





- 
























REVISED LATIN GRAMMAR. 



J± 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



/ 



B. L. GILDEKSLEEVE, Ph.D. (Gottingen), LL.D., 

Professor of Greek in the University of Virginia. 




UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY, 

NEW YORK and BALTIMORE. 

1872. 

T. 






?* <*'„ 



: 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1872, by the 

UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 






PREFACE 

TO THE REVISED EDITION. 



In this new edition of my Latin Grammar, I have not made any essen- 
tial change in the Inflections, as I am thoroughly in accord with the wise 
self-restraint of the G-erman authors, Professors Lattmann and Muller, 
who have presented simply the results and not the processes of Compara- 
tive Grammar. A few sections and a few notes have been added, and 
here and there I have allowed myself to vary from the original, but in the 
main I have kept to the translation, as made by Professor Thomas R. 
Price, of Randolph Macon College, a scholar whose attainments need no 
testimonial from me, a man whose friendship I count among my most 
valued possessions. 

To the revision of the Syntax, which was originally based on Kritz, 
and largely indebted for its practical features to Lattmann and Muller, 
especial attention has been given ; and, whilst I have not deviated from 
the general arrangement, which was dictated by the design of writing a 
parallel Greek Grammar, the variations in detail are so numerous that 
this part of the book may be considered a new work. 

The orthography has been brought nearer to recent results, but I have 
not aimed at a painful consistency. 

In the treatment of the metres I have had regard to the system of 
Heinrich Schmidt. 

It would be pedantry to enumerate all the grammars that I have con- 
sulted, worse than pedantry to acknowledge my obligations to the great 



4 PREFACE. 

masters of the department, without whose aid no tolerable Latin grammar 
can be written, and unworthy of the aims of my life to advertise my own 
efforts or to call attention to the supposed excellences of my own methods. 
To all who have encouraged me by their sympathy, or aided me by 
corrections and suggestions, I am truly grateful. To none do I owe 
more, both for encouragement and for aid, than to my tried friend and 
esteemed colleague, Professor Peters, whose acute criticism and practical 
experience have been of great service to me in the prosecution of my 
Latin studies. 

B. L. GILDERSLEEVE. 
September, 1872. 



CONTENTS. 



The references are to the paragraphs. 



Inflections 1 — 191 

Alphabet 1 

Vowels 2 

Consonants 6 

Syllables 8 

Quantity 10 

Accentuation 14 

Parts of Speech . . 15 

Inflection 16 

Substantive 17 

Gender 18 

Cases 21 

Declensions 25 

First 27 

Second 29 

Third 36 

Fourth 67 

Fifth 69 

Greek Nouns 71 

Irregular Nouns 74 

Adjectives 81 

Comparison 86 

Adverbs 90 

Numerals 92 

Pronouns 97 

Verb 109 

Conjugation of Sum . , . . 112 

Systems of Conjugation 116 

First Conjugation 119 

Second Conjugation 123 

Third Conjugation 131 

Fourth Conjugation 135 

Appendix to third Conj 139 

Deponents of First Conj 141 

Deponents of Second Conj 143 

Deponents of Third Conj 145 

Deponents of Fourth Conj 147 

Periphrastic Conjugation 149 

Abbreviations 151 

Present Stem 152 

Perfect " 153 

Supine " 154 

Euphonic Laws 155 

Change of Conjugation 156 



Stems in a P-mute. 157 

Stems in a K-mute 159 

Aspirate Stems in H and Y . . . 163 

Stems in a T-mute 164 

Liquid Stems 169 

Stems in S 172 

Stems in U 173 

Deponents 175 

Change of Conjugation 176 

Inchoative Verbs. 181 

Irregular Verbs 183 

Obsolete forms of the Verb . . 191 

Syntax 192—697 

Syntax of Simple Sentence 192 

Nominative and Vocative 193 

Concord 201 

Voices 203 

Tenses 213 

Present Tense 218 

Imperfect 222 

Perfect 226 

Pluperfect 233 

Future 234 

Future Perfect 236 

Periphrastic Tenses 238 

Tenses in Letters 244 

Moods 245 

Indicative 246 

Subjunctive. . . 247 

Imperative 259 

Tenses of Moods and Verbal 

Nouns 270' 

Simple Sentence Expanded 280 

Multiplication of Subject 281 

Qualification of Subject 284 

Attribute 285 

Demonstrative Pronouns 290 

Determinative and Reflexive 

Pronouns 293 

Possessive Pronouns. . ... 299 

Indefinite Pronouns 300 

Numerals 307 

Comparatives and Superla- 
tives 311 



6 



CONTENTS. 



Apposition 318 

Predicative Attribution, and 

Apposition 324 

Multiplication of Predicate. . . . 325 

Qualification of Predicate 326 

Accusative 327 

Dative 343 

Genitive 357 

Ablative 383 

Names of Towns and Islands. . 410 

Prepositions 414 

With Accusative 417 

With Ablative 418 

With Ace. and Abl 419 

Infinitive as a Substantive 420 

Gerund and Gerundive 426 

Supine 435 

Adverb 440 

Negatives 442 

Incomplete Sentence 451 

Interrogative Sentences 452 

Syntax of Compound Sentence. . 474 

( Coordination 475 

Copulative Sentences 476 

Adversative Sentences 485 

Disjunctive Sentences 494 

Causal and Illative Sentences. 500 

Subordination 505 

Sequence of Tenses 510 

Reflexive 520 

Object Sentences 523 

With Quod 524 

With Ace. and Inf. 526 



Object Sentences with Parti- 
ciple 536 

Causal Sentences 538 

Sentences of Design and Ten- 
dency 543 

Final Sentences 544 

Consecutive Sentences 553 

Temporal Sentences 561 

Antecedent Action 563 

Contemporaneous Action. 570 

Prior Action 576 

Cum (Quum) 580 

Conditional Sentences 590 

Logical 597 

Ideal 598 

Unreal 599 

Incomplete 600 

Of Comparison 604 

Concessive Sentences 605 

Relative Sentences 612 

Comparative Sentences 641 

Correlative 645 

With atque 646 

With quam 647 

Abridged Sentence 648 

Infinitive 649 

Oratio Obllqua 651 

Participle 669 

Arrangement of Words. ....... 671 

Arrangement of Glauses 682 

Figures of Syntax . . 685 

Pkosody 698 

Versification 723 



INFLECTIONS 



LATIN LANGUAGE, 



ON THE BASIS OF LATTMANN AND MULLER. 



ALPHABET. 

1. The Latin alphabet is the same as the English, except that 
i it has no W. 

Remark. — K is used chiefly m abbreviations — K. (Caeso), Kal. (Oa- 
lendae). Y and Z occur in Greek words only. Originally, there was no 
difference in character between I and J, between V and U. In the olden 
time U did not come after V : servos (servus) equos or ecus (equus), 
quom (cum). 

VOWELS. 

2. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u ; and are divided : 

i 1. According to their quality, into 

open, a., e, o. 
close, i, u. 
2. According to their quantity, into 

long, — 

sliort, — * 

common, i. e., sometimes short, and sometimes long, 3 

The following distinction is made : 

common : by preference short, ~ 
common : by preference long, — 

In this grammar, every long vowel sound is marked. But see 700 R. 2. 







Sounds of the Vowels. 




a 


in 


father. 5 = o 


in 


e 


in 


prey, u = oo 


in 


i 


in 


caprice. y = u 


in 



O VOWELS — CONSONANTS. 

3. 

a = a in father. 5 = o in bone 

e = e in prey. u = oo in moon 

I = i in caprice. y = u in stir (French). 

Remark.— The short sounds are only less prolonged in pronunciation than tke long 
sounds, and have no exact English equivalents. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

4. There are but few diphthongs or double sounds in Latin. The theory 
of the diphthong requires that both elements be heard in a slur. The tend- 
ency iu Latin was to reduce diphthongs to simple sounds ; hence frequent 
variations in spelling : so glaeba and gleba, sod; oboedire and obedire, 
obey ; faenum (foenum) and fenum, hay. 

ae and 



oe — ae 


in 


Graeme. 


au = ou 


in 


our. 


ei = ei 


in 


feint (drawled). 


eu == eu 


in 


Spanish dewda. 


ui = oui 


in 


French oui. 



Diaeresis. 

5. The sign •• (Dimresis — Greek = separation) over the second vowel 
shows that each sound is to be pronounced separately : a§r, air ; Oeno- 
maiis, aloe. 

CONSONANTS. 

6. Consonants are divided: 

1. According to the principal organs by which they are pronounced, 
into 

Labials (lip-sounds): b, p, (ph), f, v, m. 

Denials (tooth-sounds) : d, t, (th), 1, n, r, s. 

Gutturals (throat-sounds) : g, c, k, qu, (ch), h. 

2. According to their prolongation, into 

A. Semi-vowels : of which 

1, m, n, r, are liquids, (m and n being nasats). 
h, j, and v, are breathings, and 
s is a sibilant. 

B. Mutes : to which belong 

P-mutes, p, b, (ph), i> labials. 

T- mutes, t, d, (th), dentals. 

K-mutes, k, c, qu, g, (ch), gutturals. 



in* 
C 
( 

roi 
( 
I 



if\o 



DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 9 

Those on the same line are said to be of the same organ. 
Mutes are further divided into 

Tenuis (thin) : p, t, k, c, qu, hard (surd). 

Mediae (middle) : b, d, g, soft (sonant). 

[Aspiratae (aspirate) : ph, th, ch,] aspirate. 

The aspirates occur chiefly in Greek words. 

Those on the same line are said to be of the same order. 
ryy 3. Double consonants are : z = dz in adze ; x = cs (ks) ; j between two 
.pwels is a double sound, half vowel, half consonant, and always length- 
it jis the preceding vowel ; jejiinus, hungry. 

Sounds op the Consonants. 

7. The consonants are sounded as in English, with the following 
inceptions : 

C is hard throughout = k (commonly assibilated before e (ae, oe) and i. 

Ch is not a genuine Latin sound. In Latin words it is a k ; in Greek 
wds a kh ; commonly pronounced as ch in German. 

G is hard throughout, as in get, give. 

J has the sound of a broad y ; much fuller than y in yo\x\\ 

N has a guttural nasal sound before c, g, q, as in anchor, anguish. 

Qu = kw (nearly) ; before u, qu = c ; quum = cum 5 equus = ecus. 
2uum is a late spelling, retained for convenience' sake. 

R must be trilled. 

S and X are always hard, as in hiss, &xe. 

T is hard throughout. 

V was nearer our w than our v ; still nearer the French ou in oui. 



SYLLABLES. 

8. The syllable is the unit of pronunciation, and consists of a 
'owel, or a vowel and one or more consonants. 

A consonant, between two vowels, belongs to the second: 
i-mo, / love. 

Two or more consonants belong to the following vowel: 
t-sper, rough j fau-stus, lucky ; ii-brl, books. 

Exceptions. — 1. Liquids, 1, m, n, r, join the preceding vowel : al-mus, 
fostering ; am-bo, both ; an-guis, snake ; ar-bor, tree ; mn follows the 
general rule : a-mnis, river. 

2. When the consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the first, the 

i* 



1 QUANTITY ACCENTUATION. 

second to the second syllable: cas-sis, helmet; al-lium, garlic ; map-pa 
napkin ; an-nus, year ; mit-to, I send. 

3. Compounds are treated as if their parts were separate words : ab-igo, 
Idri/r off; res-publica, commonwealth. 

9. The last syllable of a word is called the ultima ; the next 
to the last, the penult ; the one before the penult, the ante- 

penult. 

10. Quantity. — A syllable is said to be long by nature, 
when it contains a long vowel or diphthong; by position, when 
a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a dou- 
ble consonant: ars, art; collum, neck; abrampo, I break off; 
p<?r mare, through the sea ; nex, murder. 

Remark. — Nf, ns, and j make a preceding vowel sound long, not merely 
the syllable. 

Exception. — J in the compounds of jugum, yoke; bi-jugus, two-horse. 

11. A syllable ending in a short vowel, followed by a mute 
with 1 or r, is common (anceps) : tenebrae, darkness. 

12. Every diphthong, and every vowel derived from a diph- 
thong, or contracted from other vowels, is long: saevus, cruel ; 
concludo, / shut up (from claudo, / shut) ; cogo (from co-igo), 
/ drive together. 

13. One simple vowel before another vowel-sound makes a 
short syllable: dens, God; puer, boy. 

Remarks. — 1. h does not count: nihil, nothing. 

2. Exceptions will be noted as they occur. 

3. On the quantity of final syllables see Prosody. 

14. Accexttjation". — 1. Dissyllabic words have the accent 
or stress on the penult: equus, horse. 

2. Polysyllabic words have the accent on the penult, when 
the penult is long; on the antepenult, when the penult is short 
or common : mandare, to commit ; mandere, to chew ; integrum, 
entire. 

Remarks. — 1. The little appendages (enclitics), que, ve, ne, add an 

accent to the ultimate of words accented on the antepenult : luminaque, 
and lights ; fluminave, or rivers ; vomerene, from a "ploughshare ? 
2. Other exceptions will be noted as they occur. 



STTBSTAOTIVE. ] J 



PAETS OP SPEECH. 

15. The parts of speech are: 
I. The Noun, embracing : 

1. The Substantive, which gives a name: vir, a wan; Codes, 
Socles ; donum, a gift 

2. The Adjective, which adds a quality to the substantive. 
( II. The Pronoun, which points out. 

III. The Verb, which says. 

IV. The Particles, which are mainly mutilated forms of the 
loun, and embrace : 

1. The Adverb, which shows circumstances. 

\ 2. The Preposition, which shows local relation. 

3. The Conjunction, which shows connection. 

Remarks. — 1. Pronoun and noun have essentially the same inflec- 
:ion ; 'but they are commonly separated, partly on account of the differ- 
ence in signification, partly on account of the greater antiquity of the 
pronominal forms. The pronominal element is the formative element of 
language. 

2. The Interjection is either a mere cry of feeling: ah! all! and does 
■lot belong to language, or fails under one of the above-mentioned classes. 



INFLECTION. 

16. Inflection is that bending or change, chiefly in the end of 
a, word, which shows a change in the relations of that word. 
The noun, pronoun, and verb are inflected ; the particles are not 
papable of further inflection. 

The inflection of nouns and pronouns is called declension, 
and nouns and pronouns are said to be declined. 

The inflection of verbs is called conjugation, and verbs are 
-said to be conjugated. 

SUBSTANTIVE. 

17. The substantive gives the name of a person or thing 
((concrete), or of a quality (abstract). 

Concrete substantives are either proper or common, 



12 GENDER. 

The proper noun is proper, or peculiar, to certain persons or 
things: Horatius, Horace ; Neapolis, Naples; Padus, Po. 

Common nouns are common to a whole class: dominus, a lord; 
urbs, a city ; amnis, a river. 

GENDER. 

18. For the names of animate beings, the gender is deter- 
mined by the signification; for things and qualities, by the 
termination. 

Males are masculine ; Females, feminine. Masculine : Romu- 
lus ; Jupiter ; vir, man ; equus, 7wrse. Feminine : Cornelia ; Juno ; 
femina, woman ; equa, mare. 

19. Some classes of words, without natural gender, haye their 
gender determined by the signification: 

1. Names of months (menses, masc), ivinds (venti, masc), 
rivers (fluvil, masc), and mountains (montes, masc), are mascu- 
line: Aprllis, the opening month, April ; Aquilo, the north wind ; 
Albis, the River Elbe ; Ath5s, Mount Athos. 

Exceptions. — 1. Feminine are the rivers Allia; Albula; Matrbna, 
the Marne ; Styx ; Lethe. 

2. Of the mountains, the Alps, Alpes, are feminine, and sundry (Greek) 
names in a (Gen. ae), e (Gen. es) : Aetna, Cyllene; Soracte, and Pelion 
are neuter, and so are names of mountains in a (Gen. orum) : Maenala, 
Maenalorum. 

II. Names of countries (terrae, fern.), islands (insulae, fern.), 
cities (urbes, fern.), plants (plantae, fern.), and trees (arbores, 
fern.), are feminine : Aegyptus, Egypt ; Rhodus, Rhodes ; pints, 
a pear-tree ; abies, a fir-tree. 

Exceptions. — The exceptions, which are numerous, are chiefly Greek, 
and follow the termination, instead of the signification. 

III. All indeclinable nouns, and all words and phrases treated 
as indeclinable nouns, are neuter : fas, right ; a longum, a long ; 
scire tuum, thy Tcnoiving ; triste vale, a sad "fareioell." 

20. 1. Nouns which have but one form for masculine and 
feminine are said to be of common gender : clvis, citizen (male 
or female) ; comes, companion ; judex, judge. 



CASES. 13 

2. Substantlva mobilia are words of the same origin, whose 
different terminations designate difference of gender: magister, 
master, teacher ; magistra, mistress ; servus, serva, slave (m. and 
f.) ; victor, victrlx, conqueror (m. and f.) 

3. If the male and female of animals have but one designa- 
tion, mas, male, and femina, female, are added, when it is neces- 
sary to be exact : pavo mas (maseulus), peacock-, pavo femina, pea- 
lien. These nouns are called epicene. 

Oases. 

21. The Latin noun has six cases : 

1. Nominative (Case of the Subject). 

Answers : who t what? 

2. Genitive (Case of the Complement). 

Answers : whose ? whereof? 

3. Dative (Case of Indirect Object or Personal Interest). 

Answers : For or To whom f 

4. Accusative (Case of Direct Object). 

Answers : whom ? what? 
\ 5. Vocative (Case of Direct Address). 
6. Ablative (Case of Adverbial Relation). 
Answers : wliere f whence f wherewith ? 

22. According to their syntactical use, the cases are divided 
into Casus Recti, or Independent Cases, and Casus Obllqui, or De- 

, pendent Cases. Nominative and Vocative are Casus Recti, the 
, rest Casus Obllqui. 

23. According to their form, the cases are divided into 
1 strong and weak : The strong cases are Nominative, Accusative, 

and Vocative. The weak cases are Genitive, Dative, and Ablative. 

Remarks.— These six cases are the remains of a larger number. The Locative, which 
is akin to the Dative, and coincident with it in the 1st and 3d Declensions, is lost in the 
Genitive of the 2d Declension, and often blended with the Ablative in form, regularly in 
syntax. The Instrumental, which is found in other members of the family, is likewise 
merged in the Ablative. 

24. The case-forms arise from the combination of the ending 
, with the stem. 

The stem is that which is common to a class of formations. 



1 4 DECLENSIONS. 

y \i;ks.- 1. The stem is often so much altered by contact with the ending, the end- 
ing so much altered by the wearing away of vowels and consonants, that they can be de- 
termined only by BcientiflLc analysis. So in the paradigm mensa, the stem is not mens, 
but mensa, the final a having been absorbed by the ending in the Dative and Ablative 
Plural mensis. So -d. the characteristic of the Ablative Singular, has disappeared, and 
the locative ending has undergone many changes (6, ei, I. e). The '-crude form" 1 it is 
often impossible to ascertain. 

'2. The root is an ultimate stem, and the determination of the root belongs to compara- 
tive etymology. The stem may be of any length, the root must be a monosyllable. In 
penna the stem is penna- ; in pennula, pennula- ; in pennatulus, pennatulo- ; the 
root is pet (petna. pesna. penna), and is found in pet-ere, to fall upon, to fly at ; Greek, 
itir-ofJLOCi) Ttrepov ; English, feather. 

Declensions. 

25. There are five declensions in Latin, which are character- 
ized by the final sound of their respective stems : 

Stem 

characteristic. 

a 

6 

a consonant, 

i and u 

u 

e 

are called Vowel De- 



The stems of the First Declension end in 
The stems of the Second Declension end in 
The stems of the Third Declension end in 
or the close vowels .... 
The stems of the Fourth Declension end in 
The stems of the Fifth Declension end in 



26- 1. The First, Second, and Fifth Declensions ; 
clensions ; the Third and Fourth, which really form but one, the Conso- 
nant Declension, i and u being semi-consonants. 

2. General Kules of Declension. 

I. For the strong cases : 

Neuter nouns have Nominative and Vocative like the Accusative ; in 
the Plural the strong cases always end in a. 

In the Third, Fourth, and Fifth Declensions the strong cases are alike 
in the Plural. 

The Vocative is like the Nominative, except in the Second Declension, 
when the Nom. ends in -us. 

II. For the weak cases: 

Dative and Ablative Plural have a common form. 

Remarks. — In declining neuter nouns, follow the order of strong cases and weak 
cases. It saves time, and shows connection. 

Fikst Declension. 

27. The stem ends in a, which disappears in the ending -is 
of the Dative and Ablative plural. 



DECLENSIONS. 15 

Feminine, 

sing. — N. mensa, the, or a, table. 

Gr. mensae, of the, or a, table. 

D, mensae, to, for the, or #, table. 

Ac. mensa-m, £7w, or a, table. 

V. mensa, table I or ta5te / 

Abl. mensa, from, with, by, the, or a, table. 

plur. — N. mensae, the tables, or tables. 

G. mensarum, of the tables, or tables. 

D. mensis, to, for the tables, or tables. 

Ac. mensas, the tables, or tables. 

Y. mensae, tables ! 

Abl. mensis, from, with, by, the tables, or tables. 

Remarks. — 1. The Gen. -ai is found in poetry. The Gen. in -as occurs 
in the word familia, family, when combined with pater, father, mater, 
mother, fUius, son, filia, daughter, viz. : paterfamilias, materfamilias, 
fUius familias, filia familias. 

The Gen. PI. sometimes takes the form -um instead of -arum, chiefly in 
the Greek words amphora (amphora, measure of tonnage), and drachma, 
franc — {Greek coin). The poets make frequent use of this form in patro- 
nymics and compounds of -cola (from colo, / inhabit) and -gena(from gen, 
beget). 

2. The Locative Dative case singular is like the Genitive Romae, 
at Borne. 

3. Dea, goddess, filia, daughter, ambae, both, and duae, two, have the form 
-abus in the Dative and Ablative Plural, viz. : deabus, filiabus, ambabus, 
duabus. 

28. Rule of Gender. — The gender is feminine, except when 
males are meant. 

Hadria, the Adriatic, is masculine. 

Second Declension. 

29. The stem ends in -6 ? which appears in the older forms of 
the Norn, and Ace. singular, servo-s, servo-m. In the ordinary 
forms it is changed into u, e, lengthened into 6, or disappears 
wholly. 

Masculine. 

sing.— N". hortus, garden. m.UR. — horti, gardens. 

G. horti, hortoruai. 

D. horto, hortis. 

Ac. hortum, hoitos. 

V. horte, hoiti. 

Abl. horto, hortls. 



16 SECOND DECLENSION. 



Neuter. 

sing. — N. Ac. V. bellum, war, plur. — bella, wars. 

G. belli, bellorum. 

D. Abl. bello, bellis. 

Remarks. — 1. In the Genitive Singular, ii is often contracted into i, 
the accent remaining unchanged : ingenii, of genius, into ing^ni. 

2. In the Vocative Singular, ie (je) is commonly contracted into I in 
proper names in -ius, -eius (ejus), -aius (ajus), the accent remaining un- 
changed ; as, Antoni, Tulli, Gai, Vergili. Filius, son, genius, genius, and 
meus, my, form their Vocatives in like manner : fill, geni, mi. 

3. In the Genitive Plural, -um for -orum is found in words denoting 
coins and measures ; as, nummum (of moneys) — sestertium, of sesterces ; 
modium, of measures. Faber, workman, has both fabrum and fabrdrum ; 
Hberi, children, both liberum and liberorum ; and vir, man, in compounds 
has triumvirum, of the triumvirs, and the like. 

4. The Locative Singular, which has a restricted use, ends in I (Appa- 
rent Genitive), as Rhodi, at Rhodes, Tarenti, at Tarentum. 

5. Deus, God, is irregular. Singular Vocative, deus. Plural Nomina- 
tive (del), dii, dij Genitive, deorum, deum; Accusative, deos; Dative 
and Ablative (dels), diis, dis. 

30. Rule of Gender. — Nouns in -us are masculine; in -um, 
neuter. 

Exceptions. — Feminine are: 1st. Cities and islands, as, Corinthus, 
Samus. 2d. Most trees, as, fagus, beech ; pirus, pear-tree. 3d. Many Greek 
nouns, as, atomus, atom ; paragraphus, paragraph ; methodus, method ; 
periodus, period; dialectus, dialect. 4th. Alvus, belly ; colus, distaff ; 
humus, ground ; vannus, wheat-fan. 

Neuters are : virus, venom ; pelagus, sea ; vulgus, the rabble (sometimes 
masculine). 

31. Most masculines in r drop -us in the Nominative and e 
in the Vocative Singular : 



N. 


puer, boy. 


pueri. 


ager, field. 


agri. 


G. 


pueri, 


puerorum. 


agri, 


agrorum 


D. 


puero, 


pueris. 


agr5, 


agris. 


Ac. 


puerum, 


pueros. 


agrum, 


agros. 


V. 


puer, 


pueri. 


ager, 


agri. 


Abl. 


puero, 


pueris. 


agr5, 


agris. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



17 



32- The e belongs to the stem, and is retained through all the cases in 
adulter, adulterer ; alter, the oilier ; asper, rough ; dexter, on tlie right 
(which has either dextrl or dexteri) j exter, outside ; gener, son-in-law ; 
gibber, hump-backed ; lacer, torn; liber, free; Liber, god of wine ; miser, 
wretched; prosper, lucky ; puer, boy ; socer, father-in-law; tener, soft; 
vesper, evening ; and in words ending in -fer and -ger, from fero, I bear , 
and gero, I carry, as, signi fer, standard-bearer, armi ger, armor-bearer. 

Iber and Celtiber (names of nations) have in the Plural Iberi and 
CeltiberL 

In other words, the e is inserted only in the Nominative and Vocative 
Singular. 

33. Declension of Adjectives in -us, -a, -tun. 

Bonus, bona, bonum, good. 



M. F. N. 

-N. bonus, bona, bonum. 

G. boni, bonae, boni. 

D. bono, bonae, bono. 

Ac. bonum, bonam, bonum. 

V. bone, bona, bonum. 

Abl. bono, bona, bono. 



M. F. N. 

plur.— boni, bonae, bona. 

bonorum, bonarum, bonorum. 

bonis, bonis, bonis, 

bonos, bonas, bona, 

boni, bonae, bona, 

bonis, bonis, bonis. 



34. 



Miser, misera, miserum, wretched. 



SINGULAR. 

N. miser, misera, miserum. 

G. miseri, miserae, miseri. 

D. misero, miserae, misero. 

Ac. miserum, miseram, miserum. 

V. miser, misera, miserum. 

Abl. misero, misera, misero. 



PLURAL. 

miseri, miserae, misera. 
miserorum, miserarum, miserorum. 

miseris, miseris, miseris. 

miseros, miseras, misera. 

miseri, miserae, misera, 

miseris, miseris, miseris. 



sing.— N. piger, pigra, pigrum 
G. pigri, pigrae, pigri. 
D. pigro, pigrae, pigrQ. 
Ac. pigrum, pigram, pigrum. 
V. piger, pigra, pigrum. 
Abl. pigro, pigra, pigro. 



Piger, pigra, pigrum, slow, 

PLUR. 



-pigri, pigrae, pigra. 
pigrorum, pigrarum. pigrorum. 
pigris, pigris, pigris. 
pigros, pigras, pigra. 
pigri, pigrae, pigra. 
pigris, pigris. pigris. 



35. The following have Genitive Singular in -Ins, and Dative 
Singular in I : 



unus, ullus, 


nullus. 


one, 


any, 


none. 


s51us, totus, 


alius. 


sole, 


whole, 


other. 


uter, alter, 


neuter, 


which of the two, 


one of the two, 


neither. 



Remark. — In poetry, the I of the Genitive ending -ius is often shortened, 
excf- It in alius (rare), solius, utrius, neutrius. 






18 



TIIIKD DECLENSION. 



HNG. — 1ST. nullus, nulla, nullum, none. 
G. nullius, nullius, nullius. 
D. nulli, nulll, nulli. 
Ac. nullum, nullam, nullum. 
Abl. nullo, nulla, nullo. 

The Plural is regular. 



alius, alia, aliud, ot7ier- 
alius, alius, alius, 
alii, alii, alii, 
alium, aliam, aliud. 
alio, alia, alio. 



Thied Declension". 

36. The stem ends in a consonant, or the close vowels i andu. 

37. The stems are divided according to their last letter, called 
the stem-characteristic, following the subdivisions of the letters 
of the alphabet : 



I.— Consonant Stems. 

A. Liquid stems, ending in 1, m, n, r. 

B. Sibilant stems, ending in s. 

il. Ending in a P-mute, b, p. 
2. Ending in a K-mute, c, g. 
3. Ending in a T-mute, d, t. 



II.— Vowel Stems. 

1. Ending in i. 

2. Ending in u. 
(Compare the Fourth 

Declension.) 



38. The sign of the Nominative Singular, masculine and 
feminine, is s, which, however, is dropped after 1, n, r, s. 
The Nominative Singular undergoes various changes. 
The Vocative is like the Nominative. In the other cases, the 
endings are added to the unchanged stem. 

the Nominative without the case 

ending s. 
the Accusative and Vocative case 
in both numbers like the 
Nominative, 
the Nominative Plural in a. 



39. Neuters always form i 



Remark.— Originally coincident with the Dative, the Locative of the Third Declension 
was finally blended with Ablative, both in form and in syntax. In the names of nouns 
the old form is frequently retained : Karthagini, at Carthage, Sulmoni, at Sulmo. Ac- 
cording to some, riiri, in the country, is an Ablative. 

I.— Consonant Stems. 
A.— LIQUID STEMS. 
1. Liquid stems in 1. 
40. Nominative without s, as, consul, the consul. ^ p 



j 

i 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



19 



EN T G.- 



consul, 



consul. 



PLUR- 



-K 


consul-es, the consuls. 


G. 


consul-um. 


D. 


consul-ibus. 


Ac. 


consul-es. 


Y. 


consul-es. 


Abl. 


consul-ibus. 



■K 

G. consul-is, 

D. consul-I, 

Ac. consul-em, 

Y. consul, 

Abl. consul-e, 

Rule of Gender. — Stems in 1 are masculine : sol, the sun, solis; 
al, salt, salis. 
Exceptions. — Neuters are : mel, honey, mellis ; fel, gall, fellis. 

2. Liquid stems in m. 

41. Nominative with s. One example only: hiem(p)s, winter ; 
3-enitive, Mem-is (fern.). 

3. Liquid stems in n. 

42. The Nominative Singular of masculine and feminine stems 
L 's formed without s, drops the n of the stem, and ends in 5. 

The Genitive Singular has, in some nouns, -onis; in others, 
inis. 

The Nominative Singular of the neuter stems retains the n, 
md terminates in -en 5 

The Genitive Singular of neuters ends in -mis. 



43. 

SING — 



PLUR- 



MASCULINE. 


-K 


leS, lio 


G. 


le5n-is, 


D. 


leon-i, 


Ac. 


le5n-em, 


Y. 


leo, 


Abl. 


leon-e, 


-N. 


le5n-es, 


G. 


leon-um, 


D. 


le5n-ibus, 


Ac. 


leon-es, 


Y. 


leon-es, 


Abl. 


leon-ibus. 



FEMININE. 

imago, likeness. 

imagin-is, 

imagin-i, 

imagin-em, 

imago, 

imagine, 

imagin-es, 

imagin-um, 

imagin-ibus, 

imagin-es, 

imagin-es, 

imagin-ibus. 



NEUTER. 

nomen, name. 

nomin-is, 

nomin-i, 

nomen, 

nomen, 

nomin-e, 

n5min-a, 

n5min-um, 

n5min-ibus, 

nomin-a, 

nomin-a, 

nomin-ibus. 



"Remakes. — 1. Nouns in -do and -go have in the Genitive -inis, whilst 
the rest in -o have -onis ; as, grando, hail, grandinis ; virgo, maid, 
virginis. 

Exceptions.— Praedo, robber ; harpago, grappling -hook ; ligo, mattock, have onis 
hlmo, man ; turbo, whirlwind, have Inis. 






20 



Till III) DECLENSION. 



2. To the stems in n belong sanguis, blood, sanguin-is ; pollis, flour, pollin 
-is (both masc). In these, n of the stem is dropped before s of the Nom. 

3. Masculines in -en, Genitive inis, are: pecten, comb, and the personal | 
designations: tibicen, flitter ; tubicen, trumpeter; cornicen, horn-blower ;\ 
and flamen, priest. 

Masculines in -en,-enis, are only : splen and lien, spleen, and the Plural] 
renes, kidneys. 

44. Rules of Gender.— 1. Masculine are nouns in -o, save 
those in -do, -go, and -io, with caro, flesh : but ordo, cardo, are 
masculine, with ligo, margo; add harpago; and in -io, all con 
crete nouns like pugio. 

ordo, rank ; cardo, hinge ; ligo, mattock ; margo, border ; harpago, grappling 
hook; pugio, dagger ; vespertllio, bat ; titio, firebrand. 

2. Nouns in -en (men) are neuter. See exceptions 43, 3. 
4. Liquid stems in r. 

45. Nominative without s. 

Remark. — In several words in -6r and -ur, the r has arisen from s 
Hence, labos, as well as labbr, toil; robus and r5bnr, oak ; vomis an 
vomer, ploughshare. 



o. 



MASCULINE. 






NEUTER. 


passer, sparrow. 


pater, 


father. 


cadaver, dead body. 


passer-is. 


patr-is. 




cadaver-is. 


labor, toil. 


orator, 


speaker. 


robur, oak. 


labor-is. 


5rator-is. 




robor-is. 


fur, thief. 


vultur, 


vulture. 


fulgur, lightning. 


fur-is. 


vultur-is 




fulgur-is. 



46- Words in -ter, syncopate, i. e. t leave out the e, except later, brie 
later-is. 



N. 
G. 

D. 

Ac. 
V. 



SINGULAR. 

labor, toil. 

labor-is, 

lab5r-i, 

labor-em, 

labor, 



Abl. labor-e, 



PLURAL 

labor-e s. 

labor-um. 

labor-ibus. 

labor-es. 

labor-es. 

labor-ibus. 



SINGULAR. 

pater, father. 

patr-is, 

patr-i, 

patr-em, 

pater, 

patr-e, 



PLURAL. 

patr-es. 

patr-um. 

patr-ibus, 

patr-es. 

patr-es. 

patr-ibus 



47. Rules of Gender. - 
those in -ur, neuter. 



-Words in -er and -or are masculine 



THIRD DECLENSION. 21 

i Exceptions. — The only feminine is arbor. 

Neuters are : far, nectar, marmor, 
Aequor, iter, acer, piper, 
Verber, uber, ver, cadaver, 
Ador, tuber, and papaver. 

cer, maple; ador, spelt; aequor, sea; arbor, tree; cadaver, dead body ; far, spelt; 
larmor, marble; nectar, nectar; piper, pepper ; papaver, poppy; tuber, tumor; 
ber, teat ; ver, spring. 

Furfur, bran, is masculine. 

B.— SIBILANT STEMS. 

48. The Nominative has no additional s, 

In the other cases, the s of the stem passes over, between two 
owels, into r. 

Instead of the final stem-vowel e, the Nominative of Mascu- 
ines has i. 

Instead of the final stem-vowels e and o, the Nominative of 
leuters has u. 

uf Remake:. — S is retained throughout in the neuter : vas, dish, vasis. 
5S occurs in as, a copper, genitive assis (masc), and os, bone, ossis (neut). 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

49. N. genus, kind, gener-a. corpus, body. corpor-a. 
G. gener-is, gener-um. corpor-is, corpor-um. 
D. gener-i, gener-ibus. corpor-i, corpor-ibus. 
Ac. genus, gener-a. corpus, corpora. 
Y. genus, gener-a. corpus, corpor-a. 
Abl. gener-e, gener-ibus. corpor-e, corpor-ibus. 

50. Rule of Gender. — Masculine are nouns in -is (-eris), and 
-os, -oris: except os, mouth; genitive oris, neuter. 

Neuter are nouns in -us, genitive -eris, -oris, and in -us, -uris; 
except telltis, earth, telltiris, which is feminine ; and the mascu- 
lines, lepus, hare, leporis ; mus, mouse, muris. 

C— MUTE STEMS. 

51. All masculines and feminines of mute stems have s in the 
Nominative. 

Most polysyllabic mute stems change their final vowel i into 
e in the Nominative. 



22 THIRD DECLENSION. 

A K-nm te, combining with s, becomes x, as, pac-s = pax, peace J 
reg-s = rex. Icing. 

A T-mute before s is dropped, as, aetat-s = aetas, age ; ped-s ~ 
pes, foot. 

52. /Stems m a Y-mute. 

A E I O 

trab-s. fieaw. pleb-s, commons, stip-s, dole, princep-s, chief, (op-s), power. 
trab-is (fern.) pleb-is (fern.) stip-is (fem.) princip-is, op-is (fern.) 

With consonant preceding the stem-characteristic : 

Urb-s, city, urb-is (fem.) ; stirp-s, stock, stirp-is (fem.). 

53. Stems in a K-mute. 

pax, peace, rex, king, radix, root. vox, voice, lux, 

pac-is (fem.) reg-is (mas.) radic-is (fem.) voc-is (fem.) luc-is (fem.) 

fax, torch, grex, herd, salix, willow, judex, judge. dux, leader. 

fac-is (fem.) greg-is (mas.) salic-is (fem.) judic-is. due-is. 

54. With consonant preceding the stem-characteristic : si 

Arx, citadel, arc-is (fem.) ; falx, sickle, falc-is (fem.). 

Seng. — N". princep-s, chief. Plur. — princip-es, 

G. princip-is, princip-um, 

D. princip-I, princip-ibus, 

Ac. princip-em, princip-es, 

V. princep-s, princip-es, 

Abl. princip-e, princip-ibus. 

Sing. — N. rex, king. Plur. — reg-es, 

G. reg-is, reg-um, 

D. reg-I, reg-ibus, 

Ac. reg-em, reg-es, 

V. rex, reg-es, 

Abl. reg-e, reg-ibus. 

Remark. — All monosyllabic mute stems, with the characteristic pre- 
ceded by a consonant, have the Genitive Plural in -ium, as, urbium, of 
cities; arcium, of citadels ; montium, of mountains ; partium, of pa/rts ; 
noctium, of the nights. The polysyllabic stems also in -nt and -rt have; 
more frequently -ium, as, clientium, of clients; cohortium, of companies^ 
Stems in -at have sometimes both -um and -ium, as, civitatum and civita 
tium. See 50, R. 3. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 

Stems in a T-mute. 
55. A. Characteristic preceded by a vowel. 



23 



i. aetas, 
aetat-is, 
quies, 
quiet-is, 
lis, 
Ht-is, 



D. 

vas, 



age. anas, duck. vas, bail. 

(fern.) anat-is, (fern.) vadis, (masc.) 

rest. paries, wall. heres, heir. pes, foot. 

(fern.) pariet-is, (masc.) hered-is, (masc.) ped-is, (masc.) 

suit. lapis, stone. 



(fern.) G.P. ium. 
miles, 



lapid-is, (masc.) 



milit-is. 



-). sacerdos, priest. 

sacerdot-is. 
u. virttis, manlin* 

virtut-is, (fern.) 



custos, keeper. 
custod-is. 
palus, bog. 
palud-is, (fern.) 
pecus, sheep. 
peciid-is, (fem.) 



laus, praise. 
laudis, (fern.) 



56. 



B. Characteristic preceded by a consonant. 



. frons, brow. 




nd. frons, leafy branch. 


front-is, (fern.) 




frond-is, (fem.) 


pars, part. It. 


puis, porridge. 


rd. cor, heart. 


part-is, (fem.) 


pult-is, (fem.) 


cord-is, (neut.) 


nox, night. 


lac, 


milk. 


noct-is, (fem.) 


lact 


■is, (neut.) 


ng.— N. aetas, age 


Plur. — aetat-es, 


Sing.— pes, foot. Plur.— ped-es, 


G. aetat-is, 


aetat-um, 


ped-is, pedum, 


D. aetat-i, 


aetat-ibus, 


ped-i, ped-ibus. 


Ac. aetat-em, 


aetat-es, 


ped-em, ped-es, 


V. aetas, 


aetat-es, 


pes, ped-es, 


Abl. aetat-e, 


aetat-ibus. 


ped-e, ped-ibus. 



57. Rule of Gender, — All mute stems, with Nominative in s, 
pe feminine. 

Exceptions in a K-mute. 

Masculines are -unx and -ex, 

Saving forfex, forpex, nex, 

Lex, vibex, faex, and forms of prex. 

faex, dregs. 

forfex, shears. 

forpex, tongs. 

deunx, \\ as. 

] Calix, cup, and fornix, arch, are masculine. Calx, heel, and calx, chalk, 
ary. 



lex, 


law. 




nex, 


slaughter. 


prece, 


with 


prayer. 


vibex, 


weal 


(better vlblx.) 



24 THIRD DECLENSION. 

Hbeeptitms in a T-nv/te. — Nouns in -es, -itis, are masculine, as, cespeg^ 
turf cespitis; as are also pes, foot, and its compounds; paries, wall; and, 
of the nouns in -is, lapis, stone. Merges, -itis, sheaf, is feminine. 

Masculines in -ns are : mons, mountain; pons, bridge; fons, spring, 
dens, tooth; torrens, torrent ; rudens, rope. 

Neuters are only : cor, heart, and lac, milk, which drop the character- 
istic ; and caput, head, capitis. 

n.— Vowel Stems. 
1.— VOWEL STEMS IN I. 

58. Masculines and feminines form their Nominative in s. 

Some feminines change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel i 
into e. 

Neuters change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel i into e. 
This e is generally dropped by polysyllabic neuters after 1 and r. 

All stems in i have Genitive Plural in -ium. 

All neuter stems in i have the Ablative Singular in I, and 
Nominative Plural in -ia. 

Remarks. — The stems of Nominatives in -is and -es are easily distin- 
guished. 

Consonant stems in -is and -es increase in the Genitive ; but vowel stem? 
in l do not increase in the Genitive, as : 

Consonant: lapis, stone; Genitive, lapid-is. miles, soldier ; Genitive, mllit-is. 
Vowel : civis, citizen. civis. nubes, cloud. nubis. 

59. 

M. P. P. N. 

Sing.— N. colli-s, hill, turri-s, tower. vulp§s,/0£. mare, sea. animal, living being 
G. collis, turris, vulpis, maris, animalis, 

D. colli, turn, vulpi, marl, animali, 

Ac. collem, turrem (turri-m), vulpem, mare, animal, 
V. collis. turris, vulpes, mare, animal, 

Abl. colle, turre (turn), vulpe, marl, animali, 

Plur.— N. colles, turrgs, vulpes, mari-a, animali-a, 

G. colli-um, turri-um, vulpi-um, mari-um, animali-um, 

D. colli-bus, turri-bus, vulpi-bus, mari-bus, animali-bus, 

Ac. colles. turres, vulpes, mari-a, animali-a, 

V. colles. turres, vulpes, mari-a, animali-a, 

Abl. colli-bus. turri-bus. vulpi-bus. mari-bus. animali-bus. 

Remarks. — 1. In Genitive Plural, -um instead of -ium. 
Always in : juvenis, young ; senex, old; canis, dog; vates, bard \ 
strues, heap ; panis, bread. 

Usually in: apis, bee ; sedes, seat ; volucris, bird. 



THIBD DECLENSION. ~ 

2. The Genitive Plural in -ium occurs in the apparently consonant 
j stems : imber, rain-storm ; uter, bottle ; v -enter, belly ; linter, skiff; which 

form the Nominative without s, dropping the i, and inserting e. Genitive, 
imbris, utris, ventris, lintris. All are masculine, except linter, which 
is feminine. 

3. Under the vowel stems in -i are sometimes classed those mute stems 
which take -ium in the Gen. Plural ; urbi-um, monti-um. See 54, R 

60. Observations. — Several stems in i, with Nominative in 
-is, have Accusative and Ablative Singular and Accusative 
Plural in -im, I, Is, respectively : 

1. The Accusative Plural in -Is occurs, side by side with -es: 
In all vowel stems in i, which have Nominative Singular in -is; 
In mute stems, which have Genitive Plural in -ium. 
; 2. The Accusative Singular in -im is used: 

a. Always in names of towns and rivers in is, as, Neapolis, Accusative, 
Neapolim; Tiberis, Accusative, Tiberim; and in vis, force; sitis, thirst ; 
tussis, cough. 

b. Usually in securis, axe ; febris, fever ; puppis 3 poop ; turris, tower. 

3. The Ablative Singular in I is used: 

a. In all nouns which Lave Accusative Singular invariably in -im, and 
in ignis, fire, in the phrases, ferro ignique, aqua et igni interdlcere. Nouns 
which have Accusative in -im or -em have Ablative in I or e. 

b. In the neuter vowel stems, which have Nominative in e, al, ar. Names 
of cities in -e have Ablative also in -e, as, Fraeneste, Genitive, Praenestis. 

c. In the adjective vowel stems of the Third Declension, as, facilis, easy ; 
J Ablative, facili ; acer, sharp ; Ablative, acri. 

Kexakk. — So also the adjectives of this class, when used as substantives by ellipsis: 
annalis (sc. liber, book), chronicle ; natalis (sc. dies, day), birthday ; Aprllis (sc. men- 
sis, month), and all the other months of the Third Declension : Ablative, annall, natall, 
April!, Septembri, etc. 

Exceptions.— Juvenis. young man: and aedilis, aedile ; Ablative, juvene, aedile. 
Adjectives used as proper nouns have generally Ablative in -e, as, Juvenilis ; Ablative, 
Juvenale. 

61. Rule of Gender. — 1. Of stems in i, Nominative in -is, 
some are masculine, some feminine. 

Masculine are: 

Amnis, axis, callis, crlnis, Postis, scrobis, buris, collis, 

Cassis, cauliSj fascis, finis, Sentis, torquis, atque follis, 

Funis, fustis, ignis, ensis, Torris, unguis et annalis, 

Orbis, panis, piscis, mensis, Vectis, vermis et canalis. 



. 



V 



THIED DECLENSION. 



annus. 

axis, axle. 

buris, ptong 

callis, /:■"■> 
canal:- 

cassgs. {pi. I ^<?t&. 

caulis. rtaflfc. 



collis. #£#. 

crinis. hair. 

ensis, ghiire. 

fascis. fagot. 

finis. end. 

follis. beOows. 

funis, rope. 



fastis, cudgel 

ignis, Jirw. 

mensis. month. 

or bis. circle. 

panis. bread. 

piscis. fish. 

post is, doorpost. 



sentis, bramble. 

scrobis, ditch. 

torqois, necklace. 

torris, fire-brand. 

unguis, nail. 

vectis, lever. 

vermis, worm. 



CalliSj finis, scrobis, torquis, are used also as feminines. 

Other nouns in -is, and all in -es, are feminine. Vepres, bramble, is 
usually masculine. 

••2. Vowel stems, with Nominative in -e, -al, -ar, are neuter. 

Remark.— Of the names of animals in -is. some are masculine ; tigris. tiger ; caDis, 
dog ; piscis. fish ; others feminine: apis, bee; avis, bird ; ovis, sheep ; felis, cat (usu- 
ries). 

3. VOWEL STEMS IX U. 

62. Of stems in u, only the monosyllabic belong to the Third j 
Declension. 



gruSj crane (fern.). 



Sing. — X. grus 
G. gruis 
D. grui 
Ac, gru-em 
V. grus 
Abl, gru-e 



Plue. — gru-es 
gru-um 
gru-ibus 
gru-es 
gru-es 
gru-ibus. 



Siis, MOtntf, commonly fern., usually subus, in D. and AM. Plural. 

Taele of Nominative and Genitive Endings of the Third Declension. 
A * before the ending denotes that it occur? only in the one word cited. 

63- A. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A LIQUID. 



Nox. 








No*. 


Gen. 






-al 


-alis 


animal. 


animal. 


-ar 


-arris 


far, 


spelt. 




-alis 


Hannibal 


proper name. 


-er 


-eris 


anser, 


goo*e. 


-al 


*-alis 


sal. 






-ris 


pater, 


father. 


-el 


-ellis 


mel. 


honey. 




Mneris 


iter, 


journey. 


-il 


-ilis 


pugil. 


boxer. 


-er 


*-eris 


ver. 


spring. 




-His 


Tanaquil. 


proper name. 


-or 


-oris 


color, 


color. 


-51 


*-olis 


sol. 


the sun. 




-oris 


aequor, 


expanse. 


-al 


-alis 


consul. 






*-ordis 


cor, 


heart. 


-en 


-enis 


ren. 


kidney. 


-ur 


-uris 


fulgur, 


lightning. 


-en 


-ini3 


nomen. 


no/me. 




-oris 


robur. 


oak. 


-ar 


-aris 
-aris 


calcar. 
nectar. 


spur, 
nectar. 


-ar 


-uris 


fur. 


thief. 



THIED DECLENSION. 



27 



64. B. NOMINATIVES EXDIXG WITH S, OR A COM- 
POUND OF S (GS, CS), X : 



N03I, 


Gen. 






Nom. 


Gen. 




-as 


-atis 


aetas, 


age. 


-aus 


-audis 


fraus, cheat ery. Gen, 




*-asis 


vas, 


dish . 






PI. fraudium. 


-as 


*-aris 


mas, 


male. 


-Is 


*-ltis 


puis, porridge. 




*-assis 


as. 


a copper. 


-m(p)s 


*-mis 


iiiems, winter. 




*-adis 


vas, 


surety . 


-ns 


-ndis 


irons, leafy branch. 




*-atis 


anas, 


duck. 




-ntis 


frons, forehead. 


ies 


*-aedis 


praes, 


surety. 


-rs 


-rdis 


concors, concordant. 




*-aeris 


aes, 


brass. 




-rti3 


pars, part. 


-gs 


-is 


nubes, 


cloud. 


-bs 


-bis 


urbs, city. 




*-eris 


Ceres. 


Ceres. 


-ps 


; pis 


stirps, stalk. 




-edis 


pes, 


foot. 




-ipis 


princeps. chief. 




-etis 


abies, 


fir. 




*-upis 


auceps. fowler. 




-etis 


quies, 


rest. 


-ax 


-acis 


pax, pew:e. 


-$S 


-etis 


seges, 


crop. 


-ax 


*-acis 


fax. torch. 




-idi3 


obses, 


hostage. 


-ex 


-icis 


judex, judge. 




-itis 


miles, 


soldier. 




-ecis 


nex, death. 


-is 


-is 


amnis, 


river. 




-egis 


grex, feck. 




-idis 


lapis, 


stone. 




*igis 


remex, 




-eris 


cinis, 


ashes. 


-ex 


*-eeis 


alex, pickle. 




-inis 


sanguis 


blood. 




*-Icis 


Tlbex(ix).weal (fern.) 


-Is 


*-Itis 


lis, 


suit at law. Gen. 




-egis 


rex. king. 








PI. Htium. 


-Ix 


-Icis 


cervix, neck. 




Mris 


glls, 


dormouse. Gen. 
Pi. glirium. 


-ix 


-icis 
*-igis 


calix, cup. 
strix, screech-owl. 


-OS 


*-odis 


custos, 


keeper. 




*-ivis 


nix, snow. Gen. 




-otis 


COS, 


whetstone. 






Pi. nivium. 




-oris 


nos, 


fencer. 


-ox 


-ocis 


vox, voice. 




*-ovis 


bos, 


ox. 


-ox 


*-ocis 


praecox. early-ripe. 


-«S 


-otis 


compos, 


possessed of. 




*-ogis 


Allobrox. 




*ossis 


OS. 


bone. 




*-octis 


nox. night. 


-us 


*-udis 


pecus, 


cattle, sheep. 


-ux 


-ucis 


crux. cross. 




*-utis 


intercus 


, under the skin. 




-ugis 


conjux, spouse. 




*-uris 


Ligus, 


a Ligurian. 


-iix 


-Ucis 


lux. light. 




-oris 


corpus. 


body. 




-ugis 


(frox,) fruit 




-eris 


scelus, 


crime. 


-aex 


-aecis 


faex, dregs. 


-us 


-uis 


siis, 


stcine. 


-aux 


-aucis 


faux. threat. G« n. 
Pi. faucium. 




-uris 


jus, 


right. 


-lx 


-Icis 


falx. sickle. 




-iidis 


incus, 


anvil. 


-nx 


-ncis 


lanx, dish. 




-litis 


salus, 


weal. 


-rx 


-rcis 


arx, citadel. 



65. 



C. XOMIZSTATIYES EXDLN'G WITH A MUTE. 



-ac 


*-actis 


lac. milk. 


-6c 


*-ecis 


alec, pidkle. 


-ut 


Mtis 


caput, head 



23 FOUKTII DECLENSION. 



66. D. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A VOWEL. 



-e 


-is 


mare, sea. 


-8 


-onis 


pavo, peacock. 




-onis 


Saxo, Saxon. 




-inis 


homo, man. 




*-nis 


caro, flesh. 



Fourth Declension. 

67. The Fourth Declension embraces only dissyllabic and 
polysyllabic stems in u. 

The endings are those of the Third Declension. 

In the Genitive and Ablative Singular, and the Nominative, 
Accusative, and Vocative Plural (sometimes, too, in the Dative 
Singular), the u of the stem absorbs the vowel of the ending, 
and becomes long, as fructu-is becomes fructus, of fruit ; fmctu-e 
becomes fructti, from fruit; fructu-es becomes fructus, fruits. 
This u, on the contrary, is lost before the ending -ibus in the 
Dative and Ablative Plural. 

The Accusative Singular, as always in vowel stems, has the 
ending m, without a connecting vowel (compare the Accusative 
in -im of the stems in i), hence u-m. 





MASCULINE. 




NEUTER. 




-N. 


fructu-s,/rw^. Pl. fructus, 


cornu, 


horn. Pl 


. cornu-a, 


G. 


fructus, f 'uctu-um, 


corntis 




cornu-um, 


D. 


fructu-I (fructti), fructibus, 


cornu, 




cornibus, 


Ac. 


fructu-m, fructus, 


cornu, 




cornu-a, 


V. 


fructus, fructus, 


cornu, 




cornu-a, 


Abl 


. fructti, fructibus, 


cornu, 




cornibus. 



Remakks. — 1. Dative and Ablative Plurals iii -ubus occur in nouns i 
-cus, and in tribus, tribe ; artus, joint ; partus, childbirth ; portus, harbor 
unus, fold. 

2. Domus, home, Ablative Singular, domo; Genitive Plural, domuur 
Mid domorum; Accusative Plural, domus and domos. Domi (a locatrv 
form) means, at home. 

68. Rule of Gender. — Nouns in -us are masculine ; those i 
-u are neuter. 

Exceptions.— Feminines are idus, pl., the 15th day of the month, tribu 
tribe, porticus, piazza, acus, needle, manus, hand, domus, house. 



FIFTH DECLENSION. 29 



Fifth Declension. 
69« The stem ends in e. Nominative in s. 



Sing.- 





MASCULINE. 






FEMININE 






-K 


die-s, day. 


PL 


die-s, 


Sing 


re-s, thing. 


PL 


re-s. 


G. 


die-I, 




die-rum, 




re-i, 




re-rum 


D. 


die-i, 




die-bus, 




re-i, 




re-bus, 


Ac, 


die-m, 




die-s, 




re-m, 




re-s, 


y. 


die-s, 




die-s, 




re-s, 




re-s, 


Abl. 


die, 




die-bus. 




re, 




re-bus. 



Eemarks. — 1. The Plural is used throughout in three words only : res, 
thing ; dies, day ; and in later Latin, species, appearance. In some words, 
only Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural occur ; others have no 
Plural at all. 

2. The stem-characteristic e, in the Genitive and Dative Singular, is 
long after a vowel and short after a consonant, as species, Genitive speciel; 
res, thing, Genitive rei; fides, faith, Genitive fidei. 

3. Some nouns of the Fifth Declension have a secondary form, which 
follows the First Declension, as mollities, softness, and mollitia. Where 
the double form exists, only Nominative, Accusative, and Ablative Singu- 
lar commonly follow the Fifth Declension. 

70. Rule of Gender. — Nouns of the Fifth Declension are 
feminine, except dies (which in the Singular is of the common 
gender, and. in the Plural masculine), and the masculine merl- 
dies, mid-day. 

Decle^sio^" of Greek Notjss. 

71. Greek substantives, especially proper names, are com- 
monly Latinized, and declined regularly according to their 
stem-characteristic. Many nouns, however, either retain their 
Greek form exclusively, or have the Greek and Latin forms side 
by side. 

72. Singular Forus of Greek Nouxs. 
t. ii. 

N. Penelope, Leonidas, Anchises, Delos (us), Ilion (um). 

O. Penelopes, Leonidae, Anchisae, Deli, Ilii. 

D. Penelopae, Leonidae, Anchisae, Delo, Ilio. 

Ac. Penelopen, Leonidam (an), Anchisen (am), Delon (um), Ilion (um). 

V. Penelope, Leonida, Anchise, a, a, Dale, Ilion (um). 

Abl. Penelopa. Leonida. Anchisa. Dslo. Ilio. 



30 




GREEK NOUNS. 








IT. 






ii. in. 


ni. 


X. 


Pantlius, 


Androgeos (us), Athos, 


Orpheus, 


Solon, Solo, 


G. 


Panthi, 


Androgel, 


Atho, onis, 


Orphei (ei), 


Solonis. 


D. 


Pantho. 


Androgeo, 


Atho, 


Orpheo, 


Soloni. 


Ac. 


Panthun, 


Androgeon, 
o. ona, 


Atho, on, onem 


, Orpheum (ea), 


Solona (em), 


V. 


Panthu, 


Androgeos, 


Athos, 


Orpheu, 


Solon. 


Abl 


Pantho. 


Androgeo. 


Athene. 


Orpheo. 


Solone. 


N. 


Aer. air. 


Xenophon, 


Atlas, 


Thales, 


Paris. 


G. 


Aeris, 


Xenophontis, 


Atlantis, 


Thaletis, is, 


Paridis, os. 


D. 


Aeri, 


Xenophonti, 


Atlanti, 


Thai?/*, I, 


Paridi, I. 


Ac. 


Aera cem), 


Xenophonta 


Atlanta, 


Thale/a, en, em, Parto, im, 1 






(em), 








V. 


A6r, 


Xenophon, 


Atla, 


Thale, 


Pari, Paris 


Abl 


. Aere. 


Xenophonte. 


Atlante. 


Thale. 


Paride. 






N. Oedipus, Achilles, eus, Socrates, Dido, heros. 

G. Oedipodfc?, I, Achillis, el, I, Socratis, 1, Didus, onis, herois. 

eos, 

D. Oedipodi, Achilli, Socrati, Dido, oni, heroi. 

Ac. Oedipwm (oda), Achillem, ea, Socraten, em, Dido, onem, heroa, em. 

en, 

V. Oedipe, Achilles, e, eu, Socrate (es), Dido, heros. 

Abl. Oedipocte. o. Achille. Socrate. Dido, one. heroe. 

Re? t arks. — 1. Many other forms are found, for which the dictionaries 
must be consulted. So poesis, G. poesis, eos, D. poesT, Ace. poesin, poesy. 
Many of them are transliterations of Greek words, quoted as Greek. 

2. In transferring Greek nouns into Latin, the Accusative Singular was 
sometimes taken as the stem. 

So KpaTtffj, Ace. xparT/pa, (pnnc7i) bowl. 

crater, crateris (masc), and cratera (creterra) craterae (fern.) 
2aXajui$ y Ace. lEaXajniva, Salamis. 
Salamis, Salamlnis, and Salamina, ae. 



73. 



Plural Forms of Greek Nouits. 



N. Pl. 



-oe 

-e 

-es 



: canephoroe, basket-bearers. 
: epe, epic poetry. 
Arcades, Arcadians. How often in prose we can- 
not tell. 
Georgicon, of tlie Georgics. 
-eon : Metamorphose5n, of the Metamorphoses. 
D. Pl. -si : Lemniasi (rare), to the Lemnian women. 
Ace. Pl. -as ■ Macedonas. Common even in words that are not 
Greek : Allobrogas. 



G. Pl. -on 



IRREGULAR XOUNS. 



31 



IRREGULAR NOUKS. 
74- *• Redundant Nouns. 

ABUNDANTIA. 
A. Different genders in the same declension : 

foaculus, baculum, 

balteus, balteum, sword-bdt. 

clipeus, clipeum, shield. 

calamister, calamistrum, curling-iron. 



1. 


1st and 2d. 


esseda, ae, 


essedum, I, 


war-chariot, gig. 






vespera, ae, 


vesper, I, 


evening. 


2. 


1st and 5th. 


duritia, ae, 


dtirities, 


hardness. 






materia, ae, 


materies, 


stuff. 


3. 


2d and 5th. 


diluvium, I, 


dlluvies, 


flood. 


4. 


2d and 4th. 


eventum, i, 


eventus, us, 


issue. 


5. 


3d and 4th. 


plebs, is, 
tribunus plebi, 


plebes, el, 

tribune of the people. 


commons. 


6. 


3d acd 2d. 


imbecillis, 


imbecillus, 


weak. 



And a few others (adjectives). 

•75. II. Defective Notjns. 

1. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER. 

A. Nouns used in Singular only : Singularia tantum. 
Most abstract nouns, and names of materials : 

justitia, justice, aurum, gold. 

B. Nouns used in Plural onlv : Pluralia tantum. 



angustiae. 


straits 


liberl, 


children. 


arma, orum, 


arms, 


manes, 


shades of tJie dead. 


blgae, quadrigae, 


two-horse, four-horse chariot, 


minae, 


threats. 


casses, ium, 


. toils {snare), 


moenia, ium, N. town-wall. 


cervices, um. 


neck (preferred to cervix), 


nuptiae, 


wedding. 


divitiae, 


riches, 


scalae, 


stairway. 


epulae (epulum), 


banquet, 


tenebrae, 


darkness. 


fores, um, f. 


door, 


valvae, 


folding -doors. 


habenae, 


reins. 


viscera, 


entrails. 


indutiae, 


truce. 






Kalendae. ffonae, 


Idtis, Calends, Nones, Ides. 






ambages, -um, 


round about, 


fauces -ium 


, f., gullet. 


compedes. -ium. 


fetters, 


preces -um, 


f.. prayer. 


These four have the 


Ablative Singular in -e: ambaj 


?e,compede, 


fauce, prece. 



Akin to Pluralia tantum are : 

C. Nouns used in Plural with a special sense : Heterologa. 
aedes. is, temple, aedes, ium, house, palace. 



auxilium, help, 
castrum, fort, 



auxilia, 
castra, 



auxiliaries, reinforcements, 
camp. 



3'2 IPTCEGUXAH NOUNS. 



copia, 


abundance. 


copiae, 


forces, troops. 


finis, 


end, limits 


fines, 


territory, borders. 


litera, 


letter (of the alphabet). 


literae, 


epistle, literature. 


opera, 


work, 


operae, 


luorkmen. 



76- 3. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN CASE. 

A. Used only in Nominative and Accusative Singular : fas, right, nefaa, 
wrong, and Greek Neuters in -os. 

B. In Ablative Singular: sponte, of free toil!, and many verbals in u: 
promptu, in readiness; jussu, by order ; monitu, by advice. 

C. In the oblique cases the forms from : 

(daps), f., feast, S. and PI. (ops), f, help (No Dat), S. and PI. 

(dicio), f., sway, S. (vix), f., change (No Dat.), S. and PI. 

(frux), f., fruit, S. and PI. 

D. The Genitive Plural of many monosyllabic words does not occur : 

cos, whetstone, lux, light, os, mouth. 

vis, force : G. and D. are wanting ; Ac. vim ; Abl. vi. PI. vires, virium, 
viribus. 

nemo, nobody : G. nullius hominis ; D. nemini ; Ac. neminem ; Abl. 
nullo nomine. 

77- HI. Variable Nouns. 

A. Hetehoclttes : Different stems with the same Nominative. 

domus (domu- and domo) ; Abl. domo ; PI. G. domuum, domorum ; Ace. domus 
and domos. 

pecus (peoud- and pecor-), peendis, sheep ; pecoris, cattle. 

ficus, flg-iree ; laurus, bay-tree ; pinus, pine-tree ; are declined regularly 
according to the Second Declension, but have' secondary forms in use 
from the Fourth Declension in the Ablative Singular, and in the Nomina- 
tive and Accusative Plural. . 

senatus, senate ; G. senatus or senati (rare). 

requies, -etis, f. : Ac. requietem and requiem, rest. 

fames, -is ; Abl. fame and fame, hunger. 

satrapes, G. satrapae and satrapis ; D. satrapae, &c, Persian governor. 

78* B. Heterogeneous Nouns have the same stem with different 
gender in Singular and Plural: 

Singular. Plural. 

frenum, bridle. freni, and frena. 

jocus, jest. joci, and joca. 

locus, jilace. j loca, localities. 

< loci, passages in books, topics. 
r as tram, mattock. rastrl, and rastra. 



ADJECTIVES OF THIRD DECLENSION. 



33 



79- C. Metaplasts are nouns which have isolated cases from another 
than the Nominative stem : 



vas, vasis, n., vessel. PI. vasa, vasorum, vasis (as if from vaso). 

poema, poematis, n.,poem. PL poemata, poematum, Ibus. 

G. poematorum, D. poematis (as if from poemato-). 

So all Greek nouns in -a, -atis. 
Bacchanalia, -ium (-iorum), -ibus, feast of Bacchus. 

So several other names of feasts in -ia. 



80. 



IV. Peculiarities. 






Anio, G. Anienis, the (river) Anio. 
as, assis, m., a copper. 
auceps, sMCTxpis, fowler. 
bos (bovs), bovis, c., ox, cow. 

G. Pi. bourn. 

D. Abl. bubus, bonus, 
caput- capitis, n., head. 
So anceps, ancipitis, two-headed. 

praeceps, -cipitis, headlong. 
caro, carnis (for carinis), f., flesh. 

G. PI. carnium, 
Ceres, Cereri3, Ceres. 
far, fair is. d., spelt. 
fel, fellis, ri., gall. 
femur, femoris, n., thigh. 
feminis. 



iter, itineris, n., way, route. 
jecur, jecoris, n., liver. 

jecinoris. 
Jupiter (for Jov(i)piter), Jovis. 
mel, mellis. n., honey. 
nix=(s)nig(v)s, nivis, f., snow. 
os, ossis, n., bone. 
OS, oris, n.„ mouth, 
pollis. pollinis, m., flour. 
sanguis, sanguinis, m., blood. 
senex, senis, old man. 
supellex, supellectilis, f., furniture. 
Venus, Veneris, Venus. 



Adjectives oe the Third Declension". 

81. The declension of tlie adjectives of the Third Declension 
follows the rules given for the substantives. 

Most of the adjectives of the Third Declension are vowel 
stems in i. They form the masculine and feminine alike, with 
Nominative in s; but the neuter Nominative weakens the char- 
acteristic i into e. (Compare mare, sea.) 



Adjectives of Two Endings. 

82. Several stems in i, preceded by r (cr, tr, br), form the 
Nominative masculine, not by affixing s, but by dropping the i 
and inserting e short before the r, as, stem acri, sharp, Nom. 
Masc. acer, Norn. Fern, acris. (Compare 60, 3 c.) 

The e belongs to the stem only in celer, celeris, celere, swift. 

2 * 



ADJECTIVES OF TTTITIT) DECLENSION. 



MA80, 


and Fbv. 


Neuter. 


Masc. 


Fem. 


Neuter. 


Sing.— N. 


facili-s, easy. 


facile, 


acer, 


acri-s, 


acre. 


G. 


facilis, 




acris, 






D. 


facili, 




acrl, 






Ac. 


facilem, 


facile, 


acrem, 




acre. 


V. 


facilis, 


facile, 


acer, 


acris, 


acre. 


Abl 


facili. 




acrl. 






Plur.—N. 


faciles, 


facili-a, 


acres, 




acri-a. 


G. 


facili-um, 




acri-um, 






D. 


facili-bus, 




acri-bus, 






Ac. 


faciles, 


facili-a, 


acres, 




acri-a. 


y. 


faciles, 


facili-a, 


acres, 




acri-a. 


Abl. 


facili-bus. 




acri-bus. 







83. The consonant stems have the same forms in all the 
genders, except that in the Accusative Singular, and in the 
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural, the neuter is 
distinguished from the masculine and feminine. 





M. and F. 


N. 


M. and F. N. 


M. and F. 


N. 


Sing.— N. 


felix. lucky, 


felix, 


priidens, wise, priidens, 


vetus, old, 


vetus. 


G. 


fellc-is, 




prudent-is, 


veter-is, 




D. 


felic-i, 




prudent i, 


veter-i, 




Ac. 


felic-em, 


felix, 


prudent-em, priidens, 


veter-em, 


vetus. 


V. 


felix, 




priidens, 


vetus, 




Abl 


fellcl (and -e), 


prudent! (and e), 


veter-e (or 


i). 




M. and F. 


N. 


M. and F. N. 


M. and F. 


N. 


Plur.—N. 


felic-es, 


felicia, 


prtident-es, prudentia, 


veter-es, 


veter-a. 


G. 


felic-ium, 




prudent ium, 


veter-um, 




D. 


felic-ibus, 




prtident-ibus, 


veter-ibus, 




Ac. 


felic-es, 


felicia, 


priident-Ss, prudentia, 


veter-es, 


veter-a. 


V. 


felic-es, 


felicia, 


prtident-es, prudentia, 


veter-es, 


veter-a. 


Abl. felic-ibus, 




prudent-ibus, 


veter-ibus. 





Adjectives of One Ending. 

84. Adjective stems of one ending close with 1, r, s, or a p, 
k, or t mute. 

vigil. nUH, memor. mindful, pauper, poor, cicur, tame, pubgs, adult, vetus, old. 

vigil-is, memor-is, pauper-is, cicur-is, ptiber-is, veter-is. 

Abl. i (e). Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. e. 



particep s. sharing, 
particip-is, Abl. e. 

audax. hold, felix, lucky, 

audac-is. fellc-is. 



caeleb-s, unmarried, 
caelib-is, Abl. e. 

duplex, double, 
duplic-is. 



ferox, fierce, 
feroc-is. 



inop-s, poor. 
inop-is, Abl. i (e). 

trux, savage. 
truc-is. 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 35 

dives, rich, deses, slothful, compos, possessed of, prudens, wise, concors, harmonious. 
divit is, desid-is, compot-is, prudent-is, concord-is, 

Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. e. 

85. Obseeyations. — The adjectives of one ending, including 
the present participle, follow in part the declension of vowel 
stems : 

1. In the neuter Plural they have -ia; only vetus, old, has 
Vetera. Many have no neuter. 

2. In the Ablative Singular they have I and e — when used as 
adjectives commonly I; when used as substantives commonly e. 

The participles, as such, have e; but used as nouns or adjec- 
tives, either e or I, with tendency to I. 

3. In the Genitive Plural the consonant-stems have: -ium, 
when the characteristic is preceded by a long vowel or a con- 
sonant; -urn, when the characteristic is preceded by a short 
vowel, as : 



audax, bold, 
audacium, 


prudens, wise. 
prtidentium, 


Samnites, Samnites. 
Samnitium. 


supplex, suppliant, 
supplicum, 


dives, rich. 
divitum or ditum. 




caelebs, unmarried, 
caelibum, 


compos, possessed of, 
compotum, 


memor, mindful. 
memorum. 



Exceptions occur, as : 

multiplex, manifold, multiplicium. Phoenices, Phoenicians, Phoenicum. 
The participles have -ium; as, amans, loving, amantium. 
Used as nouns, they have sometimes -urn, as : 

sapiens, a sage, sapientum. parens, a parent, parentum. 

4. Compound adjectives follow the declension of the word 
from which they are formed, as : 

concors, harmonious, anceps, double, quadrupes,/0wr-/<?0tetf, 

concordum, ancipitum, quadrupedum. 

Even these, however, have the neuter plural commonly in -ia, as, anci- 
pitia, quadrupedia. 

Compaeison or Adjectives. 

86. The Degrees of comparison are : Positive, Comparative, 
and Superlative. 



i6 



COMrAKTSON OF ADJECTIVES. 



The Comparative is formed by adding to the consonant stems 
the endings -ior for the masculine and feminine, and -ius for the 
n< ater. 

The Superlative is formed by adding to the consonant stems 
the endings -issinius, -a, -um. 

Vowel shins, before forming the Comparative and Superla- 
tive, drop their characteristic vowel. 






Positive. Comparative. 

M. and F. N. 

altus. -a, -uin, high, alt-ior, higher, alt-ius, 

fortis. -e, brave, fort-ior, fort-ius, 

utilis, -e, useful, util-ior, util-ius, 

audax, bold, audac-ior, audac-ius, 



Superlative. 

alt-issimus, a, um, highest 
fort-issimus. 
iitil-issimus. 
audac-issimus. 



prudens, 



87- 



wise, 


prudent-ior, 






M. and F. 


SlKG.- 


-K 


altior, 




G. 


altioris, 




D. 


altiorl, 




Ac. 


altiorem, 




V. 


altior, 




Abl. 


altiore and 


Plub.- 


-K 


altiores, 




G. 


altiorum, 




D. 


altioribus, 




Ac. 


altiores, 




V. 


altiores, 




Abl. 


altioribus, 



prudent-ius, prudent-issimus. 

N. 
altius. 
altioris. 
altiorl. 
altius. 
altius. 
-I. altiore and -L 

altiora. 
altiorum. 
altioribus. 
altiora. 
altidra. 
alti5ribus. 



Peculiarities. 






88. 1. Adjectives in -er add the Superlative ending -rimus directly to 
the Nominative Masculine (-rimus for -simus by assimilation). 



Positive. 
miser, -a. -um, wrtiched, 
celer, -is. -e, swift, 
acer. acris. acre, sharp, 
vetus, old, 



Comparative. 
miser-ior, miser-ius, 
celer-ior, celer-ius, 
acr-ior. acr-ius, 
veterior, vetustior, 



Superlative. 
miser-rimus. 
celer-rimus. 
acer-rimus. 
veter-rimus. 



mattirus, ripe, sometimes maturrimus. 



2. Six adjectives in -ilia add -limus to the stem, after dropping -i, to 
form the Superlative: perhaps by assimilation. 

facilis. easy; difficilis, hard; similis, like; dissimilis, unlike; gracilis, slender; 
and humilis. low. 



facilis, 



Comp. facil-ior, 



Sup. faoil-limus (for facil-simus). 



IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 



37 



3. The adjectives in dicus, ficus, volus, borrow the Comparative and 
Superlative from the participial forms in -dicens, -ficens, and -volens. 

benevolus, benevolent, Comp. benevolentior, Sup. benevolentissimus. 
maledicus, scurrilous. maledlcentior, maledicentissimus. 

In like manner: 

egentior, egentissimus. 

providentior, providentissimus. 

4. Adjectives in -us, preceded by a vowel, form the Comparative and 
Superlative by means of magis and maxime, more and most: 

idoneus,^, Comp. magis idoneus, Sup. maxime idoneus. 

Remark.— Adjectives in -quus are not included under this last rule. 

antiquus, old, Comp. antfqu-ior, Sup. antlqu-issimus. 



e genus, needy, 
providus, far-sighted, 



89. 



Irregular Comparison. 



bonus, 


good, 


melior, 


melius, 


optimus. 


malus, 


bad, 


pejor, 


pejus, 


pessimus. 


magnus, 


great, 


major, 


majus, 


maximus. 


parvus, 


small, 


minor, 


minus, 


minimus. 


multus, 


much, 


S. 

PL plures, 
complurSs, 


plus (no Dat. nor Abl.), 
plura, G. PL plurium. 
compltira and -ia. 


pliirimus. 


neqnam, 


worthless, 


nequior, 


nequius, 


nequissimus. 


frugl (indecl. 


frugal, 


frugalior, 




frugalissimus 



Remarks.—!. Some Comparatives and Superlatives are in use, whilst 
the corresponding Positive is either lacking or rare. 

deterior, worse, deterrimus. 

ocior, swifter, ocissimus. 

potior, better, potissimus. 

exterior, outer, extremus, extimus, from exterus, on the outside, and prep, extra, 

without. 
superior, upper, supremus, or summus, from superus, on the top, and prep, supra, 

above. 
inferior, lower, infimus, from inferus, below, prep, infra, below. 
posterior, hinder, later, postremus and postumus, from posterus, coming after, and 

prep, post, after. 

2. The Positive stem of existing Comparatives is met with only in a 
preposition or an adverb : as, ante, before ; anterior, that is before; prope, 
near; propior, proximus; citerior, on this side; citimus, from citra ; ul- 
terior, farther; ultimus, from ultra, beyond; interior, inner; intimus, 
from intus, within ; prior, former ; primus, first, from prae, before. 

3. Many adjectives lack one or both of the degrees of comparison. 

Diver sus, different, novus, new, falsus, untrue, meritus, deserved, have no Com- 
parative. 

Longinquus, ofai, propinquus, near, salutaris, healthful, jnvenis, young (Com* 
1 parative junior \ and senex, eld (Comparative senior), Lave no superlative. 
u Youngest" and '"oldest/'' are expressed by minimus, maximus (natti). 



i8 



ADVERBS. 



ADVEBBS. 

90. Adverbs are cither oblique cases or mutilated forms of 
oblique cases of the adjectives. 

1. Adjectives in -us and -er form the adverb in e (mutilated 
Ablative), 

altus, lofty, alte. pulcher, beautiful, pulchre. miser, wretched, misere. 

2. The adjectives of the Third Declension form their adverbs by adding 
-ter to the stem ; stems in -nt dropping the t, and stems in a K-mute in- 
serting the connecting vowel i before the ending. 

fortis, brave, fortiter. ferox, wild, ferociter. prudens, foreseeing, prudenter. 

Exceptions : 
audax, bold, audac-ter (seldom audaciter). difficilis, hard to do, difficulter and 

difliciliter. 
But instead of these, generally, non facile, vix, aegre. 

3. The Ablative of some adjectives serves as an adverb: 

tutus, safe, tuto; falso, falsely; perpetuo, ceaselessly; continuo, forth- 
wtii ; improvIs5, unexpectedly ; primo, at first. 

consulte and consulto, purposely ; certe, at least, and certo, certainly. 

rare, thinly, and rard, seldom ; vere, in truth, and vero, true but 

recte, correctly, and recta, straightway ; dextera or dextra, to the right % \ 
and dextere, skillfully. 

sinistra and laeva, to the left hand. 

4. The Accusative neuter of many adjectives is used as aril 
adverb. This is true of all Comparatives. 

Multum, much ; paulum, a Utile ; nimium, too much ; ceterum, /<?r tli\ 
rest ; prlmum, first ; postremum, finally ; potissimum, chiefly ; facile| 
easily ; dulce, sweetly ; triste, sadly ; im.pu.ne, scot-free. 

91. 







Comparison of Adverbs. 




Positive. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 


alt6, 


loftily, 


altius, 


altissime. 


pulchrg, 


beautifully 


, pulchrius, 


pulcherrimg. 


miserg, 


poorly, 


miserius, 


miserrime. 


fortiter, 


bravely, 


fortius, 


fortissime. 


audacter, 


boldly, 


audacius, 


audacissime. 


tuto, 


safely, 


tutius, 


tutissime. 


facile, 


easily, 


facilius, 


facillime. 


bene, 


xvell, 


melius, 


optime. 


male, 


ill, 


pejus, 


pessime. 


[parvus], 


small, 


minus, less, 


minime, least. 


[magnus] 


great, 


magis, more, 


maxime, most. 


multum, 


much, 


plus, more, 


plurimum. 


cito, 


quickly, 


citius, 


citissime. 


diu. 


long, 


diutius. 


diutissimS. 


saepe, 


often, 


saepius, 


saepissimg. 


nuper, 


recently, 




nuperrimS. 


> 


satis, 


enough, 


satius, better. 





NUMERALS. 



39 



J 



NUMERALS. 

Numeral Adjectives. 



92. The Cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except : tinus, 
ne, duo, two, tres, three, the hundreds beginning with ducenti, 
vo hundred, and the plural milia, thousands, which forms 
■illium and miiibus. 

duo, tres, tria. 

duorum, trium. 

duobus, tribus. 

duo, tres, tria. 

duobus, tribus. 

Like duo is declined ambo, -ae, -o, both. 



duo, two, 


duae, 


duorum, 


duarum, 


duobus, 


duabus, 


duos, duo, 


duas, 


duobus, 


duabus, 



93. 



1. Cardinal Numbers. 



2. Ordinal Numbers. 



1 


I 


tinus, una, unum 


primus, -a, -urn (prior) 


2 


II 


duo, duae, duo 


secundus (alter). 


3 


III 


tres, tria 


tertius 


4 


IV 


quattuor 


quartus 


5 


V 


quinque 


quintus 


6 


VI 


sex 


sextus 


7 


VII 


sept em 


Septimus 


8 


VIII 


octo 


octavus 


9 


IX 


novem 


nonus 


10 


X 


decern 


decimus 


11 


XI 


undecim 


undecimus 


12 


XII 


duodecim 


duodecimus 


13 


XIII 


tredecim 


tertius decimus 


14 


XIV 


quattuor decim 


quartus decimus 


15 


XV 


quindecim 


quintus decimus 


16 


XVI 


sedecim 


sextus decimus 


17 


XVII 


septendecim 


Septimus decimus 


18 


XVIII 


duodeviginti 


duodevicesimus 


19 


XIX 


undeviginti 


undevicesimus 


20 


XX 


vigintl 


vicesimus 


21 


XXI 


vigintl unus 


vicesimus primus 


22 


XXII 


vigintl duo 


vicesimus secundus 


23 


XXIII 


vigintl tres 


vicesimus tertius 


24 


XXIV 


vigintl quattuor 


vicesimus quartus 


25 


XXV 


vigintl quinque 


vicesimus quintus 


26 


XXVI 


vigintl sex 


vicesimus sextus 



,0 




NUMERALS. 




1. Cardinal Numerals. 


27 


XXVII 


viginti sept em 


28 


XXVIII 


duodetriginta 


29 


XXIX 


undetriginta 


30 


XXX 


triginta 


40 


XL 


quadr^7ginta 


50 


L 


quinqu^ginta 


60 


LX 


sex<7ginta 


70 


LXX 


sept^aginta 


80 


LXXX 


octoginta 


90 


XC 


nonaginta 


100 


C 


centum 


101 


CI 


centum et unus 


115 


CXV 


centum et quindecim 


120 


cxx 


centum et viginti 


121 


CXXI 


centum et viginti unus 


200 


cc 


ducenti, -ae, -a 


300 


ccc 


trecenti 


400 


cccc 


quadn'ttgenti 


500 


D(IO) 


quingenti 


600 


DC 


sexcenti 


700 


DCC 


septmgenti 


800 


DCCC 


octingentl 


900 


DCCCC 


nongenti 


1000 


M (CIo) 


mille 


1001 


MI 


mille et unus 


1101 


MCI 


mille centum unus 


1120 


MCXX 


mille centum viginti 

[unus 


1121 


MCXXI 


mille centum viginti 


1200 


MCC 


mille ducenti 


2000 


MM 


duo milia (millia) 
blna milia 


2222 




duo milia ducenti vi- 
ginti duo 


5000 


IOD 


quinque milia 
quina milia 


10,000 


CCIoo 


decern milia 
dena milia 


21,000 




unum et viginti milia 


100,000 




centum milia 
centena milia 


000,000 




decies centena milia 









[mue 



2. Ordinal Numerals. 
vicesimus Septimus 
duodetricesimus 
undetricesimus 
trlcesimus 
quadragesimus 
quinquagesimus 
sexagesimus 
septuagesimus 
octogesimus 
nonagesimus 
centesimus 
centesimus primus 
centesimus et quintus deci 
centesimus vicesimus [mui 
centesimus vicesimus prij 
ducentesimus 
trecentesimus 
quadringentesimus 
quingentesimus 
sexcentesimus 
septingentesimus 
octingent e simus 
non^entesimus 
millesimus 
millesimus primus 
millesimus centesimus pr 

mus 
millesimus centesimus v 

cesimus [cesimus primil 
millesimus centesimus v 
millesimus ducentesimus 
bis millesimus 



bis millesimus ducente 

mus vicesimus secund 

quinquies millesimus 

decies millesimus 

semel et vicies millesin? 
centies millesimus 

decies centies millesimu; 



NUMERALS. 



41 



Eemark.-D is short for Iq, M for CIo. Adding o on the right of I multiplies by 10 : 
; o = 5000 ; IQOO = 50,000. Putting C before as often as q stands after multiplies by 2: 
O = 1000; CCIoo = 10,000; CCCIqoo = 100,000. 

94- Compound Numerals. 

1. From 10 to 20, as in the tables, or separately: decern et tres. 

2. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, &c., are commonly expressed by subtrac- 
:>n ; occasionally, as in English. 

3. From 20 to 100, the compound numerals stand in the same order as 
le English : twenty-one, viginti unus j or one and twenty, iinus et viginti. 

As 21 years old : annos unum et viginti (viginti unum), unum et vi- 
inti annos natus. 

4. From 100 on, et is inserted after the first numeral, or omitted alto- 
ether : mille et centum unus, or mille centum unus = 1101. 







Cardinals. 




21- 


2T viginti unus 




or unus et viginti 


101 


centum et unus 






centum iinus 


120 


centum et viginti 






centum viginti 


121 


centum et viginti unus 


— 




centum viginti iinus 


1001 


mille et iinus 






mille iinus 


1101 


mille et centum unus 






milie centum unus 


1125 


miile et centum viginti 


quinque 


mille centum viginti quinque. 


2222 


duo milia et ducenti viginti 


duo 


duo milia ducenti viginti duo 






Ordinals. 




13-17 


tertius decimus 




or 


decimus et tertius 


18 


duodevicesimus 






octavus decimus 


19 


undevicesimus 






nonus decimus 


21 


vicesimus primus 






unus et vicesimus 


22 


vicesimus secundus 






alter et vicesimus 


23 


vicesimus tertius 






tertius et vicesimus 


95. 


3. Distributive Numerals. 


1 


singuli, -ae, -a, one each. 




14 


quaterni deni 


2 


bini, -ae, -a, two each. 




15 


quini deni 


3 


terni 




10 


seni deni 


4 


quaterni 




17 


septeni deni 


5 


quini 




18 


oct5ni deni, duodeviceni 


6 


seni 




19 


noveni deni, undeviceni 


7 


septeni 




20 


viceni 


8 


octoni 




21 


viceni singuli 


9 


noveni 




22 


viceni bini, bini et viceni 


10 


deni 




28 


duodetriceni 


11 


undeni 




29 


undetriceni 


12 


duodeni 




30 


trice ni 


13 


terni deni 




40 


quadrageni 



42 



NUMERAL ADVERBS. 



50 quinquageni 

60 sexageni 

TO septuageni 

80 oct5geni 

90 n5nageni 

100 centeni 

200 duceni 

300 treceni 

400 quadringeni 

500 quingeni 



600 sexceni 

700 septingeni 

800 octingeni 

900 nongeni 

1000 singula milia 

2000 bina milia 

3000 trlna milia 

10,000 dena milia 

100,000 centena milia 



Remarks.— 1. The distributives are used with an exactness, which is foreign to ocr 
idiom, whenever repetition is involved, as in the multiplication table. But when singulli 
is expressed, the cardinal may be used. 

2. The distributives are used with Pluralia tantum : blnae literae, two epistle',} 
But with these unl is used for one, trlnl for three: unae literae, trinae literae. 

3. The poets occasionally use the distributives for cardinals. 

4. Multiplicative Numerals. 



1 


simplex, 


single. 


5 


quincuplex. 


2 


duplex, 


double, 


7 


septemplex. 


3 


triplex, 


triple, 


10 


decemplex. 


4 


quadruplex, 




100 


centuplex. 



These answer the question, how many fold? 

5. Proportional Numerals. 

1 simplus, -a, -urn, single, 4 quadruplus. 

2 duplus, double, 7 septuplus. 

3 triplus, 8 octuplus. 

These answer the question, how many times as great? 
Remark. — Only a few forms can be proved. 

Numeral Adverbs. 



96. 

1 semel, once, 

2 bis, twice, 

3 ter 

4 quater 

5 quinquies, quinquiens 

6 sexies 

7 septies 

8 octies 

9 no vies 

10 decies 

11 undecies 



12 duo decies 

13 ter decies, tredecies 

14 quater decies, quattuordecies I 

15 quinquies decies, quindecies 

16 sexies decies, sedecies 

17 septies decies 

18 duodevicies, octies decies 

19 undevicies, novies decies 

20 vicies 

21 semel et vicies, vicies et 



* Not semel vicies. bis viciSs, etc., because that would be, once twenty times =;[( 
times ; twice twenty times = 40 times. 







PRONOUNS. 43 


■2 bis et vicies, 


vicies et 


400 quadringenties 


bis, vicies bis * 


500 quingenties 


tricies 




600 sexcenties 


quadragies 




700 septingenties 


quinquagies 




800 octingenties 


>0 sexagies 




900 nongenties 


septuagies 




1,000 millies 


K3 octogies 




2,000 bis millies 


)0 n5nagies 




100,000 centies millies 


)0 centies 




1,000,000 millies millies, decies cen- 


)0 ducenties 




ties millies. 


)0 trecenties 







PKONOUNS. 

97. Pronouns designate without describing. 

Remark. — The pronoun is not a word used instead of a noun. The noun says too 
? uch, for all nouns (proper as well as common) are originally descriptive ; the pronoun 
mply points out. The noun says too little, because it cannot express person, as ego, /, 
i, thou ; it cannot express local appurtenance, as hlC, this (here), ille, that (there), 

98. A. Personal Pronouns. 

I. Personal Pronouns of the First Person. 
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE. 

meus, -a, -urn, mine or my. 
Voc. (masc), ml. 



noster, nostra, nostrum, our or ours. 



n. Personal Pronouns of the Second Person. 

SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE. 

thou, 
of thee, 

to, for thee, tuus, a, urn, thy or thine, 

thee, 
Abl. te, from, with, by thee. 

* Not semel vicies, bis vicies, etc., because that would be, once twenty times = 20 
times ; twice twenty times = 40 time*. 



Sing.— N. 


ego, 


/, 


G. 


mei,^ 


of me, 


D. 


mini, 


to, for me, 


Ac. 


me, 


me, 


Abl. 


me, 


from, with, by me. 


Plur.— N. 


nos, 


' we, 


G. 


nostri, 


of us, 




nostrum, 


D. 


nobis, 


to, for us, 


Ac. 


nos, 


us. 


Abl. 


nobis, 


from, with, by us. 



Sing.— N. 


tu, 


G. 


tuL 


D. 


tibl, 


Ac. 


te, 



44 





jtjk 

SUBSTANTIVE. 


KJIX\J\J X\&. 


Plur.— N. 


vos, ye or you, 




G. 


vestrl, of you, 






vestrum, 


vester, 


D. 


vobis, to, for you, 




Ac. 


vos, you, 





POSSESSIVE. 



vester, vestra, vestrum, your or yours. 



Abl. vobis, from., with, by you. 

Remarks. — 1. The forms of the Genitive Plural, nostrum and vestrum, are used as 
partitive genitives in reference to number. 

2. From noster and vester and also from cujus, whose? (104) are formed the Gentile 
adjectives of one ending: nostras, of our country ; vestras, of your country ; cujas, of 
whose country? Gen. nostratis, vestratis, cujatis. 



III. Personal Pronouns of the Third Person. 

100. The personal pronoun of the third person is represented 
by the determinative in the oblique cases, with special forms for 
the reflexive. 

Determinative. 



SUBSTANTIVE. 

Sing.— N. [is, ea, id], he, she, it, 

G. ejus, of him, etc., 

D. el, to, for him, 

Ac. eum, earn, id, him, her, it, 
Abl. eo, ea, eo, from,, with, by him, etc. 

Plur.— N. [el, oril, eae, ea], they, 

G. eorum, earum, eorum, of them, 

D. els, or ils, to, for the?n, 

Ac. eos, eas, ea, them, 

Abl. els, or iis, from, with, by them. 



POSSESSIVE. 

(supplied by the genitive.) 
ejus, his, hers, its. 



eorum, earum, eorum, their, 
or theirs. 



Sing.— N. 
G. 
D. 

Ac. 
Abl 

Plur.— N. 
G. 
D. 
Ac. 



Reflexive. 
SUBSTANTIVE. 

sui, of him, her, it(self), 

sibl, to, for, him(self), her (self), 

se (sSse), himiself), herisflf), 

se (sese), from, with, by him(self). 



POSSESSIVE, 

suus, -a, -um, his, her(s), 
(own). 



a, -um, their (own), 



sui, of them(selves), SUUS. 

sibl, to, for fhem(selves), theirs. 

se (sese), them(selves), 
Abl. se (sese) from,, with, by them(selves). 
Remarks. — 1. The enclitic -met may be added to all the forms of ego (except nos- 
trum), to all the forms of til (except tii and vestrum), to sibi, se, and the forms of 
suus ; egomet, I myself 

2. The enclitic -pte is joined to the Ablative Singular of the Possessives ; it is espe- 
cially common with suo ; suopte ingenio. by his own genius. 

3. From til are formed ttite and tutemet- 






PRONOUNS. 45 



101. B. Determinative Pronouns. 

1. is, he, that, etc. 





Singular. 








Plural. 


N. is, 


ea, 


id, 


ei, or ii, 


eae, 


ea, 


G. ejus, 
D. ei, 






eorum, 

els, or iis, 


earum, eorum, 


Ac. eum, 


earn, 


id, 


eos, 


eas, 


ea, 


Abl. e5, 


ea, 


e5. 


els, or iis. 







2. Idem, the same. 
Singular. Plural. 

N. idem, eadem, idem, eldem, or iidem, eaedem, eadem, 

G. ejusdem, eorundem, earundem, eorundem, 

D. eldem, eisdem, or iisdem, 

Ac. eundem, eandem, idem, eosdem, easdem, eadem, 

Abl. eodem, eadem, eodem, eisdem, or iisdem. 

3. ipse, he, self. 
Singular. Plural. 

N. ipse, ipsa, ipsum, ipsi, ipsae, ipsa, 

G. ipsius, ipsorum, ipsarum, ipsoru x, 

D. ipsi, ipsis, 

Ac. ipsum, ipsam, ipsum, ipsos, ipsas, ipsa, 

Abl. ipso, ipsa, ipso. ipsis. 

102. 0. Demonstrative Pronouns. 

I. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE FIRST PERSON. 

hie, this. 
Sing. N. hie, haec, hoc, Pl. N. hi, hae, naec, these, 

G. hujus, horum, harum, h5rum, 

D. huic, his, 

Ac. hunc, hanc, hoc, h5s, has, haec, 

Abl. hoc, hac, hoc. his. 

II. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE SECOND PERSON. 

iste, that. 

Sing. N. iste, ista, istud, Pl. N. isti, istae, ista, 

G. istius, istorum, istarum, ist5rum, 

D. isti, istis, 

Ac. istum, istam, istud, istos, istas, ista, 

Abl. ist5, ista, isto. istis. 

I 



46 



PRONOUNS. 



III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE THIRD PERSON. 



Sing. N. 


ille, 


ilia, 


illud, 


PL. 


N. 


illi, illae, ilia, 


G. 


illius, 










illorum, illarum, illorum, 


D. 


illi, 










illis, 


Ac. 


ilium, 


illam, 


illud, 






illos, illas, ilia, 


Abl. 


illo, 


ilia, 


ill5. 






illis. 



Remarks. — 1. Hie: the forms in -c arise from the enclitic -C8. So hice, hunce, are 
found in older Latin ; and -ci in the interrogative form with ne, hicine ? This -ce is 
sometimes appended io the other forms : hujusce, hosce. 

2. Iste and Ille have, like hie, forms in -e, but only in Nom. Ace. Abl. 



103. 






istic, 


istaec, 


istoc 


or istuc, 


istunc, 


istanc, 


istoc 


or istuc. 


istoc, 


istac, 


istoc, 


So illic, illoc, etc 



D. 



quae, 
quorum, 

quae, 



Relative Pronouns. 

qui, who. 
quae, quod, Pl. N. qui, quae, 

qu5rum, quarum, 

quibus, 
quam, quod, quos, quas, 
qua, quo. quibus. 

Remarks.— t^eis, quis, is also found as a Plural Dat. Abl. The form qui is used as 
the Abl. Sing, quo, qu?.. quo, chiefly with -cum ; quicum for quocum, with whom. 
Qui, interrogative, means how s- 

General Relatives are : 

Substantive, quisquis, whoever, quidquid, whatever. 

Adjective. quiqui, quaequae, quodquod, whosoever. 

quicunque, quaecunque, quodcunque, whichever. 



Sing. N. 


qui, 


G. 


cujus, 


D, 


cul, 


Ac. 


quern, 


Aul 


quo, 



104. 

Substantive. quis ? 
Adjective. qui ? 

Subst. and Adj. uter ? 



Sing. N. quis ? 
G. cujus ? 
D. cul? 
Ac. quern ? 
Abl. qu5? 



Substantive. 
Adjective. 



E. Interrogative Pronouns. 

quid? what? 

quod ? which ? 

utrum ? who, which of two f 

Possessive. 
cujus, cuja, cujum, whose ? 
(rare). 



quid? 



who ? 

quae? 
utra? 

who? what? 

whose ? 

to, for whom ? 

whom? what? 

from, with, by whom or what? 

Remark.— The plural of the substantive interrogative pronoun and both numbers of 
the adjective interrogative pronoun coincide with the forms of the relative qui, quae, 
quod, who, which. 

Strengthened Interrogatives. 

quisnam ? who pray ? quidnam ? what pray ? 

quinam? quaenam? quodnam? which pray? 



1 y some, any. 



CORRELATIVES. 47 



105. F. Indefinite Pronouns. 

1. Substantive, aliquis, aliqua, aliquid, ) somebody, some one or 

quis, qua, quid, J other* 

Adjective. aliqui, aliquae (or aliqua*), aliquod, \ 
qui, quae (or qua*), quod, 

2. quidam, quaedam, quiddam (and quoddam), a certain, certain one. 

3. quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam (and quodpiam), some one, some. 

4. quisquam, -, quidquam, any one {at all). No plural. 

5. qui vis, quaevis, quidvis (and quodvis), \ any one you please, 
quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet (and quodlibet), ) you like. 

6. quisque, quaeque, quidque and quodque, each one. 
unusquisque, unaquaeque, unumquidque and unumquodque, each 

one severally. 

The distinction between the substantive and adjective form is observed 
igorously only in the neuter. 

Remark. — Quisquam is used only as a substantive, except with designations of 
ersons ; scriptor quisquam, any writer {at all), Gallus quisquam, any Gaul {at all). 
'he corresponding adjective is ullus. 

ullus, -a, -um, any ; nullus, -a, -urn, no one, not one. The corresponding 
substantives are nemo (76), and nihil, which forms nihil! aud nihild 
Abl.) only in certain combinations. 

nonnullus, -a, -um, some, many a. 

alius, -a, -ud, another ; alter, -era, -erum, the other, one {oftivo) ; neuter, 
leutra, neutrum, neither of two. 

alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, the one or the other of the two. Gen. 
dterutrius. 

(or alter uter, altera utra, alterum utrum. Gen. alterius utrius.) 

uterque, utraque, utrumque, each of two, either, ambo, -ae, -o, both. 

utervis, utravis, utrumvis, ) 

uterlibet, utralibet, utrumlibet, \ ^*W you please of the two. 

COEEELATIVES. 
106- I. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 

Interrogative s. Demonstratives. Relatives. 

luis? who? is, that, qui, who. 

uialis ? ofiohat hind ? talis, such {of that qualis, as {of which kind). 

kind), 

juantus ? how much ? tantus, so much, quantus, as much, 

juot ? how many ? tot, so many. quot, as many. 

; . . 

* In neuter plural, aliquae or aliqua, quae or qua. 



4S 



COMPOUND RELATIVES. 






107. II. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. 
1. Pronominal adverbs ol place. 



ubi? where ? 


ibi, 


there, ubi, where. 


qua? where? which 


hie, hac, 


here, this way, qua, where, which way 


way f 








istic, istacj 


there, that way, 




illic, iliac, 


there, yonder way. 


unde ? whence ? 


inde, 


thence, unde, whence. 




hinc, 


hence. 




istinc, 


thence. 




illinc, 


thence, from yonder. 


quo ? whither ? 


eo, 


thither. quo, whither. 




hue, 


hither. 




istuc, 


thither. 




illuc, 


thither, yonder. 


2. Pronominal adverbs of time. 


quando ? when f 


turn, 


then, quando, 




tunc, 


at that time, quum. 




nunc, 


now. 


quoties ? how often f 


toties, 


so often. quoties, as often as. 


3. Pronominal adverbs of 


manner. 


quomodo ? qui ? how 


? ita, sic, 


so, thus, ut, uti, as. 


quam ? hoio much f 


tarn, 


so much, quam, as. 



108- Ill COMPOUNDS OF THE RELATIVE FORMS. 

1. The relative pronouns become indefinite by prefixing ali- : 

aliquantus, somewhat great ; aliquot, several, some ; alicubi, somewhere 
alicunde, from somewhere ; aliquando, at some time. 

2. The simple relatives become universal by doubling them 
selves, or by suffixing -cunque (cumque) : 

quantuscunque, however great ; qualiscunque, of whatever hind. ; quo 
quot, however many ; ubicunque, wheresoever ; quandocunque, lohenever 
quotiescunque, however often ; utut, in whatever way ; utcunque, how, 
ever ; quamquam, however, although. 

3. Many of the relatives are further compounded with -vis c 
-libet : 

quantuslibet, quantusvis, as great as you please ; ubivis, where you will\ 
quamvis, as you please, though. 



THE VERB. 49 



THE VERB. 



109. The Inflection given to the verbal stem is called Con- 
jugation, and expresses : 

1. Person and Number ; 

2. Voice — Active or Passive ; 

3. Tense — Present, Imperfect, Future, 

Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect ; 

4. Mood — Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative. 

110. These forms belong to the Finite Verb. Outside of the 
Finite Verb, and akin to the noun, are the verbal forms called 

Infinitive, Supine, Participle, Gerund. 

111. The Inflection of the Verb is effected by means of — 

1. Personal endings, 

2. Connecting vowels, 

3. Tense-signs. 

1. The personal endings are pronominal forms, which serve to 
I indicate not only person, but also number and voice. 

2. The connecting vowels are either euphonic or symbolic. 

3. The tense-signs occur only in the compound tenses (weak 
tenses). 

The compound or weak tenses are : 

The Imperfect, Active and Passive. The Perfect in vi (ui) and si. 
The Pluperfect Active. The Futures in -bo, -bor. 

The Future Perfect. The Perf. and Pluperf. Subj. 

So in ama-ba-m, I loved, b is the tense-sign, a the connecting vowel, m 
the personal ending (comp. me), 1st P. Singular Active. 

Remarks.— 1. The tense-signs are themselves auxiliary verbs, as: -r(am) for -s (am), 
from (e)s-(se) ; v(i), u(I) from fu(i) ; si from (e)s (se) ; -b(am) -b(o) from fu-(am), fu(o). 

2. No adequate uniform translation can be ^iven to all the moods and tenses. Espe- 
cially is this true of the subjunctive. See Syntax. 

Several parts of the verb are formed with the verb sum, / am. 

3 



50 THE VERB SUM. 

112. The Verb sum, I am (stem es-). 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 









Present. 




Sing.- 


-1. 


sum, 


I am, sim, 


I be, 




2. 


es, 


thou art, sis, 


thou be, 




3. 


est, 


he, she, it is, sit, 


he, she, it be. 


Plur.- 


-1. 


sumus, 


we are, simus, 


we be, 




2. 


estis, 


you are, sitis, 


you be, 




3. 


sunt, 


they are, sint, 
Imperfect. 


they be. 


SlNG.- 


-1. 


eram, 


1 was, essem, 


I were (for em), 




2. 


eras, 


thou wast, esses, 


thou wert (fores), 




3. 


erat, 


he was, esset, 


he were (foret). 


Plur.- 


-1. 


eramus, 


we were, essemus, 


we were, 




2. 


eratis, 


you were, essetis, 


you were, 




3. 


erant, 


they tvere, essent, 
Future. 


they were (forent). 


SlNG- 


-1. 


er5, 


I shall be, 






2. 


eris, 


thou wilt be, 






3. 


erit, 


he will be. 




Plur.- 


-1. 


erimus, 


we shall be, 






2. 


eritis, 


you will be, 






3. 


erunt, 


they will be. 

Perfect. 




Sing.- 


-1. 


fui, 


I haw been, I was, fuerim, 


I have, may have, been, 




2. 


fuisti, 


thou hast been, thou fuerls, 

wast, 


thou have, mayest have, 
been, 




3. 


fuit, 


he has been, he was, fuerit, 


he have, may have, been. 


Pltjr.- 


-1. 


fuimus, 


we have been, ice fuerimus, 
were, 


we have, may have, been, 




2. 


fuistis, 


you have been, you fueritis, 

were, 


you have, may have, been, 




3. 


fuerunt, 


they have been, they fuerint, 
were, 

Pluperfect. 


they have, may have, been. 


Sing.- 


-1. 


fueram, 


Iliad been, fuissem, 


I had, might have, been, 




2. 


fueras, 


thou hadst been, fuisses, 


thou hadst, mightst have, 
been, 




o 


fuerat, 


he had been, fuisset, 


he had, might have, been. 


Plur. 


-1. 


fueramuSj^^ had been, fuissemus 


, we had, might have, been, 




2. 


fueratis, 


you had been, fuissetis, 


you had, might have, been, 




3. 


fuerant, 


they had been, fuissent, 


they had, might have, been. 



COMPOUNDS OF SUM. 



51 



INDICATIVE. 
Future Perfect, 
Sing. — 1. fuer6 ; I sliall have been, 

2. fueris, thou wilt haw been, 

3. fuerit, he shall have been, 

Plur. — 1. fuerimus,w£ shall have been, 

2. fueritis, you will have been, 

3. fuerint, they will have been. 



Sing. 


IMPERATIVE. 


1. — 

2. es, 
3. 

Plur. 
1. — 


be thou, 


esto, 
esto, 


thou shalt be, 
he shall be. 


2. este, 
3. 


be ye, 


estate, you shall be, 
sunto, they shall be. 



INFINITIVE. 



Pres. esse, to be, 

Perf. fuisse, to have been, 

Fut. futurum (-am, -urn), esse 

(fore), to be about to be. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Fut. futurus, -a, -urn, about to be. 



113. 



Compounds of sum, / am. 



ab-sum, lam away, absent. Perf. 

abful, afui. 
ad-sum, I am present. Perf. affui. 
de-sum, I am wanting . 
in-sum, / am in. 
inter-sum, lam between. 



ob-sum, I am against, I hurt. 

Perf. obfui or offul. 
prae-sum, lam over, I superintend. 
pro-sum, I am for, I profit. 
sub-sum, I am under. No Perf. 
super-sum, I am, or remain, over. 



Remark.— Only absum and praesum form present participles : afosens, absent, and 
praesens, present. 

Prosum, I profit. 
114. In the forms of prosum, prod- is used before vowels. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present, pro-sum, prod-es, prod-est, pro-sim, 

pro-sumus, prod-estis, prd-sunt, 

Imperfect, prod-eram, prod-essem, 

Future, prod-ero, 

Perfect, pr5-fui, pro-fuerim, 

Pluperfect, pro-fueram, pr5-fuissem. 

Fut. Perf., pro-fuero, 

INFINITIVE. Pres. prod-esse j p ER r. pro fuisse. 



52 



THE VERB POSSUM. 



Possum, I am able, I can. 

115. Possum is compounded of pot (potis, pote) and sum; t 

becomes s before s. 







INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNC r 






Present 




SlNG.- 


-1. 

2, 
3. 


pos-sum, i" am able, can, 

pot-es, 

potest, 


pos-sim, 

pos-sis, 

pos-sit. 


Plur.- 


-1. 

2. 
3. 


pos-sumus, 

pot-estis, 

pos-sunt, 


pos-slmus, 

pos-sitis, 

pos-sint. 






Imperfect. 


SltfG.- 


-1. 


pot-eram, I was able, 
could, 


pos-sem, 




2. 

3. 


pot-eras, 
pot-erat, 


pos-ses, 
pos-set. 


Plur.- 


-1. 
2. 
3. 


pot-eramus, 
pot-eratis, 
pot-erant, • 

Future. 


pos-semus, 
pos-setis, 
p os-sent 


SlNG.- 


-1. 
2. 
3. 


pot-ero, I shall be able. 

pot-eris, 

pot-erit. 




Plur.- 


-1. 

2. 
3. 


pot-erimus, 

pot-eritis, 

pot-erunt. 





I be able. 



I were, might be, able. 



Perfect. 



Sing. — 1. pot-ui, / ham been able, 

2. pot uisti, 

3. pot-uit, 

Plur. — 1. pot-uimus, 

2. pot-uistis^ 

3. pot-uerunt, 



pot-uerim, I have, may have, beer\\ 

able. 
pot-uerfs, 
pot-uerit. 

pot-uerimuSj 

pot-ueritis, 

pot-uerint. 



SYSTEMS OF CONJUGATION. 



53 



INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pluperfect. 
Sing. — 1. pot-ueram, / had been pot-uissem, I had, might have, 

able, been able, 

2. pot-ueras, pot-uisses, 

3. pot-uerat, pot-uisset. 

Plur. — 1. pot-ueramus, pot-uissemus, 

2. pot-ueratis, pot-uissetis, 

3. pot-uerant, pot-uissent. 

Future Perfect. 
Sing.— 1. pot-uero, I shall have been able, 

2. pot-ueris, 

3. pot-uerit. 

Pluk. — 1. pot-uerxxnus, 

2. pot-ueritis, 

3. pot-uerint. 

INFINITIVE. Pres. Posse, to be able. Perf. Potuisse, to have been able. 

Systems of Conjugation. 

116. There are two Systems of Conjugation, distinguished 
by the stem-characteristic, viz., the Vowel Conjugation and the 
Consonant Conjugation. 

117. Vowel verbal stems end in a, e, I (First, Second, and 
Fourth Conjugations). 

Consonant verbal stems end in one of the consonants (Third 
Conjugation). 

Stems in u follow the Consonant Conjugation. 



118. 


The Stem-Forms. 






PRES. IND. 


PRES. INFIN. 


PERF. IND, 


SUPINE. 




I. am-5. 


ama-re, 


ama-vi, 


ama-tum, 


to love. 


II. dele-o. 


dele-re, 


dele-vi, 


dele -turn, 


to blot out. 


mone-o, 


mone-re, 


mon-ui, 


mon-i-tum, 


to remind. 


III. em-o, 


em-e-re, 


em-i, 


em-tum, 


to buy. 


statu-5j 


statu- e-re, 


statu-!, 


statu-tum, 


to settle. 


scrib-o, 


scrib-e-re, 


scrip-si, 


scrip-turn, 


to write. 


IV. audi-5, 


audi- re, 


audi-vi, 


audi-tum. 


to hear. 



54 FIRST CONJUGATION. 



119. First Conjugation. 

active. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
Am loving, do love, love. Be loving, may love. 

Sing. — 1. am-o, ame-m, 

2. ama-s, ame-s, 

3. ama-t, am^-t. 

Plur. — 1. ama-mus, ame-mus, 

2. ama-tis, am^-tis, 

3. ama-nt, am^-nt. 

Imperfect. 
Was loving, loved. Were loving, miglit love* 

Sing. — 1. ama-ba-m, ama-re-m, 

2. ama-ba-s, ama-re-s, 

3. ama-ba-t, ama-re-t. 

Plur. — 1. ama-ba-mus, ama-re-mus, 

2. ama-ba-tis, ama-re-tis, 

o. ama-ba-nt, ama-re-nt. 

Future. 
Shall be loving, shall love. 
Sing. — 1. ama-b-o, 

2. ama-bi-s, 

3. ama-bi-t. 

Plur. — 1. ama-bi-mus, 

2. ama-bi-tis, 

3. ama-bu-nt. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.— 1. , 

2. ama, love thou, ama-to, thou shalt love. 

3. ama-to, he shall love. 

Plur.— 1. , 

2. ama-te, love ye, ama-tote, ye shall love. 

3. ama-nto, they shall love. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Present. X. ama-n-s, G. ama-nt-is, loving. 
Future, ama-tur-us, -a, -um, being about to love. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



55 



120. First Conjugation. 

active. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have, may have, loved, 
ama-ve-ri-m, 



Have loved, did love. 
Sing.— 1. ama-vi, 

2. ama-vi-sti, 

3. ama-vi-t, 

Plur. — 1. ama-vi-mus, 

2. ama-vi- stis, 

3. ama-ve-runt, 



Had loved. 
Sing. — 1. ama-ve-ra-m, 

2. ama-ve-ra-s, 

3. ama-ve-ra-tj 

Plur, — 1. ama-ve-ra-mus, 

2. ama-ve-ra-tis, 

3. ama-ve-ra-nt, 

Shall have loved. 
Sing. — 1. ama-ve-r-o, 

2. ama-ve-ri-s, 

3. ama-ve-ri-t. 

Plur. — 1. ama-ve-ri-mus, 

2. ama-ve-ri-tis, 

3. ama-ve-ri-nt. 



ama-ve-n-s, 
ama-ve-ri-t. 

ama-ve-ri-mus, 

ama-ve-ri-tis, 

ama-ve-ri-nt. 

Pluperfect. 

Had, might have, loved. 
ama-vi-sse-m, 
ama-vi-sse-s, 
ama-vi-sse-t. 

ama-vi-sse-mus, 

ama-vi-sse-tis, 

ama-vi-sse-nt. 

Future Perfect. 



INFINITIVE. 

Pres. ama-re, to love. 

Perf. ama-vi-sse, to have loved. 

Fut. amatur-unij -am, -urn, esse, to be about to love. 



GERUND. 

N. [ama-re], loving. 

G. ama-nd-I, of loving. 

D. ama-nd-o, to loving. 

Ac. [ama-re], (ad) ama-nd-um, loving, to I 

Abl. ama-nd-o, by loving. 



SUPINE. 



1. ama-tum, to love. 

2. ama-tu, to love, in the loving. 



56 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



121. 



First Conjugation. 



passive. 

Present. 



Imperfect. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Be, may be, loved. 
ame-r, 
am^-ris, 
am^-tur. 
ame-mur, 
ame-mini, 
am^-ntur. 

Were, miglit be, loved. 
ama-re-r, 
ama-re-ris, 
ama-re-tur. 
ama-re-mur, 
ama-re mini, 
ama-re-ntur. 



Future. 



INDICATIVE. 

Am loved. 
Sing.— 1. amor, 

2. ama-ris, 

3. ama-tur, 
Plur. — 1. ama-mur, 

2. ama-mini, 

3. ama-ntur, 

Was loved. 
Sing. — 1. ama-ba-r, 

2. ama-ba-ris, 

3. ama-ba-tur, 
Plur. — 1. ama-ba-mur, 

2. ama-ba-mini, 

3. ama-ba-ntur. 

Shall be loved. 
Sing. — 1. ama-bo-r, 

2. ama-be-ris, 

3. ama-bi-tur. 
Plur. — 1. ama-bi-mur, 

2. ama-bi-mini, 

3. ama-bu-ntur. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.— 1. , 

2. ama-re, be thou loved, ama-tor, thou shalt be loved, 

3. ama-tor, he shall be loved. 
Plur.— 1. , 

2. ama-mini, be ye loved. 

3. ama-ntor, they shall be loved. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. ama-ri, to be loved. 

Perf. ama-t-um, -am, -urn, esse, to have been loved. 
Fut. ama-tum Iri, to be about to be loved. 

F. P. ama-t-um, -am, -urn, fore. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 57 



122. First Conjugation. 

passive. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have been loved. Have, may have, been loved. 

Sing. — 1. ama-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, ama-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m, 

2. es, s-I-s, 

3. es-t, s-i t. 

Plur. — 1. ama-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, ama-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus, 

2. es-tis, s-i-tis, 

3. s-u-nt, s-i-nt. 

Pluperfect. 

Had been loved. Had, might have, been loved. 

Sing. — 1. ama-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, ama-t-us, -a, -urn, es-se-m, 

2. er-a-s, es-se-s, 

3. er-a-t, es-se-t. 

Plur. — 1. ama-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, ama-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus, 

2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis, 

3. er-a-nt, es-se-nt. 

Future Perfect. 

Shall have been loved. 
Sing.— 1. ama-t-us, -a, -um, er-o, 

2. er-i-s, 

3. er-i-t 

Plur. — 1. ama-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus, 

2. er-i-tis, 

3. er-u-nt. 

PAETICIPLE. 

Perfect. ama-t-us, -a, -um, loved. 
Gerundive, ama-nd-us, -a, -um, (one) to be loved, 

3* 



58 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



123. Second Conjugation. 

active. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 



Destroy (blot out). 
Sing.— 1. dele-5, 


B 


e destroying, may destroy. 
dele-a-m, 


2. dele-s, 




dele-a-s, 


3. dele-t, 




dele-a-t. 


Plur.— 1. dele-mus, 




dele-a-mus, 


2. dele-tis, 




dele-a-tis, 


3. dele-nt, 




dele-a-nt. 




Imperfect. 


Was destroying. 
SiNG.— 1. dele-ba-m, 




Were destroying, might destroy. 
dele-re-m, 


2. dele-ba-s, 




dele-re-s, 


3. dele-ba-t, 




dele-re-t. 


Plur. — 1. dele-ba-mus 


. 


dele-re-mus, 


2. dele-ba-tis. 




dele-re-tis, 


3. dele-ba-nt, 




dele-re-nt. 




Future. 


Shall destroy. 
SiNG.— 1. dele-b-o, 






2. dele-bi-s, 






3. dele-bi-t. 






Plur.— 1. dele-bi-mus 


j 




2. dele-bi-tis, 






3. dele-bu-nt. 








IMPERATIVE, 


Slng.— 1. , 






2. dele, 
Plur.— 1. , 


destroy tlwu, 


dele-to, thou shalt destroy. 
dele-to, he shall destroy. 


2. dele-te, 


destroy ye, 


dele-tote, ye shall destroy. 
dele-nto, they shall destroy. 




PARTICIPLE. 



Present. N. dele-n-s j G. dele-nt-is, destroying. 
Future, dele-tur-us, -a, -urn, about to destroy. 






SECOND CONJUGATION". 



59 



124 



Second Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 



ACTIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have, may have, destroyed. 
dele-ve-ri-m, 
dele-ve-ri-s, 
dele-ve-ri-t. 

dele-ve-ri-mus, 

dele-ve-ri-tis 

dele-ve-ri-nt. 

Pluperfect. 

Had, might have, destroyed. 
dele-vi-sse-m, 
dele-vi-sse-s, 
dele-vi-sse-t. 

dele-vi-sse-mus, 



Have destroyed, destroyed. 
Sing. — 1. dele-vi, 

2. dele-vi-sti, 

3. dele-vi-t, 

Plub. — 1. dele-vi-mus, 

2. dele-vi-stis, 

3. dele-ve-runt, 

Had destroyed. 
Sing. — 1. dele-ve-ra-m, 

2. dele-ve-ra-s, 

3. dele-ve-ra-t, 

Pluk.— 1. dele-ve-ra-mus, 

2. dele-ve-ra tis, dele-vi-sse-tis, 

3. dele-ve-ra-nt, dele-vi-sse-nt. 

Future Perfect. 
Shall hate destroyed. 
Sing. — 1. dele-ve-r-o, 

2. dele-ve-ri-s, 

3. dele-ve-ri-t. 

Pluk. — 1. dele-ve-ri-mus, 

2. dele-ve-ri-tis, 

3. dele-ve-ri-nt. 

INFINITIVE. 
Present, dele-re, to destroy. 
Perfect, dele-vi-sse, to have destroyed. 
Future, dele-tur-um, -am, -una, esse, to be about to destroy. 



GERUND. 

N. [dele-re], destroying, to destroy. 

G. dele-nd-i, of destroying. 

D. dele-nd-o, to, for destroying. 

Ac. [dele-re] (ad) dele-nd-um, destroying, 

to destroy, 
Abl. dele-nd-o, by destroying, 



SUPINE. 



1. dele-tum, to destroy. 

2. dele-tu, to destroy, in 

destroying. 



the 



60 



SECOND CONJUGATION, 



125. 



Second Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 

Am destroyed. 
Sing— 1. dele-o-r, 

2. dele-ris, 

3. dele-tur, 

Pluk. — 1. dele-mur, 

2. dele-mini, 

3. dele-ntur, 



PASSIVE. 



Present. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Be, may he, destroyed. 
dele-a-r, 
dele-a-ris, 
dele-a-tur. 

dele-a-mur, 
dele-a-minJ 
dele-a-ntur. 



Was destroyed. 
Sing. — 1. dele-ba-r, 

2. dele-ba-ris, 

3. dele-ba-tur, 



Imperfect. 



Were destroyed. 
dele-re-r, 
dele-re-ris, 
dele-re-tur. 



Pl/CR. — 1. dele-ba-mur, 

2. dele-ba-mini, 

3. dele-ba-ntur, 



dele-re-mur, 
dele-re-mini, 
dele-re-ntur. 



Shall be destroyed. 
Sing. — 1. dele-bo-r, 

2. deie-be-ris, 

3. dele-bi-tur. 



Futitrk. 



Pluii- 



-1. dele-bi-mur, 

2. dele-bi-mini, 

3. dele-bu-ntur. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.— 1. , 

2. dele-re, be thou destroyed, dele-tor, thou shalt be destroyed 

3. dele-tor, he shall be destroyed. 



Plur.— 1. , 

2. dele-mini, be ye destroyed, 
3. 



dele-ntor, they shall be destroyed 



SEC^ D CON %UGATION. 61 



/. Second Conjugation. 

^ PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have been destroyed, was destroyed. Have, may have, been destroyed. 
Sing. — 1. dele-t-us, -a, -urn, sum, dele-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m, 



2. 
3. 


es, 
es-t, 






S-l-S, 

sit. 


Plur. — 1. dele-t-i, -ae, -a, 
2. 
3. 


s-u-mus, 

es-tis, 

s-u-nt, 


dele-t-I, -ae, 


-a, 


s-i-mus, 

s-I-tis, 

s-i-nt. 



Pluperfect. 

Had been destroyed. Had, might have, been destroyed. 

Sing.— 1. dele-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m, dele-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m, 

es-se-s, 
es-se-t. 

-ae, -a, es-se mus, 
esse-tis, 
es-se-nt. 





2. 
3, 


er-a-s, 
er-a-t, 


Pltjr.- 


-1. 
2. 
3, 


dele-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, del< 
er-a-tis, 
er-a-nt, 

Future Perfect. 


SlNG.- 


-1. 
2. 
3. 


Shall have been destroyed. 

dele-t-us, -a, -um, er-o, 
er-i-s, 
er-i-t. 


Pluk." 


-1. 
2. 
3. 


dele-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus, 
er-i-tis, 
er-u-nt. 

INFINITIVE. 



Pres. dele-ri, to be destroyed. 

Perf. dele-t-um, -am, -um, esse, to have been destroyed. 

Fut. dele-tum iri, to be about to be destroyed. 

F. P. dele-t-um, -am, -um, fore. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Perfect. dele-t-us, -a, -um, destroyed. 
Gerundive, dele-nd-us, -a, -um, [one] to be destroyed. 



62 



SECOND d 



^NJUGAT 



ON. 



127. 



Second Conjugation. 



Like delere, to destroy, are conjugated only,n§re, to spin, flere, 
to weep, and the compounds of -plere,^, and -olere (-olSscere), 
groiv ; but aboleo, I abolish, forms abolitum. 

All other verbs of the Second Conjugation retain the char- 
acteristic e in the forms of the Present Stem, and drop it in the 
rest of the verbal forms. In the Perfect, the ending vl becomes 
ul. In the Supine, the connecting vowel i is used. 

128. Five verbs of the Second Conjugation form their Su- 
pine without a connecting vowel, viz. : 



cense5, 


censere, 


censul, 


censum, 


to think. 


doceQ, 


docere, 


docul, 


doctum, 


to teach. 


misceo, 


miscere, 


miscul, 


mtatum (mistum), 


to mix. 


teneo, 


tenere, 


tenui, 


(ten turn), 


to hold. 


torreo, 


torrgre, 


torrul. 


tostum, 


to parch. 



Synopsis of mone-o, / remind. 
129. active. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Pres. mone-6, 
Impf. mone-banij 
Fut. mone-b-5j 
Perf. mon-ui, 
Plpf. mon-ue-ra-m, 
F. Pp. mon-ue-r-5. 



mone-am, 
mone rem. 



mon-ue-ri-m. 
mon u isse-m. 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Second Conjugation, 
active. 

IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. 



63 



mone, 
mone-to, 



Participle. Pres. mone-n-s. 
Gerund. mone-nd-L 

Supine. 1. mon-itum. 



Pres. mone -re. 

Pert, mon-ui-sse. 

Put. mon-itur-um, -am, urn, 

Fut. mon-itur-us, -a, -um. 
2. mon-itu. 



130. 



PASSIVE. 



INDICATIVE. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Pres. 


mone-o-r, 




mone a-r. 


Impp. 
Fut. 


mone-ba-r, 
mone-bo-r, 




mone.re-r. 


Perf. 


mon-it-us, -a, 


-um, s-u-m, 


mon-it-us, -a, -um, s-i-m. 


Plpp. 




er-a-m, 


es-se-m. 


P. Pp. 




er-o. 





IMPERATIVE. 

mone-re, 
mone-tor. 



INFINITIVE. 



Pres. mone-ri. 



Perf. mon-it-um, -am, -um, -es-se. 
Fut. mon-it-um Iri. 
F. Pp. mon-it-um, -am, -um, fore. 
Participle. Perfect. mon-it-us, -a, -um. 

Gerundive, mone-nd-us, -a, -um. 



64 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



131. 



Third Conjugation". 



INDICATIVE. 



Buy. 
Sing.— 1. em-6, 

2. em-i-s, 

3. em-i-t, 

Plur. — 1. em-i-mus, 

2. em-i-tis, 

3. em-u-nt, 



Was buying. 
Sing. — 1. em-e-ba-m, 

2. em-e-ba-s, 

3. em-e-ba-t, 

PLUR. — 1. em-e-ba-mus, 

2. em-e-ba-tis, 

3. em-e-ba-nt, 

Shall be buying, shall buy* 
Sing. — 1. em-a-m, 

2. em-e-s, 

3. em-e-t. 

Plur.— 1. em-e-mus, 

2. em-e-tis, 

3. em-e-nt. 



ACTIVE. 



Present. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Be buying, may buy. 
em-a-m, 
em-a-s, 
em-a-t. 

em-a-mus, 

em-a-tis, 

em-a-nt. 

Imperfect. 

Were buying, might buy* 
em-e-re-m, 
em-e-re-s, 
em-e-re-t. 

em-e-re-mus, 

em-e-re-tis, 

em-e-re-nt. 

Future. 



Sing.— 1. 


IMPERATIVE. 




2. 
3. 

Plur.— 1. 
2. 
3. 


em-e, buy thou, 


em-i-to, 
em-i-to, 


thou shalt buy. 
he shall buy. 


em-i-te, buy ye. 


em-i-tote, 
em-u-nto, 


ye shall buy. 
they shall buy. 



PARTICIPLE. 
Present. N. em-e-n-s ; G. em-e-nt-is, buying. 
Future, em-tur-us, -a, -um, about to buy 



THIED CONJUGATION'. 



65 



132. 



Third Conjugation. 





ACTIVE. 


INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE, 




PERFECT. 


Have bought, bought 
Sing. — 1. em-i, 

2. em-i-sti, 


Have, may have, bought 
em-e-ri-m, 
em-e-ri-s, 


3. em-i-t, 


em-e-ri-t. 


Plur. — 1. em-i-mus, 


em-e-n-mus, 


2. em-i-stis, 


em-e-ri-tis, 


3. em-e-ru-nt, 


em-e-ri-nt. 




Pluperfect. 


Had bought. 
Sing. — 1. em-e-ra-m, 


Had, might have, bought 
em-i-sse-m, 


2. em-e-ra-s, 


em-i-sse-s, 


3. em-e-ra-t. 


em~i-sse-t. 


Plur. — 1. em-e-ra-mus, 


em-i-sse-mus, 


2. em-e-ra-tis, 


em-i-sse-tis, 


3. em-e-ra-nt, 


em-i-sse-nt. 




Future Perfect. 


Shall have bought. 
Sing. — 1. em-e-r-6, 




2. em-e-ri-s, 




3. em-e-ri-t, 




Plur. — 1. em-e-ri-mus, 




2. em-e-ri-tis, 




3. em-e-ri-nt. 






INFINITIVE. 


Pres. em-e-re, 
Perf. em-i-sse, 
Fut. em- tor-urn, -am, -um, 


to buy. 

to have bought 
esse, to be about to buy. 


GERUND. 


SUPINE. 



N. [em-e-re], to buy, buying. 

G-. em- e-nd-i, of buying. 

D. em-e-nd-o, to, for buying. 

Ac. [em-e-re] (ad) em-e-ndum, to buy. 

Abl. em-e-nd-o, by buying. 



1. em-tum, to buy. 

2. em-tu, to buy, in the buying. 



66 



THIKD CONJUGATION. 



133. 



Third Conjugation. 









PASSIVE. 






INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCI 

Present. 


SlNG.- 


-1. 


Am bought. 
em-o-r, 


Be, may be, bought. 
em-a-r, 




2. 


em-e-ris, 


em-a-ris, 




3. 


em-i-tur, 


em-a-tur. 


Plur.- 


-1. 


em-i-mur, 


em-a-mur, 




2. 
3. 


em-i-mini, 
em-u-ntur, 


em-a-mini, 
em-a-ntur. 

Imperfect. 


SlNG.- 


-1. 


Was bought. 
em-e-ba-r, 


Were, might be, bought. 
em-e-re-r, 




2. 


em-e-ba-ris, 


em-e-re-ris, 




3. 


em-e-ba-tur, 


em-e-re-tur. 


Plur.- 


-1. 


em-e-ba-mur, 


em-e-re-mur, 




2. 


em-e-ba-mini, 


em-e-re-mini, 




3. 


em-e-ba-ntur, 


em-e-re-ntur. 


SlNG.- 


Shall be bought. 
— 1. em-a-r, 


Future. 




2. 


em-e-ris, 






3. 


em-e-tur. 





Plur. — 1. em-e-mur, 

2. em-e-mini, 

3. em-e-ntur. 






IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.— 1. 

2. em-ere, be thou bought, em-i-tor, thou shalt be bought 

3. em-i-tor, he shall be bought. 

Plur.— 1. 

2. em-i-mini, be ye bought. 

3. em-u-ntor, they shall be bought. I! 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 67 



134. Third Conjugation. 

passive. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have been, was bought. Have, may have, been bought 

Sing. — 1. em-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, em-t-us, -a, -um, s-i-m, 

2. es, s-i-s, 

3. es-t, s-i-t. 

d lur. — 1. em-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, em-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus, 

2. es-tis, s-i-tis, 

3. s-u-nt, s-i-nt. 

Pluperfect. 

Had been bought. Had, might have, been bought. 

Sing.— 1. em-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, em-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m, 

2. er-a-s, es-se-s, 

3. er-a-t, es-se-t. 

?lur.~— 1. em-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, em-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus, 

2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis, 

3. er-a-nt, es-se-nt. 

Future Perfect. 

Shall have been bought. 
Sing. — 1. em-t-us, -a, -um, er-o, 

2. er-i-s, 

3. er-i-t. 

Plur. — 1. em-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus, 

2. er-i-tis, 

3. er-u-nt. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pees, em-i, to be bought 

Perf. em-t-um, -am, -um, esse, to have been bought 
Fut. em-tum Iri, to be about to be bought 

p. f. em-t-um, -am, -um, fore. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect. em-t-us, -a, -um, bought. 
Gerundive, em-e-nd-us, -a, -um, to be bought 



68 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



135. 



Fourth Conjugation. 



The stems in i follow in several forms the Third Conjugation, 



and take the same connecting vowels. 



INDICATIVE. 

Hear. 
Sing. — 1. audio, 

2. audl-s, 

3. audi-t, 

Plur. — 1. audi-mus, 

2. audi-tis, 

3. audi-u-nt, 

Was hearing. 
Sing. — 1. audi-S-ba-m, 

2. audi-S-ba-s, 

3. audi-S-ba-t, 

Plur. — 1. audi-S-ba-mus, 

2. audi-e-ba-tis, 

3. audi-5-ba-nt, 



ACTIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Be hearing \ may hear. 
audi-a-m, 
audi-a-s, 
audi-a-t. 

audi-a-mus, 

audi-a-tis, 

audi-a-nt. 

Impeefect. 

Were hearing, might hear. 

audi-re-m, 

audi-re-s, 

audi-re-t. 

audi-re-mus, 

audi-re-tis, 

audi-re-nt. 

Future. 







Shall hear. 




Sing.- 


-1. 


audi-a-m, 






2. 


audi-C-s, 






3. 


audi-e-t. 




Plur.- 


-1. 


audi-g-mus, 






2. 


audi-g-tis, 






3. 


audi-e-nt. 

IMPERATIVE. 




Sing.- 


-1. 


y 






2. 


audi, hear tfiou, audi-to, 


thou shalt hea/r. 




3. 

-1. 
2. 


audi-to, 


he shall hear. 


Plur.- 


audi-te, hear ye, audi-tote, 


ye shall hear. 




3. 


audi-u-nto, 


they shall hear. 



PARTICIPLE. 
Present. N. audi-e-n-s, G. audi-e-nt-is, hearing. 
Future, audi-tur-us, -a, -um, about to hear. 






FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



69 



136. 



Fourth Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 



Have heard, heard 
Sing. — 1. audl-vi, 

2. audl-vi-sti, 

3. audi-vi-t, 

?lur. — 1. audi-vi-mus, 

2. audi-vi-stis, 

3. audl-ve-runt. 



Had heard. 
Sing. — 1. audi-ve-ra-m, 

2. audi-ve ra-s, 

3. audl-ve-ra-t, 
Plur. — 1. audi-ve-ra-mus, 

2. audi-ve-ra-tis, 

3, audi-ve-ra-nt. 



ACTIVE. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Perfect. 

Have, may have, heard. 
audi-ve-ri-m, 
audi-ve-ri-s, 
audl-ve-ri-t. 

audi-ve-ri-mus, 

audi-ve-ri-tis, 

audi-ve-rint. 

Pluperfect. 

Had, might have, heard. 
audi-vi-sse-m, 
audi-vi-sse-s, 
audi-vi-sse-t, 
audi-vi-sse-mus, 
audi-vi-sse-tis, 
audi-vi-sse-nt. 



Future Perfect. 
Shall have heard. 
Sing. — 1. audI-ve-r-5, 

2. audi-ve-rt-s, 

3. audi-ve-ri-t, 

Plur. — 1. audi-ve-ri-mus, 

2. audi-ve-ri-tis, 

3. audi-ve-ri-nt. 

INFINITIVE. 
Present, audi-re, to hear. 
Perfect, audi-vi-sse, to have heard. 
Future, audi-tur-um, -am, -urn, esse, to be about to Tiear. 



N. 
G. 
D. 

Ac. 

Abl. 



GERUND. 

[audi-re], hearing, to hear. 

audi-e-nd-i, of hearing. 

audi-e-nd-o, to, for hearing. 
[audi-re] (ad) audi-e-nd-um, hear- 
ing, to hear. 1. 

audi-e-nd-o, by hearing. 2. 



SUPINE. 



audi-tum, to hear. 

audl-tu, to Jiear, in the Jiearing, 



70 



FOURTH CONJUGATION, 



137. 



Fourth Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 



SlNG.- 



Am heard, 
-1. audi-o-r, 

2. audi-ris, 

3. audi-tur, 



Plur. — 1. audi-mur, 

2. audi-mini, 

3. audi-u-ntur. 



PASSIVE. 



Present. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Be, may be, heard. 
audi-a-r, 
audi-a-ris, 
audi-S-tur, 

audi-a-mur, 
audi-a-mini, 
audi-a-ntur. 



Imperfect. 



Was heard. 
Sing. — 1. audip.-ba-r, 

2. audi-£-ba-ris, 

3. audi-8-ba-tur, 

Plur. — 1. audi-S-ba-mur, 

2. audi-g-ba-mini, 

3. audi-B-ba-ntur. 



Were, might be, heard. 
audl-re-r, 
audi-re-ris, 
audi-re-tur, 

audi-re-mur, 
audl-re-mini, 
audi-re-ntur. 



Future. 



Shall be heard. 
Sing. — 1. audi-a-r, 

2. audi-S-ris, 

3. audi-3-tur, 

Plur. — 1. audi-e-mur, 

2. audi-5-mini, 

3. audi-e-ntur. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.— 1. , 

2. audi-re, be thou heard, audl-tor, thou shalt be heard, 

3. audl-tor, he shall be heard. 



Plur.— 1. , 

2. audi-mini, be ye heard. 
3. 



audi-u-ntor, they shall be heard. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 71 



138. Fourth Conjugation. 

passive. 
USTDICATIYE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have been heard, was heard. Have, may have, been heard, 

3iNG. — 1. audi-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, audi-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m, 

2. es, s-I-s, 

3. est, s-i-t, 

'lur. — 1. audi-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, audl-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus, 

2. es-tis, s-I-tis, 

3. s-u-nt. s-i-nt. 

Pluperfect. 

Had been heard. Had, might have, been heard. 

Simg. — I. audi-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, audi-tu-s, -a, -urn, es-se-m, 

2. er-as, es-se-s, 

3. er-a-t, es-se-t, 

?lur. — 1. audi-t-1, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, audi-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus, 

2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis, 

3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt. 



Future Perfect. 

Shall have been heard. 
Sing. — 1. audi-t-us, -a, -um, er-5, 

2. er-i-s, 

3. er-i-t, 

Pltjr. — 1. audi-t-I, -ae, -a, er-imus, 

2. er-i-tis, 

3. er-u-nt. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present, audi-ri, to be heard. 

Perfect, audl-t-um, -am, um, esse, to have been heard. 

Future, audi-tum iri, to be about to be heard, 

F. P. audi-tum, -am, -um, fore. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect. audi-t-us, -a, -um, heard. 

Gerundive, audi-e-nd-us, -a, -um, [one] to be heard. 



72 



APPENDIX TO THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



Appendix to the Third Conjugation. 

139. Several verbs of the Third Conjugation in the Present- 
stem add i to the stem. This i is dropped when it would come 
before e or i, except before et ; as, cap-it, cap-eret, but capi-et. 

active. 





INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE 








Present. 






Take. 


Be taking. 


SlNG.- 


-1. 


capi-6, 


capi-a-m, 




2. 


cap-i-s, 


capi-a-s, 




3. 


cap-i-t, 


capi-a-t, 


Plttr. 


-1. 


cap-imus, 


capi-a-mus, 




2. 


cap-i-tis, 


capi-a-tis, 




3. 


capi-u-nt. 


capi-a-nt. 

Imperfect. 






Was talcing. 


Were taking. 


SlNG.- 


-1. 


capi-e-ba-m, 


cap-e-re-m, 




2. 


capi-e-ba-s, 


cap-e-re-s, 




3. 


capi-e-ba-t, 


cap-e-re-t, 


Plur. 


-1. 


capi-e-ba-mus, 


cap-ere-mus, 




2. 


capi-e-ba-tis, 


cap-e-re-tis, 




3. 


capi-e-ba-nt. 

Shall take. 


cap-e-re-nt. 

Future. 


Sing. 


-1. 


capi-a-m, 






2. 


capi-e s, 






3. 


capi-e-t, 




Plur.- 


-1. 


capi-e-mus, 






2. 


capi-e-tis, 






3. 


capi-e-nt. 






IMPERATIVE. 


INFINITIVE. 


SlNG. 


-2. 


cap-e, take thou, 


Pres. cap-e-re, 






cap-i-t5, 


to take. 




3. 


cap-i-to, 


PAETICIPLE. 


Plur. 


-2. 


cap-i-te, take ye, 


Pres. capi-e-n-s, 






cap-i-tote. 


taking. 




3. 


capi-u-nto. 


GERUND. 
G. capi-e-nd-I, 

of taking. 



APPENDIX TO THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



73 



140. 



INDICATIVE. 



Am taken. 
Sing. — 1. capi-o-r, 

2. cap-e-ris, 

3. cap-i-tur, 

Plur. — 1. cap-i-mur, 

2. cap-i-mini, 

3. capi-u-ntur. 



PASSIVE. 



Present. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Be, may be, taken. 
capi-a-r, 
capi-a-ris, 
capi-a-tur, 

capi-a-mur, 
capi-a-mini, 
capi-a-ntur. 



Imperfect. 



Was taken. 
SlNG. — 1. capi-e-ba-r, 

2. capi-e-ba-ris, 

3. capi-e-ba-tur, 

Plur.— 1. capi-e-ba-mur, 

2. capie-ba-mini, 

3. capi-e-ba-ntur. 



Were, might be, taken. 
cap-e-re-r, 
cap-e-re-ris, 
cap-e-re-tur, 

cap-e-re-mur, 
cap-e-re-mini, 
cap-e-re-ntur. 



Future, 



Shall be taken. 
Sing. — 1. capi-a-r 5 

2. capi-e-ris, 

3. capi-e-tur, 

Plur. — 1. capi-e-mur, 

2. capi-e-mini, 

3. capi-e-ntur. 



Pres. 



BIPERATIVE. 

Sing. — 2. cap-e-re, 

be thou taken, 
cap-i-tor, 
thou shalt be taken, 
3. cap-i-tor, 

he shall be taken, 

Plur. — 2. cap-i-mini, 

be ye taken, ye shall be taken, 
3. capi-u-ntor, 

they shall be taken. 

4 



INFINITIVE. 

cap-i, 

to be taken. 



GERUNDIVE, 
capi-e-nd-us, -a, -um, 

[one] to be taken. 



74 



DEPONENT OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



141. Deponent of the First Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 

Exhort 
Sing. — 1. hort-tf-r, 

2. horta-ris, 

3. horta-tur, 

Pluk. — 1. horta-mur, 

2. horta-mini, 

3. horta-ntur. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



Be exhorting, may exhort. 
horte r, 
hort^-ris, 
horte-tur, 

horte-mur, 
horte-mini, 
horte-ntur. 



Imperfect. 



Was exhorting. 

Sing. — 1. horta-ba-r, 

2- horta-ba-ris, 

8. horta-ba-tur, 

Plur. — 1. horta-ba-mur, 

2. horta-ba-mini, 

3. horta-ba-ntur. 



Were exhorting, might exhort. 
horta-re-r, 
horta-re-ris, 
horta-re-tur, 

horta-re-mur, 
horta-re-mini, 
horta-re-ntur. 



Future. 



Shall exhort. 
Sing. — 1. horta-bo-r, 

2. horta-be-ris, 

3. horta-bi tur, 

Plur. — 1. horta-bi-mur, 

2. horta-bi-mini, 

3. horta-bu-ntur. 



IMPERATIVE. 



Sing.— 2. horta-re, 



exhort thou, 
horta-tor, 

thou shalt exhort, 
horta-tor, 

he shall exhort, 



ACTIVE FORMS. 

PART. Pres. horta-n-s, 

exhorting, 
Fut. horta-tur-us, -a, -urn, 
about to exhort. 
INF. Fut. horta-tur-um, -am, -um, esse, 

to be about to exhort. 



PluPw.- 



-2. horta-mini, 

exhort ye, ye shall exhort, 



PASSIVE IN MEANING. 



3. horta-ntor, 

they shall exhort. 



Gerundtve, horta-nd-us, -a, -um, 

[one] to be exhorted. 



DEPONENT OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 75 



142. Deponent of the First Conjugation. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have exhorted, exhorted. Rave, may have, exhorted. 

Sing. — 1. horta-t-us, -a, -tun, s-u-m, horta-t-us, -a, -um, s-i-m, 

2. es, s-I-s, 

3. es-t, si-t, 

Plur. — 1. horta-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, horta-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus, 

2. es-tis, s-I-tis, 

3. s-u-nt. s-i-nt. 

Pluperfect. 

Had exhorted. Had, might have, exhorted. 

SrNG. — 1. horta-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, horta-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m, 

2. er-a-s, es-se-s, 

3. er-a-t, es-se-t, 

Plur. — 1. horta-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, horta-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus, 

2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis, 

3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt. 

Future Perfect. 

Shall have exhorted. 
Sing. — 1. horta-t-us, -a,.-um, er-o, 

2. er-i-s, 

3. er-i-t, 

Plur. — 1, horta-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus, 

2. er-i-tis, 

3. er-u-nt. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Pees, horta-ri, Perfect, hortatus, -a, -um, 

to exhort having exhorted. 

Perf. horta-t-um, -am, -um, esse, 
to have exhorted. 

F. P. horta-t-um, -am, -um, fore. 

Supine. 1. horta-tum, 2. horta-tu, 

to exJtort, for exhorting. to exhort, in the exhoi*ting 

Gerund, [horta-ri], G. horta-nd-i, 

to exhort, exhorting. of exhorting. 



76 



DEPONENT OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



143. Deponent of the Second Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Shall fear. 
Sing. — 1. vere-bo-r, 

2. vere-be-ris, 

3. vere-bi-tur, 

Plur. — 1. vere-bi-mur, 

2. vere-bi-mini, 

3. vere-bu-ntur. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.— 2. vere" re, 

fear thou, 
vere-tor, 

thou shalt fear, 



Present. 





Fear. 


Be fearing, may fear. 


SlNG.- 


— 1. vere-o-r, 


vere-a-r, 




2. vere-ris, 


vere-a-ris, 




3. vere-tur, 


vere-a-tur, 


Plur.- 


— 1. vere-mur, 


vere-a-mur, 




2. vere-mini, 


vere-a-mini, 




3. vere-ntur. 


vere-a-ntur. 
Imperfect. 




Was fearing. 


Were fearing, might fear. 


SlNG.- 


— 1. vere-ba-r, 


vere-re-r, 




2. vere-ba-ris, 


vere-re-ris, 




3. vere-ba-tur, 


vere-re-tur, 


Plur.- 


— 1. vere-ba-mur, 


vere-re-mur, 




2. vere-ba-mini, 


vere-re-mini, 




3. vere-ba-ntur. 


vere-re-ntur. 
Future. 



3. vere-tor, 



ACTIVE FORMS. 

PART. Pres. verens, 

fearing^ 
Fut. ver-i-tur-us, -a, urn, 

about to fear. 
INF. Fut. ver-i-tur-um, -am, -um, esse 

to be about to fear. 



Plur. 



he shall fear, 

-2. vere-mini, 

fear ye, ye shall fear, PASSIVE IN MEANING. 

3. vere-ntor, Gerundive, vere-nd-us, -a^ -um, 

they shall fear. [one] to be feared. 



ic 



DEPONENT OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 77 



144. Deponent of the Second Conjugation. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have feared, feared. Have, may have, feared. 

Sing. — 1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, s-u-m, ver-i-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m, 

2. es, s-I-s, 

3. es-t, s-i-t, 

Plur. — 1. ver-i-t-I, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus, 

2. es-tis, s-i-tis, 

3. s-u-nt. s-i-nt. 

Pluperfect. 

Had feared. Had, might have, feared. 

Sing. — 1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m, 

2. er^a-s, es-se-s, 

3. er-a-t, es-se-t, 

Plur. — 1. ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus, 

2. er-a-tis, esse-tis, 

3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt. 

Future Perfect. 

Shall have feared. 
Sing. — 1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, er-5, 

2. er-i-s, 

3. er-i-t, 

Plur. — 1. ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus, 

2. er-i-tis, 

3. er-u-nt. 

INFINITIVE. PAETICIPLE. 

Pres, vere-ri, Perfect, ver-i-tus, -a, um. 

to fear. 
Perf. ver-i-tum, -am, -um, esse, 

to have feared. 
F. P. ver-i-tum fore. 

Supine. 1. ver-i-tum, 2. ver-i-tu, 

to fear, for fearing. to fear, in fearing. 

Gerund, [vere-ri], G. vere-nd-i, 
to fear, fearing. of fearing. 



78 



DEPONENT OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, 



145. Deponent of the Third Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 



Speak. 
Sing. — 1. loqu-o-r, 

2. loqu-e-ris, 

3. loqu-i-tur, 

Plur. — 1. loqu-i-mur, 

2. loqu-i-mini, 

3. loqu-u-ntur, 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



Be speaking, may speak. 
loqu-a-r, 
loqu-a-ris, 
loqu-a-tur. 

loqu-a-mur, 
loqu-a mini, 
loqu-a-ntur. 



Imperfect. 



Was speaking. 
Sing. — 1. loqu-e-ba-r, 

2. loqu-e-ba-ris, 

3. loqu-e-ba-tur, 



Plur.— 1. 
2. 
3. 



loqu-e-ba-mur, 
loqu-e-ba-mini, 
loqu-e-ba-ntur, 



Shall speak. 
Sing.— 1. loqu-a-r, 

2. loqu-e-ris, 

3. loqu-e-tur. 

Plur. — 1. loqu-e-mur, 

2. loqu-e-mini, 

3. loqu-e-ntur. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sing. — 2. loqu-e-re, 

speak thou, 
loqu-i-tor, 

thou shalt speak, 
3. loqu-i-tor, 

he shall speak. 

Plur. — 2. loqu-i-mini, 

speak ye. 
3. loqu-u-ntor, 

they shall speak. 



Were speaking^ might speak. 
loqu-e-re-r, 
loqu-e-re-ris, 
loqu-e-re-tur, 

loqu-e-re-mur, 
loqu-e-re-mini, 
loqu-e-re-ntur. 



Future. 



ACTIVE FORMS. 



PART. Pres. loqu-e-n-s, 



Fut. 



INF. fut. 



speaking. 
locti-tur-us, -a, -um, 

about to speak. 
locu-tur-um, -am, -um, i 

to be about to speak. 



PASSIVE IN MEANING. 
Gerundive, loqu-e-ndus, -a, -um, 

to be spoken. 



DEPONENT OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

146. Deponent oe the Thied Conjugation. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have spoken^ spoke. Have, may have, spoken. 

Sing. — 1. locu-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, locu-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m, 

2. es, si s, 

3. est, s-i-t. 

Plur. — 1. locti-t-1, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, locu-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus, 



79 



2. 

3. 



es-tis, 
s-u-nt, 



s-i-tis, 
s-i-nt. 



Pluperfect. 



Had spoken. Had, might have, spoken. 

Sing. — 1. locu-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, locu-t-us, -a, -urn, es-se-m, 

2. er-a-s, es-se-3, 

3, er-a-t, es-se-t. 

Plur. — 1. locu-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, locu-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus, 



er-a-tis, 
er-a-nt. 

Future Perfect. 



es-se-tis, 
es-se-nt. 



Shall have spoken. 
Sing. — 1. locu-t-us, -a, -um, er-o, 



2. er-i-s, 






3. er-i-t. 






Plur, — 1. locu-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mas, 




2. er-i-tis, 






3. er-u-nt. 






INFINITIVE. 




PARTICIPLE. 


Pres. loqu-i, Perf. 


locu-tus, -a, -um, 


to speak. 




having spoken. 


Perf. locu-t-um, -am, -um, esse, 






to have spoken. 






F. Pf. locii-t-um, -am. -um, fore. 






Supine. 1. locu-tum, 


2. 


locd-tu, 


to speak, for speaking. 




to speak, in speaking. 


Gerund, [loqu-i], 


&. 


loqu-e-nd-i, 


to speak, speaking. 




of speaking. 



30 



DEPONENT OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



147. Deponent of the Fourth Conjugation. 



Sing.- 



INDICAT1VE. 

Lie. 
-1. menti-o-r, 

2. menti ris, 

3. mentl-tur, 



Plur.— 1. menti-mur, 

2. menti-mini, 

3. menti-u-ntur, 



Was lying. 
Sing. — 1. menti-g-ba-r, 

2. menti-S-ba-ris, 

3. menti-5-ba-tur. 

Plur. — 1. menti-§-ba-mur, 

2. menti-5-ba-mini, 

3. menti-5-ba-ntur. 



Shall lie. 
Sing. — 1. menti-a-r, 

2. menti-e-ris, 

3. menti-e-tur. 

Plur. — 1. menti-e-mur, 

2. menti-e-mini, 

3. menti-e-ntur. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



Be lying, may lie. 
menti-a-r, 
menti-a-ris, 
menti-a-tur, 

menti-a-mur, 
menti-a-mini, 
menti-a-ntur. 



Imperfect. 



Were lying, might < 
menti-re-r, 
menti-re-ris, 
menti-re-tur, 

menti-re-mur, 
menti-re-mini, 
menti-re-ntur. 



Future. 



IMPERATIVE. 



ACTIVE FOEMS. 



Sing. — 2. menti-re, 

lie thou, 
menti-tor, 
thou shall lie, 
3. menti-tor, 

he shall lie. 

Plur. — 2. menti-mini, 

lie ye, 
3. menti-u-ntor, 
they shall lie. 



PART. Pres. menti-e-n-s, 

lying. 
Perf. 



-urn. 



about to lie. 
INF. Fut. menti-tur-um, -am, -urn, esse, 
to be about to lie. 



PASSIVE IN MEANING. 
Gerundive, menti-e-nd-us, -a, -urn. 



DEPONENT OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 81 



148. Deponent of the Fourth Conjugation. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perfect. 

Have Med, lied. Have, may have, lied. 

Sing. — 1. menti-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, menti-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m, 





2. 


es, 






S-l-S, 




3. 


es-t, 






s-i-t. 


Plur.- 


— 1. menti-t-i, -ae, -a, 


s-u-mus, 


menti-t-i, 


-ae, -a, 


s-i-mus 




2. 


es-tis, 






s-i-tis, 




3. 


s-u-nt, 






s-i-nt. 



es-se 


-s, 


es-se- 


■t. 


es-se-mus, 


es-se 


-tis, 


es-se 


-nt. 



Pluperfect. 

Had lied. Had, might have, lied. 

Sing. — 1. menti-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m, menti-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m, 

2. er-a-s, 

3. er-a-t, 

Plur.— 1. menti-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, menti-t-i, -ae, -a, 

2. er-a-tis, 

3. er-a-nt, 

Future Perfect. 

Shall have lied. 
Sing. — 1. menti-t-us, -a, -um, er-5, 

2. er-i-s, 

3. er-i-t. 

Plur. — 1. menti-t-I, -ae, -a, er-i-mus, 

2. er-i-tis, 

3. er-u-nt. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Pees, menti-ri, Perfect, menti-t-us, -a, -um, 

to lie. having lied. 

Perf. mentl-t-um, -am, -um, esse, 

to have lied. 
F. P. menti-t-um, -am, -um, fore. 
Supine. 1. menti-tum, 2. menti-tu, 

to lie, for lying, to lie, in lying. 

Gerund. [menti-ri], G. menti-e-nd-i, 

to lie, lying. of lying, 

4* 



82 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 



149. Periphrastic Conjugation. 

active. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. amatur-us, -a, -um, sum, amatur-us, -a, -urn, sim,. 

Am about to love. Be about to love. 

Imperf. amaturus eram, amaturus essem, 

Was about to love. Were about to love. 

Fut. amaturus ero, Shall be about to love. 

Perf. amaturus fui, amaturus fuerim, 

Have been, was, about to love. Have, may have, been about to 

love. 

i»luperf. amaturus fueram, amaturus fuissem, 

Had been about to love. Had, might have, been about 

to love. 

Fut. Perf. amaturus fuero. 

INFINITIVE. Present, amatur-um, -am, -um, esse, to be about to love. 
Perfect, amatur-um fuisse, to have been about to love. 

150. PASSIVE. 

Pres. amand-us, -a, -um, sum, amand-us, -a, -um, sim, 

Have to be loved. Have to be loved. 

Imperf. amandus eram, amandus essem, forem, 

Had to be loved. Had to be loved. 

Fut. amandus ero, Shall have to be loved. 

Perf. amandus fui, amandus fuerim, 

Have had to be loved. Have had to be loved. 

Pluperf. amandus fueram, amandus fuissem, 

Had had to be loved. Should have had to be loved. 

INFINITIVE. Present, amand-um, -am, -um, esse, to have to be loved. 
Perfect, amand-um fuisse, to have had to be loved. 



ABBREVIATIONS IN CERTAIN FORMS OF THE VERB. 83 

151. Abbreviations occurring in certain Forms of 

the Verb. 

1. The Perfects in -avi 5 -evi, -Ivi, drop the V before S or R, and con- 
tract the vowels throughout, except those in -Ivi, which admit the con- 
traction only before S. 

Perfect. 

Seng.— 1. 

2. amavisti, amasti. delevisti, delesti. audivisti, audlstl. 

Flue.— 1. 

2. amavistis, amastis. delevistis, delestis. audivistis, audistis. 

3. amaveruiit, amarunt deleverunt, delerunt audlverunt, audierunt. 
Sttbj. amaverim, amarim. deleverim, delerim. audlverim, audierim. 

Pluperfect. 
Ind. amaveram, amaram. deleveram, deleram. audlveram, audieram. 
Sub j. amavissem, amassem, delevissem, delessem. audlvissem, audlssem. 

Future Perfect. 
amavero, amaro. delevero, delero. audlvero, audiero. 

Infinitive Perfect. 
amavisse, amasse. delevisse, delesse. audivisse, audisse. 

In like manner, novi, I know, and movi, I have moved, are, in their com- 
pounds especially, contracted : 

Sing.— 2. nosti. Plur.— 2. nostis, 3. norunt Subj. norim. 

Pluperfect, noram. Subj. nossem. Inf. nosse. But the Future is novero, un- 
contracted. 

Remark. — In petere, to fall upon, desinere, to give over, and in the compounds of Ire, 
to go, the V of the Perfect is dropped in 1 and 3 Pers. Sing., and in 1 Pers. PI., but no 
contraction ensues, as: 

petlvi, petii ; petlvit, petiit So desivi, desil ; desivit, desiit, etc. 
And redil, rediit, from redire, to go back. 

2. In 3 PI. Perf. Act. instead of the ending -erunt, -ere is often found, 
but never iu the contracted Perfects mentioned above : amavere, they have 
loved; delevere, they have destroyed ; emere, they have bought ; audlvere, 
they have heard. But amare, for amarunt, is not admissible. 

3. Instead of -ris in 2 Sing. Pass, we find often -re : 

amabare, thou wast loved ; amar ere, thou mightest be loved ; amabere, thou wilt be loved. 
This is rare, however, in Present Indicative. 

4. The Imperatives of dicer e, to say, ducere, to lead, facer e, to make, 
and ferre, to bear, are die, due, fac, fer. These shortened forms occur in 
their respective compounds, except in those compounds of facio, which 

\ change a into i, as : perfice, achieve thou. (188 R) 

5. The Gerund and Gerundive of the 3d and 4th Conjugations, instead 
of -endi, -endus, may, especially after i, end in -undi and -undus, as : 

faciundus, to be done : gerundus, to be carried, 



84 THE STEM. 

152. THE STEM. 

L In the Present. 

The stem of many verbs appears in the Present, not in the 
pure, but in a strengthened form. 

Hence verbs are classified according to the relation of the 
Present Stem to the Verb Stem. 

I. Stem class : To this class belong those verbs whose present 
stem is the same as the verb stem. 

Such are the verbs of the vowel conjugations ; and in the Third Conju- 
gation such verbs as leg-o, I read, ed-o, I eat, em-o, I buy. 

II. The Protracted or Intensified class: In this class the 
vowel of the Verb Stem is lengthened in the Present Stem: 

duc-o, Head, stem due-; dlc-o, I say, stem die. 

Remark. — This change arises from a diphthongal strengthening of the 
stem : douc-o, deic-o ; but the class is treated as a stem-class in formation. 

III. The Nasal class : In this class the stem is strengthened 
byn. 

A. In vowel-stems : si-, sino, I let ; li-, lino, 1 besmear. 

B. After the characteristic r or m : cer-, cerno, I sift, separate ; tern-, 
temno, I scorn. 

C. Before the characteristic mute : vie-, vinco, / conquer ; frag-, frango, 
I break ; fud-, fundo, I pour. 

Before a P-mute N becomes M: rup-, rumpo, I rend ; cub-, cumbo, 
1 lie down. 

IV. The T class : flee-, flecto, i" lend. 

V. The Inchoative class : The stem strengthened by sc or isc: 
sc after vowel stems, isc after consonant stems. 

1. ira-, irascor, ere-, cre-sco, dormi-, obdormi-sco, 

I am in a rage. I grow \ I fall asleep. 

2. ap-, ap-iscor, fac-, profic-iscor, nac-, nanc-iscor, 

I reach. I set out. I get. 

VI. Redujjlicated class : Eeduplication in the Present stem : 

gen-, gi-gno, I beget, (for gi-gen-o) ; sta-, si-sto, si-st-ere, to set, stand 
Compare stare, to stand. 

VII. V-class : U suffixed to the stem : 

ting-, tingu-o, I son fa 



SUPINE. - 85 

VIII. 1- class : I suffixed to the stem : 

cap-, capi-o, I take. 

IX. Geminated class : 

The Liquids 1 and r may be doubled : pel-, pello, I drive ; cur-, 
curro, I run. 

So t is doubled in mit-, mitto, / send. 

Remark.— This small class is probably a subdivision of the 8th class (I-class) ; pello, 
for peljo, pelio; curro, for curjo, curio. 

X. Change of Conjugation : 

Many consonant-stems assume in the Present the character- 
istic of one of the three vowel-conjugations : 

vid , vide-o, I see, vi de-re. ven-, veni-o, I come, veni-re* 

153. II. In the Perfect. 

The Perfect is formed from the pure stem. 
Exceptions : see change of conjugation. (156, 176). 

1. The vowel-stems take -vi: ama-vi, / have loved; dele-vi, 
I have destroyed; audl-vl, I have heard. 

However, most verbs of the 2d Conjugation drop the vowel-character- 
istic, and change -vl into -ui. (See 128.) 

2. Consonant-stems with short stem-syllable take I in the" 
Perfect, before which the stem-syllable becomes long, and a is 
changed into e. 

lego, I read, vid-eo, I see, fod-io, I dig, fug-io, I flee, ag-o, I do, 
leg-L vid-L fod-L fug-I. egi. 

3. Consonant-stems with long stem-syllables take si in the 
Perfect : 

rep-o, I creep, rep-si. scrlbo, I write, scrip-si dic-o, I say, dixi = dic-si. 
aug-eo, I increase, auxi — aug-si. rad-o, I scrape, ra-sl = rad-si. 

Even when the stem-syllable is long by position only: 

carp-o, I pluck, carp-si. ping-o, I paint, pinxl = ping-si. 

Exceptions. — Exceptions are stems in -nd, which take I in the Perfect: 
defend-o, I strike {ward) off, defend-I ; perhaps because the stems in -nd 
formed originally a reduplicated perfect : 

mand-o, I chew, man(di)dl ; so (fe)fendi, I have struck. 



86 FUTURE ACTIVE PARTICIPLE. 

4. The stems in u have I in the Perfect: acu-o, / sharpen, 
acu-l. 

5. Sundry verbs reduplicate in the Perfect, i. e., repeat the 
initial consonant of the stem with the vowel following it: 
pend-o, I weigh, pe-pend-I. posc-o, I demand, po-posc-i, curr-o, Iran, cu-curr-I. 

When a change of vow T el occurs in the stem, e is always found in the 
syllable of reduplication : 

cad-o, I fall, ce-cid-1. caed-o, I fell, ce-cid-i. 

parc-o, I spare, pe-perc-i. pel-lo, I push, pe-pul-i. 

These reduplicated Perfects are always formed in -I. They do not 
lengthen the stem-vowel, but change a into i, ae into I, a before two con- 
sonants into e, and e and o into u before L 

Remark.— In compounds with monosyllabic prepositions reduplication is generally 
dropped except in disco, 1 learn, do, I give, posco, I demand, std, I stand. The com- 
pounds of curro, / run, sometimes retain it, excucurri. With dissyllabic prepositions 
the reduplication is commonly retained. 

III. The Supine. 

154. I. The Supine is formed from impure stem. 

1, Vowel-stems and stems in XJ take -turn in the Supine: 

am-o, I love, ama-tum. dele-o, I destroy, dele-tum. 

audi-o, I hear, audi-tum. tribu-o, / allot % tribu-tum. 

Most verbs of the Second Conjugation drop, however, their own char- 
acteristic vowel before -turn, and insert the connecting-vowel i : mone-o, 
I remind, moni-tum. Some have no connecting- vowel. (See 128.) 

2. Consonant-stems in a P- or K-mute take -turn in the Supine : 

cap-io, I take, cap-turn. rep-o, I creep, rep-tum. 

fac-io, I do, factum. dic-o, I say, dic-tum. 

Exceptions. — 1. Among the P-stems, only labor, I slip, lap-sus. 
2. Among the K-stems, the Supine in -sum occurs : 

A. In verbs whose Present-stem is strengthened by t : 

flect-o, I bend, flexum. plect-o, I plait, plexum. 

pect-o, I comb, pexum. nect-o, I knot, bind, nexum. 

B. Some, whose characteristic is preceded by a Liquid: merg-o, I dip, 
mer-sum ; terg-o, I wipe, ter-sum ; parc-o, I spare, par-sum ; sparg-o, 
I sc/co, scatter, spar-sum; mulce-o, I stroke, mul-sum. 

C. In some the ending -sum prevents confusion w 7 ith other words: 
fingo, I shape, makes fic-tum; but figo, I fasten, fix-um. So mul-sum, 
from mulc-eo, I stroke, distinguishes it from multum, much. 



.CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. 87 

Remark. — The K-niutes are dropped in the Perfect and Supine between 1-g, It, r-S, 
r-t: fulc-io, I prop, ful(c)-si, ful(c)-tum; torqu-eo, I twist, tor(qu)-si, tor(qu)-tum. 
(See 160.) 

3. Consonant-stems in a T-mute take -sum in the Supine : 

ed-o, I eat, e sum (for ed-sum) ; lud-o, I play, lu-sum ; defend-o, I ward 
off, defensum. 

4. Liquid-stems haye partly -turn, partly -sum. Stems in m 
and n take -turn ; stems in 1 and r take -sum : 

em-o, I buy, em-tum; veni-o, I come, ven-tum ; can-o, I sing, can-turn. 
ver-sum, from ver-ro, I sweep; fal-sum, from fall-o, i" cheat ; vul-sum, 
from vell-c, I pluck. 

Exceptions. — A. Liquid-stems which in the Perfect pass over to the 
2d Conjugation have -turn, with or without connecting-vowels: al-o, 
\£ nourish, al-i-tum or al-tum. 

B. To be distinguished from other forms : par-turn, from pari o, I bring 
forth ; but par-sum, from parc-ere, to spare : sal-tum, from sali-o, I leap ; 
but sal-sum, from sali-o, I salt. 

C. Man-sum, from mane-o, I remain, 

II. The Future Active Participle is formed regularly from 
the Supine ; in some verbs, however, from the Present-stem. 

Juvaturus, about to help, from juvare ; secaturus, from secare, to cut ; 
sonaturus, from sonare, to sound ; lavaturus, from lavare, to wash ; but 
adjuturus, from adjuvare, to help ; moriturus, from morior, I die ; oritu- 
rus, from orior, I rise ; pariturus, from pario, I bring forth ; agnoturus, 
from agnosco, / recognize ; nasciturus, from nascor, I am born. 

In some TJ-stems it is formed by means of the connecting-vowel I : arguiturus, from 
arguo, / accuse; abnuiturus. from abnuo, / refuse ; luiturus, from lu-o, I wash off, 
ruiturus, from ruo, I rush ; fruiturus, from fruor, I enjoy. 

155. Euphonic Laws 

IN THE CONVERSION OP THE CONSONANT-CHARACTERISTIC 

Characteristic b before s and t becomes p : 

scrib-o, I write, scrip-sl, scrip-turn. 
Characteristic g and qu before t become c : 

leg-o, I read, lec-tum ; coqu-o, I bake, coc-tum. 

Characteristic c, g, and qu with s become x : 

dic-o, I say, dixi (= dic-si). 
jung-o, I join, junxl (= jung-si). 



88 CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. • 

coqu-o, I cook, coxi (= coqu-sl). 
stingu-o, I poke (put), stinxi. 

Characteristic t and d before s are dropped, or become by as* 
similation ss : 

ed-o, I eat, e-sum (= ed-sum) j ced-o, I give way, ces-sl (= ced-si). 
mitt-o, I send, mi-si (= mit-si), mis-sum (= mit-sum). 

156. Change of Conjugation. 

A change of Conjugation arises when a vowel (e, i, a), or one 
of the strengthening suffixes of the Present, is added to the pure 
stem. The following instances occur : 

1. Consonant-stems, regular in the Perfect and Supine, pass over in the 
Present-stem into one of the vowel-conjugations. 



auge-o, 


auge-re, 


aux-I, 


auc-tum, 


to increase. 


senti-o, 


senti-re, 


sen-si, 


sen-sum, 


to feel. 


sepi-o, 


sepi-re, 


sep-sl, 


sep-tum, 


to hedge in. 


veni-o, 


veni-re, 


ven-i, 


ven-tum, 


to come. 


video, 


vide-re, 


vld-i, 


vl-sum, 


to see. 


vinci-o, 


vinci-re, 


vinx-I, 


vinc-tum, 


to bind. ' 



Be mark. —As these verbs form Perfect and Supine from the pure stem regularly, like 
the others of the 3d or Consonant-Conjugation, they are placed among the verbs of the 3d 
Conjugation in the list below. 

2. Yowel-stems, in consequence of a strengthened Present, pass over 
into the 3d Conjugation, but form Perfect and Supine from the vowel- 
stem. 

cre-sc-c cre-sc-ere, cre-vi, cre-tum, to grow. 

line, lin-ere, li-vl (le-vl), li-tum, to besmear. 

3. Consonant-stems form the Present regularly according to the 3d 
Conjugation, but pass in the Perfect and Supine into the 2d or 4th Con- 
jugation. 

frem-o, frem-ere, frem-ui, frem-i-tum, to growl. 

pet-o, pet-ere, pet-lvl, pet-itum, to fall upon. 

4. Yowel-stems vary among the Yo wel-Conj ugations. 

crep-o, I. crepa-re, I. crep-ul, II. crep-itum, II., to crackle. 

aperi-o, IV. aperl-re, IV. aper-ul, II. aper-tum, to uncover. 

5. dare, to give, and stare, to stand, in the Perfect, in consequence of 
reduplication, pass over to the 3d Conjugation. 

Bemark.— Verbs mentioned under 2, 3, 4, and 5 as suffering change of Conjugation, 

are specially marked in 176-180. 



MTJTE-STEMS. 



89 



Stems isr a P-mute. 

Supine: -turn. 
157. Perfect. — 1. After a short stein-sy liable, Perfect in -I 



capi-o (cap-), 

ac-cipi-o 5 
rump-o (rup-), 



cap-ere, 

ac-cip-ere, 

rump-ere, 



cep-I, 

ac-cep-I, 

rup-I, 



cap-turn, 

ac-cep-tum, 

rup-tum, 



1 58. 2- After a long stem-syllable, Perfect 



carp-o, 

de-cerp-o, 
nub-o, 

rep-o, 

scalp-o, 

scrib-o, 

sculp-o, 

serp-o, 



in -si. 



carp-ere, 

de-cerp-ere, 

niib-ere, 

rep-ere, 
scalp-ere, 
scrib-ere, 
sculp- ere, 
serp-ere, 



carp-si, 
de-cerp-sl, 
imp- si, 

rep-si, 

scalp-si, 

scrip-si, 

sculp-si, 

serp-sl, 



carp-tum, 

de-cerp-tum, 

nup-tum, 

rep-tum, 
scalp- turn, 
scrip- turn, 
sculp-tum, 
serp-tum, 



to take, 
to receive. 
to break. 



to pluck, 
to pluck off. 
to put on a veil 
(as a bride). 
to creep, 
to scrape, 
to write. 
to chisel, 
to creep. 



With change of Conjugation. 



sepi-o (saepi-o), 
sorbe-o, 



clep-o, 
lamb-o, 



sepi-re, 
sorbe-re, 



clep-ere, 
lamb-ere, 



sep-si, 
(sorp-si) sorbul, 

Exceptions. 

clep-sr(elep-i), 
lamb-I, 



sep-tum, 



clep-tum, 
(lamb-i-tum), 



to hedge in. 
to sup up. 



to filch, 
to lick. 



Stems m a K-mute. 

Supine : -turn. 
159. Perfect. — After a short stem-syllable, Perfect in -I. 
a. Pure stem. 

ago, 

co-g-o, 

de-g-o, 

red-ig-o, 
faci-o, 

cale-faci-o (c 

per-fici-o, 
fugi-o, 
jaci o, 

con-jici-o, 
xeg-o. 

col-lig-o, 

So the other compounds, except dl-lig-O, intel-lig-O, neg-lig-O, see 161. 



ag-ere, 


eg-*, 


ac-tum, 


to do, drive. 


co-g-ere, 


co-eg-I, 


co-ac-tum, 


to compel. 


dS-g-ere, 





— 


to pass (time). 


red-ig-ere, 


red-eg-i, 


red-ac-tum, 


to bring back. 


fac-ere, 


fec-i, 


fac-tum, 


to make. 


cale-fac-ere 


cale-fec-i, 


cale-fac-tum, 


to make warm. 


per-fic-ere, 


per-fec-i, 


per-fec-tum, 


to achieve. 


fug-ere, 


fug-i, 


fug-i-tum, 


to flee. 


jac-ere, 


jec-i, 


j ac-tum, 


to cast. 


con-jic-ere, 


con-jec-I, 


con-jec-tum, 


to gather. 


leg-ere, 


leg-I, 


lee turn, 


topick up, read* 


col-lig-ere, 


col-leg-i, 


col-lec-tum, 


to gather. 



90 



MUTE-STEMS. 



b. Stein strengthened by N. 

frang-o, 

per-fring-o, 
linqu-o, 

re linqu-o, 
(pang-o), 

com-ping-o, 
vinc-o (vie), 



•-ere, freg-1, 
per fring ere,per-freg-i, 
linqu-ere, liqu-i, 
re-linqu-ere, re-llqu-i, 
(pang-ere), (peg-I), 

com-ping-ere,com-peg-i, 
vinc-ere, vlc-i, 



frac-tum, 
per-frac-tum, 

re-lic-tum, 
(pac-tum), 

com-pac-tum, 
vic-tum, 



to break. 

to shiver. 

to leave. 

to leave behind. 

com p. 2 b and 3, 

to drive in. 
to drive tight, 
to conquer. 



1 60. 2. After long stem-syllable, Perfect in -si. 

a. Pure stem. 



dic-o, 

duc-o, 

fig-o, 

-fllg-o (con-, af-, in-), 

frig-o, 

stig-o, 



dlc-ere, 

duc-ere, 

fig-ere, 

-fllg-ere, 

frig-ere, 

stig-ere, 



dixi (dlc-sl), 

dlixl, 

fixl, 

-flixi, 

frixl, . 

siixi, 



dictum, 

duc-tum, 

fixum,* 

-flic-tum, 

fric-tum, 

suc-tum, 



to say. 
to lead, 
o fasten, 
to strike, 
to parch, 
to suck. 



With change of Conjugation. 



auc-tnm, 



to cause to wax. 
to be chilled. 
to give light, 
to bein mourning. 



auge-o, aug-ere, auxi, 

frige-o, frig-ere, (frixi), 

luce-o, ltic6-re, luxi, 

luge-o, luge-re, luxi, 

b. Stem strengthened by N, which is retained in Perfect and generally 
in Supine ; the stem-syllable is therefore long by Position. 

Supine without N. 



fing-o, 


fing-ere, finxi, 


fic-turn, 


to form. 


ping-o, 


ping-ere, pinxi, 


pic-tum, 


to paint. 


string-o, 


string-ere, strinxi, 

Supine with N. 


stric-tum, 


to draw tight. 


ang-o, 


ang-ere, anxl, 





to throttle, vex. 


cing-o, 


cing-ere, cinxl, 


cinc-tum, 


to gird. 


e-mung-o, 


e-mung-ere, e-munxl, 


e-munc-tum, 


to wipe the nose. 


jung-o, 


jung-ere, junxl, 


junc-tum, 


to yoke, join. 


lingo, 


ling-ere, linxL 


linc-tum, 


to lick. 


ning-o, 


ning-ere, ninxl, 





to snow. 


pang-o, 


pang-ere, panxi, 


panc-tum, 


to drive in. 


plang o. 


plang-ere, planxi, 


planc-tum, 


to smite. 


-stingu-o (ex-, dis- 


re-), -stingu-ere, -stinxl, 


-s tine- turn, 


to {stick) put out. 


ting-o (tingu-o), 


ting(u)-ere, tinxi, 


tinc-tum, 


to ivet, dye. 


ung-o (ungu-o). 


ung(u)-ere, unxl, 


unc-tum, 


to anoint. 




With cliange of Conjugation. 




sanci-o, 


sanci-re, sanxi, 


sanc-tum and 








sancitum, 


to hallow. 


vinci-o, 


vinci-re, vinxi, 


vinc-tum, 


to bind. 



The exceptions mentioned, 154, are marked with *. 



MUTE-STEMS. 



91 



c. Stem strengthened by T, Supine in -sum. 



flect-o, 


flect-ere, 


flexl, 


flexum,* 


to bend. 


nect-o, 


nect-ere, 


nexi (nexui) 


, nexum,* 


to knot. 


pect-o, 


pect-ere, 


pexi, 


pexum,* 


to comb. 


plect-o, 


plect-ere, 


(plexl), 


plexum,* 


to plait. 


d. The K-mute dropped after 


L or R, and before S or T. 




merg-o, 


merg-ere, 


mer-sl, 


mer-sum,* 


to dip in. 


sparg-o, 


sparg-ere, 


spar-si, 


spar-sum,* 


to strew. 


con-sperg-o, 


con sperg-ere,con-sper-si, 


con-sper-sum. 


to besprinkle. 


terg-o (e-o), 


terg-ere (e-re),ter-sl, 


ter-sum,* 


to wipe. 




With change of Conjugation. 




alge-o, 


alge-re, 


al-sl, 


— 


to freeze. 


farci-o (-ferci-o), 


farci-re, 


far-si, 


far-turn (-sum), 


to stuff. 


fulci-o, 


fulcl-re, 


ful-si, 


ful-tum, 


to prop. 


fulge-o. 


fulge-re, 


ful-si, 





to glow. 


indulge-o, 


indulge-re, 


indul-sl, 


(indul-tum), 


to give way. 


mulce-o, 


mulce-re, 


mul-sl, 


mul-sum,* 


to stroke. 


mulge-o. 


mulge-re, 


mul-si, 


mul-sum (ctum) 


* to milk. 


sarci-o, 


sarci-re, 


sar-si, 


sar-tum, 


to patch. 


torque-o, 


torque-re, 


tor-si, 


tor-turn, 


to twist. 


turge-o, 


turge-re, 


tur-si, 





to swell. 


urge-o, 


urge-re, 


ur-si, 





to press. 



161. 



Exceptions. 
1. Stem-syllable short, but Perfect in -si. 



coqu-o, 


coqu-ere, 


C0X1, 


coc-tum, 


to cook. 


[-lig-o (leg-), 


-lig-ere, 


-lexl, 


-lec-tum,] 


" 


dl-lig-o, 


dl-lig-ere, 


di-lexi, 


dllec-tum, 


to love. 


intelligo or intellegc 


>antellig-ere, 


intel-lexi, 


intel-lec-tum, 


to understand. 


negligo or neg-leg-o 


, neg-lig-ere, 


neg-lexl, 


neg-lec-tum, 


to neglect. 


(col-lig-ere, e-lig-ere, 159) 








[-lici-o (lac), 


lic-ere, 


-lexl. 


-lec-tum,J 


to lure. 


(al-, il-) pel-lici-o, 


pel-lic-ere, 


pel-lexi, 


pel-lec-tum, 


to allure. 


e-lici-o, 


e-lic-ere, 


e-lic-ui, 


e-lic-i-tum, 


to lure forth. 


[-spici-o (spec), 


-spic-ere, 


-spexl, 


-spec-turn,] 


to peer. 


(ad-, con-, de-, in-), 










per-spici-o, 


per-spic-ere, 


per-spexl, 


per-spec-tum, 


to see through 


reg-o, 


reg-ere, 


rexi, 


rectum, 


to keep right. 


di-rig-o, 


dl-rig-ere, 


di-rexi, 


di-rec-tum, 


to guide. 


per-g-o, 


per-g-ere, 


per-rexi, 


per-rec-tum, 


to go on. 


su-rg-o, 


su-rg-ere, 


sur-rexl, 


sur-rec-tum, 


to rise up. 


teg-o, 


teg ere, 


texi, 


tec-tum, 


to cover. 



2. Stem-syllable long, but Perfect in -I. 

ic-tum, 



Ic-O (defective), ic-ere, 1C-1, 

Pr sent stem rare : Ic-it, Ic-itur. ic-imur. 



to strike. 



92 



MUTE-STEMS. 



162. 


3. With reduplicated Perfect. 




disc-o, 


disc-ere, di-dic-i, 


(disc-iturus), 


to learn. 




Compounds retain reduplication. 




(pang-o, 159, b), 


(pang-ere), pe-pig-i, 


pactum, 


to drive a bar- 
gain, 
to spare. 


parc-o, 


parc-ere, pe-perc-I (par-si), (par-surus), 


com-parco (perccO 


, com-parc-ere, com-pars-I, 


com-par-sum, 


to save. 


posc-o, 


posc-ere, po-posc-I, 





to claim. 


pung-o, 


pung-ere, pu-pug-I, 


punc-tum, 


to prick. 


inter-pungo, 


inter pungere. inter-punxi, 


inter-punc-tum,fo place points 








between. 


tang-o (tag), 


tang-ere, te-tig-I, 


tac-tum, 


to touch. 


at-ting-o, 


at-ting-ere, at-tig-I, 


at-tac-tum, 


to border upon. 


163. 


Aspirate Stems m H 


A1ST> V. 





The stems in H, and some in V, follow the Conjugation of the 
K-mute stems. 

Remark. — In these stems an original K-mute reappears, as, viV-0 for vi(g)V0, and 
vixl for vig(v)sl. Compare nix for nig(v)S, snow. 

Perfect, -si. Supine, -turn, 
flu-o (flugv-), flu-ere, fluxi, (flux-us), 

stru-o (strugv-), stru-ere, struxl, struc-tum, 

trali-o, trah-ere, traxi, trac-tum, 

veh-o, veh-ere, vexi, vec-tum, 

viv-o (vigv-), vlv-ere, vixl, vic-tum, 

With change of Conjugation, 
co-nive-o (nigv), co-nive-re, co-nixl and ivl, 

164. 



to flow, 
to build, 
to drag, 
to carry, 
to live. 



to close the 



Stems in a T-mute. 

Supine : -sum. 

Perfect. — 1. The sterns in D with short stem-syllable and all stems in 
-nd, have Perfect in -I. 

(Many stems in -nd, with reduplicated Perfect, see 4 below.) 



ac-cend-o, 


ac-cend-ere, 


ac-cend-i, 


ac-cen-sum, 


to kindle. 


de-fend-o, 


de-fend-ere, 


de-fend-I, 


de-fen-sum, 


to strike away, 
defend. 


ed-o, 


ed-ere, 


ed-I, 


e-sum (es-sum) 


to eat. 


com-ed-o, 


com-ed-ere, 


com-gd-I, 


com-e-sum and 
com-es-tum, 


to eat up. 


fund-o (fud), 


fund-ere, 


fud-I, 


fu-sum, 


to pour. 


mand-o, 


mand-ere, 


mand-I, 


man-sum, 


to chew. 


prehend-o, 


prehend-ere, 


prehend-i, 


prehen sum, 


to seize. 


scand-o, 


scand-ere, 


scand-I, 


scan sum, 


to climb. 


a(d)-, de-scend-o, 


de-scend-ere, 


descend-!, 


de-scen-sum, 


to climb up t 
down. 




With change of Conjugation. 




prande-o, 


prande-re, 


prandi, 


pran-sum, 


to breakfast. 


vide-o, 


vide-re, 


vid-I, 


visum, 


to see. 



MUTE-STEMS. 



93 



165. 2. Stems in D and T, with long stem-syllable, have Perfect in -si. 



claud-o, 
eon-, ex-olud-o, 

laed-o, 
col-lld-o, 



claud-ere, 
ex-clud-ere, 

laed-ere, 
col-lld-ere, 



lud-o, lud-ere, 
plaud-o (ap-plaud-o), plaud-ere, 

ex-plod-o, ex-plod-ere, 

rad-o, rad-ere, 

rod-o, rod-ere, 

trud-o, trud-ere, 

vad-o (in-, §-), -vad-ere, 



clau-si, 
ex-clu-si, 

lae-si, 
col-li-si, 

lu-si, 

plau-si, 

ex-plo-si, 

ra-si, 

ro-si, 

tru-sl, 

-va-si, 



With change of Conjugation. 



arde-o, 


arde-re, 


ar-si, 


ride-o, 


ride-re, 


ri-sl, 


senti-o, 


senti-re, 


sen-si, 


suade-o, 


suade-re, 


sua-si, 


166. 


3. 


With assii 


a. In the Supine 






fodi-o, 


fod-ere, 


fod-1, 


mitt-o, 


mitt-ere, 


mi-si, 


pand-o, 


pand-ere, 


pand-I, 



sede-o, 



sede re, 



sed-i, 



b. In the Perfect and the Supine. 

ced-o, ced-ere, ces-si, 

quati-o, quat-ere, (quas-si), 

con-cutio (per-, ex-), con-eut-ere, con-cus-sl, 



clau-sum, 


to shut. 


ex-clti-sum, 


to shut up, 




out. 


lae-sum, 


to harm. 


col-11-sum, 


to strike to- 




gether. 


lu-sum, 


to play. 


plau-sum, 


to clap. 


ex-plo-sum, 


to hoot off. 


ra-sum, 


to scratch. 


ro-sum, 


to gnaw. 


trti-sum, 


to push. 


-va-sum, 


to go. 


tion. 
ar-sum, 


to be on fire. 


rl-sum, 


to laugh 




{at). 


sen-sum, 


to feel. 


sua-sum, 


to {make 




sweet) 




counsel. 


fos-sum, 


to dig. 


mis-sum, 


to send. 


pas-sum (pansum) 


, to spread 




out. 


ses-sum, 


to sit. 


ces-sum, 


to yield. 


quas-sum, 


to shake. 


con-eus-sum, 


to shatter. 



167. 



di-vid-o, 
quati-o, 

cud-o, 
sid-o, 

con-sid-o, 
strlde-o (-do), 



Exceptions. 

1. With short stem-syllable, but Perfect in -si. 

di-vid-ere, df-vi-si, di-vi-sum, 

quat-ere, (quas-si), quas-sum, 

2. With long stem-s}^llable, but Perfect in -I. 

cud-ere, cud-I, cu-sum, 

sid-ere, sid-I, 

In composition -sedf, -sessum,/rwft sede-o. 
con sid-ere, con-sed-i, con-ses-sum, 

stridere (-ere),strid-i, 



vert-o, 
re-vert-or, 



vert -ere, 
re-vert-I, 



vert-i, ver-sum, 

revert-I (active), re-ver-sum, 



to part, 
to shake. 



to hammer, 
to sit down. 

to settle 

down, 
to whistle, 

screech, 
to turn, 
to turn 

back. 



94 



LIQUID-STEMS. 



1 68. 4. With reduplicated Perfect. 



The 


reduplication of the Perfect is 


dropped in compound verbs. 


(153 R.) 


cad-o, 


cad-ere, 


ce-cid-I, 




ca-sum, 




to/all. 


oc-cid-o, 


oc-cid-ere, 


oc-cid-I, 




oc-ca-sum, 




to perish. 


caecl-o. 


caedere, 


ce-cid-I, 




cae-sum, 




to fell. 


oc-cld o, 


oc-cid-ere, 


oc-cid-i, 




oc-ci-sum, 




to kill. 


pend-o, 


pend-ere, 


pe-pend-I, 




pen-sum, 




to hang (tran- 
sit.). 


tend-o, 


tend-ere, 


te-tend-I, 




ten- sum an 


d -turn, 


to stretch. 


ex-teiid-o 


, ex-tend-ere 


, ex-tend-I, 




ex-ten-sum 


and -turn, 


to stretch out. 


os-tend-o 


os-tend- ere, 


os-tend-i, 




os-ten-sum 


(-tus), 


to stretch at, 
show (obs-t-). 






With change 


of Conjugation. 






morde-o, 


morde-re, 


mo-mord-I, 




mor-sum, 




to bite. 


pende-o, 


pende-re, 


pe-pend-I, 









to hang (intr.) 


sponde-o, 


sponde-re, 


spo-pond-i, 




spon-sum, 




to pledge one- 
self, 
to shear. 


tonde-o, 


tonde-re, 


to-tond-I, 




ton-sum, 




In some 


verbs the strengthening N of the Present has been dropped 


. In two verbs 


even the reduplicated syllable has been dr 


opped. 








find-o, 


find-ere, 


fid 1, 




fis-sum, 




to cleave. 


scind-o, 


scind-ere, 


scid-I, 




scis-sum, 




to split. 


tund-o, 


tund-ere, 


tu-tud-I, 




tun -sum and tu-sum, 


to thump. 



1 69. Liquid-Stems. 

1. All liquid-stems have the stem-syllable short. 

Exceptions. — 1. Contracted forms : su-mo (sub-imo) ; po-no (po-sinc 
or posi-n-o). 

2. Original sibilant stems : haere-o, haes-. 

2. Most liquid-stems, by means of the suffix e, pass over int 
the 2d Conjugation, or in the Perfect, at least, suffer change o: 
Conjugation. 

3. Those which follow the 3d Conjugation throughout take 
in the Perfect, and in the Supine either -sum or -turn. The 
lengthen the stem-syllable in the Perfect, or retaiu the doubl 
letter (rr, 11). Some form the reduplicated Perfect. 

em-o, em-ere, era-i, em-tum, to take, to buy. 

So, too, co-em-o, I buy up. But the compounds with ad-, ex-, inter 
red-, take -im-o. So dir-im-o, I sever. 
inter-im-o, inter-im-ere, inter-em-I, inter-em-tum, to make way wit 

The other compounds of em-o contract : co-mo, de-mo, pro-mo, su~m< 
and have -si in the Perfect, generally with a p between, which is gen 
rated by the coming together of a labial and sibilant or dental. Com] 
hiem(p)s. 









t 



■I 170. 1 
isall-o, 



STEMS IN S. 



95 



om-o, com-ere, comp-sl, comp-tum, to adorn. 

em-o, dem-ere, demp-sl, demp-tum, to take away, 

rom-o, prom ere, promp-sl (prom-si), promp-tum (promtum), to take out. 

um-o, sum-ere, sump-si (stim-si), sump-tum (sumtum), to take. 

The same formation occurs in the stem -tern-. Present, temn-o, I scorn. 
on-temn-o, -temn-ere, -temp-si (msl), -temp-tum (mtum), to despise. 
With the characteristic doubled, 
psall-ere, psall-I, 



K ' 



alio, sall-ere, sall-i, sal-sum, 

r ell-o, vell-ere, vell-I (vul-?i), vul-sum, 

r err-o, verr-ere, verr-I (rare), ver-sum, 

2. With change of Conjugation in the Present. 
r eni-o, venl-re, ven-i, ven-tum, 

3. With reduplicated Perfect. 



to play on the 

cithern. 
to salt, 
to pluck. 
to sweep. 

to come. 



171. Appabeot liquid-stems in r. — In the liquid-stems in 

: with long stem-syllable, the r has arisen from s. The original 

111 ; reappears in the Perfect and Supine: hence the endings -si in 

he Perfect (or by assimilation -ssl), and -stum (-sum) in the 

Supine. 



an-o, 


can-ere, 


ce-cin-i, 


can-turn, 


to sing. 


:urr-o, 


curr-ere, 


cu-curr-i, 


cur-sum, 


to run. 


alio, 


fall-ere, 


fe-fell-I, 


fal-sum, 


to cheat. 


)ari-o, 


par-ere, 


pe-per-I, 


par-turn * (pariturus), 


tobring forth. 


com-peri-o 


, com-peri-re 


com-per-I, 


com-per-tum, 


to find out. 


re-peri-o, 


re-peri-re, 


rep-per-i, 


re-per-tum, 


to find. 


>ell-o, 


pell-ere, 


pe-pul-i, 


pul-sum, 


to push, drive 
back. 


>er-cell-o, 


per-cell-ere, 


per-cul-i, 


per-cul-sum, 


to smite down. 


.oll-o, 


toll-ere, 


sus-tul-I, 


sub-la-tum, 


to lift up. 



iaere-0, haerS-re, hae-sl, ; 

iauri-0, hauri-re, hau-si," 
ir-o, lire-re, us-si, 

com-btir-o, com-btir-ere, com-bus-si, 
J With short stem-syllable. 
*er-o, ger-ere, ges-si, 



haes-um, 


to stick (to) 


haus-tum, 


to drain. 


us-tum. 


to burn. 


com-bus-tum, 


to bum up. 



to carry. 



ges-tum (see tostum, 128), 

Stems in S. 
172. 1. The stems in s preceded by a vowel have in general 
jbanged it to r. Unchanged appears only: 
to rls-o, vls-ere, vi-si, vi-sum, to visit. 

2. Stems in s preceded by a consonant are : 
leps-o, deps-ere, deps-ul, deps-tum, to knead. 

Dina-o, pins-ere, pins-ui, -I, pins-i-tum (pis-tum, pin- 

sum), 
;ex-o, tex-ere, tex-ui, tex-tum, 

These have undergone change of Con] ligation in 
76.) 

i 



to pound, 
to weave. 
the Perfect. (See 



96 



STEMS IN U. 



Stems in U. 
PERFECT IN -I. SUPINE IN -turn. 
173. 1. With characteristic preceded by a consonant. 



ab-lu-o, 

ab-nu-o, 

acu-o, 

ad-nuo (an-nu-o), 

argu-o, 

con-gru-o, 

ex-u-o, 

im-bu-o, 

in-du-o, 

lu-o, 

metu-o, 

minu-o, 

plu-o, 

ru-o, 

spu-o, 

statu-o, 

sternu-o, 

su-o, 

tribu-o, 



ab-lu-ere, 

ab-nu-ere, 

acu-ere, 

ad-nu-ere, 

argu-ere, 

con-gru ere, 

ex-u-ere, 

im-bu-ere, 

in-du-ere, 

lu-ere, 

metu-ere, 

minu-ere, 

plu-ere, 

ru-ere, 

spu-ere, 

statu-ere, 

sternu-ere. 

su-ere, 

tribu-ere, 



ab-lu-i, 

ab-nu-I, 

acu-i, 

ad-nu-1, 

argu-i, 

con-gru-I, 

ex-u-I, 

im-bu-i, 

in-du-i, 

lu-I, 

metu I, 

minu I, 

plu-it, pltiv 

ru-I, 

spu-I, 

statu-i, 

sternu-i 

su-I, 

tribu-I, 



ab-lu-tum, 
(ab nu-itur-us), 
acu-tum, 

argti-tum, 

ex-u-tum, 
im-bu-tum, 
in-dti-tum, 
lu-itur-us, 

minu- turn, 



-it. 



ru-tum (ruiturus), 

sputum, 

statu-tum, 

su-tum, 
tribu-tum, 



1 74. 2. With characteristic preceded by a vowel. 



to wash off. 
to dissent, 
to sharpen, 
to nod 
to accuse. 
to agree. 
to put off, dqi 
to dip, dye. 
to put on, don. 
to atone for. 
to/ear. 
to lessen, 
to rain, 
to rush down, 
to spew, 
to settle, 
to sneeze. 
to sew. 
to allot. 



After a vowel, u appears as v, but in the Supine it suffers, as a vowel, contraction wit 3! 
the vowel preceding it (generally with change of conjugation). 



cave-o, 


cave-re, 


cav-i, 


cau-tum, 


to take heed. 


fave-o, 


fave-re, 


fav-i, 


fau-tum, 


to be well-di 
posed. 


fove-o, 


fove-re, 


fov-i, 


fo-tum, 


to keep warm. 


juv-o, 


juva-re, 


juv-I, 


jii-tum (juvatiirus), to help. 


ad-juv-o, 


-juva-re, 


-jtiv-i, 


-jii-tum (jti ttirus) 


to stand by i 
aid. 


(lav-o,) 


(lav-ere,) 


lav-I, 


lautum (lo-tum), 


to wash. 


lav-o, 


lava-re, 


(lava-vl,) 


lava-tum, 


to wash. 


move-o, 


mov£-re, 


mov-I, 


mo-tum, 


to move. 


pave-o, 


pave-re, 


pav-I, 





to quake (wi\ 
fear). 


vove-o, 


vovS-re, 


vov-I, 


vo-tum, 


to vow. 



The same reappearance of v occurs in : 

ferve-o (o), fervS-re (ere), ferv-i (ferb-ul), to seethe. 

bo1v-o, solv-ere, solv-i, solii-tum, to loose, pay. 

volv-o, volv-ere, volv-I, volu-tum, to roll. 



DEPONENTS. 



97 



DEPONENTS. 

1 75. Bemarks. — 1. Deponent verbs are passive forms which 
have lost their passive or reflexive signification. 

2. Stems strengthened by sc or isc have generally an inchoa- 
tive meaning. Comp. 152, V, 



1. ad-ip-isc-or, 

2. lab-or, 

1, a. pro-fic-isc-or, 



2, b. fung-or, 
nanc-isc-or, 
c. ani-plect-or, 



1. Stems in a P-mute. 

ad-ip-isc-I, ad-ep-tus sum, 

lab-I, lap-sus sum, 

2. Stems in a K-mute. 

pro-fic-isc-I, pro-fee -tus sum, 



fung-i, 

nanc-isc-I, 

am-plect-I, 



func-tus sum, 
nac-tus (nanc-tus) sum, 
am-plex-us sum, 



d. ulc-isc-or, ulc-isc-i, ul-tus sum, 

Ex.e.experg-isc-or, (-reg-) ex-per-g-isc-i, ex-per-rec-tus sum, 



! 



pac-isc-or, 



fru-or (frugv-), 
veil- or, 



assenti-or, 
fate-or, 

con-fite-or, 
gradi-or, 

ag-gredi-or, 
nit-or(gnict-) ) 

from genu, j 
ordi-or, 
pati-or, 

per-peti-or, 

ut-or. 



com-mm-isc-or, 

ex-peri-or, 
misere-or, 

quer-or, 



pac-isc-I, 

3. Stems 

rru-i, 
veh-i, 

4. Stems 

assentl-rl, 

fate-rl, 

con-fite-ri, 

grad-1, 

ag-gred-i, 

nit-I, 

ordl-ri, 

pat-I, 

per-pet-I, 



pac-tus sum (pepigi), 

IN H AND V. 

fruc-tus, fru-i-tus sum, 
vec-tus sum, 

IN A T-MUTE. 
assen-sus sum, 
fas-sus sum, 
con-fes-sus sum, 
gres-sus sum, 
ag-gres-sus sum, 
ni-sus (nix-us) sum, j 
ni-stirus, ! 

or-sus sum, 
pas-sus sum, 
per-pes-sus sum, 



to {fasten to one's 

self) attain, 
to glide. 



to (get forward) 

set out. 
to discharge, 
to get. 
to twine round, 

embrace, 
to avenge, 
to (right one's self 

up) awake, 
to drive (a bar- 



tit-i, u-sus sum, 

5. Stems in a Liquid. 

com-min-isc-I, com-men-tus sum, 



to enjoy. 

to (waggon) ride. 

to assent. 

to confess. 

to confess. 

to step. 

to attack. 

to stay one's self 

on. 
to begin, 
to suffer. 
to endure to the 

end. 
to use. 



ex-peri-ri, 
misere-ri, 



l. 



loqu-or, 

sequ-or, 

2. ob-Jiv-isc-or, 



ex-per-tus sum, 
miser-i-tus sum, 

6. Stems in R foe S. 

quer-I, ques-tus sum, 

7. Stems in TJ. 

loqu-i, locti-tus sum, 

f equ-I, secti-tus sum, 

ob-liv-isc-I, ob-li-tus sum, 
5 



to think up, de- 
vise. 
to try. 
to pity. 

to complain. 

to speak, 
tofollow 
to forget. 



98 



CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. 



crep-o, 


crepa-re, 


cub-o, 


cuba-re, 


dom-o, 


doma-re, 


mic-o, 


mica-re, 


dl-mic-o, 


dl-mica-re, 


plic-o (ex-plic-o), plica-re, 


(The simple 


rare.) 


son-o, 


sona-re, 


ton-o, 


tona-re, 


vet-o, 


veta-re, 



Change of Conjugation. 

(Compare 156.) 

A. 

176. t. Verbs of the 1st Conjugation which pass over into the 2d 

the Perfect and the Supine. 

WITH CONNECTING- VOWEL. 

crep-ui, crep-itum, to rattle. 

cub-ui, cub-itum, to lie. 

dom-ui, dom-itum, to tame. 

mic-ui, to quiver. JlaSi 

dl-mica-vl, dl-mica-tum, to Jight {out). 

plic-ul (plica-vl), plic-itum (-a-tum), to fold. 

son-ul, son-itum (sona-tu- 

rus), to sound. 

ton-ui, to thunder. 

vet-ul, vet-itum, toforbid. 

WITHOUT CONNECTING- VOWEL, 
fric o, frica-re, fric-ui, fric-tum (-a-tum), to rub. 

nec-o, neca-re, neca-vi, neca-tum, to Mil. 

e-nec-o, e-neca-re, g-nec-ui (-a-vl), g-nec-tum, to Mil off. 

sec-o, seca-re, sec-ui, sec-tum, to cut. 

2. Verbs of the 3d Conjugation which pass over into the 2d in the Per- 
fect and the Supine. 

WITH CONNECTING-VOWEL. 



ac-cumb-o, 


ac cumber e, ac-cub-ul, 


ac-cub-itum, 


to lie down. 


frem-o, 


frem-ere, 


frem-ui, 


frem-itum, 


to roar, rage. 


gem-o, 


gem-ere, 


gem-ui, 


gem-itum, 


to groan. 


gi-gn-o (gen-), 


gi-gn-ere, 


gen-ui, 


gen-itum, 


to beget. 


mol-o, 


mol-ere, 


mol-ui, 


mol-itum, 


to grind. 


strep-o, 


strep-ere, 


strep-ui, 


strep-itum, 


to make a din. 


vom-o, 


vom-ere, 


vom-ui, 


vom-itum, 


to vomit. 




WITHOUT CONNECTING-VOWEL. 




al-o, 


al-ere, 


al-ui, 


al-tum, al-itum, 


to nourish. 


col-o, 


col-ere, 


col-ui, 


cul-tum, 


to cultivate. 


consul-o, 


consul-ere, 


consul-ul, 


consul-turn, 


to consult. 


frend-o (e-o), 


frend-ere, 


(frend-ul), 


fre-sum, fres-sum, to gnash. 


occul-o, 


occul-ere, 


occul-ui, 


occul-tum, 


to conceal. 


rapi-o, 


rap-ere, 


rap-ui, 


rap-tum, 


to snatch. 


cor-ripi-o, 


cor-rip-ere, 


cor-rip-ui, 


cor-rep-tum, 


to seize. 


ser-o, 


ser-ere, 








to string {out). 


dS-ser-o, 


de-ser-ere, 


de-ser-ui, 


dS-sertum, 


to abandon. 


So, too, 


deps-o, I knead, tex-o, Iiveave, and plnso, I pound. 


(See 172.) 




WITHOUT 


SUPINE. 




compe3C-o, 


compesc-ere 


', compesc-ui, 




to curb in. 


con-cin-o (oc-, 


con-cin-ere, 


con-cin-ui, 




to sing together 


prae-), 










ex-cello, (ante- 


ex-cell-ere, 


ex-cell-ul, 


ex-cel-sus, 


to surpass. 


prae), 










Btert-o, 


stert-ere, 


stert-ui, 




to snore. 


trem-o, 


trem-ere, 


trem-ui, 




to tremble. 



amici-o, 


amici-re, 


aperi-o, 
operi-o, 
sali-o, 
de-sili-o, 


aperi-re, 
operi-re, 
sali-re, 
de-sili-re, 



CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. 99 

3. Verbs of the 4th Conjugation which pass over into the 2d in the Per- 
fect and the Supine. 

amic-ui (amixi), amic-tum, to clothe. 

aper-ui, aper-tum, to open. 

opsr-ui, oper-tum, to cover up. 

sal-ui, sal-tum, to leap. 

de-sil-ul, (de-sul-tum,) to leap down. 

4. Verbs of the 3d Conjugation which pass over into the 4th in the Per- 
fect and Supine. 

arcess-o, arcess-ere, arcess-ivl, arcess-itum, to send for. 

So, too, lacess-o, I tease, capess-o, Hay hold of.- 
in-cess-o, in-cess-ivi (cessl), to attack. 

So facess-o, I cause, make off. 
cupi o, cup-ere, cup-ivi, cup-itum, to desire. 

pet-o, pet-ere, pet-Ivi, pet-itum, to seek {fly at). 

quaer-o, quaer-ere, quaes-lvi, quaes-Itum, to seek. 
quaeso, quaesumus, are old colloquial forms, prythee. 
con-quir-o, con-qulr-ere, conquls-ivl, con-quis-Itum, to hunt up. 
rud-o, rud-ere, rud-ivl, rud-itum, to roar. 

sapi-o, sap-ere, sap-ivl (-ui), to have a flavor. 

5. Verbs which vary between the 2d and the 4th Conjugation. 
cie-o (ci-o), cie-re (cl-re), el-vl, ci-tum(ci-tum), to stir up. 

con-citus, per-cit-us, ex-ci-tus, or excltus, but ac-ci-tus. 

6. Verbs which pass over into the 3d Conjugation in the Supine. 
pot-o, pota-re, pota-vl, po-tum (po) or 

pot-atum, 
po-turus, 
pota-turus, to drink. 

B. 

177. Change op Conjugation as result op Reduplication. 

d-o, da-re, ded-I, da-tum, to give, put, do. 

Remark. — Everywhere a-short, except in das, thou glvest, and da, give thou. 

1. Like do, are conjugated the compounds with dissyllabic words, such as : 

circum-do, I surround ; satis-do, I give hail; pessum do, I ruin; venuni-do, I sell ; as: 
circum-d-o, circum-da-re, circuin-de-dl, eircum-da-tum, to surround. 

2. The compounds of da-re with monosyllabic words pass over wholly 
into the 3d Conjugation. 



ab-d-o, 


ab-d-ere, 


ab-did-i, 


ab-d-itum, 


to put away. 


ad-d-o, 


ad-d-ere, 


ad -did-I, 


ad-d-itum, 


to put to. 


con-d-o, 


con-d-ere, 


con- did-I, 


con-d-itum, 


to put up 

{found). 


abs-con-do, 


abs-con-d-ere 


, abs-con-d-i, 


abs-con-d-itum,foi^ -far away. 






(didi), 






ere d-o, 


credere, 


cre-did-i, 


cre-d-itum, 


to put faith. 


de-d-o, 


de-d-ere, 


de -did-I, 


de-d-itum, 


to give up. 


6-d-o, 


e-d-ere, 


e-did-I, 


e-d-itum, 


to put out. 


in-d-o, 


in-d-ere, 


in-did-i, 


in-d-itum, 


to put in. 


per-d-o. 


per-d-ere, 


per-did I, 


per-d-itum, 


to fordo {ruin). 


pro-do, 


pro-d-ere, 


pro-did-i, 


pro-d-itum, 


to betray. 


red-do, 


red-d-ere, 


red- did-I, 


red-d-itum, 


to give back. 


tra-d-o, 


tra-d-ere, 


tra-did I, 


tra-d itum, 


to give over. 


v6n-d-o» 


ven-d-ere, 


ven-did-1, 


vSn-d-itum, 


to put up to sale. 



100 



CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. 



I 



178. 




sto, I stand. 






st-o. 


s t a -r e , 


st et-i, 


(sta-tu-rus) 


, to stand. 


ad-st-o, 


ad-stare, 


ad-stit-i, 





to stand by. 


con-st-o, 


con-stare, 


con-stit-i, 





to stand fast. 


in-st-o. 


in-sta-re, 


in-stit-I, 





to stand uj)on. 


ob-st-o, 


ob-sta-re, 


ob-stit-I, 





to stand out 
against. 


per-st-o, 


per-sta-re, 


per-stit-i, 





to stand firm. 


prae-st-o, 


prae-sta-re, 


prae-stit-I, 


— ■ 


to stand ahead. 


re-st-o, 


re-sta-re, 


re-stit-i, 





to stand over. 


dl-st-o, 


di-sta-re, 


— 





to stand apart. 


ex-st-o, 


ex-sta-re, 








to stand out. 


circum-st-o, 


circum-sta-re, 


civcum-stet-i, 




to stand round. 



1. Like circum-sto, all compounds of stare with dissyllabic prepositions 
have -steti in the Perfect, as : 

ante-sto, lam superior ; inter-sto, lam between ; super-sto, I stand upon. 

2. In other compounds the reduplicated form sisto is used, which, as a 
simple verb, has the transitive meaning, I {cause to) stand, but in its com- 
pounds, the intransitive, I stand. 



s i s t -o , 

con-sist-o, 
de-sist o (ab-), 
ex-sist-o, 
ob-sist-o, 

re-sist-o, 
ad-sist-o, 
in-sist-o, 
circum-sist-o, 



s i s t- e r e , 

con-sist-ere, 
de-sist-ere, 
ex-sist-ere, 
ob-sist-ere, 

re-sist-ere, 
ad-sist-ere, 
in-sist-ere, 



(stit-I), sta-tum, 



con-stit-i, 
de-stit-I, 
ex-stit-I, 
ob-stit-i, 

re-stit-I, 
ad-stit-i, 
in-stit-I, 



con-sti-tum, 
de-sti-tum, 
ex-sti-tum, 
ob-sti-tum, 

re-sti-tum, 



circum-sist-ere, circum-s&tf-i, 



to {cause to) 

stand, 
to come to a stand, 
to stand off. 
to stand up. 
to take a stand 

against, 
to withstand. 
to stand near, 
to stand upon, 
to take a stand 

round. 



179. 



Change of Conjugation as result of strengthened Present. 



1. Present strengthened by n. 



lino, 


lin-ere, 


si-n-o, 


sin-ere, 


de sin-o, 


de-sin-ere, 


pon-o (po-sino), 


pon-ere, 



li-vl, or levi, li-tum, 
si-vl, si-tum, 

de-sl-vl (if), de-si-tum, 
pos-ui, positum, 



2. Present strengthened by sc- : compare E (181). 

cre-sc-o, cresc-ere, cr6-vi, crS-tum, 

no sc-o. nosc-ere, no-vi, (Adj. notus), 

co-gnosc-o, co-gnosc-ere, co-gno-vi, co-gn-itum, 



to besmear, 
to let. 

to leave of. 
to place, leave be- 
hind. 



to grow. 

to learn to know. 

to recognize. 



So the other compounds of nosco, except ignosco, Ipardon, take no notice of, which I 
has Sup. ignotum(adj. ignotus, unknown^. 



pa-sc-o, pase-ere, 


pa-vl, 


pas-tum, 


to graze (trans.) 


quie-sc o, quiesc-ere, 


quie-vl, 


quie-tum, 


to rest. 


Eue-sc-o (as-, con), suesc-ere, 


sue-vl, 


su6-tum, 


to accustom one 
self 



INCHOATIVE VEEBS. 



D. 



101 



180. Some stems in-r(-er) undergo change of conjugation as result of 
Metathesis, which also is a strengthening of the Present. Ser-o, I sow, is a 
reduplicated form for se-so. 



cer-n-o, 


cern-ere, 


(erg- vi), 


(cre-tum), 


to separat 


de-cern-o, 


de-cern-ere, 


de-cre-vi, 


de-cre-tum, 


to decide. 


ser-o, 


ser-ere, 


se-vi, 


sa-tum, 


to sow. 


con-ser-o, 


con-ser-ere, 


con-se-vi, 


con-s-itum, 





sper-n-o, 


spern-ere, 


spre-vi, 


spre-tum, 


to despise. 


ster-n-o, 


stern-ere, 


stra-vi, 


stra-tum, 


to strew. 


ter-o, 


ter-ere, 


tri-vl, 


tri-tum, 


to rub. 



E. 

Inchoative Vekbs. 



181. 1. The inchoatives are formed < 



r bj adding to the vowel- 
stems -sc-. 
by adding to the conso- 
nant-stems -isc-. 
Perfect and Supine are formed from the pure stem. 



invetera-sc-o, 

na-sc-or, 

ex-ole-sc-o, 



inveterasc-ere, 

nasc-I, 

ex-olesc-ere, 



in vet era- vi, 
na-tus sum, 
ex-ole-vl, 



invetera-tum, 



ex-ole-tum, 



to grow old. 

to be born. 

to get one's growth. 



Like exolesco, conjugate obsolesco, / grow old ; but abolesco, / disappear, follows 
aboleo, and inolesco has no supine. 



ad-olg-sc-o, 

co-al§-sco, 

eon-valg-sc-o, 

in-cale sc-o. 

exarde-so-o, 

sci-sc-o, 

ad-sci-sc-o, 
ob-dormi-sc-o, 
con-cup-isc-o, 

(cup-ere), 
in-gem-isc-o, 
re-sip-isc-o, 

(sap-ere) ; 
re-viv-isc-o, 



ad-oi6sc-ere, 

co-alesc-ere, 

con-valesc-ere, 

in-caleso-ere, 

ex-ardesc-ere, 

sclsc-ere, 

ad-scisc-ere, 

ob-dormisc-ere, 

con-eupisc-ere, 

in-gemisc-ere, 
re-sipisc-ere, 



ad-ole-vf, 

co-al-ul, 

con-val-ui, 

in-cal-ul 

ex-ar-si, 

sci-vi, 

ad-sci-vi, 

ob-dorml-vi, 

con-cup-ivi, 

in-gem-uf, 
re-sip-ivi, 



ad-ul-tum, 

(co-al-itum), 

con-val-i-tum, 

ex- ar-sum, 
scl-tum, 
ad-sci-tum, 
ob-dorml turn, 
con-cupl-tum, 



re-vivisc-ere, re-vi-xi, 



re-vic-tum, 



to grow up. 
to grow together, 
to get ivell. 
to get warm, 
to take fire, 
to decree, 
to take on. 
to fall asleep. 
to long for. 

to sigh. 

to come to one's senses. 

to come to life again. 



2. Inchoative Verbs may be formed likewise from Nouns or Adjectives, 
e-van-ui, (vanus), 



6-van-esc-o, 
Ira-sc-or, 

not-esc-o, 
vesper-asc-o, 



g-vanesc-ere, 
IrS-sci, 

notesc-ere, 
vesperasc-ere, 



to disappear, 
to grow angry, 
lam angry, 

not-ul, (notus), to become known. 

— (vesper), to become evening. 



ira-tus sum, I (Ira) 



102 irregulaf verbs. 

182. Change of Voice. 

Neuter Passive Verbs. 



aude-o, 


aude-re, 


au-sus sum, to dare. 


fid-o, 


fid-ere, 


fl-sus sum, to trust. 


gaude-o, 


gaude-re,, 


gav-lsus sum, to rejoice. 


[re-vert-or 


re-vert-I, 


re-vert-I., re- versus sum], to turn back. 


sole-o, 


sole-re, 


sol-itus sum, to be wont. 



Remarks.— 1. Some Active Verbs have a Perfect Passive Participle with Active mean- 
ing, as : cenatus, one who has dined, from cenare, to dine ; pransus, having breakfasted, 
from prandeo, I breakfast ; potus, drunken, from poto, 1 drink ; jiiratus, having taken 
the oath, sivorn, from juro, I swear ; conjiiratus, a conspirator, from conju.ro, I con- 
spire. Many snch are used purely as Adjectives: conslderatus, circumspect, from con- 
sidero ; cautus, wary, from caveo, I beware. 

2. The Perfect Participle of many Deponent Verbs has both Active and Passive mean- 
ing : adeptus (adipiscor), having acquired, or being acquired; comitatus (comitor, 
1 accompany) ; expertus (experior, / try) ; exsecratus (exsecror, / curse) ; imitatus 
(imitor, / copy) ; meritus (mereor, / deserve) ; opinatus, necoplnatus (oplnor, 1 
think) ; pactus (paciscor, I contract) ; partitus (partior, I distribute) ; sortitus (sortior, 
T cast lots) ; tueor, I protect; tiitus, safe ; the Perf. Participle in ordinary use is tutatus. 



183. Irregular Verbs. 

A. 

Irregular in the Formation of the Tense-Stems. 

Irregular in the formation of the tense-stems are: 

1. Two Verbs in a P-mute of the 3d conjugation, viz. : 

clepo, I filch. lambo, / lick. See 158. 

2. Six Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a K-mute, which have, in spite of 
the short stem-syllable, the Perfect in -si, viz. : 

rego, I keep right, tego, I cover in, coquo, Ibake, and the compounds of 
lego, Ipick up, lacio, I lure, specie I spy (-ligo, -licio, -spicio). 

From lego, however, only diligo, / love ; intellego, I understand ; and neglego, 

I neglect; are irregular. The other compounds are regular. See 161. 

3. Two Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a T-mute, which, in spite of the 
short stem-syllable, have the Perfect in -si, viz. : 

dlvido, Ipart. quatio, I shake. See 167. 

4. Four Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a T-mute, which, in spite of long 
stem-syllable, have the Perfect in -I, viz. : 

ciido, 1 hammer ; sido, I sit; strldeo, I whistle ; verto, I turn. See 167. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



103 



5. Assimilation between bs and ms occurs in the Perfect and Supine of 



jube-o, jube-re, jus-si, jus-sum, 

prem-o (-prim-o), prem-ere, pres-si, pres-sum, 

6. Special irregularities occur in : 



bib-o, 

mane-o, 

meti-or, 

met-o, 

mori-or, 

rauci-o, 

re-or, 



bib-ere, 

mane-re, 

metl-ri, 

met-ere, 

mor I, 

rauci-re, 

re-ri, 



bib I, (bib-itum), 

man-si, man-sum, 

men-sus sum, 
mes-sui, mes-sum, 

mor tuus sum, 



rau-si, 
ra-tus sum, 



This verb has no present participle. 

7. Formed from different tense-stems, are ; 

fer-o, 
toll-o, 

See 186. 



fer-re, 
toll-ere, 



tul-I, 
sus-tul-I, 



rau-sum, 



latum, 
sub-la-tum, 



to order, 
to x>ress. 



to drink, 
to remain, 
to measure, 
to mow. 
to die. 

to be hoarse, 
to think. 



to bear, 
to lift. 



184. B. 

Irregular in the Conjugation op the Present-Stem. 

Irregular in the conjugation of the Present-stem are: 

1. ori-or, ori-ri, or-tus sum, to arise. 

Present: ori-or, or-eris, or-itur, or-imur, or-iminl, ori-untur. 

Imperfect : ori-rer and or-erer. Gerund : ori-undus. 
The compounds follow the simple verb, except ad-ori-ri, rise up at y at- 
tack, which follows the Fourth Conjugation. 

2. i-re, to go. Stem i, which, before a, o, u, becomes e. 

185. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

I be going. 
e-a-m, 
e-a-s, 
e-a-t, 
e-a-mus, 
e-a-tis, 
e-a-nt. 





Igo. 


Seng.- 


-1. e-o, 




2. I-s, 




3. i-t, 


Plur.- 


— 1. I-mus, 




2. i-tis, 




3. e-u-nt. 


SlKG.- 


-2.1, 




3. 


Plur.- 


-2. I-te, 




3. 



IMPERATIVE. 



go thou, 



(jo ye, 



I-t5, tlwu slialt go, 
I-to, he shall go, 

I-tote, ye shall go, 
e-u-nto, they shall go. 



104 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



INDICATIVE. 
I-ba-m, I went, 

I-b-o, I shall go. 



Imperfect. 



Future. 



Perfect. 
I-vi (compos, -i-i), I have gone, 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 
I-re-m, I were going. 

I-veri-m (ex-i-eri-m). 



Pluperfect. 
I-vera-m (ex-i-era-m), I had gone, I-visse-m (ex-i-sse-m). 

Future Perfect. 
i-ver-6 (ex-i-er-o). 
INFINITIVE : p RE s. i-re. Perf. I-visse (I-sse). 
PARTICIPLES : Pres. i-e-ns. G. e-u-ntis. fut. ACT. i-tur-us. 
GERUND : e-u-nd-I. 
SUPINE : i-tum, to go. 

The Passive occurs in some of the compounds : circum-i-ri. 

Compounds of eo are : ven-eo, I am for sale, and per-eo, I perish, which 
serve as passives to ven-do and per-do, whose regular passives occur only 
in the forms vend-itus, vend-endus, and per-ditus. 

The compound ambi-o, I solicit, follows the Fourth Conjugation 
throughout. 

Like I-re, to go, are conjugated qui-re, to be able, andne-qui-re, to be unable, 
which, however, are usual only in Present Indicative and Subjunctive. 

3. fer-re, to bear. 

186. The connecting- vowel i is dropped before t and s, and $ 
before r. 



ACTIVE. 



INDICATIVE. 



Present. 



I bear. 
Sing.— 1. fer-o, 

2. fer-s, 

3. fer t, 



Pltxr- 



-1. fer-i-mus, 

2. fer-tis, 

3. fer-u-nt. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I be bearing. . 
fer-a-m, 
fer-a-s, 
fer-a-t, 

fer-a-mus, 

fer-a-tis, 

fer-a-nt. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



105 



IMPERATIVE. 



Sikg— 2. fer, 
3. 

Plur.— 2. fer-te, 
3. 



bear thou, 
bear ye, 



fer-to, tlwu shalt bear, 

fer-to, lie shall bear, 

fer-t5te, ye shall bear, 

fer-u-nto, they shall bear. 



INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Imperfect. 
fer-eba-m, 1 teas bearing, fer-re-m, I were bearing. 



Future. 



f er-a-m, I shall bear. 



Perfect. 
tul-i, I have borne, tul-eri-m. 

INFINITIVE : Pres. fer-re. Perf. tul-isse. 

PART. fer-e-ns, bearing. Fut. Act. la-tur-us. 

SUPINE : latum (t(o)la-tum). 





PASSIVE. 




INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 




Present. 




lam borne.. 




I be borne. 


Sikg. — 1. fer-o-r, 




fer-a-r, 


2. fer-ris, 




fer-a-ris, 


3. fer-tur, 




fer-a-tur, 


Plue. — 1. fer-i-mur, 




fer-a-mur, 


2. fer-i-mini, 




fer-a-mini, 


3. fer-u-ntur. 




fer-a-ntur. 




IMPERATIVE. 


Sing.— 2. fer-re. 


be thou borne, 


fer-tor, thou shalt be borne, 


3. 




fer-tor, he shall be borne. 



Plur. — 2. fer-i-minl, be ye borne. 
3. 

INDICATIVE. 

Imperf. : fer-eba-r, 

Future : fer-a-r. 

Perfect : la-tus sum, 

INF. fer-ri, to be borne. 



fer-u-ntor, they shall be borne. 

SUBJUNCTIVE, 
fer-re-r. 



la-tus sim. 
GER. : fer-e-nd-us, 



5* 



106 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



COMPOUNDS. 

at-tul-I, al-la-tum, to bear to. 

abs-tul-L ab-la-tum, to bear aivay. 

con-tul-i, col-la-tum, to collect. 

dis-tul-I, dl-la-tuni, to put of. 

ex-tul-I, e-la-tum, to carry out. 

ob-tul-i, ob-la-tum, to offer. 

Remark.— Suf-fero, / undergo, has the Perfect sus-tin-ul (sus-tul-1, sub-la-tum, 
being appropriated to toll-o). (183.) 

4. ed-ere, to eat. 

187. In certain forms the connecting- vowels i and e are dropped 
before s, t, and r j d before s (r) is dropped or assimilated (as ss), and before 
t becomes s. 



af-fer-o, 


af-fer-re, 


au-fer-o, 


au-fer-re, 


con-fer-o, 


con-fer-re, 


dif-fer-o, 


dif-fer-re, 


ef fer-o, 


ef-fer-re, 


of-fer-o, 


offer-re, 



INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

I be eating. 
ed-a-m, 
ed-a-s, 
ed-a-t, 

ed-a-mus, 

ed-a-tis, 

ed-a-nt. 

Imperfect. 
late, ed-ere-m, es-sem, I were eating. 



I eat 
Sing.— 1. ed-o, 

2. ed-i-s, 

3. ed-i-t, e-st, 

Plur. — 1. ed-i-mus, 

2. ed-i-tis, es-tis, 

3. ed-u-nt. 



ed-eba-m, 



Sing.— 2. ed-e, es, 
3. 



IMPERATIVE 

eat tJiou, 



Pltjr. — 2. ed-i-te, es-te, eat ye, 
3. 



ed-i-to, es-t5, thou shall eat, 
ed-i-to, es-to, he shall eat, 

editote, es-tote, ye shall eat. 
ed-u-nto, they shall eat. 



INFINITIVE, 
ed-ere, es-se, to eat. 

5. fi-erl, to become. 

188. Fl-o is conjugated in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, accord- 
ing to the 4th Conjugation, but receives a connecting-vowel in the Sub- 
junctive Imperfect and in the Infinitive, viz., fi-e-rerh, I were becoming; 
fi-e-rlj to become. In these forms the i is short, but elsewhere it is long, 
even before another vowel. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



307 



The Infinitive ends in -ri, and the whole Verb in the Present-stem is 
treated as the Passive to facio, I make The rest of the Passive is formed 
regularly from facio. 

ACTIVE, 
Pres. facio, I make. IKD. 



Imperf. faciebam, I made. 
Future, faciam, I shall make. 
Perfect, feci. 
Pluperf. feceram. 
F. Perf. fecero. 



SUB. 

INF. Perf. 
Fut. 
F. P. 



PASSIVE. 
fie, / am made, I become. 

fis, fit (fimus, fitis), fiunt. 
flebam, I icas made, I became. 
fiam, I shall be made {become). 
factus sum. 
factus eram. 
factus er5. 
flam, fias, fiat, etc. 
fierem, fieres, etc. 
factum esse, to have become. 
futurum esse or fore, 
factum fore. 



Remark. — The compounds of facio with Prepositions change the a of the stem into 
i, and form the Passive regularly from the same stem : perficio, I achieve^ Pass, perficior ; 
interficio, Pass, interficior, I am destroyed. But when compounded with words other 
than prepositions, facio retains its a, and uses fio as its Passive : 

patefacio, Hay open, Pass, patefio: calefacio, Iivarm, Pass, caleflo. 
The accent remains the same as in the simple verb : calefacis, thou warmest. 

189. 6. Vel-le, to be icilling, 
nolle, to be unwilling ; malle, to be willing rather. 





INDICATIVE. 






Present. 




volo, 


nolo, 


malo, 


vis, 


non vis, 


mavis, 


vult, 


non vult, 


mavult, 


volumus, 


nolumus, 


malumus, 


vultis, 


non vultis, 


mavultis, 


volunt. 


nolunt. 
Imperfect. 


malunt. 


volebam, 


n51ebam, 

Future. 


malebam. 


volam, 


nolam, 


malam, 


voles, 


noles, 

Perfect. 


males. 


Yplulj 


noluij 


malui. 



108 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 





SUBJUNCTIVE. 






Present. 




velim, 


nolim, 


malim, 


veils, 


noils, 


malls, 


velit, 


nolit, 


malit, 


vellmus, 


nSlimus, 


malimus, 


velitis, 


nolitis, 


malitis, 


velint. 


nolint. 
Isiperpect. 


malint. 


vellem, 


nollem, 


mallem. 



IMP.: 

INF. Pres. velle, 

Perp. voluisse, 
PART. volens. 

190. 



Sing. — noli, nolito, 
Plur. — n51ite, nolit5te, n51unt5. 

nolle, malle. 

noluisse, maluisse. 

nolens. 



Defective Verbs. 

1. ajo, / say ay. 

IND. Pres. 1. ajo, 2. ais, 3. ait. Plur. — 3. ajunt. 

Imperp. ajebam, etc. 
SUBJ. ajas, ajat, ajant. 

PART, ajens (as acij.), affirmative. 

2. inquam, I say, quoth I. 

IND. Pres. Sing. — 1. inquam, 2. inquis, 3. inquit. 

Plur. — 1. inquimus, 2. inquitis, 3/ inquiunt. 
Imperii 3. inquiebat. 

2. inquies, 3. inquiet. 
2. inquisti, 3. inquit. 
Plur. — 2. inquistis. 



Imperp. 

Fut. 

Perp. 



3. fa-ri, to speak. 

Pres. fatur. Fut. fabor, fabitur. Perp. fatus sum, etc. SUP, fatu 
IMPER. fare. GER. fandi, fando. PART. Pres. fantis, fantem, 



4. ave-re, salve-re, vale-re. 



ave, salve, salvebis, liail thou ! 
avete, salve te, hail ye ! 

avere, salvere. 

age, agite, come ! 



cedo, 



give 



1 



Plur. 



vale, farewell. 
valete, farewell. 
valere. 

apage, begone! 
-cette. 



OBSOLETE FORMS OF THE VERB. 109 

5. 

In use only in the Perfect-stem are coepi, I have begun, to which incipio 
serves as a Present ; memini, I remember ; odi, I hate ; n5vi (from ndseo, 
see 179), I know, am aware ; consuevi (from consuesco), lam wont. 
IND. coepi, I have begun. SUBJ. coeperim, 

coeperam, coepissem. 

coepero. INF. coepisse, to ham begun. 

IND. memini, I remember, SUBJ. meminerim, 

memineram, meminissem. 

meminero. INF. meminisse, to remember. 

DIPER Sing. — memento. Pltjr.— mementate. 

IND. odi, I hate, SUBJ. oderim, 

oder am, o diss em, 

odero. INF. odisse, to hate. 

coepi and odi have passive forms of the same meaning : 

coeptus sum } Ifiave begun (which is used with the Passive Inf.). 
osus sum, I hate. 

191. Obsolete Forms of the Verb. 

1. The Future of Verbs in -io is sometimes formed like Ibo, / shall go : 
venibo, I shall come ; scibo, 1 shall knoic. 

2. The Pres. Inf. Pass, was origiually longer by -er : monstrarier, 
miscerier, admittier, experirier. 

3. The Pres. Subj. Act. had an ending -im (compare sim, velim) : edim, 
edis, edit, edint, eat ; effodint, dig out ; coquint, cook. Stem vowels were 
dropped : temperint, carint. Dare formed duim ; so, perduim, creduim. 

4. In older poetry ie of the Imperf. Ind. Act. 4th conj. is sometimes con- 
tracted into I : scibam. 

5. In the Perfect stem there was a shorter formation. So in the 2 Pers. 
Perf. Act. Ind. 3 conj., dixti, dixtis (only from mute stems). The termi- 
nations -sim and -sem (Perf. and Pluperf. Subj.), -so (Fut. Perf), -se (Perf. 
Inf.), are added to the verb stem. After a vowel s becomes ss. So dixim, 
faxim, adaxim, rapsim; locassim, negassim; faxem, extinxem ; faxo, 
capso, jusso, amasso ; surrexe, protraxe, dixe. The Inf. forms of the 
vowel conjugations coincide with amasse, flesse, audisse, as creasti, de- 

; lesti, audisti with dixti. A Future Inf. in -sere is also found : impetras- 
sere, prohibessere. Compare, however, facessere, capessere. 
The antiquated forms of facio are often found in old formulae. 

6. Old forms of esse. 

(1) si em, sies, siet, Pr. Subj. 

(2) escit, escunt, Inchoative for Fut. 

(3) fuam, fuas, fuat, fuant, Pr. Subj. (stem fa-). 

(4) fuvi, fovi, Pf. Ind. 



110 



INDEX OF VERBS. 



INDEX OF VERBS. 



Tins Index is intended to serve as a supplement also, and contains 
many verbs not mentioned in the text, defectives in supine or in perfect 
and supine, compounds, isolated forms, rare words. 

A Ajo, 190. 

Albeo, ere, to be white. 

Algeo, ere, alsi, 160. 

lexi 
Al-licio, ere, n^ cul l -lectum, 161. 

Al-luo, ere, -lui, lutum, 173. 
Alo, ere, alul, al(i)tum, 176. 
Amb-igo (ago), ere, 159. 
Arnb-io (eo), ire, Ivi (ii), Itum, 185. 

Amicio, Ire, (^j^ 1 ') amictum, 176. 

Amo, 5re, avi, atum. See 119. 

Amplector, I, amplexus, 175. 

Ango, ere, anxi, 160. 

An-nuo, ere, annul (annutum), 173. 

Ante-cello, ere, 176. 

Ante-sto, -stare, -stetl, 178. 

Apage, 190. 

A-perio, -ire, aperul, apertum, 176. 

Apiscor, I, aptus sum. See adipiscor, 

175. 
Ap-peto, ere, Ivi, itum, 176. 
Ap- P lico(176) )are) g-^ S 

turn). 
Ap-pono (179), ere, -posul, -positum. 
Arceo, ere, arcul j arctus, 

(comp. 128) ( artus (adj.) 
Arcesso (accerso), ere, arcessivl, 

-itum, 176. 
Ardeo, ere, arsl, arsum, 165. 
Aresco, ere, arul, 181, to become dry. 

Arguo, ere, argui, f^g^) 173. 

Ar-ripio (rapio), ere, ui, -reptum, 

176. 
A-scendo (scando), ere, I, scensum, 

164. 
A-spicio, ere, a-spexl, a-spectum, 161. 
As-sentior, 111, assensus sum, 175. 
As-sideo (sedeo), ere, -sedl, -sessum, 

166. 
As-suesco, ere, -suevl, -suetum, 179. 
At-texo, ere, -texui, -textum, 172. 
At-tineo (teneo), ere, ui, -tentum, 

128. 



Ab-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 
Ab-igo (ago), ere, -egl, -actum, 159. 
Ab-jicio (jacio), ere, -jecl, -jectum, 

159. 
Ab-luo, ere, -lui, -lutum, 173. 
Ab-nuo, ere, -nut (-nuiturus), 173. 
Ab-oleo, ere, evl, itum, 127. 
Ab-olesco, ere, -olevl, 181. 
Ab-ripio (rapio), ere, -ripul, -rep- 
tum, 176. [177. 
Abs-conclo (do), ere, -dl (-didl), ditum, 
Ab-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178. 
Ab-sum, -esse, ab-ful, a-ful, 113. 
Ac-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum, 164. 
Ac-cido (cado), ere, -cidi, 168. 
Ac-cipio (capio), ere, -cepl, -ceptum, 

157. 
Ac colo (colo), ere, -colul, -cultum, 

176. 
Ac-cumbo, ere, -cubui, -cubitum, 

176. 
Ac-curro, ere, ac-currl, -cursum, 170. 
Aceo, ere, acul, to be sour. 
Acesco, ere, acul, 181, to get sour- 
Ac-qulro (quaero), ere, -qulsivl, 

-quisltum, 176. 
Acuo, ere, acul, acutum, 173. 
Ad-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 
Ad-imo (emo), ere, -Bml, -emtum, 131. 
Ad-ii)iscor, I, ad-eptus sum, 175, 182. 
Ad-olesco, ere, -olevl, -ultum, 181. 
Ad-orior, -orlri, -ortus sum, 184. 
Ad-scTsco, ere, -sclvl, -scltum, 181. 
Ad-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178. 
Ad-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161. 
Ad-sto, -stare, -stitl, 178. 
Ad-sum, ad-esse, ad-fui, af-ful, 113. 
Aegresco, ere, to fall sick. 
Af-tero, -ferre, at-tull, al-latum, 186. 
Age, 190. 

Ag-gredior, -gredl, -gressus, 175. 
A-gnosco, ere, a-gnovi, a-gnitum 

(agnoturus), 179. 
Ago, ere, egl, actum, 159. 



: 



INDEX OF YEEBS. 



Ill 



At-tingo (tango), ere, attigl, attac- 

tuin, 162. 
i At-tollo, ere, to raise up. 

Andeo, ere, ausus sum, 182. 

Audio, Ire, IvI, Itum. See 136. 
| Au-fero, -ferre, abstull, ablatum, 186. 

Aimeo, ere, auxl, auctuui, 156. 

Ave, 190. 

B. 

Balbutio, Ire, to stutter. 
BatuOj ere, ui, to pummel, fence. 
Bibo, ere. bibi, (bibituru), 183. 



c. 

Cado, ere, cecidl, casum, 168. 
Caecutio, ire, to be blind. 
Caedo, ere, cecidl, caesum, 168. 
Calefacio, ere, -feci, -factum, 159, 188. 
Calesco, ere, calul, to get warm. 
Calleo, ere, ul, to be skilled. 
Calveo, 5re, to be bald. 
Caudeo, ere, ul, to shine. 
Caneo, ere, to be gray. 
Cano, ere, cecini, cantum, 170. 
Capesso, ere, capesslvl, Itum, 176. 
Capio, ere, cepl, cap turn, 157. See 

139. 
Carpo, ere, carpsl, carptum, 158. 
Caveo, ere, cavl, cautum, 174. 
Odo, ere, cessi, cBssum, 166. 
Cenatus, 182, R. 1. 

Cerno, ere, (crSvi), (crStum), 180. 

S?'te'«vT ( citu m ,176. 

Cingo, ere, cinxi, cinctum, 160. 
Circum-do, -dare, -dedl, -datum, 177. 
Circum-sisto, ere, stetl, 178. 
Circum-sto, stare, stetl, 178. 
, Claudo, ere, clausi, clausula, 165. 

Clepo, ere, ?\^h cleptum, 158, 183. 

Co-alesco, ere, -alul, (-alitum), 181. 

Co-arguo, ere, ul, 173. 

Co-em o, ere, -5ml, -em(p)tum, 169. 

Coepi, coepisse, 190. 

Co-guosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnitum, 156, 

179. 
Co-go (ago), ere, co-Sgl, co-actum, 

159. 



Col-lido (laedo), ere, -lisl, -llsum, 

165. 
Col-ligo (lego), ere, -legl, -lectum, 

159. 
Col-luceo, ere, -luxl,160. 
Colo, ere, colui, cultum, 176. 
Coru-bu.ro, ere, -ussl, -ustum, 171. 
Com-edo, ere, -edi, -5sum (estum), 164. 
Comitatus, 182, R. 2. 
Comminiscor, I, commentus sum, 

175. 
Com-moyeo, ere, -movl, -motum, 174. 
Co-mo (emo), ere, compsl, comptum, 

169. 
Com-parco, ere, -parsl, -parsum, 162. 
Com-pello, ere, com-pull, -pulsum, 

168, 170. ' 
Com-perio (pario), ire, com-perl, 

com-per-tum, 170. 
Compesco, ere, ul, 176. 
Com-piugo, ere, -pegi, -pactum, 159. 
Com-plector, I, com-plexus, 175. 
Com-pleo, ere, evi, Stum, 127. 
Com-primo (premo), ere, -pressl, 

-pressum, 183. 
Com-pungo, ere, -punxl, -punctum, 

162. 
Cou-cido (cado), ere, -cidi, 168. 
Cou-cldo (caedo), ere, -cidi, -cisum, 

168. 
Con-cino (cano), ere, -ciuul, 176. 
Concitus (cleo), 176. 
Con-cludo (claudo), ere, -clusi,-clu- 

sum, 165. 
Cou-cupisco, ere, -cuplvl, cupltum, 

181. 
Con-cutio (quatio), ere, -cussi, -cus- 

sum, 167. 
Con-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177. 
Con-fercio (farcio), Ire (fersl), fer- 

tum, 160. 
Con-fero, -ferre, -tull, collatum, 186. 
Con-ficio (facio), ere, -feci, -fectum, 

159, 188. 
Con-fiteor (fateor), 5il, -fessus, 175. 
Con-fringo (frakgo), ere, -fregl, 

-fractum, 159. 
Con-gruo, ere, congrul, 173. 
Con-jicio (jacio), ere, -jBd, -jectum, 

159. 
Coujtiratus, 182, R. 1. 

Con.ulveo,5re, ( c ™ v I 1)) 163. 

Con-quiro (quaero), ere, -quIsIvL, 
-quisltum, 176. 



112 



INDEX OF VERBS. 



Con-sero, ere, -semi, -sertum, 176. 

Con-sero, ere, -sB\i, -si turn, 180. 

Con-sIderStus, 182, R, 1. 

Con-sldo, ere, cpnsBdl, -sessum, 167. 

Con-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178. 

Con-spicio, ere, -spexl,-spectum, 161. 

Con-stituo (statuo), ere, ul, -stitu- 
tum, 173. 

Con-sto, -stare, -still, (eonstattirus), 
178. 

Con-suesco, ere, -suBvI, -suBtum, 179, 
190. 

Consulo, ere, consulul, -sultum, 176. 

Con- tern no, ere, -tem(p)sl, -tem(p)- 
tum, 169. 

Con-texo, ere, -texui, -textum, 172. 

Con-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ul, -ten- 
turn. 

Con-tingo (tango), ere, contigi, con- 
tacting 162. 

Convalesce*, ere, -valul, -valitum, 181. 

Coquo, ere, coxT, coctum, 161, 183. 

Cor-ripio (rapio), ere, -ripul, -rep- 
tum, 176. 

Cor-ruo, ere, corral, 173. 

CrBbresco, ere, crBbrui, to get fre- 
quent. 

CrB-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177. 

Crepo, are, crepui, crepitum, 176. 

CrBsco, ere, crBvI, crBtum, 179. 

Cubo, are, cubui, cubitum, 176. 

Ciido, ere cudl, ctlsum, 167. 

Cupio, ere, cuplvl, cupitum, 176. 

Curro, ere, cucurri, cursurn, 170. 

D. 

DB-cerno, ere, -crBvI, -crBtum, 180. 
De-cerpo (carpo), ere, si, turn, 158. 
De-do, dedere, dedidi, deditum, 177. 
De-fendo, ere, -fendl, -fensum, 164. 
Defetiscor, I, to be worn out. 
De-go (ago), ere, 159. 
Deleo. See Paradigm, 123-126. 
De-ligo (lego), ere, -legl, -lectum, 

IT)!). 
De-mo (emo), ere, dempsl, demptum, 

169. 
Depello (170), ere, depull, depulsum. 
De-primo (pkemo, 183), ere, -pressl, 

pressnm. 
Depso, ere, depsul, depstum, 172. 
De-scendo (scando), ere, -scendl, 

-soensum, 164. 
De-sero, ere, -serul, -sertum, 176. 



De-silio (salio), ire, u ^' ( gf tUn * 

Dc-sino, ere, ^J/' desitum, 179. 

De-sipio (sapio), -ere, 176. 

De-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178. 

De-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161. 

De-sum, -esse, -fui, 113. 

De-tendo (168), ere, -tendl, -tentum. 

De-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, -ul, -ten- 
tum. 

De-vertor, -I, 182. 

Dico, ere, dixi, dictum, 160. 

Dif-fero, -ferre, distull, dilatum, 186, 

Dl-gnosco (nosco, 179), ere, -gnovl. 

Dl-ligo, ere, -lexi, -lectum, 161. 

Dl-mico, are, avi, atum, 176. 

Di-rigo, ere, -rexl, -rectum, 161. 

Dir-imo (emo, 169), ere, -Bml, -em- 
tum. 

Disco, ere, didicl, 162. 

Dis-crepo, are, -crepui (avi), 176. 

Dis-cumbo (176), ere, -cubui, -cubi 
turn. 

Dis-pesco, ere, [-pescui,] -pestum, to 
divide. 

Dis-sideo (seoeo, 166), ere, -sedl. 

Dl-stinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stiuctum, 160. 

Di-sto, -stare, 178. 

Dltesco, ere, to grow rich. 

Divido, ere, dlvlsl, dlvlsum, 167. 

Do, dare, dedl, datum, 177. 

Doceo, ere, docul, doctum, 128. 

Domo, are, ul, itum, 176. 

Dtico, ere, duxl, ductum, 160. 

Dulcesco, ere, to grow sweet. 

Duresco, ere, durui, to grow hard. 

E. 

Eclo, ere, edl, esum, 164, 187. 
E-do (do), edere, Bdidl, editum, 177. 
Ef-fero, -ferre, extuli, Blatum, 186. 
Egeo, ere, egul, to want. 
E-licio, ere, -licui, -licitum, 161. 
E-ligo (lego), ere, -legl, -lectum, 159. 
E-mico (176), are, ul (aturus). 
Emineo, ere, ul, to stand out. 
Emo, ere, Bml, em turn, 169. See 131. 

E-neco, are, { *™™^ 5liectum > 176 - 
Eo, ire, IvI, itum, 185. 
E-vado, ere, BvasI, Bvilsum, 165. 
E-vanesco, ere, Bvanui, 181. 
Ex-ardBsco, ere, exarsl, exarsum, 181. 



INDEX OF VERBS. 



113 



Ex-cello, ere, ul (excelsus), 176. 

Excitus, 176. 

Ex-cludo (clatjdo), ere, -si, -sum, 
165. 

Ex-cuito (170), ere, excucurri, -cur- 
sum. 

Ex-olBsco, ere, -olBvI, -olgtum, 181. 

Ex-pello (170), ere, -pull, -pulsum. 

Expergiscor, I, experrectus sum, 175. 

Ex-perior, In, -pertus sum, 175, 
182, R 2. 

Ex-pieo, 5re, Bvl, etum, 127. 

Ex-plico, are, ul (avl), itum (atum), 
176. 

Ex-plodo (plaudo), ere, -si, -sum, 165. 

Exsecratus, 182, R. 2. 

Ex-stinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stiuctum, 
160. 

Ex-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178. 

Ex-sto, are (exstaturus), 178. 

Ex-teudo, ere, di, -sum (-turn), 168. 

Ex-tollo, ere. 

Ex-uo, ere, -ul, -Titum, 173. 

F. 

Facesso (176), ere, Ivi (-1), Itum. 
Facio, ere, feci, factum, 159, 188. 
Fallo, ere, fefelli, falsum, 170. 
Farcio, Ire, farsl, fartum (-sum), 160. 
Fan, 190. 

Fateor, Sri, fassus sum, 175. 
Fatisco, ere, to fall apart. 
Fatiscor, I (fessus, adj). 
Faveo, ere, favi, fautum, 174. 
Ferio, Ire, to strike. 
Fero, ferre, tuli, latum, 183, 186. 
Ferveo, ere, fervl (ferbui), 174. 
Fldo, ere, fisus sum, 182. 
Flgo, ere, fixl, fixum, 160. 
Findo, ere, fidi, fissum, 168. 
Fingo, ere, fmxi, iictum, 160. 
Flo, fieri, factus sum, 188. 
Flecto, ere, flexl, flexum, 160. 
Fleo, ere, gvl, etum, 127. 
Fllgo, ere, fllxl, flictum, 160. 
Floreo, 5re, ul, to bloom. 
Fluo, ere, fluxl (fluxus, adj.), 163. 
Fodio, ere, fodl, fossum, 166. 
Forem, 112. 

Foveo, 5re, fovl, fotum, 174. 
Frango, ere, frBgl, fractum, 159. 
Fremo, ere, ul, itum, 176. 
Frendo (eo), ere (ul), frSsum, fres- 
sum, 176. 



Frico, are, ul, frictum (atum), 176. 

Frigeo, ere (frlxl), 160. 

Frlgo, ere, frlxl, frictum (frixum), 

160. 
Froudeo, Sre, ul, to be leafy. 
Fruor, I, fructus (fruitus) sum, 175. 
Fugio, ere, fugi, fugitum, 159. 
Fulcio, Ire, fulsl, fultum, 160. 
Fulgeo, 5re, fulsl, 160. 
Fuudo, ere, fudl, fusuni, 164. 
Fungor, I, fuuctus sum, 175. 
(Fnro, def.), furere, to ram. 

G. 

Gaunio, ire, to yelp. 

Gaudeo, 5re, gavlsus sum, 182. 

Gemo, ere, ul, itum, 176. 

Gero, ere, gessl, gestum, 171. 

Giguo, ere, geuul, geuitum, 176. 

Glisco, ere, to swell. 

Gradior, I, gressus sum, 175. 

H. 

Haereo, Sre, haesl, haesum, 171. 
Haurio, Ire, hausl, haustum, -j n ^ 
(hausurus, liausturus), ' * 
Hisco, ere, to yawn. 
Horreo, Sre, ul, to stand on end, 
Hortor, arl, atus sum, 141, 142. 



Ico, ere, Ici, ictum, 161. 
I-gnosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnotum, 179. 
Il-licio, ere, -lexi, -lectum, 161. 
Il-llclo (laedo), ere, -llsl, -llsum, 165. 
Imbuo, eve, ul, titum, 173. 
Imitatus, 182, R. 2. 
Immineo, Bre, to overhang. 
Im-pingo (pango, 160), ere, -pegl, 

-pactum. 
In-calesco, ere, -calul, 181. 
In-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum, 164. 
Incesso, ere, Ivi (I), 176. 
In-cido (cado, 168), ere, -cidl, -ca- 

sum. 
In-cido (caedo, 168), ere, -cidl, -cl- 

sam. 
In-cipio (capio, 157), ere, -c5pl, -cep- 

tum. 
In-crepo (ciiepo, 176), are, ul, itum. 
In-cumbo (176), ere, -cubul, -cubi- 

tum. 



114 



INDEX OF VERBS. 






In-cut io (quatio, 167), ere, -cussl, 

• cussum. 
Ind-igeo (egbo), Ore, ul, to want. 
Ind-ipiscor, I, indeptus sum, 175. 
In-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 
Indulgeo, ere, indulsl (indultum), 160. 
Iii-duo, ere, -dul, -datum, 173. 
Ineptio, Ire, to be silly. 
Ingemisco, ere, ingemui, 181. 
1 Dgruo, ere, ul. See congruo, 173. 
In-notesco (181), ere, notul. 
Iu-olesco, ere, -olevl, -olitum, 181. 
Inquam, 190. 
Iu-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sedi, -ses- 

sum. 
In-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178. 
In-spicio, ere, -spexi, -spectum, 161. 
Iuter-fieio, ere, -feci, -fectum, 159. 
In-sto, are, -stitl, (instaturus), 178. 
In-sum, -esse, -ml, 113. 
Intel-ligo, ere,-lexi, lectum, 161, 183. 
Iuter-imo (emo), ere, -eml, -emtum, 

169. 
Inter-pungo, ere, -punxl, -punctum, 

162. 
Inter-sto, are, -stetl, 178. 
Iuter-sum, -esse, -ful, 113. 
Inveierasco, ere, -avl, 181. 
In-vado, ere, invasi, -vasum, 165. 
Irascor, I, Iratus sum, 181. 



Jaceo, ere, jacul, to lie. 
"Jacio, ere, j eel, j actum, 159. 
Jubeo, £re, jussl, jussum, 183. 
Juugo, ere, junxl, junctum, 160. 
Juratus, 182, R. 1. 

Juvo, are, juvl, jutum (juvaturus), 
174. 

L. 

Labor, I, lapsus sum, 175. 

Lacesso, ere, lacessivl, -Itum, 176. 

Lacio, 161. 

Laedo, ere, laesl, laesum, 165. 

Lambo, ere, I, 158. 183. 

Langueo, ere, I, io be languid. 

Lateo, ere, ul, to lie hid. 

Lavo, are (ere), lavl, lautum, lotum, 

lavatum, 174. 
Lego, ere, legl, lectum, 159. 
Libet, libere, libuit (libitum est), it 

pleases. 
Licet, licere, licuit (licitum est), it is 

2 ermiited. 



Lingo, ere, linxl, linctum, 160. 

Lino, ere, llvl (levl), litum, 179. 

Linquo, ere, llqui, 159. 

Liqueo, ere, licul, to be clear, 

Llveo, 5re, to be livid. 

Loquor, I, locutus sum. Paradigm^ 

145, 146. 

Ltlceo, ere, luxl, 160. 

Ltido, ere, lusl, lusum, 165. 

Lugeo, ere, luxl, 160. 

t ~ ™„ i ,- S lutum, to wash, 173. 
Luo,ere,lm \ Mtm ^ toaton ' efor . 

M. 

Maereo, ere, io grieve. 

Malo, Hialle, malul, 189. 

Mando, ere, mandl, mansum, 164. 

Maneo, ere, mansi, mansum, 183. 

Medeor, erl, to heal. 

Meminl, 190. 

Mentior, Iri, Itus. Paradigm, 147. 

Mereor, en, meritus sum, 182, R. 2. 

Mergo, ere, mersl, inersum, 160. 

Metior, Iri, mensus sum, 183. 

Meto, ere, messul (rare), messum, 

183. 
Metuo, ere, ul, 173. 
Mico, are, ul, 176. 
Minuo, ere, minul, mintitum, 173. 
Misceo, ere, ul, mixtum, (mistum), 

128. 
' Misereor, erl miseritus, (misertus) 

sum, 175. 
Mitto, ere, mlsl, missum. 166. 
Molo, ere, molul, molitum, 176. 
Moneo, ere, ul, itum, 129, 130. 
Mordeo, ere, momordl, morsum, 168. 

Mono r) mo, I)n - o ~ us su m) 183. 

Moveo, ere, movl, motum, 174. 
Mulceo, ere, mulsi, mulsum, 160. 
Mulgeo, ere, mulsi, mulsum(ctum), 

160. 
Mungo, ere, munxi, munctum, 160. 

N. 

Nanciscor, I, n actus (nanctus), 175. 
Nascor, I, natus sum (nasciturus)ll 

181. 
Neco, are, avl, atum, 176. 
Necto, ere, nexl (nexul), nexum, 160|j 
Neg-iigo, ere, -lexl, -lectum, 161. 
Necoplnatus, 182, R. 2. 
Neo, nere, nevi, netum, 127. 



INDEX OF VERBS. 



Nequeo, ire, 185. 
Noteseo, ere, notul, 181. 
ISTingo, ere, ninxl, 160. 
Niteo, ere, ui, to shine. 
Nltor, I, nixus (nlsus) sum, 175. 
Nolo, nolle, nolul, 189. 
Noceo, ere, ui (nocittirus), to be hurt- 
ful 
Nosco, ere, novi, notum, 179. 
Nubo, ere, nupsl, riuptum, 158. 



i Ob-do, ere, -didi, -ditura, 177. 

S Ob-dormlsco, ere, -dorrnlvl, -dorinl- 

tum, 181. 
! Obllviscor, I, oblltus sum, 175. 
Ob-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sedl, -ses- 

sum. 
Ob-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178. 
Obs olesco, ere, -olevl, -oletum, 181. 
Ob-sto, stare, stiti (obstaturus), 178. 
lObtineo (teneo, 128), ere, -tinul, 

-tentum. 
( Oc-cido, (cado), ere, -cidi, -casum, 

168. 
Oc-cido (caedo), ere, -cidi, -clsum, 

168. 
Oc-cino (cano), ere, -clnui, 176. 
Oc-cipio (capio), (157), ere, -cepl, 

-ceptum. 
Occulo, ere, occului, occultum, 176. 
Odl, def., 190. 

Of-fendo (164), ere, -fendi, -fensum. 
Of-fero, -ferre, obtuli, oblatum, 186. 
Oieo, ere, ui, to smell. 
Olesco. See 181. - 
Operio, Ire, operui, opertum, 176. 
Opluatus, 182, R. 2. 
Opperior, in, oppertus (or Itus). 

Comp. 175, 5. 
Ordior, Iri, orsus sum, 175. 
Orior, In, ortus sum (oriturus), 184. 
-Os-tendo, ere, -tendl, -ten-sum (-ten- 
uis), 168: 

P. 

Paciscor, I, pactus sum, 175, 182, R. 2. 
Palleo, -ere, -ui, to be pale. 
Pando, ere, pandl, passum (pansum), 
166. 

Parco, ere, pepercl (parsl), parsurus, 

162. 
Pario, ere,peperl, partum(pariturus), 

170. 



115 



Partior, iri, Itus, 182, R. 2. 

Pasco, ere, pavi, pastum, 179. 

Pate-facio, ere, -feci, -factum, 188. 

Pateo, ere, ui, to be open. 

Patior, I, passus sum, 175. 

Paveo, ere, pavi, 174. 

Pecto, ere, pexi, pexum, 160. 

-lexl 
Pel-licio, -licere, nj cu J\ -lectum,161. 

Pello, ere, pepuli, pulsum, 170. 
Pendeo, ere, pependl, 168. 
Pendo, ere, pependl, pensum, 168. 
Per-cello, ere, percull, perculsum, 

170. 
Percenseo (censeo), ere, -censul, 

-ceusum. 
Percitus (cieo), 176. 
Per-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177. 
Per-eo, Ire, peril, itum, 185. 
Per-ricio, ere, -feci, fectum, 188. 
Pergo (rego), ere, perrexl, perrec- 

tum, 161. 
Per-petior (patior, 175), I,perpessus 

sum. 
Per-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161. 
Per-sto, -stare, -stiti, 178. 
Per-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ui. 
Pessum-do, -dare, -cledl, -datum, 

177. 
Peto, ere, Ivi (il), Itum, 156, 176. 
Piget, pigere, piguit, pigitum est, it 

irks. 
Pingo, ere, pinxl, pictum, 160. 
Pinso, ere, ui (I), pinsitum (pistum, 

pinsum), 172. 
Plango, ere, planxl, planctum, 160. 
Plaudo, ere, plausl, plausum, 165. 
Plecto, ere, plexl, plexum, 160. 
Plector, I, to be punished. 
Pleo. See 127. 
Plico, are, ui (avl), itum (atum), 176. 

Polleo, ere, to be potent. 

Pouo (169), ere,posuI, positum, 179. 

Posco, ere, poposcl, 162. 

Pos-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sedl, ses- 

sum. 
Pos-sum, posse, potul, 115. 
Poto, are, avl, potum, potatum, 176. 
Potus, 182, R. 1. 
Prae-cello, ere, cellul, 176. 
Prae-cino, ere, cinui, 176. 
Prae-curro, ere, -cucurrl, -cursum, 

170. 
Prae-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, sedl. 



1JC 



INDEX OF VERBS. 



Prac-sum, -esse, -fin, 113. 

Prae-sto, -stare, -stitl, (-statQrus), 

178. 
Prandeo, Bre, prandl, pransum, 164, 

182, R. 1. 
Prehendo, crc, prcliendl, prehensum, 

164. 
Pre mo, ere, pressl, pressum, 183. 
Pr5d-igo (ago, 159), ere, -Bgl. 
Pro-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 
Pro-ficiscor, I, profectus sum, 175. 
Pro-fiteor (fateor, 175), Sri, -fessus 

sum. 
Promo (emo), ere, prompsl, promp- 

tum, 169. 
Pro-sum, prodesse, profui, 114. 
Pro-tenclo (tendo, 168), ere, -tendl, 

-tentum, -teusum. 
Psallo, ere, I, 170. 
Pudet, Bre, puduit, puditum est, it 

sliames. 
Puerasco, ere, to become a boy. 
Pungo, ere, pupugl, puuctum, 162. 

Q. 

Quaero, ) ere, quaesivl, quaesltum, 

Quaeso, j 176. 

Quatio, ere, (quassl), quassum, 166. 

Queo, quire, 185. 

Queror, querl, questus sum, 175. 

Quiesco, ere, quievi, quietum, 179. 

R. 

Rado, ere, rasl, rasum, 165. 

Rapio, ere, rapul, raptum, 176. 

Raucio, ire, rausi, rausum, 183. 

Re-censeo (censeo, 128), ere, -cBnsuI, 
-cBnsum (recensltum). 

Recitidesco, ere, -crudul, to get raw 
again. 

Red-arguo (173), ere, -argul. 

Red-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 

Red-igo (ago), ere, -S^I, -actum, 159. 

Re-fello (fallo, 170), ere, refelll. 

Re-iero (183, 186), -ferre, -tull, -la- 
tum. 

Rego, ere, rexl, rectum, 161, 183. 

Re-linquo, ere, -llqul, -lictum, 159. 

Reminiscor, I, to recollect. 

Renldeo, ere, to glitter. 

Reor, rBrl, ratus sum, 183. 

Re-perio, Ire, reperl, repertum, 170. 

Repo, ere, repsi, reptum, 158. 

Re-sipisco, ere, -siplvi (-sipul), 181. 

Re-sis to, ere, -stitl, -stitum, 178. 



Re-spoudeo (168), ere, -spondl, -spon- 
sum. 

Re-sto, stare, -stitl, 178. 

Restinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stinctum, 160. 

Re-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ui, -ten- 
turn. 

Re-vertor, I, reverti, reversum, 167. 

Re-vivisco, ere, vixi, victum, 181. 

Rldeo, ere, rlsi, risum, 165. 

Rigeo, ere, ui, to be stiff. 

Rodo, ere, rosi, rosum, 165. 

Rubeo, ere, ui, to be red. 

Rudo, ere, rudlvl, Itum, 176. 

Rumpo, ere, rupi, ruptum, 157. 

Ruo, ere, rul, rutum (ruiturus), 173. 



s. 

Salio, ire, ( g s ^ saltum, 176. 

Sallo, ere, salli, salsum, 170. 
Salve, def., 190. 

Sancio^rB.san^J^^l^ 

Sapio, ere (saplvl), sapui, 176. 
Sarcio, ire, sarsi, sartum, 160. 
Satis-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum, 177. 
Scabo, ere, scabi, to scratch. 
Scalpo, ere, scalpsl, scalptum, 158. 
Scando, ere, scandl, scansum, 164. 
Scateo, ere, to gush forth. 
Sciudo, ere, scidi, scissum, 168. 
Sclsco, ere, scivi, scltum, 181. 
Scribo, ere, scrlpsi, scrlptum, 158. 
Sculpo, ere, sculpsi, sculptum, 158. 

Seco.sre, seem, s s e e « s> 176. 

Sedeo, ere, sedl, sessum, 166. 
Seligo (lego, 159), ere, -lsgl, -lectum. 
Sentio, ire, sensi, sensum, 165. 
Sepelio, Ire, Ivi, sepultum, 176. 
Sepio, ire, sepsl, septum, 158. 
Sequor, I, seciitus sum, 175. 
Sero, ere, 176. 
Sero, ere, sBvI, satum, 180. 
Serpo, ere, serpsi, serptum, 158. 
Sido, ere, sldl, 167. 
Sileo, ere, ui, to be silent. 
Sino, ere, slvl, situm, 179. 
Sisto, ere, stitl, statum, 178. 
Sitio, Ire, Ivi, to thirst. 
Soleo, ere, solitus sum, 182. 
Solvo, ere, solvl, solutum, 174. 



Sono, are, sonul, 



sonitum, 



176. 



sonattirus, 
Sorbeo, ere (sorp-si), sorbul, 158. 



INDEX TO VERBS. 



117 



Sordeo, ere, ul, to be dirty. 
Sortior, Irl, sortltus sum, 182, R. 2. 
Spargo, ere, sparsl, sparsum, 160. 
Sperno, ere, sprevi, spretum, 180. 

-Spicio. See ad-spicio. 
Splendeo, ere, ui, to shine. 
Spondeo, ere, spopondl, sponsuni, 

168. 
Spuo, ere, spul, sputum, 173. 
Squaleo, ere, to be rough, foul. 
Statuo, ere, statu!, statutum, 173. 
Sterno, ere, stravl, stratum, 180. 
Sternuo, ere, sternui, 173. 
Sterto, ere, stertul, 176. 
-Stinguo, ere, 160. 
Sto, stare, steti, statum, 178. 
Strepo, ere, strepul, strepitum, 176. 
Strldeo, ere (ere), strldl, 167. 
Stringo, ere, strinxl, strictum, 160. 
Struo, ere, struxT, structum, 163. 
Studeo, ere, ui, to be zealous. 
Stupeo, ere, ui, to be astounded. 
Suadeo, ere, suasi, suasum, 165. 
Sub-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 
Sub-igo (ago, 159), ere, -egl, -actum. 
Suc-cedo (cedo, 166), ere, -cessl, 

-cessum. 
Suc-cendo {see ac-cendo, 164), ere, 

-cendl, -ceusum. 
Suc-censeo (128), 5re, ui, -ceusum. 
Suesco, ere, su5vl, suetum, 179. 
Suf-fero, -ferre, sus-tiuui, 186, R 
Suf-ficio (facio, 159), ere, -feci, -fec- 

tum. 
Suf-fodio (166), ere, -fodi, -fossum. 
Sug-gero (see 171), ere, -gessi, -ges- 

tum. 
Sugo, ere, suxi, suctum, 160. 
, Sam, esse, fui, 112. 
Sumo (emo), ere, sumpsi, sumptum, 

169. 
Suo, ere, sul, sutum, 173. 
Superbio, Ire, to be haughty. 
Super-sto, -stare, -steti, 178. 
Super-sum, -esse, -fill, 113. 
Sup-pouo (see 179), ere, -posui, -posi- 

tum. 
Surgo (rego), ere, surrexi, surrec- 

tum, 161. 

I T - 

Taedet, pertaesum est, it tires. 
Tango, ere, tetigi, tactum, 162. 
Tego, ere, texl, tectum, 161, 183. 



Temno, ere, 169. 

Tendo, ere, tetendi, tensum (-turn), 

168. 
Teueo, ere, tenui, (tentum), 128. 
Tergo (eo), ere, tersi, tersum, 160. 
Tero, ej-e, trlvi, tritum, 180. 
Texo, ere, texui, textum, 172. 
Timeo, ere, ui, to fear. 
Ting(u)o, ere, tinxl, tinctum, 160. 
Tollo, ere (sustuli, sublatum), 170. 
Tondeo, ere, totondi, tonsum, 168. 
Touo, are, ui, 176. 
Torpeo, ere, ui, to be torpid. 
Torqueo, ere, torsi, tortum, 160. 
Torreo, ere, torrul, tostum, 128. 
Tra do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 
Trah o, ere, traxl, tractum, 163. 
Tremo, ere, ui, 176. 
Tribuo, ere, ui, tributum, 173. 
Trudo, ere, trusi, trusum, 165. 

Tueor, en ^^f tutatus sum, 182, 

R. 2. 
Tumeo, ere, ui, to swell. 
Tunclo, ere, tutudi, tunsum, tusum, 

168. 
Turgeo, ere, tursi, 160. 

u. 

Ulciscor, I, ultus sum, 175. 
Ungo, ere, unxl, uuctum, 160. 
Urgeo, ere, ursi, 160. 
Uro, ere, ussi, ustum, 171. 
Utor, I, usus sum, 175. 

v. 

Vado, ere, 165. 
Vale, 190. 

Velio, ere, vexl, vectum, 163. 
Velio, ere, velll (vulsi), vulsum, 170. 
Veu-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177. 
Ven-eo, ire, Ivi (il), 185. 
Venio, Ire, venl, ventum, 170. 
Veoum-do, -dare, dedl, -datum, 

177. 
Vereor, 6rl, yeritus sum. See 143. 
Verro, ere, verri, versum, 170. 
Verto, ere, verti, versum, 167. 
Vescor, I, to feed. 
Vcsperasco, ere, 181. 
Veto, are, vetul, vetitum, 176. 
Video, ere, vldl, visum, 164. 



118 



INDEX OF VERBS. 



Vieo, Ore, Btum, to phut. See 127. 
Vigeo, 6re, ul, to flourish. 
Vincio, Ire, vinxl, vinctum, 160. 
Vinco, ere, vlcl, victum, 159. 
Vlso, ere, vlsl, visum, 172. 



Vivo, ere, vixl, victum, 163. 
Volo, velle, volul, 189. 
Volvo, ere, volvi, voltitum, 174. 
Vomo, ere, vomul, vomitum, 176. 
Voveo, ere, vovl, votum, 174. 



SYNTAX. 



SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 

192. Syntax treats of the formation and combination of 
sentences. 

Sentences are diyided into simple and compound. 

A simple sentence is one in which the necessary parts occur 
out once. 

The necessary parts of the sentence are the subject and the 
predicate. 

The predicate is that which is said of the subject. 

The subject is* that of which the predicate is said. 

Luna splendet, The moon shines. 

Luna is the subject; splendet, the predicate. 

193. The most simple form of the sentence is the finite verb : 
i-u-m, I am; doce-s, thou teachest ; scrlb-i-t, he writes. 

t Remark.— Here the form contains in itself all the necessary elements (compare 111): 
is the first person, s the second, t the third. From the expansion and modification of 
e finite verb arise all the complicated forms of the compound sentence. 

194. The subject of the finite yerb is always in the Nomina- 
tive Case, or so considered. 

. Remarks. — 1. The subject of the Infinitive is in the Accusative. 

2. The use of the Nominative in Latin is the same as in English. 

3. The Vocative (the case of Direct Address) is not affected by the structure of the 
entence, and doe3 not enter as an element into Syntax, except in the matter of Concord. 
^he form differs from the Nominative in the Second Declension only, and even there the 
Nominative is sometimes used instead, especially in poetry and solemn prose. (See 
farther, 324, R. 1.) 

Almae filius Majae. Hor. Son of mild Maia! 

Audi tti, populus Albanus. Liv. Hear thou, people of Alba! 

is prefixed to give emphasis to the address : 



120 FORMS OF THE SUBJECT. 

formose puer, nimium ne cre"de colon. Verg. shapely boy! trust not com- 
ph.vion all too much. 

The vocative is commonly interjected in prose, except in highly emotional passages. 

195. The Subject may be a noun or pronoun, or some other 
word or phrase used as a noun : 

Dens mundum gubernat, God steers the universe. 
Ego reges ejeci, I drove out kings. 

Sapiens res adversas non timet, The sage does not fear adversity. 
Victi in servitutem rediguntur, The vanquished are reduced to slawry. 
Contendisse decorum est. Ov. To have struggled is honorable. 
Magnum est beneficium naturae quod necesse est morl. Sen. It is 
a great boon of nature, that we must needs die. 
Vides habet duas syllabas, (The word) " vides" has tioo syllables. 



' The following remarks may be omitted by the beginner. 
Remarks. — 1. Masculine and Feminine adjectives and participles are used as sub- 
stantives, chiefly in the plural number: pauperes, the poor ; divites, the rich' docti, 
the learned ; whereas, in the singular, the substantive is generally expressed: vir bonus, 
a good man; homo doctus, a learned person ; mulier peregrina, a foreign woman. 
When persons are not meant, a substantive is understood : cani (capilll), grey hairs ; 
calida (aqua), warm water ; dextra (manus), right hand. 

2. Neuter adjectives and participles are freely employed as substantives in both num- 
l ers: medium, the midst; extremum, the end ; reliquum, the residue ; futurum, the 
future ; bonum, good; bona, blessings, possessions; malum, evil; mala, misfortunes. 
The plural is frequently employed when the English idiom prefers the singular : vera, the 
truth ; omnia, everything. 

3. Adjectives of the Second Declension are sometimes used as neuter substantives in 
the Genitive case, afterwords of quantity or pronouns : aliquid boni, something good ; 
nihil mall, nothing bad. Adjectives of the Third Declension are thus employed only 
in combination with those of the Second. (See 371, R. 2.) 

4. Instead of the neuter adjective the word r6s, thing, is frequently used, especially in 
forms which are identical for different genders ; so bonarum rerum, of blessings, rather 
than bonorum (m. and n.). 

5. In Latin the plural of abstract nouns occurs more frequently than in English : 
adventus imperatorum, the arrival(s) of the generals (because there were severa' ■ 
generals, or bee mse they arrived at different times). Pluralizing abstract nouns makes 
thom concrete : fortitiidinSs, gallant actions ; formidinSs, bugbears ; Irae, quarrels. 

0. Other plural expressions to be noted are : nives, snow-flakes) • grandines, hai 
(stones ) ; pluviae, (streams of) rain; ligna, (logs of) wood ; carngs, pieces of meat ; aera 
articles of bronze ; also symmetrical parts of the human body: cervices, neck ; pectora 
breast. 

The Plural is freely used in poetry : 

Otia si tollas, periere Cupidinis arcus. Ov. If you do away with holidays, Cupid 1 
bow (and arrows) are ruined. 

7. The rhetorical Roman often uses the First Person plural for the First Person sing! 
lar. The usage originates in modesty, but mock modesty is the worst form of pompositj 
In poetry there is often an element of shyness. 

Librum de" senectute ad te misimus. Cic. We (I) have sent you a treatise on ol\ 
age. 

Sitque memor nostrl necne, referte mini. Ov. Bring me back (word) whether s/|l 
thinks of us (me among others; or no. 



COPULA AND COPULATIVE VERBS. 121 

8. The Singular, in a collective sense, is also used for the Plural, but more rarely: faba, 
vans ; porcus. pig (meat) ; gallina./o^(as articles of food) ; vestis, clothing ; hostis, 
he enemy ; miles, the soldiery ; pedes, infantry ; eques, cavalry. 

196. Copula. — When the predicate is not in the form of a 
rerb, the so-called Copula is generally employed, in order to 
3onple the adjective or substantive with the subject. 

The chief Copula is the verb sum, I am. 

Fortuna caeca est. Cic. Fortune is blind. 

Usus magister est optimus. Cic. Practice is the best teacher. 

Remark.— Strictly speaking, the Copula is itself a predicate, as is shown by the 
ranslation when it stands alone or with an adverb : est Deus, there is a God, God exists ; 
•ecte semper erunt res, things vjill always be (go on) well ; sic vita hominum est, 
vch is human life ; u So runs the world away." 

197. Other copulative verbs are: viderl, to seem; apparere, 
)o appear ; manere, to remain ; nascl, to be lorn ; fieri, to become; 
3vadere, to turn out ; crearl, to be created ; deligl, to be chosen ; 
putarl, to be thought ; haberl, to be held; did, to be said ; appel- 
arl, to be called; nominan, to be named. Hence the rule: 

Verbs of Seeming, Remaining, Becoming, with the Passive of 
yerbs of Making and Choosing, Showing, Thinking, and Call- 
ing, take two nominatives, one of the Subject, one of the Predi- 
cate : 

Nemo dives nascitur. Sen. No one is born rich. 

Aristides Justus appellatur, Aristides is called just. 

Servius Tullius rex est declaratus. Liv. Servius Tullius was declared 
king. 

Thucydides nunquam numeratus est 5rator. Cic. Thucydides has 
never been accounted an orator. 

Remarks.— 1. All copulative verbs retain the Nominative with the Infinitive after 
auxiliary verbs. (424.) 

Beatus esse sine virtiite nemo potest. Cic. No one can be happy without virtue. 
2. On the Double Accusative construction after Active Verbs, see 334. 

198. Subject Omitted. — The personal pronoun is not ex- 
pressed, unless it is emphatic, as for example in contrasts : 

Amamus parentis, We love (our) parents. 

Ego reges ejeci, vos tyrannds introducitis. Cic. I drove out kings, ye 
are bringing in tyrants. 

199. Verbs that have no definite subject are called Imper- 
sonal Verbs, chiefly relating to the state of the weather : 

6 



L22 CONCORD. 

Tonat, it thunders; fulgurat, fulminat, it lightens; pluit, it rains; 
ningit, it snows. 

Remarks.— 1. The passive of intransitive verbs (201) is often used impersonally: 
vivitur, people live / curritur, there is a running. The subject is contained in the verb 
itself : sic vivitur = sic vita vivitur, such is life. In the same way explain taedet, 
it wearies; miseret, it moves to pity ; piget, it disgusts ; pudet, it puts to shame. 

2. All other so-called Impersonal Verbs have an Infinitive or an equivalent for a sub- 
ject. 

3. Other uses coincide with the English. So the Third Person Plural of verbs of Saying, 
Thinking, and Calling. So the Ideal Second Person Singular. (2-52.) To be noticed is 
the occasional use of inquit, quoth he, of an imaginary person : 

Non concedo, inquit, Epicuro. Cic. i" do not yield the point, quoth he (one), to 
Epicurus. 

200. Copula Omitted. — Est or sunt is often omitted in saws 
and proverbs, in sliort questions, in rapid changes, and in tenses 
compounded with participles : 

Summum jus summa injuria, The height of right (is) the height of wrong. 
Nemo malus felix. Juv. No bad man (is) happy. Quid dulcius quam 
habere quicum omnia audeas loqui. Cic. What sweeter than to ham some 
one, with whom yon can venture to talk about everything t Aliquamdiu cer- 
tatum. Sall. The struggle was kept up for some time. 

So also esse with participles and the like. 

Caesar statuit exspectandam classem. Caes. Caesar resolved that the 
fleet must be waited for. 

Concord. 

201. The Three Concords. — There are three great con- 
cords in Latin : 

1. The agreement of the predicate with the subject. 

2. The agreement of attributive or appositive with the substantive. (281, 
319.) 

3. The agreement of the Pronoun with the Noun (Relative with ante- 
cedent.) (616.) 

Remark.— It may be well for the beginner to study these together. 

202. Agreement of the Predicate with the Subject. 

The verbal predicate >• agrees with its subject \ m number 
1 ) *=> J ( and person. 

i( in number, 
agrees with its subject •< gender, and 
( case. 

The substantive predicate agrees with its subject in case. 






COXCOKD. 123 

Substantiva m5bilia (21) are treated as adjectives, and follow the num- 
ber and gender of the subject. 

Ego reges ejeci, vostyrann5s introducitis (198). 

Verae amicitiae sempiternae sunk Cic. True friendships are abiding. 

Dos est decern talenta. Ter. The doiory is ten talents. 

Usus magister est optimus. Cic. Practice is the best teacher. 

Athenae sunt omnium doctrinarum inventrices. Cic. Athens is the 
Inventor of all branches of learning. 

Arx est monosyllabum. " Arx" is a monosyllable. 

Remarks. — 1. The violation of the rules of agreement is due chiefly to 
3ne of two causes : 

I. The natural relation is preferred to the artificial (constructio ad sen- 
sum, per synesin, according to the sense). 

n. The nearer is preferred to the more remote. Hence : 

Exceptions. — 1) Nouns of multitude often take the predicate in the 
Plural : pars, part; vis, quantity ; multitudo, crowd; organized bodies 
more rarely. 

Pars major receperant sese. Lrv. The greater part had retired. 

Omnis multitudo abeunt. Liv. All the crowd depart. 

2) The adjective predicate often follows the natural gender of the sub- 
ject : 

Capita conjuration] s virgis caesi sunt. Lrv. The heads of the con- 
spiracy were flogged. 

3) The copula often agrees with the number of the predicate (" the wages 
3f sin is death") : 

Amantium Irae (195, R. 5) am5ris integratio est. Ter. Lovers' quarrels 
ire love's renewal. 

2. A superlative adjective defined by a partitive genitive follows the 
gender of the subject when it precedes : 

Hordeum omnium frugum mollissimum est. Pltn. Barley is the softest 
?f all grains. 

Otherwise it follows the genitive: 

Velocissimum omnium animalium est delphinus. Pltn. The dolphin 
is the swiftest of all animals. 

3. The Vocative is sometimes used by the poets in the predicate, either 
by anticipation or by assimilation, (See 324, R. 1.) 

4. The neuter adjective is often used as the substantive predicate of 
a masculine or feminine subject : 

Triste lupus stabulls. Yerg. The wolf is destruction to the folds. 
Omnium rerum (195, R. 4) mors est extremum, Cic. Death is the end 
pf all things. 

5. The demonstrative pronoun is commonly attracted into the gender 
of the predicate : 



3 



124 voices. 

Ea non media sed nulla via est. Liv. That is not a middle course, but 
no course at all. 

Non ego illam mihi duco d5tem esse, quae dos dxcitur. Platjt. Tliat 
which is called a dowry I deem not my doicry, no, not L 

When the pronoun is the predicate there is no change. So in defini- 
tions. 

Quid est Deus ? What is God ? 

FOKMS OE THE VERBAL PREDICATE. 
Voices of the Verb. 

203. There are two Voices in Latin — Active and Passive. 
The latter seems to have been Keflexive in its origin. 

204. The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds 
from the subject. 

Verbs are called Transitive when their action goes over to an 
object; Intransitive when their action does not go beyond the 
subject: occldere, to fell = to kill (Transitive); occidere, to fall 
(Intransitive). 

Remark. — Transitive verbs are often used intransitively, and Intransitive verbs 
transitively : suppeditare, to supply (Transitive), to be. on hand (Intransitive) ; queror, 
/ complain (Intransitive), I complain of (Transitive). When transitive verbs are used in- 
transitively they serve simply to characterize the agent. When intransitive verbs are 
used transitively it is chiefly with an accusative of the Inner object. (331, R. 2.) 

205. The Passive Voice denotes that the subject receives the 
action of the Verb. 

The instrument is put in the Ablative. 
Virgis caeditur, He is beaten with rods. 

The agent is put in the Ablative with ab (a). 

A patre caeditur, He is beaten by (his) father. 

Remarks. — 1. Intransitive verbs of Passive signification are construed as Passives : 
fame" perire, to perish of hunger. 

Ab reo fustibus vapulavit. Quint. He was whacked with cudgels by the defendant. 

2. When the instrument is considered as an agent, or the agent as an instrument, the 
constructions are reversed : 

Vinci a Voluptate, to be overcome by Pleasure. Cic. 

Poeno mllite portas frangimus. Juv. We break down the gates with the Punic 
soldiery (as if with a battering-ram). 

Animals, as independent agents, are treated like Persons. 

A cane non magno saepe ten6tur aper. Ov. A boar is often held fast by a little 
dog. 



YOICBS. 125 

Animals, as instruments, are treated like Things. 

Equ5 vehi, to ride a horse (to be borne by a horse) ; in equo, on horseback. 

206. The person in whose interest an action is done is put 
in the Dative. Hence, the frequent inference that the person 
interested is the agent. 

With the Perfect Passive it is the natural inference, and com- 
mon in prose. 

Res mini tota provisa est. Cic. I have had the whole thing provided 
for. 

Carmina scripta mihi sunt nulla. Ov. Poems — I have none written (I 
have written no poems). 

With the Gerundive it is the necessary inference, and the 
Dative is the reigning combination. 

Nihil est homini tarn timendum quam invidia. Cic. There is nothing 
that one has to fear to the same extent as envy. See 352. 

207. The Direct Object of the Active Verb (the Accusative 
Case) becomes the Subject of the Passive. 

Alexander Darium vicit, Alexander conquered Darius. 

Darius ab Alexandra victus est, Darius was conquered ly Alexander. 

208. The Indirect Object of the Active Verb (Dative Case) 
| cannot be properly used as the Subject of the Passive. The 

Dative remains unchanged, and the verb becomes a Passive in 
the Third Person Singular (Impersonal Verb). This Passive 
form may have a neuter subject corresponding to the Inner 
object. (331, E. 2.) 

Active : Miserl invident bonis, The wretched envy the icell-to-do. 
Passive : mihi invidetur, I am envied, 

tibi invidetur, thou art envied, 

ei invidetur, he is envied, 

nobis invidetur, we are envied, 

vobis invidetur, you are envied, 

iis invidetur, they are envied, 



ab aliquo, by some one. 



Nihil facile persuadetur invitis. Quint. People are not easily per- 
suaded of anything against their will. 

Anulls nostris plus quam animis creditur. Sen. Our seals are more 
trusted than our souls. 



i 



12 G TENSES. 

Remark.— The same rule applies to Genitive and Ablative. The poets are more free 
in imitation of the Greek. Cur invideor % Hon. for Cur invidetur mihi ? Wliy am 
1 envied ? 

209. Reflexive relations, when emphatic, are expressed as in 

English : 

Omne animal se ipsum diligit. Cic. Every living creature loves itself. 

But when the reflexive relation is more general, the Passive 
is employed : 

Lavor, I bathe, I bathe myself. 

Purgari nequiverunt. Liv. They could not clear themselves. 
Curabar propriis aeger Fodalirius herbis. Ov. A sick Podalirius, 1 
was trying to cure myself by my own herbs. 

210. As the Active in all languages is often used to express 
what the subject suffers or causes to be done, so the Passive in 
Latin in its reflexive sense is often used to express an action 
which the subject suffers or causes to be done to itself: trailer, 
I let myself be dragged ; tondeor, I have myself shaved. 

Ipse docet quid agam ; fas est et ab hoste doceri. Ov. He himself 
teaches {me) what to do ; it is (but) right to let oneself be taught even by an 
enemy (to take a lesson from a foe). 

211. The Deponent is a Passive form which has lost, in most 
instances, its Passive (or Reflexive) signification. It is commonly 
translated as a Transitive or Intransitive Active: hortor, / am 
exhorting (Trans.) ; morior, I am dying (Intrans.). 

212. Reciprocal relations ("one another") are expressed by 
inter, among, and the Personal Pronouns, nos, us ; vos, you ; se, 
themselves : Inter se amant, They love one another. 

TENSES. 

213. The Tenses express the relations of time, embracing : 

1. The stage of the action (duration in time). 

2. The period of the action (position in time). 

The first tells whether the action is going on, or finished,. 
The second tells whether the action is past, prese?it, or future. 

Both these sets of relations are expressed by the tenses of the 
Indicative or Declarative mood — less clearly by the Subjunctive. 



TABLE OF TEMPORAL RELATIONS. 



127 



214. There are six tenses in Latin : 

1. The Present, denoting continuance in the present 

2. The Future, denoting continuance in the future. 

3. The Imperfect, denoting continuance in the past 

4. The Perfect, denoting completion in the present. 

5. The Future Perfect, denoting completion in the future. 

6. The Pluperfect, denoting completion in the past. 

215. An action may further be regarded simply as attained, 
without reference to its continuance or completion. Continuance 
and completion require a point of reference for definition ; at- 
tainment does not. This gives rise to the aoristic or indefinite 
stage of the action, which has no especial tense-form. It is 
expressed by the Present tense for the present; by the Future 
and Future Perfect tenses for the future ; and by the Perfect 
tense for the past. 

Of especial importance is the Indefinite or Historical Perfect 
(Aorist), which differs materially in syntax from the Definite or 
Pure Perfect. 

216. The Tenses are divided into Principal and Historical. 
The Principal Tenses have to do with the Present and Future. 
The Historical Tenses have to do with the Past. 

The Present, Pure Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are 
Principal Tenses. 

The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Historical Perfect are Histor- 
ical Tenses. 

Remark. — The Historical Tenses are well embodied in the following distich : 
Talia tentabat, sic et tentaverat ante, 
Vixque d e d i t victas utilitate maniis. Ov. 

217. Table of Temporal Relations. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Continuance. 
Present : scribo, 

I am writing. 
Future : scribam, 

I shall be writing. 
p AST : scribebam, 

I was writing. 



ACTIVE. 

Completion. 
scrips!, 

I have written. 
scripsero, 

I shall have written. 
scrips er am, 
I had written. 



[Attainment. 
scribo, 
Iiorite. 
scribam (scripsero), 
I shall write. 
scrips!, 
I wrote^\ 



128 



PRESENT. 



Continuance. 



PASSIVE. 

Completion. 
seripta est, 

has been written, 
is written, 



Attainment. 
scrlbitur, 

is written. 



scribetur, 

will be written. 

seripta est, 

was written. 



Present: scrlbitur (epistola), 
The letter is written, 
(writing)^ 

Future : scribetur, seripta erit, 

The letter will be written, will ham been, 
{icriting), will be written, 

Past : scribebatur, seripta erat, 

The letter teas written, had been written, 
{writing), was written, 

Remark. — The English Passive is ambiguous. The same form is currently used for 
continuance, attainment, and completion. The context alone can decide. A convenient 
test is the substitution of the Active. 

r Continuance, Some one was writing a letter. 
A letter was written • ) Completion, Some one had written a letter. 

( Attainment, Some one wrote a letter. 
£5^ The detailed consideration of the Tenses may be omitted by the beginner. 

Present Tense. 

218. The Present Tense is used as in English of that which 
is going on now (Specific Present), and of statements that apply 
to all time (Universal Present). 

Specific Present : 

Auribus tened lupum. Ter. lam holding the wolf by the ears. 

Universal Present : 

Probitas laudatur et alget. Juy. Honesty is bepraised and freezes. 

Remarks.— 1. The Specific Present is often to be translated by the English Progress- 
ive Present. The Universal Present is Aoristic, true at any point. 

2. As continuance involves the notion of incompleteness the Present is used of at- 
tempted and intended action (Present of Endeavor). But on account of the double use of 
the Present this signification is less prominent and less important than in the Imperfect. 
Do not mistake the Endeavor which lies in the Verb for the Endeavor which lies in the 
Tense. So in the traditional example : 

Quintus frater Tusculanum venditat. Cic. Brother Quintus is " trying to sell" his 
Tusculan villa : venditare itself means to offer for sale. Translate: intends to offer for 
sale, if the notion lies in the Tense. 

3. The ambiguity of our English Passive often suggests other translations. Use and 
Wont make Law ; hence, the frequent inference that what is done is what ought to be 
done ; what is nor, done is not to be done. 

(Deusj nee bene promeritis capitur, nee tangitur Ira. Lucr. God is not to be in- 
veigled by good service, ?ior touched by anger. 



IMPERFECT. 129 

219. The Present Tense is used more rarely than in English 
in anticipation of the future, chiefly in compound sentences: 

Si vincimus, omnia tuta erunt. Sall. If we conquer (= shall conquer), 
everything will be safe. 

Antequam ad sententiam redeo de me pauca dicam. CiC. Before 1 
return to the subject, I id ill say a few things of myself. 

Exspectabo dum ille venit. Ter. I will wait all the time that he is 
coming, or, until he comes. 

220. The Present Tense is used far more frequently than in 
English, as a lively representation of the %>ast (Historical Pres- 
ent) : 

Romam proficiscitur. Sall. He sets out for Borne. 
Maturat proficisci. Caes. He hastens to depart. 

Remark.— Dum, while, commonly takes the Historical Present : Bum haec in col- 
loquio geruntur, Caesari nuntiatum est. Caes. While these things were transacting 
in the conference, word was brought to Caesar. Dum, so long as, follows the ordinary law. 
(See 566.) 

221. The Present is used in Latin of actions that are con- 
tinned into the present, especially with jam, now ; jam diu, now 

I for a long time ; jam prldem, now long since. In English we 
often translate by a Progressive Perfect. 

Mithridates annum jam tertium et vicesimum regnat. CiC. Mithri- 
daies has been reigning now going on ttoenty-three years. 

Liberare vos a Philipp5 jam dm magis vultis quam audetis. Lrv*. 

You have this long time had the wish rather than (= though, not) the courage 
to deliver yourself from Philip. 

Imperfect Tense. 

222. The Imperfect Tense denotes Continuance in the Past : 
pugnabam, I was fighting. 

The Imperfect is employed to represent manners, customs, 
1 situations ; to describe and to particularize. 

The Imperfect and the Historical Perfect serve to illustrate 
one another. The Imperfect dwells on ihe process ; the His- 
torical Perfect states the result. The Imperfect counts out the 
1 items ; the Historical Perfect gives the sum. 

223. The two tenses are often so combined that the general 



130 PERFECT. 

statement is given by the Historical Perfect, the particulars of 
the action by the Imperfect : • 

Verres in forum venit ; ardebant oculi ; tot5 ex ore crudelitas 
eminebat. Cic. Verres came into the forum, his eyes were blazing, cruelty 
teas standing out from his whole countenance. 

224. The Imperfect is used of attempted and interrupted, 
infolded and expected actions (Imperfect of Endeavor). It is 
the Tense of Disappointment and (with the negative) of Eesist- 
ance to Pressure. (Mere negation is regularly Perfect.) 

Curiam relinquebat. Tac. He was for leaving the senate-house. 

Postumius dedebatur. Cic. Postumius was to be given up. 

Lex abrogabatur. Liv. The law teas to be abrogated. 

Oreum et Eretriam Eumeni dabant : senatus libertatem his clvitatibus 
dedit. Liv. They were for giving Oreus and Eretria to Eumenes ; the senate 
gave these cities liberty. 

Curabar propriis aeger Podalirius herbis. Ov. (206.) 

Aditum non dabat. Nep. He would not grant access (dedit, did not). 

Remarks.— 1. The Imperfect as the Tense of Evolution is a Tense of Vision. But 
in English, Imperfect and Historical Perfect coincide ; hence the various translations to 
put the reader in the place of the spectator. 

2. The continuance is in the mind of the narrator ; it has nothing to do with the ab- 
solute duration of the action. The mind may dwell on a rapid action or hnrry over a 
Blow one. With definite numbers, however large, the Historical Perfect must be used, 
unless there is a notion of continuance into another stage (overlapping). 

Gorgias centum et novem annos vixit- Quint. Gorgias lived 109 years. 

3. As the Tense of Disappointment, the Imperfect of such verbs as d§bere, to owe, 
posse, to be able, is sometimes used in a modal sense. (246, R. 2.) 

225. The Imperfect is used as the English Progressive Plu- 
perfect : especially with jam, jam diu, jam dudum. 

Jam dudum tibi adversabar. Plaut. Iliad long been opposing you. 

Remark.— As the Historical Present is used in lively narrative, so the Historical Infin- 
itive is used in lively description, parallel with the Imperfect. (649.) 

Perfect Tense. 

226. The Perfect Tense has two distinct uses : 

1. Pure Perfect. 2. Historical Perfect (Aorist). 

1. PURE PERFECT. 

227. The Pure Perfect Tense expresses completion in the 
Present, and hence is sometimes called the Present Perfect. 



PERFECT. 131 

The Pure Perfect looks at both ends of an action, and the 
time between is regarded as a Present. The Historical Present 
looks at but one end; or, rather, beginning and end are one. 

228. The Pure Perfect is used : 

1. Of an action that is over and gone. 

Filium unicum habso, imo habul. Ter. I have an only son — nay, I 
have had an only son. 

Tempora quid faciunt : hanc volo, te volui. Ov. What difference times 
make ! I want her — 1 wanted yo u. 

2. Far more frequently of the present result of a more remote 
action : Eesulting condition. 

Equum et milium Brundisii tibi reliqui. Cic. I have left a horse and 
mule for you at Brundusium — (they are still there). 

Perdidi spem qua me oblectabam. Plaut. I've lost the hope with 
which I entertained myself. 

Actum est, perlsti. Ter. It is all over ; you're undone. 

Remark.— The Pure Perfect is often translated by the English Present : novi, I have 
becom.e acquainted with, I know ; memini, I have recalled, 1 remember ; odi, I have con- 
ceived a hatred of , I hate ; consuSvi, I have made it a rule, 1 am accustomed. This is 
due to the inchoative character of the Present form. 

Oderunt hilarem tristes tristemque jocosi. Hon. The long-faced hate the lively 
man, the jokers hate the long-faced man. 

229. As the Present stands for the Future, so the Perfect 
stands for the Future Perfect. 

Brutus si conservatus erit, vicimus. Cic. Brutus! — if he is saved, we 
are victorious, we (shall) have gained the victory. 

Otia si tollas, periere Cupldinis arcus. Ov. (195, R. 6.) 

230. Habeo or teneo, I hold, I have, with the Accusative of 
the Perfect Participle Passive, is not a mere circumlocution for 
the Perfect, but lays peculiar stress on the maintenance of the 
result. 

Habeo statutum, I have resolved, and hold to my resolution. 
Habeo perspectum, I have 'perceived, and I have full insight. 
Excusatum habeas me rogo, ceno domi. Mart. I pray you have me 
excused, I dine at home. 

Remark.— On the Iterative Perfect, see 569, 



132 FUTURE. 



2. HISTORICAL PERFECT. 

231. The Historical or Indefinite Perfect (Aorist) states a 
past action, without reference to its duration, simply as a thing 

attained. 

Veni, vidi, vici. Suet. I came, saw, overcame* 

Milo domum venit, calceos et vestimenta mutavit, paulisper com- 
moiatus est. Cic. JMilo came home, changed shoes and garments, tarried a 
little while. 

Gorgias centum et novem vixit annos. Quint. Gorgias lived 109 
years. 

232. The Historical Perfect is the great narrative tense of 
the Latin language, and is best studied in long connected pas- 
sages, and by careful comparison with the Imperfect. 

Pluperfect Tense. 

233. The Pluperfect denotes Completion in the Past, and is 
used of an action that was completed before another was begun. 
It is, so to speak, the Perfect of the Imperfect. Hence it is used : 

1. Of an action that is over and gone. 

Putaram, Iliad thought (before such and such a thing happened). 

2. Of a Resulting Condition. 

Massilienses portas Caesari clauserant. Caes. The Marseillese had 
shut their gates against Caesar. {Their gates were shut.) 

Remarks.— 1. When the Perfect of resulting Condition is translated by an English 
Present (228 R.), the Pluperfect is translated by an English Imperfect : noveram, / had 
become acquainted with, I knew ; memineram, / remembered ; oderam, / hated • con- 
sueveram, I was accustomed. 

2. The Periphrastic Pluperfect with habeo corresponds to the Perfect. (230.) 

3. On the Iterative Pluperfect, see 569. 

Future Tense. 

234. The Future Tense denotes Continuance in the Future , 
scrlbam, I shall be writing. 

The Future Tense is also used to express indefinite action in 
the Future : scrlbam, / shall write. 

Remarks. — 1. In subordinate clauses the Latin language is more exact than the En- 
glish in the expression of future relations. 

Donee eris fglix, multos numerabis amicSs. Ov. So long as you shall be (are) 
happy, you will count many friends, 



FUTURE PERFECT. 133 

Quidquid e r i s, mea semper eris. Ov. Whatever you shall be (are), you will al- 
ways be mine own. 

2. Observe especially the verbs volo, I will, and possum, 1 can. 

Odero si p o t e r o ; si non, in Vitus amabo. Ov. I will hate if I shall be able (can) ; 
if not, I shall love against my tuill. 

Si qua volet regnare diu, deludat amantem. Ov. She who shall wish to queen 
it long must fool her lover. 

235. The Future is used in an imperative sense, as in English, 

chiefly in familiar language. 
I 

Tu nihil dices. Hor. You sliall, are to, say nothing {do you say nothing). 

Quum volet accedes, quum te vitabit abibis. Ov. When she wants you> 

approacJi ; and when she avoids you, begone, sir. 

Future Perfect Tense. 

. 236. The Future Perfect is the Perfect, both Pure and His- 
torical, transferred to the future, and embraces both completion 
and attainment : fecero, I sliall have clone it, or / sliall do it 
(once for all); videro, I ivill see to it; profecerit, it will prove 
profitable. 

Remarks— 1. Hence, when the Perfect is used as a Present, the Future Perfect is used 
as a Future : 

Novero, I shall know ; consuevero, 1 shall be accustomed ; Odero, si potero. Ov. 
(234, R. 2.) 

2. In subordinate sentences, the Latin language is more exact than the English in the 
use of the Future Perfect. 

When one action precedes another in the future, the action that precedes is expressed 
by the Future Perfect. 

Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, ejus victoria erit. Liv. Who first draws the 
1 sword, his shall be the victory. 

3. The Future Perfect is frequently used in volo, / will ; nolo, I will not ; possum, 
" I can ; licet, it is left free ; libet, it is agreeable ; placet, it is the pleasure ; whereas the 
"English idiom familiarly employs the Present. 

Si p o t u e r o, faciam vobis satis. Cic. If lean, I shall satisfy you. 

4. The Future Perfect in both clauses denotes simultaneous accomplishment or attain- 
ment ; one action involves the other. 

Qui Marcum Antonium oppresserit, is bellum confecerit. Cic. He who 
shall have crushed (crushes) Marie Antony, will have finished (will finish) the tvar. 

Ea vitia qui fugerit, is omnia fere* vitia vitaverit- Cic. He who shall have es- 
caped these faults, will have avoided almost all faults. 

Sometimes, however, the first seems to denote antecedence, the second finality. An 
Imperative is often used in the first clause. 

Immuta verborum collocationem, perierit tota r5s. Cic. Change the arrange- 
ment of the words, the whole thing falls dead. 

237. As the Future is used as an Imperative, so the Future 
Perfect approaches the Imperative. 

De hoc tu ipse videris. Cic. You may see to that yourself hereafter 



134: PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. 



Periphrastic Tenses. 

238. The Periphrastic Tenses are formed by combining the 
various tenses of esse, to be, with participles and verbal ad- 
jectives. 

I. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION— ACTIVE VOICE. 

239. The Periphrastic Tenses of the Active are chiefly com- 
binations of esse and its forms with the so-called Future Par- 
ticiple Active. The Future Participle is a verbal adjective 
denoting capability and tendency. Compare amator and amS,- 
turus. The translation is very various: 

1. Scripturus sum, lam about to write, I am to write, I purpose to write, 
I am likely to write. 

2. Scripturus eram, I was about to write, etc. 

3. Scripturus fui, I7iave been or was about to write (often = I should have 
icritten). 

4. Scripturus fueram, Iliad been about to lorite, etc. 

5. Scripturus ero, I shall be about to write, etc. 

6. Scripturus fuero, 7" shall have made up my mind to write, etc. (of 
course very rare). 

1. Bellum scripturus sum quod populus Romanus cum Jugurtha 
gessit. Sall. I purpose to write the history of the war which the Roman 
people carried on with Jugurtha. 

- 2. Rex non interfuturus navall certamini erat. Lrv. The king did not 
intend to be present at the naval combat. 

3. Cato qua nocte periturus fuit legit. Sen. Goto read on the night 
when he was about to die (kill himself). 

Deditos ultimis cruciatibus aflfecturi fuerunt. Liv. They would have 
put the surrendered to extreme tortures. 

4. Major Romanorum gratia fuit quam quanta Carthaginiensium fu- 
tiira fuerat. Lrv. The Romans' credit for this was greater than tlie Cartha- 
ginians' would liave been. 

5. Plus mini detracturus ero, quam ill! collaturus. Sen. / shall in all 
likelihood take away more from myself than I shall bestow on him. 

6. Sapiens non vivet, si fuerit sine nomine victurus. Sen. The wise 
man will not continue to live, if he finds that he is to live without human 



Remark.— The Subjunctives and Infinitives, scripturus sim, essem, fuerim, scrip- 
tiirum esse, and scripturum fuisse, are of great importance in dependent discourse. 



PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. 135 

II. PERIPHRASTIC TENSES OF THE PASSIVE. 

A.— Of Future Relations. 

240. The following periphrases are used both in Active and 
^ssive, but more frequently in the Passive. 

1. Futurum est, it is to be, \ 

erat, ) > ut, t7iat y with the subjunctive. 



erat, ) 

fuit, \w™t°W t 

This circumlocution is used : 



1. Rarely in the Indicative. 

2. Often in the Infinitive, and necessarily so, when the verb forms no 
iiipine or Future Participle : 

j ut metuas, that you will fear. 
Futurum esse (fore), ( ut metu a riSj that you will be feared. 

In the Passive it is more common than the Supine with Iri. 

Spero fore ut contingat id nobis. Cic. I hope that we shall have that 
ood fortune. 

In fatis script urn Vejentes habebant fore ut brevi a Gallis Roma 
aperetur. Cic. The Vdentes had it written down in their prophetic books 
hat Rome would shortly be taken by the Gauls. 



| Remarks. — 1. Fore ut ... is used chiefly with Present and Imperfect Subjunctive; 
'erf. and Pluperf. are very rare. Cic. ad Att. xvi. 16 E. 16. 

2. The form futurum fuisse ut . . . is used with Passive and Supineless verbs, to ex- 
ress the dependent apodosis of an unreal conditional sentence. 

Nisi eo ipso tempore nuntil de Caesaris victoria essent allati, existimabant 
ilerique futurum fuisse ut oppidum amitteretur. Caes. (662.) 

3. Posse, to be able, and velle, to will, on account of their future sense, do not require 
periphrasis. In the absence of periphrastic forms, the forms of posse are often used 

hstead. (659.) 

4. The Subjunctive forms futurum sit, esset, fuerit, ut . . . are used in the gram- 
aars to supply the periphrastic subjunctive of Passive and Supineless verbs. (See 512,11. 2.) 

Warrant in real usage is scarce. 

An utique futurum sit ut Carthaginem superent Roman! % Quint. I. O. 
II. 8. 7. (not merely periphrastic). 

241. 2. In eoest, it is on the point, 1 J7 . , ... .., ,. 
' \ I tit, that (of), with the 

f . ' \ teas (Impersonal), | subjunctive. 

In e5 erat ut Pausanias comprehend ere tur. Nep. It was on the point 
that Pausanias should be (P. was on the point of) being arrested* 

Remark. — This phrase occurs in Nepos and Livy, seldom in earlier writers. 



136 TENSES IN LETTERS. 

B.—Of Past Relations. 

242. The Perfect Participle Passive is used in combination with sum 
lam, and fui, I have been, I was, to express the Pure Perfect and Historical 
Perfect of the Passive Voice. Eram, I was, and fueram, I had been, stand 
for the Pluperfect ; and ero, I shall be, and fuero, I shall have been, for the 
Future Perfect. 

Re3iap.k.— Fui i? the favorite form when the participle is frequently used as an ad- 
jective: convivium exoruatum fuit, the banquet was furnished forth ; fui is the 
necessary form when the Perfect denotes that the action is over and gone : amatus fui, i I 
lhave been loved (but I am loved no longer). The same principle applies to fueram and; 
fuero. though not so regularly. 

Simulacrum e mar more in sepulcro positum fuit; hoc quldam homo no 
bilis deportavit. Cic. A marble effigy was deposited in the tomb ; a certain man of ran 
has carried it off. 

Arma quae fixa in parietibus fuerant, huml inventa sunt. Cic. The 
arms which had been fastened to the walls v: ere found on the ground. 

Nee mater fuero dicta nee orba diu. Ov. I shall not have been called mother nor 
childless long. 

C. — Periphrastic Conjugation — Passive Voice. 

243. The combination of the Tenses of esse, to be, with th 
Gerundive (verbal in -ndus), is called the Periphrastic Conjuga- 
tion of the Passive, and follows the laws of the simple conjuga 
tion. (See 150.) 

Remarks.— 1. The Gerundive has the form of a Present Participle Passive, (-ndus 
for -ntus). Whenever a participle is used as a predicate it becomes characteristic, anc 
good for all time. Compare 439, R. 

As amans not only = qui amat, but also = qui amet, so amandus = qui amStur 

2. The Gerundive follows the law (205), and can be formed only from verbs that take 
the accusative. Otherwise the Impersonal form must be used. 

Parcendum est victls. The vanquished must be spared. 

TEXSES m LETTERS. 

244. The Eoman letter-writer not unfrequently puts him- 
self in the position of the receiver, more especially at the begin- 
ning and at the end of the letter, often in the phrase Nihil eral 
quod scrlberem, "I have nothing to write." This permutation of 
tenses is never kept up long, and applies only to temporary situ 
ations, never to general statements. 

Table of Permutations. 

scribo, 
scrips!, 



*cribam, 



I am writing, ) becomes 


scribebam, 


: 


I write, [ 


scripsL 




lhave written, \ 
I wrote, ) 


scripseram, 


: 


scripseram, 




or remains unchanged. 






I shall write, 


scripturus eram. 


' 



MOODS. 137 

The adverbial designations of time remain unchanged — or 

Heri, yesterday , becomes pridie. 

hodie, to-day, u quo die has litteras dedi, dab am, 

eras, to-morrow, " poster5 die, postridie. 

Formias me continue recipere cogitabam, Cic. lam thinking <rf re- 
tiring forthwith to Formiae. 

Quiim mihi Oaecilius dixisset puerum se Romammittere, haec scrips! 
raptim. Cic. As GmcUius has told me that he is sending a servant to Borne, 
I write in a hurry. 

Litteras eram daturus postridie el qui mihi primus obviam venisset, 
Cic. I will give the letter to-morrow to the first man that comes my way. 

Moods. 

245. Mood signifies manner. The mood of a verb signifies 
the manner in which the predicate is said of the subject. 

There are three moods in Latin : 

1. The Indicative. 

2. The Subjunctive. 

3. The Imperative. 

Kehap.k.— The Infinitive form of the verb is generally, but improperly, called a mood. 
The Indicative Mood. 

246. The Indicative Mood represents the predicate as a 
reality. It is sometimes called the Declarative Mood, as the 
mood of direct assertion. 

The use of the Latin Indicative differs little from the English. 



IT 



The beginner may omit the Remarks. 
Rbjcahks. — 1. The LatiD language expresses possibility andpoicer. obligation and nt 
r.d abstract relations generally, Bsfacts ; whereas, onr translation often implies the 

iodize. Such expressions are : debeo. I aught. :': / oportet. U he* 

: necesse est. it is <://" :v~. 'leoes-sary : possum, I can. I have it in my power 
convenit. it is fitting ; par. aequuni est. it is fair / infinitum, endless : difficile 

; longum. tedious; and the Indicative form of the Passive Periphrastic Gonjaga- 
ion 

Possum persequi multa oblectamenta rerumrusticarum. Cic. Imight rehi 

i 0" : "- 
Longum est utilitates persequi asinorum. Cic, I: i:::d: 7 :-: :,:' 'ear-se 

' ' (I qua. :'"':'. ; f as*cs .J vail not do it). 
Ad mortem te duci oportebat. Cic. It behooved you to I you were 

not . : ou ought to have been ted of. 

Volumnia debuit in te ofneiosior esse, et id ipsum. quod fecit, potuit 
facere diligentius. Cic. It was Volumnia's duty to be V. ought to have be-. 

: and :':-: .0:0 she aid do ..sle r.;:d it in her power to dO\ she might have done 
vxore car-:; . 



138 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Quae condicio non accipienda fuit potius quam patria relinquenda % Cic 

What terms ought not to have been accepted in preference to leaving thy country f 

Nil mini debuerat cum versibus amplius esse. Ov. Naught more should 

have had (ere then) to do with verses. 

The Perfect and Pluperfect always refer to a special case. 

2. The Imperfect, as the Tense of Disappointment is sometimes used in these verbs t< 
denote opposition to a present state of things : debebam, I ought (but do not) ; poteras 
you could (but do not;. These may be considered as conditionals in disguise. (See R. 3.) 

Poteram morbos appellare, sed non convenlret ad omnia. Cic. I might tram 
late (that Greek word") "diseases" but that would not suit all the cases. (Poteram si con 
veniret-) 

At poteras, inquis, melius mala ferre silendo. Ov. "But," you say, "yo 
could (you do not) bear your misfortunes better by keeping silent" (Poteras si sileres.) 

3. The Indicative is sometimes used in the leading clause of conditional sentences (th 
Apodosis), thereby implying the certainty of the result, had it not been for the interrup 
tion. 

The Indicative clause generally precedes, which is sufficient to show the rhetoric 
character of the construction. 

With the Imperfect the action is often really begun : 

Labebar longius. nisi me retinuissem. Cic. I was letting myself go on (should ha 
let myself go on) too far, had I not checked myself. 

Omnlno erat supervacua doctrlna, si natura sufficeret. Quint. Trainir 
were wholly superfluous, did nature suffice. 

Praeclarg viceramus, nisi Lepidus recepisset Antonium. Cic. We had (shou 
have) gained a brilliant victory, had not Lepidus received Antony. 

In all these sentences the English idiom requires the Subjunctive, which is disguis< 
by coinciding with the Indicative in form except in '- were." 

4. In general relative expressions, such as the double formations, quisquis, no matt 
who, quotquot, no matter how many, and all forms in -cunque, -ever, the Indicative 
employed where we may use in English a Subjunctive or its equivalent : quisquis es 
no matter who he is, be, may be • qualecunque est, whatever sort of thing it is, be, m< 
be. 

Quid quid id est, timeo Danaos et dona ferentes. Virg. Whatever it (ma\ 
be, I fear the Danai even when they bring presents. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

247. The Subjunctive Mood represents the predicate as m 
idea, as something merely conceived in the mind (abstract 
from reality). 

Remark.— The Latin Subjunctive is often translated into English by the auxilhj 
verbs may, can, must, might, could, would, should. When these verbs have their f 
signification of possibility and power, obligation and necessity ; they are represented 
Latin by the corresponding verbs: may, can, might, could, by the forms of posse, to 
able, licet, it is left free ; will and would, by velle, to will, to be willing / must, by deb 
oroportet (of moral obligation), by necesse est (of absolute obligation). 

Nostras injtirias nee potest nee possit alius ulcisci quam v5s. Liv. Ourwroi 
no other than you has the power or can well have the power to avenge. Here potest gi 
the simple affirmation, possit, the moral conviction of the speaker. 

248. The realization of the idea may be in suspense, or 
may be beyond control. The first, or purely Ideal Subjunctr 



POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 139 

is represented by the Present and Perfect Tenses ; the second, 
or Unreal, is represented by the Imperfect and Pluperfect. 

Remarks. — 1. The Subjunctive, as the name implies (subjungo, I subjoin), is largely 
used in dependent sentences, and will be treated at length in that connection. 

2. The following modifications of the above principles must be carefully observed : 

A. The Romans, in lively discourse, often represent the unreal as ideal, that which is 
beyond control as still in suspense. (598, R. 2.) 

B. In transfers to the past, the Imperfect represents the Present, and the Pluperfect 
tfitthe Perfect Subjunctive. (510.) 



!/( \ 249. The idea may be a view, or a wish. Hence the division of the 
Subjunctive into the Potential aud the Optative. The Potential Subjunc- 
tive is nearer the Indicative, from which it differs in tone ; the Optative 
Subjunctive is nearer the Imperative, for which it is often used. 

The beginner may omit to 259. 



POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 

250. The Potential Subjunctive represents the opinion of the 
speaker as an opinion. The tone varies from vague surmise to 

3li! moral certainty, from "may" and "might" to "must." The 
negative is the negative of the Indicative non. 

The Potential of the Present or Future is the Present or 
Perfect Subjunctive. The verification is in suspense, and so 

ieifuture; the action may be present or future : with Perfect some- 
times Past. 

i"" Velim, I should wish; nolim, I should be unwilling ; malim, I should. 

vrefer ; dicas, you would say ; ere das, you would believe, you must believe ; 

iicat, dlxerit aliquis, some one may undertake to say, go so far as to say. 
Caedi discipul5s minime velim. Quint. I should by no means like 
S (pupils to be flogged. 
K Tu Flatonem nee nimis valde unquam nee nimis saepe laudaveris. 

Die. You canH praise Plato too much nor too often. 

251. The Mood of the Question is the Mood of the expected 
or anticipated answer (464). Hence the Potential Subjunctive 
is used in questions which serve to convey a negative opinion on 

Wi ;1 t part of the speaker. 

Quis dubitet(=: nemo dubitet) q u I n in virtute divitiae sint ? CiC. 

JVho can doubt that there is wealth in virtue f (No one). 

Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione querentes? Juv. Who could 
hear the Gracchi complaining of rebellion ? (No one). 

Apud exercitum fueris ? Cic. You were with the army? 



I 



140 OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

252. The Potential of the Past is the Imperfect Subjunctive, 
chiefly in the Ideal Second Person, an imaginary " you." 
Statement : 



i 



Crederes victos. You icould, might, have thought them beaten. 

Haud facile decerneres utrum Hannibal imperatori an exerci- 
tui carior esset. Liv. Not readily could you have decided 'whether Hannibal 
was dearer to general or to army. 

Miraretur qui turn cerneret. Liv. Any one who saw it then must have 
been astonished. 

Vellem, I should have wished ; nollem, I should have been unwilling ; 
mallem, I should have preferred (it is too late). 

Question : 

Hoc tantum bellum quis unquam arbitraretur ab uno imperatore con- J° 
fici posse ? Cic. Who would, could, should have thought that this great way 
could be brought to a close by one general ? 

Remarks.— 1. The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes explained by the ellipsis of ar 
Ideal or of an Unreal Conditional Protasis. But the free Potential Subjunctive differ 
from an elliptical conditional sentence in the absence of definite ellipsis, and hence a 
definite translation. Compare the first two sentences above with : 

Eum qui palam est adversarius facile cavendo (si caveas) vitare possls. Cic 

An open adversary you can readily avoid by caution {if you are cautious). 

Nil ego contulerim jucundo sanus (= dum sanus ero) amico. Hob. There i 
naught 1 should compare to an agreeable friend, while I am in my sound senses. 

2. The Unreal of the Present and the Ideal of the Past coincide. What is unreal of 
real person is simply ideal of an imaginary person. The Imperfect is used as the tens 
of Description. 

The Aoristic Perfect Subj. is rarely used as the Ideal of the Past. 

3. The Potential Subjunctive, as a modified form of the Indicative, is often foun 
whei e the Indicative would be the regular construction. So after quanquam (603, R. 1 



OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

253. The Subjunctive is used as an Optative or wisliin 
mood. 



w 



V 

,J 3 



The regular negative is ne. N5n is used chiefly to negative a singl 
word. 

The Present and Perfect Subjunctive are used when the decision is 
suspense, no matter how extravagant the wish ; the Imperfect and Plv 
perfect are used when the decision is adverse. The Perfect is rare and old.| ^ 

Stet haec urbs. Cic. May this city continue to stand! 
Di faxint = fecerint. I 1 he gods grant ! 

Ne istuc Juppiter optimus maximus sirit ( s= siverit) ! Lrv. May Jiq 
ter, supremely great and good, suffer it not ! 

254. The Optative Subjunctive frequently takes XJtinam, uf 
nam ne, utinam non — in poetry also si, Oh if. 



OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 141 

Utinam modo conata efficere p o s s im. Cic. May I but have it in my 
v>wer to accomplish my endeavors. 

Utinam reviviscat frater ! Gell. Would that my brother would come to 
\fe again ! 

Utinam inserere jocos m5ris esset. Quint. Would that it were usual 
? introduce jokes/ 
jjj B Illud utinam ne vere scrlberem. Cic. Would that what lam writing 
iere not true ! 

Utinam susceptus n5n e s s e m. Cic. Would I had not been born ! 

O mihi praeteritos referat si Juppiter annos. Verg. if Jove 
a oere to bring me back the years that are gone by ! 

Remarks. — 1. Utinam was originally an interrogative, How, pray? and belongs 
artly to the potential. 6 SI is an elliptical conditional sentence, which is not intended 
., p have an Apodosis. When the Apodosis comes, it may come in a different form. So in 
ae example. Verg. Aen. viii. 560, 568. 

2. For the wish with adverse decision vellem, mallem, and nollem are often used 
rith Imperf. and Pipf. Subj. 

Veileni adesse posset Panaetius. Cic. Would that Panaetius could be present ! 

Nollem dixlssem. Cic. Would that 1 had not said it ! 

So velim, nolim, etc., for the simple wish (546, It. 3). 

255. The Optative Subjunctive is used in asseverations : 

Ita v i v a m ut maximos sumptns facio. Cic. As I live, I am spending 
ery largely (literally, so may I live as 1 am making very great outlay). 

256. The Subjunctive is used as an Imperative — 

1. In the First Person, which has no Imperative form: . 

j Amemus patriam. Cic. Let us love our country. 

Ne difficilia optemus. Cic. Let us not desire what is hard to do. 

2. In the Second Person— In the Present chiefly of an imagi- 
nary "you." 

Utare, you may use it; ne requiras, you must not pine for it. 

In the Perfect negatively : 

Ne transieris Hiberum. Liv. Do not cross the Ebro. 

3. In the Third Person (regularly) : 

ild \ Amet, let him love ; ne amet, let him not love. (See 265.) 

257. The Subjunctive is used as a concessive: 

Sit far. Cic. {Granted thai) he be a thief. 

Fecerit, si ita vis. Cic. {Suppose) he have done it, if you will (have it so). 

Other examples with ut and ne, see 606. 



142 IMPERATIVE. 

258. The Subjunctive is used in Questions which expect an 
Imperative answer (conjunctlvus dellberatlvus). 

Genuine questions are commonly put in the First Person or 
the representative of the First Person : 

Quid faciam ? roger anne rogem ? quid deinde rogabo ? Ov. What 
shall I do ? shall I ask or be asked f what then shall I ask him f 

Magna fuit contentio utrum moenibus se defenderent an obviam 

irent hostibus. Nep. There was a great dispute lohether they should defend 
themselves behind the walls or go to meet the enemy. (Utrum nos defendamus 
an obviam eamus ?). 

Ehetorical questions (questions which anticipate the answer), 
under this head, are hardly to be distinguished from Potential. 

Quo me nunc vertam ? Undique custodior. Cic. Whither shall T 
now turn f Sentinels on every side. 

Quid agerem ? Cic. What was I to do f 

Imperative Mood. 

259. The Imperative is the mood, of the will. It wills that 
the predicate be made a reality. The tone of the Imperative 
varies from stern command to piteous entreaty. It may appear 
as a demand, an order, an exhortation, a permission, a prayer. 

Abi in malam rem. Plaut. Go {to the mischief), and be hanged. 

Compesce mentem. Hon. Curb your temper. 

Da mini hoc, mel meum ! Plaut. Give me this, honey dear ! 



'■■■■i 



'"; 






260. The Imperative has two forms, known as the First and 
the Second Imperative. The First Imperative has only the « 
Second person ; the Second Imperative has both Second and 
Third persons. The First Person is represented by the Sub- 
junctive. 

Amemus patriam. Cic. Let us love our country. 



Remark.— Some verbs have only the second form. This may be due to the signifi- 
cation : so sclto, know thou ; memento, remember thou ; and habeto, in the sense of 
know, remember. 

261. The First Imperative looks forward to immediate fulfil- 
ment (Absolute Imperative) : 

Special : Patent portae ; proficiscere. Cic. Open stand the 
gates ; depart. 



c 



c. 



IMPERATIVE. 143 

General: Justitiam cole et pietatem. Cic. Cultivate justice 
md piety* 

262. The Second Imperative looks forward to contingent ful- 
ilment (Relative Imperative), and is chiefly used in laws, legal 
Locuments, maxims, and the* like: 

Regi5 imperio duo sunto, there shall be two {officers) with royal power. 

Consules appellantor, they shall be called consuls. 
I Nemini parento, they are to obey no one. 

Illis salus populi suprema lex e s t o. Cic. To them the welfare of the 
cople must be the paramount law. 

] Rem vobis proponam : vos earn penditSte. Cic. I will propound the 
latter to you : do you thereupon perpend it. 

• Percontatoirem fugito, nam garrulus Idem est. Hon. Avoid your 
uestioner^for he is a tell-tale too. 

263. Negative of the Imperative. — The regular negative 
f the Imperative is ne (neve, neu), which is found with the 
Second Imperative ; with the First Imperative, in poetry only. 

c Hominem mortuum in urbe neve sepelito neve urito, thou shalt not 
t ury nor burn a dead man in the city. 

Impius ne audeto placare d5nis iram deSrum. Cic. The impious man 
lust not dare attempt to appease by gifts the anger of the gods. 

Tu ne cede malls, sed contra audentior Ito. Verg. Yield not thou to 
lisf or tunes, but go more boldly (than ever) to meet them. 

Remark. — Non may be used to negative a single word. 
; A legibus non recedamus. Let us not recede from {let us stick to) the laws. 
Opus poliat lima, non exterat. Quint. Let the file rub the work up, not rub it 

i 

264. Periphkases. — I. Cura ut, taJce care tliat ; fac ut, cause 
hat ; fac, do, with the Subjunctive, are common circumlocutions 

or the Positive Imperative. 

Cura u t quam primum (317) venias. Cic. Manage to come as soon 

possible. 

Fac c5gites. Cic. Reflect ! 



II. Cave ne, leroare lest, and cave, with the subjunctive, and 
oil, he unwilling, with the Infinitive, for the Negative Imperat- 
ive (Prohibitive). 

Cave festlnes. Cic. Do not be in a hurry. 



144 IMPERATIVE. 

Tantum quum finges n e sis manifesta c a v e 1 5. Ov. Only^ when you 
pretend^ beicare that you be not detected. 

Noli vexare, quiescit. Juv. Don' t disturb her ; she's sleeping. 

265. Representatives of the Imperative. — Instead of 
the Positive Imperative, may be employed : 

1. The Second Person of the Future Indicative ; 

2. The Third Person of the Present Subjunctive: 

Facies, ut sciam, let me knoio ; vives, live on. 

Quod quis habet dominae conferat omne suae. Ov. Let a man 
give everything that he has to his lady-love. 

Quaedam cum prima resecentur crimina barba. Juv. Let cer- 
tain faults be clipped off with the sprouting beard. 

266. Instead of the Negative Imperative (Prohibitive), may 
be employed : 

The Second Person of the Perfect Subjunctive, with n6. 
The Second Person of the Future, with non. 
The Third Person of the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, with 
ne. 

Hoc facito, hoc ne feceris. Cic. This do, that leave undone. 
Non cessabis. Cic. You must not be idle. 

Puer telum ne habeat. Cic. A boy is not to have a deadly weapon. 
Ne metus quemquam ceperit. Liv. Let not fear seize any one. 
Misericordia commotus ne sis. Cic. Don't let yourself be moved by pity. 

Remarks. — 1. Non is often used in poetry forne, and neque, nee for neve, neu. 

Aut non tentaris ant perfice. Ov. Either do not try (at all), or effect (your 
object). 

Nee, si quern falles, tu perjtirare timgto. Ov. Nor if you (shall try to) de- 
ceive a man, do you fear to forswear yourself. 

On the negative non with a single word, see 263 R. With the Perfect Subjunctive, 
neque, nihil, nemo, nullus are freely used, as well as n6ve, neu, nequis, nequid. 

2. The Present Subjunctive is employed when stress is laid on the continuance of the 
action ; the Perfect, when stress is laid on the completion. Hence in total prohibitions, 
the Perfect Subjunctive is the favorite form. 

3. The Imperative of the Past is expressed by the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunc 
tive (unfulfilled duties). 

Dotem darStis ; alium quaereret virum. Ter. You should have given her a por- 
tion ; she should have sought another match. 

Cras Ir6s potius, hodie" hie ccmargs. Vale. Plaut. You ought rather to have 
put off going till to-morrow, you ought to (have) dine(d) with us to-day. Good-bye. Any- 
thing decided is regarded as past. 

Ne" poposcissetis libros. Cic. You ought not to have asked for the books. 

267. The Second Person Singular of the Present Subjunc^ 



TENSES OP MOODS AND VERBAL NOUNS. 145 

tive is used both positively and negatively ; but in prose, only 
of an imaginary subject ("you") : 

Corporis viribus utare, dum adsint; cum absint ne requiras. Cic. 

Enjoy your vigor of body while you have it ; when it is gone, you must not 
pine for it. 

268. Passionate questions are equivalent to a command : 

Ndn taces ? tconH you hold your tongue? quin taces? why don't you 
hold you tongue t 

Cur non ut plenus vitae con viva recedis ? Lucr. Why do you not 

withdraw as a guest sated with life f 

269. SUMMARY OF IMPERATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS. 

Positive. 

2d P. Audi, hear thou ; audits (legal or contingent) ; audies (familiar) ; 
audias (ideal 2d Person). 

3d P. Audito (legal), let him hear ; audiat. 

Negative. 
2d P. Ne audi, hear not (poetic) ; ne audito (legal) ; n5n audies (fami- 
liar) ; ne audias (ideal) ; ne audiveris \ noli audire. 

3d P. Ne audito (legal), let him not hear ; ne audiat \ ne audiverit. 

Tenses of the Moods and Verbal Nouns. 

270. The Indicative alone expresses with, uniform directness 
the period of time. 

■rfn 

271. 1. The Present and Imperfect Subjunctive have to do 
| with continued action, the Perfect and Pluperfect with completed 

action. The Perfect Subjunctive is also used to express the 
attainment. 

2. In simple sentences Present and Perfect Subjunctive post- 
pone the ascertainment of the Predicate to the Future. The 
action itself may be Present or Future for the Present Subjunc- 

i tive; Present, Past, or Future for the Perfect Subjunctive. 

Credat. He may believe (now or hereafter). 

Crediderit. Let him have had the belief (heretofore), he may have come 
to the belief (now), he may come to the belief (hereafter.) 

3. In simple sentences the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunc- 

7 



116 TENSES OF MOODS AND YEKBAL NOUNS. 

tive are Past Tenses. The notion of unreality lies in the past 
tense, rather than in the Subjunctive Mood. Compare 243, E. 2. 
4. In dependent sentences the Subjunctive is future if the 
leading verb has a future signification ; otherwise the Subjunc- 
tive represents the Indicative. The tense is regulated by the 
law of sequence. (See 510.) 

272. The Imperative is necessarily Future. 

273. The Infinitive has two uses : 

1. Its use as a Noun. 

2. Its use as a representative of the Indicative. 

274. 1. As a Noun, the Infinitive has tw r o tenses, Present and 
Perfect. 

The Present Infinitive has to do with continued action. It is 
the common form of the Infinitive, used as a noun. 

The Perfect Infinitive has to do with completed action, and 
is also used to express attainment. 

The Present Infinitive is used as a subject. 

Valere est vita, Being well is life. 

The Present Infinitive is used as the object of verbs of crea- 
tion (Auxiliary Verbs, Verbs that help the Infinitive into being). 
(424.) 

Metui quam amari malo, I prefer being feared to being loved. 

275. The Perfect Infinitive is comparatively little used as a 
noun. 

1. As a Subject, it is used chiefly in fixed expression or in 
marked opposition to the Present. 

Plus proderit demonstrasse rectam protinus viam quam r e- 
vocare ab errore jam lapsos. Quint. It will be more profitable to have 
pointed out the right path immediately than to recall from wandering those | 
that have already gone astray. 

Non tarn turpe fuit v i n c I quam contendisse decorum est. Ov. 
' Twos not so much dishonor to be beaten as 'tis an honor to have struggled. 

So by a kind of attraction with debuit, ought, decuit, became, and the 
like, especially in earlier and late Latin. 

Tunc decuit fl e s s e. Lrv. That was the time when it would have been 
becoming to weep {to have wept). 



TENSES OF MOODS AND VERBAL NOUNS. 147 

2. As an Object, the Perfect Infinitive is seldom found in the 
active: so after velle, to wish. 

Neminem nota strenui aut ignavi mllitis notasse volui. Liv. I wished 
to have marked {to mark finally) no soldier with the mark of bravery w of 
cowardice. 

Otherwise it is found only in the poets (after the fashion of the Greek 
Aorist Infinitive) : 

Fratres tendentes opaco Pelion imposuisse Olympo. Hor. The 
brothers striving to pile Pelion on shady Olympus. 

In the Passive, the Perfect Infinitive is used after verbs of 
Will and Desire, to denote impatience of anything except entire 
fulfilment. 

Here the Infinitive esse is seldom expressed. 

Democritum nollem (esse) vituperatum. Cic. I should rather not have 
had Democritus abused. 

276. 2. As the representative of the Indicative, the Infinitive 
has all its Tenses : Present, Fast, Future, and Future Periphras- 
tics. 

277. The Present Infinitive represents contemporaneous action 
— hence the Present Indicative after a Principal Tense, and the 
Imperfect after a Historical Tense : 

Dlco eum venire, I say that he is coming ; dicebam eum venire, 
I said that he was coming. 

The Perfect Infinitive represents Prior Action — hence the 
Perfect and Imperfect Indicative after a Principal Tense : 

Dlco eum venisse, I say that he came, has come, used to come ; 
and the Pluperfect, Imperfect, and Historical Perfect Indicative 
after a Historical Tense : 

Dixl eum venisse, I said that he had come, used to come, did 
come. 

Remark. — Memiill, I remember, when used of personal experience commonly takes 
the present. 

Turn me regem appellari a vobis memini, nunc tyrannum vocari video. Lrv. 
I remember being styled by you a king then, I see that I am called a tyrant now. So also 
memoria teneo and recordor, I remember, I recall. When the experience is not per- 
sonal, the ordinary construction is followed : 

Memineram Marium ad infimorum hominum misericordiam confugisse. Cic. 
I remembered that Marius had thrown himself on the mercy of a set of low creatures. 
! The peculiar construction with the Present arises from the liveliness of the recollec- 



148 SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED. 

tion. When the action is to be regarded as a bygone, the Perfect may be used even of 
personal experience : 

Me memini Iratum dominae turbasse capillos. Ov. 1 remember in my anger 
having tousled my sweetheart's hair. 

278. The Present Participle Active denotes continuance; the 
Perfect Passive, completion or attainment. 

Remark. — The Perfect Participle is often used where we should employ a Present : 
ratus, thinking ; complezus, embracing ; hortatus, exhorting. 

279. The Future Participle (Active) is a verbal adjective, 
denoting capability and tendency, chiefly employed in the older 
language with sum, I am, as a periphrastic tense. In later Latin 
it is used freely, just as the Present and Perfect Participles, to 
express subordinate relations. 

Remark.— The so-called Future Participle Passive is more properly called the Gerun- 
dive, and has already been discussed. (243.) ^ 

SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED. 

280. The sentence may be expanded by the multiplication 
or by the qualification, A, of the subject, B, of the predicate. 

A. 
1. Multiplication of the Subject. 

Concord. 

281. Number: The common predicate of two or more sub- 
jects is put in the plural number : 

Jus et injuria natura dijudicantur. Cic. Right and wrong are 
distinguished by nature. 

Pater et avus mortui sunt. Ter. Father and grandfather are dead. 

Exceptions. — 1. The common predicate may agree with a singular 
subject when that subject is the nearest or the most important : (" My flesh 
and my heart faileth," Psa. lxxiii. 26.) 

Aetas et forma et super omnia Romanum nomen te ferociorem facit, 
Liv. Tour youth and beauty, and, above all, the name of Roman, makes you 
too mettlesome. 

Naves et praesidium excessit. Liv. The fleet and garrison departed. 

2. Two abstracts in combination, when they are conceived as a unit 
take a singular verb : (" When distress and anguish cometh upon you/ 
Prov. i. 27.) 



concord. 149 

Religio et fides anteponatur amicitiae. CiC. Let the religious obliga- 
tion of a promise be preferred to friendship. 

So any close union : (" Your gold and silver is cankered," Jas. v. 3.) 
Senatus populusque Romanus intellegit. CiC. The senate and 
people of Borne perceives (r= Home perceives.) 

Remarks.— 1. Neque— neque, neither— nor, allows the Plural chiefly when the Per- 
sons are different : 

Kaec n e q u e ego neque tufecimus. Ter. Neither you nor I did this. 

2. A singular subject combined with another word by cum, with, is treated some- 
times as a singular, sometimes as a plural : 

Mago cum omnibus fere armatis refugerat. Liv. Mago with almost all the 
armed men had retreated. 

Taurus cum quinque vaccls lino ictti fulminis exanima tl sunt. Lrv. A 
bull with jive cows were killed by one stroke of lightning. 

282. Gender : When the genders of combined subjects are 
different, the adjective predicate takes either the strongest gen- 
der or the nearest. 

In things with life, the masculine gender is the strongest; in 
things without life, the neuter. 

The strongest : 

Pater et mater mortui sunt. Ter. Father and mother are dead. 
Murus et porta de caeld t a c t a. Lit. Wall and gate had been struck 
by lightning. 

The nearest : 

Convictaest Messalina et Sllius. Tag. Messalina was convicted and 
(so was) Silius. 

Hippoiochus Larissae5rumque deditum est praesidium. LiY. 

Hippolochus and the Larissaean garrison {were) surrendered. 

When things with life and things without life are combined, 
the gender varies. 
Both as persons : 

Rex regiaque classis profecti sunt. Lit. The king and the king J s 

fleet set out. 

Both as things : 

Natura inimica sunt libera civitas et rex. LiY. A free State and a 
king are natural enemies. 



Remark.— On the neuter as a predicate see 199, R. 4. 

Pax et concordia victis utilia, victoribus tantum pulchra sunt- Tag. Peace 
and harmony are useful (things) to the conquered, to the conquerors alone are they orna- 
ments. 



150 ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE. 

283. Persons : When the persons of combined subjects are 
different, the First Person is preferred to the Second, the Second 
to the Third : 

Si tu et Tullia, lux nostra, valetis, ego et suavissimus Cicero vale- 
mus. Cic. If Tullia, light of my eyes, and you are well, dearest Cicero and 
I are well. 

Remarks.— 1. The order is commonly the order of the persons, not of modern polite- 
ness : Ego et uxor mea. Wife and I. 

2. Exception.— In contrasts, and when each person is considered separately, the pred- 
icate agrees with the person of the nearest subject : 

Ego sententiam, tu verba defendis. lam the champion of the spirit, you of the 
letter. 

Et ego et Cicero meus flagitabit. Cic. My Cicero will demand it and (so will) /. 

So regularly with disjunctives. On neque— neque, see 281, R. 1. 

2. Qualification* of the Subject. 

284. The subject may be qualified by giving it an attribute. 
An attribute is that which serves to give a specific character. 

The chief forms of the attribute are : 

I. The adjective and its equivalents : amicus certus, a sure 
friend. 

II. The substantive in apposition: Cicero orator, Cicero the 
orator. 

Remark.— The equivalents of the adjective are : 1. The pronouns hlC, this, ille, 
that, etc. 2. Substantives denoting rank, age, trade : servus homo, a slave person / 
homo senex, an old fellow ; homo gladiator, a gladiator-fellow ; mulier ancilla, a 
servant-wench. 3. The genitive (357). 4. The ablative (402). 5. Preposition and case : 
excessus e vita, departure from life. 6. Adverbs chiefly with participial nouns : rectS 
facta, good actions. 7. Relative clauses (506). 

I. Adjective Attribute. 

Concord. 

285. The Adjective Attribute agrees with its substantive, in 
gender, number, and case : 

Gender. Number. 

Vir sapiens, a wise man, viri sapientes, wise men. 

Mulier pulchra, a beautiful woman, mulieres pulchrae, beautiful 

women. 
Regium donum, royal gift, regia ddna, royal gifts. 



PECULIAR FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE. 151 

Case. 
Viri gapientis, of a wise man. bone fill ! good son ! 

Mulierl pulchrae, for a beautiful woman, regio don5, by royal gift. 
Virum sapient em, wise man. mulieres pulchras, beautiful 

women. 

286. The common attribute of two or more substantives 
agrees with th e nearest : 

Omnes agri et niaria, . 

YAH lands and seas. 



Agri et maria o m 



aria, ) 
nia,p 



Remarks. — 1. The Latin language repeats the common attribute more frequently 
than the English : omnes agri et omnia maria, all lands and (all) seas. Generally, 
the Latin language has a strong tendency to rhetorical repetition. 

2. A common surname is put in the plural : M. et Q- Cicerones, Marcus and Quintus 
Cicero ; GK, Gn., M. Carbones, Gains, Gnaeus (and) Marcus Carbo; otherwise, M. Cicero 
et Q- Cicero, Marcus and Quintus Cicero. 

287. Position of the Attribute. — When the Attribute is em- 
phatic, it is commonly put before the substantive, ordinarily 
after it. 

1, Pugitivus servus, a runaway slam (one complex). 

2. Servus f u g i t i v u s, a slave (that is) a runaway (two notions). 
Many expressions, however, have become fixed formulae, such as civis 

Romanus, Roman citizen ; populus Romanus, people of Borne. 

Remark.— The. superlatives which denote order and sequence in time and space are 
of ten used partitively, and then generally precede their substantive: summa aqua, the 
surface of the water; summus mons, the top of the mountain; vere primo, primo 
vere, in the beginning of spring ; in media urbe, in the midst of the city. So also, re- 
liqua, cetera Graecia, the rest of Greece. 

288. When the attribute belongs to two or more words, it is 
placed sometimes before them all, sometimes after them all, 
sometimes after the first. 

All lands and seas, omnes agri et maria; agri et maria om- 
nia; agri omnes et maria. 

ygMT' The beginner may omit to 318. 

Peculiar Forms op the Adjective Attribute. 

289. The following forms of the Adjective Attribute present 
important peculiarities. 

1. Demonstrative Pronouns. 

2. Determinative and Reflexive Pronouns. 



152 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

3. Possessive Pronouns. 

4. Indefinite Pronouns. 

5. Numerals. 

6. Comparatives and Superlatives. 

1. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

290. Hie, this (the Demonstrative of the First Person), refers 
to that which is nearer the speaker, and may mean : 

1. The speaker himself : hi c homo = ego. 

2. The judges in a suit of law : si ego hos novi, if I know these men 
(= the jury). 

3. The most important subject immediately in hand: hie sapiens de 
quo loquor, this (imaginary) wise man of whom I am speaking. 

4. That in which the speaker is peculiarly interested : hoc studium, 
this pursuit of mine, of ours. 

5. That which has just been mentioned: haec hactenus, these things 
thus far = so much for that. 

G. Very frequently, that which is about to be mentioned : his condi- 
cionibus, on the following terms. 

7. The current period of time : h i c dies, to-day ; haec nox, the night 
just past or just coming ; hie mensis, the current month. 

291. Iste, that (of thine, of yours), refers to that ivhich belongs 
more peculiarly to the Second Person (Demonstrative of the 
Second Person) : 

Perfer i s t a m militiam. Cic. Endure that military service of yours. 
Adventu tu5 i s t a subsellia vacuefacta sunt. Cic. At your approach 
the benches in your neighborhood were vacated. 

Remark.— The supposed contemptuous character of Iste arises .from the refusal to 
take any direct notice of the person under discussion, " the person at whom." 

292. Hie, that (the Demonstrative of the Third Person), de- 
notes that which is more remote from the speaker, and is often 
used in contrast to hie, this. 

Heu quantum haec Niobe Nioba distabat ab ilia. Ov. Alas ! how 
far this Niobe differed from that Niobe. 
Ille may mean : 

1. That, which has been previously mentioned (often ille quidem): 
illud quod initio vobis proposui, that which 1 propounded to you at first 

2. That which is well known, notorious (often put after the substantive) : 



DETERMINATIVE AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 15 3 

testula ilia, that (notorious) potsherd — institution of ostracism; illud 
Solonis, that (famous saying) of Solon 1 s. 

3. That which is to be recalled: illud imprimis mirabile, that (which 
I am going to remind you of) is especially wonderful. 

4. That which is expected : 

Ilia dies veniet mea qua lugubria ponam. Ov. The day will come 
when I shall lay aside (cease) my mournful strains. 

Remarks.— 1. Hie and ille are used together in contrasts : as, the latter— the former, 
the former— the latter. 

When both are matters of indifference the natural signification is observed: hie, the 
latter ; ille, the former 

Ignavia corpus hebetat, labor firmat ; i 1 1 a maturam senectutem, hie long- 
am adulescentiam reddit. Cels. Laziness weakens the body, toil strengthens it ; the one 
(the former) hastens old age, the other (the latter) prolongs youth. 

When the former is the more important, hie is the former, ille the latter : 

Melior tutiorque est certa pax quam sperata victoria ; h a e c in nostra, ilia 
in deorum nianu est. Liv. Better and safer is certain peace than hoped-for victory ; the 
former is in our hand(s), the latter in the hand(s) of the gods. 

2. Hie et ille ; ille et ille ; ille aut ille, this man and (or) that man = one or two. 
Non dlcam hoc signum ablatum esse et illud; hoc dico, nullum te signum 

reliquisse. Cic. I will not say that this statue was taken off and that ; (what) I say (is) 
this, that you left no statue at all. 

3. The derived adverbs retain the personal relations of hie, iste, ille : hie, here 
(where I am) ; nine, hence (from where I am) ; hue, hither (where I am) ; istlc, there 
(where you are) ; illic, there (where he is), etc. 

4. The Demonstrative Pronouns hie, iste, ille, and the Determinative is, are often 
strengthened by quidem, indeed. The sentence often requires that either the demon- 
strative or the particle be left untranslated. 

Optare hoc quidem est, non docere. Cic. That is a (pious) wish, not a (logical) 
proof. 

Nihil perfertur ad nos praeter rumores satis istos quidem constantes 
sed adhuc sine auctore. Cic. Nothing is brought to us except reports, quite consistent, it 
is true but thus far not authoritative. 

2. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 

293. Is, that, is the determinative pronoun, and the regular 
antecedent of the relative. 

Mihi obviam venit tuus puer ; i s mihi litteras abs te reddidit. Cic. 

I was met by your servant ; he delivered to me a letter from you. 

Is minimo eget mcrtalis qui minimum cupit. Syrus. That mortal 
is in want of least, who wanteth least. 

Remarks.— 1. Is, as the antecedent of the relative, is often omitted, chiefly in the 
Nominative, more rarely in an oblique case. 

Eis dat qui cito dat. Pkov. He gives twice who gives in a trice. 

2. Is, with a copulative or adversative particle, is used as he or that in English, for the 
purpose of emphasis. Such expressions are : et is, atque is, isque, and he too, and that 

7* 



154 REFLEXIVE PRO^OUXS. 

too ; neque is, et is non, and he not, and that not ; sed is, but he, further strengthened 
by quidem, indeed. 

Exempla quaerimus e t e a non antlqua. Cic. We are looking for examples, and 
those, too, not of ancient date. 

Epicurus una in domo et ea quidem angusta quam magnos tenuit ami- 
corum greges. Cic. What shoals of friends Epicurus had in one house, and that a pinched- 
up one ! 

3. Is does not represent a noun before a Genitive, as in the English that of. In Latin 
the noun is omitted, or repeated, or a word of like meaning substituted. 

Non jiidicio discipulorum dlcere debet magister sed discipull magistri. 
Quint. The master is not to speak according to the judgment of the pupils, but the pupils 
according to that of the master. 

Nulla est celeritas quae possit cum animi celeritate contendere. Cic. There 
is no speed that can possibly vie with that of the mind. 

M. Coelius tribunal suum juxta G. Trebonl sellam collocavit. Caes. Marcus 
Coelius placed his chair of office next to that of Gaius Trebonius. 

Of course Hie, Ille, and Iste can be used with the Genitive in their proper sense. 

294. Eeflexive : Akin to is is the Eeflexive Pronoun sul, 
sibi, se. Instead of the Genitives ejus, eorum, earum, eorum, the 
Possessive of the Eeflexive, suns, sua, suum, is employed when 
reference is made to the subject of the sentence : 

Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae. ISTep. Alex- 
ander (when) dying had given Ms ring to Perdiccas. 

Quod quis habet dominae conferat omne s u a e. Ov. (265 .) 

On the other hand : 

Deum agn5scis ex operibus ejus. God you recognize by Ms works. 

The same principle applies to the other cases of is and of 
the Eeflexive. Hence the general rule : 

295. The forms of the Eeflexive Pronoun are used when 
reference is made to the subject of the sentence. 

Ipse s e quisque dlligit. Cic. Everybody loves Mmself. 

Remarks.— 1. Suus, when used in an emphatic sense {own, peculiar, proper), may 
refer to another case than that of the subject : 

Hannibalem sui elves e clvitate ejecerunt- Cic. HannibaVs own countrymen 
exiled him. 

Justitia suum culque distribute Cic. Justice gives each man that is his own = 
his due. 

Inque s u o s volui cogere verba pedes. Ov. And I wished to force the words into 
their proper feet (places in the verse). 

Suo tempore, at the proper, fitting time. So suo loco : 

Comoediae quern usurn in pueris putem suo loco dicam. Quint. What 1 
consider to be the good of comedy in the case of boys I will mention in the proper place. 

2. In dependent clauses the reflexive is used with reference either to the principal or 
to the subordinate subject. See for fuller treatment 521. 






distinctive ppoxorx. 155 

296. Idem, the same, serves to unite two or more attributes or 
predicates on a person or thing. 

Idem is often to be translated by at the same time ; Mkeivise, 
also ; yet, notwithstanding. 

Cimon incidit in eandem invidiam quam pater srius. Nep. Gimon 
fell into the same odium as his father. 

Quidquid honestum est idem est utile. Cic. Whatever is honorable 
is also (at the same time) useful. 

Nil prodest quod non laedere possit idem. Ov. Nothing helps that 
may not likewise hurt. 

Epicurus, quum optimam et praestantissimam naturam del dicat esse, 
negat Idem esse in deo gratiam. Cic. Although Epicurus says that the 
nature of God is transcendently good and great, yet (at the same time) he says 
that there is no sense of favor in God. 

Difficilis facilis, jucundus acerbus, es idem. Mart. Grabbed (and) 
kindly, sweet (and) sour, are you at once. 

Kebiarks.— 1. The same- asis expressed by idem with qui, with atque or ac, with ut, 
with cum, and poetically with the Dative : 

Servi moribus iisdem erant quibus dominus. Cic. The servants had the same 
character as tJie master. 

Est animus erga te idem a c fuit- Ter. Her feelings toward you are the same as 
they were. 

Disputationem esponimus iisdem fere verbis u t actum disputatumque 
est. Cic. We are setting forth the discussion in very mmch the same words in which it 
was actually carried on. 

Tibi mecum in eodem pistrino vlvendum. Cic. You have to live in the same 
treadmill vjiih me. 

Invltum qui servat idem facit Occident!. Hor. He who saves a man('s life) 
against his will, does the same thing as one who Mils him (as if he killed him) . 

2. Idem cannot be used with is, of which it is only a stronger form (is + dem). 

297. Ipse, self, is the distinctive pronoun, and separates a 
subject or an object from all others : 

Ipse feci, I myself did it and none other, I alone did it, I did it of my own 
accord, I am the very man that did it. 

Nunc ipsum, at this very instant, at this precise moment. 

Conon non quaesivit ubi ipse tuto viveret, sed unde praesidio 
esse posset civibus suis. ISTep. Gonon did not seek a place to live in safely 
himself, but a, place from which he could be of assistance to his countrymen. 

Valvae subito se ipsae aperuerunt. Cic. The folding-doors suddenly 
opened of their own accord. 

Cato mortuus est annis oct5ginta sex ipsis ante Ciceronem con- 
sulem. Cic, Gato died just eighty-six years before Cicero's consulship. 



156 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Remarks.— 1. Owing to this distinctive character, ipse is often used of persons in 
opposition to things; riders in opposition to horses; inhabitants in opposition to the 
towns which they inhabit; the master of the house in opposition to his household. 

Eo quo me ipsa misit. Plaut. 1 am going where mistress sent me. 

2. Et ipse, likewise, as well, is used when a new subject takes an old predicate: 

Virtutes et ipsae taedium pariunt nisi gratia varietatis adjiitae. Quint. 
Virtue* likewise (as well as faults) produce weariness unless they are flavored with variety. 

Camillus ex Volscis in Aequos transiit e t i p s o s helium molientes. Liv. 
Camillas went across from the Volscians to the Aequians, who were likewise (as well as the 
Volscians) getting up war. 

298. Ipse is used to lay stress on the reflexive relation ; in the 
Nominative when the subject is emphatic, in the Oblique Oases 
when the object is emphatic. 

Se ipse laudat, he (and not another) praises himself. 

Se ipsum laudat, he praises himself (and not another). 

Piger ipse sibi obstat. Pkov. The lazy man stands in Ms own way, 
is his own obstacle. 

Non egeo medicina ; me ipse consolor. Cic. I do not need medicine ; 
I comfort myself (I am my only comforter). 

Omnibus potius quam i p s I s nobis consuluimus, we have consulted the 
interest of all rather than our own. 

Exceptions are common: 

Quique aliis cavit n5n cavet ipse sibL Ov. And lie who took pre- 
cautions for others takes none for himself. 



3. POSSESSIVE PROKOUNS. 

299. The Possessive Pronouns are more rarely used in Latin 
than in English, and chiefly for the purpose of contrast or clear- 
ness. 

Manus lava et cena. Cic. Wash (your) hands and dine. 

Praedia m e a tu possides, ego aliena misericordia vivo. ClC. 

You are in possession of my estates^ (while) Hive on the charity of others. 

Remark.— Observe the intense use of the Possessive in the sense of property, peculi- 
arity, fitness : suum esse, to belong to one's self, to be one's own man. 

Tempore t u o pugnasti. Liv. You have fought at your oivn time (= when you 
wished). 

Ego anno" meo Gonsul f actus sum. Cic. Iivas made consul in my own year (= j 
the first year in which I could be made consul). 

Pugna suum finem quum jacet hostis habet Ov. A fight has reached 'itefit 
end when the foe is down. 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 157 

4. INDEFINITE FKONOUNS. 

300. Quldam means one, a, a certain one (definite or indefinite 
to the speaker, not definitely designated to the hearer): qul- 
dam rhetor, a certain rhetorician. 

In the plural, it is equivalent to some, sundry, without emphasis. 

Quldam is often used with or without quasi, as if, to modify 
an expression : 

Est quaedam virtutum vitidrumque vicinia. Quint. There is a cer- 
tain neighborly relation betioeen virtues and vices. 

Non sunt isti audiendl qui virtutem duram et quasi ferream 
q u a n d a m esse volunt, Cic. Those friends of yours are not to be lis- 
tened to who will have it (maintain) that virtue is hard, and as it were made 
of iron. 

301. Aliquis (aliqul), means, some one (wholly indefinite), 
some one or other: fecit hoc aliquis tul similis, some one or 
other like you did this; aliqul scrupus, some scruple or other. 

In the predicate it is emphatic (by Litotes, 448, R. 2) : sum aliquis, 
aiiquid,2 am somebody = a person of importance, something = of some 
tceight, opposed to : nullus sum, nihil sum, I am a nobody, nothing. 

Est ali qui d fatale malum per verba levare. Ov. It is something to 
relieve the fated misfortune by words. 

302. Guis (qui), fainter than aliquis, is used chiefly in relative 
sentences and after quum, when, si, if, ne, lest, num, whether, quo 
the . . . 400. 

Ne quid nimis ! nothing in excess ! 

Si qua volet regnare diu, deludat amantem. Ov. (231, R. 2.) 

Quod qui s habet dominae conferat omne suae. Ov. (265.) 

/ 
Remark. — Aliquis is used after si, and the rest when there is stress : si quis, if 
any ; si aliquis, if some. 

Si aliquid dandum est voluptatl, modicls convlviis senectus delectari potest. 

Cic. If something is to be given to pleasure (as something or other must), old age can take 
delight in mild festivities. SI quid, if anything ; si quidquam, if anything at all. 

When used with negatives, the negative itself is commonly negatived : Verres 
nihil unquam fecit sine ali quo quaestu. Cic. (445.) 

303. Quispiam is rarer than aliquis, but not to be distin- 
guished from it, except that quispiam is never found in negative 
sen tences : dixerit quispiam, some one may say. 

304. Quisquam and ullus (adjective) mean any one (at all), 



138 INDEFINITE PKONOUNS. 

and are used chiefly in negative sentences, in sentences that 
imply total negation, and in sweeping conditions: 

Justitia nunquam nocet cuiquam. Cic. Justice never hurts anybody. 

Quis unquam Graecorum rhetorum a Thucydide quidquam 
duxit? Cic. What Greek rhetorician ever drew anything from Thucydides? 
[None]. 

Si quisquam, ille sapiens fuit. Cic. If any one at all (was) wise, he was. 

Est u 1 1 a res tanti, ut virl boni et splendorem et nomen amittas ? 
Cic. Is anything of such importance as that you should lose (for its sake) the 
splendid title of a good man? 

The negative of quisquam is nemo, nobody ; nihil, nothing (105). 
Nemo, however, is sometimes used as an adjective : 

Nemo discipulus, no scholar. 

The negative of ullus is nullus, no, none, which is also used regularly as 
a substantive in the Genitive and Ablative instead of neminis and nemine. 

Remarks.— l. On neque quisquam and et nemo, see 479. 

2. Nullus is used in familiar language instead of non (so sometimes in English) : 
Philippus nullus usquam. Liv. No Philip anywhere. 

305. Quisque (from quisquis) means each one. 

Laudati sunt omnes ddnatique pr5 merito q u i s q u e . Lrv. All were 
praised and rewarded, each one according to his desert. 

Quam quisque norit artem in hac se exerceat, (618.) 

With superlatives and ordinals quisque is loosely translated 
every : 

Optimum quidque rarissimum est. Cic. Every good thing is rare , 
more accurately, The better a thing, the rarer it is. (645, R. 2.) 

Quinto qudque anno Sicilia tota censetur. Cic. Every fifth year all 
Sicily is assessed. 

Primo quoque tempore, The sooner the better, as soon as possible. 

Remarks. — 1. Quisque is commonly postpositive, almost invariably after the reflex- 
ive : ipse se quisque diligit (295) ; suum cuique (295, K. 1), except when the reflex- 
ive is especially emphatic. 

2. Niigelsbach's formulae: 

a. Non omnia omnibus tribuenda sunt, sed suum cuique ; 

b. Omnes idem faciunt, sed optimus quisque optime ; 
c Non omnibus annls hoc fit, sed tertio quoque anno ; 
d. Non omnes idem faciunt, sed quod quisque vult. 

306. Alter and alius are both translated other, another, but 
alter refers to one of two, alius to diversity. 



i 



NUMERALS. 150 

S51us aut cum a 1 1 e r 5 , alone or with (only) one other ; alter Nero, 
a second Nero. 

Alter alterum quaerit, one (definite person) seeks the other (definite 
person); alius alium quaerit, one seeks one, another another; alter! — 
alteri, one party — another party (already defined) ; alii — alii, some — others. 
Alter often means neighbor, brother, fellow-man ; alius, third person. 

Alter: 

AgesJlaiis claudus fuit a 1 1 e r o pede. Nep. Agesilaus was lame of one 
foot. 

Altera manu fert lapidem, panem ostentat altera. Plaut. In 
one hand a stone he carries, in the other holds out bread. 

Mors nee ad vivSs pertinet nee ad mortuos : alteri null! (304, R 2) 
sunt, alteros n5n attinget. Cic. Death concerns neither the living nor 
the dead : the latter are not, the former it will not reach. 

Alius: 

Fallacia alia aliam trudit. Ter. One lie treads on the heels of another 
(indefinite series). 

Divitias alii praeponunt, alii honores. Cic. Some prefer riches, others 
honors. 

Aliud alii natura iter ostendit. Sall. Nature shows one path to one 
man, another path to another man. 

Alter and alius : 

Ab alio espectes alteri quod feceris. Syrus. You may look for 
from another what you've done unto your brother (from No. 3, what No. 1 
has done to No. 2). 

5. NUMERALS. 

307. Duo means simply two, ambo, both (two considered to- 
gether), uterque, either (two considered apart, as, " They cruci- 

1 tied two others with him, on either side one," John xix. 18) : 

Supplicatio amborura nomine et triumphus utrique decretus 
est. Liv. A thanksgiving in the name of both and a triumph to either (each 
of the two) was decreed. 

Remark.— Uterque is seldom plural, except of sets : 

Utrique [plebis fautores et senatus] victoriam crudeliter exercebant. Sall. 
Either party (democrats and senate) made a cruel use of victory. 

Duae fuerunt Ariovisti uxores : utraeque in ea fuga perierunt. Caes. 
Ariovistus" 's wives were two in number ; both perished on that flight. 

On uterque with the Genitive, see 370 R. 2. 

308. Mille, a thousand, is in the Singular an indeclinable Adjective, 
and is less frequently used with the Genitive : mille milites, rather than 
mille militum, a thousand soldiers ; in the Plural it is a declinable Substan- 
tive, and must have the Genitive : duo milia militum, two thousand^ of) 
soldiers = two regiments of soldiers. 



:0 COMPARATIVES. 



But if a smaller number comes between, the noun follows the smaller 
number : 

f tria mllia quingenti equites, 
| tria mllia equitum et quingenti, but 
3500 cavalry, - <j equit§s tria milia quingenti, or 

[ equitum tria mllia quingenti. 

309. The ordinals are used for the cardinals with a careless- 
ness which gives rise to ambiguity: 

Quattuor anni sunt, \ ex quo te non vidi, 

It is four pears, y that I have not seen you {since I saw you). 
Quartus annus est, ) 
It is the fourth year {four years, going on four years). 

Remark.— To avoid this ambiguity inceptus, begun, and ex&CtVLS, finished, seem to 
have been used. Gellius, N. A. iii. 16. 

310. The distributives are used with an exactness which is 
foreign to our idiom wherever repetition is involved, as in the 
multiplication table. 

With singuli either cardinal or distributive may be used. 

Ant5nius [pollicitus est] denarids quingen5s (or quingentos) singulis 
mllitibus daturum. Cic. Antonius promised to give 500 denarii to each sol- 
dier. 

Scriptum eculeum cum q u i n q u e pedibus, pullos gallinaceos tres 
cum terms pedibus natos esse. Ltv. A letter was written to say that a colt 
had been foaled with five feet (and) three chickens hatched with three feet 
(apiece). 

Carmen ab ter novenis virginibus can! jusserunt. Lit. They or- 
dered a chant to be sung by thrice nine virgins. 

Remark. — The poets often use the distributive where the cardinal would be the 
rule, and the cardinals are sometimes found even in prose, where we should expect the 
distributives. Bin! is not un frequently used of a pair : Bin! scyphl, a pair of cups. 
On the distributives with Pluralia tantum, see 95, R. 2. 

6. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 

311. Comparative. — The comparative degree generally takes 
a term of comparison either with quam, than, or in the Ablative: 

Ign5ratio futurorum malorum utilior est quam scientia. Cic. Igno- 
rance of future evils is better than knowledge (of them). 

Tullus Hostilius ferocior etiam Romulo fuit. Lrv. Tullus Hostilius 
was even more mettlesome than Romulus. 

Remarks.— 1. The Ablative is used only when the word with quam would stand in 
the Norn, or Ace. 



COMPARATIVES. 161 

Caesar minor est \ S Uam ? om P g J us ' !■ Caesar is younger than Pompey. 
' rompejo, > 

Caesarem magis amamus i ^am_Pompejum, J. we love Caesar ^^ than p om pey. 

But— 

Caesari magis fav emus quam Pompeja, we favor Caesar more than Pompey (647). 

2. The Ablative is very common in negative sentences, and is used exclusively in 
negative relative sentences. 

Non adeo cecidi quamvis dejectus ut infra te quoque sim, inferius quo nihil 
esse potest. Ov. / have not fallen so far, however cast down, as to be lower than you, 
than ivhom nothing can be lower. 

3. Measure of difference is put in the ablative, 397. 

4. Quam is often omitted after plus, amplius, more, and minus, less, and the like, 
without affecting the construction. 

Hominl misero plus quingentos colaphos infregit mini. Ter. He has dealt me, 
luckless creature, more than five hundred crushing boxes on the ear. 

Spatium est non amplius pedum sexcentorum. Caes. The space is not more than 
| (of) six hundred feet. 

More than thirty years old: 1. Natus plus (quam) triginta annos. 

2. Natus plus triginta annis (rare). 

3. Major (quam) triginta annos natus. 

4. Major triginta annis (natus). 

5. Major triginta annorum. 

Palus non latior pedibus quinquaginta. Caes. A swamp not broader than fifty 
feet (or pedes quinquaginta). 

5. On the combination of the comparative with opinione, opinion, spe, hope, and the 
like, see 399, R. 1. 

6. Atque for quam is poetical. 

312. Standard of Comparison omitted.— When the standard 
of comparison is omitted, it is supplied.: 1. By the context; 
2. By the usual or proper standard ; 3. By the opposite. 

1. By the context : 

Solent reges Persarum p lures uxores habere. Cic. The kings of 
Persia usually have more wives [than one]. 

2. By the proper standard : 

Senectus est natura loquacior. Cic. Old age is naturally rather (or too) 
talkative. 

3. By the opposite : 

Sed melius nesclsse fuit. Ov. But it had been better not to have known 
(than to have known), ignorance had been bliss. 

313. Disproportion.- — Disproportion is expressed by the com- 
parative with quam pro, than for, and the Ablative, or with ut, 
that, or qui, who, and the subjunctive: 

Minor caedes quam pro tanta victoria fuit. Liv. The loss was 
(too) small for so great a victory. 



1G2 SUPERLATIVES. 

Major sum quam ut mancipium sim mei corporis. Sen. I am 
too great to be the slave of my body. 

Major sum quam cui possit Fortuna nocere. Ov. lam too great 

for Fortune possibly to hurt me. 

314. Two Qualities compared. — When two qualities of the 
same substantive are compared, we find either magis and quam 
with the positive, or a double comparative : 

Celer tuus disertus magis est quam sapiens. Cic. Your (friend) 

Celer is eloquent rather than wise- — more eloquent than wise. 

Faulli contio fuit verior quam g r a t i o r populo. Liv. Paullus's 
speech was more true than agreeable to the people. 

Remark.— There is no distinction to be made "between the two expressions. In the 
latter turn, mainly post-Ciceronian, the second comparative is merely attracted into the 
same form as the first. The same rule applies to the adverb : fortius quam fellcius, 
with more bravery than good luck. 

315. Restriction to the Comparative. — When but two objects 
are compared, the comparative exhausts the degrees of com- 
parison, whereas, in English, the superlative is employed, unless 
the idea of duality is emphatic. 

Natu major, the eldest (of two), the elder; natu minor, the young- 
est, the younger. 

Prior, the first ; posterior, the last. 

Posteriores cogitationes, ut ajunt, sapientiores solent esse. Cic. After- 
thoughts, as the saying is, are usually the wisest. 

Remark.— The same rule applies to the interrogative uter, which of two? {whether f) : 

Quaeritur : ex duobus uter dignior;ex pluribus, quis dignissimus. Quint. 

The question is : Of two, which is the worthier ; of more (than two), which is the worthiest. 
Exceptions are rare. 

316. Superlative. — The Latin superlative is often to be ren- 
dered by the English positive, especially of persons : 

Quintus Fabius M a x i m u s , Quintus Fabius the Great. 

Tarn felix esses quam formosissima vellem. Ov. Would thou 
wert fortunate as (thou art) fair. 

Maxima impetu, majore fortuna. Liv. With great vigor, with greater 
luck. 

317. Superlative strengthened. — The superlative is strength- 
ened by longe, by far ; multo, much ; vel, even; unus, unusjj 



APPOSITION. 163 

omnium, one above all others; quam, quantus — potuit, as — as 

possible. 

Ex Britannis omnibus longe sunt humanissimi qui Cantium incolunt. 

Caes. Of all the Britons by far the most cultivated are those that inhabit 
Kent. 

Protagoras sophistes illls temporibus v e 1 maximus. Cic. Protago- 
ras, the very greatest sophist (— professor of wisdom) in those times. 

Urbem unam mihi amicissimam declinavi. Cic. I turned aside from 
a city above all others friendly to me. 

Caesar quam aequissimo loco potest castra communit. Caes. Caesar 
fortifies a camp in as favorable a position as possible. 

Remabk.— Quam aequissimus locus = tarn aequus quam aequissimus. (For 
other expressions, see 645, R. 5. 

Apposition. 

318. By apposition one substantive is placed by the side of 
another, which contains it : 

Oicero orator, Cicero the orator. 
Rhenus flumen, the river Bhine. 

Concord. 

319. The word in apposition agrees with the principal word 
in number and case, and as far as it can in gender : 

Noro. Herodotus pater historiae, Herodotus the father of history ; 
Gen, Herodoti patris historiae : D. Herodoto patrl historiae. 

Aestus exesor murorum. Lucr. Tide the devourer of walls. 

Athenae omnium doctrmarum inventrices. Cic. Athens the in- 
ventor of all branches of learning. (See 202.) 

Remakks.— 1. The predicate sometimes agrees with the word in apposition, especially 
In names of towns : Corioll oppidum captum est. Liv. Corioli-town was taken. 

Otherwise regulary: 

Fompejus, nostri amores, ipse se aiflixit. Cic. Pompey, our bosom 
friend, lias floored himself 

2. The Possessive Pronoun takes the Genitive in apposition : 

Tuum, hominis simplicis, pectus vidimus. Cic. We have seen your 
bosom bared, you open-hearted creature / 
' Urbs mea unlus opera salva fuit. Cic. The city was saved by my exer- 
tions alone. 

320. Partitive Apposition. — Partitive Apposition is that 
i\ form of Apposition in which a part is taken out of the whole: 



104 PREDICATIVE ATTRIBUTION AND APPOSITION. 

Cetera multitud o sorte deciraus quisque ad supplicium 
lectl sunt. Liv. (Of) the rest of the crowd every tenth man was chosen by lot 
for punishment (Sometimes called Restrictive Apposition.) 

321. Distributive Apposition. — Distributive Apposition is 
,tluit form of Apposition in which the whole is subdivided into 
its parts, chiefly with alter — alter, the one — the other ; quisque, 
each one; alii — alii, some — others. (Often called Partitive.) 

Duae filiae altera occisa altera capta est. Caes. (Of) two 

daughters, the one icas killed, the other captured. 

Remark.— The Partitive Genitive is more commonly employed than either of these 
forms of apposition. 

322. Mihi nomen est. Instead of the apposition with 
no men, name, the name of the person is more frequently at- 
tracted into the Dative. 

/ 1. Mihi Ciceroni nomen est ; most common. 
My name is Cicero, < 2. Mihi nomen Cicero est j less common. 

a 3. Mihi nomen Ciceronis est j least common. 
Nomen Arcturd est mihi. Platjt. My name is Arcturus. 
Tibi nomen insand posuere. Hor. They called you " cracked." 
Samnites Maleventum, cm nunc urbi Beneventum nomen est, perfu- 
gerunt. Lrv. The Samnites fled to Maleventum (Ilcome), a city which now 
bears the name Beneventum (Welcome). 

Nomen Mercurii est mihi. Plaut. My name is Mercury. 

323. Apposition to a Sentence. — Sometimes an accusative 
stands in apposition to a whole preceding sentence : 

Admoneor ut aliquid etiam de sepultura dicendum existimem, rem 
non difficile m. Cic. I am reminded to take into consideration that 
something is to be said about burial also — an easy matter. 

Remark. — This accusative may follow a Passive or Neuter verb as the Object affected. 
Others regard such Neut. Accusatives as Nominatives. 

PREDICATIVE ATTRIBUTION AND PREDICATIVE APPOSI- 
TION. 

324. Any case may be followed by the same case in Predica- 
tive Attribution or Apposition, which differ from the ordinary 
Attribution or Apposition in translation only. 

Nominative : Filius aegrotus rediit. 

Ordinary Attribution : The sick son returned. 



PREDICATIVE APPOSITION AND ATTRIBUTION. 1G5 

Predicative Attribution : The son returned sick — he was sick when he 

returned. 
Hercules juvenis leonem interfecit. 
Ordinary Apposition : The young man Hercules slew a lion. 

Predicative Apposition : Hercules, tohen a young man, slew a lion = 

he teas a young man ivhen he slew a lion. 
Genitive : Potestas ejus adhibendae uxoris, The permission to take her 

to wife. 
Dative : Amic5 vivo non subvenisti, You did not help your friend 

(while he was) alive. 
Accusative : Hercules cervam vivam cepit. 

Ordinary Attribution : Hercules caught a living doe. 
Predicative Attribution : Hercules caught a doe alive. 
Ablative : Aere utuntur importato, They use imported copper = the 
copper which they use is imported. 

Remarks. — 1. The vocative, not being a case proper, is not used predicatively. Ex- 
ceptions are apparent or poetical. 

Quo, moritTLre, ruis % Yerg. " Whither dost thou rush to die?" = Whither dost thou 
rush, thou doomed to die ? 

Notice here the old phrase : 

Macte virtute esto. Yerg. Increase in virtue — Heaven speed thee in thy high career. 

Macte is regarded by some as an old vocative, from the same stem as magnus ; by 
others as an adverb. 

2. Victores redierunt may mean, the conquerors returned, or they returned conquer- 
ors ; and a similar predicative use is to be noticed in idem, the same. 

Iidem abeunt qui venerant, they go away just as they had come (literally, the same 
persons as they had come). 

3. Predicative Attribution and Apposition are often to be turned into an abstract 
noun: 

Ego non eadem volo senex, quae puer volui, I do not wish the same things (as an 
old man) in my old age, that I wished (as a boy) in my boyhood. 

So with prepositions : 

Ante Ciceronem consul em, before the consulship of Cicero ; ante urbem conditam, 
before the building of the city. 

4. Do not confound the " as " of apposition with the " as " of comparison— ut, qua- 
si, tanquam. (645, R. 4). 

Cicero ea quae nunc usii veniunt cecinit ut vates. Nep. Cicero foretold all that 
is coming to pass now as (if he were) an inspired prophet . 

5. When especial stress is laid on the Adjective or Substantive predicate, in combina- 
tion with the verbal predicate, it is well to resolve the sentence into its elements : 

Themistocles tinus restitit, Themistocles alone withstood = Themistocles was the 
only one that withstood. 

Argonautae primi in Pontum Euxinum intraverunt, the Argonauts first 
entered the Euxine (Black) Sea = were the first to enter the Black Sea. 

Una saltis victis nullam sperare salutem. Yerg. The only safety which the 
vanquished have, is to hope for none. 

Fragilem true! commisit pelago ratem primus. Hor. He was the first to trust 
his frail bark to the ivild waves. 

6. The English idiom often uses the adverb and adverbial expressions instead of the 
Latin adjective : so in adjectives of inclination and disinclination, knowledge and igno- 



166 QUALIFICATION OF THE PREDICATE. 

ranee, of order and position, of time and season, and of temporary condition generally t 
libens. wUh ph asure ; volens, willingly) ; nolens, •unwillingly) ; invitus, against one's 
will ; prudens. aware; imprudens, unawares; sciens, knowingly) ; primus, prior, 
first ; ultimus, last ; medius, in, about the middle ; hodiernus, to-day ; matutlnus, in 
the morning ; frequens, frequently) ; sublimis, aloft. 

Odero si potero, si non, invitus amabo. Ov. (231, R. 2.) 

Plus hodie bonl feci imprudens quam sciens ante nunc diem unquam. Ter. 
1 have done more good to-day unawares than I have ever done knowingly before. 

Adcurrit, mediam mulierem complectitur. Ter. He runs up, puts his arms 
about the woman's waist. 

Qui prior strinxerit ferrum ejus victoria erit. Liv, Who draws the sword firsts 
his shall be the victor-y. 

Vespertinus pete tectum. Hor. Seek thy dwelling at eventide. 

Rarus venit in cenacula miles. Juv. The soldiery rarely comes into the garret. 

So also totus, wholly. 

Philosophiae nos totos tradimus, Cic. We give ourselves wholly to philosophy. 

Soli hoc contingit sapientl. Cic. This good luck happens to the wise man alone = 
it is only the wise man who has this good luck. 

7. Carefully to be distinguished are the uses of primus, and the adverbs primum, 
first, for the first time, and primo, at first. 

Primus : Ego primus hanc orationem legi, I was the first to read this speech. 

Hanc p r I m a m orationem legi, this was the first speech that Tread. 

Primum : Hanc orationem primum legi deinde transcrlpsi, I first read (and) 
then copied this speech. 

Hodie hanc orationem primum legi, Iread this speech to-day for the first time. 

Primo : Hanc orationem primo libenter legi, postea magis magisque mini 
jejuna visa est, at first I read this speech with pleasure, afterward it seemed to me drier 
and drier.— Lattmann and Mutter. 

B. 

1. Multiplication of the Predicate. 

325. The Multiplication of the Predicate requires no further 
rules than those that have been given in the general doctrine of 
Concord. 

2. Qualification of the Predicate. 

326. The Qualification of the Predicate may be regarded as 
an External or an Internal change : 

I. External change : combination with an object. 

1. Direct object, Accusative. 

2. Indirect object, Dative. 

II. Internal change: combination with an attribute, whict; 
may be in the form of 

1. The Genitive case. 

2. The Ablative. 



ACCUSATIVE. 1G7 

3. Preposition with a case. 

4. An Adverb. 

Remark.— The Infinitive forms (Infinitive, Gerund, Gerundive, and Supine) appear 
now as objects, now as attributes, and require a separate treatment. 



I. EXTEE^"AL CHAKGE. 

Accusative. 

327. The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object. 
The Object may be contained in the verb (Inner Object, Ob- 
ject Effected) : 

Deus mundum creavit, God made a creation — the universe. 

Akin to this is the Accusative of Extent : 

A recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet discedere. CiC. 

One ought not to swerve a nailbreadth from a right conscience. 



Decern annds Troja oppugnata est. Liv. Ten years was Troy besieged. 
Maximam partem lacte vivunt. Caes. For the most pari they live on 
,milk. 

From the Accusative of Extent arises the Accusative of the 
Outer Object (Object Affected) : 

Deus mundum gubernat, God steers the universe. 

Remakk. — The Accusative of the Inner Object is the characteristic use of the case; 
the Accusative of the Outer Object the most common use. It is sometimes impossible to 
determine which element preponderates; so in verbs compounded with prepositions. 

K- The so-called Terminal Accusative may be conceived as an Inner or an Outer Object. 

q[ [Hence the following table is only approximate : 

General View oe the Accusative. 

328. I. Inner Object ; Object effected. 

Cognate Accusative. 
Accusative of Extent. 

1. In Space. 

2. In time. }► pounded with 

3. Of Adverbial Relation. 
Terminal Accusative 

icllj . (Point Reached). 

II. Outer Object : Object affected. • \ „ , 

i. whole. I Yei ; l)s , com ; 

2. Part (so-called Greek f nM , wllh 
A .. >. Prepositions. 

Accusative). J ^ 



Verbs com- 
mncled v 
Prepositions. 



108 ACCUSATIVE. 

III. Double Accusative: Asking and Teaching. 

Making and Taking. 

IV. Accusative as the most general form of the object (object created 
or called up by the mind) : 

In Exclamations. 
Accusative and Infinitive. 

329. Active Transitive Verbs take the Accusative case: 

Romulus Urbem Romam condidit, Romulus founded Hie City of Borne. 
(Object Effected.) 

Mens regit corpus, Mind governs body. (Object AfFected.) 

Remarks. — 1. Many verbs are intransitive in English which are transitive in Latin ', 
dolere, to grieve (for) ; desperare, to despair (of) ; horrSre, to shudder (at) ; mirariJ 
to wonder (at) ; ridere, to laugh (at). Especially to be noted is the wide scope of the I 
Inner Object: 

Honores desperant, Cic. They despair of honors (give them up in despair). 

Kecata est Vitia quod filil necem flevisset (541). Tac. Vitia was executed for hav 
ing wept (for) her son's execution. 

Conscia mens recti Famae mendacia risit. Ov. Conscious of right, her soul (but 
laughed (at) the falsehoods of Rumor. 

Verbs of Smell and Taste have the Inner Object : 

Piscis ipsum mare sapit. Sen. The fish tastes of the very sea. 

N en omnes possunt olere unguenta exotica. Plaut. It is not every one can sme.. 
of foreign ointments. 

2. The Accusative with Verbal nouns, such as tactio, touching, is comic. 

330. Verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, cii 
cum, con, in, inter, ob, per, praeter, sub, subter, super, and tram 
become transitive, and take the accusative : 

All with circum, per, praeter, trans, super, and subter. 
Many with ad and in. 
Some with ante and con. 

Pythagoras Persarum magos adiit. Cic. Pythagoras applied to (co 
suited) the Persian magi. 

Stella Veneris a n t e greditur solem. Cic. The star Venus goes 
advance of the sun 

Tarn me circumstant densorum turba malorum. Ov. So dense 
crowd of evils encompasses) me. 

Earn, si opus esse videbitur, ipse conveniam. Cic. I will go to see h 
myself, if it shall seem expedient. 

Consilium multae calliditatis init. Ov. He engages in {devises) a plan i 
deep cunning. j 

Tanais Eur op am et Asiam interfluit. Curt. The Don flows oetwt\ 
Europe and Asia. ) 



ACCUSATIVE. 169 

Mortem obiitj e medio abiit. Ter. She went to face Death (died), she 
left the world,. 

Caesar omnem agrum Ficenum percurrit. Caes. Caesar traversed 
rapidly all the Picenian district. 

Populus solet dignos praeterire. Cic. The people is wont to pass by the 
worthy. 

Epammondas paenam subiit. Nep. Epaminondas submitted to the pun- 
ishment. 

Fluminaque antiquds subterlabentia muros. Verg. And rivers 
gliding under ancient walls. 

Roman! rulnas muri supervadebant. Lit. The Romans marched over 
the ruins of the wall. 

Crassus Euphratem nulla belli causa transiit. Cic. Crassus crossed 
the Euphrates without any cause for war. 

Remarks. — 1. If the simple verb is a transitive, it can take two accusatives : 

Agesilaus Hellespontum copias trajScit* Nep. Agesilails threw his troops across 
the Hellespont 

2. With many of these verbs the preposition may be repeated : 

Copias trajecit Khodanum, or trans Khodanum, He threw his troops across the 
Bhone. 

Sometimes with difference of signification : 

Adire ad aliquem, to go to a man; adlre aliquem, to apply to {to consult) a man. 

331. Any verb can take an Accusative of the Inner Object, 
when that object serves to define more narrowly or to explain^ 
i; more fully the contents of the verb. 

"When the dependent word is of the same origin or of kindred 
meaning with the verb, it is called the Cognate Accusative. 

Faciam ut mei memineris dum vitam vivas. Plaut. I'll make 
you think of me the longest day you live. 

Servus est qui ut antiqui dixerunt servitutem servit. Quint. 

He is a slave who, as old-style people said, slaves a slavery =who is a slave that 
is a slave. 

Remarks.— 1. The Cognate Accusative, when a substantive proper, is commonly at- 
tended by an attribute : 

Consiniilem luserat jam olim ille ludum, Ter. He had long before played a 
like game. 

Cantilenam e a n d e m canis. Ter. You are singing the same song. 

Mirum atque inscitum somniavl somnium. Plaut. A marvellous and uncanny 
dream I've dreamed. 

2. Much more common is the Cognate Accusative of neuter pronouns and adjectives 
treated as substantives : 

Xenophon eadem fere p e c c a t. Cic. Xenophon makes very much the same mis- 
takes. 

Equidem posse veil em idem glSriari quod Cyrus. Cic. For my part I could 
wish that it were in my power to make the same boast as Cyrus. 



I r DO U BLE ACO U S ATI V E. 

Quidquid dell rant reges plectuntur Achlvl. Hor. Whatever mad freak 
the kings play, the Achivi are punished for it. 

Quid lacrumas % Ter. What are you crying for? 

With transitive verbs an accusative of the person can be employed beside: 

Discipulos id unum moneo ut praeceptores suos non minus quam ipsa 
studia anient. Quint. I give pupils this one piece of advice, that they love their teachers 
no less Mum their studies themselves. 

3. From this the accusative neuter gradually passes over into an adverb, such as 
aliquantum, somewhat • nihil, nothing ('* nothing loath 1 ') ; summum, at most. Especi- 
ally to be noted are : magnam partem, to a great extent ; id temporis, at that time ; id 
aetatis, of that age ; id genus, of that kind • omne genus, of every kind. 

Haec vulnera vitae non minimam partem mortis formidine aluntur. Lttcr. 
These wounds of life are for not the least part fostered by the fear of death. 

Nostram vicem ultus est ipse sese. Cic. He took vengeance on himself in our 
stead. 

4. Instead of the Cognate Accusative the Ablative is occasionally found : lapidibus 
pluere, to rain stones ; sanguine sudare, to sweat blood. 

Herculis simulacrum multo sudore manavit. Cic. The statue of Hercules rem 
freely with sweat. 

332. A part of the object affected is sometimes put in the 
Accusative case after a passive or intransitive verb or an 
adjective : 

Tacita cura animum incensus. Lrv. His soul on fire with silent care. 
Jam vulgatum actis quoque saucius pectus. Quint. Now-a-days 
"breast-wounded" is actually a common newspaper phrase. 

Remarks.— 1. This is commonly called the Greek Accusative, and is found chiefly in 
poetry. The common prose construction is the Ablative. 

Neseit stare loco ; micat auribus et tremit artus. Verg. He cannot stand still ; 
he twitches with his ears and quivers in his limbs. 

2. Somewhat different is the Accusative with induor, I don; exuor, I doff ; cingor, 
I gird on myself ; in which verbs the reflexive signification is retained : 

Inutile ferrum cingitur. Verg. He girds on {himself) a useless blade. 

Lorlcara induitur fidoque accingitur ense. Verg. He dons a corslet and begirds 
himself vjith his trusty glaive. 

Arminius impetu equl pervasit oblitus faciem suo cruore ne nosceretur. 
Tac. Hermann got through, thanks to his fiery charger, having smeared his face with his 
own gore to keep from being recognized. 

DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 

333. When two Accusatives depend on the same verb, one is the In- 
ner, the other the Outer object. 

Active verbs signifying to Inquire, to Eequire, to Teach, and 
celare, to conceal, take two Accusatives, one of the Person, and 
the other of the Thing. 

Pusionem quendam Socrates interrogat quaedam gedmetrica. CiC. 1 

Socrates asks an urchin sundry questions in geometry. 



DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 171 

Caesar Aeduos fmmentum fiagitabat. Caes. Caesar kept on demand- 
ing the corn of the Aedui. 

Quid nunc te, asine 3 litteras doceam ? (258). Cic. Why should I now 
give you a lesson in literature, you donkey f 

Iter omnes celat. Nep. He keeps all in the dark about his route, conceals 
Ms route from all. 

Remarks.— 1. The Passive form with the Nominative of the Person and the Accusa- 
tive of the Thing is sparingly used. Discere is more common than doceri. 

Mot us doceri gaudet lonicos mattira virgo. Hon. The rare ripe maid de- 
lights to learn Ionic dances. 

Omnes mllitiae artes edoctus fuerat. Lrv. He had learned (been taught) thoroughly 
all tJie arts of war. 

2. The expressions vary a good deal. Observe : 

This then is not the only way, Posco, I claim, and flagito, 

For it is also right to say ; And always peto, postulo : 

Locere and celare de, Take aliquid ab aliquo, 

Interrogate de qua re\ While quaero takes ex, ab, de, quo. 

Adherbal Bomam legatos miserat, qui senatum docerent de caede fratris. 
Sall. Adherbal had sent envoys to Borne to inform the senate of the murder of his brother. 

Bassus noster me de hoc libro celavit. Cic. Our friend Bassus has kept me in the 
dark about this book. (So commonly in the Passive.) 

Aquam a pumice nunc postulas. Plaut. You are now asking water of a pumice- 
stone (blood of a turnip). 

3. With doceo the Abi. of the Instrument is also used : docere fidibus, equo, to teach 
the lyre, to teach riding. Doctus generally takes the Abl. : Doctus Graecls llttens, a 
good Grecian. 

4. Quid me vis \ what do you want of me ? what do you want me fort belongs to thia 
general class, 

5. On Double Accusative with compound verbs, see 330, R. 1 ; on the accus. neuter of 
the Inner Object, see 331, R. 2. 

334. Verbs of Naming, Making, Taking, Choosing, Showing, 
may have two Accusatives of the same Person or Thing : 

Iram bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae. Cic. Well did Ennius 
call anger the beginning of madness. 

Ancum Marcium regem populus creavit. Lrv. The people made 
Ancus Marcius king. 

Cato Valerium Flaccum collegam habuit. Nep. Goto had Va- 
lerius Flaccus (as) colleague. 

Socratem Apollo sapientissimum judicavit. Cic. Apollo 
judged Socrates (to be) the wisest. 

Atheniensibus Pythia praecepit ut Miltiadem sibi imperatorem 
sumerent. Nep. The Pythia instructed the Athenians to take Miltiades 
(as) their commander. 

Praesta te virum. Cic. Show yourself a man. 

Quern intellegimus divitem ? Cic. Whom do we understand by the 
rich man ? 



172 ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT. 

Remark. — The Double Accusative is turned into the Double Nominative with the 
Passive (197). Reddo, / render, is not used in the Passive, but, instead thereof, fio, / 
become. 

Habeo, with two Accusatives, commonly means to have • in the sense of hold, regard* 
other turns are used : 

Utrum p r 5 ancilla m 6 habe"s an pro filia ? Plaut. Do you look upon me as a 
maidservant or a daughter? 

So habere servorum loco, (in) numero deSrum, to regard as slaves, as gods. 



ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT IN SPACE AND TIME. 

335. The Accusative of Extent in Space accompanies the 
verb, either with or without per, through. 

1. "With per to denote entire occupancy (from one end to the 

other, all through). 

Spars! per provinciam milites, the soldiers scattered all through the 
province. 

Phoebidas iter per Thebas fecit. Nep. Phoebidas marched through 
Thebes. 

2. "Without per to denote distance, how far, how long. 

Trabes inter se binos pedes distabant. Caes. Tlie beams were 
two feet apart. 

Campus Marath5n abest ab oppidd Atheniensium circiter m 1 1 i a 
passuum decern. Nep. The plain (of) Marathon is about ten miles from 
tlie city of Athens. 

A recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet disce- 
dere. Cic. (327.) 

Remarks.— 1. With abesse and distare, an Ablative of measure may also be em- 
ployed : 

Milibus passuum quattuor et vlginti abesse. to be twenty-four miles off. 

2. When the point of reference is taken for granted, ab (a) with the Ablative may be 
used: 

Host 6s ab milibus passuum minus duobus castra posuerunt. Caes. The enemy 
pitched their camp less than two miles off. 

336. The Accusative of Extent in Space accompanies the 
adjectives longus, long ; latus, ivide ; altus, high (deep). 

Fossa pedes trecentos longa est, sex pedes alta, the ditch 
is three hundred feet long, six feet deep. 

Milites agger em latum pedes trecentos trlginta altum pedes 
octoginta exstruxerunt. Caes. The soldiers raised an embankment 
three hundred and thirty feet wide (and) eighty feet high. 



ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE. 173 

337. The Accusative of Extent in Time accompanies . the 
verb, either with or without per, in answer to the question, How 
long ? 

Gorgias centum et novem vixit ann5s. Quiht. Gorgias lived 109 
years. 

Tenuisti provinciam per decern annos. Cic. You have held on to the 
province for 10 years (10 years long). 

Est mecum per totum diem. Plin. Ep. He is with me the livelong day. 

Remark.- Per with the Accusative is frequently used like the Ablative of Time 
within which. Per ilia tempora = illis temporibus, in those times. 
So especially with the negative : 
Nulla res per triennium nisi ad nutum istlus judicata est. Cic. Ko 

matter was decided during {in) the three years except at Ms beck. 

338. The Accusative of Extent in Time accompanies the 
adjective natus, old (born) : 

Puer decern annos natus est, the boy is ten years old. 

Cyrus regnavit ann5s triginta ; quadraginta annos natus regnare 
coepit. Cic. Cyrus reigned thirty years ; (he was) forty years old (when) 
he began to reign. 

ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE CASE. 

339. The Accusative as the Objective Case generally is used 
as an object of Thought, Perception, Emotion ; an object cre- 
ated by the mind, evoked or deprecated by the will. Hence the 
use of the Accusative : 

1. In Exclamations. 

2. With the Infinitive. 

340. The Accusative is used in Exclamations as the general 
object of Thought, Perception, or Emotion : 

Me miserum, poor me / 

Me caecum qui haec ante non vlderim. Cic. Blind me I not to have 
peen all this before. 

So in Exclamatory Questions : 

Quo mihi fortunam, si non conceditur uti ? Hon. What (is the object 
of) fortune to me if Trn not allowed to enjoy it t 

Interjections are used: 

Heu me miserum ! Alas ! poor me I 



174 TERMINAL ACCUSATIVE. 

6 miseras hominum mentes, 6 pectora caeca. LuCR. 0/i, the wretched 
minds of men, oh, the blind hearts ! 

Remarks.— 1. 6 with the Vocative is an* address; with the Nom. a characteristic; 
with the Accus. an object of emotion. 

2. En, Lo! and Ecce, Lo here! take the Nominative : 

En Varus, Lo Varus/ Ecce homo ! Behold the man! 

In the earlier language the Accusative was used : 

En tibi hominem ! Plaut. Here's your man! 

Ecce me ! Plaut. Here am I! 

So Eccum. ellum, eccam, eccillam, in comic poetry. 

There seems to be some confusion between the interrogative En and Em (Hem). 

Pro takes the Vocative: Pro di immortales ! Ye immortal gods ! The Accusative 
occurs in : Pro deum (hominum, deum atque hominum) fidem ! For heaven's sake. 

Hei ! and Vae ! take the Dative. 

Hei mihi ! Ah me ! Vae victis ! Woe to the conquered! 

341. The Accusative as the most general form of the substantive, and 
the Infinitive as the most general form of the verb, are combined so as to 
present the general notion of Subject and Predicate as an object of thought 
or perception (537). 

The Accusative with the Infinitive is used 

1. In Exclamations : 

HeiTij mea lux, te nunc, mea Terentia, sic vesari ! Hem, light of my 
eyes, for you to be so harassed now, Terentia dear. (The idea of) you{r) be- 
ing so harassed / So in idiomatic English, Me write ! 

2. As an Object. (See 527.) 

3. As a Subject. (See 535.) 

Remark.— The Infinitive was originally a Dative-Locative, but almost every syntac- 
tical trace has vanished, and practically it has become an Accusative Neuter. 



ACCUSATIVE OF THE LOCAL OBJECT. 

Terminal Accusative. 

342. The Accusative of the Local Object, Whither? com- 
monly takes a preposition, such as: in, into; ad, to; versus, 
-ward : 

In Graeciam proficisci, to set out for Greece. 

Remarks.— 1. The omission of the preposition, except as below stated, is poetical : 
Italiam venit- Verg. He came to Italy. 

2. Names of Towns and Smaller Islands are put in the Accusative of the place 
Whither? without a preposition. So also rus, into the country ; domum, domos, home, 

For further explanations, see 410. 



DATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS. 175 

Dative. 

343. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object, and al- 
ways implies an object effected which may be contained in the 
verb or expressed. 

Nemo errat uni sibi. Sen. No one errs (makes .mistakes) to, for himself 
alone. 

Fortuna multis dat nimis, satis nulli. Mart. Fortune to many 
gives too much, enough to none. 

Remarks.— 1. In English the form of the Indirect Object is the same as that of the 
Direct: " He shewed me (Dat.) a pure river ;" He shewed me (Ace.) to the priest. Origi- 
nally a case of Personal Interest, it is used freely of Personified Things, sparingly of 
Local Relations, and this despite the fact that Locative and Dative are blended in the 
First and Third Declensions. 

2. When parts of the body and the like are involved, the English possessive is often a 
convenient though not an exact translation. 

Tuo viro ocuil dolent. Ter. Your husband' 1 s eyes ache. Nearer : Your husband 
has a pain in the eyes. Tul viri oculi. Your husband's eyes. 

DATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS. 

344. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with Transi- 
tive verbs, which already have a Direct Object in the Accusa- 
tive. Translation, to, for,. from. This Accusative becomes the 
Nominative of the Passive. 

Active Form : 

To : Facile omnes, cum valemus, recta consilia aegrotis damus. Ter. 

Beadily all of us, when well, give good counsel to the sick. 

For : Frangam tonsori crura manusque simul. Mart. Id break the 
barber's legs for Mm and hands at once. 

From : Somnum mihi ademit. Cic. It took my sleep away from me. 

Passive Form : 

Perpetuus null! datur usus. Hor. Perpetual enjoyment (of a thing) is 
given to no one. 

Immeritis franguntur crura caballis. Juv. Tlie innocent hacks get tlieir 
. legs broken for them. 

Anna adimuntur militibus. Lrv. The soldiers have their arms taken 
from them. 

Domus pulchra dominis aedificatur non muribus. Cic. A handsome 
house is built for its owners, not for the mice. 

Remarks.— 1. For is nearer the Dative than To; but /or (in defence of) is pro : pro 
patria morl, to die for one's country. To (with a view to) is ad or in, and when the idea 
' of motion is involved the preposition must be used, even with dare, which gives its name 
to the Dative : 



1T6 DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 

Hostis est uxor invlta quae a d virum nuptum datur. Platjt. An enemy is the 
wife who \s given to a man in marriage against her will. 

Litter as alicul dare, to give one a letter (to carry or to have). 

Litteras ad aliquem dare, to indite a letter to one. 

Rogas ut mea tibi scripta mittam. Cic. You ask me to send you my writings 
(you wish to have them). 

Libros jam pridem ad te misissem si esse edendos putassem. Cic. I should 
have sent the boohs to you long since if 1 had thought they ou,ght to be published. 

2. From is allowable, and even then merely approximate, when the relation of Per- 
sonal Interest is involved, otherwise the Ablative is used. Both combined in 

Aegroto domino (Dat.) deduxit corpore (Abl.) febres. Hob. From the sick mas- 
ter^ body drained the ague {for the sick master from his body). 

3. The poets are more free in their use of the Dative, inasmuch as their personifications 
are bolder : 

KarthaginI jam non ego nuntios mittam superbos. Hon. Carthage no more 
shall I send haughty tidings. 

Jam satis terrls nivis atque dlrae grandinis misit pater. Hon. Full, full 
enough of snow and dire hail the Sire hath sent the land. 

The extreme is reached when the Dative follows Ire and the like : 

It caelo clamorque virum clangorque tubarum. Verg. Mounts to high heaven 
warriws' shout and trumpets' I 



DATIVE WITH INTKANSITIVE VERBS. 

345. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with many In- 
transitive Verbs of Advantage or Disadvantage, Yielding and 
Kesisting, Pleasure and Displeasure, Bidding and Forbidding, 
such as : prodesse, to do good; nocere, to do harm ; indulgere, to 
give tip ; cedere, to yield ; servlre, to lea slave; parere, oboedlre, 
to be obedient ; credere, to lend belief ; ignoscere, to grant forgive- 
ness ; placere, to give pleasure ; imperare, to give orders ; resist- 
ere, to make resistance. 

Nee prosunt domino quae pro sunt omnibus artes. Ov. 
And the arts which do good to all do none to their master. 

Verba nobis magis nocent, minus prosunt nostra quam aliena. 
Quint. Our own words do us more harm (and) less good than the words of 
others. 

Indulsit lacrimis. Ov. She gate free course to her tears. 

Turpe servlre puellae. Ov. It is disgraceful to play the slave to a 
girl. 

Tu ne cede malls. Vehg. Yield not thou to misfortunes. 

Mundus deo paret et huic oboediunt maria terraeque. CiC. 
The universe is obedient to God, and seas and lands hearken unto him. 

Nimium ne crede color I. Verg. Trust not complexion all too 
much. 



DATIVE. 177 

Ignosce timori. Prop. Grant pardon to my fear. (Be to my fear as 
" you knew it not.) 

Cui placeo protinus ipsa placet. Ov. The girl I please straight 'pleases 
le herself. 

Reliquum est ut tute tibi imperes. Cic. It remains that you give orders 
i yourself (have absolute command over yourself). 

Arbor resistit ventis. Ov. The tree offers resistance to the winds. 

Remaeks. — 1. Among the most notable exceptions are : aequare, to be equal ; de 
ire (to distinguish), to be becoming ; deficere, to be wanting ; juvare, to be a help ; 
ibere, to order ; and vetare, to forbid, which take the Accusative : 

Earn picturam imitati sunt multi, aequavit nemo. Plin. That style of 
linting many have imitated, none equalled. 

Forma v i r o s neglecta d e c e t. Ov. A careless beauty is becoming to men. 

Me dies d e f i c i a t. Cic. The day would fail me. 

Fortes fortuna a d j u v a t- Ter. Fortune favors the brave. 

On jubeo aud veto see 424, R. 3. Fldo and confldo take the Ablative as well as the 
ative. 

2. The Dative use is often obscured by the absence of etymological translation. So 
fibere alicui, to marry a man (to veil for him) ; mederi alicui, to heal (to take one's 
easures for) a man ; supplico, / beg (I bow the knee to) ; persuadeo, I persuade (I 
ake it sweet). 

3. The novice is again reminded that the passives of these verbs are used impersonally : 
08). 

Qui invident egent, ill! quibus invidetur rem habent. Plaut. Those 
ho envy are the needy, tlwse who are envied have the stuff. 



DATIVE AKD VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS. 

346. Many verbs compounded with the prepositions 

ad, ante, con, in, inter, 

ob, post, prae, sub and super, 

&ke the Dative, especially in moral relations. 

J Transitive Verbs have an accusative case besides. 

Pelopidas omnibus perlculls adfuit. Rep. Pelopidas was present 
'o help) in all dangers. 

j Virtus omnibus rebus anteit. Plaut. Virtue goes before all 
hings. 

Non omnis aetas, Lucie, 1 u d 6 convenit. Plaut. Not every age, 
*ood) Lydus (Playfair), sorts with play. 

At lupus et turpes instant morientibus ursi. Ov. But the 
oolf and foul bears press the dying hard. 

! Probus invidet nemini. Cic. The upright man {looks hard at) envies no 
ne. 



178 DATIVE. 

Aris tides interfuit pugnae navali apud Salaminem. Nep. 
Aristides was engaged in the naval battle off Salamis. 

Obsta principiis. Ov. Oppose the beginnings. 

Hannibal Alexandra Magno n5n postponendus est. 
Just. Hannibal is not to be pat below Alexander the Great. 

Omnibus Druidibus praeest unus. Caes. At tfte head of all the 
Druid* is one man. 

Blanda quies victis furtim subrepsit ocelli s. Ov. Caressing 
sleep crept stealthily o'er her vanquished eyes. 

Miseris succurrere disco. Verg. I learn to succor the wretched. 

Anatum ova gallinis saepe supponimus, Cic. We often put 
ducks' eggs under hens (for them to hatch). 

Lucumo superfuit patri. Liv. Lucumo survived his father. 

So with Transitive Verbs, compounded with de and ex. 

Caesar Dejotaro tetrarchiam eripuit, eidem que detraxit 
Armeniam. Cic. Caesar wrested from Dejotarus his tetrarchy, and stripped 
from him Armenia. 

Eemarks.— 1. When the local signification preponderates, the preposition is repeated 
with its proper case : 

Adhaeret navis a d scopulum, the ship sticks to the rock. 

Ajax incubuit in gladium, Ajaxfell on his sword. 

Congredi cum hoste, to engage the enemy. 

Detrahere anulum d e digito, to draw a ring from one's finger. 

The tendency in later Latin is to neglect this distinction, which even in the best period 
is not rigidly observed. Compounds with cum (con-) commonly repeat the preposition : 
always communicare aliquid cum aliquo, to communicate something to a man 
(share it with him). 

2. The analogy of this class of verbs, which imply Nearness, is followed in poetry and 
*ater prose by haereo, misceo, jungo, and others. 

Haeret later! letalis arundo. Verg. Sticks to the side the lethal shaft. 

Quod haerere in equo senex posset (542) admirari solebamus. Cic. We used 
to wonder that the old man could stick to his horse. 

Misce stultitiam consiliis brevem. Hon. Mix with sense a little nonsense {add 
to sense a little spice of nonsense). 

Non potest amor cum timore miscSri. Sen. Love cannot mingle with fear. 

Jungitur TJrsidio. Juv. She is yoked to Orson. 

Junctus is found in Cicero with the Dative. 



VERBS WITH ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. 

347. Some verbs are construed both with the Accusative and 
with the Dative. 

Sometimes there is hardly an appreciable difference; sometimes the 
Dative emphasizes the personal relation. 

Comitor aliquem, I accompany a man ; comitor alicui, I act as com- 



DATIVE. 170 

panion to a man; adulor, generally Accusative, I fawn on; aemulor, 
I rival, I am a rival ; praestolor, I wait for. 

Sometimes the difference follows naturally from the difference of case : 

Cavere alicui, to take precautions for ) 

' * J {.someone. 

aliquem, against ) 

Quique aliis cavit n5n c a v e t ipse s i b i. Ov. (298.) 

Hie niger est, hunc tu, Romane, caveto. Hon. He is a black fellow ; 

against Mm he thou on thy guard, oh Eoman ! 

Metuere alicui, to fear for ) orxnnnM „ n 
' J . J \ some one. 

aliquem, to dread ) 

So all Verbs of Fearing. 

Consulere alicui, to take measures for, consult the interest of ) 

7 T J ' J y some one. 

aliquem, to consult ) 

Convenire alicui, to be suitable for ) o/wn/t ^ a 
m y some one. 

aliquem, to meet ) 

J 1 !■ alicui rei, to moderate \ 
Temperare ) ^ ^ hounds to y a matter. 

aliquid, to manage J 

To be noticed are the constructions of invideo, I envy. 
Invidere alicui aliquid (ClC.) J ((> begmdge a man a m 
(in) aliqua re ) 

alicujus rei (once in Horace). 

alicujus alicui rei, to envy something belonging to a man. 
Non inviderunt laudes suas mulieribus viri Romani. Liv. The men 
of Rome did not begrudge the women the honors that were due them. 

Invidet igne rogi miseris. Lucan. Begrudges the hapless men the 
' funeral fire. 

| Vacare rei | 



) to be at leisure for \ 

) to attend to >a matter. 

Vacare re, a re, to be at leisure from ) 



DATIVE WITH VERBS OF GIVING AND PUTTING. 

348. A few verbs, chiefly of Giving and Putting, take a 
Dative with an Accusative, or an Accusative with an Ablative, 
according to the conception. 

Dono tibi librum, I present (to) you a book. 

Dono te iibro, I present you with a book. 

-.. , j urbi murum, I put round the city a wall. 

( urbem muro, I surround the city with a wall. 
So also aspergere, to besprinkle and to sprinkle on ; impertire, to endow 



1 SO DATIVE. 

and to give; induere, to clothe and to put on; exuere, to strip of and to 
strip off ; miscere, to mix and to mix in. 

DATIVE OF POSSESSOR 

349. Esse, to be, with the Dative, denotes an inner connection 
between its subject and the Dative, and is commonly translated 
by the verb to have: 

Mihi est amicus, I have a friend. 

An nescis longas regibus esse manus ? Ov. Or perhaps you do not 

know that kings have long arms f 

Remarks.— 1. The predicate of esse with the Dative is translated in the ordinary- 
man ner : 

Caesar amicus est mihi, Caesar is a friend to me (amicus meus, my friend, friend 
of mine). 

2. The Dative is never simply equivalent to the Genitive. The Dative is the Person 
interested in the Possession, hence the Possession is emphatic; the Genitive character- 
izes the Possession by the Possessor, hence the Possessor is emphatic. 

Latin! concedunt Eomam caput Latio esse. Liv. The Latins concede that Latium 
has its capital in Rome. (Latii : that Latium's capital was Rome.) 

3. On the attraction of the Dative with nomen esse (322). 

4. The possession of qualities is expressed by in and the Ablative or some other turn: 
In Cicerone magna fuit eloquentia, Cicero had great eloquence. 

Cimon habebat satis eloquentiae. Nep. Cimon had eloquence enough. 

DATIVE OF THE OBJECT FOR WHICH. 

350. Certain verbs take the Dative of the Object for Wliich 
(to what end), and often at the same time a Dative of the Per- 
sonal Object For Wliom, or To W7iom, as in the legal phrase, cul 
bono ? To whom is it (for) an advantage ? == who is advantaged ? * 

Nimia fiducia magnae calamitati solet esse. Nep. Excessive corir 
fidence is usually a great calamity. 

Virtus sola neque datur dono neque accipitur. Sall. Virtue alone 
is neither given nor taken as a present. 

Paupertas pr o b r 6 haberi coepit. Sall. Poverty began to be held (as) 
a disgrace. 

Pausanias rex Lacedaemoniorum venit At tic is auxilio. Nep. 
Pausanias, king of the Lacedaemonians , came to the help of the Attics. 

Viti5 mihi dant quod hominis necessarii mortem graviter fero. 

* Such verbs are: esse, to be ; fieri, to become, to turn out'; dare, to put ; mittere, to 
tend; accipere, to receive; venire, to come; relinquere, to leave; habere, to hold i 
vertere, to interpret ; ducere, to count, and the like. 



DATIYE. 181 

VIatius ap. Cic. They charge it to me as a fault that I resent the murder of 
me so near to me. 

Caesar receptul can! jussit. Caes. Caesar ordered a retreat to be 
ounded. 

Remark. — The origin of this usage seems to be mercantile (Key). In English we treat 
J ront and Loss as persons. 

Quern fors dierum cumque dabit lucre appone. Hon. "Every day that Fate 
hall give, set down to Profit.'''' 

On the Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive in a similar sense, see 430. 

ETHICAL DATIYE. 

351. The Ethical Dative indicates special interest in the 
iction. It may be called the Dative of Feeling, and its use in 
Latin (and Old English) is confined to the personal pronouns. 

Tu mihi Ant5nii exemplo istius audaciam defendis? Cic. Do you 

lefend me (to my face) by Antony's example that fellow's audacity f 

Ecce tibi Sebosus! Cic. Here's your Sebosus! "She's a civil modest wife, one (I 
ell you) that will not miss you morning nor evening prayer." — Shakespeare. 

Et quoscunque meo fecisti nomine versus, ure mihi, laudes desine 
labere meas. Prop. And whatever verses you have made on my account, 
mm them me (I beg) ; cease to keep praises of me. 

Remark.— Especially to be noted is sibi velle, to want, to mean : Quid tibi v l S, 
aulier ? Hor. What do you want, woman f Quid sibi vult haec oratio \ What 
loes this speech mean? 

DATIVE OF THE AGENT. 

352. The Dative is used with Passive Verbs, in prose chiefly 
vith the Perfect Passive, to show the interest which the agent 
;akes in the result. That the person interested is the agent is 
j>nly an inference. (See 206.) 

Res mihi tota provisa est. Cic. I have had the whole matter provided 
for. 

Carmina scripta mihi sunt nulla. Ov. I have no poems written , (there- 
re) have written no poems. 



r 



Remark.— Instances of this Dative with the Tenses of continuance are poetical, or 
.dmit of a different explanation : 

Barbarus hie ego sum quia non intellegor ulli. Ov. lam a barbarian here be- 
ause I can't make myself understood to any one. 

Whenever an Adiective or an equivalent is used, the Dative Plural may bean Ablative : 

Sic dissimillimls bestiolis communiter cibus quaeritur. Cic. So, though these 
itUe creatures are so very unlike, their food is sought in common. 



182 DATTVE. 

Carmina quae scrlbuntur aquae potoribus. Hor. Poems which are written when 
peopk art water-drinkers. 

Cena ministratur puerls tribus. Hor. Dinner is served, {the waiters being) the 
waiters art (but) three. 

353. The agent of the Gerund and Gerundive is put in the 

Dative. 

Hoc milii faciendum est, I have this to be done (this is to be done by me, I 
must do this). 

Est mala sed cunctis ista terenda via. Prop. That is a bad road, but 
one all have to travel. 

Desperanda tibl salva concordia socru. Juv. You must despair of 
harmony while Mother-in-law } s alive. 

Compare the Dative with verbals in -bilis : mihi amabilis, lovable in 
my eyes. 

Remark. — When the verb itself takes the Dative, the Ablative with ab (a) is em- 
ployed for the sake of clearness : 

CI vibus a vobis consulendum. Cic. The interest of the citizens must be consulted by 
you. 

Where there is no ambiguity there is no need of ab. 

Linguae moderandum est tibi. Plaut. You must put bounds to your tongue. 

DATIVE OF PARTICIPLES. 

354. Datives of Participles are used as predicative attributes. 

Phaselis conspicitur prima terrarum Rhodum a Cilicia petentibus. 
Liv. Phaselis is the first land sighted as you make for Rhodes from Cilicia 
(to people as they make for Rhodes). 

In universum aestimanti (= Si aestimes) plus penes peditem rdboris. 
Tac. If you look at it as a whole, there is more real strength in the infantry. 

Remark.— Notice the Greekish phrase : mihi volenti est, lam willing for it to be so. 

DATIVE WITH DERIVATIVE SUBSTANTIVES. 

355. A few derivative substantives take the Dative of their 
primitives : 

Justitia est obtemperatio legibus, Cic. Justice is obedience to the laws. 
Remark.— Otherwise the Dative must have a verb to produce the Object Effected. 

DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 

356. Adjectives of Likeness, Fitness, Friendliness, Nearness, 
and the like, with their opposites, take the Dative : 



GENITIVE. 183 

Rara avis in terris nigroque simillima cycno. Juv. A 

"are bird in this worlds and very like a black swan. 

Non ego sum 1 a u d I n5n natus idoneus armis. Prop. I am 
not fitted, by nature for glory, not fitted for arms. 

Utilis urbl. Hor. Useful to the city. 

Arnica luto sus. Hon. A hog, devoted to the mire. 

Semper, tu sclto, flamma fumo est proxima. Plaut. Bear thou 
in mind, that fire is aye next door to smoke. 

Testis id dicit quod ill! causae maxime est alienum. Cic. The 
witness says what is especially damaging to that case {side). 

Remarks.— 1. Many adjectives which belong to this class become substantives, and 
as such are construed with the Genitive : amicus, friend ; affinis, connection • aequalis, 
contemporary; alienus, foreign, strange; cognatus, kinsman; communis, common ; 
contrarius, opposite ; par, match; proprius, peculiaris, own, peculiar ; similis, Wee ; 
(•■we ne'er shall look upon his like again"), especially of gods and men ; sacer, set apart, 
sacred ; superstes, survivor. 

Domini similis es. Ter. You are like your master. 

Virtute sis par dispar fortunis p a t r i s. Attius. Be thou thy father's match, 
in valor, not in luck. 

2. The object toward which is expressed by the Accusative with in, erga, adversus : 
Manlius fuit severus in fllium. Cic. Manlius was severe toward his son. 

Me esse scit erga se benevolum. Plaut. He knows that I am kindly disposed 
toward him. 

Adversus deos immortales impii jtidicandi sunt. Cic. They are to be judged im- 
pious toward the immortal gods. 

3. The object for which may be expressed by the Accusative with ad, to : 
Homo ad nullam rem utilis. Cic. A good-for-nothing fellow. 

This is the more common construction with adjectives of fitness. 

4. Propior, nearer, proximus, next, are construed also (like prope, near) with the 
Accusative and the Ablative with ab, off : 

Propius est fidem, it is nearer belief, i. e., more likely. 
Qui te proximus est, he ivho is next to you. 

Proximus a tectis ignis defenditur aegre. Ov. A fire next door is kept off with 
difficulty (is hard to keep off). 

5. Alienus, foreign, strange, is also construed with the Ablative, with or without ab 
(a): 

Homo sum, human! nihil a me alienum puto. Ter. I am a man, and nothing 
1 that pertains to man do I consider foreign to me. 

6. In poetry, Idem, the same, is often construed after the analogy of the Greek, with 
the Dative. 

Invitum qui servat idem facit Occident!. Hor. (296, K. 1.) 

7. Derived adverbs take the Dative. 

II. INTERNAL CHANGE. 

Genitive. 

357. The Genitive Case is the Case of the Complement, and 
is akin to the Adjective with which it is often parallel. It is the 
substantive form of the Specific Characteristic. 



184 GENITIVE. 

The chief English representatives of the Genitive are : 

The Possessive case : 

Domus regis, the king's palace. 

The Objective case with of: 

Domus regis, the palace of the king. 

Substantives used as adjectives or in composition : 

Arbor abietis, fir-tree. 

Remakks.— 1. Other prepositions than of are not unfrequently used, especially with 
the Objective Genitive. (361, R. 1.) 

Patriae quis exsul se quoque ftigit % Hon. What exile from his country ever fled 
himself as well? 

Boiorum triumph! spem collegae rellquit. Liv. He left the hope of a triumph 
over the Boii to his colleague. 

Via mortis. Liv. The death-path, the way to death. Elsewhere : via a d mortem, 

2. An abstract Noun with the Genitive is often to be translated as an attribute : 

Verni temporis suavitas, the sweet spring-time. 

And, on the other hand, the predicative attribute is often to be translated as an ab- 
stract noun with of : 

Ante Romam conditam, before the founding of Rome. (324, R. 3.) 

Notice also hie metus, this fear = fear of this, and kindred expressions. 

358. The Genitive is employed: 

I. and II. Chiefly as the complement of Nouns Substantive 
and Adjective. 

III. Occasionally as the complement of Verbs. 

Remark.— The Locative of the Second Declension coincides in form with the Geni- 
tive, and is generally treated under the head of the Genitive. (See 412.) 



I. GENITIVE WITH NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 
ADNOMINAL GENITIVE. 

Appositive Genitive, or Genitive of Specification. 

359. The Genitive is sometimes used to specify the contents 
of generic words instead of Apposition in the same case: 

Vitium nimiae tarditatis. Quint. The fault of excessive sloioness. 
Virtus continentiae. Cic. The virtue of self-control. 

So especially with vox, expression; nomen, name; verbum, 
tvord, verb: vox voluptatis, the word "pleasure;" nomen regis, 

the name or title of Icing, 

SuUa nomen Felicis assumpsit. Vell. Sulla assumed the surname (of) 
" the Lucky." 



GE'STITIYE. 185 

"Remark. — So also occasionally other words, such as : 

Urbs ftomae, the city of Rome. 

Arbor abietis, fir-tree. 

Spretae injuria formae. Verg. The insult of despised beauty. 

POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 
Genitive of Property. 

360. The Possessive Genitive is the substantive form of an 
adjective attribute with which it is often parallel : 

IDomus regis = domus regia, the palace of the king, the king's palace = 
the royal palace. 

Remarks. — 1. The adjective form is often preferred. So always with the possessive 
pronoun : amicus meus, a friend of mine; canis alienus, a strange dog, another man's 
dog; filius nerilis, master's son. So of cities: Thales Milesius, Tholes of Miletus. 

2. The attention of the student is called to the variety of forms which possession may 
take. Statua Myronis, Myron's statue, may mean : 1. A statue which Myron owns ; 
2. Wbich Myron has made ; 3. Which represents Myron. 

3. Observe the brief expressions : Ventum erat ad Vestae, We (they) had come to 
Vesta's (i. e., temple, aedem) ; Hasdrubal Gisgonis, Gisgo's Hasdrubal, Hasdrubal 
Gisgo's son (as it were, Hasdrubal 0' Gisgo) ; Flaccus Claudil, Claudius's Flaccus = 
Flaccus the slave or freedman of Claudius. 

4. The chorographic (geographic) Genitive is rare and late : 

Res Cnalcidem Euboeae venit. Liv. The king came to Chalcis of (in) Euboea. 



ACTIVE AND PASSIVE GENITIVE. 

361. When the Substantive on which the Genitive depends 
contains the idea of an action, the possession may be active or 
passive. Hence the division into 

1. The Active or Subjective Genitive : amor Dei, the love of 
God, the love ivhich God feels (God loves). 

2. Passive or Objective Genitive: amor Dei, love of God, love 
toward God (God is loved). 

Remarks.- 1. The English form in of is used either actively or passively : the love of 
women. Hence, to avoid ambiguity, other prepositions than of are often substituted for 
the Passive Genitive, such as for, toward, and the like. So, also, sometimes in Latin: 

Voluntas provinciae erga Caesarem, the good-will of the province toward Caesar. 

Odium in hominum universum genus, Hate toward all mankind. 

2. Both Genitives may be connected with the same Substantive : 

Quanta sit aviditas hominum talis victoriae scio. Cic. How great the eagerness 
of men for such a victory is, 1 know. 

362. The Genitive of the Personal Pronouns, except nostrum 
and vestrum, is used as the Passive Genitive : 



1 86 GENITIVE. 

Amor mei, love to me. 

Desiderium tui, longing for thee. 

Memoria nostri, memory of us (our memory). 

Remark.— Nostrum and vestrum are used as Partitive Genitives : 

Magna pars nostrum, a great part of us ; uterque vestrum, either (both) of you. 

Nostri melior pars means the better part of our being, our better part. 

With omnium, the forms nostrum and vestrum must be used. 

363. The Possessive Pronoun is generally used as the Active 
Genitive. 

Amor meuSj my love {the love which I feel). 

Desiderium tuum, your longing {the longing which you feel). 

Additional attributives are put in the Genitive : 

Hoc negotium mea ipsius (sdlius, unius) opera perfectum est. -This 

business was finished by my exertions alone. 

Remark. — Occasionally, however, in Latin, as in English, the Possessive Pronoun 
is used passively : desiderium tuum, longing for thee ; injuria tua, your wrong (" The 
deep damnation of his taking off"). 



GENITIVE OF QUALITY. 

364. The Genitive of Quality must always have an Adjective 

or its equivalent : 

Mitis ingenii juvenis. Lrv. A youth of mild disposition. 
Homo nihil! {= nullius pretii). Platjt. A fellow of no account. 
Tridui via. Caes. A three days 1 journey. 

Non multi cibi hospitem accipies, multi joci. Cic. You will receive a 
guest who is a small eater but a great joker. 

Remark. — The Genitive of Quality is less common than the Ablative, being found 
chiefly of the essentials. The Genitive always of Number, Measure, Time, Space ; the 
Ablative always of externals, so of parts of the body. Often the use seems indifferent. 
(402.) 

GENITIVE AS A PREDICATE. 

365. The Genitives of Possession and Quality maybe used 
as Predicates : 

Domus est regis, the house is the king's. 

Vir est magni ingenii, the man is (one) of great genius. 

Remarks.— 1. The Possession appears in a variety of forms, and takes a variety of | 
translations : 

Hujus ero vlvus, mortuus hujus ero. Prop. Hers I shall be, living ; dead, hers M 
shall be. 



GEmTIYE. 187 

Omnia quae mulieris fuerunt viri fiunt Cic. All that was the wife's (property) 
ecomes the husband's. 

Is [Hercules] dlcebatur esse Myronis. Cic. That (statue of Hercules) was said to 
e Myron "s (work). 

Nolae senatus Romanorum, plebs Hannibalis erat Liv. At Nola the senate was 
Dn the side) of the Romans, the common folk (on) Hannibal's. 

Bamnatio est judicum, paenalegis, Condemning is the judges' (business), punish- 
ment the law's. 

Est animi ingenui cui multum debeas eidem plurimum velle debere, Cic. It 
hows the feeling of a gentleman to be willing to owe very much to him to whom you already 
we much. 

Pauperis est numerare pecus, 'Tis only the poor man that counts his flock ('Tis the 
nark of a poor man to count the flock). 

Stultitiae est, U is folly ; Moris est, it is customary. 

So also with facere, to make (cause to be) : Romanae dicionis facere, to bring under 
he Roman sway. 
; 2. In the Third Declension of the Adjective, the Genitive is the usual form : 

Amentis est superstitione praeceptorum contra rationem causae tranl. 
^tjint. It is madness to let oneself be carried by a superstitious regard for rules counter to 
t he requirements of the case. 

Sometimes the Nom. of the Third Declension is used in combination with the Nom. 
f the Second. 

Pigrum et iners videtur siidore adquirere quod possis sanguine parare. Tac. 
It is thought slcnv and spiritless to acquire by sweat what you can get by blood. 

3. The same methods of translation apply to the Possessive Pronoun in the Predicate 
R Vengeance is mine") : meuni est, it is my property, business, way. 

Non est meum mentirl. Ter. Lying is not my way {I do not lie). 

PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 

366. The Genitive stands for the Whole to which a Part be- 
longs : 

Magna vis militum, a great number of soldiers. 
Centum militum, a hundred (of the) soldiers. 
n mllitum, those (of the) soldiers. 
Fortissimi mllitum, the bravest (of the) soldiers. 
Satis mllitum, enough (of) soldiers (soldiers enough). 

367. The Partitive Genitive is used with substantives of 
Quantity, Number, Weight : 

Modius tritici, a measure of wheat. 

Libra f arris, a pound of spelt. 

Ala equitum, a squadron of cavalry. 

Remark. — This is sometimes called the Genitlvus Generis. Whether the conception 
be partitive or not, depends on circumstances. 

Medimnus tritici, a medimnus of wheat may be a medimnus of wheat (Genitlvus 
I 1 Generis) or a medimnus of wheat (Partitive). 

368. The Partitive Genitive is used with numerals, both 
special and general : 



1 ;; z; :r:z 



l nntttnm, a hundred (of the) soldiers, a hundred (of) soldiers 

C;e-:-_--~ ~Ll;:es. \ :\.: ~ . -" : ; :;"":•• 

Zzdntas rex, ike fifth king.) 

Mnlti -itisiJMMij nurajr of the soldiers, many soldiers. 

:»:_::: ~ r '::§s. : ; :■;':".::.. 

?.i ••_.- -.= — 1 7:t I:;'.-: li:._'iii-r : :iz::.'.j :::_.: 5 ;ir ; -r::::;!. — ".ess i: ; 
t - ; . . - -. — ; i_i r" : 

Qnnt efvium adsnxtf .Sw amgr cdxkess are present? Quot elves adsunt 
£ - - ■ ? 

::: 

Bra Ueceatl eo mjUr avimmg, &r«e hundred of us Juroe bound ourselves by an oath. 

A«i#»a» ^BflB ***fit4*» 3iabei-//ifi*<fe aticw fee Afl* tit oreot number {of whom \ t 

;. .: :::..-: 

;._:: tz::: ' .": .: . . : ■- '''-: ~ '.; ..:.-* 
Mere Out English language familiarly employs the partitioii. Exceptions are verj 

£ 1 9 J t : := :. . : \. vr-h ?; jiiouns : 

E inTlilmn, zfose (of the ) soldiers. 

37C V .. Svc . ; . used with C:mpara tires anc 

^ : y : :\y. v~ = : 

B e run nlthmw ille bonornm, J - £ fawf (5/ the good kings. 
TtwMtiVX*.— L When tkere are only two, Hie comparative exb.an.sts the degr r ; e 

0— >-*r.,.VL ;:' 

2. UterqiLe- «flfeer (fctffc), is commonly used as an adjective with substantive?. 
uterque consuL «&ft£r «s*r~ _ :- : -. :; as a Babetanttre witt pronoun*: uterqut 

- 

371 igni 

omi- 

tanttnn. goa : much), aliqnantum, sorr^wkat. 

mtiltror ye, rfammj mart. 

r- * ~ '.^r- :•::.< mi:-. rninimxim, least. 

panm 

\/x£, idem. ffti 01016 
quod and q ipotmd*. 



GEXITITE. 189 

Carnis plus habet Aeschines, minus lacertorum. Qulst. Aesdiines 
as more flesh , less muscle. 

Cimon habebat satis eloquentiae. Xep. (349, R 4.) 

Surgit amari aliquid, quod in ipsis floribus angat. Lucr. Uprises 
rmething bitter to choke us mid the very flowers. 

Nihil reliqui facere. 1. To leave nothing {not a thing). 2. (Occasionally), 

leave nothing undone. 

Remarks. — 1. The conception is often not so much partitive as characteristic. As we 
7 : Scelus puerl es. Plact. You are a rascal of a boy — where the boy is the rascaL 

Quodcumque hoc regni. Verg. This realm, what (little) there is of it (what little 
aim I have). 

2. Neuter Adjectives of the Second Declension can he treated as substantives in the 
mitive ; not so Adjectives of the Third, except in combination with Adjectives of the 
icond : aliquid bonum. or boni, something good ; aliquid memorabile, something 
^movable • aliquid boni et memorabilis, something good and memorable. 

Vixque tenet lacrimas quia nil lacrimabile cernit Ov. And scarce restrains 
r tears, because she descries naught to shed tears for. 

3. The partitive construction is not admissible with a preposition: ad tantum StU- 
um, to so much zeal. (Exceptions are late : ad multum diei./ar into the day.) 

4. The Partitive Genitive is also used with Adverbs of Quantity, Place, Extent : ar- 
orum affatim, abundance of arms; ubi terrarum gentium'? where in the world? 
ic. eo arrogantiae prccessit. he got to this, that pitch of presumption. (Later Latin, 
m temporis. at that time). Notice especially the phrase: quoad ejus facere pos- 
m, as far as lean do so. 

5. Instead of the Partitive Genitive with Numerals. Pronouns. Comparatives, and 
perlatives, the Ablative may be employed with ex. out of. de.from (especially with 
oper names and singulars), or the Accusative with inter, among: Grallus provocat 
ium ex Romanls, The Gaul challenges one of the Romans ; unus d e multis, one of 

-■■? many (the masses) ; Croesus inter reges opulentissimus. Croesus, wealthiest of 
igs; (but in a series : quorum unus. alter, tertius.) 

6. On the Attribute used partitively, s^e 287. R. 

7. Qualitative Adjectives are combined with the Genitive in later Latin : 
Degeneres canum caudam sub alvum flectunt. Plin. Currish dogs curl the tail 
under the belly. 

In poetry and silver prose the Neuter of Qualitative Adjectives is frequently used be- 
e the Genitive : 

Ardua dum metuunt amittunt vera vial. (87, R. 1.) Ltjcr. The while they fear 
■■ steeper road, they miss the true. 

So amara ciirarum, bitter elements of cares. Utter cares ; strata viarum. stratae 
ie, the paved streets. 

8. The Partitive Genitive as a Predicate is Greekish : 

Fies nobilium tu quoque fontium. Hok. Thou too shalt count among the famous 
untains. 



-GENITIVE WITH PREPOSITIONAL SUBSTANTIVES. 
372. Causa, gratia, ergo, and instar, are construed with the 



Bnitive : 
Causa and gratia, for the sake, commonly follow the Genitive. So also 



100 GENITIVE. 

ergo, on account (in old formulae). Instar is an old Accusative, as it were, 
an "instead." 

Sophistae quaestus causa philosophabantur. CiC. The profess- 
ors of wisdom dealt in philosophy for the sake of gain. 

Tu me a m 5 r i s magis quam honoris servavisti gratia. Enn. 
Thou didst save me more for love's (sake) than (thou didst) for honor's sake. 

Virtutis erg 5j 0;i account of valor. 

Instar montis equus. Verg. A Jiorse to stand in mountain's 
stead (a horse that stood a mountain high). 

Plato mihi unus instar est omnium. CiC. Plato by himself is in 
my eyes worth them all. 

Remark.— So mea, tua, sua causa, seldom gratia. 

II. GEKTTIYE WITH STOUTS ADJECTIVE. 

373. Adjectives of Fulness, of Participation, and of Power, 
of Knowledge and Ignorance, of Desire and Disgust, take the 
Genitive: 



Plenus rlmarum, full of chinks (" a leaky vessel "). 

Particeps consilii, a sharer in the plan. 

Compos mentis, in possession of (one's) mind. 

Peritus belli, versed in war. 

Cupidus gloria e, grasping after glory. 

Fastidiosus Latinarum literarum, too dainty for Latin. 

Omnium rerum inscius, a universal ignoramus. 

Cur non ut plenus vitae conviva recedis ? Lucr. (268.) 

Sitque memor nostrl necne, referte mihi. Ov. (195, E. 7.) 

C o n s c i a mens recti Famae mendacia risit. Ov. (329, R. 1.) 

Agricolam laudat juris legumque peritus. Hor. TJie hiu 
bandman('s lot) is praised by the counsel learned in the law. 

Venator tenerae conjugis immemor. Hor. The hunter of his te? 
der spouse unmindful. 

Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. Hor. Force void of couns 
tumbles by its own mass. 

Mentis inops gelida formidine lora remisit. Ov. Senseless fro 
chill fear y he let go the reins. 



m 



■i; 



ten: 

Or 

I 

k 
k 



Hi 
i 

h 

I %: 



Remarks.— 1. The following adjectives— refert us, stuffed; praeditus, endowed i» 
contentus, satisfied ; fretus, supported— show their participial nature by being co 
Btrned with the Al)lative : 

Vita referta bonis, a life filled to overflowing with blessings. 

Membrls humanls esse praeditum, to be endowed with human limbs. 

Fretus opulentia, trusting in wealth. 

Uxor contenta est quae bona est uno viro. Plaut. A wife who is good is co 
tented with one husband. 



IT: 



GENITITE. 



191 



2. Plenus, full, sometimes takes the Ablative : 

Maxima quaeque domus servis est plena superbis. Juv. Every great house is 

id with overbearing slaves. 

8. Dignus, worthy, and indignus, unworthy, are construed with the Ablative : 

Digne puer meliore fLamma. Hou. Boy worthy of a better flame. 

Vita tua dignior aetas. Verg. Your age is worthier of life. 

The Genitive is rare. 

4. Liber, free, and vacuus, empty, take the Ablative with or without ab (a) (388) : 
Liberum (vacuum) esse metu (a metu), to be free from (void of) fear. 

5. On alienus, strange, see 356, R. 5. 

t On aequalis, communis, conscius, contrarius, par, similis, superstes, and the 
:e, see 356, R. 1. 

6. Verbs of Filling sometimes follow the analogy of plenus, full, and take the Geni- 
r e. 

On egere and indigere with the Gen., see 389, R. 2. . 

The poets carry the analogy of Plenty and Want very far. 

Bitissimus agri. Verg. Rich of domain. 
r Solutus operum. Hon. loosed of (released from) work. 

Thus the Genitive in poetry comes near the Ablative or Whence case : 
*! Besine mollium tandem querelarum. Hon. Cease at last from zvomanish com- 
linings. 

GENITIVE WITH VERBALS. 

374. Present Participles take the Genitive when they lose 
teir verbal nature; and so do verbals in -ax in poetry and later 

:ose : 

i 

Epaminondas adeo veritatis erat diligens nt ne joco quidem 
entire tur. Nep. Epaminondas was so careful of the truth as not to tell lies 
m in jest. 

Omnium consensu capax imperii nisi imperasset. Tac. By general 
\Xment capable of empire, had he not become emperor. 

Remarks.— 1. The participle is transient; the adjective permanent. The simple test 
>the substitution of the relative and the verb : amans (participle), loving (who is lov- 
i) ; amans (adjective), fond, (substantive), lover ; patiens (part.), bearing (who is bear- 
1 ; patiens (adjective), enduring, (substantive), a sufferer. 

1 2. In later Latin and in the poets almost all adjectives that denote an affection of the 
nd take a Genitive of the Thing to which the affection refers : aeger timoris, sick of 
r; ambiguus consilii, doubtful of purpose ; vitae dubius, doubtful of life. 
I Here model prose requires the Ablative or a Preposition. 
;The analogy of these adjectives is followed by others, so that the Genitive becomes a 

fiplement to the adjective just as it is to the corresponding substantive. 
Integer vitae. Hor. Spotless of life; like Integritas vitae. (Fama et fortunis 
teger. Sall. In fame and fortunes intact.) 

3. The seat of the feeling is also put in the Genitive, chiefly with animl (which is 
?pected of being a Locative). Aeger animi, sick at heart, heartsick; audax ingenii, 
ring of disposition. 

n Hi- 



W\ 



192 GENITIVE. 

III. — GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 

GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF MEMORY. 

375. Verbs of Keminding, Remembering, and Forgetting, 
take the Genitive : 

Te veteris amicitiae commonefacio. [Cic] 1 remind you of our old 
friendship. 

Est proprium stultitiae aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci suorum. Cic. 

The fact is, it shows a fool to have keen eyes for the faults of others, to forget 
one's oicn. 

Ipse jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. Mart. God himself bids 
you remember death. 

Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Reminding also take the Ablative with de (so regularly 
moneo), and the Ace. Neut. of a Pronoun or Numeral Adjective : 

Oro ut Terentiam moneatis de" testaments. Cic. I beg you to put Terentia in 
mind of the will. 

Discipulos id unum moneo. Quint. (331, R. 2.; 

2. Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting also take the Accusative, especially of 
things : 

Haec olim meminisse juvabit- Verg. To remember these things one day will givt 
us pleasure. 

Dulces moriens reminiscitur Argos. Verg. Dying, he remembers sweet Argos. 

Oblivisci nihil soles nisi injurias. Cic. You are wont to forget nothing excep 
injuries. 

Recordor (literally = I bring to heart, to mind) is commonly construed with the Ace. 

Et v o c e m Anchisae magni vultumqne recordor. Verg. And I recall (call tj 
mind) the voice and countenance of Anchises the Great. With persons, de. 

MeminI, I bear in mind, /(am old enough to) remember, takes the Accusative : 

Antipatrum tu probe meministl. Cic. You remember Antipater very well. 

3. Venit mini in mentem, it com.es into (np to) my mind, may be construed imper 
eonaliy with the Genitive, or personally with a subject : 

Venit mini in mentem Platonis. Cic. (or Plato.) Plato rises before my mind's eye 
Certiorem aliquem facere, to inform, follows the analogy of Verbs of Reminding. 

GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF EMOTION. 

376. Misereor and miseresco, / pity, take the Genitive, an* 
miseret, it moves to pity, paenitet, it repents, piget, it irks, pudef 
it makes ashamed, taedet and pertaesum est, it tires, take the Ac! 
ensative of the Person Who Feels, and the Genitive of the Ex 
citing Cause : 

Miserere sororis. Verg. Pity thy sister t 

Suae quemque fortunae paenitet. Cic. Each man is discontenit 
with his lot. 



V 



GENITIVE. 193 

Miseret te aliorum, tul te nee m i s e r e t nee pudet. Platjt. 
You are sorry for others, for yourself yon are neither sorry nor ashamed. 

Pudet is also used with the Geuitive of the Person whose Presence 
excites the shame : 

Pudet deorum hominumque. Lrv. It is a shame in tlie sight of gods and 
men. 

Remark.— These Tmpersonals can also have a subject, chiefly a Demonstrative or 
Relative Pronoun: 

Hon te haec pudent ? Tek. Do not these things put you to the blush? 
Other constructions follow from general rules : 
Non me paenitet vixisse. Cic. (540.) 

Quintum paenitet quod animum tuum offendit Cic. Quintus is sorry that h* 
has wounded your feelings. 
I y 

/ GENITIVE WITH JUDICIAL VERBS. 

377. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, and Ac- 
quitting take the Genitive of the Charge : 

Miltiades accusatus est proditionis. Nep. Miltiades was accused of 
treason. 

Oannensem exercitum quis pavoris insimulare potest ? Liv. Who can 
charge the army of Cannae with craven fear f 

Parce tuum vatem sceleris damnare, Cupido. Ov. Be slow to condemn 
thy bard of crime, Cupid ! 

Absolvere improbitatis, to acquit of dishonesty. 

So also kindred expressions : reum facere, (to make a party) to indict, to bring an 
action against ; sacrilegil compertum esse, to be found (guilty) of sacrilege. 

Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Condemning and Acquitting take the Ablative as well as the 
Genitive of the Charge and the Punishment, and always the Ablative of the Fine : 

Accusare capitis, or capite, to bring a capital charge. 

Damnare capitis, or capite, to condemn to death. 

Damnari decern milibus, to be fined 10,000. 

Multare, to mulct, is always construed with the Ablative : 

IMultare pecunia, to mulct in (of) money. 
Manlius virtiitem filii morte multavit- Quint. Manlius punished the valor of 
his son with death. 

2. Most verbs belonging to this class take also instead of the Genitive the Ablative 
with de : accusare de vi, of violence (no Genitive; ; de veneficio, of poisoning ; de 

dt -j rebus repetundls, of extortion. 

3. Destination and Enforced Labor are expressed by ad or in : damnari ad bestias, 
to be condemned (to be thrown) to wild beasts ; ad (in) metalla, to the mines ; ad (in) opus 

I- publicum, to hard labor. Voti damnari, to be bound to fulfil a vow. 



GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF RATING AND BUYING. 
378. Verbs of Rating and Buying are construed with the 






194 GENITIVE. 

Genitive of the general value or cost, and the Ablative of the 
particular value or cost. (404.) 

Verbs of Rating are : aestimare, to value ; putare, to reckon ; ducere, 
to take ; habere, to hold; pendere, to weigh; facere, to make, put ; esse, 
to be (worth). 

Verbs of Buying are : emere, to buy ; vendere, to sell ; venire, to be 
for sale ; stare and constare, to cost, to come to ; prdstare, licere, to be ex- 
posed, left (for sale) ; conducere, to hire ; locare, to let. 

379. Verbs of Eating take: 

Magnl, much, pluris, more, plurimi, maxima, most. 

Parvi, little, minoris, less., minimi, least. 

Tanti, so much, quanti, how much, nihili, naught. 

Equivalents of nihili, nothing, are flocci, a lock of wool, nauci, a trifle, 
assis, a copper, and the like, and so also hujus, that (a snap of the finger), 
with the negative, which is omitted only in the earlier times. 

Tanti is often used in the sense of operae pretium est = it is worth 
while. 

Dum ne ob malefacta peream parvi [id] aestimo. Platjt. So long 
as I be not killed for my misdeeds little do I care. 

Voluptatem virtus minimi facit. Cic. Virtue makes little account of the 
pleasure of the senses. 

Judices rempublicam flocci non faciunt. Cic. The judges do not care 
a fig for the State. 

Non habeo nauci Marsum augurem. Ennius. I do not value a Marsian 
augur a baubee. 

Est mini tanti hujus invidiae tempestatem subire. Cic. It is worth 
while (the cost), in my eyes, to bear this storm of odium. 

380. Verbs of Buying take tanti, quanti, pluris, and minoris. 

The rest are put in the Ablative : 

Vendo raeum frumentum non pluris quam ceteri, fortasse 
etiam minoris. Cic. I sell my corn not dearer than everybody else, per- 
haps even cheaper. 

Magis ilia juvant quae pluris emuntur. Juv. Things give more 
pleasure which are bought for more. 

Emit Oanius hortos tanti quanti Pythius voluit. CiC. Canius 
bought the gardens at the price Pythius wanted. 

Quanti cenas ? What do you give for your dinner ? 

Quanti habitas ? What is the rent of your lodgings? 

But : 

P a r v 5 fames constat, m a g n 5 fastidium. Sen. Hunger costs little, 
daintiness much. 



GENITIVE. 195 

Remarks.— 1. Aestimo is found with the Ablative as well as with the Genitive. So 
aestimare m a g n o and m a g n I. to value highly. 

2. Observe the phrases : bonl (aequi bonlque) facio, bonl consulo, I put up with, 
take in good part. 

3. Bene emere, to buy cheap; bene vendere, to sell dear; male emere, to buy tear; 
male vendere, to sell cheap. 

GENITIVE WITH INTEREST AND REFERT. 

* 381. Interest and Refert take a Genitive of the Person, seldom 
of the Thing, concerned. 

Clodii interest. Cic. It is Clodius's interest. 

Refert compositionis quae quibus anteponas. Quint. It is of impor- 
tance far the arrangement of words, which you put before which. 

Instead of the Genitive of the Possessive Pronouns the 

Ablative Singular Feminine of the Possessives is employed : 

Mea interest, mea refert, I am concerned. 

Remarks. — 1. Refert is commonly used absolutely, occasionally with mea, etc., sel- 
dom with the Genitive. 

2. Instead of Apposition use the Relative : 

Vehementer intererat vestra, qui patrgs estis, llberos vestros hie potissimum 
discere. Plin. Ep. It were vastly to the interest of you parents, that your children, if 
possible, were taught at home. 

3. No satisfactory explanation has been given of this construction. Mea seems to be 
an adverbial form like qua, nac, ea. (Madvig.) 

382. 1. The Degree of Concern is expressed by an Adverb, 
Adverbial Accusative, or a Genitive of Value : 

Multum (nihil) interest. It makes much (no) difference. 
Quid interest ? What difference does it make f 

Magnl interest mea una n5s esse Cic. It is of great importance to me 
that we be together. 

2. The Object of Concern is commonly put in the Infinitive, 
Accusative and Infinitive, lit or ne, with the Subjunctive, or an 
Interrogative Sentence. 

Quid Milonis intererat interfici Clodium ? Cic. What interest had Milo 
in Clodius 1 being killed. 

Caesar dicere solebat non tarn sua quam relpublicae interesse ut 
salvus esset. Suet. Caesar used to say that it icas not of so much impor- 
tance to 7iim(se\f) as to the State that his life should be spared. 

Vestra interest n e imperat5rem pessimi faciant. Tac. It is to your 
interest that the dregs of creation do not make the emperor. 

i 



196 



ABLATIVE. 



Quid refert tales versus qua voce Iegantur. Juv. Wlmt matters it 
what voicr such verses are recited with? 

Occasionally by the Nominative of a Neuter Pronoun : 

Quid (Ace.) tua id (Norn.) refert ? Ter. What business is that of yours? 

3. The Thing Involved is put in the Ace. with ad : 
Magni ad hon5rem nostrum interest quam primum nds ad urbem ve- 
nire. Cic. It makes a great difference touching our honor that we should 
come to the city as soon as possible. 

Ablative. 

383. The Ablative is the Adverbial, as the Genitive is the 
Adjective case. It contains three elements : 

A. Where ? B. Whence ? C. Wherewith ? 

In a literal sense, the Ablative is commonly used with Pre- 
positions; in a figurative sense, it is commonly used without 
Prepositions. 

A. The Ablative of the Place Where appears in a figurative 
sense as the Ablative of t*he Time When. 

B. The Ablative of the Place Whence appears as: 

1. The Ablative of Origin. 

2. The Ablative of Measure. 

C. The Ablative of the Thing Wherewith appears in a figu- 
rative sense, as : 

1. The Ablative of Manner. 

2. The Ablative of Quality. 

3. The Ablative of Means. 

Remark. — It is impossible to draw the line of demarcation with absolute exactness. 
So the Ablative of Cause may be derived from any of the three fundamental significations 
of the case, which is evidently a composite one. 

To these we add : 

D. The Ablative of Cause : 

E. The Ablative Absolute. 

I. THE LITERAL MEANINGS OP THE ABLATIVE. 

A ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHERE. 

Ablatlvus locdlis. 

384. The Ablative answers the question Where? and takes a 
a rule the preposition ijst : 



ABLATIVE. 19? 

In portu navigo. Ter. I am sailing in harbor. 

Pons in Hibero prope effectus erat. Caes. The bridge over the Ebro 
was nearly finished. 

Histrio in scena est. Plaut. The actor is on the stage. 
Haeret in equd senex. Cic, The old man sticks to his horse. 

Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Placing and kindred significations take the Ablative with in, to 
designate the result of the motion: ponere, to place • collocare, to put • statuere, con- 
stituere, to set ; considere, to settle ; deflgere, to plant ; demergere, to plunge ; im- 
primere, to press upon ; inserlbere, to write upon ; incldere, to carve upon. 

Plato rationem in capite posuit, iram in pectore locavit Cic Plato has put 
reason in the head, has placed anger in the breast. 

Lucretia cultrum in corde defigit. Liv. Lucretia plants a knife in {thrusts a knife 
down into) her heart. 

Philosophi in ils ipsis librls quos scrlbunt de contemnenda gloria sua no- 
mina inscrlbunt. Cic. Philosophers write their own names on (the titles of) the very 
books which they write about contempt of glory. 

Index inciditur in aeneis tabulis. Suet. An index is engraved on tablets of bronze. 

The same observation applies to sub: 

Pone sub curru nimium propinqui solis in terra domibus negata. Hon. Put 
(me) under the chariot of the ail-too neighboring sun, in a land denied to dwellings. 

So humi, which is a Where-case : hum! prosternere, to throw flat on the ground. 

2. The poets are free in omitting in,- but regard must be had to 387. 

3. On the Locative Ablative of Towns and Small Islands, see 412. 

385. In citations from books and in enumerations, the Abla- 
tive of the Place Where is used without in : 



Libro tertiOj third book ; versu decimo, tenth verse; alio locd, elsewhere. 

Remark.— Locus, place, used metaphorically, generally omits in : hoc loco, in this 
position, situation; in hoc loco (or hoc loco), in this place, part of the country. Libro 
is used when the whole book, in libro, when merely a passage in the book, is devoted to 
the subject in hand. 
in 

386. In designations of place with totus, whole, and the like, 

rthe Ablative of the Place Where is generally used without in: 

Menippus disertissimus tota Asia fuit. Menippus was the most eloquent 
man in all Asia (Minor). 

Battiades t5to semper cantabitur orbe. Ov. Battiades (Callimaclms) 
will always be sung throughout the world, 

387. In all such Designations of Place as may be regarded in 
the light of Cause, Manner, or Instrument, the Ablative is used 
without a preposition : 

Ut terra Thermopylarum angustiae Graeciam ita marl fretum Euripi 
claudit. Lit. As the pass of Thermopylae bars Greece by land, so the frith of 
Euripus by sea. 



198 ABLATIVE. 

Nemo ire quenquam publica prohibet via. Plaut. No man forbiddeth 

(an j/ one to) travel by the public road. 

Matris cineres Tiber! subvecti sunt. Suet. His mother's ashes were 
brought up by the Tiber. 

Imperator milites (in) castris tenebat (intra castra). Caes. The general 
kept the soldiers in camp. 

Recipere aliquem tecto, oppido, portu. To receive a man into one's 
house, town, harbor. 

B. ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHENCE. 

Abldtlvus Separdtlvus. 

388. The Ablative answers the question Whence? with or 
without the prepositions ex, oat of, de, from, ab, off: 

Eum exturbasti ex aedibus. Plaut. You hustled him out of the house. 

Araneas dejiciam de pariete. Plaut. I will get the cobwebs down from 
the wall. 

N5n ex eo loco sed ab eo loco me dejecit. Cic. It was not out of that 
'place, but from that place that he dislodged me. 

The prepositions are omitted chiefly with Verbs of Abstain- 
ing, Removing, Relieving, and Excluding, but with Persons a J 
preposition (chiefly ab) must be used. 

Alieno rnanus abstineat. Cato. Let him keep his hands from other peo- 
ple's property. But : 

Alexander vix a se maniis abstinuit. Cic. Alexander hardly kept (could 
hardly keep) his hands from himself (from laying hands on himself). 

Populus Atheniensis Phocionem patria pepulit. Nep. The Athenian 
people drove Phocionfrom his country. But : 

Ilium aemulum ab ea pellito. Ter. Drive that rival from her. 

Multos fortuna liberat paena, metu neminem. Sen. Fortune rids 
many of punishment, none of fear. But : 

Te ab eo llbero. Cic. I rid you of him. 

Amicitia nullo loc5 excluditur. Cic. Friendship is shut out from no 
place. But : 

Ab ilia excludor, hue concludor. Ter. I am shut out from her (and) 
shut up here (to this, to live with her). 

Alcibiadem Athenienses e civitate expulerunt. Nep. The Athenians 
banished Alcibiades from the Slate. 

Hannibal ex Italia decedere coactus est. Cic. Hannibal was forced 
to withdraw from Italy. 



ABLATIVE. 190 

Crede mihi, mores distant a carmine nostro. Ov. Believe me, far 

my conduct differs from my song. 

Consules se abdicant magistrate. Cic. TJie consuls abdicate their office. 

So also kindred Adjectives : 

Animus excelsus omni est liber cura. Cic. A lofty mind is free from 
all care. 

Cato, omnibus humanis vitiis immunis, semper fortunam in sua po- 
testate habuit. Yell. Cato, exempt from all human failings, always had 
fortune in his own power. 

Remakks. — 1. Compounds with dl (dis) also take the Dative (in poetry) : 
Paullum sepultae distat inertiae celata virtus. Hon. Little doth hidden worth 
differ from buried sloth. 

2. The Place Whence gives the point of view from which. In English a different trans- 
lation is often given, though not always necessarily : a tergo, in the rear ; ex parte 
dextra. on the right side ; ab oriente, on the east ; a tanto spatio, at such a distance ; 
ex fuga, on the flight ; a re frumentaria laborare, to be embarrassed in the matter of 
provisions. 

3. The poets are free in the use of the Ablative as a Whence-case without a preposi- 
tion. On the difference of conception between Dative and Ablative, see 344, R. 2. On the 
Genitive, see 373, R. 6. 

4. On the Ablative as a Whence-case in Names of Towns and Small Islands, see 411. 

389. Verbs of Depriving and Filling, of Plenty and Want, 
take the Ablative : 

-Democritus dicitur oculis se privasse. Cic. Democritus is said to 
have deprived himself of his eyes. 

Deus bonis omnibus explevit mundum. Cic. God has filled the uni- 
verse with all blessings. 

Abundant dulcibus vitiis. Quint. They abound in charming faults. 

Non caret effectu quod voluere du5. Ov. What two have resolved 
on never lacks execution. 

Amor vac at metu. Ov. Love is void of fear. 

Sapiens eget nulla re. Sen. The sage stands in need of nothing. 

Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Filling are commonly referred to the Instrumental Ablative 
rather than to the Ablative of the Source, and are put here for convenience of contrast. 
But observe that in the classic tongues the construction of opposite? is identical. 

2. Egeo and (more frequentty) indigeo also take the Genitive. 

Non tarn artis indigent quam laboris. Cic. They are not so much in need of skill 
as of industry. 

3. Adjectives of Plenty and Want take the Genitive, but some of them follow the 
analogy of the verb (373, R. 1) : 

Asellus onustus auro. Cic. A donkey laden with gold. 
Pollicitis dives quilibet esse potest. Ov. Anybody can be rich in promises. 
Amor et melle et felle est fecundissimus. Flaut. Love is very fruitful both in 
honey and in gall (of acrimony). 



ABLATIVE. 

390. Opus and TJsus take the Dative of the Person who Wants 
and the Ablative of the Thing Wanted; but the Thing Wanted 
may be the subject and opus the predicate: 

Opus est mini libro, libris, I want a book, boohs. 

Liber mini opus est, a book is a want to me (is what I want). 

Libii mihi opus sunt, books are a want to me (are what I want). 

Quid opus est speculo tibi ? Plaut. What do you want to do with a 
mirror? 

Emas non quod opus est sed quod necesse est ; quod n5n opus est 
asse carum est. Cato. Buy not what you want, but what is absolutely need- 
ful ; what you do not want (have no use for) is dear at a penny. 

So with the Perfect Participle Passive : 

Quod paratd opus est para. Ter. What must be got ready, get ready. 
Vicin5 opus est convents. Plaut. The neighbor must be called on. 
Usus est pecunia or pecunia. Plaut. Money is wanted (is, would be 
(246, R. 1) useful). 

N5n facto est usus. Plaut. It were better let alone. 

Remark.— This construction belongs to the Instrumental, and is put here for conve- 
nience of reference : 

Opus est, there is ivorh to be done with. 

TJsus est. there is making use of()ike iitor, 405). 

The Genitive is of rare occurrence. Other constructions are the Infinitive and ut. 
The Neuter Accusative is often adverbial (331, R. 3) : 

Quid (Ace.) digitos opus est graphio lassare tenendo % Ov. What is the use of 
tiring the fingers by holding the stilus ? 

Opus est te animo valere ut corpore possis. Cic. You must be well in mind in 
order to be well in body. 

An cuiquam est usus homini se ut cruciet ? Ter. Of what good is it to any man 
to torture himself t 

C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH. 

Abldtivus Socidtlvus. 

391. The Ablative of Attendance takes the preposition cum, 
with : 

Cum baculo peraque senex. Mart. An old man with stick and wallet. 
Nee tecum possum vivere nee sine te. Makt. I can't live eithe-r with 
you or without you. 

Remarks.— 1. In military phrases, the troops with which a march is made are put in 
the Ablative, with or without cum ; generally without cum when an adjective is used 
(Ablative of Manner), with cum when no adjective is used (Ablative of Attendance) : 

Rex Hellespontum cum exercitii transiit, The king crossed the Hellespont with 

an art i "j. 



ABLATIVE. 201 

Dictator (cum) ingenti exercitu ab urbe profectus est. The dictator set out from 
the city with a great army. 

2. Not to be confounded with the above is the Instrumental Ablative : 

Kavibus proficisci, to set out by ship. 

So also with verbs which denote other military actions : 

Hostes sagittariis et funditoribus terrebat, he was frightening the enemy with 
archers and slingers. 

Armatns ipse et armatis saeptus. Liv. Armed himself and hedged about with 
armed men. 

Nil actum est nisi Poeno milite portas frangimus. Jut. Naught is accomplished 
unless we break the gates with the Punic soldiery (as if with a battering-ram). 

II.— THE FIGURATIVE MEANINGS OF THE ABLATIVE. 
A. The Place Where is transferred to the Time When. 

Ablative of Time. . 

>2. Time When or Within Which is put in the Ablative . 

Qua nocte natus est Alexander eadem Dianae Ephesiae templum 
deflagravit. Cic. On the sam& night on which Alexander was born, the 
temple of Diana of Ephesus burnt to the ground. 

Saturn! stella triginta fere annis cursum suum conficit. Cic. The 
planet Saturn completes its period in about thirty years. 

Many adverbial forms of time are really locative ablatives : 

So hodie, to-day ; heri(e), yesterday ; mane, in the morning. 

Remarks.— 1. Time within which may be expressed by per and the accusative : 
Per eos ipsos dies quibus Philippus in Achaia fuit, Philocles saltum Cithae- 

ronis transcendit. Lrv. During those very days, while Philip was in Achaia, Philocles 

crossed the range of Cithaemn. 

2. Time Within Which may embrace both extremities ; so with totus, all, whole : 
Tqfa nocte pluit, redeunt spectacula mane. Verg. All night (Jupiter) rains ; 

back corns the shows in the morning. 

So with definite numbers (chiefly later) : 

Apud Pythagoram discipulis quinque annis erat tacendum. Sen. In the school 
of Pythagoras the disciples had to keep silence Jive years. 

3. When the Notion is Negative the English Time For Which is the Latin Within 
Which: 

Quadriennio (or per quadriennium) non militavit. Lrv. For four years he did 
not serve as a soldier (during, at any time within, four years'). 

4. Especially to be noted is the Ablative of Time with hie, this ; ille, that : 

Ego ad te bis duobus mensibus non scripseram (244). Cic. I have not written to 
you these two months {at any time within the last two months). 

Hanc urbem hoc biennis evertes. Cic. This city you vrill overturn in the next two 
years. 

Transferred to Oratio Obliqua, hie becomes ille (063, 3) : 

Diodorus respondit illud argentum se paucis illls disbus misisse Lilybaeum, 
Diodorus answered that he had sent that silver plate to Lilybaeum within a few days (a few 
days before). 

9* 



202 ABLATIVE. 



393. The Ablative with the preposition in is used of points 
within a period of time, or of the character of the time: 






Bis in die, tic ice a day ; in pueritia, in boyhood; in adulescentia, in 
youth. 

Null5 mo do mihi placuit bis in die saturum fieri. CiC. It did not suit 
me in any way to eat my fill twice a day. 

Sometimes, however, bis die, as dies = unus dies. 

Feci ego istaec itidem in adulescentia. Plaut. I did those things too in 
my youth. 

In may be omitted, chiefly with an adjective or in phrases : 

Prima pueritia, in early boyhood ; illo tempore, at that time ; in illo 
tempore, in those circumstances, at that crisis ; in tempore or tempore = 
at the right time ; bello Persico, at the time of the Persian war ; in bello, 
in tear times ; in pace, in peace times. 

Remark. — De is also used in designations of time : 

Tit jugulent homines surgunt de nocte latrones. Hon. To kill people, highioay- 
men rise by night., i. e., while it is yet night. 

Inter, between: Quot prandia inter continuum perdidi triennium. Plaut. 
How many luncheons I have lost during three years together f 

Intra, within : Subegit solus intra vlginti dies. Plaut. He quelled them all 
alone in less than twenty day-. 

On per, through, see 337, R. 

Cum, with ; cum prima luce, with daybreak. 

394. B. The Place Whence is transferred : 
1. To Origin ; 2. To Measure. 

1. Ablative of Origin. 

395. Participles which designate Birth take the Ablative of 
Origin, with or without the Prepositions ex and de : 

Tanaquil summo loc5 nata. Liv. Tanaquil born (by birth) of high de- 
gree. 

Numae Pompilii regis nepos, filia ortus, Ancus Mafcius erat. Lit, 
King Numa Pompilius's grandson, a daughter's son, was Ancus Matcius. 

Maecenas atavis edite regibus. Hon. Maecenas, offshoot of great-grand- 
sire kings. 

DIs genite et geniture deos. Verg. Begotten of gods and destined U 
beget god* ! 

Sate sanguine divdm! Verg. Seed of blood divine ! 

Ex me atque hoc natus es. Ter. You are his son and mine. 

Oderunt natos de pellice. Juv. They hate the offspring of the concubine 



ABLATIVE. 203 

Ab is employed of remote progenitors : 

Plerique Belgae sunt orti ab Germanis. Caes. Belgians are mostly of 

German descent. 

396. The Ablative of Material commonly takes ex : constare, 
to consist, sometimes omits the preposition : 

Animo constamus et corpore, constamus ex animo et corpore. Cic. 

We consist of mind and body. 

Medicina tota constat experimentis. Quint. All medicine is made up 
of experiments (is empirical). 

But : Statua ex auro, ex aere, facta, a statue made of gold, of bronze. 
Often an adjective is used: aureus, golden, ligneus, wooden. 

Remarks. — 1. A remnant of the old usage is found with fio and facio .* 
Quid fecisti scipione % What have you done with the wand? 
Quid me fiet % What will become of me ? 
Quid me futurum est % What is to become of me ? 
Quid facies hoc nomine % How will you dispose of this man ? 
Hulc homini % What will you do to this m,an ? De hoc nomine, in this man's case. 
Fles de rhetore consul. Juv. From (having been) rhetorician you will become con- 
sul. 

2. Otherwise the simple Ablative of Material is poetic or late : 
Mavors caelatus ferro. Vero. Mars carven of iron. 
Meliore luto nnxit- Juv. Refashioned him of better clay. 



2. Ablative of Measure. 

397. The Ablative gives the Point from which a thing is 
measured or treated : Ablative of Measure or Eeference. 

398. The Ablative is put in answer to the questions From 
What Point of View ? According to What ? By What ? In Ke- 
spect of What ? 

Magnos homines virtute metimur, non fortuna. Nep. We measure 
A great men by worth, not by fortune. 

Sonis homines dignoscimus ut aera tinnltu. Quint. We distinguish 
men by sound as coppers by ring. 

Descriptus erat populus Romanus censu, ordinibus, aetatibus. Cic. 
The people of Rome was drawn off according to income, rank, (and) age. 

Ennius ingenio maximus arte rudis. Ov. Ennius in genius great, in 
art unskilled. 

Animo pravus, procax ore. Tac. Crooked of soul, saucy of tongue. 

Crlne ruber, red-haired ; captus oculis (literally, caught in the eyes), 



204 ABLATIVE. 

blind ; captus mente, insane; mea sententia, according to my opinion; 
jure, by right; lege, by law; and the Supines in -u (437). 

Remarks.— 1. Prepositions are also used, which serve to show the conception : 

Caesaris adventus ex colore vestltus cognitus est. Caes. The arrival of Caesar 
was known by the color of his clothing. 

De gestu intelligo quid respondeat. Cic. / understand by your gesture what 
r you are giving. 

Ex lege, according to law ; ex pacto, according to agreement ; ex (de) more, accord- 
ing to custom : ex animi sententia, according to (my) heart's desire; ex ii.su, useful. 

Ab animo aeger ful. Plaut. At heart I was sick. 

Otiosum esse ab animo. Ter. To be easy in mind. 

2. Dignus (distinguished), worthy, and indignus, unworthy, are most conveniently 
referred to this head. (Examples, see 373, R. 3.) 

So also dignor, I deem worthy, 

399. The Ablative of Measure is used with the Comparative 
instead of quam, than, with the Nominative or Accusative: 

Tunica propior pallio. Prov. The shirt is nearer than the cloak. 

Phidiae simulacris (= quam simulacra) cogitare possumus pulchriora. 
Cic. We can imagine more beautiful things than the statues of Phidias. 

So also after adverbs, but not so freely in prose: 

Nemo est qui tibi sapientius suadere possit te ips5. Cic. There is no 
one icho coin give you wiser advice than you yourself 

Pulchrum ornatum turpes mores pejus caen5 collinunt. Platjt. Foul 
behavior doth bedraggle fine apparel worse than mud. 

Remarks. — 1. The comparative is also employed with the Ablative of certain abstract 
substantives and adjectives used as substantives : 

Consul serius spe (= quam spes fuerat) Eomam venit Liv. The consul came to 
Borne later than was hoped. 

Amnis solito citatior. Liv. The river running faster than usual. 

2. Alius, other than, with the Ablative, is poetic. 

400. Measure of Difference is put in the Ablative : 

Turres denis pedibus quam murus altiores sunt. Curt. The towers 
are (by) ten feet higher t/ian the wall. 

Tanto est accusare quam defendere quanto facere quam sanare vul- 
nera facilius. Quint. It $t as much easier to accuse than to defend as it is 
easier to inflict wounds than to cure them. 

Perfer et obdura : multo graviora tulisti. Ov. Endure to the end and 
be firm : you have borne much more grievous burdens. 

Quoque minor spes est, hoc magis ille cupit. Ov. And the less his 
hope, the greater his desire. 

Remarks.— 1. This rule applies to verbs involving difference as well as to comparatives: ] 
Aesculapii templum quinque millibus passuum ab urbe Epidauro distal Ljy. 
The temple of Aesculapius is five miles from the city of Epidaurus. 
2. The Accusative is sometimes employed. (See 335.) 



ABLATIVE. 205 

3. Especially to he noted is the use of the Ablative of Measure with ante, before, and 
post, after: 

Panels ante diebus, Paucis diebus ante, a few days before. 

Paucis post diebus, Paucis diebus post, a few days after, afterward. 

Duobus annis postquam Roma condita est, Two years after Rome was founded, 

Paulo post Trojani captam, A little while after the taking of Troy. 

The Accusative can also be employed : post paucos annos, after a few years ; ante 
paucos annos, a few years before ; and the ordinal as well as the cardinal numbers : two 
hundred years after{ward) may be : 

Ducentis annis post or Dueentesimo anno post, 

Post ducentos annos " Post ducentesimum annum. 

Ante hos sex menses, six months ago (comp. 392, K 2), more frequently abhine sex 
menses : abhine sex mensibus, means six months before (Madvig). 

With a relative sentence the Ablative may be used alone : 

Roscii mors quatriduo quo is occisus est, Chrysogono nuntiatur. Cic. The 
death of Eoscius tuas announced to Chrysogonus four days after he was killed {in the course 

the four days iviihin which he was killed). See 392. 

Hence is ad : ad sex menses, six months hence. 

C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH. 

Abldtlvus socidtwus. Ablative of Attendance. 

1. Ablative of Manner. 

401. The Ablative of Manner answers the question How ? 
and is used with the Preposition cum when it has no Adjective ; 
with or without cum when it has an Adjective : 

Miltiades summa aequitate res constituit Chersonesi. Nep. Miltiades 
settled the affairs of the Chersonese with the greatest fairness. 

Non facile est aequa commoda mente pati. Ov. It is not easy to bear 
good fortune with an even temper. 

Cum cura scrlbere, to write icith care. 

Magna cura, j 

Cum magna cura, I with great care. 

Magna cum cura, ) 

[_ Remark.— Several Ablatives are used adverbially without an Adjective or Preposi- 
tion : ordine, in an orderly manner ; silentio, silently • casu", by chance, accidentally ; 
via et ratione, methodically ; dolo, fraude, fraudulently. It is sometimes hard to dis- 
tinguish between the Manner and the Instrument : vi, violently and by violence ; vi et 
armis, by force of arms ; pedibus, afoot; navibus, by ship. Notice, also, the use of 
per, through, with the Accusative: per vim, by violence ; per lltteras, by letter. 

2. Ablative of Quality. 
(Descriptive Ablative.) 

402. The Ablative of Quality has no Preposition, and always 
! takes an Adjective or an equivalent: 



206 ABLATIVE. 

Agesilaus statura fuit humili. Nep. Agesildus was (a man) of low 
stature. 

Cato singular! fuit prudentia et industrial Nep. Cato was (a man) of 
unique foresight and energy. 

1st a turpiculo puella naso. Cat. That girl of yours with the ugly nose. 

Clavi ferrei digiti pollicis crassitudine. Caes. Iron nails of the thick- 
ness of your thumb. 

Remarks.— 1. External and transient qualities are put by preference in the Ablative ; 
Measure, Number, Time, and Space, are put in the Genitive only; parts of the body in 
the Ablative only. Otherwise there is often no difference. 

2. Of unnatural productions cum may be used : agnus cum suillo capite. Lrv. A 
lamb with a swine's head. 



3. Ablative of Means. 

403. The Instrument is put in the Ablative without a Prep 
osition. 

The Agent or Doer is put in the Ablative with the Prepo-J 
sition ab (a) : 

The Person Through Whom is put in the Accusative with 
per: 

Pyrrhus lapide interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed, by a stone. 

Pyrrhus a muliere interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed by a woman. 

Pyrrhus a muliere lapide interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed by a 

woman with a stone. 

\ 1. nuntio, by a message. 
Xerxes certior factus est, ( ^ - - ..- t 

v 2. a nuntio, by a messenger. 






Xerxes was informed, J ft per niintium> hy means of a me9myger% 

Nee bene promeritis capitur neque tangitur ira. Lucr. (218, R. 3 
Ipse docet quid agam : fas est et ab hoste doceri. Ov. (210.) 
Discite sanari per quem didicistis amare. Ov. Learn to be healed b\ 
means of (him by) whom you learned to love. 

Remarks.— 1. When the Instrument is personified and regarded as an Agent, or th 
Agent is regarded as an Instrument, the constructions are reversed ; when an Adjective 
used, the construction may be doubtful, 352, R. 

So jacent suis testibus. Cic. They are cast by their own witnesses ; or, they m 
cast, their own men being witnesses. 

2. Especially worthy of note under this head are assuesco and assuefacio : asSTlStUi 
labore, accustomed to toiL familiar with toil (the Dative is more rare) ; doctus Graei: 
litterls, learned in Greek; and the various words for sacrifice : 

Quinquaginta caprls sacrificaverunt Liv. They sacrificed fifty she-goats. 
Aflicere, to treat, with the Ablative, is a favorite term ; see the Lexicons. 

3. NItor, I stay myself, is construed with the Ablative, with or without in : Hastl 
nixus, leaning on a spear (stayed by a ppear). 



ABLATIVE. 207 

[Pompgi] in vita nitgbatur salus civitatis. Cic. The weal of the State depended 
m Pompey's life. 

Notice also stare, with the Abl. : stare condicionibus, to abide by the terms. 

4. Ablative of Price. 

404. Definite Price is put in the Ablative : 

Viginti talentis unam Srationem Isocrates vendidit. Plin. Isocrates 

wld one speech far twenty talents. 

Emit morte immortalitatem. Quint. He purchased deathlessness with 
death. 

Nimium risus pretium est si probitatis impendio constat. Quint. The 
mice of a laugh is too high, if it costs the outlay of a man's uprightness. 

Argentum accepi; dote imperium vendidi. Plaut. The cash I 
took ; (and) for a dowry sold my sway. 

Remark.— Mutare, to exchange, is sometimes Give, sometimes Get ; sometimes Sell, 
sometimes Buy : 

Pax misera vel bello bene mutatur. Tac. A wretched peace is well exchanged even 
for war. 

Durus qui potuit lucro mutare puellam. Prop. Bard (is the soul of the) man 
who could sell his sweetheart for lucre. 

Cur valle perxnutem Sablna divitias operosiores. Hor. Why should I exchange 
my Sabine vale for riches sure to breed (me) greater trouble ? 



5. Ablative with Sundry Verbs. 



405. The Deponent Verbs TJtor, Abutor, Fruor, Fungor, Potior, 
and Vescor, take the Ablative: 

Victoria uti nescis. Liv. How to make use of victory you know not. 
QuSusque tandem abutere patientia nostra. Cic. How long, tell me, 
will you abuse our patience ? 

Lux qua fruimur a Deo nobis datur. Cic. The light which we enjoy is 
given to us by God. 

Fungor vice cotis. Hob. I discharge the office of a whetstone. 
t Tutius esse arbitrabantur sine ull5 vulnere victoria potlri. Caes. 
el They thought it safer to make themselves masters of the victory without any 
wound. 

Numidae lacte vescebantur. Sall. The Numidians made their food of 
Awtilk {fed on milk). 

id; 

Remarks.— 1. These Ablatives are commonly regarded as Ablatives of the Instru- 
ment; but fruor, I get fruit, and vescor, I feed myself from (ve-ed-scor), and perhaps 
fungor seem to take the Ablative as a Whence-case. In older Latin they are sometimes 
combined with the Accusative. Hence they have a Gerundive : 

Justitia dicet te esse injustum quum graviter feras te quod iitendum acce- 



2 S ABLATIVE. 

peris reddidisse. Cic. Justice will say that you are unjust since you resent having restored 
what y on have nceived (but) to use. 

2. Utl is a favorite word, and has a most varied translation : 

Uti aliquo amlco, to avail oneself of {to enjoy) a man's friendship {to have a friend in 
him). 

Utl consilio, to follow advice ; utl bono patre, to have the advantage of having a 
good father ; utl legibus, to obey the laws. See the Lexicons. 

3. Vivo is construed like vescor : aliena misericordia vivo, I live on the charity 
of others. 

Potior, / possess myself, sometimes takes the Genitive ; always potiri rerum, to 
possess the supreme power. 

D. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE. 

406. The Ablative of Cause may be referred to so many 
classes, that it is most convenient to regard it as a class by 
itself. 

407. The Ablative of Cause is used without a preposition, 
chiefly with Verbs of Emotion : 

Castor gaudet equis. Hon. Castor rejoices in horses. 

Quidam vitiis suls gloriantur. Sen. Some make a boast of their vices, 

Pecunia fidens non dubitabat. Nep. Trusting in his money *, he had nc 
doubts. 

In culpa sunt qui oflicia deserunt mollitia animl. Cic. They are tc 
blame who shirk their duties from effeminacy of temper. 

Oderunt peccare boni virtutis am5re. Hon. The good hate to sinfron 
a love of virtue. 

So also jussu civium, at the bidding of the citizens ; med rogatii, at mi 
request, and other verbal Ablatives. On causa and gratia, for the sake of 
see 372. 

Remarks. — 1. The moving cause is often expressed by a participle with the Ablative 
adductus, led; ardens,J?ra£; commotus, stirred up ; incitatus, egged on; incensus 
inflamed ; impulsus, driven on; Ira, by anger ; odio, by hate ; metxi, from fear ; metlh 
perterritus, sore frightened ; propter metum, on account of, {by reason of) fear. 
2. The preventing cause is expressed by prae,/or : 
Prae gaudio ubi sim nescio. Ter. I know not where lam for joy. 



ji 



i\ 



I 



E. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 

408. The so-called Ablative Absolute is an Ablative com 
binecl with a participle, and serves to modify the verbal predicat 
of a sentence. Instead of the participle, a predicative substan|| 
tive or adjective can be employed. 

Remark.— This Ablative, which may be called the Ablative of Circumstance, spring ..Jj 
from the Temporal Use of the Ablative— the Temporal from the Local. 



" 



NAMES OF TOWNS. 209 

409. The Ablative Absolute may be translated by the Eng- 
ish Objective Absolute, which is a close equivalent: but for 

purposes of style, it is often well to analyze the thought, to 
hange Passive into Active, to make use of an abstract noun. 

Xerxe regnante (— Quum Xerxes regnaret) 3 Xerxes reigning. When 
"Xerxes teas reigning. In the reign of Xerxes. 

Xerxe victo (= Quum Xerxes victus esset), Xerxes being, having been, 
lefeated. When Xerxes had been defeated. After the defeat of Xerxes. 

Xerxe rege (= Quum Xerxes rex esset), Xerxes [being] king. When 
Xerxes was king. 

Patre vivo, while father is, was alive (in father's lifetime). 

Maximas virtutes jacere omnes necesse est voluptate domi- 
l ante. Cic. All the greatest virtues must necessarily lie prostrate, if (or 
vhen) tlie pleasure (of the senses) is mistress. 

Roman! veteres regnari omnes volebant libertatis dulcedine 
iondum experta. Liv. The old Romans all icished to have a king over 
hem (because they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty. 

Urbe expugnata imperator rediit : 

Passive Form : The city [being] taken (after the city was taken), the gene- 
ral returned. 

Active Form : Having taken the city (after he had taken the city), the 
general returned. 

Abstract Form : After the taking of the city. After taking the city. 

Remarks. — 1. As the Latin language has no Perf . Part. Active, except the Deponent, 
vhich is thus used, the Passive construction is far more common than in English: 

Tunc juvenes veste posita corpora oleo perunxerunt. Cic. Then the youths, 
having) laid aside their clothing, anointed their bodies with oil: or, laid aside their cloth- 
( ng, and anointed their bodies with oil. 

2. The Ablative Absolute, though often to be rendered by a co-ordinate sentence, for 
onvenience 1 sake, always presents a subordinate conception : 

Lysander suadet Lacedaemoniis ut regia potestate dissoliita ex omnibus dux 
SDi!:ieligatur ad bellum gerendum. Nep. Lysander advises the Lacedaemonians that the 
jiroyal power be done away with, and a leader be chosen from all, to conduct the war. Here 
the one is necessary to the other. 

3. As a rule, the Ablative Absolute can stand only when it is not identical with the 
subject, object, or dependent case of the verbal predicate. Manlius slew the Gaul and 
stripped him of his necklace, is to be rendered : Manlius caesum Galium torque spo- 
liavit- 

The rule is most frequently violated when the dependent case is in the Genitive : 
i Jugurtha fratre meo interfecto regnum ej us sceleris sui praedam fgcit Sall, 
Jugurtha killed my brother, and (= after killing my brother) made his throne the booty of 
%i his crime. 
Ilk 4. On the Ablative of the simple participle, see 438, R. 2. 

Names of Towns and Small Islands. 

410. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put — 
In the Accusative of the Place Whither. 



210 NAMES OF TOWNS. 

So also rus, into the country, domum, domos, home. 

Legatl Athenas missi sunt. Liv. Envoys were sent to Athens. 

Latona confugit Delum. Cic. Latona took refuge in Delos. 

Laelius et Scipio rus evolabant. Cic. Laelius and Scipio used to hurry 
out into the country. 

Innumerabiles philosophi nunquam domum revertere. Cic. In- 
numerable philosophers never returned home. 

So verbals : domum reditus, a return home. 

Remarks.— 1. Domum, house, with a possessive pronoun, or Genitive, may or may 
not have in before it : domum meam or in domum meam, to my house / domum Pom 
pejl or in domum Pompeji, to Pornpey's house ; also domum ad Pompejum. Other- 
wise : in magnificam domum venire, to come into a grand house. 

2. When urbem, city, or oppidum, town, precedes the name of the city or town, the 
preposition in or ad is prefixed ; if urbem or oppidum follows, in or ad may be omit- 
ted : in (ad) oppidum Cirtam, to, in (at) the town (of) Cirta. 

Jugurtha Thalam pervenit in oppidusi magnum et opulentum. Sall. Jugur- 
tha arrived at Thala, a great and wealthy town. 

3. Ad means to the neighborhood of, often before, of military operations. Ad Muti 
nam, to the neighborhood {siege of) Matina (Mod en a). 

4. Observe that there must be motion, not merely extent, which requires a preposition 
A Salonis ad Oricum porttis. Caes. The harbors from Salonae to Oricus. 

5. Motion To a Place embraces all the local designations : 
Phalara in sinum Maliacum processerant- Liv. They had advanced to Phalan 

on the Maliac Gulf. 

Tarentum in Italiam inferiorem proficisci, to set out for Tarentum in Lowe 
Italy 

41 1. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put- 
In the Ablative of the Place Whence: 

Demaratus fugit Tarquinios Corintho. Liv. Demaratus fled to Tai 
quinii from Corinth. 

Dolabella Delo proficiscitur. Cic. Dolabella sets out from Delos. 

So also domo, from home ; humo, from the ground ; rure, from t? 
country. 

Remarks.— 1. The prepositions ab (a) and ex (e) are sometimes used for the sake 
greater exactness. So regularly ab with the Place from which distance is measured : 

Aesculapii templum quinque milibus passuum ab urbe Epidauro distat Li 
(400, R. 1.) 

When the common nouns urbe, city, and oppido, town, are employed, the use of t 
preposition is the rule : 

Aulide, ex oppido Boeotiae,/n>m Aulis, a town of Boeotia. 

£x Apollonia Pontl urbe,/ww Apollonia, a city of Pontus. 

Ex oppido Gergovia, from the town of Gergovia. 

2. The Place Whence embraces all the local designations : 

Agrigento ex Aesculapii fano, whereas we should say, from the temple of Aescuil 
vius at Agrigentum. 

Unde domo % Veru. From what home? 

3. Letters are dated from rather than at a place. 

4. The poets arc free in using the Ablative as a Whence-case. 



NAMES OF TOWNS. 211 

412. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put 
In the Locative of the Place Where. 

The Locative coincides in the Singular with the Genitive of the Second 
Declension, with the Dative of the First and Third. In the Plural, Dative, 
Locative, and Ablative coincide, and the Ablative is blended with the Lo- 
3ative in Syntax and in the Third Declension, often in form. (See 23, R. 1.) 

Locative S. 1. Romae (RSmai) PI. 1. Athenis 

2. Corinth! 2. Delphis 

3. Sulmom(e) 3. Curibus. 

Ut Romae consules sic Karthagini (Carthagine) quotannis bin! reges 
Dreabantur. Nep. As at Rome (two) consuls, so in Carthage two kings, were 
created yearly. 

Artemisia nobile fecit HaJicarnassi sepulcrum. Cic. Artemisia built 
i famous sepulchre at Halicarnassus. 

Tarquinius Superbus mortuus est Oumis. Liv. Tarquin the Over- 
)eo,ring died at Cumae. 

Timotheus Lesbl vixit. Nep. Timotheus lived in Lesbos. 

; ff j Eemarks.— 1. Other locative forms are, domi, at home, (Genitive, domiis) humi, on 
fie ground, and also belli and militiae, in combination with domi : 

£arvi sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. Cic. Of little value are arms 
ibroad unless there is wisdom at home. 

Hum! jacere, to lie on the ground. 

Huml prosternere, to throw flat on the ground. 

Domi militiaeque, belli domlque, inpeace and in war, in war and in peace, at homt 

% in the field. 

n. Hurl, in the country, is also generally considered a locative form (but mre meo, on my 
e arm). 

On animl, see 374, R. 3. 

2. Appositions are put in the Ablative commonly with in : 

Milites Albae constitemnt in urbe opportuna, the soldiers halted at Alba, a con- 
veniently situated town. 

Archias Antiochlae natus est celebri quondam urbe, Archias was born at AntU 
%ch, once a populous city. 

Neapoll in celeberrimo oppido, at Naples, a very populous town— in the populous, 
'elebrated town of Naples. 

When urbe, city, oppido, town, or insula, island, precedes, the preposition is always 
employed : 

In urbe Roma, in the city (of) Borne. 

In oppido Neapoll, in the town of Naples. 
I In insula Samo, in the island (of) Samos. 

3. Domi takes the Possessive Pronoun in the Genitive : 

Marcus Drilsus occisus est domi suae, M. Drusus was hilled at his own house. 
Also domi alienae, in a strange house. 

Metuis ut domi meae curetur diligenter. Ter. Ton fear that she will not be care- 
fully nursed in my house ; otherwise, in domo casta, in a pure house. 
In dom5 Periclis, in the household) of Pericles. 
In domo, in the house (not, at home). 



212 PREPOSITIONS. 



Prepositions. 

413. The Prepositions are local adverbs, which serve to define j 
more narrowly the local ideas of the cases. The only cases that 
convey local ideas are the Accusative and Ablative. The Accu 
sative, as the case of the Direct Object, represents the relation 
whither? the Ablative represents the relations whence? and 
where? * 



Rkmarks.— 1. In Verbs of Motion, the result of the motion is often considered a 
Rest in a place (where) : 

Ponere in loco, to put in a place. 

2. In Verbs of Rest, the Rest is sometimes conceived as the Result of motioj 
(whither) : 

Habere in potest at em, to have (got) in (to) one' s power. 
In carcerem asservare, to keep in jail. 

3. Prepositions derive their name from the fact that they are prefixed in compositior 
Many of the Latin prepositions are not used in composition, and these may be called in 
proper prepositions. The prefixes amb- (am- an-), dis (di), red- (re-) sed- (se-) and vi 
are sometimes called inseparable prepositions. 

414. Position of the Preposition. The Preposition generall 
precedes the case. 

Remarks.— 1. Versus, -ward, and tenus, as far as, are postpositive, and so is cue 
with, in combination with the Personal Pronouns and Relative : 
Mecum, with me. 

Nee tecum possum vivere nee sine te. Mart. (391.) 
Secum, with oneself. 

Quocum (al so quicum,) with whom (likewise, cum quo). 
Quibuscum, with whom, wherewith (also, cum quibus). 

2. Other prepositions are postponed chiefly after the relative : quem contra, again 
whom ; quos inter, among ivhom; quo de.from whom. 

3. Poets and affected writers are very free in putting the Preposition after its case, 

415. The Preposition is often put between the Attribute an 
the Case : 



Magno cum metu, with great fear. 

Whereas the Genitive and other forms of the Attribute aL 
connecting particles are often put between the Preposition arj 
its case : 

Post ver5 Sullae victoriam, but after Sulla's victory. 

Remark.— Especially to be noted is the position of per, through (by), in adjuratior 
Lydia die per omnes Te" deos oro, Hon. Lydia, tell, by all the gods, Ipray thee. 



k 

t; 
i" 

fee 

m 



PREPOSITIONS. 



213 



416. Repetition and Omission of the Preposition. — With 
liferent words which stand in the same connection, the Prepo- 
sition is repeated, when the Preposition is emphatic, or the indi- 
vidual words are to be distinguished ; so always after et — et, nee 
-nee: et ex urbe et ex agris, both from (the) city and from (the) 
mintry. Otherwise it is omitted ; so always with que. 

Clodius a Milone candidato consulates jugulatus est. Yell. Clodius 
oas killed by Mllo, a candidate for the consulship. 

Cimon in eandem invidiam incidit (in) quam pater suus. Nep. (296). 
Discite sanari per quern ( = per eum per quern) didicistis amare. Ov. 

403). 

otic|o; 

Remark.— Several Prepositions, such as contra, on the other hand, extra, outside, 

nfra, below, supra, above, ultra, beyond, are used also as adverbs without a case : 

Iliacos intra muxos peccatur et extra. Hon. Inside the walls of Ilium sin is 

Drought, and outside (too). 

! Otherwise two Prepositions cannot be used with one case : For and against Scipio, 
?ro Scipione et adversus Sclpionem. Before and after the battle, ante pugnam et 
>ost earn. 

I.— PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 

417. Prepositions construed with the Accusative are : 



inr; 



ante, 


apud, 


ad, 


adversus, 


circum, 


circa, 


citra, 


cis, 


erga, 


contra, 


inter, 


extra, 


infra, 


intra, 


juxta, 


ob, 


penes, 


pone, 


post and praeter, 


prope, 


propter, 


per, 


secundum, 


supra, 


versus, 


ultra, 


trans. 



: Remarks.— 1. To these we may add clam, xinlcnown to. hidden from (cel-O, OC-Cul-Oj 
vhich is commonly used as an adverb secretly and according to some MSS. is construed 
Mth the Ablative as well as with the Accusative. 

2. The detailed consideration of the Prepositions belongs to the Dictionary. 

ft.d, at, to (comp. ad-do, I put to), up Circum, 



to — opposed to Ab. 
Adversus, ) [turned to], towards, 
Adversum, ) over against, against. 
Ante [oxer against, facing], before 

(most frequently of time). 
Apud (chiefly of persons), at, near, 
, in the presence of (official), with 
'oil (French, chez), at the house of, in 

the view of. 



i around, about. 

Circiter, about (seldom of place, 
sometimes of time, chiefly with 
numerals). 

Cis, ) this side, short of, correlative 

Citra, ) of ultra. 

Contra ( == cum + tra), opposite to, 
oxer against, opposed to, against. 

Erga, opposite, towards, seldom of 



214 



PREPOSITIONS. 



place ; generally of friendly rela- 
tions. 

Extra, without, outside of, beside, (op- 
posed to intra). 

Infra, beneath, lower down, later. 

Inter, betioeen (reaching from one to 
the other), among, during. 

Intra, within. 

Juxta [adjoining], hard by, near, next 
to. 

Ob (over against, op-posite to), right 
before, with a mew to, for. 

Penes, with = in the hands of. 
Penes eum est potestas, The 
power lies with him. [to, by. 

Per (along), through, by way of, owing 



Pone, behind (rare). 

Post, behind, after. 

Praeter, on before, past, beyond, be- 
sides, contrary to, 

Prope, near. 

Propter, near, on account of. 

Secundum [following], next to, imme- 
diately behind, after, along, accord- 
ing to. 

Supra, above, higher up (earlier). 

Trans, on the other side, beyond, 
across. 

Ultra, on that side, beyond (opp. to 
citra). 

Versus, -ward (always postponed). 
Romajn versus, Homeward. 



IL— PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ABLATIVE. 
418. Prepositions construed with the Ablative are: 

Ex, E, out of, from (opposed to in) 



A, ab, and abs, off, of, from, by (op- 
posed to ad). 

Before vowels and h, ab ; before 
consonants, a or ab ; abs, used 
chiefly before te, thee. 

Absque (off), without (antiquated). 

C5ram, face to face with, in the pres- 
ence of (accidental). 

Cum, with. 

De, down from, from, of= about. 



i. 



Before vowels and consonants, exp 
(so chiefly in the model period): 
before consonants, e. 
Prae, in front of, side by side with, fo 

(preventive cause). 
Pro, before, for. 

Sine, without, opposed to cum. 
Tenus (to the extent of), as far a 
(occasionally with the Genitive). < 



Remark.— In poetry and later prose palam, openly, takes the Ablative ; procul, afar %' . 
follows the analogy of ab ; simul, at the same time, that of cum. 

Err 

III.— PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ACCUSATIVli \ 
AND ABLATIVE. 

419. Prepositions construed with the Accusative and Ablal I 
tive are : N 1 1 



In, in, 
Sub, under, 
Super, over, 

Eubter, under, 



ACCUSATIVE. 

into, for (purpose), 
about (of time), 
over, above, 

over and above, 
under \ beneath, 



about (of time) [rarely] 
about = de. 

over [in prose rarely 
under, beneath [rarely], 



ta 



INFINITIVE. 215 

The Infinitive as a Substantive. 

420. The Infinitive is the substantive form of the verb. 

Remakk.— The Infinitive differs from a verbal substantive, in that it retains the ad- 
rbial attribute, the designations of voice and time, and the regimen of the verb : 

Amare. to love ; valde amare, to love hugely • amari, to be loved ; amavisse, to have 
<ed ; amare aliqueni. to love a man ; nocere alicui, to hurt a man. 

But the great claim of the Infinitive to be considered a verb lies in the involution of 
xlicate and subject. Like the finite verb, the Infinitive involves predicate and subject ; 
t the subject is indefinite and the. predication is dependent. 

,'421. The Infinitive, when it stands alone, involves an mdefi- 
te Accusative Subject, and the Predicate of that Subject is, of 
'iurse, in the Accusative Case. 

Regem esse, To be king. 
Bonum esse, To be good. 

So in the paradigm of the verb: 

Amaturum esse, To be about to love. 

Remark.— On the Nominative with the Infinitive by Attraction, see 528. 

In consequence of this double nature, the Infinitive may be used as a 
4bstantive or as a verb. 
{.. 

422. The Infinitive, as a Noun, is used regularly in two 

/4ses only — Nominative and Accusative. In the other cases its 
ace is supplied by the Gerund and the Ablative Supine. 

THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBJECT. 

423. The Infinitive, as a Subject, is treated as a neuter sub- 

pjkative : 

i Errare humanum est. To err is human (that man should err is human), 
Incipere multo est quam impetrare facilius. Platjt. Begin- 

ng is much easier (work) than winning. 

Non tarn turpe fuit vine! quam contendisse decorum est. Ov. (275.) 
1 Esse b o n a m facile est quum quod vetet esse remotum est. 

V. Be -a good woman — 'tis easy when what icould prevent it is distant. 

THE INFINITIVE AS AN OBJECT. 
J 424. The Infinitive is used as the Object of Verbs of Creation, 
)mmonly known as Auxiliary Verbs. 

These Verbs hdp the Infinitive into existence. 



2 1 6 INFINITIVE. 

Such verbs denote Will, Power, Duty, Habit, Inclination, Resolve, Con- 
tinuance, End, and the like, with their opposites : 

Emori cupio. Ter. I want to die. 

Cato esse quam videri bonus malebat. Sall. Caio preferret 
being (good) to seeming good. 

Et precor ut p o s s i m tutius esse miser. Ov. And I pray that . 
may he more safely wretched. 

Vincere scis, Hannibal ; victoria uti nes'cls. Ltt. How t 
win victory, you know, Hannibal ; how to make use of victory, you know no\ 

Qui mori didicit, servire dedidicit. Sen. He who has learned t 
die has unlearned to be a slave. 

Maledictis deterrere ne scribat p a r a t. Ter. He is preparin 
(trying) to frighten (him) from writing, by abuse. 
So paratus, ready. 

Qui mentiri solet, pejerare consuevit. CiC. He who is wont to 
accustomed to sice ar falsely. 

Vulnera quae fecit debuit ipse pati. Ov. The wounds he gave J 
should himself have suffered. 

Vereor te laudare praesentem. CiC. I feel a delicacy about praisii 
you to your face. 

Religionum animum nodis exsolvere pergo. Ltjcr. I go on 
loose the spirit from the bonds of superstitious creeds. 

Atque ut vivamus vivere desinimus. Mart. And that wemc\ 
live, we cease to live. 

So habeo, I have (it in my power). 

Tantum habeo polliceri me tibi cumulate satisfacturum. CiC. 
much I can promise that I will give you abundant satisfaction. 



L( 



42 



Remarks. — 1. Notice that coepl, I have begun, anddesino, I cease, have Passive P 
fects with Passive Infinitives : 

Athenienses undique premi bello sunt coepti. Nep. The Athenians began to J (Mfi 
the pressure of war on {from) all sides. 

Veteres orationes legl sunt desitae. Cic. The old speeches have ceased to be reai 

When the Passives are really Reflexives or Neuter, the active forms may be used. 

2. Verbs of Will and Desire take ut as well as the Inf. So regularly opto, I choose, 

3. Verbs which denote Hope and Promise take the Accusative and Future Infinit fei 
(occasionally as in English) : 

Spero me" hoc adepturum esse, I hope to (that I shall) obtain this. 

Promittebat s<5 venturum esse, he kept promising that he would come (to come). 

Doceo, I teach, jubeo, Ibid, veto, 1 forbid, sino, I let, take the Infinitive as a Seco 
Accusative : \ 

Dionysius ne collum tonsorl committeret tondere filias suas d o c u i t. ( 
Dionysius, to keep from trusting his neck to a barber, taught his daughters to shave (tan I 
them shaving). 

Ipse jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. Mart. (375.) 

Vltae summa brevis spem ncs vetat incohare longam- Hor. Life's brief 
forbids us open (a) long (account with) hope. 



•5 



GEEUXD. 217 

Neu Me&os sinas equitare inultos. Hor. Nor let the Median ride and ride un- 
Duni«hed. 

4. Poetical Uses of the Infinitive : The poets use the Infinitive as an Object with 
*reat freedom : 

1.) After many verbs which are not auxiliary in Prose : 

Ardet mere. Ov. He glows {he burns) to rush. 

Quid sit futurum eras fuge quaerere. Hok. What will be to-morrow, Jly the ques- 
tion. 

Parce tuum vatem sceleris damnare, Cupido. Ov. (377.) 

2.) For the Genitive of the Gerund and Geruudive, see 429, K. 4. 
i 

3.) For the Accusative of the Gerundive : 

Quern virum ant heroa lyra vel acri tibia sumes celebrare, Clio ? Hor. 

What man or hero wilt thou undertake to celebrate on harp or shrilly flute, Clio? (siim.es 
^elebrandum.) 

But dare is used with the Infin. even in prose, in familiar phrases : dare bibere, to 
jive to drink. 

4.) For ut, of purpose ; ad with the Gerund, or Gerundive ; or Supine : 

Tunc ego : non oculos sed ventrem pascere venl. Mart, Then I: I'm come to 
feed my belly, not my eyes. 

Semper in Oceanum mittit me quaerere gemmas. Prop. She is always 
tending me to the ocean to. look for pearls. 
i 5.) For the Supine in -u, ad with Gerund, or the like : 

Roma cap! facilis- Lucan. Rome is easy to be taken, to take (facile capitur). 

6.) In fine, the Infinitive is often used because the word or phrase is considered an 
equivalent to a verb of creation. In all these points the Post- republican prose follows 
joetry more or less closely. 
| 

INFINITIVE AS A PREDICATE. 

425. The Infinitive, as a verbal Substantive, may be used as 
} Predicate after the copula esse, to ie, and the like : 

Docto homini et eruditS vivere est cogitare. Cic. To a learned and 

cultivated man to live is to think. 

Gerund and Gerundive 

J 426. The other cases of the Infinitive are supplied by the 
jrerund. With Prepositions, the Gerund, and not the Infinitive, 
s employed. 

Remark. — Of course the Infinitive may be quoted as an abstract notion: 
Multum interest inter "dare " et "accipere." Sen. There is a vast difference 
between "Give" and " Receive." 

Nom. Legere difficile est, reading (to read) is hard to do. 
Gen. Ars legend!, the art of reading. 

Puer studiosus est legendl, the boy is zealous of reading. 
Dat. Puer operam dat legendo, the boy devotes himself to reading. 

10 



218 GERUNDIVE. 

Acc. Puer cupit legere, the boy is desirous to read. 

Puer propensus est ad legendum, the boy has a bent toward readf 
trig. 
Ar.L. Puer discit legendo, the boy learns by reading. 

427. As a verbal form, the Gerund, like the Infinitive, take; 
the same case as the verb. 

Studium obtemperandi le gibus. Zeal for obedience to the laws. 

Remarks.— 1. The Gerund is the Substantive of the Gerundive. (243, R. 1.) The si; 
nification of necessity comes mainly from its use as a predicate. Verbal Nouns are Actrv 
or Passive according to the point of view. (Compare 361.) Worthy of note is the fa< 
that the leading form of the Greek Active Infinitive is ultimately a Present Particip 
Passive. 

2. Gerundive and Perfect Participle Passive are often translated alike ; but in the or M 
case the action is progressive or prospective, in the other it is completed. 

Caesare interficiendo Brutus et Cassius patriae libertatem restituere cona 
sunt. By the murder of Caesar (by murdering Caesar), Brutus and Cassius endeavored 
restore their country' 's freedom to her. 

Caesare interfecto, Brutus et Cassius patriae libertatem non restituerun 
By murdering Caesar, Brutus and Cassius did not restore their country 's freedom to her. 



428. Gerundive for Gerund. — Instead of the Gerund, wit kt 
an Accusative Object, the object is generally put in the case c 
the Gerund, with the Gerundive as an Attribute. 



I 



Gen. Placandi Dei, of appeasing God. 

Dat. Placando Deo, for appeasing God. J I, 

Abl. Placandd Deo, by appeasing God. Iud 

In the model period this construction is invariably employed with Pr 
positions. 



Ad placandSs Deos, for appeasing the gods. 
In placandis Deis, in appeasing the gods. 



T; 



Remarks. — 1. It is impossible to make a distinction between the Gerund and t 
Gerundive Form. They are often used side by side, where there can be no differen ^0} 
Liv. xxi. 5; xxv. 40; xxviii. 37; xxx. 26. The preference for the Gerundive is of Hfe 
piece with the use of the Perf. Pass. Participle in preference to an Abstract Not 
(357, R. 2.) 

2. Neuter Adjective? and Pronouns are not attracted: studium agendi aliqu 
desire of doing something ; cupiditas plura habendi. greed for having more. But wl 
the Neuter Adjective has become a subslantive (195, R. 2), the Gerundive form may 
used : modus investigandl veri, the method of investigating the truth. 

3. The Gerundive can be formed only from Transitive Verbs, the Gerund from t\ 
(243. R. 2). Hence the impersonal form must be used with all verbs that do not take 
Accusative. 

Valetiidinl parcendum est, the health must be spared. 
Exceptions.— tftendus, to be used; fruendus, to be enjoyed; potiendus. to be % ^ 
tessed ; fungendus, to be discharged ; vescendus, to be eaten (405) ; which, however, 



.to 

_r 

i tie, 

y 



GERUND. 219 

ised only * in the oblique cases. Further, medendus, to be healed ; paenitendus, to be 
regretted. 

Expetuntur dlvitiae ad perfruendas voluptates. Cic. Riches are sought for the 
njoyment of pleasures. But : 

tltendum est aetate, cito pede labitur aetas. Ov. Life's season is to be enjoyed, 
wift-footed glides that season. 
* The Impersonal Nominative with the Accus, is rare and antiquated : 

Aeternas quoniam paenas in morte timendum est- Lucr. Since we must fear 
ternal punishments in death. 

GENITIVE OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 

11 429. The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive is used 
hiefly after substantives and adjectives which require a com- 
oi'lement : 

■ Sapientia ars Vivendi putanda est. Cic. Philosophy is to be considered 
\ie art of living. 

Et propter vitam Vivendi perdere causas. Juv. And on account of 
Y$, to lose the reasons for living. 

Raucaque garrulitas studiumque immane loquendi. Ov. And hoarse 
\\\iattiness 1 and a monstrous love of talking. 

Triste est ipsum nomen carendl. Cic. Dismal is the mere word 
carere" {go without). 

Non est placandi spes mihi nulla Dei. Ov. / am not without hope of 
ppeasing God. 
Ign5rant cupidi maledicendi plus invidiam quam convicium posse. 
uint. Those who are eager to abuse know not that envy has more power 
,an billingsgate. 

Titus equitandi peritissimus fuit. Suet. Titus was exceedingly, skillful 
\ riding. 
Neuter sui protegendi corporis memor erat. Liv. Neither thought of 
ielding his own body. 

I Qui hie mos obsidendi vias et viros alienos appellandi ? Liv. What 
rt of way is this of blocking up the streets and calling upon other women's 
is kisbands f 

Summa eludendl occasio est mihi nunc senes. Ter. / have a Up-top 
nnce to fool the old folks now. 

Remarks. — 1. As meL tui, SUl, nostri, vestrl, are, in their origin, neuter singulars, 
!>m meum, my being ; tuum, thy being ; suum, one's being, etc., the Gerundive is put 

the same form: conservandl sui, of preserving themselves; vestrl adhortandl, of 
horting you. 

Copia placandi sit modo parva tui. Ov. Let (me) only have a slight chance of try- 
7 to appease you (feminine). 

Similar constructions are also found with other words : exemplorum eligendi po- 
pe <[ £tas, power of choosing exanqrfes. 



M 



* In Cic. Fin. 1, 1, 3, fruenda (Nom.) is used for the sake of paranda. 



S82C -zr.Tvr. 

itrm An:!:::: fa : nltSS IStar agrorum snls latronibus condonanc 
Bow is whether Antony shall be empowered to give away lands I; 

'■ . ' :.:. :-/ :. 

■....: :-anS3 -irk the Gc : - . _ . Serundvre finr the sake 

to ez iig lolo i u m e S i j i e a 1 : i a m causa, for ih-e sake of escapl. 

i ,:. . '. ".- seine: zir; :ir 3~r.i:ivf ;.;.-...- is used : 

L:; .".:.: ^J:::-::i :;'::-}::e:^r Sail. Lepidus took up arms a? 

- -'•: -' j>: --. :-' ; : f ft ; / -/V :. 

- : - . ■ ■ : : s t e - ; : 
:.--i- - -:::~z ~:.~ '. e :: etc 

: " '. : i :■ : ~ :• : r i: a e —in 1 en da e s ant- Lit. AM such distincti 
.: ■:' : _ : -" ■"' '■:■: : :: :~-e i ::':; -'.:." /: -;-;.".' -.: ::.•: ;;-.;;■•■;" . 

- :--■: -=^ "~ ~ B: Eaves aula Bui |uisqnc c:rr_modi fec-erat Ships wh 
ehadQi&t :er) of personal concert '.-■;-;. 

Iezi^"i= rs: :'" . '_: -'_ : . consilium est, id h 77? y {your, Mb) plan; andaf 
::lers. _.;'. 7 v.- . _". v ."._ :~e :::::::-: : Tempns at Ire ::"bl est. J~ :5 rrrr --■• r :::. :■: 
r _- : , . 

Bot when tempos is nsed in the sense of season- ("a time to weep and a time 
lan^i"), the Gerund, or Gerundive is rets ir.ed : 

If s = rei ger endas non dimisit • Hbf. Zysander did not let the op: 

: . .:'-;. ;-' :.::i: :'l\ 

4 Tie 1 e:= are -err free -j. :ie n= :- : : the TnfinitiTe for the Genirive of the Gen; 
;-_ : \.:. ~: _ - :: .e 7 :-:r. = ::'T.e :le r_ iVe :ri _ e :: v.: ': -::::::~r I: :e :i: : . r_:.:e V ■=■:": . 

A: s e : T : e. rr.ies e: n e : : : .-. : a 1 1 er e = qnae nesciat fallere) vita. Yi 
(tet^ without a can. and a Ufe that knoweth not Ttow to disappoint {ignorant of di, 
;.'■:: - \e:~ . 



- 
8 



DATIVE W TZZ GERUND AOT GERUNDIVE. 

430 The Dative rf the Gerund and Gerundive is n^ 
ihieflj after woi 3 . which imply capacity and adaptation: 

Arv.e :;::r:^e atOls e^: faibeodd. Plht. Alkaline water is good 

c. '.'-:. ; ". ' : : : . . 

rigmnn aiidmn materia est idonea eliciendis ignibus. Sex. 

wood is a fit substance fo' r ; fire (drawing out sparks 

Refenmdae err habeo lir.guam natam gratia e. Plaut. / hat 

:: ■■; ' -: ~~ .: : ': : "'■. ~: ' .'".:". \: the : : .":. " less. 

Rarer if the Datire in combination with the Accnsatiye. 

C : d b d 1 7- 1 a : a r. r i ?. d 1= r. a I r p e r a m 1 it . The consul does his endeai ; 

Eg tc be d >ticed ifi the Datiye with esse, and in na: 

: ] ■ .".s : 



Ek>hrendc rivitates nrn ere:::, Cic The com rtuniUes iiere not equ 

li'.e::-. v:re^ s::r: :;r rit Bcif se e.:^e oneri ferendo. Sex. .77^ 

:7t ; Ae knows thai Tie is (equal) 



7^ ? 
to 



GERUND. 221 

Decemviri legibus scribundis, Decemvirs for (charged with) drawing up 
ws. 

Remark.— Later writers treat the Dative of the Gerund or Gerundive as if equivalent 
ad. 



ACCUSATIVE OF THE GERUNDIVE. 

431. The Gerundive is used in the Accusative of the Object 
11 be Effected, after such Verbs as Giving and Taking, Sending 
' id Leaving. 

Diviti homini id aurum servandum dedit. Plaut. He gave (hat gold 
k& rich man to keep. 

Conon muros renciendos curat. Nep. Conon has the walls rebuilt. 

Patriam diripiendam relinquimus. Cic. We leave our country to be 
Sundered. 

Carvilius aedem faciendam locavit. Lrv. Garvilius let the (contract of) 
' ikling the temple. 

Of course the Passive form has the Nominative : 
[2 Filius Philippi Demetrius ad patrem reducendus legatis datus est. 

v. The son of Philip, Demetrius, was given to the envoys to be taken back to 

? father. 

ABLATIVE OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 

i 432. The Ablative of the Gerund or Gerundive is used as 
e Ablative of Means and Cause, seldom as the Ablative of 
aimer or Circumstance. 

i XJnus hom5 nobis cunctando restituit rem. Exntcs. One man by 
\gering raised our cause again. 

\i Cede repugnant!, cedendd victor abibis. Ov. Yield to her when she 
nsts ; you'll come off victor by yielding. 

Quid digitos opus est graphio lassare tenend5 ? Ov. (390, R.) 
Exercendo quotidie milite hostem opperiebatur. Lrv. Drilling the 
'' diers daily he loaitedfor the enemy. 
Occasionally with the Comparative. 



PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 



433. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive takes the 
•epositions ad and inter, seldom ante, circa, in, ob. 

j Nulla res tantum ad dicendum proncit quantum scriptio. Cic. NotTi- 
g is as profitable for speaking as writing. 






222 supine. 

Atticus philosophorum praeceptis ad vitam agendam n5n ad osten 
tationem. utebatur. Xep. Atticus m of philosopher 

for the conduct of Ir 

Inter spoliandum corpus hostis exsplravit. Lrr. While in the act oj 
si \ ping the b. ' the enemy he gave up the ghost, 

434. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive takes th 
pre] - ab, de, ex, often in. seldom cum and pro, and sin 
never. 

Prohibenda maxime est Ira in puniendo. Cic. Especially to be foi 

in- pun ishing. 
Brutus in liberanda patria est interfectus. Cic. Brutus was slain i 

i 
Philosophi in ils ipsls libris quos scribunt de contemnenda gloria su 
nomina inscribunt. Cic. (384, R. 1.) 

Ex discendo capimus voluptatem. Cic. We receive pleasure from lean\\ 
ing. 

Sutihs. 

435. The Supine is a Verbal Xoun, which appears only i:Ij 
the Accusative and Ablative cases. 



! 






THE ACCUSATIVE SUPINE. 

436. The Accusative Supine (Supine in -ran) is used chiefl 
after Verbs of Motion : 



4: 
fe 



h. 



Galli gallinacei cum sole eunt cubitum. Plin. Cocks go to roost 

Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsae. Ov. They come 
see v \ they come to be themselves a show. 

Stultitia est venatum ducere in vitas canes. Plaut. ' Tis foolishness 
take unvn .' p % a-h. u nting. 

Hcstis est uxor invita quae ad virum n up turn datur. PlauJj 
(344 ; R 1.) 

Remarks.— L The Accusative S ipine may take aii object, but the construction is e 

oinmon : 
Hannibal patriam defensum (more usual : ad defendendam. patriam) revocat 
est- Nbp. B 

SL Egf e i i ally : xm moo is the us »J - opine after the verb ire, to go : 

Cur te Is perditum ? Ter. Why are you going to ruin you 

Turpisiimi virl bmarum uraemia ereptum eunt. Sall. The scoundrels o 
y by force the rewards of the hette 

Lp of the Passive Infinitive cf ire 
:;:. ... 3 the Supine : 



PARTICIPLE. 223 

Dicunt reum damnatum Irl. They say that the defendant villi be condemned, {that 
ople are going (Irl from Itur, 199. R. 1.), that there is a movement, to condemn the accused). 

The consciousness of this is lost, as is shown by the Nominative (528). 

Beus damnatum irl videbatur, Quint. The accused seemed to be about to be con- 
mned. 

THE ABLATIVE SUPINE. 

437. The Ablative Supine (Supine in -u) is used chiefly with 
djectives, as the Ablative of the Point of View From Which : 

Mirabile dicta, Wonderful (in the telling) to tell, visu, to behold. 

Hoc dictii quam re facilius est, Liv. This is easier in the saying than 

the fact (easier said than done). 

Remarks. — 1. The use of the Ablative Supine is confined to a few verbs, chiefly : 
ctii, to tell ; factii, to do ; auditu, to hear ; visu, to see : cognitu, to know. Authors 
T ry much. The adjectives generally denote Ease or Difficulty, Pleasure or Displeasure, 
ght or Wrong. 

2. Ad, with the Gerundive, is often used instead : 

Cibus facillimus ad concoqnendum,/<?o^ (that is) very easy to digest. 
The Infinitive, facilis concoqui, is poetical. 

3. The local use of the Ablative Supine is very rare : 

Vilicus primus cubitii surgat, postremus cubitum eat. Cato. The steward 
ist be the first to get out of bed, the last to go to bed. 

4. The Supine in -u never takes an object. 

Participle. 

438. The Participle may be used as a Substantive, but even 
Aen generally retains something of its predicative nature. 

Nihil est magnum somnianti. Cic. Nothing is great to a dreamer (to a 
an, when he is dreaming). 
Regia, crede mihi, res est succurrere lap sis. Ov. It is a kingly 

ing, believe me (to run to catch those who have slipped), to succor the fallen. 

Remarks. — 1. The Attribute of the Participle, employed as a Substantive, is gene- 
ly in the adverbial form : recte facta, right actions • facete dictum, a witty remark. 

2. Especially to be noted is the Ablative of the Participle without a Substantive : 
jidlto, it having been heard ; comperto, it having been found out. 

So also an adjective used predicatively : the Substantive is commonly supplied by a 
atence. The construction is of limited use. 

Alexander audlto Dareum movisse ab Ecbatanis fugientem insequi pergit. 
rRT, Alexander, (it) having (been) heard that Darius had decamped from Ecbatana, pro- 
ids to follow him up on his flight. 

439. The Participle, as an Adjective, often modifies its ver- 
3,1 nature, so as to be characteristic : 

Epamlnondas erat temporibus sapienter u t e n s, Epaminondas was a 
an icho used to use opportunities wisely (= is qui uteretur). 



224 NEGATIVE ADVERBS. 

Remark.- -Especial attention in called to the parallelism of the Participle or Adjective 
with the Relative and Subjunctive: 

Res parva dictii, sed quae studiis in magnum certamen excesserit. Liv. A 

small thing to mention, but one which, by the excitement of the parties, terminated in a grea 
contest 



B 



One class of Adverbs demands special notice — the Negatives. 



NEGxVTIVE ADVEKBS. 



Adverb. ^ 

440. 1. The Predicate may be qualified by an Adverb. 
2. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs, anc 

sometimes substantives, when they express or imply verbal o 
adjective relations: 

Male vivit, lie lives ill; bene est, it is well; fere omnes, almost all 
nimis saepe, too often ; admodum adulescens, a mere youth, quite a youth 
late rex (Verg.), wide-ruling ; bis consul, twice consul ; duo simul bell 

two simultaneous wars. 

Remark. — The form of the Adverb does not admit of any further inflection, and there 
fore the Adverb requires no rules of Syntax except as to its position. 

441. Position of the Advert. — Adverbs are commonly pu 
next to their verb, and before it when it ends the sentence, an 
immediately before their adjective or adverb, 

Injuste facit, he acts unwisely. 

Admodum pulcher, handsome to a degree, wry handsome. 

Valde diligenter, very carefully. 

Exceptions occur chiefly in rhetorical passages, in which great stress I 
laid on the Adverb, or in poetry : 

Iram bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae, Well did Ennius call ange 
the beginning of madness. 

Vixit dum vixit bene. Ter. He lived while he lived (and livec 
well. 



N 
leo: 

nt 
Ci 
§ 



442. There are two original negatives in Latin, Ne and Han 
(haut, hau). From ne is derived non (ne-oinom (uimm), no-wlii 
not). Ne is used chiefly in compounds, or with the Imperath 
and Optative Subjunctive. The old use appears in ne — quidei 
Non is used with the Indicative and Potential Subjunctiv 
haud, mainly with Adjectives and Adverbs. 



id 



!!' 



NEGATIVES. 225 

NEGATIVE OF THE INDICATIVE. 

443. 1. The regular Negative of tlie Indicative and of the 
Potential Subjunctive is non, the absolute not. 

Quern amat, amat \ quern non amat, n5n amat, Whom he likes, he likes ; 
ohom he does not like, he does not like. 
Non ausim, / should not venture. 
Remark.— Non as the emphatic, specific negative may negative anything. (See 263,R.) 

2. Haud in model prose is used chiefly with Adjectives and 
idverbs : hand magnus, not great ; haud male, not badly. 

Haud scio (Hauscio), in haud scio an, is the chief exception 
! >59, E.) 

In antitheses non is used, and not haud : 

Non est vivere sed valere vita. Martial. Not living, but being well, is 
ife. 

I Remark.— Other negative expressions are : haudquaquam, nequaquam, neuti^ 
[nam, by no means; nihil, nothing. (*' Adam, with such counsel nothing swayed.") On 
iUllus, see 304, R. 2. 

I 444. Subdivision of the Negative. — A general negative may 
3e subdivided by neque — neque, as well as by aut — aut, or 
strengthened by ne — quidem, not even : 

Nihil unquam neque insolens neque gloriosum ex 5re Timo- 
.eontis processit. Nep. Nothing insolent or boastful ever came out of the 
nouih of Timoleon. 

Consci5rum nemo aut latuit aut fugit. Liv. Of the accomplices no one 
either hid or fled. 

Nunquam Scipionem ne minima quidem re offendi. Cic. / never 
wounded Scipio's feelings, no, not even in the slightest matter. 

("I will give no thousand crowns neither.' 1 '' — Shakes.) 

Remark.— In the same way nego, 1 say no, is continued by neque— neque (nee— 
aee) : 

Negant nee virtutes nee vitia crescere. Cic. They deny that either virtues or vices 
increase. 

445. Negative Combinations. — In English, we say either no 
y me ever, or, never any one; nothing ever, or, never anything ; in 
Latin, the former turn is invariably used : nemo unquam, no one 
"ever : 

Verres nihil unquam fecit sine aliquo .quaestu. Cic. Verres 

never did anything without some profit or other. 
Remark.— No one yet is nondum quisquam. 

10* 



226 NEGATIVES. 

446. Nego (/ say no, I deny) is commonly used instead of 
dico non, I say — not. 

Negant quemquam virum bonum esse nisi sapientem. Cic. They say 
that no one is a good man except the sage. 

Remark- The positive (ajo, / say) is sometimes to be supplied for a subsequent 
clause. Caes. B. G. i. 19. The same thing happens with the other negatives. 

POSITION OF THE NEGATIVE. 

447. The Negative naturally belongs to the Predicate, and 

usually stands immediately before it but may be placed before 
any emphatic word or combination of words : 

Potes non revertl. Sex. Possibly you may not return. 
Non potes revertl. You cannot 'possibly return. 

Saepe viri fallunt ; tenerae non saepe puellae. Ov. Often do men 
deceive ; soft-hearted maidens not often. 

Non omnis aetas, Lude, ludo convenit. Plaut. (346.) 

Ee marks. — 1. As the Copula esse, to be, is, strictly speaking, a Predicate, the Nega- 
tive generally precedes it, contrary to the English idiom, except in contrasts. The differ- 
ence in position can often be brought out only by stress of voice : fellx non erat, he 
wasn't happy ; non fellx erat. he was not happy, he was far from happy. 

2. Ne — quidem bestrides the emphatic word or emphatic group (444). 

448. Two negatives in the same sentence destroy one 
another, and make an affirmative: 

Non nego, I do not deny {I admit). 

Remark;.- 1. Non possum non, I cannot but, {I must). 
Qui mortem in malls ponit non potest earn non timere. Cic. He who classes H 
death among misfortunes cannot but (must) fear it. 

2. The double Negative is often stronger than the opposite Positive : 
Non iDdoctus. a highly educated man ; non sum nescius, lam well aware. 
Non indecoro pulvere sordidl. Hon. Swart fsoiled) with (no dis)honorable dust. 
Non ignara mall miseris succurrere disco. Verg. Not unacquainted (= but toe 

well acquainted) with misfortune, I learn to succor the wretched. 

This figure, which has a very wide application, is called Litotes LAiToTr}$), oi 
Under sta lament. 

3. It follows from R. 2. that nee non is not simply equivalent to et, and: nee belong; 
to the sentence, non to the particular word : 

Nec hoc Zeno non vldit. Cic. JS/or did Zeno fail to see this. 

4. Of especial importance is the position of the Negative in the following combina 
tions : 

Indefinite Affirmative. General Affirmative. 

nonnihil, somewhat; nihil non, everything; 

nonnemo, some one, some ; nemo non, everybody; 

nonnulll. some people ; null! non, all; 

nonnunquam, sometimes; nunquam non, always; 

nonnusquam. somewhere; nusquam non, everywhere. 



INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 22? 

In ipsa curia nonnemo hostis est- Cic. In the senate-house itself there are enemies 
aemo non hostis est, everybody is an enemy). 

Non est placandi spes mihi nulla Dei- Ov. 1 ham some hope of appeasing 
rod (nulla spes non est, I have every hope). 

Nemo non didicisse mavult quam diseere. Quint. Everybody prefers having 
arned to learning. 

NEGATIVE OF THE IMPERATIVE. 

449. Ne is the Negative of the Imperative and of the Opta- 
ive Subjunctive : 

Ne cede malls. Verg. Yield not thou to misfortunes. 
Ne transierls Hiberum. Liv. Do not cross the Ebro. 
Ne vivam, May I cease to live. 

Remark.— The Negative non is sometimes used instead of ne, when contrast is 
Emphasized : ' 

Aut non tentarls aut perfice. Ov. Either attempt not, or achieve. 

450. Ne is continued by neve or neu: 

i Ne illam vendas neu me perdas hominem amantem. Plaut. Don't 

il her y and don't ruin me, a fellow in love. 



Incomplete Sentence. 

Interrogative Sentences. 



451. An interrogative sentence is necessarily incomplete. 
irhe answer is the complement. 

, 452. A question may relate : 

1. To the existence or non-existence of the Predicate: Pre- 
dicate Question: 

j Vivitne pater ? Is my father alive ? 

II. To some undetermined integrant of the sentence, such as 
'Subject, Object, Adjective, Adverbial modifier : Nominal Ques- 

ion : 

ii 

Quis est ? Who is it f Quid ais ? What do you say ? Qui hie mos 7 
What sort of way is this ? Cur non discedis ? Why do you not depart ? 

For a list of Interrogative Pronouns see 104, 

Remarks. — 1. The second class requires no rules except as to mood (464). 

2, The form of the question is often used to imply a negative opinion on the part of 
ie speaker, 



228 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

Quid interest inter perjurum et mendacem ? Cic. What is the difference between 
a perjured .'nan and a liar? 

All questions of this kind are called Rhetorical. 

453. Interrogative sentences are divided into simple and 
compound (disjunctive). Am I? (simple) ; Am I, or am I not ? 

(disjunctive). 

Remark.— Strictly speaking, only the simple interrogative sentence belongs to thi; 
section ; but for the sake of completeness, the whole subject will be treated here. 

454. Interrogative sentences are further divided into direct 
and indirect, or independent and dependent. Am I? (direct) 
He asks whether I am (indirect). 

DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS. 

455. Direct simple questions sometimes have no interrogate 
sign. Such questions are chiefly passionate in their character 
and serve to express Astonishment, Blame, Disgust. 

Infelix est Fabricius quod rus suum fodit ? Sen. Fabricius is unhapp. 
because lie digs Ms own field? (Impossible !) 

Reus, inquitj linguam vis meam praecludere ? Phaedr. Ho! ho 
quoth lie, you wish to shut my mouth, you do. (You shall not.) 

Quod dicis te non fecissej ego feci ? Quint. Because you say you di\ 
not do it, I did ? (Absurd !) 

Remark.— When several questions follow in immediate succession, only the first gen 
rally takes the Interrogative Pronoun, or -ne. Repeated questioning is passionate. 

456. Interrogative Particles. — Ne (enclitic) is always aj: 
pended to the emphatic word, and generally serves to denote 
question, without indicating the expectation of the speaker : 

Omnisne pecunia soluta est? Cic. Is all the money paid? 
Estne omnis pecunia soluta? Is all the money paid? 

Remarks. — 1. -Ne is originally a negative. Questioning a negative leans to t 
affirmative; and -ne is not always strictly impartial. 

2. -Ne sometime? cuts off a preceding -s, and shortens the long vowel of the same, a, 1 
often drops its own e. Viden ? Seestf Tun 1 You? 

457. Nonne expects the answer Yes : 

Nonne meministi ? Crc. Do you not remember? 

Nonne is generosissimus qui optimus ? Quint. Is Jie not the trw 

gentleman tcho is the best man? 

So the other negatives with ne: nemone, nihilne, and the like. 



tei; 



INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 229 

n ,. 458. Hum expects the answer No : 

Num quis hie alius praeter me atque te ? Nemo est. Platjt. Is any 

body here besides you and me f J\ T o. 

Num tibi quum fauces urit sitis, aurea quaeris pocula ? Hon. When 
thirst burns your throat for you, do you ask for golden cups f [No.] 

459. An (or) belongs to the second part of a disjunctive 
J question. 

Sometimes, however, the first part of the disjunctive question is sup- 
pressed, or rather involved. The second alternative with an serves to 
urge the acceptance of the positive or negative proposition involved in the 
preceding statement. This abrupt form of question (or, then) is of frequent 
use in Remonstrance, Expostulation, Surprise, and Irony. 

Non manum abstines 7 An tibi jam mavis cerebrum dispergam hie ? 

' Ter. Are you not going to keep your hands off? Or would you rather have 

! me scatter your brains over the place now ? 

(Vir custodit absens.) (My husband keeps guard, though absent.) 
(Is it not so f) An nescis longas regibus esse manus ? Ov. Or per- 
Jr haps you do not knoic (you do not know, then) that kings have long hands 

(arms). 

Remark.— Especially to be noted, in connection with an, are the phrases, nescio an, 
hand scio an, / do not knoiv but ; dnbito an, / doubt, 1 doubt but = / am inclined to 
think ; which give a modest affirmation. Negative particles, added to these expressions, 
give a mild negation : 

Hand scio an ita sit. Cic. / do not know but it is so. 

Hand scio an nulla senecttis beatior esse possit Cic. I do not know but it 
is impossible for any old age to be happier. 

Dnbito an Thrasybulum primum omnium ponam. Nep. 1 doubt but I should 
( =1 am inclined to think I should) put Thrasybulus first of all. 

So forsitan, perhaps, regularly with the Potential Subjunctive : 

Forsitan et Priaml f n e r i n t quae fata reqniras. Verg. Terhaps you may 
ask what was the fate of Priam, too. 

In later Latin an is used as a simple interrogative, and nescio an = nescio num. 

DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 

460. Direct Disjunctive Questions have the following forms: 

First Clause. Second and Subsequent Clauses. 

utrum, whether j an, (anne), or 

utrumne, an, 



:et: 



an, 

an (anne), 

ne (chiefly in indirect questions). 



2C0 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

U t r u m nescis quam alte ascenderis, a n id pro nihilo habes ? Cic. 

Are you not aware how high you have mounted, or do you count that as 
nothing? 

Vosne Lucium Domitium a n vos Lucius Domitius deseruit ? 
Caes. Have you deserted Lucius Domitius, or has Lucius Domitius deserted 
you f 

Eloquar an sileam ? Verg. Shall I speak, or hold my peace ? 

Utrum hoc tu parum meministi, a n ego non satis intellexi, a n 
mutasti sententiam ? Cic. Do you not remember this, or did I misunder- 
stand you, or ham you changed your view ? 

Sunt haec tua verba necne ? Cic. Are these your words, or no f 

Remark.— Aut (or), in questions, is not to be confounded with an. Aut gives another 
part of the same question, or another form of it (or in other words). 

Voluptas melioremne efficit aut laudabiliorem virum? Cic. Does pleasure make 
a better or more praiseworthy man ? (Answer : neither.) 

Tibi ego an tu mini servus es % Plaut. Am I slave to you or you to me— which ? 
(The MS. reading aut would expect the answer: neither). 

461. In direct questions, or not is annon, rarely necne; in 
indirect, necne, rarely annon: 

I s n e est quern quaero, a n n 5 n ? Is that the man lam looking for, or 
not? 

Sitque memor n5stri necne, referte mihi. Ov. (195, R. 7.) 

Remark. — Utrum is sometimes used with the suppression of the second clause for 
whether or no? 

INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 

462. Indirect questions have the same particles as the 
direct, with the following modifications : 

1. Num loses its negative force, and becomes simply whether : 

Specularl jussi sunt num sollicitati animi sociorum essent. Lrv. 

They icere ordered to spy out whether the allies had been tampered with. 

2. Si, if, is used for whether, chiefly after verbs and sentences, 
implying trial : 

Tentata res est si primo impetu cap! Ardea posset. Lrv. An attempt j 
was made (in case, in hopes that, to see), if Ardea could be taken by a dash 
(coup-de-main). Compare O si (254). 

3. An is sometimes used for num and ne, but never in model j 
prose : 



INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 231 

Consuluit deinde Alexander a n totius orbis imperium sibi destina- 
3t pater, Curt. Alexander then asked the wacle whether his father des- 
ned for him the empire of the whole world, 

4. The form ne is found chiefly in the indirect ques- 

^on : 

Tarquinius Prisci Tarquinii regis filius neposne fuerit parum liquet. 

it. Whether Tarquin was the son or grandson of king Tarquin the Elder, 
oes not appear. 

Remark.— The form ne— ne is poetical. 

SUMMARY OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVE 
QUESTIONS. 

463. Direct: 

Is the last syllable short or long f 

Postrema syllaba utrum brevis est a n longa ? 
brevis n e est a n longa ? 

Indirect : 

In a verse it makes no difference whether the last syllable be short or long : 
utrum postrema syllaba brevis sit an 

longa. 
postrema syllaba brevis n e sit an longa. 
postrema syllaba brevis a n longa sit. CiC. 
postrema syllaba brevis sit longa n e. 



In versu nihil refert ■< 



Moods in Interrogative Sentences. 
I. IN DIRECT QUESTIONS. 

464. The Mood of the question is the Mood of the expected 
r anticipated answer. 

465. Indicative questions expect an Indicative answer, when 
he question is genuine. 

A. Quis homo est ? B. Ego sum. Ter. Who is that? It is I. 
A. Vivitne [pater ?] B. Vlvum Hquimus. Plaut. Is father alive ? We 
ft him alive. 

466. Indicative questions anticipate an Indicative answer 
vith the negative when the question is rhetorical. 



233 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

Quis paupertatem n5n extimescit ? Cic. Wlio does not dread poverty ? 

Remark.— Nonne and num in the direct question are really rhetorical. With nonne 
a negative answer is anticipated to a negative, hence the affirmative character. Compare 
further, 452, R. 2. 

467. Subjunctive questions expect Imperative or anticipate 
Potential answers. Subjunctive questions expect Imperative 
answers, chiefly in the First Person. 

A. Abeam? B. Abi. Plaut. Shall I go away ? Go. 

Remark.— So in the representative of the First Person in dependent discourse. (258.) 

468. The Subjunctive is used in rhetorical questions, which 
imply a negative opinion on the part of the speaker: 

Quis hoc credat? Who would believe this? [No one.] Quid faceret 
aliud ? What else was he to do f [Nothing.] 

Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione querentes ? Juv. (251.) 

Remark.— On the Exclamatory Question see 534, 560. 



II. IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 

469. The Dependent Interrogative is always in the Subjunc- 
tive. 

The Subjunctive may represent the Indicative : 

Consider abimus quid fecerit (Ind. fecit), quid faciat (Ind. facit), quid 
facturus sit (Ind. faciet or facturus est). Cic. We will consider what 7u 
has done, what he is doing, what he is going to do {will do). 

Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus. Cic. Ejpaminonda, 
asked whether his shield was safe. (Salvusne est ?) 

The Subjunctive may be original : 

Ipse docet quid agam (210) ; fas est et ab hoste doceri. Ov. (Quii 
agam, what I am to do ; not, what I am doing). See 258. 

Remarks.— 1. When the leading verh is disconnected from the interrogative, the Id' 
dicative form is employed : 

So often with die, say, vide, see, quaere, ask. Die, quid est % Tell me, what is it 
(Die quid sit, Tell me what it is.) 

Quin tti iino verbo die : quid est quod me veils ? Ter. Won't you tell me in o? 
word : What is it yov, want of me ? 

Die mini quid feci nisi non sapienter amavi. Ov. Tell me what have I done, sa\ 
that I have loved unwisely. 

The early poets yo even further than this. 

2. Ne"scio quis, nescio quid, nescio qui, nescio quod, I know not who, what, whic. 
are used exactly as indefinite pronouns, and have no effect on the construction. 



i-eli. 



IOTEKKOGATIVE SENTENCES. 233 

So also, nescio quomodo, I know not how — strangely ; and mirum quantum, it (is) 
marvellous how much = uvnde? fully, are used as adverbs : 

Mirum quantum profuit ad concordiam. Liv. It served wonderfully to promote 
harmony. 

Nescio quid majus nascitur Iliade. Prop. Something, Iknow not tvhat, is rising 
greater than the Iliad. 

Nescio quo pacto vel magis homines juvat gloria lata quam magna. Pun. Ep. 
Somehow or other ; people are even mare charmed to have a wide-spread reputation than a 
jrand one, 

The position excludes a conscious ellipsis of the Subjunctive. 

3. The Relative has the same form as the Interrogative quis ? except in the Nom. Sing. ; 
hence the importance of distinguishing between them in dependent sentences. The in- 
terrogative depends on the leading verb, the relative belongs to the antecedent. (612, 
R. 2.) 

Interrogative ; die quid rogem, Tell me what it is lam asking. 
Belative : die quod rogo. Ter. Tell me that which I am asking (the answer to 

my question). 

The relative is not unfreqneiitly used where we should expect the interrogative, espe- 
cially when the facts of the case are to be emphasized : 

Dicam quod sentio, I will tell you my real opinion. 

Incorporated relatives are not to be confounded with interrogatives : 
- Quaeramus ubi ( =ibi ubi) maleficium invenlrl potest. Cic. Let us look for the 
misdeed in the place where it can be found. 



PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

470. The subject of the dependent clause is often treated 
as the object of the leading clause (Prolepsis) : 

ai'ii 

Nosti Marcellum quam tardus sit. Cic. You Tcnoio Marcellus, what a 

slow creature he is. 

471. Contrary to our idiom, the interrogative is often used 
in participial clauses. In English, the participle and verb 
change places, and a causal sentence becomes consecutive : 

Quam utilitatem petentes scire cupimus ilia quae occulta nobis sunt ? 
Cic. What advantage do we seek ichen we desire to know those things which 
I are hidden from usf 

Solon Pisistrato tyranno quaerenti qua tandem spe fret us sibi 
tarn audaciter resisteret respondisso dicitur, senectute. Sen. Solon, 
to Pisistratus the usurper, asking him (= when Pisistratus the usurper 
asked him) on what earthly hope relying (— on what hope he relied that) 
he resisted him so boldly, is said to have answered " old age." 

472. Final sentences (sentences of Design) are used in ques- 
tions more freel} 7 than in English : 



234 SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 

Sessum it praetor. Quid ut judicetur ? Cic. The judge is going to take 
his seat What is to be adjudged? (To adjudge what?) 

Remark.— The Latin language goes further than the English in combining interroga- 
tive words in the same clause. 



YES AND NO. 
473. Yes is represented : 

1. By sane, (literally) soundly, sane quidem, yes indeed, etiam, even (so), 
vero, of a truth, ita, so, omnino, by all means, certe, surely, cextb^for cer- 
tain, admodum, to a degree. 

2. By immo or imo, which conveys a correction, and either removes a 
doubt or heightens a previous statement — yes indeed, nay rather. 

Ecquid placeant aedes me rogas ? Immo. Plaut. Do 1 like the house, 
you ask me ? Yes, indeed. 

Causa igitur non bona est ? Immo optima. Cic. The cause, then, is a 
bad one ? Nay, it is an excellent one. 

3. By cense o, I think so. 

4. By repeating the emphatic word either with or without confirmatory 
particles : 

Estisne ? Sumus. Are you ? We are. 

Dasne ? D5 sane. Do you grant ? I do indeed. 

N~o is represented : 

1. By non, non vero, non ita, minime, by no m,eans, nihil, nothing, 
minimi vero, nihil sane, nihil minus. 

2. By repeating the emphatic word with the negative : 

N5n irata es ? Non sum irata, You are not angry ? I am not. 
Remark. — Yes, for, and no, for, are often expressed simply by nam and enim: 
Turn Antonius : Heri enim, inquit, hoc mini proposueram. Cic. Then quoth 
Antony : Yes, for I had proposed this to myself yesterday. 



k 



« 



Sicl 

1 

it 
J 

4 



SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 

474. 1. A compound sentence is one in which the necessary 
parts of the sentence occur more than once, one which consists 
of two or more clauses. 

2. Coordination is that arrangement of the sentence accord-* 
ing to which the different clauses are merely placed side by 
side. 

3. Subordination is that arrangement of the sentence accord- 
ing to which one clause depends on the other. 



Si 



SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 235 

He "became poor and we became rich, is a coordinate sentence. 

He became poor that we might be rich, is a subordinate sen- 
:ence. 

4. The sentence which is modified is called the Principal 
Clause, that which modifies is called the Subordinate Clause. 
'He became poor" is the Principal Clause, " that toe might be 
"ich" is the Subordinate Clause. 

Remark.— Logical dependence and grammatical dependence are not to be confounded, 
n the conditional sentence, yivam Si Vivet, let me live if she lives, my living depends 
>n her living ; yet " vivam " is the principal, " si Vivet " the subordinate clause. It 
s the dependence of the introductory particle that determines the grammatical relation. 

Coordination. 

475. Coordinate sentences are divided into various classes, 
According to the particles by which the separate clauses are 
tound together. 

j Remabk. — Co-ordinate sentences often dispense with conjunctions (Asyndeton), 
Then the connection must determine the character. 

Copulative Sentences. 

476. The following particles are called Copulative Conjunc 
ions: et, -que, atque (ac), etiam, quoque. 

477. Et is simply and, the most common and general par- 
icle of connection, and combines likes and unlikes : 

Panem et aquam natnra desiderat. Sen. Bread and water (is what) 
mture calls for. 

Probitas laudatur e t alget. Juv. Honesty is bepraised and— freezes. 

478. -Que (enclitic) unites things that belong closely to one 
mother. The second member serves to complete or extend the 
irst : 



!J 



^ 



Senatus populus que Romanus, The Senate and people of Borne. 
Ibi mortuus sepultusque Alexander. Liv. There Alexander died and 
oas buried. 



Combinations : et — et ; 
-que — et; 

et — que (only for two words) ; 
-que — que, chiefly in poetry (also Lrv. and Sall.) 
jH| j Et domino satis et nimium furique lupoque. Tib. Enough for owner, and too 
inch for thief and wolf 



236 SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 

479. Atque (compounded of ad and -que) adds a more impor- 
1 an t to a less important member. But the second member often 
owes its importance to the necessity of having the complement 
(-que). Ac (a shorter form, which does not stand before a 
vowel) is fainter than atque, and almost equivalent to et: 



Intra moenia atque in sinu urbis sunt hostes. Sall. Within the 1 
ay, and in the heart of the city, are the enemies. 

A. Ego servos? (29.) B. Atque meus. Plaut. I— a slaw? And 
mine to hoot. 

Atque or ac is often used to connect the parts of a clause in 
which et has been already employed : 

Et potentes sequitur invidia et humiles abjectosque contemptus et 
turpes ac nocentes odium. Quint. The poicerful are followed by envy ; the 
low and grovelling, by contempt ; the base and hurtful, by hatred. 

Remarks. — 1. Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness may take atque or I 
ac See 645. 

2. On the Latin proneness to subordination by means of the participle, see 409, R. 2, 
and 667, R. 1. 

480. Etiam, even {noiv), yet, still, exaggerates (heightens) and 
generally precedes the word to which it belongs : 

Nobis res familiaris etiam ad necessaria deest, We lack means even 
for necessaries of life. 

Ad Appil Claudii senectutem accedebat etiam ut caecus esset 
Cic. (558.) 

Of time: 

Non satis pernosti me etiam qualis sim. Ter. You still do not know 
well enough (— little know) what manner of person lam. 

Remark.— Et is sometimes used for etiam, but sparingly. So et ipse, and kindred 
expressions. 

481. Quoque, so also, complements (compare -que) and alway 
follows the words to which it belongs: 

Quum patri Timothei populus statuam posuisset, filio quoque 
dedit. Nep. The people, having erected a statue in honor of the father of 
Timotheus, gave one to the son also {likewise). 

Rem auk.— The difference between etiam and quoque is not to be insisted on to< 
rigidly : 

Grande et conspicuum nostro quoque tempore monstrum. Juv. A huge an, 
conspicuous prodigy, evtn in our day. 



SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 237 

482. Copulation by means of the Negative. — Instead of et 
and the negative, neque (nee) and the positive is the rule in 
Latin: 

Opini5ne vulgi rapimur in errSrem nee vera cernimus. Cic. By 

the prejudice of the rabble we are hurried into error, and do not distinguish 
the truth. 

Caesar substitit neque hostem lacessivit. Caes. Caesar halted and did 
not Jiarass the enemy {without harassing the enemy). 

Remarks.— 1. Et— non, and .... not, is used when the negation is confined to a 
6ingle word, or is otherwise emphatic : 

Et militavi non sine gloria. Hon. And I have been a soldier not without glory. 
On nec non, the opposite of et non, see 448, R. 3. 

2. Combinations: Neque —neque ; nee — nec, neque — nec. 
neque —-que. (nec — neque.) 
et —neque. 

3. Paradigms : And no one, neque quisquam, nor any one. 
And no— neque ullus, nor any. 
And nothing, neque quidquam, nor any thing. 
And never, neque unquam, nor ever. 

Neque amet quemquam nec ametur ab ullo, Juv. May he love no one, 

and be loved by none. 

4. Nec is often nearly equivalent to nec tamen, and yet not : 
Extra invidiam nec extra gloriam erat, Tac. He was beyond the reach of envy. 

and yet not beyond the reach of glory. 

483. 1. Insertion and Omission of Copulatives. — When mul- 
tus, much, many, is followed by another attribute, the two are 
often combined by copulative particles : many renowned deeds, 
multa e t praeclara facinora ; many good qualities, mnltae bonae- 
que artes. 

2. Several subjects or objects, standing in the same relations, 
^1 either take et throughout or omit it throughout. The omission 
of it is common in emphatic enumeration : 



Phryges et Pisidae et Cilices j or, Phryges, Pisidae, Cilices, Phry- 
gians, Pisidians, and Cilicians. 



;/ 3. Etis further omitted in climaxes, in antitheses, in phrases, 
and in formulae : 

Viri non est debilitari dolore, frangl, succumbere. Cic. It is unmanly 
to allow oneself to be disabled (unnerved) by grief, to be broken-spirited, to suc- 
cumb. 



238 OTHER PARTICLES EMPLOYED. 

Difficilis facilis, jucundus acerbus, es idem. Mart. (296.) 

Patres Conscript!, Fathers (and) Conscript (Senators). 

Jupiter Optimus Maximus, Father Jove, supremely good (and) great. 

OTHER PARTICLES EMPLOYED. 

,484. Other particles are sometimes employed instead of the 
copulative in the same general sense. 

1. Temporal : Turn — turn, then — then ; nunc — nunc, modo — modo, 
now — noiD ; simul — simul, at the same time. Turn Graece — turn 
Latine, partly in Greek, partly in Latin. 

Horatius Codes nunc singulos provocabat, nunc increpabat om- 
nes. Lit. Horatius Codes now challenged them singly, now taunted them 
all. 

Modo hue, modo illuc, now hither, now thither {hither and thither). 

Simul spernebant, simul metuebant, they despised and feared at the same 
time (they at once despised and feared). 

On Quum — turn, see 589. 

2. Comparative : ut — ita, as — so : 

Dolabellam ut Tarsenses ita Laodiceni ultro arcessierunt, As the 
people of Tarsus so the people of Laodicea (= Both the people of Tarsus 
and those of Laodicea) sent for Dolabella of their own accord. 

Often, however, there is an adversative idea : 

Haec omnia u t invitis ita non adversantibua patriciis transacta. 
Lrv. All this was done, the patricians, though unwilling, yet not opposing 
(= against the wishes, but without any opposition on the part of the patri- 
cians). 

3. Adversative : Non modo, non solum, non tantum, not only ; sed 
etiam, verum etiam, but even, but also (sometimes simply sed) 

Urbes maritimae non solum multis periculis oppositae sunt sec 
etiam caecis. Cic. Cities on the seaboard are liable not only to mani\ 
dangers, but even (also) to hidden (ones). 

Non doceri tantum sed etiam delectarl volunt. Quint. They icisJm ., 
not merely to be taught but to be tickled to boot. I ^ 

In the negative form, non modo non, not only not; sed ne . . . quidem|| 
but not even ; sed vlx, but hardly. 

Ego n o n modo tibi non irascor sed ne reprehendo quidenj; 
factum tuum. Cic. I not only am not angry with you, but I do not even fin 
fault with your action. 

Remarks.— 1. Instead of non modo (solum) non— sed ne— quidem, the latter nolj 
is generally omitted, when the two negative clauses have a verb in common, the negativ, 
of the first clause being supplied by the second : 



ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES. 239 

Pisone consule senatui non solum juvare rempublicam sed ne lugere quidem 
licebat. Cic. Wlien Piso was consul, it was not only not left free for the senate (= the senate 
was not only not free) to help the commonwealth, but not even to mourn (for her). 

2. Nedum, not (to speak of) yet, much less, is also used, either with or without a verb 
in the subjunctive : 

Satrapa nunquani sufferre ejus sumptus queat, nedum tu possls. Tek. A 
nabob could never stand that girPs expenditures, much less could you. 

Nedum from Livy on is used after affirmative clauses as well. 



ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES. 

485. The adversative particles are: autem, sed, verum, vero, 
at, atqui, tamen, ceterum. Of these only sed and tamen are really 
adversative. 

486. Autem (postpositive) is the weakest form of but, and in- 
dicates a difference from the foregoing, a contrast rather than a 
contradiction. It serves as a particle of transition and explana- 
tion ( — moreover, furthermore, now), and of resumption (= to 
come bach), and is often used in syllogisms : 

Rumoribus mecum pugnas, ego autem a te rati5nes require Cic. 

You fight me with rumors, whereas I ask of you reasons. 

Quod est bonum, omne laudabile est ; quod autem laudabile est, omne 
est honestum ; bonum igitur quod est, honestum est. Cic. Everything 
\hat is good is praiseworthy ; hut everything that is praiseworthy is virtuous ; 
"therefore, what is good is virtuous. 

Remark. — Autem commonly follows the first word in the sentence or clause ; but 
vhen an unemphatic est or sunt occupies the second place, it is put in the third. So 
.gitur and enim. 

487. Sed (set) is used partly in a stronger sense, to denote 
contradiction, partly in a weaker sense, to introduce a new 
thought, or to revive an old one : 

^'f Non est vivere sed valere vita. Mart. (443.) 

Domitius nulla iile quidem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat. Cic. Domi- 

l el ! ius spoke with no art it is true, but for all that, in good Latin. 



ieJ 488. Verum, it is true, true, always takes the first place in a 
entence, and is practically equivalent to sed in its stronger sense : 

SI certum est fac ere, facias ; verum ne post conferas culpam in 
a ; ne. Ter. If you are determined to do it, you may do it ; but you must not 
fterward lay the blame on me. 



2-iO ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES. 

489. Vero ? of a truth, is generally put in the second place, 
asserts with conviction, and is used to heighten the statement: 

Plat5nem Dion adeo admiratus est ut se totum el traderet. Neque 
vero minus Plato delectatus est Dione. Nep. Dion admired Plato to 
such a degree that lie gave himself wholly up to him ; and indeed Plato was no 
less delighted with Dion. 

490. At (another form of ad = in addition to) introduces 
startling transitions, lively objections, remonstrances, questions 
wishes, often by way of quotation : 

Si gravis dolor, brevis. At Philocteta jam decimum annum in spe 
lunca jacet. Cic. If pain is sharp, it is short. But Philoctetes has been ly 
ing in his cave going on ten years. 

"At multis malls affectus ?" Quis negat? Cic. " But he has suffere 
much ?" Who denies it f 

Si scelestus est at mi infidelis n5n est. Ter. If he is a scamp, y> 
(at least) he is not unfaithful to me. 

At videte hominis intolerabilem audaciam! Cic. Well, but see thefe 
loic y s insufferable audacity ! 

A t vobis male sit ! Cat. And ill luck to you ! 

Remakk.— Ast = at + set (sed) is antiquated and poetic. 



k 

n 



m 



491. AtquI (But hoiv ? = But what of that ?) is still strong 
than at, and is used chiefly in argument : 

Atqui perspicuum est hominem e corpore animoque constare. CW^ 

But it is clear that man consists of body and soul ; igitur, therefore, 

492. Tamen (literally, even thus), nevertheless, is often coi 
bined with at, verum, sed. 

It is commonly prepositive, unless a particular word is to 
made emphatic : 

Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret. Hor. You may dr it 

out Dame Nature with a pitchfork, for all that she will ever be returning. 
Domitius nulla quidem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat (487). 

493. Ceterum, for the rest, is used by the historians as 
adversative particle. 

Remark.— In lively discourse, the adversative particles are often omitted. 



DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES. 
494. The disjunctive particles are aut, vel, -ve, slve (seu). 



Hi 



DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES. 241 

495. Aut, or, denotes absolute exclusion or substitution : 
Vinceris aut vincis. Prop. Ton are conquered or conquering. 

Aut is often = or at least (aut saltern) : 
i 

Cuncti aut magna pars fidem mutavissent. Sall. All, or at least a 
great part, would have changed their allegiance. 

Duo aut summum tres juvenes. Lit. Two, or at most three, youths. 

Aut — aut, either — or: 

Quaedam terrae partes aut frigore rigent aut uruntur calore. Cic. 

.Some parts of the earth are either frozen with cold or burnt with heat. 
j Aut die aut accipe calcem. Juv. Either speak or take a kick. 

496. Vel (literally, you may choose) gives a choice, often with 
etiam, even, potius, rather : 

i Ego vel Cluvienus. Juv. I, or, if you choose, Gluvienus. 

Per me vel stertas licet, non modo quiescas. Cic. For all I care, you 
<H)nay {even) snore, if you choose, not merely sleep. 

Satis vel etiam nimium multa. Cic. Enough, or even too much. 
Epicurus homo minime malus vel potius vir optimus, Epicurus 
[was) a person by no means bad, or, rather, a man of excellent character. 

Vel — vel, either — or (whether — or) : 

Miltiades dixit ponte rescisso regem vel hostium ferr5 vel inopia 
(jj paucis diebus interiturum. ]N"ep. Miltiades said that if the bridge were cut 
'he king would perish in a few days, whether by the sword of the enemy, or for 
want of provisions. 



/OP 



497. -Ve (enclitic) is a weaker form of vel (with numerals, 
ft most) : 

I Cur timeam dubitem v e locum defendere ? Juv. Why should I fear 
>r hesitate to maintain my position? 

Bis terve, twice or at most thrice (bis terque, twice and indeed as much as 
•hrice, if not more). 

i 498. Slve, (seu), if you choos ? gives a choice between tw > 
Resignations of the same object : 

Urbem matri seu novercae reliquit. Liv. He left the city to his mother, 
rr {if it seems more likely) to his step-mother. 

499. Slve — slve (seu — seu) whether — or (indifference) : 

11 



242 CAUSAL AND ILLATIVE SENTENCES. 

Sive tu medicnm adhibueris sive non adhibueris n5n convalesces. 
Cic. Whether you employ a physician, or do not employ (one), you will not get 
well. 

S e u visa est catulis cerva fidelibus seu rupit teretes Marsus aper 
plagas. Hor. Whether a doe hath appeared to the faithful hounds, or a Mar- 
tian boar hath burst the tightly -twisted toils. 



CAUSAL AND ILLATIVE SENTENCES. 

500. A. The causal particles are nam, enim, namque, and 
etenim, for. 

Sensus mirifice collocati sunt. Nam oculi tanquam speculatores al- 
tissimum locum obtinent. Cic. The senses are admirably situated. For 
eyes, like the watchmen, occupy the highest post. 

Themistocles mur5s Atheniensium restituit suo peiiculo. Namque 
Lacedaemonii prohibere conati sunt. Nep. Themistocles restored the wallsl 
of Athens with ?isk to himself For the Lacedaemonians endeavored to pre- 
vent it. 

Pisces dva relinquunt, facile enim ilia aqua sustinentur. Cic. Fish leav 
their eggs, for they are easily kept alive by the water. 



Remarks. — 1. Nam is always put at the beginning of a sentence ; enim is alway, 
postpositive (486, R.) : namque and etenim are commonly put in the first place : 

For what can you do? Nam quid agas % Quid enim agas ? Namque quic 
agas? Etenim quid agas 1 

2. These particles are originally asseverative, and are often used not only to furnish 
reason, but also to give an explanation or illustration (as for instance). Quid enim agas 
!Vhat,for instance, can you dof This is especially true of enim, but a broad differenc 
between nam and enim twhich is derived from nam) cannot be proved. Etenim i 
often used to carry on the argument, and gives an additional ground. Nempe (from nam 
namely, to wit, that is, of course, is often used ironically. 

Sed qualis rediit \ Nempe una nave. Juy. But in what style did he return ? Wit ^ 
one ship, forsooth. 

3. In atenim, sed enim, verumenim, enimvero, verumenimvero, as in etenin 
enim gives a ground or an illustration of the leading particle, but translation by an ellip: 
would be too heavy, and enim is best left untranslated: 

A. Audi quid dlcam. B. At enim taedet jam audire eadem millies. Ter. a 
Hear what I say. B. But {I won't, for) lam tilled of hearing the same things a thousan 
times already. 

501. B. Illative particles are itaque, igitur, ergo, ideo, idcirci 
proinde. 

502. Itaque (literally, and so), therefore, is put at the begir 
ning of the sentence by the best writers, and is used of fac\ 
that follow from the preceding statement: 

Nemo ausus est liber Phocionem sepelire. Itaqu e a servis sepult? 



i 

5i 

!5 



it 



SUBORDINATION. 243 

est. Kep. No free man dared to 'bury Phocion, and so he was buried by 
slaves. 

503. Igitur, therefore, is generally postpositive, and is used of 
opinions which, have their natural ground in the preceding 
statement : 

Mihi non satisfacit. Sed quot homines tot sententiae ; fall! igitur 
possumus. Cic. Me it does not satisfy. But many men many minds. 1 
may therefore be mistaken. 

Remark.— In historical writers, igitur is used both in position and signification as 
■itaque. When emphatic, igitur is found even in the best authors at the head of the 
sentence. 

i 

504. Ergo denotes necessary consequence, and is used espe- 
cially in arguments, with somewhat more emphasis than igitur. 

4ldeo, idcirco, means on that account ; proinde, accordingly, is 
employed in exhortations, appeals, and the like: 

Negat haec filiam me suam esse ; n5n ergo haec mater mea est. 
Plaut. She says that I am not her daughter, therefore she is not my mother. 

Quod praeceptum (nosce te ipsum) quia majus erat quam ut ab no- 
mine videretur idcirco adsignatum est deo. Cic. This precept (know thy- 
self), 'because it was too great to seem to be of man, was, on that account, attri- 
buted to a god. 

P r o i n d e aut exeant aut quiescant. Cic. Let them then either depart 
or be quiet. 



SUBORDINATION". 

505. Subordinate sentences are only extended forms of the 
simple sentence, and are divided into Adjective and Substantive 
sentences, according as they represent adjective and substantive 
relations. 

506. Adjective sentences express an attribute of the subject 
in an expanded form : 

Uxor quae bona est (625) = uxor bona. 

nfflla 

507. Substantive sentences are introduced by particles, 
ifhich correspond in their origin and use to the Oblique Cases, 
Accusative and Ablative. 



These two cases furnish the mass of adverbial relations, and hence we 
nake a subdivision for this class, and the organization of the subordinate 
Sentence appears as follows : 



24:4: MOODS IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 

508. A. Substantive sentences. 

I. Object sentences. 
II. Adverbial sentences : 

1. Of Cause. (Causal.) 

2. Of Design and Tendency. (Final and con- 

secutive. ) 

3. Of Time. (Temporal.) 

4. Of Condition and Concession. (Condi- 

tional and concessive.) 
B. Adjective sentences (Kelative) . 

Moods in Subordinate Sentences. 

509. 1. Final and Consecutive Clauses always take the Sub- 
junctive. Others vary according to their conception. Especially 
important are the changes produced by Oratio Obllqua. 

2. Oratio Obllqua, or Indirect Discourse, is opposed to Oratiq 
Recta, or Direct Discourse, and gives the main drift of a speech] 
and not the exact words. Oratio Obllqua, proper, depends on 
some Verb of Saying or Thinking expressed or implied, the 
Principal Clauses being put in the Infinitive, the Dependent ir 
the Subjunctive. 

Socrates dlcere solebat : 

6. R. Omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt eloquentes. 

O, R. Socrates used to say : u All men are eloquent enough in what the t 

UNDERSTAND." 

O. O. Omnes in e5 quod scirent satis esse eloquentes. 

6. O. Socrates used to say that all men were eloquent enough in what the 

UNDERSTOOD. 

3. The oblique relation may be confined to a depender 
clause and not extend to the whole sentence. This may I 
called Partial Obliquity : 

6. R. Nova nupta dicit : Fleo quod Ire necesse est. The bride says : 

weep because I must needs go. 
6. O. Nova nupta dicit se flere quod ire necesse sit. The bride sa 

that she weeps because she must needs go. 
6. R. Nova nupta flet quod Ire necesse est. Cat. 

The bride weeps because she must go. 
P. O. Nova nupta flet quod Ire necesse sit. 

The bride is weeping because " she must go " (quoth she). 



i 



Al 



SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 



245 



4. Akin to 0. 0. is the so-called Attraction of Mood by which 
clauses originally Indicative are put in the Subjunctive because 
they depend on Infinitives or Subjunctives. (666.) 

N5n dubito quin nova nupta fleat quod Ire necesse sit. I do not doubt 
that the bride is weeping because she must go. 

Remark. — The full discussion of O. O. must, of course, be reserved for a later period, 
See 650. 

Sequence of Tenses. 

510. In those dependent sentences which require the subjunc- 
tive, the choice of the tenses of the dependent clause is deter- 
mined by the form of the principal clause. Principal Tenses 
tlare followed by Principal ; Historical, by Historical. 



All forms that relate to 
., the Present and Future 
(Principal Tenses) 



• are followed by 



All forms that relate to the 
Past (Historical Tenses) 



the Present Subjunctive 
(for continued action) ; 

the Perfect Subjunctive 
(for completed action). 

the Imperfect Subjunctive 
(for continued action) ; 

the Pluperfect Subjunc- 
tive (for completed ac- 
tion). 

Remark. — The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in 
itself a continued action. So in English : I have been doing, I had been doing. Hence, 
| the Imperfect Indicative (I was doing) is represented in this dependent form by the Per- 
fect and Pluperfect, when the action is completed as to the leading verb. 



!l 



are followed by - 



511. Pres. 
Pure Pf., 



cognosco, 
cognovi, 



•:' 



Hi 



Future, cognoscam, 



Fut. Perf., cognovero, 



I am finding out, 
I have found out 

(I know), 
I shall (try to) 

find out, 
I shall have found 

out (shall know), 



Imperp., cognoscebam, I was finding out, 



Pluperf., cognoveram, 



i" had found 
(I knew), 



out 



quid facias, 

what you are doing ; 
quid feceris, 

what you have done y 
what you have been 
doing (what you did), 
what you were doing 
(before). 

quid faceres, 

what you were doing ; 
quid fecisses, 

what you had done, tchat 
you had been doing, 
what you were doing 
{before). 



246 SEQUENCE OF TENSES- 



Hist. Perf., Caesar cognovit, Caesar found out, 



quid facerent hostes, 

what the enemy was 

doing ; 
quid fecissent hostes, 
ichat the enemy had 
. done. 

Peincipal Tenses. 

Nihil refert postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit. Cic. (463.) 
Nemo adeo ferus est u t n o n mitescere p o s s it. Hon. (556.) 
Rusticus exspectat dum defluat amnis. Hon. (574.) 
Post mortem in morte nihil est quod metuam mall. Plaut. 

(634.) 

Ar d e a t ipsa licet, tormentis gaudet amantis. Juv. (609.) 

U t r u m nescis quam alte ascenderis a n id pro nihilo habes ? Cic. 

(460.) 

Laudat Panaetius Africanum quod fuerit abstinens. Cic. (542.) 
Non is es u t te pudor unquam a turpitudine revocarit. Cic. (556.) 
Quern mea Calliope laeserit unus ego. Ov. (633.) 
Sim licet extremum sicut sum missus in orbem. Ov. (609.) 
Multl fuerunt qui tranquillitatem expetentes a negotiis publicis se 

removerint. Cic. (634.) 

Nee mea qui digitis lumina c o n d a t erit. Ov. (634.) 

Historical Tenses. 

Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus. Cic. (469.) 
Noctu ambulabat in foro Themistocles quod somnum capere non 
posset. Cic. (541.) 

Ad Appii Claudil senectutem accedebat etiam u t caecus esset. 

(558.) 

Tanta opibus Etruria e r a t ut jam non terras solum sed mare etiam 
fama nominis sui implesset. Liv. So great in means ( = so powerful) 
was Etruria that she had already filled not only the land but even the sea with 
the reputation of her name. 

Quum primi ordines hostium concidissent, tamen acerrime re- 
liqui resistebant. Caes. (587.) 

Accidit ut una nocte omnes Hermae dejicerentur. ]STep. (513, E. 2.) 

Agesilaus quum ex Aegypto reverteretur decessit/ JSTep. (586.) 

Deleta est Ausonum gens perinde ac s I internecivd bello c e r t a s- 
set. Ltv. (603.) 

Hannibal omnia priusquam excederet pugna erat expertus. 
Liv. (579.) 

Remarks.— 1. The Historical Present is treated according to its Tense, or according to 
its Sense. Final sentences more commonly follow the Sense. 



SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 247 

Caesar cognoscit quid host es fl faciant, fecerint, is doing, has done, 

etc. 
Caesar finds out (found out) what the enemy 1 2. facerent, fecissent, was doing, had 

[ done, etc. 

Tense : Ubii Caesarem orant ut sibi parcant. Caes. The ZJbii beg Caesar to spare 
them. 

Sense: Athenienses creant decern, praetores qui exercitui praeessent. Nep. 
The Athenians make ten generals to command their army. 

Sense and Tense : Agunt gratias quod sibi pepercissent ; quod arma cum ho- 
minibus consanguinels contulerint queruntur. Caes. They return thanks to them 
for having spared them, and complain that they had crossed swords with kinsmen. 

So of authors : 

Chrysippus disputat aethera esse eum quern homines Jovem appellarent. Cic. 
Chrysippi/s maintains that to be aether which men call Jove. 

2. The Pure Perfect is often treated as an Historical Perfect in the matter of sequence : 

Hodie expertus sum quam caduca felicitas esset- Curt. This day have I found 
tut how perishable happiness is. 

512. Sequence of Tenses in Sentences of Design. — Sentences 
of Design have, as a rule, only the Present and Imperfect Sub- 
junctive. The Eoman keeps the purpose and the process, rather 
bhan the attainment, in view. 

• t Present, edunt, they are eating, 
Pure Perf., ederunt, they haw eaten, 
Future, edent, they will eat, 
Fut. Perf., ederint, they will ham eaten, 
Imperfect, edebant, they were eating, t ut viverent 

Pluperfect, ederant, they had eaten, J ^ ^ migM fe ^ ^ 

Hist Per ederunt, they ate, v 

Principal Tenses. 

Atque ut vivamus vJvere desinimus. Mart. (424.) 
Et precor ut possim tutius esse miser. Ov. (424.) 
Galllnae pennis fovent pullos n e frigore laedantur. CiC. (545.) 
i Legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperltis teneatur. 

Sen. (545.) 

Me praemisit domum haec ut nuntiem ux5ri suae. Plaut. He has 

ient me home ahead of him, to take the neics to his wife. 

Oculos efifodiam tibi ne observare possis. Plaut. I will gouge out your 
fyes for you, to make it impossible for you to watch me. 



ut vivant, 

that tJiey may live (to live). 



1 



•Historical Tenses. 

Laelius veniebat ad cenam ut satiaret desideria naturae. CiC. Lae* 

'us used to go to table, to satisfy the craving* of nature. 
l'4\ Phaethon ut in currum patris toll ere tur optavit. Cic. (546.) 



248 SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 

Remark.— The Perf. and Pluperf. Subj. aro sometimes found in sentences of Design, 
Chiefly in earlier and later Latin, when stress is laid on completion, or when an element 
of Hope or Fear conies in : Ut sic dixerim, if I may be allowed to use the expression. 

Id agendum est ut satis vixerimus. Sen. We must aim at having lived enough. 

Affirmare audeo me omni ope adnisurum ne frustra vos hanc spem de me con- 
cgperitis. Liv. I dare assure you that I will strain every ne?-ve to keep you from having 
conceived this hope of me in vain. (After a past tense, ne concepissetis.) 

513. Exceptional Sequence of Tenses: — Sentences of Result 
(Consecutive Sentences). In Sentences of Kesult, the Present 
Subjunctive is used after Past Tenses to denote the coi tinuance 
into the Present, the Perfect Subjunctive to imply final result. 
This Perfect Subjunctive may represent either the Pure Perfect 
or the Aorist, the latter especially with the negative : the action 
happened once for all or not at all. 

Present Tense : 

Siciliam Verres per triennium ita vexavit ut ea restitui in antiquum 
statum nulla mo do p o s s i t. Cic. Verres so harried Sicily for three years 
as to make it utterly impossible for it to be restored to its original condition. 

Perfect Tense (Pure) : 

Murena Asiam sic obiit ut in ea neque avaritiae neque luxuriae ves- 
tigium reliquerit. Cic. Murena so administered Asia as not to ham 
(that he has not) left in it a trace either of greed or debauchery. (There is no 
trace there). 

Perfect Tense (Aorist) : 

E quite s hostium acriter cum equitatu nostro conflixerunt tamen 
ut n5stri eos in silvas collesque compulerint. Caes. The cavalry of 
the enemy engaged the cavalry on our side briskly, and yet (the upshot was 
that) our men forced them into the woods and hills. 

Neque ver5 tarn remisso ac languido anim5 quisquam cmnium f u i 1 
qui ea nocte conquieverit. Caes. And indeed there was no one at al 
of so slack and indifferent a temper as to take {a wink of) sleep thai night. 

Remarks. — 1. Authors vary much in the use of this Perfect. Cicero uses it very rarely | 
some abuse it. 

2. After accidit, contigit, and other Verbs of Happening, the Imperfect is alway 
used, the result being already emphasized in the Indicative form. 

Accidit ut una nocte omnes Hermae dejicerentur. Nep. It happened that in on 
night all tJie Hermae were thrown down. 



I 



Representation op the Subjunctive in the Future and Future Perpec 

Tenses. 

514. The Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect, whicl 



h 



SUBJUNCTIVE IN FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. 



249 



are represented either by the other Subjunctives, or in the 
Active by the Subjunctive of the Periphrastic Conjugation. 

Eule I. — After a Future or Future Perfect Tense, the Future 
relation is represented by the Present Subjunctive, the Future 
Perfect by the Perfect Subjunctive, according to the rule. 

Cognoscam, *j quid facias, what you are doing (will 

'[shall (try to) find out, be doing). 



Cognovero, 

,T sJiall have found out (shall know), 



quid feceris, what 
(will have done). 



you ham done 



But whenever the dependent future is subsequent to the leading future, 
i:he Periphrastic Tense must be employed. 
Cognoscam, 



I shall (try to) find out, 
Cognovero, 
C Z shall have found out (shall know), 



quid facturus sis, 
- what you are going to do (what you 
will do). 



[Considerabimus], [we shall consider], 

A. Quid fecerit aut quid ipsi acciderit aut quid dlxerit, 

What he has done, or what has happened to him, or what he has said. 

B. Aut quid f a c i a t, quid ipsi a c c i d a t, quid dicat, Or, what he is 
doing, what is happening to him, ichat he is saying. 

C. Aut quid facturus sit, quid ipsi casurum sit, qua sit 
a sur us oratione. Cic. Or what he is going to do (will do), what is going 
l o (will) happen to him, what plea he is going to employ (will employ). 

Tu quid sis acturus si ad me scripseris pergi atum erit. 
iJic. It will be a great favor if you will write to me what you are going to do. 

Remark. — In soine of these forms, ambiguity is unavoidable. So A may represent a 
jiijal perfect, B a real present. 

515. Eule II. — After the other tenses, the future relation 
Is expressed by the Active Periphrastic Subjunctive, Present or 
Imperfect. 

Cognosco, 
I am finding out, 
Cognovi, 
have found out (know), [ 
Cognoscebam, 
Twas trying to find out, 

Cogn5veram, 
I had found out, 

Incertum est quam longa cujusque nostrum vita futura sit. CiC. 
It is uncertain how long the life of each one of us is going to be (will be). 

11* 



quid facturus sis, 
what you will do. 



{what you are going to do), 



quid facturus esses, {what you were going to do), 
ichat you would do. 



250 SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 

Antea dubitabam venturaene essent legiones. CiC. Be* 

fore, J was doubtful whether the legions icould come (or no). 

Nunc mihi non est dubium quin venturae n5n s i n t. CiC. 

Now I have no doubt that they will not come. 

Remarks.—.!. The Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive of the Periphrastic are used 
only to represent the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional Sentence. 

u 

Cognosce Cognovi, quid factiirus fueris. (what you have been 

I am finding out, I have found out (know), what you would have done. going to do), 

Cognoscebam, Cognoveram, [quid factiirus fuisses, (what you had been 

I was trying to find out, I had found out, what you would have done, going to do), 

rare]. 

2. There is no Periphrastic for the Future Perfect Active, no Periphrastic for Passive 
and Supineless Verbs. The Grammars make up a periphrastic for all these from futurum 
sit, esset ut, as : 

i ut redierit, I do not doubt that he will have returned. 
Non dubito quin futurum sit -J ut maereat, that he will grieve. 

' ut necetur, that he will be tilled. 
For the dependent Fut. Perf. Pass. Cicero says (Att. ix. 7, 2) : 

Non dubito quin confecta jam res futura sit, I do not doubt but the matter will 
have been settled by this time. 

In the absence of the Periphrastic forms, use the proper tenses of posse. (240, R. 3.) 

3. When the preceding verb has a future character (Fear, Hope, Power, Will, and the 
like), the simple subjunctive is sufficient : 

Galli nisi perfregerint munitiones de omni salute desperant ; RomanI si 
rem obtinuerint flnem omnium laborum exspectant. Caes. The Gauls despair of 
all safety unless they break through (shall have broken through) the fortifications ; the Ro- 
mans look forward to an end of all their toils, if they hold their own (shall have held). 

Venerunt querentes spem nullam esse resistendl nisi praesidium Romanus 
misisset- Liv. They came with the complaint that there was no hope of resistance unless 
the Roman sent a force to protect them. 

Of course the Deliberative Subjunctive is future: Examples, 258. 

516. Sequence of Tenses in Oratio Obllqua: In Oratio 
Obllqua and kindred constructions, the attraction of tenses applies 
also to the representatives of the Future and Future Perfect 
Subjunctive. 

In [scytala] erat scriptum nisi domum rever,teretur se capitis 

eum damnaturos, It was written in the scytale that if he did not return home, 
they would condemn him to death. Nep. (Oratio Recta : Nisi domum re 
verteris te capitis damnabimus, unless you (shall) return home, we will con- 
demn you to death.) 

Pythia praecepit ut Miltiadem sibi imperatorem sumerent ; id si fe- 
cissent incepta prospera futura. Nep. The Pythia instructed them to take 
Milt lades for their general ; that if they did that, their undertakings icould be 
successful. (Oratio Recta : si id feceritis, incepta prospera erunt. 

Laced aemoniij Philippe minitante per litteras se omnia quae c5na- 



•h 

5 

n 



SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 251 

entur (6. R., c5nabimini) prohibiturum, quaesiverunt num s e esset 
rfiam mori prohibitum s. (6. R., prohibebis). Cic. The Lacedaemo- 
itans, when Philip threatened them by letter, that he would prevent everything 
hey undertook {should undertake), asked whether -he was going to (would) pre- 
ent them from dying too. 

517. Sequence of Tenses after the other Moods. — The Imper- 
ative and the Present and Perfect Subjunctive haye the Se- 
uences of the Principal Tenses; the Imperfect and Pluperfect 
lave the Sequences of the Historical Tenses. 

[Ne] comp5ne comas quia sis venturus ad illam. Ov. Do not 
rrange (your) locks because (forsooth) you are going to see her. 

Excellentibus ingeniis citius defuerit ars qua civem regant quam 
ua hostem suparent. Liv. Great geniuses would be more likely to lack the 
kill to control the citizen than the skill to overcome the enemy. 
I Quid me prohiberet Epicureum esse, si probarem quae ille diceret ? 
3ic. What would prevent me from being an Epicurean if I approved what 
f£ said (says) ? 

Turn ego te primus hortarer diu pensitares quern potissimum eligeres. 
'lin. Ep. In that case I should be the first to exhort you to weigh long whom 
ou should choose above all others. 

j Quae vita Priam5 fuisset, si ab adolescentia s c i s s e t quos eventus 
snectutis esset habiturus? Ctc. What sort of life would Priam 
hve led if lie had known, from early manhood, what were to be the closing 
'.enes of his old age f 

Remarks.—!. Of course when the Perf. Subj. represents the Historical Perf. it takes 
Qie historical Sequence : 
Magna culpa Pelopis qui non docuerit filium quatenus esset quidque curan- 

im. Cic, Greatly to blame is Pelops for not having taught his son how far each thing 
Jw$ to be cared for. 

So also in the conditional proposition, when the, action is past. For varying conception, 
1 Cic. Off. iii. 24. 

2. The Imperfect Subjunctive, being used in opposition to the Present, might be 
jeated as a Principal Tense, but the construction is less usual : 

Vererer ne immodicam orationem putares nisi esset generis ejus ut saepe in* 
spere saepe desinere videatur. Plin. Ep. I should be afraid of your thinking the 
fech of immoderate length, if it were not of such kind as to produce the effect of often be- 
nning often ending. 



\ 518. Sequence of Tenses after an Infinitive or Participle.— 
Vhen a subordinate clause depends on an Infinitive or Partici- 
le. Gerund or Supine, the tense of that clause follows the 
[jenses of the Finite verb. 



252 



SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 



Cupio scire, 
I am desirous of knowing, 



Cupiebam scire, 

I teas desirous of knowing, 



Mihi interroganti, 
- when I ask him, 
(literally : to me asking), 



what you are doing. 

what you have done. 

what you are going to do 
(will do). 

what you were doing. 

what you had done. 
quid acturus esses, what you were going to do 

(would do). 
quid agat, ichat he is doing, " 

quid egerit, what he has done, 

quid acturus sit, what he is going 

to do (will do), 



r quid agas, 
quid egeris, 
quid acturus sis, 

' quid ageres, 
quid egisses, 



Mihi interroganti, 

when I asked him, 
(literally : to me asking). 



quid ageret, 



~\ quid egisset, 

i 



what he was do- 
ing, 
what he had done, 



non re 

spondet 

he give; 

no an 

swer. 

n5n re 

spondit 

he gav 

no an 

swer. 



quid acturus esset,what he was go- 
{ ing to do, 

Apelles pictores e5s peccare dicebat qui non sentiren 
quid e s s e t satis. Ctc. Apelles used to say that those painters blundere 
wlw did, not perceive what was (is) enough. 

Athenienses Cyrsilum quendam suadentem ut in urbe manerer 
lapidibus cobperuerunt. Cic. (546.) 

Cupido incessit animos juvenum sciscitandi ad quern eorui 
regnum Romanum e s s e t venturum. Liv. The minds of the young me 
were seized by the desire of inquiring to which of them the kingdom of Ron 
would come. 

Miserunt Delphos consultum quid facerent. ISTep. They sent to JDelp, 
to ask the oracle what they should do. 

Exception. — A Perfect Infinitive or Participle, dependent on a Prese 
Tense, commonly takes the sequence of the Past Tenses : 

Satis mihi multa verba fecisse v i d e o r quare e s s e t hoc be 
lum necessarium. Cic. i" think I have said enough (to show) why this w> 
is necessary. 

519. The Potential of the Past— The Potential of the Pa 
may depend on a Present Tense : 

Video causas esse permultas quae Titum Roscium imp 

1 e r e n t. Cic. I see that there are very many causes which might have i 
pelted Titus Iloscius. 

Quaero ate cur Gajum Cornelium n5n defenderem. Cic. 
ask you why I was not to defend Gajus Cornelius. 

Remark- The Sequence of Tenses is not nnfrequently deranged by the attractioE 
parenthetic clauses, or the shifting of the conception. 



p] 



USE OF THE REFLEXIVE. 253 



USE OF THE REFLEXIVE IK SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 

520. In subordinate clauses, the Kenexive is used with refer- 
ence either to the subject of the principal, or to the subject of 
the subordinate, clause; and sometimes first to the one and then 
to the other. 

521. The Eeflexiye is used of the principal subject when ref- 
erence is made to the thought or will of that subject ; hence, 
in Infinitive Sentences, in Indirect Questions, in Sentences of 
Design, and Sentences which partake of the Oblique Relation : 

Animus sentit se vl sua, non aliena mover!. Cic. The mind feels 
that it moves by its own force, (and) not by that of another. 

Quaesiverunt num s e esset etiam mori prohibitum s. Cic. (516.) 

Pompejus a me petlvit ut s § cu m et apud s e essem quotidie. Cic. 
Pompey asked me to be with him, and at his house, daily. 

Paetus omnes libr5s quos frater s u u s reliquisset mihi donavit. Cic. 
Paetus presented to me all the books (as he said) thai his brother had left (qu5s 
frater ejus reliquerat, would be the statement of the narrator). 

Remarks.— 1. Sentences of Tendency and Result have" is : 

Tarquinius sic Servium diligebat ut is ejus vulgo haberetur filius. Cic. Tar- 
quin loved Servius so that he was commonly considered his son. 

2. The Reflexive may refer to the real agent, and not to the grammatical subject of the 
principal clause : 

A Caesare invltor sibi ut sim legatus. Cic. lam invited by Caesar (= Caesar in- 
vites me) to be lieutenant to him. 

Especially to be noted is the freer use of SUUS (295, R. 1). The other forms are em- 
ployed chiefly in reflexive formulae : 

Sul colligendi hostibus facultatem non relinquunt. Caes., They do not leave 
the enemy a chance to rally. 

So se recipere, to withdraw. 

3. The Reflexive is used in general sentences, as one, oneself, etc. : 

Deforme est de se praedicare. Cic. It is loathsome to be bragging about oneself. 
With the Infinitive this follows naturally from 420. 

4. In Indicative Relative Sentences, which are mere circumlocutions (506), is is the 
rule: 

Socrates inhonestam sibi credidit orationem quam ei Lysias reo composuerat. 
Quint. Socrates believed the speech which Lysias had composed for him when he was ar- 
raigned, dishonouring to him. 

Sometime*, however, the Reflexive is put contrary to the rule : 

Metellus in iis urbibus quae ad s e defecerant praesidia imponit. Sall. Me- 
tellus put garrisons in those towns ivhich had gone over to him / regularly, ad eum. 

Ille habet quod sibi debebatur, He has his due ; regularly, el. 

5. Sometimes the Demonstrative is used instead of the Reflexive, because the narrator 
presents his po ; nt of view: 

Solon, quo tutior vita ejus esset, furere se simulavit Cic. Solon feigned madness, 
that his life might be the safer. (The notion of Result intrudes.) 



254 OBJECT SENTENCES. 

6. Examples of Reflexive? pointing both ways : 

Roman! legatos miserunt qui a Prtisia peterent ne inimlcissimum suura 
(= RoinanorurcO apud se [Prusiam] haberet Nep. The Romans sent ambassadors to 
ask Prusias not to keep tin ir bitterest enemy at his court. 

Agrippa Atticum flens orabat atque obsecrabat ut se sibi suisque re- 
servavet- Xi:r. Agrippa begged and conjured Atticus with tears to save himself [Atticus] 
for him [Agrippa] and for his own family [Atticus]. 

Hopeless ambiguity: 

Heres meus damnas esto dare ill! omnia sua. Quint. My heir is to give him all 
that is his. 

7. For the sake of clearness, the subject of the leading sentence is not unfrequently re- 
ferred to in the form of the Demonstrative instead of the Reflexive : 

Helvetil Allobrogibus sese persuasuros existimabant vel vi coacturos ut per 
suos fines eos ire paterentur. Ca.es. The Helvetians thought that they would persuade 
or force the Allobroges to let them [the Helvetians] go through their territory. 

8. Ipse is always used in its proper distinctive sense: so when it represents the 
speaker in 0. 0. 

Ejus and Sui. 

522. Alexander moriens anulum s u u m dederat Perdiccae, Alex- 
ander^ [when] dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas. 

Perdiccas acceperat ejus anulum, Perdiccas had received his ring. 

Quare Alexander declaraverat s e regnum e I commendasse, There- 
by, Alexander had declared that he had committed the kingdom to him. 

Ex quo Perdiccas conjecerat e u m regnum sibi commendasse, 
From this, Perdiccas had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him. 

Ex qu5 omnes conjecerant e u m regnum e I commendasse, From 
this, all had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him. 

Perdiccas postulavit ut s e regem haberent quum Alexander anu- 
lum sibi dedisset, Perdiccas demanded that they should have him to king, as 
Alexander had given the ring to him. 

Amici postulaverunt ut omnes eu m regem haberent quum Alexan- 
der anulum e I dedisset, (His) friends demanded that all should have him to 
king, as Alexander had given the ring to him. (Lattmanu and Miiller.) 

Ita se gesserat Perdiccas ut e I regnum ab Alexandro commendare- 
tur, Perdiccas had so behaved himself that the kingdom was intrusted to him 
by Alexander. 

Object Sentences. 

523. Verbs of Doing, Perceiving, Conceiving, of Thinking 
and Saying, often take their object in the form of a sentence. 

Remark. — These sentences are regarded, grammatically, as neuter substantives. The 
accusative of neuter substantives is employed as a Nominative. Hence, a Passive or 
Intransitive Verb may take an object sentence as a subject. 



OBJECT SENTENCES. 255 

I. OBJECT SENTENCES INTRODUCED BY QUOD. 

524. Clauses which serve merely as periphrases (circumlocu- 
tions) of elements in the leading sentence are introduced by 
quod, that. 

Remarks.— 1. The leading sentence often contains a demonstrative, such as hoc, this ; 
illud, id, that ; and then the whole structure may be considered as a relative. 

%W As these sentences present difficulties to the beginner, it may be well to postpone 
the consideration to the Relative. 

2. In some of the combinations, quod may be considered an adverbial accusative of 
extent. (Inner Object.) Quod, in that (= because). 

525. Quod is used to introduce explanatory clauses chiefly 
after a Demonstrative, after verbs of Doing and Happening with 
an adverb, and after verbs of Adding and Dropping : 

Here quod means " the fact that," " the circumstance that." 

H 5 c solo propior quod amic5s conjugis odit. Juv. In this alone 
(is the wife) nearer (than a mere neighbor), that she hates the friends of her 
husband. 

Nil habet infelix paupertas durius in se quam quod (= id quod) 
ridiculos homines facit. Juv. Unhappy poverty hath in itself nothing harder 
(to bear) than that it makes people ridiculous. 

Magnum beneficium est naturae quod necesse est mori. Sen. (195.) 

Quod spiro et placeo, si placeo, tuum est. Hon. That I do breathe and 
please, if that I please, is thine. 

Bene facis quod me adjuvas. Cic. You do well (in) that you help 
me. 

Bene mihi evenit quod mittor ad mortem. Cic. It is fortunate for me 
that I am sent to death (execution). 

Adde quod ingenuas didicisse fideliter artes emollit mores nee 
sinit esse feros. Ov. Add (the fact) that to have acquired faithfully the ac- 
complishments (education) of a gentleman, softens the character, and does not 
let it be savage. 

On nisi quod, see 592, R. 3. 

The reigning mood is the Indicative. The Subjunctive is 
only used as in Oratio Obllqua. 

Quum Castam accusarem nihil magis press! quam quod accusator 
ejus praevaricationis crimine corruisset. Plin. Ep. When I accused Casta, 
there was no point that I laid more stress on than the fact (that I stated) " that 
her accuser had been crushed under a charge of collusion" 



256 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 

Remarks.— 1. To this group belongs tho exclamatory interrogation Quid? quod or 

^uid quod ? What of this, that? 

Quid quod simulac mihi collibitum est praesto est imago ? Cic. What is to be 
said of the fact that the image presents itself as soon as I see fit? {Nay, does not the image 

■nt itself?) 

2. A sentence with quod often precedes as an adverbial accusative : 

Quod me Agamemnonem aemulari putas falleris. Nep. In that (if) you think 
that 1 am emulating Agamemnon, you are mistaken. 

3. With several of the above-mentioned verbs, ut can be employed, as well as quod 
(ut, of the tendency — quod, of the fact) : 

Ad Appii Claudii senectutem accedebat ut etiam caecus esset, Cic. (558), or, 
quod caecus erat. 

Accedit quod patrem plus etiam quam ipse scit amo. Cic. Besides, I love the 
father even more than he himself knows. 

But when the action is prospective or conditional, ut must be used : 

Hue accedat ut perfecta virtus sit- Sen. To this be added the perfect nature of 
virtue. 

4. Verbs of Emotion, such as Kejoicing, Sorrowing, etc., take quodwith the Indicative 
•r Subjunctive. See Causal Sentences, 540. I 

II. OBJECT SENTENCES, WITH ACCUSATIVE AND 
INFINITIVE. 

526. Preliminary Observation. — On the simple infinitive as 
an object, see 424. 

The Infinitive as a verbal predicate, has its subject in the Accusative. 
(421.) 

Remark.— The Accusative is the most general form of the noun; the Infinitive (or 
rather the Indefinitive), the most general form of the verb. The two together give the 
outline, and not the details, of the thought — present an idea, and not a fact, as such. 
Compare 340. 

527. Active verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing and Per- 
ceiving (Verba sentiendl et declarandl*), and similar expressions, 
take the Accusative and Infinitive : 

Thales Milesius a quam dixit e s s e initium rerum, Thales of Miletus 
said that water was the first 'principle of things. 

Solon furere se simulavit. Cic Solon pretended to be mad. 



* Verba sentiendl are : video, audio, sentio, animadverto, scio, nSscio, intellego, per- 
spicio, comperio, disco, meminl, credo, arbitror, puto, suspicor, judico, cgnseo, dtico, 
concludo, npero, despero. Similar expressions are : spes est, opinio est. 

Verba decldrandl arc" ': edico, affirnio, nego, fateor, narro,trado, scrlbo, nfintio, ostendo, 
dSmonstro. persuadeo (546, K. 2.) significo, polliceor, promitto, minor, simulo, dissimulo, 
etc. Similar expressions are : fama est, auctor sum, testis sum, certiOrem aliquem facio. 
etc. 



ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 257 

Medici causa morbi inventa ciirationem esse inventam 
putant. Cic. Physicians think that, (when) the cause of disease (is) dis- 
covered, tlie method of treatment is discovered, 

Volucres videmus finger e et construere nidos. Cic. We see that birds 
fashion and build nests. 

Audiet cives acuisse ferrum. Hon. [The youth] shall hear that citizens 
gave edge to steel. 

Timagenes auctor est omnium in litteris studi5rum antiquissimam 
musicen exstitisse. Quint. Timagenes is the authority (for the state- 
ment) that of all intellectual pursuits music was the most ancient. 

The sentence very often passes over into the Ace. and Inf. (O. O.) with- 
out any formal notice. 

Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Perception and Representation take the Participle to express 
the actual condition of the object of Perception or Representation (536). As there is no 
I Present Participle Passive the Infinitive must be used, and thus the difference between 
intellectual and actual perception is effaced, sometimes even in the Active. 

Audio elves acuentes ferrum, I hear citizens sharpening) the steel. 

Audio a clvibus acui ferrum, 1 hear that the steel is sharpened by citizens / or, the 
steel as it is sharpened by citizens. 

Octavium dolore confici vldi. Cic. 1 have seen Octavius (when he was) wearing 
out with anguish. 

Vldi histriones fientes egredi. Quint. I have seen actors leave the stage weeping. 

Notice faeio, I make out, represent, suppose : 

Plato a Deo aedifieari mundum facit- Cic. Plato makes out that the uni- 
verse is built by God. 

Isocratem Plato laudarl fecit a Socrate. Cic. Plato has represented Isocrates 
as praised by Socrates. 

Fac, quaeso, qui ego sum esse te. Cic. Suppose, 1 pray, yourself to be me. 

2. When the subject of the Infinitive is a personal or reflexive pronoun, that subject 
J is sometimes omitted— chiefly with Future Infinitive — and then esse also is dropped : 

Eefracturos carcerem minabantur. Liv. They threatened to break open the jail. 

3. The simple Infinitive is often used in English, where the Latin takes Ace. and Inf. 
See 424, R. 3. 

The (Greek) attraction of the predicate of the Inf. into the Nominative after the Verb 
of Saying or Thinking, is poetical : 

Phaseius ille, quern videtis, hospites, ait fuisse navium celerrimus. Cat. 
That pinnace yonder, which you see, my stranger guests, declares she used to be the fastest 
^ craft afloat. 

4. When the Accusative with the Infinitive is followed by a dependent accusative, 
ambiguity may arise : 

Ajo te, Aeaeida, Romanos vincere posse, in which te may be subject or object. 

Real ambiguity is to be avoided by giving the sentence a passive turn : 

Ajo a te, Aeaeida. Romanos vine! posse, I affirmthat the Bomans can be conquered 
^ by thee, son of Aeacus. 

Ajo te, Aeaeida, a Romanis vine! posse, I affirm that thou, son of Aeacus, canst be 
conquered by the Romans. 

When the context shows which is the real subject, formal ambiguity is of no import- 
ance. But see Quint, vii. 9. 10. 



258 XOMIXATTVE AVTTTT INFINITIVE. 






NOMINATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 

528. Passive verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Per- 
ceiving, prefer the personal construction, in which the Accusa- 
tive Subject of the Infinitive appears as the Nominative Subject 
of the leading verb. 

Active : 

Tradunt Homerum caecum fuisse, they say that Homer was blind 

Passive : 

Traditur Homerus caecus fuisse, Homer is said to have been blind. 
[Traditur Homerum caecum fuisse], it is said that Homer teas blind. 

But when the leading verb is a form compounded with esse, 
to be, the impersonal construction is preferred : 

Traditum est Homerum caecum fuisse. Cic. There is a tradition that 
Homer was blind. 

Aristaeus inventor olei fuisse dicitur. Cic. Aristaeus is said to 
have been the inventor of oil. 

Terenti (29, R. 1.) fabulae propter elegantiam sermonis putabantur 
a Laelio scrlbi. Cic. Terence's plays, on account of the elegance of the 
language, were thought to be written by Laelius. 

Si Vejos migrabimus amisisse patriam videbimur. Lrv. If 
we remove to Veji, we shall seem to have lost our country. * 

Reus damnatum Iri videbatur. Quint. (436, R. 2.) 

But: 

Venerem Adonidi nupsisse proditum est. Cic. It is recorded 
that Venus married Adonis. 

Oreditur Pythagorae audltorem fuisse Numam. Cic. It is 

believed that Numa was a hearer of Pythagoras. 

Remark.— In Verbs of Saying, except dlCO, the personal construction is confined to 
the third person. The poets are free in treating verbs under this head. 



TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE AFTER VERBA SENTIENDI 
ET DECLARANDI. 

529. The Infinitive denotes only the stage of the action, and 
determines only the relation to the time of the leading verb 
(274). 



ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 



259 



530. After verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Perceiv- 
ing, and the like, 

The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous ac tion ; 
The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ; 
The Future Infinitive expresses future action. 

Remark. — The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in 
itself a continued action. So in English : / have been studying, I had been studying. 
Bence, the Imperfect Indicative (I was studying) is represented in this dependent form by 
the Perfect Infinitive, because it is prior to the leading verb. 

^F" In this table the Present is taken as the type of the Principal, the Imperfect as 
.he type of the Historical, Tenses. 



531. 



Active. 



Contemporaneous Action. Passive 



P. T. Dlcit : te errare, te decipl, 

He says, that you are going wrong, that you are deceived (217, R.). 

H. T. Dicebat : te errare, te decipi, 

He was saying, that you were going that you were deceived, 
wrong, 



Prior Action. 



P. T\ Dibit : te errasse, 

He says, that you have gone wrong, 
that you went wrong \ 
that you have been going 
wrong, 

H. T. Dicebat : te errasse, 

He was saying, that you had gone 
wrong, 
that you went wrong, 
that you had been 
going wrong, 



te deceptum esse, 

that you have been (are) deceived, 
that you were deceived (Aon.), 
(that people have been deceiving you), 

te deceptum esse, 

that you had been deceived. 

that you were deceived (Aor.), 
(that people had been deceiving you). 



Subsequent Action. 



P, T. Dicit : te erraturum esse, 

He says, that you (are about to go 
wrong), will (be) go(ing) wrong, 

H. T. Dicebat : te erraturum esse, 

He was saying, that you were about 
to (would) go wrong, 



te deceptum iri, 

that you (are going to) will be de- 
ceived. 

te deceptum iri, 

that you were going to (woidd) be 
deceived. 



Periphrastic Future. 

The following form (the Periphrastic Future) is necessary when the Verb has no Su~ 
ine or Future Participle. It is often used from other verbs to intimate an interval, 
hich cannot be expressed by other forms, and is more common in the Passive than the 
uture Passive Inf. of the paradigms. 



200 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 

Active. Periphrastic Future. Passive. 

P. T. Dlcit : fore (futurum esse) ut fore ut decipiaris (metuaris), 

erres (metuas), 
fore (futurum esse) ut erra- fore ut deceptus sis (rare), usually . 
veris* (rare), deceptum fore (not futurum 

esse). 

H. T. Dicebat : fore ut errares fore ut decipereris (metuere- 

(metueres), ris), 

errasses (rare), dgceptum fore (rarely : fore ut 

deceptus esses). 

Remarks.— 1. For examples of the Periphrastic, see 240. 

Carthaginienses debellatum. moxfore rebantur. Liv. The Carthaginians thought 
that the war would soon be brought to an end. From debellatum erit, it will be (have 
been) brought to an end. So in the deponent adeptum fore. 

2. Posse, velle, etc., do not require the Periphrastic, and seldom take it. (240, R. 3.) 

ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH VERBS OF WILL AND 

DESIRE. I 

532. Verbs of Will and Desire take a dependent Accusative 
and Infinitive : 

The relation is that of an Object to be Effected : 

Si vis me flere, dolendum est primum ipsi tibi. Hon. If you wish mt 

to weep, you must first feel the pang yourself. 

Utrum Milonis corporis an Fythagorae tibi malls vires ingenii dari 

Cic. Which {whether) would you rather ham given to you, Milo's strength of 

body or Pythagoras' strength of mind ? 

Ipse jubet mortis nos meminisse Deus. Mart. (375, 3.) 

Vitae summa brevis spem nos vetat incohare longam. Hor. (424j & 

R.3.) 

Nemo ire quenquam publica prohibet via. Plaut. (387.) 
German! v I n u m ad se omnino importari non sinunt. Caes 

TJie Germans do not permit wine to be imported into their country at all. 

Remarks.— 1. On the construction of this class of verbs with ut (ne, quominus 
see 546. Impero, I command, in ordinary prose takes only the Passive Infinitive : 

Hannibal imperavit quam plurimas venenatas serpentes vivas colligi. Ne: 
Hannibal ordered as many poisonous serpents as possible to be caught alive. 

Permitto seldom takes the Infinitive. Jubeo, Ibid ; sino, / let ; veto, I forbid ; pr 
hibeo, I prohibit, always have the Infinitive of Passive Verbs. These verbs may ther 
selves be turned into the Passive : jubeor, sinor, vetor, prohibeor. 



* Heavy periphrastics are of rare occurrence. So Fetiales decrevSrunt utru 
eorum fecisset recte" facturum (Liv. xxxi. 8) ; not fore ut fecisset, although the O. 
requires utrum feceris, recte feceris. (223, R. 4.) See Weissenborn's note. 



ACCUSATIVE AND IXFIXITIVE. 261 

2. After jubeo, / bid, and veto, I forbid, the Infinitive Active can be used without an 
imaginary or indefinite subject : 

Jubet reddere, he bids return (orders the returning). 
Vetat adhibere medicinam, he forbids the administration of medicine. 
Infandum, regina, jubes renovare dolorem. Verg. Not meet for speech, queen, 
the anguish which you bid (me, us) revive. 

3. When the subject of the Infinitive is the same as the subject of the leading verb, 
the subject of the Infinitive is not necessarily expressed : 

NI parere veils, pereundum erit ante lucernas. Juv. Unless you resolve to 
obey, you will hare to perish before candle-light. 

Etjam mallet equos nunquam t etigisse paternos. Ov. And now he 
could have wished rather never to have touched his father's horses. 

But the subject may be expressed, and commonly is expressed, when the action of the 
Infinitive is not within the power of the subject : 

Timoleon maluit s e dlligi quam metui. Nep. Timoleon preferred that he should 
'■•f be loved rather than that he should be feared. 

Et fugit ad salices et s e cupit ante videri. Verg. And fees to the willows, and 
desires that she should first be seen. 

4. The poets go much further in using verbs and phrases as expressions of Will and 
\U Desire. See 424, R. 4. 

ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH VEKBS OF EMOTION. 

533. Verbs of Emotion take a dependent Accusative and In- 
finitive, inasmuch as these verbs may be considered as verbs of 
Saying and Thinking : 

Salvum t § advenlsse gaudeo, I rejoice that you should haw arrived safe 
J (to think that you ham arrived safe, at your arriving safe). 

Quod salvus advenisti, that you have arrived safe. 

Quod salvus adveneris, that (as you say) you have arrived safe. 

Gloriatur Epicurus se non toto asse pascL Sen. Epicurus brags of 
^dining for not quite one copper. See 541. 

ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE IN EXCLAMATIONS. 

l - 534. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used in Exclama- 
tions and Exclamatory Questions as the object of an unexpressed 
m thought or feeling : 

Hem, mea lux, te nunc, mea Terentia, sic vexari. CiC. (341.) 
Hominemne Romanum tam Graece loqui ? Plin. Ep. A Boman speak 
h such good Greek f ( To think that a Roman should speak such good Greek). 
Mene incept5 desistere — ? Verg. I— desist from my undertaking? 
1! Hinc abire matrem ? Ter. Mother go away from Jieref 

Re-marks.— 1. Different is quod, which gives the ground : 

Hei mihi quod nullls amor est medicabilis herbis . Ov. Woe's me that {in that, 
because) love is not to be cured by any herbs. 

2. On ut, with the subjunctive, in a similar sense, see 560. Both forms object. 






UAJ m i^tfixitivz, 



; ^;:tsat:ti a>t ixfinitivb as a subject. 

cSd. The : with the Infinitive maj be :_t Sul 

of a senten: 7 Predicate is a suhfitanti a or neuiA a.aa 

..:." aa: _ . " '. a: : . : : aiasa 

Tniisi latu m est regent capitis ream esse. C: A u an extraorc 

:' ;:':t : " A /- : . A; : Z ~ .-A/-- "..* AV 

F acinus est vinciri civem "RnmanfiTn. Cic. It is an outrage that a 

Z. . ' : Z V" Z ■ _:" ' . : ' :: :-?. 

Necesseest facere Amptnm q zl ruaerit (== eum qui quaerit 

1~ztz~l r^-^77 _"~ " "" " A 

I_§rr~ *zr-rTr~ rssr :r:r.rT, cue A c A i u 5 3. "~ imrc-ritls "enc-^tiir 



E 



C:i: es: "A 



:: va.ere. . :: 



en used wit! 






7: 



IMoBker* Uame^lmtyou mu&tgi £ 

Ok nae i object of the L: 

.-t A :ir ::A-" '-- -"■---": prc = 
~Al Ss.:: - ; 



:-~ - 



: z n : 



MflB I SflJ - i 



:Z>~TZZ~ZZ^ ZZ?ZZ-ZI~ZZZ BY THE PAETICIPL 



536. The Participle is used after rerbs of Perec :n a 

a a, aaz---: :--:.:::.. ::aa:a:::1: a 






3tMc6rum circnmfuirj 
an ocean of Stoic bo 



cai LrmssL 

Frodiga ncn sentit pereuntem femina censum. Jut. 7un 

wt perceive (how) the ina i 

Saepe illam audivl furtive v; : r 1 ; ;_ /..-..: -.:. : 

fer talking in a stealthy tone. 

Gaude quod spectant oculi te mille 1 : q . ente n Hoi " 4 2 
Polyphemum Homerus com ariete colloquentem f a : : : 

Homer represents Pelyphemiu ls :...'/.-.. « .: '. * e 

Remark.— Od the Infinitive see a .' B I. The Breek ; . _ 

i ' f Perception Kmot ■ 

Sensit medios delapsus in hostes- Yne. He - 
fallen) 'midst the enemy. 

G-audent perfusi sanguine fratrum. Vase / ■. 'inched wUM brother? Hood. 

537. The Perfect Parti:: pie Passive is usee ei verbs : : 

. Causation and Desire.:; lenote impatience :: anything t:::;: 

entire fulfillment : 

Caligula Lolliam mis s a m fe c it Suet _- 

(for good and all). 

i Prudent! mandes si quid recte curatum veils. Tip. I~ 
to a sensible man wJu few - _ ._ t _ - 

Remakk. — After verbs of Will mdl on trad 

"^with these Participles, and hence they may he con;:" afect Infinitives 275 

Compare, however, Perfect ?_::.;. F ssrre with :~ is est "1315 ts: (390.) 

IftUBAI SMffMHiB 

538. Causal sentences are introdoc 

1. Bv Quia, : good, that) bet 

3y Que mam quom lam . f, quando, quancc- - 

quidem, rarely in this sense 

3. By Quum, Inference 

4 By the Relative Pronoun, partly alone, partly frith ut, utpote, quippe, 
to -ee626 ? 63^ 

Rkxakks. — Quia and quod differ chiefly in :: - ~- : i is ~ ; - -. —hrn the 

ansal sentence is at the same time in Reject stnt;n:e Qucd - --- -=-:■: 1~- : 
"" uia the Ace. Xent PL of qui, and often hi e a : :?t : _ e demonstrative, such as ec 
: idcirco. therefore, propterea. on that zc:c-i.ni. 

Qnoniam and quando quand&quideic -te used :t* evident present . 
uando quandoquidem is rare in an7 ::hfr :hen a temporal =en.se Z-\ 
re often used causally 

'AUSAL SENTENCES TTITH QUIA, QUOD. AND QUONIAM. 

539. Causal sentences with quia. quod, and quoniam sure at 
n the Indicative, except in oblique relation Partial ;: I::. 



264 CAUSAL SENTENCES. 

Remark.— The other person of the oblique clause may be imaginary, and the writer or 
speaker may quote from himself indirectly : 

Laetatus sum quod mihi liceret recta defendere. Cic. I was glad that I was free 
to champion the right. 

540. Causal sentences with quia, quod, and quoniam take the 
Indicative in Direct Discourse: 

Amantes de forma judicare non possunt, quia sensum ocul5rum prae- 
cipit animus. Quint. Lovers cannot judge of beauty, because the heart fore- 
stalls the eye. 

Quia natura mutarl non potest idcirco verae amicitiae sempite* 
nae sunt. Cic. Because nature cannot change, therefore true friendships are\ 
everlasting. 

Torquatus fllium suum quod is contra imperium in hostem pug 
naverat necari jussit. Sall. Torquatus bade his son to be put to death 
because he had fought against the enemy contrary to order(s) [quod pugnassel 
= because, as Torquatus said or thought]. 

Neque me vixisse paenitet quoniam ita vixl ut n5n frustra me 
natum existimem. Cic. And I am not sorry for having lived, since I haVi 
so lived that I think I was born not in vain. 

Solus ero quoniam non licet esse tuo. Prop. (535, R. 2.) 



«t 






Erant quibus appetentior famae Helvidius videretur quando etian 
sapientibus cupido gl5riae novissima exuitur. Tac. There were some t 
whom Helvidius seemed too eager for fame , since, even from the wise, ambitioi 
is the last (infirmity) that is put off. 

541. Causal sentences with quia, quod, and quoniam take fch 
Subjunctive in Oblique Discourse (Partial or Total). 

Noctu ambulabat in foro Themistocles quod somnum capere no 
posset. Cic. Themistocles used to walk about in the market-place at night b 
cause (as he said) he could not get to sleep. 

Quae quia non 1 i c e a t non facit, ilia facit. Ov. She who does it n 
because (she thinks, forsooth) she may not (do it), does it. 

Elsewhere : quae quia non licuit non facit, ilia facit. 

[Ne] compone comas quia sis venturus ad illam. Ov. (517.) 

Quoniam ipse pro se dicere non posset, verba fecit frater ejus Stei 
goras. Nep. " As [Miltiades] could not speak for himself,'" Ms brother, Stet m 
goras, made a speech. (Indirect quotation from the speech of Stesagoras 

Remarks.— 1. Non quod, non quia, are used with the Indicative or Subjunctive, 
cording to the general rule. The Indicative denies absolutely,* the Subjunctive rejej 



tect! 
Imp! 

r qnod 



54S 



"■ 



* That the Indicative is used only of excluded/acfe is not borne out by the usage| 
the language from Luck. ii. 2, to Tac. Ann. xiii. 1. 



CAUSAL SENTENCES. 265 

an imaginary suggestion (as if from an ideal second person). The real ground often fol- 
lows with sed quia, sed quod. 

The Subjunctive is more common than the Indicative with non quod, non quia. 
Non quo = non quod, and non quln = non quo non, are found with the Subjunctive 
only. 

Subjunctive: • 

Pugiles in jactandls caestibus ingemiscunt, non quod doleant, sed quia pro- 
fundenda voce omne corpus intenditur venitque plaga vehementior. Cic. Boxers 
in plying the caestus heave groans, not that (as you might suppose) they are in pain, but be- 
cause in giving full vent to the voice all the body is put to the stretch, and the blow comes 
with a greater rush. 

i Majores nostrl in dominum de servo quaerl noluerunt ; non quln posset ve- 
idfum invenirl, sed quia videbatur indignum esse. Cic Our ancestors would not 
allow a slave to be questioned by torture against his master, not because (not as though, they 
thought.) the truth could not be got at, but because such a course seemed degrading. 

A Lacedaemoniorum exulibus praetor vim arcuerat, non quia salvos vellet 

flfraed quia perire causa indicta nolebat. Lrv. The praetor had warded off violence from 

\l^he Lacedaemonian exiles, not(&s you might have supposed) because he wished them to escape, 

ml because he did not wish them to perish with their case not pleaded (unheard). 

i The same principle applies to magis quod (quo), quia .... sed quod, quia, with 

he moods in inverse order. 
1 Llbertatis originem inde, magis quia annuum imperium consulare factum 
ist quam quod deminutum quidquam sit ex regia potestate, enumeres. Liv. 
I Fou may begin to count the origin of liberty from that point, rather because the consular 
I overnment was limited to a year, than because aught was taken away from the royal 

A Indicative: 

f Sum non dicam miser, sed certe exercitus, non quia multis debeo sed quia 

lepe concurrunt. Cic. lam, I will not say, wretched, but certainly worried, not because 

am in debt to many, but because they (their claims) often conflict. 

2. Verbs of Saying and Thinking are put in the subjunctive with quod by a kind of 
traction : 

Impetrare non potui, quod religione se impedirl dlcerent- Cic. I could not ob- 
n permission, because they said they were embarrassed (prevented) by a religious scruple 
quod impedlrentur, because (as they said) they were prevented). 

3. Causal sentences may be represented by a Participle. (672.) 



:e no )l 



QUOD WITH VERBS OF EMOTION. 

542. Quod is used to give the ground of Emotions and Ex- 
pressions of Emotion, such as Verbs of Joy and Sorrow, Satis- 
ction and Anger, Praise and Blame, Thanks and Complaint* 

\ The rule for the Mood has been given already. 

Indicative : 

Gaude quod spectant ocull te mille loquentem. Hon. Re- 

ze that a thousand eyes are gazing at you (while you are) speaking. 
^'JDolet mini quod tu. nunc stomacharis. Cic. It pains me that you 
i angry now. 

12 



r 



' 






266 FINAL SENTENCES. 

Quintum paenitet quod aniraum tuum offendit. Cic. (376. R.) 
Juvat m§ quod vigent studia. Plin. Ep. I am charmed that studies 
are flourishing. 

Tristis es? indignor quod sum tibi causa doloris. Ov. Are you 

sad? I am provoked (with myself) that I am a cause of pain to you. 

Tibi gratias ago, quod me omul molestia liberas. Cic. 
thank you, that you free me from all annoyance. 

Subjunctive : 

G a u d e t miles quod vicerit hostem. Ov. The soldier rejoices at 
having conquered the enemy. 

Nunquam mini in mentem veniet paenitere quod a me ipse non de- 
sclverim. Cic. It will never occur to me to be sorry for not having been 
untrue to myself. 

Laudat Panaetius Africanum quod fuerit abstinens. Cic. Panaetius 
praises (Scipio) Africanus for having been abstinent. 

Nemo oratorem admiratus est quod Latlne loqueretur. Cic. No one 
(ever) admired an orator for speaking (good) Latin. 

Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet juventutem. Quint. So- 
crates was accused of corrupting youth. 

Memini gloriari solitum esse Quintum Hortensium quod nunquan 
bell 5 civil! interfuisset. Cic. I remember that Quintus Hortensius used t> 
boast of never having engaged in civil war. 

Agunt gratias quod sibi pepercissent. Caes. (511, R. 1.) 

Remark. — All these verbs may be construed with the Accusative and Infinitive : Sail 
vnm te advenisse gaudeo. (533.) But in Expressions of Praise and Blame, Tbankf 
and Complaint, quod is more common. 

Amo te et non neglexisse habeo gratiam. Teh. Hove you (= much obliged), a??| 
I am thankful to you for not having neglected (it). 

Gratulor ingenium non latuisse tuum. Ov. I congratulate (you) that your gent 
has not lainjjerdu. 

Isocrates queritur plus honoris corporum quam animorum virtutibus daij 
Quint. Isocrates complains that more honor is paid to the virtues of the body than to thci 
of the mind. 

On cum, see 565. J 

Sentences of Design and Tendency. 

543. 1. Sentences of Design are commonly called Fir 
Sentences. Sentences of Tendency are commonly called Co 
secutive Sentences. Both contemplate the end — the one, as 
aim; the other, as a consequence. 

2. They are alike in having the Subjunctive and the parti 
lit (how, that), a relative conjunction. 

3. They differ in the Tenses employed. The Final Senten 









i*i 






FI2TAL SENTENCES. 267 

.s a rule, takes only the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive. 
Consecutive Sentences may take also Perfect and Pluperfect. 
4. They differ in the kind of Subjunctive employed. The 
rnal Sentence takes the Optative. The Consecutive Sentence 
flakes the Potential. Hence the difference in the Negative: 

Final : ne (ut ne), Consecutive : ut non, that not. 

ne quis 3 ut nemo, that no one. 

ne ullus, ut nullus, that no. 

ne unquam, (ne quando,) ut nunquam, that never. 

ne usquam, (necubi,) ut nusquam, that nowhere. 

ne aut — aut, (ut neve— neve,) ut neque — neque, that neither 

— nor. 



Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Effecting have the Final Sequence. 

2. Verbs of Hindering have the sequences of the Final Sent 
ion of the Consecutive. 

3. Verbs of Fearing belong to the Final Sentence only so far as they have the Opta- 



,2. Verbs of Hindering have the sequences of the Final Sentence, but often the signifl- 
ion of the Consecutive. 



^7 FINxiL SENTENCES. 

544. Final Sentences are divided into two classes: 
L Final Sentences in which the Design is expressed by the 
J /tide : Sentences of Design. 

ian Dsse oportet ut vivas, non vivere ut edas. [Cic] You must eat in order 

A] m m, not live in order to eat. 
' I 

'his form may be translated by, (in order) to ; sometimes by, that may, might, Mat 

the subj., and the like. . 



,;''J(IH 






Final Sentences in which the Design lies in the leading 
b (Verba studil et voluntatis, Verbs of Will and Desire) : Coin- 
tientary Final Sentences. 

olo uti mihi respond eas Cic. I tcish you to ansicer me. 

lis form is often rendei ed by to, never by in order to, sometimes by that and the sub- 
t | {llMve, or some equivalent. 

Partly Final and partly Consecutive are: 
1 1, Verbs of Hindering. 

Peculiar in their sequence are : 
l r % Verbs of Fearing. 






arks. — 1. Temporal Particles are often used in a final sense. So dum, doneo, 
(574), antequam, priusquam (579). 



i 



268 



FINAL SENTENCES. 



2. The general sense of a Final Sentence may be expressed: 

1.) By the Genitive of Gerund or Gerundive, with (seldom without) causa or gratia! 
(439, R. 2.) I 

2.) By ad with Gerund and Gerundive. (433.) 

3.) By the Accusative Supine after Verbs of Motion. (436.) 

4.) By the Future Participle Active (later Latin) : 

Maroboduus mlsit legatos ad Tiberium oratiiros auxilia, Marbod sent commii 
sioners to Tiberius, to beg for reinforcements. 



I. Sentences of Design. 

545. Sentences of Design are introduced by : 

1. Ut (utl) (how) that, and other Kelative Pronouns and A< 
verbs (631). 

Ut is often preceded by a demonstrative expression, such as : idcircl' 
therefore ; eo, on that account ; eo consilio, with the design. 

2. Quo — ut eo, that thereby; with comparatives, tl^ui 

tJ ie ..._...; 

3. Ne, that not, lest, continued by neve, neu. (450.) 

Remark.— Other particles are of limited use. So ut ne cannot follow verbs of n 
tive signification ; quominus is used with Verbs of Hindering ; quin requires a prececi 
negative besides. HAtfaei 

Esse oportet ut vivas, non vivere ut edas. [Cic] You must eat to ' 
not live to eat. 

Inventa sunt specula, ut homo s§ ipse nosceret. Sen. Mirrors ^ 
invented, to make man acquainted with himself. 

Ut ameris, amabilis esto. Ov. That you may be loved {to make yoin 
loved, in order to be loved), be lovable. 

Legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperitis teneatur 
A law ought to be brief, that it may the more easily be grasped by the un\ 
cated. 

Senex serit arbores, quae alter! secul5 prosint. Cic. The old mat 
out trees, to do good to the next generation. 

Semper habe Pyladen, qui consoletur Oresten. Ov. Always h(\ 
Pylades, to console Orestes. 

Artaxerxes Themistocli Magnesiam urbem ddnaverat, quae el p; 
praeberet. Nep. Artaxerxes had given Themistocles the city of Mag 
to furnish him with bread. 

Galllnae pennis fovent pullos, ne frigore laedantur. Cic. HerM\ 
(their) chickens warm with (their) icings, that they may not be {to keepm% 
from being) hurt by the cold. W 

Dionysius ne collum tonsorl committeret tondere filias suas d'l 
Cic. (424, R. 3.) §• 






FINAL SENTENCES. 269 

Remark.— lit non is used when a particular word is negatived : 

Confer te ad Mallium, ut Don ejectus ad alienos sed invitatus ad tuos esse 

ddearjs- Cic. Betake yourself to Mallius, that you may seem not thrust out to stranger s y 

ut invited to your own (friends). 

II. Complementary Final Sentences. 

546. Complementary Final Sentences follow Verbs of Will- 
lg and Wishing, of Warning and Beseeching, of Urging and 
>emanding, of Resolving and Endeavoring, of Forcing and 
permitting (Verba studii et voluntatis).* 

Positive : TJt. 



ki 



Nil i 



Volo uti mihi respondeat. Cic. I wish you to answer me. 

Fhaethdn ut in currum patris tolleretur optavit. Cic. Phaethon de- 

'ed to be lifted up into Ms father's chariot. 

Admoneo ut quotidie meditere resistendum esse iracundiae. Cic. I 

monisli you to reflect daily that resistance must be made to hot-Iieadedness. 

Et precor ut passim tutius esse miser. Ov. (424.) 

Exigis ut Priamus natorum funere ludat. Ov. You exact that Priam 

rt at (his) sons' funeral. 

Athenienses quum statuerent ut naves conscenderent, Cyrsilum 

endam suadentem ut in urbe manerent lapidibus cooperuerunt. Cic. 

1 Athenians, resolving to embark on board their ships, covered with stones 
stoned) one Cyr situs, who tried to persuade them to remain in the city. 

Publium Lentulum ut s§ abdicaret praetura coegistis. Cic. You 

I ced Publius Lentulus to resign the praetor ship. 
1 '^' Jlud natura non patitur, ut aliorum spoliis nostras copias augeamus. 

. Nature does not allow us to increase our wealth by the spoils of others. 
Star 4] 
(jjttfltpo also any verb or phrase used as a verb of Willing or De- 

nding : 

>ythia respondit ut moenibus ligneis se munirent. Nep. The Pythia 
pered that they must defend themselves with walls of wood. 

o ea lege, ea condicione ut (ne), on condition that (that not). 
iieei f p legative : Ne, ut ne. 



n Itf i 



Such verbs and phrases are : oro, rogo, peto, precor, obsecro. fiagito, postulo, - 
video, provideo, prospicio, — suadeo, persuadeo, censeo, hortor, adhortor, raoneo 
•neo, permoveo, adrlfico, incito, impello, cOgo, — irapero, mando, praecipio, edlco 
Jscrlbo, mitto. — coucedo, permitto (sino), — statuo, constituo and decerno, —volo 
{ \ J ,malo, opto, studeo, nitor, contendo, elabOro, pugno, — id ago, operam do, legea 
lex est, auctor sum, consilium do. 

1 



270 FINAL SENTENCES. 

Caesar suis imperavit ne quod omnino telum in hostes rejiceren 

Cass. Caesar gave orders to Ms (men) not to throw back any missile at all c 
the (fit my. 

Themistocles collegis suis praedixit ut ne prius Lacedaemoni5ru? 
legatos dimitterent quam ipse esset remissus. Nep. Themistocles told h 
colleagues beforehand not to dismiss the Lacedaemonian envoys before he we 
sent back. 

Ut ne is not used after verbs of negative signification, such as impedio, / hind< 
recuse I refuse. (548.) 

Fompejus suis praedixerat ut Oaesaris impetum exciperent neve 
loco moverent. Caes. Pompey\ad told his men beforehand to receive Gaesa 
charge and not to move from their position. 

Neque is sometimes used after ut : 

Monitor tuus suadebit tibi ut hinc discedas neque mihi ullum v 

bum respondeat. Cic. Your adviser will counsel you to depart hence a 
answer one never a word. 

Remarks.— 1. Instead of ut with the Subjunctive, the Infinitive is frequently n 
with this class of verbs. So, generally, with jubeo, I order, 532. Authors vary. ' 
use of the Infinitive is wider in poetry and silver prose. 

2. When verbs of Willing and Wishing are used as verbs of Saying and Think 
Knowing and Showing, the Infinitive must be used. The English translation is that, 
the Indicative : volo. I will have it (maintain), moneo, 1 remark, persuadeo, / convtl 
decerno, 1 decide, cogo, I conclude. 

Moneo artem sine assiduitate dlcendi non multum juvare. Cic. I remark j 
art ivithout constant practice in speaking is of little avail. 

Vlx cuiquam persuadebatur Graecia omni cessuros Romanos. Liv. Scarce 
one could be persuaded that the Romans ivould retire from all Greece. 

Non sunt isti audiendl qui virtiitem diirani et quasi ferream quandam 
volunt Cic. (300.) 

Est mos hominum ut nolint eundem pluribus rebus excellere. Cic. It 
way of the world not to allow that the same man excels in more things (than one). 

3. When the idea of Wishing is emphatic, the simple Subjunctive, without ut, is 
ployed, and the restriction of sequence to Present and Imperfect is removed: 

Exlstimes velim neminem cuiquam cariorem unquam fuisse quam te i 
Cic. I wish you to think that no one was ever dearer to anyone than you to me. I l 

Malo te sapiens hostis metuat quam stulti elves laudent. Liv. I had rav j 
wise enemy should fear you than foolish citizens should praise you. I " ! 

Excusatum habeas me rogo, ceno domi. Mart. (230.) 

Hue ades, insani feriant sine llttora fluctus. Verg. Come hither (and) t\ 
mad waves lash the shores. 

Tarn fellx esses quam formosissima vellem. Ov. (316.) 

Nollem dixissem. Cic. (254, R. 2.) 

Occidit occideritque sinas cum nomine Trojam. Verg. 'Tis fallen, and let, 
befallen name and all. 

So jubeo in poetry and later prose. Compare also potius quam, 579, R. 

1 



fli, 
Ri 

Mi 






- 



VERBS OF HTXDERTXG. 271 

III. Verbs of Hindering. 

547. The dependencies of Verbs of Hindering may be re- 
garded as partly Final, partly Consecutive. Ne and quominus 
are originally final, but the final sense is often effaced, especially 
in quominus. Quln is a consecutive particle. The sequence of 
Verbs of Hindering is that of the Final Sentence. 

The negative often disappears in the English translation. 

548. Verbs signifying to Prevent, to Forbid, to Eefuse, and 
to Beware, take ne with the Subjunctive : 

Impedior ne plura dicam. Cic. / am hindered from saying more (I 
am hindered that I should say no more). 

I Compare : 4i Who did hinder you that ye should not obey the truth ? " Gal. v. 7. 

Servitns mea mihi interdixit ne quid mirer meum malum. Plaut. 

My slavery has forbidden me to marvel aught at (329, R. 1.) ill of mine. 

Histiaeus obstitit ne res conficeretur. Nef. Histiaeus opposed tJie 

thing being done. 

Regulus ne sententiam diceret recusavit. Cic. Regulus refused to 

'pronounce an opinion. 

Maledictis deterrere ne scrlbat parat. Ter. (424.) 

Tantum quum tinges ne sis manifesta caveto. Ov. (264.) 

Tantum ne noceas dum vis prodesse videto. Ov. Only see (to it) that 

fou do not do harm while you wish to do good. 

Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Preventing also take quominus (549), and some of them the 
nfinitive (532, R. 1). So regularly prohibere : 

Nemo Ire quenquam publica prohibet via. Plaut. (387.) 

Impedire, to hinder, deterrere, to frighten off, reciisare, to refuse, sometimes have 
ie Infinitive. 

2. Verbs signifying to Beware belong to Verbs of Hindering only so far as actiou is 
Dntemplated. 

After caveo, I beware, ne is often omitted : 

Cave credas. Beware of believing. 

(Gave ut credas, Be sure to believe.) 

Quos vieerls tibi amicos esse cave credas. Curt. Do not believe that those whom 
ni have conquered are friends to you. 

549. Quominus (= ut eo minus), that thereby the less, is used 
r itli verbs of Preventing : 

] Such as : impedire, to hinder ; prohibere, to keep from ; tenere, to hold ; 
eterrere, to frighten off ; obstare, to be in the way ; recusare, to refuse; 
id the like : 



272 VERBS OF HINDERING. 

Aetas non impedit qudminus agrJ colendi studia teneamus. Cic Age 

does not tender our retaining interest in agriculture. 

Non deterret sapientem mors quominus rei publicae (347) consulat. 
Cic. Death does not deter the sage from consulting the interest of the State. 

Quid obstat quominus Deus sit beatus ? Cic. What is in the way of 
GooVs being happy f 

Caesar cognovit per Afranium stare quominus proelio dimicaretur. 
Caes. Caesar found that it was Af ramus' 's fault that there was no decisive 
fight (stat, tliere is ei stand still). 

550. Quin is used like quominus, with Verbs of Preventing,! . 
but only when they are negatived or questioned. 



Remarks.— 1. Quin is compounded of qui + ne, how (in which way), + not, and 
answers to ut eo non or quo non. For non quin (= non quo non), see 541, R. 1. 

2. Quin is used only after Negative Sentences, or Questions which expect a negative 
answer. 

3. When quin is used as a Consecutive or Relative particle, ut non or qui non, it hat 
all the sequences of the Consecutive or Relative. See 556. 

4. When quin is used after Negative expressions of Doubt it has the sequences of th 
Interrogative. 

5. When quin is used with Verbs of Preventing it has the sequences of the Final Sen 
tence. 



I 
I 

( 
MS 

I 

N: 

ie 
M 



551. Quin is used when Verbs and Phrases of Preventing 
Omitting, Kefraining, Kefusing, and Delaying, Doubt and Un 
certainty, are negatived or questioned: 

1. Verbs of Preventing and the like (Sequence of the Pinajj^ 
Sentence) : 



Vix nunc obsistitur illis (208) quin lanient mundum.v Ov. They m\ 
now hardly to be kept {that they should not rend) from rending the universe. 

Antiochus non se tenuit quin contra suum doctorem librum ederetj 
Cic. Antiochus did not refrain from publishing a book against his teacher. 

Nullum adhuc interims! diem quin aliquid ad te litterarum darer 
Cic. I ham thus far- not allowed a day to pass but I dropped you {with oi 
dropping you) something of a letter (a line or two). 

Pacere non possum quin quotidie ad te mittam litteras. Cic. I ca\ 
not do without {I cannot help) sending a letter to you daily. 

(Nullo modo facere possum ut non sim popularis. Cic. I cannot he 
being a man of the peopled) 

Non possum quin exclamem. Plaut. I cannot but (I must) cry out. 

Nihil abest quin sim miserrimus. Cic. There is nothing wanting tha\ 
should be (= to make me) perfectly miserable. 

Fieri nuUo modo poterat quin Cleomeni (208) parceretur. Cic. 



w 



VERBS OF DOUBT. 2/3 

ould in no icise happen but that Cleomenes should be spared {— Cleomenes 
lad to be spared). 

Paulum afuit quin Fabius Varum interficeret. Caes. There was little 
%cking but Fabius (had) killed Varus (= Fabius came near killing Varus). 

2. Verbs of Doubt and Uncertainty (Sequence of the Inter- 
ogatiye sentence) : 

Non dubium est quin ux5rem nolit filius. Ter. There is no doubt that 
ny) son does not want a wife. 

Quis dubitet (= nemo dubitet) quin in virtute divitiae sint? CiC. 
fe.) 

Non dubitari debet quin fuerint ante Homerum poetae. CiC. It is not 
be doubted that there were poets before Homer. 

Nunc mihi non est dubium quin venturae non sint legiones. CiC. 
15.) 

Occasionally Verbs of Saying and Thinking are found with the same 
instruction, because they are near equivalents. 

Negari non potest quin rectius sit etiam ad pacatos barbards exerci- 
m mitti. Lrv. It cannot be denied (doubled) that it is better for an army to 
| sent to the barbarians even though they be quiet. 

Non abest suspicio (Litotes for dubitari non potest) quin Orgetorix 
se sibi mortem consciverit. Caes. There is no lack of ground to suspect 
t there is no doubt that, 448, R 2) Orgetorix killed himself. 

Remarks.— 1. In Future relations non dubito quia, (according to 515, R. 3) may have 
j Simple Subjunctive instead of the Periphrastic : 

Non dubitare quin de omnibus obsidibus supplicium siimat Ariovistus. Caes. 
Te did not doubt thai Ariovistus would put all the hostages to death." Comp. Cat. cviii. 

So when there is an original Subjunctive notion : 

Non dubito quin ad te statim veniam. Cic. I do not doubt that I ought to come 
you forthwith. (Veniam "? Shall 1 come ?) 

2. Of course dubito and non dubito may have the ordinary interrogative construc- 
ts. On dubito an, see 459, R. 

3. Non dubito, with the Infinitive, usually means I do not hesitate to: 

Non dubitem dicer e omnes sapient es semper beatos esse. Cic. I should not hesi- 

i to say that all wise men are always happy. 

Et dubitamus adhiic virtute extendere vires % Verg. And do ive still hesitate to 

md (our) power by (owe) prowess? Compare timeo, vereor, I fear, hesitate to. 

iSo occasionally non dubito quin. See K. 1. 

Roman i arbitrabantur non dubitaturum fortem virum quin cederet aequo 

.mo legibus. Cic. The Romans thought that a brave man would not hesitate to yield 

h equanimity to the laws. 

4. Non dubito with the Inf. for non dubito quin occurs chiefly in Nepos, Livy and 
r writers. 

Sunt multi qui quae turpia esse dubitare non possunt utilitatis specie ducti 
jbent- Quint. There are many who, led on by the appearance of profit, approve ivhat 
/ cannot doubt to be base. 

12* 



274 VERBS OF FEARING. 

IV. Verbs of Fearing. 

552. Verbs of Fearing are followed by the Present and Per- 
fect, Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. 

The Present Subjunctive represents the Present and Future 
Indicative. 

The Perfect Subjunctive regularly represents the Perfect In 
dicative. 

Present and Perfect Subjunctive become Imperfect and Plu 
perfect after a Past Tense. 

With Verbs of Fearing, ne, lest, shows that the negative h 
wished and the positive feared ; ut (ne non) shows that the posi 
tive is wished and the negative feared : ne non is used regularly 
after the negative, 

Timeo ne hostis veniat, I fear lest the enemy come, that he is coming\ 

that he will come. 
(I wish he may not come.) 
Timeo ne hostis venerit, I fear lest the enemy have come, 

that (it will turn out that) he has come. 
Timeo ut amicus veniat, I fear lest my friend come not, that he is n< 

coming, will not come. 
{I wish he may come.) 
Timeo ut amicus venerit, I fear lest my friend have not come, 

that he has not come. 
Non timeo ne amicus non veniat, I do not fear that my friend is n 

coming, will not come. 
Non timeo ne amicus venerit, I do not fear that my friend has not com 

Vereor ne dum minuere velim laborem augeam. Cic. Ifear lest, wh 
I wish to lessen the toil, I increase it (that lam increasing it). 

Veremur ne parum hie liber mellis et absinthii multum habere vid 
atur. Quint. / am afraid, that this book will seem to have too little honey a 
(too) much wormwood. 

Timeo ut sustineas labores. Cic. Ifear that you will not hold out unc 
your toils. 

Non vereor ne tua virtus opinioni hominum non respondeat. C 
I do not fear that your virtue will not answer to (come up to) public expe* 
tion. 

Metuo ne id consilii ceperim quod n5n facile explicare possim. C 
Ifear that I have formed a plan that I cannot readily explain. 



COXRECUTIVE SENTENCES. 275 

Unum illud extimescebam ne quid turpius facerem vel dicam jam 
effecissem, The only tiling I feared teas, lest I should act disgracefully, or, 1 
should (rather) say\ (lest) I had already acted disgracefully. 

Remarks.— 1. With the Infinitive, Verbs of Pear are Verbs of Will. So especially 
vereor, I fear to. 

Verebr te laudare praesentem. Cic. (424) (Vereor = prae timore nolo.) 

2. Vide ne, see to it lest, is often used as a polite formula for dubito an (459, R.), 
and has the same sequences. 

Vide ne plus profuttira sit ratio ordinaria. Sen. See to it lest (I am inclined to 
think that) the ordinary method will be the more profitable. 

CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 

Sentences of Tendency and Result. 

553. Consecutive Sentences are those sentences which show 
the Consequence or Tendency of Actions. In Latin, Eesult is 
a mere inference from Tendency, though often an irresistible 
inference. In other words, the Latin language uses so as 

^ij throughout, and not .so that, although so that is often a conve- 
nient translation. The result is only implied, not stated. 

554. Consecutive Sentences, or Sentences of Tendency and 
Eesult, have the Subjunctive mood. 

Consecutive Subjunctives are put in the Present or Perfect, 
1 Imperfect or Pluperfect Tense according to the rules for 
sequence. 

The introductory particle is ui 

In the leading clause, demonstratives are often employed in 
un correlation with ut, which is a relative. 

The Eelative is sometimes used, parallel with ut (632). 
The Negative is ut non, sometimes after negatives quln. 
J When the notion of Design or Condition enters, ne is also found, 

555. Consecutive Sentences are used after 

1. Demonstratives, 

2. Transitive and 

3. Intransitive Verbs, and 

4. Phrases, 

556. 1. Consecutive Sentences are largely used after De- 
monstratives expressed or implied. 

Tanta vis probitatis est, ut earn in hoste etiam diligamus. Cic. So 

great is the virtue of uprightness, that we love it even in an enemy. 



,/•!/(' 



all implying the creation or exis- 
tence of conditions that tend to 
a result. 



'■'!!• 



276 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 

Nemo tarn timidus est ut malit semper pendere quam semel cadere. 
Sex. No one is so timid as to prefer to be hanging always than to fall once 
{for alt). 

Neque me visisse paenitet quoniam ita vixi ut non frustra me natum 
existimem. Cic. (540.) 

Non is es ut te pudor unquam a turpitudine revocarit. Cic. You are 
iwt the man for shame ever to ham recalled you (= ever to have been re- 
called by shame) from baseness. 

Nemo adeo ferus est ut non mitescere possit. Hon. No one is so sav- 
age that he cannot (be made to) soften. 

After a negative quin = ut non : 

Nil tarn difficile est quin quaerendo investigari possiet (possit). Ter. 
Naught is so hard but it can ( == that it cannot) be tracked out by search. 

Nun quam tarn male est Siculis qnlnaliquid facete et commode dicant. 
Cic. The Sicilians are never so badly off as not to (have) something or other 
clever and pat (to) say. 

Remarks.— 1. Notice especially tantum abest (Irapers.) . . . ut . . . ut. The ori- 
gin of the phrase is shown by 

Tantum abest ab eo ut malum mors sit ut verear ne homini sit nihil bonum 
aliud- Cic. So far is it from death (= so far is death from) being an evil that I fear man 
has no other blessing. 

Tantum abest ut nostra miremur ut usque eo difficiles sumus ut nobis non 
satisfaciat ipse Demosthenes. Cic. So far are we from admiring our own (composi- 
tions) that we are so hard to please that Demosthenes himself fails to satisfy us. 

The personal construction can be used when an abstract follows. 

2. Dignus. worthy, indignus, unworthy, aptus, idoneus,^, take a consecutive sen- I 
tence. but usually with qui, seldom with ut : 

Digna fuit ilia natura quae meliora vellet. Quint. That nature was worthy of 
willing better things (= of better aims). 

3. A consecutive sentence follows quam ut (Cic.) or quam qui : 
Major sum quam ut mancipium sim mel corporis. Sen. (313.) 
Major sum quam cui possit Fortima nocere- Ov. (313.) 
On the omission of ut with potius quam (priusquam), see 579, R. 

4. !Ne, lest, is sometimes irregularly used instead of ut non, especially when the idea 
of design or wish intrudes : 

Ita me gessi ne tibi pudori essem- Liv. / behaved myself so as not to be a dis- 
grace to you. 

5. Ita— ut (sometimes ut alone), so that, often serves to restrict and condition. The 
negative is often ne (comp. 554). 

Ita probanda est mansuetudo at adhibeatur relpiiblicae causa" severitSs. Cic. 
Mildness is to be approved, so that (provided that) strictness be used for the sake of the com- 
monwealth. 

Ita frai volunt voluptatibus ut nulll propter e^s dolores consequantur, Cic. 
They wish to enjoy pleasures without having any pain to ensue on account of them. 

Pythagoras et Plato mortem ita laudant ut fugere vitam vetent, Cic, Py- 
thagoras and Plato so praise death that they, while they praise deaths forbid fleeing from 
life. 

Ita tii istaec tua misceto ne me admisceas. Ter. Mix up your mixings so you 
mix me not withal. 



1 
h 

5 
t 

ECC: 

P 

F 
la 

h 

so) 

Ac 

h 
k. 



5c 



CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 277 

6. Ut non is often — without and the English verbal in -ing ; 

Octavianus nunquam fllios suos populo commendavit ut non adjiceret : SI 
merebuntur. Suet. Octavianus (Augustus) never recommended his sons to the people 
in such a way as not to add (= without adding) : If they are worthy. 

Qui non vere virtiiti studet certe malet exlstimari bonus vir ut non sit 
raam esse ut non putetur. Cic. He who is not a true lover of virtue will certainly pre- 
fer being thought a good man without being such, to being (a good man) without being 
)elieved (to be such). 

After negatives quin = ut non- (550, E. 3.) 

557, 2. Verbs of Effecting belong partly to the Consecutive, 
tartly to the Final Sentence. The negative is non or ne ; the 
sequence, final. 

Such verbs are facio, efficio, perficio, I make, effect, achieve ; assequor, 
jonsequor, I attain, accomplish, and other verbs of Causation. Facere ut 
,s often little more than a periphrasis. 

Fortuna vestra facit ut irae meae temperem. Lrv. Your fortune 
causes that I (makes me) restrain my anger (put metes to my anger). 

Invitus (324, R 6) facio ut recorder ruinas reipublicae. Cic. (It is) 
gainst my will that I (am doing so as to) recall the ruined condition of the 
ommonwealth. 



I Negatives: 

Rerum obscuritas non verbSrum facit ut non intelligatur 5ratio. Cic. 

? is the obscurity of the subject, not of the words, that causes the language not 
9 be understood. 

Potestis efficere ut male moriar, ne moriar non potestis. Plik. Ep. 
You may make me die a hard death, keep me from dying you cannot. 

558. 3. Consecutive Sentences follow many Impersonal Verbs 
f Happening and Following, of Accident and Consequent: 

Such verbs are fit, accidit, contingit, it happens, usu venit, it occurs, 
ccedit, there is added, sequitur, it follows. So also est, it is the case. 
I Fieri potest ut fallar. Cic. (It) may be (that) I am mistaken. 

Potest fieri ut is unde te audisse dicis iratus dixerit. Cic. (It) may be 
hat) he from whom you say you heard (it) said it in anger. 

Persaepe evenit ut utilitas cum honestate certet. Cic. It very often 
\o) happens that profit is at variance with honor. 

Ad Appii Claudii senectutem accedebat etiam ut caecus esset. CiC. 
y o the old age of Appius Claudius was further added his being blind. 

Remark.— Very common is the periphrasis fore (futurum) ut, which gives the corn- 
on form of the Fut. Inf. See 240. 

559. 4. Many abstract phrases are followed by consecutive 
^ntences. 



278 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 

Such are : mos, consuetiido est, it is the icay, the wont, opus, usus est, 
there is need, and the like. More rarely after adjectives such as aequum, 
justum, fair, just, and the like. So with the Genitive after esse. 

The leading sentence is often a negative one to show the imaginary 
character of the result. 

J^P"" In all these relations the Accusative with the Inf. is more common. 

Est mos hominum ut nolint eundem pluribus rebus excellere. Cic. 
(540, R. 2.) 

An culquam est usus homini se ut cruciet ? Ter. (390, R.) 
Dionysio ne integrum quidem erat ut ad justitiam remigraret. CiC. 

Dionysius was not free even (if he had wished it) to return to justice. 

Est miserorum ut malevolentes sint atque invideant bonis. Plaut. 
Tfie wretched have a way of being ill-natured and envying the well-to-do. 

Rarum (= rar5 accidit) ut sit idoneus suae rel quisque defensor. 
Quint. It is rare for a man to be a good defender of his own case. 

Remark. — Necesse est, it is necessary, generally, and oportet, it behooves, always, 
omit ut : 

Leuctrica pugna immortalis sit necesse est. Nep. The battle of Leuctra must 
needs be immortal. 

Sed non effugies ; mecum moriaris oportet. Prop. Bui you shall not escape ; you 
must die with me. 

Exclamatory Questions. 

560. XJt with the Subjunctive is used in Exclamatory Ques- 
tions. 

Egone ut te interpellem ? Cic. I interrupt you f 

Tu ut unquam te corrigas ? Cic. You — ever reform yourself? 

Remark. — The expression is closely parallel with the Accusative and Infinitive. The 
one objects to the idea ; the other, to any state of things that could produce the result. It 
neither case is there any definite or conscious ellipsis. 

Temporal Sentences. 

561. The action of the Temporal or Dependent clause maj 
stand to the action of the Principal clause in one of thre< 
relations : 

I. It may be antecedent : 

Conjunctions : Postquam (Postea quam), after that, after; ut, as; ub: 
when (literally, where) ; simulac, as soon as ; ut prlmum, cum primum, th 
first moment that. 

II. It may be contemporaneous : 



AXTECEDE1ST ACTIOX. 279 

Conjunctions : Dum, donee, while, until ; quoad, up to (the time) that ; 
quamdiii, as long as ; cum, iphen. 

III. It may be subsequent : 

Conjunctions : Antequam, priusquam, before that, before. 
A special chapter is required by 

IV. Cum, when. 

Moods in Temporal Sentences. 

562. 1. The mood of Temporal clauses is regularly the 
■i Indicative. 

2. The Subjunctive is used only — 

l.)In Oratio Obllqua (509), Total or Partial. So also in the 
Ideal Second Person. 
2.) When the idea of Design or Condition is introduced. 



i/O:. 



I. ANTECEDENT ACTION. 

563. In historical narrative, Temporal Clauses with postquam, 
ubi, ut, simulac, ut primum, and cum prlmum commonly take the 
Historical Perfect or the Historical Present Indicative : 

The English translation is not unfrequently the Pluperfect. 

Postquam Caesar pervenit, obsides poposcit. Caes. After Caesar ar- 
rived, he demanded hostages. 

Quae ubi nuntiantur Romam, senatus extemplo dictatorem dici jusstt. 
rhoii JjiY. When these tidings were carried to Borne, the senate forthwith ordered a 
dictator to be appointed. 

Pompejus ut equitatum suum pulsum vidit, acie excessit. Caes. As 
Pompey saw his cavalry beaten, he left the line of battle. 

Pelopidas non dubitavit, simulac conspexit hostem, confligere (551, 
[ia|, R. 3.). Nep. As soon as he (had) caught sight of the enemy, Pelopidas did not 
7iesitate to engage (him). 

Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua : 

Ariovistum, ut semel Gallorum copias vicerit (O. R. vicit), superbe 
i. ( imperare. Caes. " That Ariovistus, as soon as he had once beaten the forces 
of the Gauls, exercised his rule arrogantly." 

Remark. — Postquam is rarely found with the Subjunctive outside of 0, 0. 

564. The Imperfect is used to express an action continued 
into the time of the principal clause (overlapping). 



280 ANTECEDENT ACTION. 

The translation of; en indicates the spectator (224, R. 1). 

Postquam nemo procedere audebat, intrat. Curt. After (he found 
that) no one hod the courage to come forth, he entered. 

Ubi nemo obvius ibat, ad castra hostium tendunt. Liv. When (they 
saw that) no one was coming to meet them, they proceeded to tlie camp of tJie 
enemy. 

Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua: 

ScripsistI eum, postquam n5n auderet (O. R. non audebat) reprehen- 

dere, laudare coepisse. Cic. You wrote that, after he could not get up the 

courage to blame, he began to praise. 

565. 1. The Pluperfect is used to express an action com- 
pleted before the time of the principal clause ; often of the Re- 
sulting Condition. 

Albinus postquam decreverat n5n egredi provincia, milites stativis 
castrls habebat. Sall. After Albinus had fully determined not to depart 
from the province, he kepi his soldiers in cantonments. 

Posteaquam multitudinem collegerat emblematunij instituit officinam. 

Cic. After he had got together a great number of figures, he set up shop. 

566. 2. The Pluperfect is used with postquam when a definite 

interval is mentioned. 

Post and quam are often separated. With an Ablative of Measure, 
post may be omitted. 

Aristides decessit fere post annum quartum quam Themistocles Athe- 
nis erat expulsus. Xep. Aristides died about four years after Themistocles 
had been (was) banished from Athens. 

Hamilcar nono anno postquam in Hispaniam venerat occisus est. 
ZSTep. Hamilcar was Jcilled nine years after he came to Spain. 

Aristides sexto fere anno quam erat expulsus in patriam resti tutus 
est. Xep. Aristides was restored to his country about six years after he was 
exiled. 

Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua: 

Scriptum a Poslddnio est triginta annis vixisse Panaetium postea- 
quam librcs de ofSciis edidisset. Cic. It is recorded by Posidonius that 
Panaetius need thirty years after he put forth his books on Duties. 

The attraction is sometimes neglected. 

Remark. — The Historical Perfect is also in frequent use: 

Nero natus est Antii post novem menses quam Tiberius excessit Suet. Nero 
was born at Antium nine month- after Tiberius departed (this life). 
On the Iterative P'upe.fect, see below, 568. 



ITERATIVE ACTION. 281 

567. Postquam and the like, with the Present and Perfect 
Indicative, assume a causative signification (compare quoniam, 
noiv that == since) : 

Curia minor mihi videtur posteaquam est major. Cic. The senate-house seems 
to me smaller novj that it is (really) greater. 

Tremo horreoque post quamaspexl hanc Tek. I quiver and shiver since I have 
seen her. 

So cum sometimes : 

Gratulor tibi cumtantum vales. Cic. I wish you joy now that you have so much 
influence. 

Iterative Action. 

568. Eule I. — When two actions are repeated contempora- 
neously, both are put in tenses of continuance : 

Humiles laborant ubi potentes dissident. Phaedr. The lowly suffer 
\when the powerful disagree. 

Populus me slbilat; at mihi plaudo ipse domi simulac nummos con- 
templor in area. Hon. The people hiss me ; but I clap myself at home as soon 
as I gloat o'er my cash in the strong box. 

Ut quisque maxime laborabat locus aut ipse occurrebat aut aliquos 
mittebat. Liv. As each point was hard pressed, he would either hasten to help 
himself or send some persons. 

The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person : 

Bonus segnior fit ubi negligas. Sall. A good man becomes more slug- 
gish tchen you 'neglect him. 

569. Eule II. — When one action is repeated before another, 
the antecedent action is put in the Perfect, Pluperfect, or Fu- 
ture Perfect ; the subsequent action, in the Present, Imperfect, or 
Future, according to the relation. 



As this use runs through all sentences involving antecedent action, all the 
classes are represented in the following examples: 

Remark.— Observe the greater exactness of the Latin expression. Comp. 236, R. 2. 

Quoties ceciditj surgit, As often as he falls, he rises. 

Quoties cecideratj surgebat, As often as he fell, he rose. 

Quoties ceciderit, surget, As often as he falls, he will rise. 

Simul inflavit tibicen a perito carmen, agnoscitur. Cic. As soon as the 
fluter blows, the song is recognized by the connoisseur. 

Alcibiades simulac se remlserat, luxuriosus reperiebatur. Nep. As 
soon as Alcibiades relaxed, he was found a debauchee. 



£82 ITERATIVE ACTION. 

Dociliora sunt ingenia prius quam obduruerunt. Quint. Minds are 
more teachable before they (have) become hardened. 

Ager quum multos annos requievit, uberidres efferre fruges solet. CiC. 
When afield has rested (rests) many years, it usually produces a more abun- 
dant crop. 

Quum palam ejus anuli ad palmam converterat Gyges,a nullo vide- 
batur. Cic. Whenever) Gyges turned the bezel of the ring toward the palm 
(of his hand), he was to be seen by no one. 

Si pes condoluit, si dens, ferre non possumus. Cic. If afoot, if a tooth 
ache(s), we cannot endure it. 

Stomachabatur senex, si quid aaperius dixeram. Cic. The old man 
used to be fretted, if I said anything (that was) rather harsh. 

Quod non dedit fortuna non eripit. Sen. What fortune has not given 
(does not give), she does not take away. 

Haerebant in memoria quaecumque audierat et viderat [Themisto- 
cles]. Nep. Whatever Themistocles had heard and seen (= heard and saw) 
remained fixed in his memory. 

Qui timere desierint, odisse incipient. Tac. Those who cease to fear 
will begin to hate. 

The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person: 

Ubi consuluerls, mature facto opus est. Sall. When you have delibe- 
rated, you icant speedy action. 

The Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua : 

Cato mirari se ajebat quod n5n rideret haruspex haruspicem cum 
vidisset. Cic. Cato said that he wondered that an haruspex did not laugh when 
he saw (another) haruspex. (Non ridet cum vidit.) 

The Subjunctive by Attraction: 

Rete texunt araneolae ut si quid inhaeserit conficiant. Cic. (Si quid 
inhaesitj conficiunt.) 

Quare fiebat, ut omnium oculos, quotiescunque in publicum prodisset, 
ad se converteret. Nep. (Quotiescunque prodierat, convertebat.) 
(66G.) 

Remark.— The Subjunctive (Imperf. and Pluperf.) is sometimes found in Iterative 
Sentences— chiefly after the Imperf. Ind. or some combination which shows Will, Habit, 
Expectation. The construction is best explained by Partial Obliquity (509, 8). It is found 
chiefly in later historians and in Nepos. The passages in Caesar are not numerous, and 
tome are uncertain. * 

Incurrere ea gens in Macedoniam solita erat ubi regem occupatum externo 
bello sensisset- Lit. That tribe was wont to make a raid in Macedonia whenever they 
perceived the king engrossed in foreign war. 



CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION. 283 

Qui unum ejus ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat Liv. Whoso had 
offended one of that order was sure to have all against him. 

Modum adhibendo ubi res posceret priores erant. Liv. By the use of moderation, 

when the case demanded it, they were his superiors. 

So sometimes the Perf. Subj. with the Pres. Indicative. Compare 666, R. 2. 



II. CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION. 

570. Conjunctions used of Contemporaneous Action are : 
Dum, donee, while, so long as, until ; quoad, up to (the time) 

that ; quamdiu, as long as ; cum, when. 

An action may be contemporaneous in Extent — so long as, 
while. 

An action may be contemporaneous in Limit — until. 

Remark.— Dum (while) yet, denotes duration, which maybe coextensive, so long as, 
or not. It is often causal. Donee (old form donicum, of uncertain composition), paral- 
lel with dum in the sense, so long as, until. Cicero uses it only as until. Quum (cum) 
demands a separate treatment. 

I. Contemporaneous in Extent. 
(So long as, while.) 

571. Dum, donee, quoad, quamdiu, so long as, while, take the 
Indicative of all the tenses. 

Dum vitant stulti vitia in contraria currunt. Hor. Fools, while they 
avoid (one set of) faults, run into the opposite. 

Sibi vero hanc laudem relinquunt, " Vixit, dum vixit, bene." Ter. 
They leave indeed this praise for themselves, " He lived well while he lived " 
(all the time). 

Tiberius Gracchus tamdiu laudabitur dum memoria rerum Roma- 
narum manebit. Cec. Tiberius Gracchus shall be praised so long as the 
memory of Roman history remains (shall remain). 

Fuit haec gens fortis dum Lycurgi leges vigebant. Cic. This nation 
was brave so long as the laws of Lycurgus toere in force. 

Donee gratus eram tibi, Persarum vigui rege beatior. Hor. While I 
was acceptable in your sight, I throve more blessed than Persia's king. 

Quoad potuit, restitit. Cic. As long as he could, he withstood. 

Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua : 

[Regulus dixit] quamdiu jurejurando hostium teneretur non esse se 
senatorem. Cic. [Regulus said] that as long as he icas bound by his oath to 
the enemy he was not a Senator* (Quamdiu teneor ndn sum senator.) 

Dum often resists the change. (658, R. 3.) 



"284 CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION. 

Subjunctive by Attraction: 

Vereor ne, dum minuere velim, laborem augeam. CiC. (552.) (Dum 
minuere volo, augeo.) 

Remark. —When the actions are coextensive, the tenses are generally the same in both 
members, bat not always. Dum with the Pluperf. Ind. is used of the Resulting con- 
dition. Liv. xxxii. 24. 

572. Dum, while, while yet, commonly takes the Present In- 
dicative after all Tenses : so especially in narrative. 

Cape hunc equum, dum tibi virium aliquid superest. Lrv. Take this 
horse, while you have yet some little strength left. 

Dum haec Romae aguntur, consules ambo in Liguribus gerebant bel- 
lum. Liv. While these things were going on at Borne, both consuls were carry- 
ing on war in Liguria. 

Praetermissa ejus rel pccasio est, dum in castellis recipiendis tempus 
teritur. Lrv. The opportunity was allowed to slip by, while time was wasted 
in recovering miserable forts. 

Remark. — The relation is often causal, and the construction is parallel with the Pre- 
sent Participle, the lack of which in the Passive it supplies. Here the Present Ind. is 
simply a tense of continuance rather than an Hist. Present. 

II. Contemporaneous in Limit. 
{Until.) 

573. Dum, donee, quoad, up to (the time) that, until, have the 
Present and Perfect and Future Perfect Indicative: 

The Present is either an Historical Present, or looks forward to the 
Future. 

Tityre, dum rede5, brevis est via, pasce capellas. Yerg. Tityrus, 
while I am returning (= till I return) — the way is short—feed my kids. 

Epamin5ndas ferrum in corpore usque eo retinuit, quoad renuntia- 
tum est vicisse Boeoti5s. Nep. Epaminondas retained the iron in his 
body, until tcord was brought back that the Boeotians had conquered. 

Donee rediit Marcellus, silentium fuit. Liv. Until Marcellus returned, 
there was silence. 

Haud desinam donee perfecero. Ter. I will not cease until I have 
(shall have) accomplished (it). 

Exspectabo dum venit. Ter. I will wait until he comes. 

Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua : 

Scipioni Silanoque donee revocati ab senatu forent prorogatum im- 
perium est. Liv. Scipio and Silanus had their command extended until 
u they should have been recalled by the senate." 



DUM WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 285 

574. Dum, donee, and quoad, until, take the Subjunctive when 
Suspense and Design are involved: 

Verginius dum collegam consuleret moratus est. Liv. Verginius 
delayed until he could (long enough to) consult his colleague. 

At tibi sit tanti non indulgere theatris, dum bene de vacu5 pectore 
cedat amor. Ov. But let it be worth the cost to you {— deem it worth the 
cost) not to indulge in play-going, until love be fairly gone from (your) unten- 
anted bosom. 

Often with exspecto, Itvait : 

Rusticus exspectat dum defluat amnis. Hor. The clown waits for the 
river to run off (dry). 

Also : exspectare ut, si (never Infinitive), 462, 2. 

Remark. — The Subjunctive is sometimes used in narrative with dutli, while, and 
donee, while, until, to express subordination (like cum, 585). The principle is that of 
Partial Obliquity. There is often a Causal or Iterative sense. 

Dum intentus in eum se rex totus averteret, alter elatam securim in caput 
dejecit. Liv. While the king fixed upon him was quite turned away, the other raised his 
axe and planted it in his skull. (Averteret from the point of view of alter = dum videt 
avertentem.) 

575. Dum, with the Subjunctive, is used in Conditional 
Wishes : Negative, dum ne = ne interim. 

Oderint dum metuant. Atttus. Let them hate so long as they fear (pro- 
vided that, if they will only fear). 

Dumne ob malefacta peream parvi [id] aestimo. Plaut. (379.) 

So also dummodOj modo, provided only, only : 

Dummodo morata recte veniat, dotata est satis. Plaut. Provided 
only she come with a good character, she is endowed (=her dowry is) enough. 

Multa [in eo] admiranda sunt : oligere modo curae sit. Quint. Many 
things in him are to be admired ; only you must be careful to choose. 

Copia placandi sit modo parva tui. Ov. (429, R. 1.) 



III. SUBSEQUENT ACTION. 

Antequam and Priusquam with the Indicative. 

576. Antequam and priusquam, before, take the Present, Per- 
fect, and Future Perfect Indicative, when the limit is stated as 
a fact. 

Remark.— The present is used in anticipation of the future. The elements ante, 
antea, prius — quam, are often separated. 



'O'. ASTKQUAM AHD P&IUSQUA1L 

577, TL_- 3. — .::- I:. .:; ~:""t is :.— ". After Positive Sentences : 

Anteqnam ad 5en7en:i?.m redec. de me pauca die am. ClC Before I 
return to the subject, I wiU say a few things of myself 

O mni a experiri certain est priusquam per eo. Tz 
try everything befor 7 Priusquam peream = s : iiir: _ n t1;_ 

to keep from perishing.) 

: >,r k. — The Pare Perfect Indicate is used ::' Herati n; Action. (569.) 
Dociliora sunt ingenia priusquam obdHra grant . u ra i 

575, The Perfect (Aorist) and Future Perfect Indicative are 
:-:.. -;::::,.-- after Xegarive Sentences After P;s:ti~e Sen- 
tences there is no necessary connection. 

LegaU n5n ante pre fee:: quarn imp c sites in naves milites viderunt. 
Liv I~ -. z : : i c?*# /aetf «e£ <?i^ &#?# lAe^ amp fA« soldiers on board. 

Neque de:a::ree:r anteq-eam iilerum vias ratienesque percepero. et 
pr5 omnibus et contra omnia dispntandi. ClC. 1 until not 
weary before (until) 1 learn (shall have learned; ~ 
: \:. ;::.:. ir , .-_ : :\i .;. 

9 il jnn stive in Otario OUlqaa : 

Tnemisteeles celiegts sues prae dixit, ut ne prius Lacedaemonierum 
legates dlmi::erent q'jam ipse esset remissus. INep. ;-:' Nellte dl- 
rri::ere priusquam ege ere remissus 

Au:equam : ': Priusquam ztice. 

579. Antequar:: too priusquam are used with the Subjunt 
when an ideal limit u g ren : when toe action is expected, con- 
tuu' entj lesigned, ibordinat 

An ideal limit involves necessary anteceden 

sequence. After Positive sentences, S : cially 

ric sentences and in naror are cur*. 185. The Sub 

junctive is absolutely necessary when the action does n take 

translation is often before, and in -tw^. 

Ante vidimus fulguratienem quam sonum audiamus %EH 
. __ ..-.._...- .:. .. ... ■ ._. ^ . . . ^ ; - _■-_- ^ve may nevei hear it). 

In omnibus negetits priusquam aggrediare adhibenda est praeparatio 






CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM. .. : '. 



Collem celeriter priusquam ab adversariis sentiatur coirim-lni! Gaes 
eedity fortified the hill before he was jx. soon to 

De perceived by the enemy). (Prius quam = prius quam oft.] 

Hannibal omnia priusquam excederet pugna erat expertu3. Ln 
Hannibal had tried everything before withdrawing from the fir'.- — \ _ 
»yitli drawing from the fight). 

Saepe magna indoles virtutis prius quam rei publicae prodesse potu- 
jsset exstincta fuit. Cic. Often hath great natim worth 
tefore it could be of service to the State. 

Ducentis annis antequam urbem Romam caperent in Italiam Galli 
iescenderunt. Lit. (It was) two hundred taking L 

the Gauls came down into Italy. 

Here the Subjunctive gives the natural point of refer- .. 

After the Negative : 

Inde non prius egressus est quam mon priusquam = dcnec rex eum 
ji fidem reciperet. Xep. He did not go away until the '-. 

-otection. (He stayed to make the king take him under his protec- 
• ion.) 

Eemakk.— When the will is involved, potius quam is used in the aune ~ - is prius 
main. 

Depugna potius quam servias. Cic. Fight it out rather than bt 

I IV. CONSTRUCTION OF CUM QUUM\ 

580. Cum is a relative conjunction, and stands nearer tc the 
lative than to the Accusative in signification, per": in 

form (quo(fi)m). Cum is the cl - ; M Ine 

;• pronunciation. 
581. There are three great uses of cum : 
I. Temporal cum (whe —41 lakes :he Indicative : 
II. Historical cum, as, the Imperfect and Plnperfeci Sub- 
junctive : 

1. Causal cum, as. since : and 

2. Concessive cum, whereas. aWio: ta) ; i&e Snbjnne- 

tive. 

I. Cum ver appetit, milites ex hibernis movent. 

- i 'diers move out of winter-qua 
II. Cum ver appeteret, Hannibal ex hibernis movit. 
approaching (spring approaching), Hannil 

III. 1. Cum ver appetat, ex hibernis movendum es: ring 

roaching, we must move out of winter-quarters. 




888 TEMPORAL CUM. 

III. 2. Cum ver appeteret, tamen hostes ex hibernis non moverunt, 

Whereas (although) spring teas approaching, nevertheless the enemy did not 

move out of ivinter-quarters. 

Remark.— So called cum inversum (cum in the apodosis) is as natural in English as 
in Latin : 

Jam ver appetebat, cum Hannibal ex hibernis movit Liv. Spring was (already) 
approaching, when Hannibal moved out of winter-quarters. 

According to 581, I., it is, of course, put in the Indicative. 



I. Temporal Cum. 

582. Cum, when, is used with all the tenses of the Indicative, 
to designate merely temporal relations. 

In the Principal clause, a temporal adverb or temporal expression is fre- 
quently employed, such as turn, tunc, then; nunc, now; dies, day ; tempus, 
time ; jam, already ; vlx, scarcely ; and the like. 

Animus, nee cum adest nee cum discedit, apparet. Cic. The soul is not 
visible, either when it is present, or when it departs. 

Sex libros tunc de Republica scrlpsimus cum gubernacula reipublicae 
tenebamus. Cic. I wrote the six books about the State at the time wlien I held 
the helm of the State. 

Recordare tempus illud cum pater Curio maerens jacebat in lectS 
Cic. Remember the time when Curio the father lay abed from grief. 

Longum illud tempus cum non ero magis me movet quam hoc exi 
guum. Cic. That long time (to come), when I shall not exist, has moi*e effecx 
on me than this scant (present time). 

Jam dilucescebat cum signum consul dedit. Liv. By this time day 
was beginning to daicn, when the consul gave the signal. (See 580, R.) 

Ideal Second Person with the Subjunctive : 

Pater, hominum immortalis est infamia. Etiam turn vivit cum esse 
ere das mortuam. Plaut. Father, immortal is the ill-fame of the world. 1\ 
lives on even when you think that it is dead. 

Remarks.— 1. Fuit cum commonly follows the analogy of other characteristic rela 
tives (633), and takes the Subjunctive : 

Fuit tempus cum (=fuit cum) rura colerent homings. Varro. There was a tim< 
when mankind lived in the country. 

The Indicative is rare. 

2. Meminl cum, / remember the time when, takes the Indicative ; but audire cunj 
takes the Subjunctive parallel with the Participle: 

Audlvl Mgtrodorum cum de his ipsis disputaret. Cic. I have heard Metrodoru 
disc m s(ing) these very matters. 

3. Peculiar is the use of cum with Lapses of Time. Lapses of Time are treated a; 
Designations of Time in Accusative or Ablative : 

Muitl anni sunt cum (= multos annos) in aere meo est. {It is) many years (tbat 
he has been (221) in my debt. 



HISTORICAL CUM. 289 

Mnlti annl sunt cum (= multis annls) in aere meo non fuit. It is many years 
that he has not been (since he was) in my debt. 

Nondum centum et decern annl sunt cum (= ex quo = abhinc annis) de pe- 
cuniis repetundis lata lex est- Cic. It is not yet 110 years since the law concerning ex- 
tortion was proposed, 

583. Coincident Action. — When the actions of the two 
clauses are coincident, cum is almost equivalent to its kindred 
relative quod, in that : 

Cum tacent, clamant. Cic. When (= in that) they are silent, they cry 
aloud. 

Dixl omnia cum hominem nominavl. Plin. Ep. I have said everything, 
in naming the man. 

584. Conditional use of Cum. — Cum with the Future, Future 
Perfect, or Universal Present, is often almost equivalent to si, 
if with which it is sometimes interchanged : 

Cum poscis 3 posce Latine. Juv. When (If) you ask (for anything), 
ask in Latin. 

Cum veniet contra, digito compesce labellum. Juv. When (If) he 

^ meets you, padlock your lip with your finger. 

585. Iterative use of Cum.— Cum in the sense of quoties, as 
often as, takes the Tenses of Iterative Action : 

Solet cum se purgat in me conferre omnem culpam. Cic. He is accus- 
tomed, when he clears himself, to put off all the blame on me. 

Ager cum multos annos requievit uberiores efferre fruges solet. Cic. 

Cum palam ejus anuli ad palmam converterat Gyges a null5 videba- 
tur. Cic. (569.) 



I 1 



Remark.— The Subjunctive is also found (569, R.) : 

Cum in jus duel debitorem vidissent, undique convolabant. Liv. Whenever 
they saw a debtor taken to court, they made it a rule to hurry together from all quarters. 



II. Historical Cum. 

586. Cum, whe?i (as), is used in narrative with the Imperfect 
cu 11 Subjunctive of contemporaneous action, with the Pluperfect 
p Subjunctive of antecedent action. 

, Remark.— The subordinate clause generally precedes, and often indicates Causal as 

' well as Temporal relation. The Subjunctive in some cases seems to be due to the Latin 
tendency to express inner connection (evolution) by the Subjunctive. In the absence 
of participles, cum with the Subjunctive is a parallel construction. 

13 






290 CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CUM. 

Agesilaus cum ex Aegyptd reverteretur decessit. ]STep. Agesilaus 
died as he was returning from Egypt. 

Zendnem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter. Cic. When I was 
(Being-) at Athens, Iheard Zeno (lecture) frequently. 

Athenienses cum statuerent ut naves conscenderent, Cyrsilum quen- 
dam suadentem ut in urbe manerent, lapidibus cooperuerunt. Cic. 
(546.) 

Cum Caesar Anconam occupasset, urbem reliquimus. Cic. When 
(As) Caesar had occupied Aneona (Caesar having occupied Ancona), I left the 
city. 

Attalus moritur alter5 et septuagesimo ann5, cum quattuor et qua- 
draginta annos regnasset. Lit. Attalus died in his seventy -second year, 
having reigned forty -four years. 

III. Causal and Concessive Cum. 
1. Causal Cum. 

587. Cum, when, ivhereas, since, seeing that, with the Sub- 
junctive, is used to denote the reason, and occasionally the 
motive, of an action : 

Quae cum it a sint, effectum est nihil esse malum quod turpe non sit. 
Cic. Since these tilings are so, it is made out (proved) that nothing is bad that 
is not dishonorable. 

Cum Athenas tanquam ad mercaturam bonarum artium sis profectus, 
inanem redire turpissimum est. Cic. As (Since) you set out for Athens as 
if to market for good qualities, it would be utterly disgraceful to return empty 
(handed). 

Dolo erat pugnandum, cum par n5n esset armis. Nep. He had to fight 
by stratagem, as he (seeing that he) was not a match in arms. 

Remark.— The Subjunctive is used because the relation is a mere conception (charac- 
teristic); that it is a mere conception is emphasized by quippe and utpote, as in the 
relative sentence. 

On the occasional use of cum with the Ind. in a causal sense, see 567. Oftener in 
earlier Latin 

2. Concessive Cum. 

588. Causal cum, ivhereas, becomes Concessive cum, whereas, 
although, when the cause is not sufficient : the relation is often 

adversative. 

Nihil me adjuvit cum posset. Cic. He gave me no assistance, althougl 
(at a time when) he had it in his power. 

Cum primi ordines hostium concidissent, tamen acerrime reliqui re 



CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 291 

sistebant. Caks. Although ike first ranks of the enemy had fallen (been cut 
to pieces), nevertheless the rest resisted most vigorously. 

Perire artem putamus nisi apparet, cum desinat ars esse, si apparet. 
Quint. We think thai (our) art is lost unless it shows, whereas it ceases to be 
art if it shows. 

589. Cum — turn. — When cum, when, turn, then (both — and 
especially), have the same verb, the verb is put in the Indica- 
tive : 

Pausanias consilia cum patriae turn sibi inimica capiebat. Nep. 

Pausanias conceived plans that were hurtful both to his country and especially 
to himself. 

When they have different verbs, the verb with cum may be 
in the Subjunctive, which often has a concessive force : 

Sisennae historia cum facile omnes superiores vincat, turn indicat 
tamen quantum absit a summo. Cic. Although the history of Sisenna easily 
surpasses all former histories, yet it shows how far it is from the highest 
(mark). 

Conditional Sentences. 

590. In Conditional sentences the clause which contains 
the condition (supposed cause) is called the Protasis, that which 
contains the consequence is called the Apodosis. 

Logically, Protasis is Premiss ; and Apodosis, Conclusion. 
Grammatically, the Apodosis is the Principal, the Protasis the 
Dependent, clause. 

591. Sign of the Conditional. — The common conditional 
particle is si, (/. 

Remarks.— 1. SI is a locative case, literally so, in those circumstances (comp. sic so). 
So in English : " I would by combat make her good, so were I a man. 1 ' — Shakesp. 
Hence, Conditional clauses with si may be regarded as adverbs in the Ablative case, 
and are often actually represented by the Ablative Absolute. 

2. The connection with the Causal Sentence is shown by si quidem, which in later 
Latin is almost = quoniam. 

3. The temporal particles cum and quando, when, and the locative ubi, are also used 
to indicate conditional relations in which the idea of Time or Space is involved. 

592. Negative of si. — The negative of si is either si non or nisi. 
Si non negatives a particular word, if not ; nisi, unless, nega- 
tives the whole idea — restricts, excepts. 

Si non is the rule — 



292 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

1. AVhen the positive of the same verb precedes : 

Si feceris, magnam habebo gratiam ; si non feceris, ignoscam. ClC. 

If you do it, I will be very grateful to you ; if you do not, I will forgive (you). 

2. When the Condition is concessive : 

Si mihi bona republica frui non licuerit, at carebo mala. Cic. If I 

shall not be alloiced to enjoy good government, I shall at least be rid of bad. 

Nisi is in favorite use after negatives : 

Parvi (= nihil!) sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. Cic. Of 

little (value) are arms abroad unless there is wisdom at home. 

Non possem vivere nisi in litteris viverem. Cic. I could not live un- 
less I lived in study. 

Memoria minuitur nisi earn exerceas. Cic. Memory wanes unless (ex- 
cept) you exercise it. (Si non exerceas, in case you fail to exercise it.) 

So nisi si, except in case : 

Miseros illudi nolunt homines nisi si se forte jactant. Cic. Men do not 
like to have the unfortunate mocked unless (except in case) they happen to 
swagger. 

Remarks. — 1. Sometimes the difference is unessential : 

Nisi Curio fuisset, hodie te muscae comedissent- Quint. If it had not been/or 

Curio, the flies would have eaten you up this day. Si non fuisset would be equally correct. 

2. Nisi and nisi Si are often used after negitive sentences or equivalents in the signi 
fication of but, except, besides, only : 

Inspice quid port em ; nihil hie nisi triste videbis, Ov. Examine what lam 
bringing y you will see nothing here except (what is) sad. 

Falsus honor juvat et mendax infamia terret, quern nisi mendacem et men- 
dosum? Hon " False honor charms and lying slander scares, whom but the false and 
faulty ?"> — Brougham. 

3. Nisi quod introduces an actual limitation — with the exception, that: 
Nihil acciderat [Polycrati] quod nollet nisi quod anulum quo delectabatur 

in marl abjecerat. Cic. Nothing had happened to Polycrates that he could not havel 
wished, except that he had thrown into the sea a ring in which he took delight (== a favorite; 
ring). So praeterquam quod. 

Nihil peccat nisi quod nihil peccat. Plin. Ep. He makes no blunder except- -tha 
he makes no blunder ( kt faultily faultless "). 

4. Nisi forte, unless perhaps, nisi vero, unless indeed, with the Indicative, eithe 
limits a previous statement, or makes an ironical concession : 

Nemo fere saltat sobrius nisi forte insanit- Cic. There is scarce any one tha\ 
dances (when) sober, unless perhaps he is cracked. 

Licet honesta morte defungi, ni3i forte satius est victoris exspectare arbi 
trium. Curt. We are free to die an honorable death, unless perhaps it is better to awai 
the pleasure of the conqueror. 

5. Nl is antiquated or poetical, and is equivalent to si non : 
Nl parere veils, pereundum erit ante lucernas. Juv. (532, R. 3.) 
So in oaths, promises, and the like : 
Peream nl piscem putavl esse. Vauro. May I die if I did not think it was a fish, 



CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293 

593. Two Conditions excluding each the other. — When two 
conditions exclude each the other, si is used for the first; sin, if 
not (but if), for the second. 

Sin is further strengthened by autem, but; minus, less {not) ; 
secus, other ivise ; aliter, else : 

Mercatura, si tenuis est, sordida putanda est ; sin magna et copiSsa, 

non est admodum vituperanda. Cic. Mercantile business, if it is petti/, is 
to be considered dirty (work) ; if (it is) not (petty, but) great and abundant 
(= conducted on a large scale), it is not to be found fault with much. 

Remark.— If the Verb or Predicate is to be supplied from the context, si minus, if 
less (not), sin minus, sin aliter, if otherwise, are commonly used, rarely si non : 

Ediic tecum omnes tuos ; si minus, quam pliirimos. Cic. Take out with you all 
your (followers) ; if not, as many as possible. 

Odero si potero ; si non, invitus amabo. Ov. (234, R. 2.) 

594. Other Forms of the Protasis. — 1. The Protasis may be 
expressed by a Relative : 

Qui videret urbem captam diceret. Cic. Whoso had seen it, had said 
that the city id as taken. 
Miraretur qui turn cerneret. Lrv. (252.) 

2. The Protasis may be contained in a Participle : 

Si latet ars, pr5dest ; affert deprensa pudorem. Ov. If art is concealed, 
it does good ; (if) detected, it brings shame. 

Maximas virtutes jacere omnes necesse est voluptate dominante. 
irf Cic. All the greatest virtues must necessarily lie prostrate^ if the pleasure (of 
the senses) is mistress. 

Nihil potest evenire nisi causa antecedente. Cic. Nothing can happen, 
JJ unless a cause precede. 

3. The Protasis may be involved in a modifier : 

Fecerunt servi Milonis quod suos quisque servos in tali re facere 
Hl voluisset. Cic. The servants of Milo did what each man would have wished 
his servants to do in such case (si quid tale accidisset). 

At bene non pnterat sine puro pectore vivi. Lucr. But there could be 
itW'-no good living without a clean heart (nisi prirum pectus esset). 

4. The Protasis may be expressed by an Interrogative, or, 
what is more common, by an Imperative : 

Tristis es ? indignor quod sum tibi causa doloris. Ov. (542.) 



29-1 LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

Cedit amor rebus : res age, tutus eris. Ov. Love yields to business ; do 
business (if you plunge into business), you will be safe. 

Immuta verborum collocationem, perierit tota res. CiC. (236, R. 4.) 

595. Correlatives of Si. — The correlatives of Si are : Sic, so ; 
ita, thus J but they are commonly not expressed. Occasionally 
turn, then; and ea condicione, on those terms, are employed. 

De frument5 responsum est ita usurum eo populum Romanum, si pre- 
tium acciperent. Liv. In the matter of the corn, answer was made that the 
Roman people would avail themselves of it, on condition that they accepted the 
value. 



CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

596. Conditional sentences may be divided into three classes, 
according to the character of the Protasis:* 

I. Logical Conditional Sentences: Si, with the Indicative. 
II. Ideal Conditional Sentences : Si, with Present and Per- 
fect Subjunctive. 
III. Unreal Conditional Sentences: Si, with Imperfect and 
Pluperfect Subjunctive. 



I. LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

597. The Logical Conditional Sentence simply states the | 
elements in question, according to the formula: 

If this is so, then that is so ; if this is not so, then that is not j 
so. 

It may be compared with the Indicative Question. 

The Protasis is in the Indicative; the Apodosis is generally inj 
the Indicative; but in future relations any equivalent of the | 
Future (Subjunctive, Imperative) may be used. 



I 



* In some grammar? of Greek and Latin, conditional sentences, and sentences involve! 
ing conditional relations, have been divided into particular and general. Whether a con- 
dition be particular or general depends simply on the character of the Apodosis. Any! 
form of the Conditional Sentence may be general, if it implies a rule of action. ThejH 
forms for Iterative action have been given. (568, 569.) 



LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295 

Protasis. Apodosis. 

Si id credis, erras, 

If you believe that, you are going wrong. 

Si id credebas, errabas, 

If you believed that, you were going wrong. 

Si id credidisti, errastl, 

If you (have) believed that, you have gone (you went) wrong. 

Si id credes, errabis, 

If you (shall) believe that, you will (be) go(ing) wrong: (234, R.S). 

Si id credideris, erraveris, 

If you (shall have) believe(&) that, you will have gone (will go) wrong. 

Si quid credidisti, erras. 

If you have believed anything 

(= when you believe anything), you go wrong. Comp. 569. 

Si quid credideras, errabas. 

If you had believed anything 

(= when you believed anything), you went wrong. 

Si spiritum ducit, vivit. Cic. If he is drawing (his) breath (breathing) 
he is living. 

Farvi sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. Cic. (412, R. 1.) 

Si occidi, recte feci ; sed non occidi. Quint. If I hilled him, I did 
right ; but I did not kill Mm. 

Naturam si sequemur ducem, nunquam aberrabimus. Cic. If we 
(shall) follow nature (as our) guide, ice shall never go astray. 

Improbos si meus consulatus sustulerit, multa saecula propagarit rel 
publicae. Cic. If my consulship shall have done away with the destructives, 
it will have added many ages to the life of the State. 

Si pes condoluit, si dens ? ferre non possumus. Cic. (569.) 

Stomachabatur senex, si quid asperius diseram. GiC. (569.) 

Vivam, si vivet ; si cadet ilia, cadam. Prop. Let me live, if she lives ; 
if site falls, let me fall. 

Nunc si forte potes, sed non potes, optima conjux, finitis gaude tot 
mini morte malls. Ov. Now, if haply you can, but you cannot, noble wife, 
rejoice that so many evils have been finished for me by death. 

Piectere si nequeo superos, Acheronta movebo. Yerg. If I can't 
bend the gods above, III rouse (all) hell below. 

Si tot exempla virtutis non movent, nihil unquam movebit \ si tanta 
clades vilem vitam non fecit 3 nulla faciet. Liv. If so many examples of 
valor stir you not, nothing will ever do it; if so great a disaster has not made 
life cheap, none ever will. 

Desines timere si sperare desieris. Sen. You will cease to fear, if you 
oftfl (shall Jiave) cease(d) to Jpqe. 

Remarks.— 1. After a Verb of Saying or Thinking (Oratio Obliqua), the Protasis 
must be put in the Subjunctive, according to the rule. 



296 IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

(SI id credis, erras.) Dlco. te. si id credas. errare. 

dixi. te. si id crederes. errare. 
(Si id credes, errabis.) Dlco. te, si id credas. erraturum esse. 

dixi, te. si id crederes. erraturum esse. 
(Si id credidisti, errasti.) Dlco. te. slid credideris, errasse. 

dixi, te, si id credidisses, errasse. 

For examples, see Oratio Obllqua, 660. 

2. The Subjuncive is used by Attraction : 

Kete texunt araueolae ut si quid inhaeserit conficiant. Cic. (SI quid inhaesit, 
connciunt.) (667.) 

3. The Ideal Second Person takes the Subjunctive in connection with the Universal 
Present : 

Senectiis plena est voluptatis si ilia scias uti. Sen. Old age is full of pleasure, 
if you know (if one knows) how to make use of it. 

Memoria minuitur nisi earn exerceas. Crc. (592.) 

4. SIve— slve (seu— seu) almost invariably takes the Logical form. (499.) 

Seu vlcit. ferociter instat victls ; seu victus est, instaurat cum victorious cer- 
tamen. Liv. If he vanquishes (569), he presses the vanquished furiously ; if he is van- 
quished, he renews the struggle with tJie vanquishers. 

II. IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

598. The Ideal Conditional Sentence represents the matter 
as still in suspense. The supposition is more or less fanciful, 
and do real test is to be applied. There is often a wish for or 
against. 

The Protasis is put in the Present Subjunctive for continued 
action, and in the Perfect Subjunctire for completion or attain- 
ment. 

The Apodosis is in the Present or Perfect Subjunctive. 
The Imperative and Future Indicative or equivalents are often 
found. The Universal Present is frequently used, especially in 
combination with the Ideal Second Person. 

On the difference between Subjunctive and Future, see (27.) 

Protasis. Apodosis. 

Si id credas, erres, 

If you should (were to) believe that, you would be going wrong. 

Si id credas, erraveris, 

If you sluovld (were to) believe that, you would go wrong. 

Si id credideris, erres, 

1. If you should (prove to) have believed, 

that (Perfect ; Action Past or Future), you would be going wrong. 

2. If you should (come to) believe that 

(Aor. ; Action Future), you would be going wrong. 

Si id credideris (rare), erraveris, 

If you (should have) believe (d) that, you would (have) ^o(ne) wrong. 



' 



UNKEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 297 

Si viclnus tuns equum meliorem habeat quam tuus est, tuumne equum 
malls an illius ? Cic. If your neighbor (were to) have a better horse than 
yours is, would you prefer your horse or his ? 

Si gladium quis apud te sana mente deposueritj repetat insaniens, 
reddere peccatum sit, officium non reddere. Cic. If a man in sound 
mind were to deposit (to have deposited) a sword with you (and), reclaim it 
(when) mad, it would be wrong to return it, right not to return it. 

Si nunc me suspendam meam operam luserim, et meis inimlcls volup- 
tatem creaverim. Plaut. Should I hang myself now, I should (thereby) 
(have) fool(ed) my icork away, and give(n) to my enemies a charming treat. 

Ut redeant veteres : Cicerdnl nemo ducentos nunc dederit nummos 
nisi fulserit anulus ingens. Juv. Let the ancients return : no one would 
give Cicero now-a-days two hundred two-pences unless a huge ring glittered (on 
his hand). 

Si is destituat, nihil satis tutum habebis. Lrv. Should he leave us in the 
lurch, you will find no safety. 

SI valeant homines, ars tua, Phoebe, jacet. Ov. Should men keep well, 
your art, Phoebus, is naught. 

Otia si tollas, periere Cupldinis arcus. Ov. (195, R. 6.) 

Si verum excutias, facies non uxor amatur. Juv. If you (were to) get 
' out the truth, it is the face, not the wife, that is loved. 

Nulla est excusatio peccatl, si amici causa peccaveris. Cic. It is no 
excuse for a sin to have sinned for the sake of a friend. 

Eemarks.— 1. The Potential of the Past coincides in form with the Unreal of the 
Present. (Comp. 252, R. 2.) Clear examples of definite persons are rare. Hon. Sat. I. 3, 5. 
Of indefinite persons : Miraretur qui turn cerneret. Liy. (252.) 
So. Erat Quinctius, si cederes, placabilis. Liv. Quinctius was, if you yielded to 
him,(?\we to be) placable. (Est si cedas.) 

Si luxuriae temperaret, avaritiam non timeres. Tac. if he were to control his 
i; love of pleasure, you should not have feared avarice. (Si temperet, non timeas.) 

2. The lively fancy of the Roman often employs the Ideal where we should expect the 
Unreal. (Comp. 248, R. 2.) 

Til si hie sis, aliter sentias. Ter. If you were I (Put yourself in my place), you 
would think differently. 

Haec si tecum patria loquatur, nonne impetrare debeat 1 Cic. If your country 
^should (were to) speak thus with you, ought she not to get (what she wants) ? 

In comparing Ideal and Unreal Conditionals, be careful to exclude all forms of future 
'verbs, such as posse, to be able; velle, to wish, and the like. 

Sometimes the conception shifts in the course of a long sentence : 

SI revlviscant et tecum loquantur— quid talibus virls responderes ? Cic. If 
they should come to life again, and speak with you— what answer ivould you make to such 
men? 

3. In Oratio Obliqua the difference between Ideal and Logical Future is necessarily 
effaced, so far as the mood is concerned. (659.) 

III. UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

599. The Unreal Conditional sentence is used of that which 
jis Unfulfilled or Impossible, and is expressed by the Imperfect 
i 13* 



rXEEAL COXr>ITTOXlL SENTENCES. 

Subjunctive for continued action — generally, in opposition to 
the Present : and by the Pluperfect Subjunctive — uniformly in 
opposition to the 1\ 

The noti ssibility comes from the irreversible character of the 

Past Tense. Compare the Periphrastic Future Perfect and Imperfect. 
Any action thai is decided is considered Past. (Comp. 266, R, 3.) 

Protasis Apodosis. 

Si id crederes, errares, 

If you bettered (were believing) that, [you do not,] you would be going wrong. 

Slid ere di diss is, erravisses, 

If \ i i ; t ' : e : v . I t '". :: :. [yon did not ] you would have gone wrong. 

Sapientia non expeteretur, si nihil efficeret. Cic. Wisdom would not 

ght after, if it did no practical good. 
Caederem te, nisi irascerer. Sex. I should flog you, if I were not getting 

■ 
SI ibi te esse sclssem. ad te ipse venissem. Cic. If I had known you 

TH have come to you myself. 

Hectora quis ncsset. si felix Troja fuisset. Ov. Who would Tcnow (of) 

Troy had I I ppt/f 
Nisi ante Roma profectus esses, nunc eamcerte relinqueres. Cic. If 
you had not departed from Rome before, you would certainly learn it now. 

Ere nisi peperissem. Roma non oppugnaretur ; nisi fllium haberem, j 
libera in libera patria mortua essem. Lrv. Had I not become a mother, 
Id not be besieged ; had I not a son, I slwuld have died a free woman 
free I vnd. 

cmarkb. — 1. The Imperfect Subjunctive is sometimes nsed in opposition to con- 
tinuance in the Past. This is necessarily the case when the Protasis is in the Imperfect,! 
and the Ap r dosis in the Pluperfect, except when the Imperfect denotes opposition to aj 
general statement, which holds good both for Past and for Present : 

lion tarn facile opes Carthaginis tantae coneidissent. nisi Sicilia classibusl 
nostria pateret- Cic. The great resources of Carthage (Carthage with her great re J 
sour: - I not I ) readily, if Sicily had not been open to our fleets. 

SI pudorem haberes. tilt imam mihi pensionem mini remisisses. Sen. If yo<\ 

— yon had not. as you have notj any delicacy, you would have let me off from the last 

I 

Memoriam ipsam cum voce perdidissemus. si tarn in nostra potestate essej 

oblivisci quam tacere. Tac. We should have lost memory itself, together with utterancA 

much in our power to forget as to keep silent. 

The Imperfect in both members is rai 

SI Protogenes Ialysum iUum suum caeno oblitum videret magnum, credo, a<j 
ciperet dolorem Cic. If Protogenes had seen thai famous lalysus of his besmeared wi 



felt a mighty pang. 

Perhaps this may be regarded as a form of Repraesentatio. (657, H.) 

2. In Unreal Conditions, the Apodosis is sometimes expressed by the Imperfect I: 

dicative. when the action is represented as interrupted (234) ; by the Pluperfect and Hi 

"hen the conclusion is confidently anticipated. (246, R. 3.) 



UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 299 

Labebar longius, nisi me retinuissem. Cic. (246. R. 3.) 

Omnino erat supervacua doctrina. si natura sufficeret. Quint. 

Peractum erat bellum, si Pompejum opprimere Erundusii potuisset Flor. 
The war was (had been) finished, if he had been able to crush Pompey at Brundusium. 

The Imperfect Indicative is sometimes found in the Protasis : 

Ipsam tibi epistolam misissem, nisi tarn subito fratris puer proficiscebatur. 
Cic. 1 should have sent you the letter itself, if my brother's servant was not starting so 
suddenly. 

3. The Indicative is the regular construction with verbs which signify Possibility or 
Power, Obligation or Necessity — so with the Active and Passive Periphrastic — vix. 
paene, scarcely, hardly, and the l!ke. 

Consul esse qui potui. nisi eum vltae cursum tenuissem ? Cic. How could I have 
been consul, if I had not kept that course of life ? 

Antoni potuit gladios contemnere, si sic omnia dixisset. Jot. He might have 
despised Antony's swords, if he had thus said all (that he did say). 

Emendaturus, si licuisset, eram. Ov. I should have removed the faults, if 1 had been 
free (to do it). 

In bona venturus, si pater ere (R. 1,) fuit. Ov. He would have come into (my) pro- 
perty, if you had permitted it. 

Pons iter paene hostibus dedit (paene dedit = dabat = daturus erat.) ni unus 
vir fuisset. Liv. The bridge well nigh gave a passage to the enemy, had it not been for om 
man. 

4. In Oratio Obliqua the Protasis is unchanged ; the Apodosis is formed by the 
Periphrastic Future Infinitive, with esse and fuisse for the Active, futurum (fore) ut, 
futurum fuisse ut for Passive and Supineless Verbs. 

A. Dico (dixi), te, si id crederes, erraturum esse. 

B. Dico (dixi), te, si id credidisses, erraturum fuisse. 

A. Dico (dixi), si id crederes, fore ut decipereris. 

B. Dico (dixi), si id credidisses, futurum fuisse ut decipereris. 

A is very rare ; A theoretical. For the long form, E, the simple Perfect Infinitive is 
found. Examples, see 6G2, R. 

5. When the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional is made to depend on a sentence 
which requires the Subjunctive, the Pluperfect is turned into the Periphrastic Perfect 
Subjunctive-; the Imperfect form is unchanged. 

Non dubito, ] quin, si id crederes, errares, 

1 do not doubt, \ that, if you believed that, you would be going wrong. 

Non dubitabam, \ quin, si id credidisses, erratum s fuens, 

. I did not doubt, J that, if you had believed that, you would have gone wrong. 

Honestum tale est ut, vel si ignorarent id homines, esset iaudabile. Cic. 

Virtue is a thing to deserve praise, even if men did not know it. 

Nec dubium erat quin, si tarn pauci simul obire omnia possent, terga dattiri 
hostes fuerint- Liv. There was no doubt that, if it had been possible for so small a num- 
ber to have managed every thing at the same lime, the enemy would have turned their 
hacks. 

Die quidnam facturus fueris, si eo tempore censor fuisses ? Liv. Tell {me) what 
you would have done, if you had been censor at that time ? 

Adeo inopia coactus est Hannibal, ut, nisi turn fugae speciem abeundo 
glj timuisset, Galliam repetiturus fuerit. Liv. Hannibal was so hard pressed by want 
; !( : of provisions, that, had he not at the time feared (presenting) the appearance of flight by re 
treating, he would have gone back to Gaul. 

The Periphrastic Pluperfect Subjunctive occurs rarely, and then only in the Depend- 
ent Interrogative, 

Potui CJ46. R.l)commonly becomes potuerim, and the Periphrastic Passive with ful 
become* fuerim : 



300 INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

Hand dubiumfuit quin, nisi ea mora intervenisset, castra eo diePunica capl 
potuerint- Lit. There was no doubt that, had not that delay interfered, the Punic camp 
could have been taken on that day. 

The Passive Conditional is unchanged : 

Id ille si repudiasset, dubitatis quin ei vis esset allata? Cic. If he had re- 
jected that, do you doubt that force would have been brought (to bear) on him? 

The active form is rarely unchanged. (Liv. II. 33.) In the absence of the periphrastic 
tense use potuerim. 



INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

600. Omission of the Conditional Sign. — Occasionally the 
members of a Conditional sentence are put side by side without 
a Conditional sign : 

An ille mihi (351) liber, cui mulier imperat? poscit, dandum estj 
vocat, veniendum; ejicit, abeundum; minatur, extimescendum. CiC. 

Or is he free (tell), me, to whom a woman gives orders f she asks, he must 
give; she calls, he must come ; she turns out (of door), he must go ; she\ 
threatens, he must be frightened. 

Unum cognoris, omnes noris. Teh. You know one, you know all. 

Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset quod optabat. Plin. Ep.| 
Had you given him a body that was a match for his spirit, he would have ac- 
complished what he desired. 

601. Omission of the Verb of the Protasis. — When the Verbl 
of the Protasis is omitted, either the precise form or the general! 
idea of the verb is to be supplied from the Apodosis : 

Si quisquam, Cato sapiens fuit =r SI quisquam fuit. CiC. If any orui 

was wise, Cato loas. I 

602. Total Omission of the Protasis. — The Protasis is ofterp 
contained in a Participle or involved in the context (594, 2). 

The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes mechanically exll 
plained by the omission of an indefinite Protasis. See 252, E. 1 

Nimio plus quam velim Volscorum ingenia sunt mobilia. Liv. Tim 

dispositions of the Volscians are (too) much more unstable than I should lik\ 

(if I had my way, if I could manage it, or what not). 

Velim sic existimes. Cic. I should like you to think so. (Utinam exist j 

mes !) 

Tarn felix esses quam formosissima vellem. Ov. (316). (Utinam esses j 
The impossibility of definite ellipsis constitutes the Modality. 



CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPARISON. 301 

603. Omission of the Apodosis. — The Apodosis is omitted in 
Wishes, in conformity with the vague character of the expres- 
sion, which is poetical See 254 and R. 1. 

O mihi praeteritos referat si Juppiter Annos. Verg. (254.) 



CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPARISON. 

604. The Apodosis is omitted in comparisons with ut si, 
velut si, ac si, quam si, tanquam si, quasi, or simply velut and 
tanquam, as if. 

The verb is to be supplied from the Protasis, as is common in 
correlative sentences. 

The Mood is the Subjunctive. 

The tenses follow the rule of sequence, rather than the ordi- 
nary use of the conditional. In English, the translation implies 
the unreality of the comparison. 

N51I timere quasi [=quam timeas si] assem elephanto des. Quint. 

Don't be afraid, as if you were giving a penny to an elephant. 

Parvi prlmo ortu sic jacent tanquam [= jaceant si] omnino sine 
animo sint. Cic. Babies, ichen first born, lie (there), as if they had no mind 
at all. 

Hie est obstandum, mllites, velut si ante Romana moenia pugnemus. 
Lrv. Here (is where) we must oppose them, soldiers, as if ice were fighting 
before the walls of Rome (velut obstemus, si pugnemus, as we would oppose 
them, if we were to fight). 

Me juvat, velut ipse in parte laboris ac periculi fuerim, ad finem belli 
i Funic! pervenisse. Liv. / am delighted to have reached the end of the 
Punic war, as if I had shared in the toil and danger (of it). 

Suspectus tanquam ipse suas incenderit aedes. Juv. Suspected as if 
he had (of having) set his own house on fire. 

Tantus patres metus cepit velut si jam ad portas hostis esset. Lrv. 
A great fear took hold of the senators, as if the enemy were already at their 
gates. 

Deleta est Ausonum gens perinde ac si interneclvo bello certasset. 
i\\ Lrv. Tlie Ausonian race was blotted out, just as if it had engaged in an in- 
ternecine war (war to the knife). 

Remarks.— 1. Occasionally the sequence is violated out of regard to the Conditional : 
Massilienses in eo honore audlmus apud Romanos esse ac si medium umbili- 
Cum Graeciae incolerent. Liv. We hear that the people of Marseilles are in as high 
honor with the Romans as if they inhabited the mid-navel (= the heart) of Greece. 

I 



rt 



MH ' 



ESSEVS SKHTEafOEa 

:he ordinary condir .comparative sentence. The 

Prota- - ssed 

GaUI lae:: at exploi its victoria Ad castra Rom iuioriuii pergunt. Cazs. The 
Goals in their jo% ory had been fully asct :he camp of 

:'■ : 

---.'.. : dma : : ellc Romano tamquam non transitilris in Asiam 

Romanis. Lw A -chus was as unconcerned at?: :ci ik Rome as if the, Romans 

t intend to cross over into Asia Minor. 

KCESSITE SEXTEXCES. 

. Lcessive v t:l:t: : — are introduced — 

1. By the sonditional Particles, etsl. etiamsl, tametsi. 

2. By the Generic Relative, quanquani. 

0. By the compound.-, quainvls, quantum vis, 

1. By :ke Ver':: licet. 

5. By the Final Particles, ut (lie). 

1 y quum icum : .dd answering generally to the notion 
atthc 

EzxiSEs. — Etsl et - si . -:.-: '- if: etiamsl. t ~: tametsi. yd 

cuai:ui„ ]"am - : - ;am . :o what exU :: totitr : quamvls. to what extent you 
choose; qnantomvis. to what amount you choose ; lice: -f:free (perhaps intrans 

::" lincuc ~ -- - 

606. Etsl, etiamsl, and tametsi, take the Indicative or Sub- 
y;:. :::"e. ; : :-ord:ng t<; the general principles vrhich regulate the 
use >fai, if. The Indicative is more common, especially with 
e:s: and etiamsl : 

D§ ruturls rebus etsl semper difficile est dicere. tamen interdum con- 
jectorapossia accidere. Cic Affl< '. : :: r.dt to teU abou 

tome near it o y guessing. 
Banrilcac ets: flagrabat bellandi cupiditate. tamen pad serviendurr 
pu: = v::. Net -.-"~~" _." J eqfwar t 

-' ' U jfitili ~ ~ ~ ~ serve to work few 

Incps Die etiamsl referre gratiam non potest, habere certe potest 
i s[ >ken : : . if he : mot return a favor, can at lea 
fed 

Me vera pro gratia loqm, etsl me urn ingenium non moneret. necessi 

tas ccgit. Liv. Even ifm% m did not bid. rue. compels m 

~ ~ - 'of the smooth. 

? z y. .,:.::- — S: ' - 

7. Quanquam. to what extent soever, falls under the head c 
generic re] :A. in the best authors, is con 

Btrned with the Indicative: 



CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 303 

Medici quanquam intellegunt saepe, tamen nunquam aegris dicunt, 
illo morbo eos esse morituros. Cic. Although physicians often know, 
nevertheless they never tell their patients that they will die of that disease. 

Remarks. — 1. The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes found with quanquam : 
Quanquam exercitum qui in Volscis erat mallet, nihil recusavit. Lit. Although 
he might well have preferred the army which was in the Volscian country, nevertheless he 
made no objection. 

2. Quanquam is often used at the beginning of sentences, in the same way as the 
English, And yet, Although, However, in order to limit the whole preceding sentence ; less 
frequently etsi, tametsi. 

3. The Indicative, with etsi and quanquam, is, of course, liable to attraction into 
the Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua. (509.) 

608. Quamvls follows the analogy of volo, / will, with which 
it is compounded, and takes the Subjunctive. Quantiimvls and 
quamlibet (as conjunctions) belong to poetry and silver prose. 

Quamvls sint sub aqua, sub aqua maledicere tentant. Ov. Although 
they be tinder the water, under the water they try to revile. 

Quamvis ille niger, quamvis tu candidus esses. Verg. Although he 
teas black, although you were fair. 

Vitia mentis, quantum vis exigua sint, in majus excedunt. Sex, 
Mental ailments ( = passions), no matter how slight they be, go on increasing. 



\" Remarks. — 1. In later Latin, quamvls and quanquam change parts : 
i lrt Quamvis ingenio non valet, arte valet. Ov. Although he does not tell by genius, he 

s tell by art. 

In Tacitus, for instance, quanquam regularly has the Subjunctive. 

2. The Verb in quamvls is sometimes inflected : 

Quam velit sit potens, nunquam impetravisset. Cic. No matter how powerful 
on :she may be, she would never have obtained it. 

609. Licet retains its verbal nature, and, according to the 
^Sequence of Tenses, takes only the Present and Perfect Sub- 
junctive : 

Licet irrideat si qui vult. Cic. Let any one laugh who will. 

Ardeat ipsa licet, tormentis gaudet amantis. Juv. Though she herself 
is aglow, she rejoices in the tortures of her lover. 

Sim licet extremum, sicut sum, missus in orbem. Ov. Although 1 be 
sent, as I have been, to the end of the world. 

Remarks.— 1. Exceptions are extremely rare : Juv. xiii. 56. 
2. Quamvis is sometimes combined with licet. 

610. Ut and ne are also used concessively : 

Ut desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas. Ov. Granted that 
rength be lacking, nevertheless you must praise (my) good will. 



304 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 

Ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est. CiC. Granted that 
pain be not the chief evil, an evil it certainly is. 

Remark.— Ut noil can be used on the principle of the Specific Negative : 
Hie dies ultimus est ; ut non sit, prope ab ultimo. Sen. This is your last day ; 
granted that it be not, it is near the last. 

On ita— ut, see 255 ; on ut— ita, see 484, 2. 

611. Concessive sentence represented ~by a Participle or Pre- 
dicative Attribute. — The Concessive sentence may be represented 
by a Participle or Predicative Attribute. 

Risus interdum ita repente erumpit, ut eum cupientes tenere nequea 
mus. Cic. Laughter between whiles (occasionally) breaks out so suddenly that 
we cannot keep it down, although we desire to do so* 

Multorum te ocull et aures non sentientem custodient. Cic. (Of]. 

many (the) eyes and ears will keep guard over you, though you perceive it not 
(without your perceiving it). 

Quis Aristidem n5n mortuum diligit. Cic. Who does not love Aristides 
(though) dead? 

Remark.— Later writers combine etsi, quanquam, or quamvis, with the Participle 

Caesarem milites quamvis recusantem ultro in Africam sunt secuti- Suet 
The soldiers followed Caesar into Africa of their own motion, althovgh he declined it. 

With Adjectives quamvis is used even in the best writers : 

Saepe bibi sticos quamvis in Vitus amaros. Ov. / have often drunk bitter potions 
although against my will. 

Relative Sentences. 

612. The Latin language uses the relative construction fa: 
more than the English : so in the beginning of sentences, anc 
in combination with Conjunctions and other Relatives. 

Remarks.— 1. The awkwardness, or impossibility, of a literal translation, may gene] 
rally be relieved by the substitution of a demonstrative with an appropriate conjunctiorlj 
or the employment of an abstract noun : 

Quae quum ita sint- Now since these things are so (Ciceronian formula). 

Futtira modo exspectant ; quae quia certa esse non possunt, conficiuntur ej 
angore et metti. Cic. They only look forward to the future; and because that cannot l\ 
certain, they wear themselves out with distress and fear. 

Epiciiru3 non satis polltus ils artibus quas qui tenent, eruditl appellantuil 
Cic. Epicurus is not sufficiently polisJied by those accomplishments, from the possession oi 
which, people are called cultivated. 

Notice especially quod in combination with si, ubi, in which quod means and as fd 
that, and is sometimes translated by and, but, therefore, sometimes not at all. 

2. The Relative is the fertile source of many of the introductory particles of the conj 
pound sentence, and is therefore put last on account of the multiplicity of its uses. 

613. Relative sentences are introduced by the Relative Prcl 



RELATIVE SENTENCES. 305 

nouns in all their forms: Adjective, Substantive, and Adverbial. 
(See Tables.) 

Remarks. — 1. The relative adverbs of Place, and their correlatives, may be used 
instead of a preposition with a relative. Unde, whence, is frequently used of persons, 
the others less frequently : ibi = in eo, &c. ; ubi = in quo, &c. ; inde = ex 60, &c ; 
unde = ex quo, &c. ; eo = in eum, &c. ; quo — in quern, &c. : 

Potest fieri ut is, unde te audisse dicis, iratus dixerit. Cic. It may be that Tie, 
' from whom you say you heard (it), said it in anger. 

2. The relative is not to be confounded with the dependent interrogative sentence. 
(469 ? R. 3.) 

Quae probat populus ego nescio. Sen. The things that the people approved, I do 
■ not know (quid probet. what it is the people approves). 

Et quid ego te velim, et tu quod quaeris, scies. Ter. You shall know both what 
(it is) I want of you, and what (the thing which) you are asking ( = the answer to your 
question). 

m 614. Position of Relatives. — The Eelative and Relative forms 
are put at the beginning of sentences and clauses. The Prepo- 
sition, however, generally, though not invariably, precedes its 
relative. (44.) 



615. Antecedent. — The word to which the Eelative refers is 
called the Antecedent, because it precedes in thought even 

when it does not in expression. 

i 

Remark.— The close connection between Relative and Antecedent is shown by the 
| frequent use of one preposition in common. (416.) 



CONCOED. 

616. The Eelative agrees with its Antecedent in Gender, 

Number, and Person: 

J\ 

to Is minimo eget mortalis, qui minimum cupit. Syrus. (293.) 

Uxor contenta est quae bona estuno viro. Platjt. (373, R. 1.) 

Malum est consilium quod mutari ncn potest. Syrus. Bad is the 

•plan that cannot (let itself) be changed. 

Hoc illis narro qui me non intelligunt. Phaedbus. I tell this tale for 
iM'hose who understand me not. 

Ego qui te confirmo, ipse me non possum. Cic. Z", who reassure you, 
annot reoissure myself. 



Enjf 



Remarks.— 1. The Relative agrees with the Person of the true Antecedent, even 
hen a predicate intervenes : 

Tu es is, qui mead caelum extulisti. Cic. You are he that has extolled me to the 
Ues. 

So occasionally in English: Acts xxi. 38. 



306 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 

2. When the Relative refers to a sentence, id quod, that which, is commonly used 
(parenthetically) : 

SI a vobis deserar, (id quod non spero,) tamen animo non deficiam. Cic. If 1 

should be deserted by you, {which 1 do not expect,) nevertheless I should not become faint- 
hearted. 

3. The gender and number of the Relative may be determined : 

I. By the sense, and not by the form. 

II. By the predicate or the apposition, and not by the antecedent : 
Examples : I. Sex mill a qui Pydnam perfugerant. Lrv. Six thousand, 

who had fled to Pydna. 

Equitatum omnem praemittit, qui videant. Lit. He sent all the cavalry 
ahead, who should see (that they might see, to see). 

II. Thebae, quod caput BoeStiae est. Liv. Thebes, which is the capital 
of Boeotia. 

Flumen Scaldis, quod influit in Mosam. Caes. The river Scheldt, whicl 
empties into the Maas. 

Justa gloria, qui est fructus virtutis. Cic. Real glory, which is thefrui, 
of virtue. 

4. The apposition may be incorporated into the relative : 
Testarum suffragils quod ill! ostracismum vocant. Nep. By potsherd votes - 

(a thing-) which they call " ostracism," 

5. When the Relative refers to the combined antecedents of different gender, th] 
strongest gender is preferred, according to 282 : 

Grandes natii matres et parvuli llberi, quorum utrorumque aetas misericoil 
diam nostram requirit. Crc. Aged matrons and infant children, whose age on eitlum 
hand demands our compassion. 

Otium atque divitiae, quae prima mortales putant- Sall. Leisure and monei 
which mortals reckon as the prime things. 

Or, the nearest gender may be preferred : 

Eae fruges atque fructus quos terra gignit. Cic. Those fruits of field and tre^ 
which earth bears. 

6. Combined Persons follow the rule, 283. 

617. Repetition of the Antecedent. — The Antecedent of til 
Eelative is quite often repeated in the Kelatiye clause, with tlj 
Eelative as its attributive : 

Caesar intellexit diem instare, quo die frumentum militibus met: 
oporteret. Caes. Caesar saw that the day was at hand, on which {day I 
behooved to measure) corn (was to be measured out) to the soldiers. 

618. Incorporation of the Antecedent. — The Antecedent ai| 
the Adjective, or the apposition of the Antecedent, are often if 
corporated into the Relative clause : 

In quern primum egress! sunt locum Troja vocatur. Liv. The fig 

place they landed at was called Troy. 



RELATIVE SENTENCES. 307 

Amanus Syriam a Cilicia dividit, qui mons erat hostium plenus. 

Cic. Syria is divided from Cilicia by Amanus, a mountain which teas full 
rf enemies. 

Themistocles, de servis suis quern habuit fidelissimum, ad Xerxem 

inisit. Nep. Themistocles sent the most faithful slave he had to Xerxes. 
Quam quisque norit artem, in hac se exerceat. Cic. What trade each 
nan understands, in that let him practise himself ( = every man to his 
I rade). 

> Remark.— Especially to be noted are the phrases : quae tua prudentia est, which 
such) is your prudence • qua prudentia es ( = tu es ea prudentia), of which (such) 
"prudence are you ( = pro tua prudentia, in accordance with your prudence). See 628. 

619. Attraction of the Relative. — The Accusative of the Eel- 
/tive is occasionally attracted into the Ablative of the Antece- 
.ent, rarely into any other case : 

j Hoc confirmamus illd augurio quo diximus. Cic. We confirm this by 
\e augury which toe mentioned. 

Remarks. — 1. This attraction takes place chiefly when the verb of the relative clause 
mst be supplied from the principal sentence : 

Quibus sauciis poterat secum ductis ad urbem pergit. Liv. Having taken with 
\m all the wounded he could, he proceeded to the city. 
1 ' 2. Inverted Attraction.— So-called Inverted Attraction is found only in poetry, and then 
J . the Accusative case, which may be considered as an object of thought or feeling: 
ic0 ri Urbem quam statuo, vestra est- Verg. (As for) the city which lam rearing, (it) is 
m frurs. 

j Istum quern quaeris, ego sum. Ter. (As for) that man whom you are looking for, 1 
!0,lt 'V he. (" He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.' 1 ) 



l/fjV: 



lit 



620. Correlative Use of the Relative. — The usual Correlative 
f qui is is, more rarely hie, ille : 

Is minimo eget mortalis, qui minimum cupit. Syrtts. (293.) 

Hie sapiens, de quo loquor. Cic. (290, 3.) 

Ilia dies veniet, mea qua lugubria ponam. Ov. (292, 4.) 

621. Omission of the Correlative. — The Correlative, is, is 
In omitted, especially when it would stand in the same case 
\ the Eelative : 

Postume, non bene olet, qui bene semper olet. Mart. Postumus, (he) 
xells not sweet, who always smells sweet. 

Quern arma non fregerant vitia vicerunt. Curt. (Him) whom arms had 
i crushed did vices overcome. 

Quern di diligunt adulescens moritur. Plaut. (He) whom the gods love 
I es young. 



308 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 

Xerxes praemium proposuit qui [ = el qui ] invenisset novam vol 
uptatem. Cic. Xerxes offered a reward to him who should invent a neu 
pleasure. 

Miseranda vita qui [ — eorum qui ] se metui quam amari malunt 
Nep. Pitiable is the life of those who would prefer being feared to being loved. 

Discite sanari per quern [ = per eum, per quern ] didicistis amare 
Oy. (403.) 

622. Position of the Correlative clause. — The Eelative claus* 
often precedes the Correlative ; incorporation is common : 

Male res se habet quum quod virtute effici debet id tentatur pecunis 
Cic. It is a bad state of affairs when what ought to be accomplished by wortl\ 
is attempted by money. 

Quod vides accidere pueris hoc nobis quoque majusculis pueris eveni 
Sen. What you see befalls children (this) happens to us also y children 
a larger growth. 

Quae quia non liceat ndn facit, ilia facit. Ov. (541.) 

Quam quisque norit artem, in hac se exerceat. (618.) 

The Correlative omitted: 

Quod non dedit fortuna, non eripit. Sen. What fortune has not gi 
(does not give), she does not take away. 

Per quas nos petitis saepe fugatis opes. Ov. The means you take 111 
win us, often scare us off. 

623. Indefinite Antecedent. — The Indefinite Antecedent 
generally omitted : 

Elige cui dicas : tii mini sola places. Ov. Clwose some one to wh\ 

you may say : You alone please me. 

Remark.— Such sentences are sometimes hardly to be distinguished from 
Interrogative : 

Conon non quaes! vit ubi ipse tiito viveret. Nep., (297), might be either. 

TENSES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 

624. Future and Future Perfect. — The Future and Putil 
Perfect are used with greater exactness than in current Engl:[ 
(234, 236) : 

Sit liber, dominus qui volet esse meus. Mart. He must be free w 
wishes (shall wish) to be my master. 

Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, ejus victoria erit. Lrv. (236, R. 2.) 



RELATIVE SENTENCES. 309 

625. Iterative Action. — Relative sentences follow the laws 
laid down for Iterative action (568, 569 :) 

I. Contemporaneous action : 

Ore trahit quodcumque potest, atque addit acervo. Hon. Drags 
with its mouth whatever it can, and adds to the treasure (heap). 

Quacumque incedebat agmen, legatl occurrebant. Lrv. In whatever 
^■direction the column advanced, ambassadors came to meet them. 

II. Prior action : 

Terra nunquam sine usura reddit, quod accepit. Cic. The earth never 
""'\ returns without interest what it has received (receives). 

Quod non dedit fortuna, non eripit. Sen. (622.) 
1 N5n cenat quoties nemo vocavit eum. Mart. He does not dine as 
rften as (when) no one has invited (invites) him. 

Haerebant in memoria quaecumque audierat et viderat [Themistocles]. 
Sep. (569.) 

Sequentur te quocumque perveneris vitia. Sen. Vices will follow you 
chithersoever you go. 

Qui timere desierint, odisse incipient. Tag. (569.) 

|' j l Remark.— According to 569, the Subjunctive is used 

1.) In Oratio Obliqua (Total or Partial) ; 

2.) By Attraction of Mood (Complementary Clauses) : 

Quis eum diligat quern metuat 1 Cic. Who could love him whom he fears ? 

Mos est Athenls laudari in contione eos qui sint in praeliis interfecti. Cic. 
It is the custom at Athens that a panegyric be pronounced on those who have been killed in 
battle. (Laudantur, qui interfecti sunt.) 

3,) In the Ideal Second Person : 

Bonus segnior fit ubi neglegas. Sall. (568.) 

4.) On the general principle of oblique sense, chiefly in later historians : 

Qui ununi ejus ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat Lrv. (569.) 

MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 

626. The Eelative clause, as such — that is, as the representa- 
ive of an adjective — takes the Indicative mood: 

Uxor quae bona est, A wife who is good (a good wife). 

., RemARK.— The Relative in this use often serves as a circumlocution for a Substantive, 
. I r ith this difference : that the Substantive expresses a permanent relation ; the Relative 

ause. a transient relation : ii qui docent = those who teach = the teachers (inasmuch as 

ley are exercising the functions). 

627. The Explanatory Relative qui, with the Indicative, 
~ is enim, for he,) often approaches quod, in that. 



310 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 

Habeo senectuti magnam gratiam, quae mihi sermonis aviditatem 
auxit. Cic. / am wry thankful to old age, which (= it, in that it) has in- 
creased me (= in me) the appetite for talk. 

Remark.— Qui with the Subjunctive gives a ground = cum is (587); qui with the 
Indicative, a fact / and in many passages the causal sense seems to be inevitable : 

Erraverim fortasse qui me esse aliquem putavi. Plin. Ep. 7 may have erred i 
thinking myself to be somebody. 

Improba [*• *-i Ardea] quae nostros cogis abesse viros. Ov. Naughty Ardea, tha 
forcest (for forcing) our husbands to be away. 

In some authors this causal sense is heightened by ut, utpote, as • quippe, namely 
but with these particles the Subjunctive is far more common. 

628. Qui = si quis, if any, has the Indicative when the Condij 
tional is logical. So in Generic Sentences. (246, li. 4.) 

Terra nunquam sine usura reddit, quod accepit. Cic. (Si quid accej 
pit.) (625.) 

Qui mori didicit, servire dedidicit. Sen. (424.) 

Remark.— On the Relative with the Subjunctive in Conditional Sentences, see 594. 

629. The Subjunctive is employed in Kelative clauses whel 
it would be used in a simple sentence. 

Potential: Habeo quae velim. Cic. I ham what I should like. 
Optative ; Quod faustum sit, regem create. Liv. Blessing be on yot^ 
choice, make ye a king. 



n 



WVfi 



Remark. — Especially to be noted is the Subjunctive in Restrictive phrases. This Re 
tive often takes quidem, sometimes modo. Such phrases are quod sciam = quanti 
scio, for all I know ; quod meminerim, so far as memory serves me. 

Omnium oratorum quos quidem cognoverim aciitissimum judico SertoriulJ'^' 
Cic. Of all orators, so far as I know them, I consider Sertorius the most acute. 

Nullum ornatum qui modo non obsciiret subtrahendumputo. Quint. IthW 
no ornament is to be tvithdrawn, provided thai it do not cause obscurity. 

Sometimes qui quidem is found with the Indicative. 

630. The Subjunctive is used in Relative clauses which fo 
a part of the utterance or the view of another than the n| 
rator, or of the narrator himself when indirectly quoted. (5 
E.) So especially in Oratio Obliqua and Final Sentences : 

Recte Graeci praecipiunt, non temptanda quae effici non possl 
Quint. Right are the Greeks in teaching, that those things are not to bef 
tempted, which cannot be accomplished. 

Apud Hypanim fluvium Aristoteles ait, bestiolas quasdam nasci qU 
unum diem vivant. Cic. (653.) |j 

Paetus omnes libros quos frater suus rellquisset mihi donavit. Jc. 
(This is Paetus' statement ; otherwise ; quos frater ejus (521) reliquerjj- i 



RELATIVE SE^TE^CES. 311 

Xerxes praemium proposuit qui [= ei qui] invenisset novam volup- 
tatem. Cic. (621.) 

Multi suam vitam neglexerunt ut eos qui his cariores quam ipsi sibi 
essent liberarent. Cic. Many have neglected their own lives, that they might 
free those who were dearer to them, than tliey were to themselves. 

Remarks. — Even in Oratio Obliqua the Indicative is retained : 
1. In explanations of the narrator : 

Nuntiatur Afranio magnos commeatus qui iter habebant ad Caesarem ad 
'flumen constitisse. Caes. It is (was) announced to Afranius that large supplies of pro- 
visions (which were on their way to Caesar) had halted at the river. 

In the historians this sometimes occurs where the Relative clause is an integral part 
of the sentence, especially in the Imperfect and Pluperfect ; partly for clearness, partly 
for liveliness. For shifting Indicative and Subjunctive, see Liv. xxvi. 1. 

2. In mere circumlocutions : 
: Quis neget haec omnia quae videmus deorum potestate administrari ? Cic. 
Who would deny that this whole visible world is managed by the power of the godsl 

Provideiidum est ne ea quae dicuntur ab eo qui dicit dissentiant. Quint. We 
must see to it that the speech be not out of keeping with the speaker* 

631. Belatiye sentences which depend on Infinitives and 
m Subjunctives, and form an integral part of the thought, are put 
n the Subjunctive (Attraction of Mood) : 



Pigri est ingenii contentum esse iis quae sint ab aliis inventa. Quint. 

T X is the mark of a slow genius to be content with what has been found out by 
others. 
Quis eum diligat quem metuat aut eum a quo se metui putet ? Cic. 
itwy?}io could love a man 'whom he fears, or by whom he deems himself feared f 
Nam quod emas possis jure vocare tuum. Mart. For what you buy y 
you may rightly call your own. 
Ilk Ab alio exspectes alteri quod feceris. Sykus. (306.) 
i In virtute sunt multi ascensus, ut is gloria maxime excellat, qui vir- 
dte plurimum praestet. Crc. In virtue there are many degrees, so that he 
vcels most in glory , who has the greatest eminence in virtue. 

Si solos eos diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset, neminem eorum 
ui viverent exciperes ; moriendum enim est omnibus. Cic. If you 
i lUed only those wretched who had (have) to die, you would except none who 
ved (live) ; for all have to die. 



Remarks.— The Indicative is used : 

1. In mere circumlocutions; so, often in Consecutive Sentences: 
Necesse est facere siimptum qui quaerit lucrum. Plaut. (535.) 
Efficitur ab oratore, ut ii qui audiunt ita amciantur ut orator velit Cic It is 
n 'ought about by the orator that tJwse who hear him (= his auditors) are affected as he 
vshes (them to be). 
-j i 2. Of individual facts : 

'_ L Et quod vides perisse perditum diicas. Cat. And what you see (definite thing, 
W JJfinite person) is lost for aye, for aye deem lost. (Quod videas, any body, any thing.) 






312 RELATIVE SEKTEKCES. 

632. Relative Sentences of Design. — Relative sentences are 
put in the Subjunctive (of Design) when qui == ut is: 

Sunt multi qui aliis eripiunt quod aliis largiantur. Cic. Many are 

they who snatch from some to lavish on others. 

Senex serit arbores, quae alter! seculo prosint. Cic. (545.) 
Semper habe Fyladen, qui consoletur Oresten. Ov. (545.) 
Artaxerxes Themistocli Magnesiam urbem donaverat, quae ei panenl 

praeberet. Nep. (545.) 

Remark.— In many combinations this Relative leans to the Characteristic, and th|| 
conception seems Potential rather than Optative. 

633. Relative Sentences of Tendency. — Optative Relative senl 
tences are put in the Subjunctive (of Tendency) when qui = utif 

The notion is generally that of Character and Adaptation : 

Damna nulla tanta sunt quae non viri fortes ferenda arbitrentur. Ci I 

There are no losses so great, that brave men should not think them endurab\ 

(great enough to keep brave men from thinking them endurable). 

Ille ego sum cujus laniet furiosa capillos. Ov. I am the man who^ 

hair she tears in her seasons of frenzy. 

Nil prodest quod non laedere possit idem. Ov. (296.) 

Quern mea Calliope laeserit unus ego. Ov. I am the only one that fill 

Calliope ( = my Muse) has hurt. 

Major sum quam cui possit Fortuna nocere. Ov. (313.) 
Digna fuit ilia natura quae meliora vellet. Quint. (556, R. 2.) 

634. This construction of the Characteristic Relative 
especially common after such general expressions as 

Est qui, sunt qui, there is, there are some who ; nemo est qui, there\ 
none to ; nihil est quod, there is nothing ; habeo quod, 1 have to; repe 
untur qui, persons are found who (to) . . . ; quis est qui ? who is th 
who (to) . . . . ? est cur, there is reason for, &c. So, also, fj 
cum, there was a time when. 

Sunt qui discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem. Cic. Th 
are some who (to) think that death is the departure of the soul from the body 

Fuit qui suaderet appellationem mensis August! in Septembr 
transferendam. Suet. There was a man who urged ( = to urge) that 
name of the month (of) August should be transferred to September. 

Multi fuerunt qui tranquillitatem expetentes a negotiis publicisjpj 
removerint. Cic. There have been many who, in the search for quiet, 7j] 
withdrawn themselves from public engagements. 

Post mortem in morte nihil est quod metuam mali. Plaut. A 
death there is no ill in death for me to dread. 



■ > 



RELATIVE SENTENCES. 313 

Nec mea qui digitis lumina condat erit. Ov. And there will he no 
one to close mine eyes with his fingers, 

Miserrimus est qui cum esse cupit quod edat non habet. Plaut. 

He is a poor wretch who, when he wants to eat, has not any thing to eat. 

Non habet quid edat would mean : does not lenow what to eat. 

Non est quod paupertas n5s a philosophia revocet ne egestas quidem. 

1 Sen. Tliere is nothing to make narrow circumstances recall us from phil- 
osophy—not even ( = or even) want. 

Remarks.— 1. The Indicative may be used in the statements of definite facts, and not 
of general characteristics : 

Multl sunt qui eripiant, Multl sunt qui eripiunt. 

There are many to snatch away. Many are they who snatch away. 

. Of course this happens only after affirmative sentences. The poets use the Indicative 
more freely than prose writers : 

Sunt-qui ( = quldam) quod sentiunt non audent dicere. Cic. Some dare not say 
what they think. 

Sunt-quibus ingrate timida indulgentia servit. Ov. To some trembling in- 
dulgence plays the slave all thanklessly. 

Est-ubi profecto damnum praestat facere quam lucrum. Plaut. Sometimes, in 
point of fact, His better to lose than gain. 

2. When a definite predicate is negatived, the Indicative may stand on account of the 
definite statement, the Subjunctive on account of the negative : 

a. Nihil bonum est quod non eum qui id possideat meliorem facit ; or, 

b. Nihil bonum est quod non eum qui id possideat meliorem faciat. 

a. Nothing that does not make its owner better is good. 

b. There is nothing good that does not make its owner better. 

635. Negative of Qui in Sentences of Character. — Qui non, 
sometimes quae non, quod non, &g. } are represented after nega- 
tive clauses by quln : 

Sunt certa vitia quae nemo est quln eflfugere cupiat. Cic. There are 
certain faults which there is no one but ( = everybody) desires to escape. 

Nil tarn difficile est quin quaerend5 investigari possiet ( = possit). 
Teh. (556.) 

But as quin = ut ndn, the demonstrative may be expressed : 

Non cum quoquam arma contuli quin is mihi succubuerit. Nep. lhave 
'■ never measured swords with any one that he has not (but he has) succumbed 
to me. 

Fur other uses of quin, see 551. 

636. Relative in a Causal Sense. — When qui = cum is, as he, 
1 the Subjunctive is employed. 






zil^z:~z sizxtizsztes. 



The particles ut, utpote. qulppe, as, are often used in conj unction n 

tzz E .'. ■ • .-- 

~C ?-*-v zs foi: mirinc-a virilaotia cu: suo tote consnlatii sonnum ::::: 
viderit. C: inius has shown martc fulness, ?\ 

= z-.kri ~:nk : •: : ~z :; T . \V zz^z^zz 

O fortunate adnlescens, quitaae virUUIs Homeram praec5nem inve- 
neris :; Zueky youth! to liam found a met = zrunipeter) of 

Major gloria Scipicnis. Quincti recentior ut qui e □ anno triumphasset. 
1~ Sfegpufo glory was greater. # was f is was to be ex- 

pected in) a man :: inasmuch is he) I -ur. 

Plat: a D::-ys:c tyra.oo: crodeliter viclatos es: qulppe ^nemve- 

nundar: jus sis set _ : z? p~.r; z. ; -''--"- "'.':■: "■:. Vy tut tyn. d 
Z : :;. :. ■',-:" . -\c: ~z " : ;-.": z" ". : : Z" Z: z \z . 



637. Edat w ia Concur Adversative zV use — Qui is 

sometime as equixalent to cam is in z Concessive : 



E": col le-ri:er Graeols IzzeraZ attigissem.. tamen cum venissem ' 
Atheoa.* crmpl-ores dies :':: coonocraros som. Czz J."' 7 :: " 
c '"."-."" ': - '.':'.:'.: ? -:.'-. ■::. : 7 -;Vz. : : :; z" 'Z z Airmen*, I *t yec. 

:' ■ :' i: z; 

638 .- - t Rekd i ' Z - Hi z — The Ac z:z ~ ~z 

Relative, with the I^zz:::~t. may be used in Dratifl Ob&qaa ^vhenl 

:z\r Et. :^ :; :- res: .Ted :z ^jrdinating ~ z_; unctionl 

. 1 zz Z em; zs::z ::t- : 



fare to our own. 



icoemcue oestrum muudl esse partem. ei> 
;z ccrumuuem utilitatem u:s:rs.e c.:.-.^zlrZ 
k that every one of us is a pa .-: />zH 

enee of this is - z prefer the 



ils: ::ot~Ot: =eo:r:::e= '-"i:Z :Z^ r^Ziu-r ;:::Z.Z= coda BOB v. 
, etc: quia trneldi t f : aia tnundarent -^causefhey 
:_: Z :-r: "oi=Mrii^ = 

339.1 i - --'_"" - : Sentences, — RelatiYe Sentenc 

;tions :nly whe 
they are actually coordii. 

it the second Eek L stand in the 

the jmmonly omitted. 



COMPARE TI YE S E WTM NC E S. 315 

When it would stand in a different case, the Demonstrative is 
often substituted; or, if the case be the Nominative or Accusa- 
tive, the Relative may be omitted altogether : 

Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat cuique plebs favebat, 

Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and whom the common,-, favored; 
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat ac plebi acceptu3 erat. 

Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy , and ''who; was acceptable to the cornrno i . 
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat eique plebs favebat. 

Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and whom the common? favored ; 
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat et plebs diligebat, 

Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and (whom; the commons loxed ; 
Dumnorix quern plebs diligebat et principatum obtinebat, 

Dumnorix, whom the commons loved, and (who; held the chieftaincy. 

Ke3Iark. — The Relative is not combined with adversative or illative conjunction - 
who, who therefore), except at the beginning of a sentence, when it represents or antici- 
pates a demonstrative. (622.) 

Qui fortis est fidens est. qui autem fidens est i3 non extiniescit. Cic. He who 
I is brave is confident, but he who is confident is not afraid. 

Sed qui, qui tamen. can be used in antithesis to adjectives. 

Sophron iniinorum quidem scriptor sed quern Plato probavit. Qcint 
a writer of mimes, 'tis trv.e, but (one; that Plato approved. 

640. Relative Sentence represented by a Participle. — The 

Eelative sentence is sometimes represented by a Participle, but 
generally the Participle expresses a closer connection than the 
mere explanatory Eelative : 

Omnes aliud agentes, aliud simulantes perfidi sunt. Cic. All who are 
-driving at one Hang and 'pretending another are treacherous. 

Pisistratus Homeri libr5s confuses antea sic disposuisse dicitur ut 
nunc habemus. Cic. Pisistratus is said to have arranged the looks of Homer, 
which were (whereas they were) in confusion before, as ice have them now. 






• ; |i Comparative Sentences. 

641. A peculiar phase of the Eelative sentence is the Com- 
parative, which is introduced in English by as or than, in La iin 
ij a great variety of relative forms : 
I. By correlatives ; 
II. By atque or ac ; 
III. By quam. 

l 642. Moods in Comparative Sentences. — The mood of the 
dependent clause is the Indicative, unless the Subjunctive is 



f:. : 



[ ;: 



EXTJEXCES, 



le laws of oblique relation, or by the conditional! 



cic 



pendent cl 



a borrow i - ; rrb from th-j 



Irz 



es: qnam scientia. Cic. (311.) 
L:--us. :: (296, R 1.) 



644. When the dependent clause (or standard of comparison | 
borr :~ its verb from the leading clause, the dependent elans 
i: seated as a part : the leading clause; and if the f: ; 
leading clause stands in the Ac msative with the InSnitiTe, tbj 
second or dependent clause must have the Ace likewise 



Zr: C-I; 

: : : 



tizam lir-r-s^r. l::::ll:.::e- esse :;;ar. Grae:a~ l: 
fc^jf Zfo JEatiii language i* richer than the Greek. 
Jaesarem non eadem de republica sentire quae me sc: 
I Gaius Caesar has not the same mews tcuh regard to ike st J 



L CORRELATIVE COMPARATIVE SENTENCES 
645. Correlate Sentences : son are introdr 



; : ::-_:.-.-tS : 



cue:. 

cu=u:us. 

qualis, 

cul 



'2. Ai~r:ii~ : ;rr-rl: r>r5 : 



:aur. 

:au::r ere 
tcties 

1 e_Ul IL1U 

::=l. si: 

:~.euu :v. :. err. 



qnam. 

:-;a.n:::ere 
cu:u§5, 
i u ~ rr. ill JL. 

u: = u:l =::uu 



(so) <k many 
(so) as great 

r...: \ 
flu same 



IK. 



(so) a* much] 

(SO) 0# 77ifl«& I 

a? for*/? 



qnemadmodmn, £ ** (*«) = <»• 
: v : rr. : c : . 

Qnot homines, tot sentantLae, fas) many men, (so) many minds. Pp. 
Frnmentam tanti fait qnanU iste aestimaviu Cic. Cbra was wor?\ 
much as he valued iL 



COAIPARATT 

Qualem inveni talem reliqui. Front. r I J 

(him i. 

Cimon incidit in eandem invidiam quani pater sons. ~ 
Nihil tarn populare quam bonitas. C 
Undness. 

Sic de ambiticne quomodo d§ arnica queruntur 
of ambition as they do of 

Tamdiu requiesco quamdiu ad te scribo. C: ; I rest 
7 to you. 

Reitakk8.— 1. On other form- with idem see -206. 

8. TTt quisque with the Snpe .ore come. :io quisq~7 

Comparative, and - . 

Ut quisque sibi plurimum coniidit- ita maxime exceilit. C r mm a man 

Obscurior quo quisque deterior. 

One member often her: 

Optimum quidque rarissimum est = Ut quidque rar: = 

3. Ut —ita is of ten used - ] - 

4. Ut and pro eo ut are fre [oently used a - - - fmras, ina*- 

Pro eo ut temporum difficultas tulit 
ut turn res erant : ut temporibus ill: 5 

furiosus. stark 

Vir ut inter Aetolos facundus Li v 

Ut sunt humana. nihil est perpetuum datum. Plaut r joth- 

I 

5. On quam. quantus. and the Superi - -511. 

e in this connection quam qui 
Tarn sum amicus reipiiblicae quam qui maxim! 
frit - ? he who U ; 



II. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES WITH atque 

646. Adjectives and Adyerbs kenesfi and Unlikeness 

may take atque or ac : 

Virtus eademin homine ac dec. Cic. 
god. 

Date operam ne simili fortuna utamur atque antea usi sumus. Tes. 
Do your end 

Dissimulatio est quum alia dicuntur ac sentias. [ :; 
other thin * are said tl ' a aething 3 s 

what you mean). 

Similiter facis ac si me roges cur te du5btis contaear ocuEs el 
altera. Cic. Tou why lam 

:ith tico t 



318 COMPARATIVE SENTENCES. 

Non dixi secus (aliter) ac sentiebam. Cic. I did not speak otherwise 

than I 'thought. 

Remarks.— 1. The expression is commonly explained by an ellipsis : 

Aliter dixi at que [aliter] sentiebam, / spoke one way and yet I was thinking 
(mother way. 

So we find : 

Timeo ne aliud credas atque aliud nunties. Ter. I fear that you believe one thing 
and tell another. 

Et and -que are occasionally used in the same way.* 

2. Alius, aliter, secus, seldom have quam : non alius and other negative combina- 
tions seldom have atque, commonly quam or nisi. (592, R. 2.) 

Philosophia quid est aliud ( = nihil est aliud) nisi donum deorum ? Cic. 
Philosophy — what else is it but the gift of the gods ? 

Non aliter has either quam or atque. 

III. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES WITH quam. 

647. Comparative Sentences with quam follow the compara- 
tive degree or comparative expressions. 

The Verb of the dependent clause is commonly to be supplied 
from the leading clause, according to 643. 

In Comparative Sentences quam takes the same case after it 
as before it : 

Melior tutiorque est certa pax quam sperata victoria. Liv. (292, R. 1.) 
Potius amicum quam dictum perdidl. Quint. / preferred to lose my 

'friend rather than my joke. 

Exlstimes velim neminem culquam cariorem unquam fuisse quam te 

mihi. Cic. (546, R. 3.) 

Remarks.— 1. When the second member is a subject, and the first member an oblique 
case, the second member ww^ be put in the Nominative, with the proper form of thej 
verb esse, unless the oblique case be an Accusative : 

Vicinus tuus equum meliorem habet quam tuns est. die. (598.) 

Haec verba sunt Varronis, hominis doctioris quam fuit Claudius, Gell. 
Them words are (the words) of Varro, a person of greater learning than Claudius (was). 

Ego hominem callidiorem vidi neminem quam Phormionem Ter. / have 
eeen. no shrewder man than Phorrnio ( = quam Phormio est). 

2. On quam pro, see quam qui, 313. On the double comparative, 314. 

3. Atque for quam after a comparative is poetical. 

4. When two clauses are compared by potius, rather, prius, before, citius, quicker, 
sooner, the second clause is put in the Present or Imperfect Subjunctive (51^), with or 
without ut. 

Depugna potius quam servias. Cic. (579 R.) 

Vir bonus statuit intolerabill dolore lacerarl potius quam ut omciumprodat. 
Cic. A good man resolves to let himself be torn by unsufferable anguish, rather than be nn 
true to his duty. 



* Still, -que in atque connects these clauses with the Relative, and the explanation t)f 
atque as ad + que, in comparison with + Jww (Ribbeck) is worthy of note. 



HISTORICAL IXFUSTTTVE. 319 

Morituros se affirmabant citius quam in alienos mores verterentur. Liv. 

They declared that they had rather die, than let themselves be changed to foreign ways. 

If the leading clause is in the Infinitive, the dependent clause may be in the Infinitive 
likewise, and this is the more common construction when the Infinitive follows a verb of 
Will and Desire : 

Haec patienda censeo, potius quam trucldari corpora vestra. Liv. 1 think, 
these things are to be endured, rather than that your bodies ( = you) s/iould be butchered. 

5. Instead of tam — quam, as— so, the Roman prefers the combinations noil minus 
quam— non magis quam (by Litotes). 

10 Non minus quam means. no less than = quite as much : 

Patria hoininibus non minus cara esse debet quam liberl. Cic. Country ought 
to be no less dear to men than children ( = quite as dear as). 

2.) Non magis quam means quite as little, or quite as much: 

Animus non magis est sanus quam corpus. Cic. The mind is no more sound than 
the body = as little sound as the body. 

Or it might mean : 

The mind is no more sound than the body = the body is quite as sound as the mind. 

Fahius non in armls praestantior fuit quam in toga. Cic Fabius was not more 
distinguished in war than in peace (no less distinguished in peace than in war, quite as dis- 
l in peace as in war). 



The Abridged Sentence. 

648. The compound sentence may be reduced to a simple 
sentence, by substituting an Infinitive or a Participle for the 
dependent clause. 

The Infinitive and Infinitive Forms. 

649. The practical uses of the Infinitive and its kindred 
forms, as equivalents of dependent clauses, have already been 
considered : 

Infinitive after Verbs of Creation : 424 and after. 

Gerund and Gerundive: 426 and after. 

Supine: 435 and after. 

Infinitive in Object Sentences : 526 and after. 

Infinitive in Complementary Final Sentences: 532. 

Infinitive in Eelative Sentences : 638. 

Remark. — Under the head of the Abridged Sentence, will be treated the Historical 
Infinitive and Oratio Obliqua: the Historical Infinitive, because it is a compendious 
Imperfect ; Oratio Obliqua. because it foreshortens, if it does not actually abridge, and 
effaces the finer distinctions of Oratio Recta. 

HISTORICAL INFINITIVE. 

650. The Infinitive of the Present is sometimes used by 
the historians to give a rapid outline of events, with the 



320 ORATIO OBLIQUA. 

subject In the Nominative ; generally, several infinitives in 

succession : 

[Verres] minitari Diodoro, vociferari palam, lacrimas interdum vix 
tenere. Cic. Verves threatened Diodorus, bawled out before everybody, 
sometimes could hardly restrain his tears. 

Remarks.— 1. The ancient assumption of an ellipsis of coepit, began (Quint, ix. 3, 58), 
serves to show the conception, although it does not explain the construction. There is 
no ellipsis. The Infinitive is to be explained as in Oratio Obliqua. It takes the place 
of the Imperfect, io used chiefly in rapid passages, and gives the outline of the thought, 
and not the details. 

2. The Historical Infinitive is sometimes found after cum, ubi, etc. : 
Non multuni erat progressa navis cum dato signo ruere tectum. Tac. Not 
far (but. a little way) had the ship advanced, when, at a signal given, the roof came down 
with a rush (began to tumble). 

ORATIO OBLIQUA 

651. The thoughts of the narrator, or the * exact words of 
a person, as reported by the narrator, are called Oratio Recta, or 
Direct Discourse. 

Indirect Discourse, or Oratio Obliqua, reports not the exact 
words spoken, but the general impression produced. 

Remarks. — 1. Under the general head of Oratio Obliqua are embraced also those 
clauses which imply Indirect Quotation (Partial Obliquity). See 509. 

2. Inquam, quoth I, is used in citing the Oratio Recta \ ajo, I say, generally in 
Oratio Obliqua. Inquam is always parenthetic ; ajo may or may not be parenthetic. 
Oratio Recta may also be cited by a parenthetic " ut ait," " ut ajunt," as he says, as 
they say. When the subject of inquit is mentioned it is commonly postponed. 

652. Oratio Obliqua differs from Oratio Recta, partly in the 
use of the Moods and Tenses, partly in the use of the Pro- 
nouns. 

Remarks. — 1. It must be remembered that 0- 0. is necessarily less accurate in its 
conception than 0. R-, and hence it is not always possible to restore the 0. R. from the 
0. 0- with perfect certainty. What is ideal to the speaker, may become unreal to the 
narrator from his knowledge of the result, and hence, when accuracy is aimed at, the nar- 
rator takes the point of view of the speaker, and in the last resort passes over to 0. 
Recta^ 

2. 0. Obliqua often comes in without any formal notice. 

Moods in Oratio Obliqua. 

653. In Oratio Obliqua the principal clauses are put in the 

Infinitive, the subordinate clauses in the Subjunctive. 



ORATIO OBLIQUA. 321 

Dratio Recta : Apud Hypanim fluvium, inquit Aristoteles, 

Oratio Obliqua : Apud Hypanim fluvium Aristoteles ait, 

0. R. : bestiolae quaedam nascuntur, 

O. O. : bestiolas quasdam nasci, 

0. R. : quae tinum diem vivunt, 

O. O. : quae unum diem vivant. 

0. R. — On the river Bog, says Aristotle, )-,.,-, . -, ,-, . 

5. 0.-Aristo0e says that, on the river Bog, \ httle creaiures are born > that 
live (but) one day. 

Socrates dicere solebat : 

0. R. Omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt eloquent es. 

O. O. Omnes in e5 quod scirent satis esse eloquentes. 

0. R. Socrates used to say : "All men are eloquent enough in what they understand." 

6. O. Socrates used to say thai all men were eloquent enough in tohal 
they UNDERSTOOD. 

Remark. — When the Principal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Indicative, the Infini- 
tive is used according to the rule for Verbs of Saying and Thinking. When the Prin- 
cipal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Subjunctive, as in the Ideal and Unreal conditions, 
special rules are necessary. (059.) 

Otherwise, Subjunctive in 0. R. continues to be Subjunctive in 0. 0. 

654. Interrogative sentences are put in the Subjunctive ac- 
cording to 469 : 

Ariovistus respondit se prius in Galliam venisse quam populum 
Romanum : quid sibi vellet cur in suas possessionem veniret. Caes. 

Ariovistus replied that he had come to Gaul before the Roman people : what did 
he (Caesar) mean by coming into his possessions f (Quid tibi vis ?) 

Thrasybulus magna voce exclamat ; cur se fugiant ? Thrasybulus 
cried out with a loud voice (asking) ,*ichy they ran from him. (O. R., cur 
me fugitis ?) 

Remakes.— 1. Indicative Rhetorical Questions (466) are transferred from the Indica- 
tive of the Oratio Recta to the Accusative and Infinitive of 0- 0- ; but seldom in the 
Second Person, which is commonly in the Subjunctive. 

0. R. Num possum % Can I? [No.] a 0. Kum posse ? Could he ? 

Quid est turpius % What is baser? [Nothing.] Quid esse turpius % What was 

baser f 

Quo se repulsos ab Romanis ituros % Liv. Whither should they go, if repelled by 
the Bomans f (Quo ibimus V 

Cui non apparere ab eo qui prior arma intulisset injiiriam ortam esse ? Liv. 
To whom is it not evident that the wrong began with him, who had been the first to wage 
war f (Cui non apparet I) 

Si bonum ducerent, quid pro noxio damnassenf? Liv. If they thought him a 
good man, why had they condemned him as guilty f (Si bonum ducitis, quid pro noxio 
damnastis ?) 

2. In Subjunctive Rhetorical Questions the Subjunctive is either retaine i, or trans* 
ferred to the Infinitive. The Deliberative Subjunctive is always retained. 

14* 



3'2'l ORATIO OBLIQUA. 

Quis sibi persuaderet sine certa re Ambiorigem ad ejusmodi consilium de- 
scendisse? Cabs. Who could persuade himself that Ambiorix had proceeded to an 
extreme measure like that, without (having made) a sure thing (of it) ? (Quis sibi per- 
suadeat %) 

The Infinitive form would be the Future: quern sibi persuasurum % (659) and is 
not to be distinguished from the Future Indicative. 

655. Imperative sentences are put in the Subjunctive: the 
Negative is, of course, ne : 

Redditur responsum : Nondum tempus pugnae esse ; castris se tene- 
rent. Liv. There teas returned for answer, that it was not yet time to fight, 
that they must keep within the camp. (O. R. castris vos tenete.) 

Vercingetorix cohortatus est : ne perturbarentur incommodo. Caes. 

Vercingetorix comforted them (by saying) that they must not allow themselves 
to be disconcerted by the disaster. (O. R. nolite perturbari.) 

Remark. — Ut can be used in the first sentence, according to 546 ; but only in the 
first. 

Pythia respondit ut moenibus ligneis se munlrent t Nep. The Pythia answered 
that they must defend themselves with walls of wood. 



TENSES IN ORATIO OBLIQUA. 

656. The Tenses of the Infinitive follow the laws already- 
laid down (530) : 

The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action; 
The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ; 
The Future Infinitive expresses future action. 

657. The Tenses of the Subjunctive follow the laws of se- 
quence (510). The choice is regulated by the point of view of 
the Reporter, or the point of view of the Speaker. 

Remark. — By assuming the point of view of the speaker, greater liveliness as well as 
greater accuracy is imparted to the discourse. This form is technically called Reprae- 
sentatio. In Conditional Sentences Repraesentatio often serves to prevent ambiguity. 
The point of view not unfrequently shifts from reporter to speaker, sometimes in the 
same sentence. 

Point of View of the Reporter: 

Legation! Ariovistus respondit : sibi mirum videri quid in sua Gallia 
quam belld vicisset, Caesarl negotii esset. Caes. To the embassy Ario- 
vistus replied, that it seemed strange to him (he wondered) what business Cae- 
sar had in his Gaul, which he had conquered in war. 

Point of View of the Speaker : 

Legatis Helveciorum Caesar respondit : consuesse deos immortales, 






ORATIO OBLIQUA. 323 






quo gravius homines ex commutatiSne rerum doleant, quos pro scelere 
eorum ulcisci velint, his secundiores interdum res concedere. Caes. To 

tlte envoys of the Helvetians Caesar replied, that the gods were (are) wont, that 
men might (may) suffer the more severely from change in their fortunes, to 
grant occasional increase of prosperity to those whom they wished (wish) to 
punish for their crime. (A. long passage may be found in Liv. xxviii. 32.) 

Point of View shifted : 

Ad haec Marius respondit : Si quid ab senatu petere vellent, ab armis 
discedant. Sall. Thereto Marius replied : If they wished to ask anything of 
the senate , they must lay down their arms. 

658. Object, Causal, Temporal, and Eelative Clauses follow 
the general laws of Oratio Obliqua. 

Examples of 6. O. in Object Glauses, 524. 

Causal, 541. 

Temporal, 562, 563, 564, 566, 570, 572, 576. 

Relative, 630. 

Remarks. — 1. Coordinate Relative Clauses are put in the Accusative and Infinitive 
(638). 

2. Relative Clauses are put in the Indicative : 1. In mere circumlocutions. 2. In ex- 
planations of the narrator. (630, R. 1.) 

3. Dum, with the Indicative, is often retained as a mere circumlocution (so also some- 
times cum) : 

Die, hospes, Spartae nos te hie vidisse jacentes, dum Sanctis patriae legibus 
obsequimur. Cic. Tell Sparta, stranger, that thou hast seen us lying here obeying (in 
obedience to) our country's hallowed laws. 

659. Conditional Sentences in Oratio Obliqua {Total and Partial). 

1. The Protasis follows the rule. 

2. The Indicative Apodosis follows the rule, but Present, Im- 
perfect, and Perfect Subjunctive are turned into the Future In- 
finitive or its periphrases. 

The Pluperfect Subjunctive is transferred to the Perfect In- 
finitive of the Active Periphrastic Conjugation. 

Passive and Supine-less Verbs take the circumlocution with 
faturmn fuisse ut . . . . 240, R. 2. 

Remark.— Posse needs no Future (245, R. 3), and potuisse no Periphrastic Perfect 
Infinitive, so that these forms are often used to lighten the construction. 

3. Identical Forms. — In the transfer of conditions to 0. 0., 
the difference between many forms disappears. For instance : 






;i:at: : : :,i:;ri, 



I. SI id :re: 

S: id eredes. errabis. Dice te. si id eredas, erraturum esse. 
Si :d creeds, euros 
TT. Si id c /edis. errabis. 
Si id creres. errabis 
Si id eredas, erres. 

Si id crederes. errares 

. 

m. Si id e: b - i (lexis, errabis. 
Siid creed deras. erres. 
Si id ere die eras, err averts. 
Si id credidisses. errares, 



Dixi fee, si id crederes. erratarum esse. 



I>ixi te. si id credidisses, erraturum 
esse. 



toi ¥i ':'.. dcreca exactness is lost 

B epraesentatio for the logical condition, and 
r Dm ■?:"-. it is] ssible. The difference 

_::.'.±iif:l !:..-: . :..:-.."_".;---..-_-.■. .e :;:'_- :;;.;-. 



;:-:.:i — Id 2 : I :"ce iirerfiiie 
In^o. IL the ami ignityis troide 

tne use ::' r'ae "r"; ..ris: ; : P rrre:: :': 

"r~::: -11 7 "..: Izl'r '.. ~ It rill ill A 

rator. to whom both are Fasi 

in., like Xo. n.. is used chiej 

Ariovistus respondit: SI quid ipsi a Caesare opus esse: sese ad ilium ventu- 
rumruisse: si quid ille se velit. ilium ad s? venire upartere 2abe A 
answered, that if he had wanted anything of Caesar he would hare come to Mm ; if he 
(Caesar) wanted anything of him. he ought to come to him (Ariovistns). 

E 5: :a:a mi a: I Caesare :pus esse: er: ad ilium reaissem : si quid ille 
me vd: iidara aa me venire caor:e: 



660. Logical Conditions in Oratio Obliqua : 



1. Ad haec Arte vistas respondit . si ipse pepulo Rcraano ncn prae- 
s:ri":ere: quern ad mod-am sac rare ateretur. ncn cportere sese a populo 
Redman e in sac j-are impedlri L'azs _T : : : If 

he did not prescribe to the Roman people how t their rigid, he ought 

not to he hindered by the 5 of his right. | O, R. Si 

ego con praes:r:bo, n5n cportet me impedirl) 

2 Si be nam aacerent, cd: pre ncxie damnassent ? Sin 593] noxium 
cemperissent. qaid alteram ccnsulatum crederent? Iar. 

7. good m \ad they condemned him as guilty ; if on the 

hand they had f: im guilty, why did i~ with 7 con- 

sulship? OR Si — ducitis. quid damr.asas 9 sin — comperistis. quid cre- 
di as?) 

THurins cl ami tab at, saara senientiam in atramque partem esse 
tatam : si nihil esse: 5. R., si nihil erit lurius. nulla periculo ad proxi- 
marn legidnem perven tares O. R, psrveaie:is ; si Gallia omnis cum 
German!? censentiret C R . sicensentit unam esse 6. R.. est. in cele- 
r:*".:e r -s::am said: em .a~s T .' ' ~ 

; (should be especial t?oey 






CONDITIONAL 8KMTENCES Of 0. 0. 325 

! get to ike-next legion without danger ; - 

the Germans, their only m speed. 

4. Bum omnium laborum finem fore existimabant si hostem ab Hiberd 
intercludere potuissent. Caes. They thought that would bt t 
(their; toils, if they could cut off the enemy fnm tht Z 5. R., is labo- 
rum finis erit (or fuerit) si hostem intercludere potuerimus 

5. [Hi] Jugurthae non mediocrem animum pollicitando accendebant 
si Micipsa rex occidisset, fore uti solus imperio Numidiae potiretur. 
Sall. These persons kindled no little courage in Jug ~~ 
wring oxer and oxer that if King Micipsa fell, he 

O. R.. si Micipsa Occident, tu solus imperio potie:. 
G. Fides data est, si Jugnrtham vivum aut necatum sibi tradidisset 
fore ut illi senatus impunitatem et sua omnia concederet. Sall. His 
word was pledged that if lie delivered tc 

would grant him impunity, O. R., si mihi tradideris, 

tibi senatus tua omnia concedet. 

7. Non multo ante urbem captam exaudita vox est . . futururn 
nisi provisum esset, ut Roma caperetur. Cic. N< 
of the city, a voice was heard saying), that 
Borne would be taken. (O. R., nisi provisum erit, Roma capietur 

8. Ariovistus respondit si quid ille se velit ilium ad se venire opor- 
tere. Caes. 

9. [Ariovistus respondit] nisi decedat [Caesar] sese ilium pro hoste 
habiturum; quodsi eum interfecerit, multis sese nobilibus principibus- 
que populi Romani gratum facturum. Caes. A 

l< 

him, he w mid lo a j f the highest \ 

pie. O. R., Nisi decedes te pro hoste habebo . . . si te inter- 
fecero gratum fee ero (236, R 

10. Fertur Jugurtha dixissa urbem venalem et mature perituram si 
-^ emptor em in veu erit. Sall. Subj 

that hit it j O. R., 

urbs peribit si emptorem invenerit : Fat. Perl. Ind.) 

Remark. — Fosse is used as has been stared. : ' 

Negamnt bellum dirimi posse nisi Messeniis Achaei Pylum redderent ~ ~~~ 
They said that the ic a 
■ nians. (Q. R. Bellum dirimi non potest poterit nisi Pylum reddent- 
-:£• Docent. si turris concidisset. non posse milites contineri quin spe praedae in 
- ttrbem irrumpant- Caes. Tkey shoic ::':-:<-.:: 

from -\e hope of booty. 0. R, si conciderit. non possi^: 

ipoterunt contineri.) 

661. Ideal Conditions in Oratio Obliqna : 

1. Ait se si uratur ;i Quam hoc suave" dicturum. Cic. He declares 



3*26 PRONOUNS IN ORATIO OBLIQUA. 

that if he were to be burnt lie would say, " How sweet this &.V (O. R. Si urar, 
dicam, same form as Logical.) 

2. Voluptatem si ipsa pro se loquatur concessuram arbitror Dignitati. 
Cic. I think that if Pleasure were to speak for herself, she would yield (the 
palm) to Virtue. (The context shows (Fin. III. 1) that the condition is 
Ideal, not Logical. Si loquatur, concedat. Comp. 598, R. 2.) 

662. Unreal Conditions in Oratio Obllqua : 

1 . Titurius clamitabat Eburones, si Caesar adesset, ad castra [Roma- 
n5rum] venturos [non] esse. Caes. Titurius kept crying out that if Caesar 
were there, tlte Eburones loould not be coming to the campxf the Romans. ! 
(6. R.. si Caesar adesset, Eburones non venirent.) On the rareness of 
this form see 659, R. 

2. Apparebat si diutius vixisset Hamilcare duce Poen5s arma Italiae j 
illaturos fuisse. Liy. It was evident that if he had lived longer, the Funics \ 
would have carried their arms into Italy under Hamilcafs conduct. 

3. Nisi eo ipso tempore nuntii de Caesaris victdria essent allati ex- 
Istimabant plerique futurum fuisse ut oppidum amitteretur. Caes. Had i 
not news of Caesar's victory been brought at that very time, most persons^ 
tlwught the city would have been lost. (O. R., nisi nuntii allati essent, oppi- 
dum amissum esset.) 

Remark.— As the Pluperfect Indicative is sometimes used (rhetorically) for the Sub- 
junctive (246, R. 3), so the ordinary Perfect Infinitive is sometimes employed instead of J 
the Periphrastic : 

Nemo mini persuadebit multos praestantes viros tanta esse conatos (= cona j 
turos fuisse) nisi animo cernerent (599, R. 1) posteritatem ad se pertinere. Cicj 
No one will per made me that (so) many eminent men had made such mighty endeavors, ha 
they not seen with their mind^ (eye) that posterity belonged to them. 

Pompejum plerique exlstimant si acrius insequl voluisset bellum eo die pot 
uisse flnire. Caes. Most people think that if Pompey had (but) determined to follow itjj 
more energetically, he could have finished the war on that day. 0- R-, si voluisset, po 
tnit, 599, R. 2.) 

Namque ilia multitudine si sana mens esset (599, R. 1) Graeciae, suppliciun; 
Persas dare potuisse. Nep. For with that number if Greece had had (= been in herjj 
sound mind, the Persians might have paid the penalty (due). (0. R- SI sana mens esse J 
Graeciae. supplicium Persae dare potuerunt) 

Pronouns in Oratio Obllqua. 

663. 1. The Reflexive is used according to the principles lai*j 
down 520, and after. 

2. The person addressed is ille or is : 

[Ariovistus respondit] nisi decedat [Caesar] sese ilium pro hoste h£| 
biturum : quodsi eum interfecerit, multis sese nobilibus principibusqujj 
populi Roman! gratum facturum. Caes. (667, R. 9.) 

Of course this does not exclude the ordinary demonstrative use. 



ORATIO OBLIQUA. 



327 



3. Hie and iste are commonly changed into ille or is, as nunc 
into turn and tunc. 

Diodorus respondit se panels illis diebus argentum misisse Lily- 
baeum. Cic. (389, R. 4.) 

4, Nos is used when the narrator's party is referred to. Oaes. 
B. G. I. 44. 



664. Specimens of the conversion of Oratio Obllqua into 
Oratio Recta. 



Oratio Obllqua. 

1. Anovistus respondit : 

Transisse Rhenum sese non 
sua sponte sed rogatum et arcessi- 
tum a Gallis ; non sine magna spe 
magnlsque praemiis domum propin- 
quosque rellqnisse ; sedes habere 
in Gallia ab ipsls concessas, obsides 
ipsorum voluntate datos ; stlpen- 
dium capere jure belli, quod victores 
victls imponere consuerint. Non 
sese Gallis sed Gallos sibi bellum in- 
tulisse ; omnes Galliae clvitates ad 
se oppugnandum venisse et contra 
,lll f\ s5 castra habuisse ; eas omnes 
I copias a se uno proelio pulsas ac 
pot superatas esse. Si iterum experlri 
w«J! velint, se iterum paratum esse de- 
,# certare ; si pace uti velint, iniquum 
est cle stlpendio recusare, quod sua 
cim|; voluntate ad id tempus pependerint, 
iiiel Amicitiam popull Roman! sibi or- 
seknamento et praesidio, non detri- 
ments esse oportere idque se" ea spe 
petisse. Si per populum Romanum 
stlpendium remittitur et dediticil 
subtrahantur, non minus libenter 
:sese recusaturum popull RomanI 
amicitiam quam appetierit. Quod 
multitudinem Germanorum in Gal- 
!liam traducat, id se" sui muniendl, 
I non Galliae impugnandae causa 
h; facere ; ejus rel testimonio esse 
quod nisi rogatus non veuerit et 
'quod bellum non intuierit sed de- 
fender it. 

Caes. B. G. I., 44. 



Oratio Recta. 



Transil Rhenum non mea sponte 
sed rogatus et arcessltus a Gallis ; 
non sine magna spe magnlsque 
praemiis domum propinquosque re- 
liqui ; sedes liabeo in Gallia ab ipsls 
concessas, obsides ipsorum volun- 
tate datos ; stlpendium capio jure 
belli, quod victores victls imponere 
consuerunt. Nou ego Gallis sed 
Galll mihi bellum intulerunt ; o- 
mnes Galliae clvitates acl me oppu- 
gnandum venerunt et contra me 
castra habuerunt ; eae omnes copiae 
a me uno proelio pulsae ac supera- 
tae sunt. Si iterum experlri volunt, 
iterum paratus sum decertare, si 
pace uti volunt, iniquum est de stl- 
pendio recusare, quod sua voluntate 
ad hoc tempus pependerunt. Amici- 
tiam popull RomanI mihi orna- 
mento et praesidio, non detriments 
esse oportet idque ea spe petil. Si 
per populum Romanum stlpendium 
remittetur et dediticil subtrahentur, 
non minus libenter recusabo popull 
RomanI amicitiam quam ap petil. 
Quod multitudinem Germanorum 
in Galliam traducam * id mel muni- 
endl non Galliae impugnandae 
causa facio ; ejus rel testimonio est 
quod nisi rogatus nou venl et quod 
bellum non intull sed defend!. 



* Allusion to the preceding speech, 
otherwise traduco. 



328 



ORATIO OBLIQTJA. 



Oratio Obliqua. 

2. ZZw OcBsar ita respondit : 

Ed sibi minus dubitatlonis darl 
quod e8s res quas lBgatl HelvBtil 
commemorassent memoria tenBret 
atque e(5 gravius ferre quo minus 
merits popull Roifianl accidissent ; 
qui si alicujus injuriae sibi conscius 
fuisset non fuisse difficile cavBre; 
sed eo deceptum quod neque com- 
missum a sB intellegeret quarB 
timBret neque sine causa" timendum 
putaret. Quod si veteris contumB- 
liae obllvisci vellet num etiam recen- 
tium injuriarum, quod eo invito iter 
per provinciam per vim tempt-as- 
sent, quod Aeduos, quod Ambar- 
ros, quod Allobrogas vexassent me- 
moriam dBponere posse? Quod 
sua victoria tarn insolenter gloria- 
rentur quodque tarn diu sB impune 
tulisse injurias aclmirarentur eodem 
pertinBre. Consuesse enim deos im- 
mortalBs quo gravius homines ex 
commutatione rBrum doleant, quos 
pro scelere eorum ulciscl velint, his 
secundiorBs interdum res et diutur- 
niorem impunitatem concBdere. 
Cum ea ita sint, tamen si obsidBs, ab 
ils sibi dentur utl ea quae pollicean- 
tnr facturos intellegat, et si Aeduls 
dB injurils quas ipsis socilsque 
eorum intulerint, item si Allobrogi- 
bus satisfaciant sBsB cum ils pacem 
esse facturum. 

Caes. B. G. L, 14. 



Oratio Recta. 



Hoc mihi minus dubitationis da- 
tur quod eas rBs quas vos, lBgatl 
Helvetii, commemorastis, memoria 
teneo atque eo gravius fero quo 
minus merito popull Romani acci- 
dBrunt ; qui si alicujus injuriae sibi 
conscius fuisset, non fuit difficile ca- 
vBre; sed eo deceptus quod neque 
commissum a sB intellegBbat quarB 
timBret neque sine causa timendum 
putabat. Quod si veteris contumB- 
liae obliviscl volo, num etiam recen- 
tium injuriarum, quod mB invito 
iter per provinciam per vim temp- 
tastis quod Aeduos, quod Ambarros, 
quod Allobrogas vexastis,memoriam 
dBponere possum ? Quod vestra vi- 
ctoria tarn insolenter gloriaminl. 
quodque tarn diu mB impune tu- 
lisse injurias admiramini eodem 
pertinent. ConsuBvBrunt enim dl 
immortalBs quo gravius homines 
ex commutatione rBrum doleant* 
quos pro scelere eorum ulciscl vo- 
lunt, his secundiorBs interdum rBs 
et diuturniorem impunitatem con- 
cBdere. Cum haec ita sint, tamen 
si obsidBs a vobls mihi dabuntur, utl j 
ea, quae pollicBmini, facturos intel- 
legam et si Aeduls dB injurils quas 
ipsis socilsque eorum intulistis, item 
si Allobrogibus satisfaciBtis, ego vo- 
blscum pacem faciam. 



3. Sulla regl patefecit : 

Quod polliceatur, senatum et po- 
pulum Eomanum, quoniam amplius 
armls valuissent, non in gratiam 
habittiros ; faciundum aliquid, quod 
illorum magis quam sua rBtulisse 
viderBtur ; id ideo in promptu esse, 
quoniam Jugurthaecopiam habBret, 
quern si Romanls tradidisset, fore 
ut ill! plurimum dBbBrBtur ; amici- 
tiam, foedus, Numidiae partem, 
quam nunc peteret, tunc ultro ad- 
venttiram. 

Sall. B. J. 111. 



Quod pollicBris, senatus et popu- i 
lus Romanus quoniam amplius 
armls valuBrunt, non in gratiam ha 
bBbunt; faciundum aliquid, quod 
illorum magis quam tua rBtulisse 
videatur ; id ideo in promptu est, 
quoniam Jugurthae copiam habBs, 
quern si Romanls tradideris tibi i 
plurimum dBbBbitur ; amlcitia, foe- 
dus, Numidiae pars, quam nunc 
petis, tunc ultrd adveniet. 

*Kraner's interpretation would 
require do lent. 



b 



ATTRACTION OF MOOD. 



329 



Oratio Obliqua. 

4. AtJienienses deplordverunt ms- 
tdtionem populdtionemque miserd- 
bilem agrbrum. Neque se id querl 
quod hostilia ab hoste pass! forent ; 
esse enim quaedam belli jura quae 
ut facere ita pati sit fas. Sata extirl, 
dirui tecta, praedas hominum peco- 
r urn que agi misera raagis quani in- 
digna patient! esse ; vSrum enim 
vSro id se querl, quod is, qui Roma- 
nos alienigenas et barbaros vocet, 
adeo omnia simul divina humana- 
' que jura polluerit ut priore popula- 
i tione cum infernis diis, secunda 
cum superls bellum nefarium gesse- 

- rit. Omnia sepulcra monumentaque 
■' diruta esse in ftnibus suis, omnium 

- nudatos manes, nullius ossa terra 
tegl. Qualem terram Atticam ffece- 

• rit, exornatam quondam opulentarn- 
[ que, talem eum si liceat A.etoliam 
I Graeciamque omnem facturum. 
^Urbis quoque suae similem defor- 
( mitatem futarum fuisse nisi RomanI 
■ subvenissent. 

Lit. xxxi. 30. 



Oratio Recta. 



Nonid querimur quod hostilia ab 
hoste pass! sumus. Sunt enim 
quaedam belli jura quae ut facere 
ita pati est fas. Sata exuri, dirui 
tecta, praedas hominum pecorum- 
que agi misera magis quam indigna 
patient! sunt ; vSrum enim vBro id 
querimur quod is, qui Roman os 
aliSnigenas et barbaros vocat, adeo 
omnia simul divina humanaque 
jura polluit ut priore populatione 
cum infernis diis, secunda cum su- 
perls bellum nefarium gesserit. 
Omnia sepulcra monumentaque di- 
ruta sunt in finibus nostris, omnium 
ntidati manes, nullius ossa terra 
teguntur. Qualem terrain Atticam 
fecit, exornatam quondam opulen- 
tamque, talem is, si licBbit Aetoliam 
Graeciamque omnem faciet. Urbis 
quoque nostrae similis deformitas 
tuisset, nisi RomanI subvenissent. 



INVOLVED ORATIO OBLIQUA. ATTRACTION OF MOOD. 

665. Oratio Obliqua proper depends on some verb of Thinking or 
Saying, expressed or understood. In a more general sense, the term O. 
Obliqua is used of all complementary clauses, that belong to ideal rela- 
tions. The principle is the same in both sets of sentences, for in the one 
as in the other, the Infinitive takes its dependencies in the Subjunctive, on 
account of the close relation between the Ideal mood and the Substantive 
Idea of the verb. Hence the favorite combination of the Infinitive and 
the Ideal second person : 

Proprium human! ingenii est odisse quern laeseris. Tac. It is peculiar 
to human nature to hate whom you have injured. (But Odisti quem laesisti.) 

The so-called attraction of mood by which clauses originally Indicative 
become Subjunctive in dependence on Subjunctives, is another phase of 
the same general principle. 

666. All clauses which depend on Infinitives and Subjunc- 
tives, and form an integral part of the thought, are put in the 
Subjunctive : 



330 PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. 

Recordatione nostrae amicitiae sic fruor ut beate vixisse videar quia 

cum Scipione vixerim. Cic. / enjoy the remembrance of our friendship so 
much that I seem to I lave lived happily because Hived with Scipio. 

Vereor ne dum minuere velim laborem augeam. Cic. I fear lest while 
lam wishing to lessen the toil I may increase it (dum minuere volo, augeo). 

Corporis viribus utare dum adsint, cum absint ne requiras. Cic. 
(264.) 

Quare flebat ut omnium oculos quotiescumque in publicum prodisset 
ad se convert eret. Nep. Whereby it happened that he attracted the eyes of 
all, every time lie went out in public (quotiescumque prodierat convertebat). 

Nescire quid antequam natus sis acciderit, id est semper esse pue- 
rum. Cic. Not to know what happened before you were born, (that) is to be 
always a boy. 

Fraus fidem in parvis sibi praestruit ut cum operae pretium sit, 
cum magna mercede fallat. Cic. Fraud lays itself a foundation of credit 
in small things in order that when it is worth while it may make a great profit 
by cheating. 

Rete texunt [araneolae] ut si quid inhaeserit conficiant. Cic. Spiders 
iceave a web to kill anything that gets caught in it (si quid inhaesit confici- 
unt, 569). 

Abeunti si quid poposcerit concedere moris. Tac. To the departing^ 
(guest) it is customary to grant anything that he asks (Si quid poposcitl 
concedunt). 

Remarks. — 1. From this it is easy to see how the Subjunctive came to be used in 
Generic or Iterative sense after Tenses of Continuance. Present, Imperfect, and Futu 
Indicative may all involve the Notion of Habit, Will, Inclination, Endeavor, and th< 
complementary clauses would follow the sense rather than the form (Partial Obliquity) 
Examples, see 505, R. 

2. Dum not unfrequently resists the Attractive both in prose and poetry : 

Tantum ne noceas dum vis prodesse videto. Ov. (548.) 



Participial Sentences. 

667. Participles are used in Latin even more extensively 
than in English, to express a great variety of subordinate rela- 
tions, such as Time and Circumstance, Cause and Occasion 
Condition and Concession, The classification cannot always b 
exact, as one kind blends with another. 



% 



Remarks. — 1. It is sometimes convenient to translate a Participial Sentence by a col 
ordinate clause, but the Participle itself is never coordinate, and such clauses are neve| 
equivalents. (409, R. 2.) : 

Manlius Galium caesura torque spoliavit Liv. Manlius slew the Gaul and strijch 
ved him of his neckchain (alter slaying the Gaul stripped him of his neckchain, havinj| 
slain, etc.). 



■ 



PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. 331 

Miltiades capitis afcsolutus, pecunia multatus est. Nep. Miltiades (though) ac- 
quitted of a capital charge, was mulcted in (a sum of) money (was acquitted, but mulcted). 

2. A common translation of the Participle is an Abstract Noun : See 324, R 3 : 

Terra mutata non mutat mores. Lrv. The change of land changeth not the char- 
acter. 

Teucer Ulixen reum facit Ajacis occisl. Quint. Teucer indicts Ulysses for the 
murder of Ajax. 

On the Participle after Verbs of Perception and Representation, see 524, R. 1 and 536. 

668. Participles may represent Time when : 

Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae. Nep. Alexan- 
der (when he was) dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas. 

Dionysius tyrannus Syracusis expulsus Corinth! pueros docebat. 
Cic. Dionysius the tyrant, (after he had been) exiled from Syracuse (after 
i his exile from Syracuse), taught (a) boys 1 (school) at Coiinth. 

Ablative Absolute : 

Solon et Pisistratus Servio Tullio regnante viguerunt. Cic. Solon and 
f Pisistratus flourished wlien Servius Tullius was king (in the reign of Servius 
' { '\\ Tullius). 

Sole orto Volsci se circumvallatos viderunt. Lrv. When the sun was 
! | risen (after sunrise), the Volscians saw that they were surrounded by lines of 
;1 t intrenchment. 

Remark.— On the Ablative Absolute of the Simple Participle, see 438, R. 1. 

4 669. Participles may represent Cause Why : 

thepi 

Areopagitae damnaverunt puerum coturnicum oculos eruentem. 
Quint. The court of Mars 1 Hill condemned a boy because he plucked out 
(for plucking out) the eyes of quails. 

Athenienses Alcibiadem corruptum a rege Persarum capere noluisse 
Cymen arguebant. Nep, The Athenians charged Alcibiades with having 
been unioilling to take Cyme (because he had been) bribed by the King of 
Persia. 

I 

J Ablative Absolute : 

liOlip Roman! veteres regnari omnes volebant libertatis dulcedine nondum 
3 M experta. Liv. The old Bomans all wished to have a king over them (because 
they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty. 



nW 



Remark. — An apparent cause is given by ut as velut, as, for instance, tanquam (so) 
i «*, quasi, as if see 604, R. 2. 

670. Participles may represent Condition and Concession : 
Si latet ars prodest, aflfert deprensa pudorem. Ov. (594, 2.) 



332 PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. 

Risus interdum ita repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenere nequea- 
mus. Cic. (611.) 

Miltiades capitis absolutus pecunia multatus est. Nep. (667, R.) 

Ablative Absolute : 

Maximas virtutes jacere omnes necesse est voluptate dominante. 
Cic. (594, 2.) 

Remark.— Later writers combine with the Participle etsi, quanquam, quamvis, 
see 611, R. 

671. Participles may represent Relative Clauses (640) : 

Omnes aliud agentes, aliud simulantes, perfidi sunt. Cic. 
Pisistratus Homer! libros confus5s antea sic disposuisse dicitur ut 
nunc habemus. Cic. 

Remark.— So called, qui dicitur, vocatur, quern vocant ; above-mentioned, quern 
antea, supra diximus. 

672. Future Participle (Active). — The Future Participle is a verbal 
adjective, denoting capability and tendency, chiefly employed in the older 
language with sum, I am, as a periphrastic tense. In later Latin, it is used 
freely, just as the Present and Perfect Participles, to express subordinate 
relations. 

Peculiar is the free use of it in Sentences of Design, and especially no- 
ticeable the compactness gained by the employment of it in Conditional 
Relations. 

673. In later Latin, the Future Participle (Active) is used to 
represent subordinate relations : 

1. Time When: 

Tiberius trajecturus (cum trajecturus esset) Rhenum commeatum non 
transmisit. Suet. When Tiberius was about to cross the Bhine, he did not 
send over the provisions. 

2. Cause Why: 

Deridiculo fuit senex foedissimae adulationis tantum infamia usurus 
Tac. A butt of ridicule was the old man, as infamy was the only gain he 
would make by his foul fawning. 

Antiochus securus erat de bello Roman5 tanquam non transiturls in 
Asiam Romanis. (604, R. 2.) 

3. Purpose : 

Maroboduus misit legatos ad Tiberium oraturos auxilia. Tac. (543 
R. 2.) 



ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 333 

Remark.— The Present Participle is sometimes used in a similar sense, but the Pur- 
pose is only an inference : 

Legati venerunt nuntiantes Asiae quoque civitates sollicitarl. Lit. Envoys 

came with the announcement thai the states of Asia (Minor) also were tampered with. 

4. Condition and Concession : 

1.) Protasis. 

Dedituris se Hannibal! fuisse accersendum Romanorum praesidium? 
Liv. If they had been ready to surrender to Hannibal, would they ham had 
to send for a Roman garrison f (= Si dedituri fuissent, O. R. si dedituri 
fuerunt.) 

2.) Apodosis. 

Quatiunt arma, rupturi imperium ni ducantur. Tac. They clash their 
arms, ready to break orders, if they be not led forward. 

Librum mis! exigent! tibi, missurus ets! non exegisses. Plin. Ep. I 
have sent you the book, as you exacted it, although I should have sent it even 
if you had not exacted it. 

ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 

674. The Latin language allows greater freedom in the ar- 
rangement of words than the English. This freedom is, of 
course, due to its greater wealth of inflections. 

675. Grammatical arrangement has for its object clearness. 
Rhetorical arrangement has for its objects Emphasis and 

Rhythm. 

1. Emphasis is produced 1. By reversing the ordinary position. 

2. By approximation of similars or opposites. 

3. By separation. 

In all sentences beginning and end are emphatic points. In long sen- 
tences the means as well as the extremes are the points of emphasis. 

2. Rhythm. — Much depends on the rhythmical order of words, for 
which the treatises of the ancients are to be consulted. Especially avoided 
are poetic rhythms. So, for example, the dactyl and spondee, or close of 
an hexameter at the end of a period. 

676. Rule I. — The most simple arrangement of a sentence 
is as follows : 

1. The Subject and its Modifiers. 

2. The Modifiers of the Predicate. 

3. The Predicate Proper or Verb. 



334: ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 

1. Democritus tyrannus, 2. Syracusis expulsus Corinthi pueros, 
o. docebat. Cic. (008.) 
Rhetorical positions : 

Potentes sequitur invidia. Quint. (479.) 
Nobis non satisfacit ipse Demosthenes. Cic. (556. R. 1.) 
Descriptus eratpopulus Romanus censu, ordinibus, aetatibus. ClC. 
Intra moenia sunt hostes. Sall. 

Remark.— The modifiers of the predicate stand in the order of their importance. The 
following arr mgement is common : 

1. Place, Time, Cause, or Means. 

2. Indirect Object. 

3. Direct Object. 

4. Adverb. 

5. Verb. 

677. Rule II. — Interrogative Sentences begin with the in- 
terrogative, subordinate clauses with the leading particle or 
relative : 

Quis eum diligat quern metuat ? Cic. (637.) 

Postquam Caesar pervenit obsides poposcit. Caes. (563.) 

Si spiritum ducit vivit. Cic. (597.) 

Qui timere desierint odisse incipient. Tac (569.) 

Rhetorical position : 

Naturam si sequemur due em, nunquam aberrabimus. Ctc. (597.) 

De futuris rebus etsi semper difficile est dicere, tamen interdum con- 
jectura possis accedere. Cic. (606.) 

Cato mirari se ajebat quod non rideret haruspex, haruspicem cum 
vidisset. Cic. (569.) 

678. Rule III. — An Adjective or dependent Genitive fol- 
lows the word to which it belongs : 

Torquatus filium suum necari jussit. Sall. (540.) 

Sensum oculorum praecipit animus. Quint. (540.) 

Rhetorical positions : 

Hannibalem sui elves e civitate ejecerunt. Cic. (295, R. 1.) 

Isocrates queritur plus henoris corporum quam animorum virtutibus 
dari. Quint. 

Ager, cum multos ann5s requievit, uberiores efferre fiaiges solet. Cic. 
(567.) 

Vereor ne parum hie liber mellis et absinthii multum habere videa- 
tur. Quint. (552.) 

Remarks.— 1. Many expressions have become fixed formulae: So titles, proper 
name-', and the like : see 284 : 

Facinus est vinciri civem Romanum. Cic. (535.) 



ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 335 

2. The demonstrative pronouns regularly precede : 

Yereor ne hie liber absinthii multum habere videatur. Quint. (551.) 

Rhetorical position : 

Recordare tempus illud, cum pater Curio maerens jacebat in lecto. Cic. (582.) 

3. New modifiers of either element may be inserted, prefixed, or added : 
Catonem vidi in bibliotheca sedentem multls circumfusum Stoicorum librls. 

Cic. (536.) 

Saepe magna indoles virtutis priusquam reipublicae prodesse potuisset ez- 

stinctafuit. Cic. (579.) 

At videte hominis intolerabilem audaciam. Cic. (490.) 
Aristides interfuit pugnae navall apud Salaminem. Nep. (343.) 

679. Eule IV. — Adverbs are commonly put next to their 
verb, and before it when it ends a sentence, and immediately 
before their adjective or adverb : 

Zenonem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter . . . Cic. (586.) 
Nemo orator em admiratus est quod Latine loqueretur. Cic. (542.) 
Vix cuiquam persuadebatur Graecia omni cessuros Romanos. Lrv. 
(546, R. 2.) 

Risus interdum ita repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenere neque- 
amus. Cic. (611.) 
Rhetorical positions : 

iram bene Bnnius initium dixit insaniae. Cic. (441.) 
Saepe magna indoles virtutis priusquam reipublicae pr5desse potu- 
isset exstincta fuit. Cic. (579.) 

Remarks.— 1. Fere, paene, prope, usually follow : 
Nemo fere saltat sobrius nisi forte insanit Cic. (591, R. 4.) 
■ l 2. Negatives always precede, see 447. 

680. Eule V. — Prepositions regularly precede their case. 

11(414) 

A recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet discedere. Cic. 
(332.) 

Remarks. — 1. On versus, tenus and the regular postposition of cum in combination 
with the Personal Pronouns and the Relative, see 414, R. 1. 

2. Monosyllabic prepositions are not unfrequently put between the Adjective and 
♦Substantive : 

Magna cum cur a (401). 
[ Less frequently between the Genitive and Substantive; except when the relative is 
employed. 

3. Dissyllabic prepositions are sometimes put after their case (Anastrophe), especial- 
ly after a relative or demonstrative : most frequently contra, inter, propter. So also 
adverbs. 

4. The preposition may be separated from its case- by a Genitive or an Adverb. 
Ad Appii Claudil senectiitem accedebat etiam ut caecus esset. Cic. (558.) 

5. Monosyllabic prepositions such as cum, ex, de, post, sometimes append the en- 



ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 

clitics -que. -ve. -ne. as ex que ils. a?idfro??i them. Usually, however, the enclitics join 
the dependent substantive : in patriamque rediit, and returned to his country. 
On the position of per, see 415, R. 

681. Rule VX — Particles vary : 

Enim commonly takes the second, seldom the third place; nam and 
namque are regularly prepositive. 

Ergo in the syllogism precedes, elsewhere follows ; igitur is commonly 
second or third ; itaque regularly first. 

Tamen is first, but may follow an emphatic word. 

Etiam usually precedes, quoque always follows. 

Quidem and demum (at length) follow the word to which they belong. 

682. Rule VJLL — A word that belongs to more than one 
word regularly stands before them all, or after them all, some • 
times after the first (287) : 

Ariovistus respondit multls sese nSbilibus principibusque popul 
Roman! gratum facturum. Caes. (670, R. 9.) 

Isocrates queritur plus honoris corporum quam animorum virtutibu 
dari. Quint. (542, R.) 

Longum est mulorum persequ! utilitates et asinorum. Cic. (246, R 

683. Rule YIII. — Words of kindred or opposite meanin; 
are often put side by side for the sake of complement or con 
trast : 

Manus manum lavat, One hand washes the other. 

Cato mirari se ajebat quod non rider et haruspex, haruspicem cur 
vidisset. Cic. (569.) 

Emit morte immortalitatem. Quint. (404.) 

684. Rule IX. — Contrasted Pairs. — "When pairs are cor 
trasted, the second is put in the same order as the first, bi 
often in inverse order. This inverse order i^called Chiasmus, 
or crosswise position, and gives alternate stress. The princip" 
is of wide application. 

Same order : 

Fortuna vestra facit ut irae meae temperem. Liv. (557.) 
Malo te sapiens hostis metuat quam stult! elves laudent. Liv. (54 
R. 2.) 

* From the Greek letter X- 

1. Foris y" 2 - arma. 

2. consilium ^ l. domi. 



ton: 



ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 33? 

Inverse order (Chiasmus) : 

Ante vidimus (1) fulgurationem (2) quam sonum (2) audiamus (1). 
Sen. (579.) 

Parvi sunt foris (1) arma (2) nisi est consilium (2) domi (1). Cic. (412, 
I R 1.) 

ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 

685. A period is a compound sentence with one or more 
subordinate clauses, in which sentence the meaning is kept sus- 
pended to the close. 

686. Latin periods may be divided into two classes : 

1. Responsive or Apodotic, in which a Protasis has an 
Apodosis. 

2. Intercalary or Enthetic, in which the various items are 
r inserted in their proper place between Subject and Predicate. 

687. Care must be taken— 

E 1. To vary the clauses, so as to prevent too great uniformity 
of rhythm. 

2. To observe a certain proportion in the length of the 
clauses. 

The following passages may be cited as specimens of long 
periods : 

Ut saepe homings aegri morbo gravl, cum aestti febrlque jactantur, si 

; aquam gelidam biberunt, primo relevari videntur, deinde multo gravius 

J vehementiusque affiictantur: sic hie morbus, qui est in republics, rele- 

vatus istlus paena, vehementius, vlvls reliquls, ingravescet. Cic. (Apodotic.) 

Catuvolcus, rSx dlmidiae partis Eburonum. qui una cum Ambiorige 

W\ consilium inierat, aetale jam confectus, cum laborem aut belli aut fugae 

vl ferre non posset, omnibus precibus detestatus Ambiorigem, qui ejus con- 

silil auctor fuisset, taxo, cujus magna in Gallia Germaniaque copia est, sS 

exanimavit. Caes. (Enthetic.) 

FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC. 

688. Ellipsis is the omission of some integral part of the 
1 thought, such as the substantive of the adjective (195, R. 1), 

the copula of the predicate (200), the verb of the adverb. 
Unde domo ? 411, R. 2. 

15 



338 FIGURES OF SYNTAX AXD RHETORIC. 

Remark.— When the ellipsis is indefinite, do not attempt to supply it. The figure is 
much abused by commentators in the explanation of grammatical phenomena. 

689. Brachylogy (breviloquentia) is a failure to repeat an 
element which is often to be supplied in a more or less modified 
form. 

Tarn fellx esses quam formosissima (= es) vellem. Ov. (316.) 

690. Zeugma {yoking) is a junction of two governing words 
under the same regimen, or with the same modifier, although 
the common factor strictly applies but to one. 

Manus ac supplices voces ad Tiberium tendens. Tac. Stretching out 
hands and (uttering) suppliant cries to Tiberius. 

691. Aposiopesis is a rhetorical breaking off before the close 
of the sentence, as in the famous Vergilian duos ego. 

692. Pleonasm is the use of superfluous words. 

693. Hyperbaton, or Trajection, is a violent displacement of 
words. 

Lydia die per omnes te deos 5ro. Hon. (415, R.) 

694. Anacoluthon, or want of sequence, occurs when the 
scheme of a sentence is changed in its course. 

695. Hendiadys (ev Sid dvozr) consists in giving an analy- 
sis instead of a complex, in putting two substantives connected 
by a copulative conjunction, instead of one substantive and 
an adjective or attributive genitive : 

Vulgus et multitude), the common herd. 
Via et ratio, scientific method. 
VI et armis, by force of arms. 

Remark. — This figure is much abused by commentators. 

696. Constructio Praegnans. So-called constrnctio praegnans 
is nothing but an extended application of the accusative of the 
Inner Object (Object Effected). The result is involved, not 
distinctly stated. 

Exitium irritat. Tac. He provokes destruction. (Ad exitium irritat.) 

697. On Litotes, see 448, R. 2. 



PROSODY. 



698. Prosody treats of Quantity and Versification. 

Remark. — Prosody originally meant Accent. Latin Accent is regu- 
lated by Quantity, and as classic Latin versification is also quantitative, 
Prosody is loosely used of both quantity and versification. 



Quantity. 

699. Eule I. — A syllable is said to be long by nature when 
it contains a long vowel or diphthong : o, vae, leges, saevae. 

Remark. — Every vowel sound followed by j is long. This is due 

sometimes to the broad sound of the j itself, sometimes to natural length 

j of the vowel, sometimes to compensation (G-ajus for Gaius, pejero for 

perjero). J does not make position in the compounds of jugum, yoke ; 

bijugus, two-horse. 

700. Bule II.— A syllable is said to be long by position when 
a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a 
double consonant : a rs, c o llran, d i sco, c a stra. 

Remarks. — 1. The consonants may be divided between two words: 
per m are, in t erris ; but when all the consonants are in the second word, 
the preceding short syllable commonly remains short : praemia scribae. 

2. The natural length of a vowel before two consonants is often hard, 
often impossible, to determine. Every vowel before nf and ns seems to 
have had a long sound. Other points are too much disputed to be intro- 
duced into an elementary treatise. With the clear and full pronunciation 
of the vowels, the difference between length by nature and length by posi- 
tion was probably not so great as might be supposed. 



tat.) 



701. Eule III. — A syllable ending in a short vowel before 
mute, followed by 1 or r, is common : tene-brae. 



340 QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 

Remarks. — 1. The syllable must end in a short vowel: navi-fragus, 
melll-fluus ; but a b-rumpo, 6 b-liviscor. 

2. In Greek words, m and n are included under this rule : Te-cmessa, 
Cy-cnus. 

702. Eule IV. — Every diphthong, and every vowel derived 
from a diphthong, or contracted from other vowels, is long : 
saevus, concludo (from claudo), iniquus (from aequus), cogo 
(from coigo = con 4- ago). 

Exception. — Prae in composition is shortened before a vowel ; prae- 
ustus. 

703. Eule V. — One simple vowel before another vowel- 
sound, or h, makes a short syllable : deus, God ; puer, loy ; 
nihil, nothing. 

Exceptions. — 1. a in the old Genitive of the First Declension : aural. 

2. e in -el of the Fifth Declension, when a vowel pre- 

cedes : diei, but fidel. 

3. a and e before i in proper names in -jus : Gal, 

Pompei. 

4. i in the Genitive form -ius. Alterius is often short- 

ened, perhaps even in prose : unius, ullius, nullius, 
totius, are found in poetry. In alius the i is never 
shortened (alius for aliius). 

5. i in fio (for fuio) is long, except before r : flo, but 

fieret. 

6. eheu, Diana, one, dius (= divus). 

7. Many Greek words : a er, Menel a us, mus e urn, 

Med 5 a. 

Quantity of Final Syllables. 
A. Polysyllables. 

704. Eule VI. — In words of more than one syllable, final 
a, e, and y are short ; i, o, and u are long. 

1. a is short: terra, earth ; dona, gifts ; capita, heads. 
Exceptions. — 1. Ablative of the First Declension : terra. 

2. Vocative of words in as (Aenea), and Greek Nomin 

ative in a long (Electra). 

3. Imperative of First Conjugation : ama. 

4. Most uninflected words : triginta, juxta- but ita 

quia, eja, puta {for instance). 



;i)iti 



QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 341 

2. e is short 

Exceptions. — 1. Ablative of the Fifth Declension: die. 

2. Imperative of Second Conjugation : mone (but cave 7 

and occasionally other Iambic Imperatives). 

3. Most adverbs of Second Declension : recte (but bene, 

male, inferne, superne, saepe). 

4. Greek words in e long {rj) : Tempe, mele. 

3. y is always short, except in contracted forms : misy (Dative misy = 
misyi). 

4. i is long : domini, viginti, audi. 

Exceptions.—!. Greek Dative si : Troasi. 

2. Greek Nominatives, sinapi Vocatives, Pari; Da- 

tives Sing, (rarely) Minoidi. 

3. quasi, nisi, cui (when a dissyllable). 

4. i is common in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi. 

Observe the compounds : ibidem, ibique, ublque, ubinam, ubivis, ubi- 
cunque, necubi ; (uti, but) utinam, utique, slcuti. 

5. o is long : bono, tut5. 

Exceptions. — 1. Common in Nominatives of proper names, and occa- 
sionally in common nouns : Scipio, virgo. 

2. Common in verbal forms, but more rarely outside of 

the Present Tense or in verbs with long penults : 
scio, puto, volo ; esto, credo. The short pronun- 
ciation extended sometimes even to the Gerund : 
amando. 

3. o is short in modb, cito, dub, octb, ego, illicb, immb, 

and in many other words (in later poetry). 

6. u is always long : cornu, fructu, auditu. 

705. Eule VII. — All final syllables that end in a simple 
consonant other than s are short. 

Exceptions. — 1. alec, lien, and many Greek nouns. 

2. The adverbs and oblique cases of illic, illuc, istic, 

istuc, can hardly be considered exceptions, as -c is 
for -ce, and is merely enclitic. 

3. Compounds of par : dispar, impar. 

4. iit, petiit, and their compounds. 



706. Rule VIII. — Of final syllables in s : as, es, os, are long; 
; is, us, ys, short. 



842 QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 

1. as is long : Aeneas, servas, amas. 

Exceptions. — 1. Greek nouns in as, adis : Areas, Arcadis. 

2. Greek Accusative Plural, Third Declension : heroas, 

Arcadas. 

3. anas, anatis. 

2. es is long : reges, dies, mones. 

Exceptions. — 1. Nominative Singular Third Declension, when the 
Genitive has etis, itis, idis : seges, miles, obses ; 
but abies, aries, paries. 

2. Compounds of es, be : ades, potes. 

3. penes (Preposition). 

4. Greek words in es (e$) : Nominative Plural, Arcades ; 

Vocative, Demosthenes ; Neuter, cacoethes. 

3. os is long : de5s, nepos. 

Exceptions. — 1. Compos, impbs, exos. 

2. Greek words in os (oS) : melbs. 

4. is is short : canis, legis. 

Exceptions. — 1. Dative and Ablative Plural . terris, bonis. 

2. Accusative Plural of the Third Declension : omnis = 

omnes. 

3. In the Nominative of sundry words, increasing long 

in the Genitive : Quiris, Quiritis. 

4. Second Person Singular Present Indicative Active, 

Fourth Conjugation : audis. 

5. In the verbal forms from vis, sis, fis, and velis : 

no-lis, ma-lis, ad-sis, cale-fis. 

6. In the Second Person Singular Future Perfect In- 

dicative and Perfect Subjunctive, is is common ; 
videris. 

5. us is short : servus, curriis. 

Exceptions. — 1. Gen. Sin., Nom. and Ace. Plural, Fourth Declension ; 
curriis. 

2. Nominative Third Declension, when the Genitive has 

a long u : virtus, virtutis ; incus, inciidis : tellus, 
telluris. 

3. In Greek words with u long (ovS) : tripiis, Sapphus ; 

but Oedipus and polypus. 

6. ys is short : chlamys. 






QUANTITY OF MONOSYLLABLES. 343 



B. Monosyllables. 

707. Kule IX. — All monosyllables that end in a vowel are 
long : a, da, me, de, hi, si, 6, do, tu. 

Except the enclitics : -que, -ve, -ne, -ce, -te, -pse s -pte. 

708. Bule X. — Declined or conjugated monosyllables that 
end in a consonant follow the rules given : das, fles, scis, dat, 
net, is, id, quis, his, quis, quos. 

hie and hoc (Nominative and Accusative) are sometimes short ; die and 
due have the quantity of their verbs ; es, be, is short. 

709. Bule XL — -Monosyllabic Nominatives of Substantives 
and Adjectives are long when they end in a consonant, even if 
the stem-syllable be short: os, mos, ver, sol, ftir, plus; lar (laris), 
pes (pedis), bos (bovis), par (paris). 

Exceptions. — vir and lac, os (ossis), mel ; 
Also cor, vas (vadis), fel. 

710. Eule XII. — Monosyllabic particles that end in a con- 
sonant are short : an, cis, in, nee, per, ter. 

Excepting en and n5n and quin ; 

And also eras and cur and sin ; 

Also the Adverbs in c : hie, hue, hac, sic. 



Quantity of Stem-Syllables. 

711. Eule XIII. — The quantity of stem-syllables, when not 
determined by the general rules, is fixed by the usage of the 
poets (long or short by authority). 



Remarks. — 1. The changes of quantity in the formation of tense-stems 
have been set forth in the conjugation of the verb, (153, 2.) 

2. The occasional differences in the quantity of the stem- syllables, 
which spring from the same radical, can only be explained by reference 
to the history of each word, and cannot be given here. 



QUANTITY 


in 


compounds. 




pax, pacis. 




sedeo, 


sedes. 


macero. 




fides, 


fido (feido). 


lex, legis. 




dux, ducis, 


duco (douco). 


rex, regis. 




voco, 


v5x. 


tegula. 




lucerna, 


luceo (louceo). 


acerbus. 




suspicor, 


suspicio. 


molestus. 




mbveo, 


mobilis (= movbilis). 


Quantity 


ik Compounds. 



paciscor, 

macer, 

lego, 

rego, 

tego, 

acer, 

moles, 



712. Eule XIV. — Compounds generally keep the quantity 
of their constituent parts: (cedo), ante-cedo, de-cedo, pro-cedo, 
(caedo), occldo (cado), occido. 

Eemarks. — 1. Of the inseparable prefixes, di, se, and ve, are long, re, 
short : diduco, sediico, vecors, rediico. Exceptions : di in disertus is 
short ; in dirimo dir stands for dis. 

2. Ne is short, except in nedum, nemo (ne-hemo), nequam, nequid- 
quam, nequaquam, nequitia, neve, necnbi, necunde. 

8. Re is sometimes lengthened ; the following letter is then doubled in 
many texts: rel(l)igio, rel(l)iquiae, rep(p)erit, re(t)tulit ; compare reddo. 
Re is for red, but, except in perfect stems and in dactylic poetry, there is 
no compensation. 

4. Pro is shortened in many words, especially before f : prbfugio, profii- 
gus, profundus, profiteor, prbfari, profanus, prbficiscor, prbcella, prbcul, 
prbnepos. The older language shortens less frequently than the later. 
In Greek words pro {jcpo) is generally short : prbpheta. 

5. The second part of the compound is sometim es shortened : dejero, 
(from juro), cognitus, agnitus (from notus). Notice the quantity in the 
compounds of -dicus : fatidi cus, verid icus (dlco), and inniiba, pronuba 
(nubo). 

6. Mechanical rules, more minute than those given above, might be 
multiplied indefinitely, but they are all open to so many exceptions as to 
be of little practical value. A correct pronunciation of Latin cannot be 
acquired except by constant practice, under the direction of a competent 
teacher, or by a diligent study of the Latin poets, and consequently of 
Latin versification. 

ElGUKES OF PKOSODY. 

713. Poetry often preserves the older forms of language, and 
perpetuates peculiarities of pronunciation, both of which are too 
frequently set down to poetic licence. 



T 



' 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 345 

714. Hiatus and Elision. — Hiatus is the meeting of two 
vowels in separate syllables, which meeting produces an almost 
continuous opening (yawning) of the vocal tube. In the body 
of a word this hiatus, or yawning, is avoided sometimes by con- 
traction, often by shortening the first vowel (13). 

In poetry, when one word ends with a vowel and another 
begins with a vowel, or h, the first vowel is elided. Elision is 
not a total omission, but rather a hurried half-pronunciation. 

a e 

O felix un(a) ant(e) alias Priameia virgo. — Verg. 

In like manner m final (a faint nasal sound) is elided with its short 
yowel before a vowel or h (EcthUpsis). 

u xl e 

Monstr(um), horrend(um), inform(e) ingens cui lumen ademptum. — 

Verg. 

Exceptions. — After a vowel or m final, the word est, is, drops its e 
and joins its preceding syllable. 

Si rixas t ubi tu pulsas ego vapulo tantum. — Juv. 
Aeternas quoniam paenas in morte timendum s t. — Lucr. 

Remarks. — 1. The Hiatus is sometimes allowed : a, in the Arsis, chiefly when the first 
vowel is long; ft, in the Thesis, when a long vowel is shortened ; c, before a period. 

a. Stant et juniperl (h) et castaneae (h) hirsutae. Verg. 
d) J b. Credimus 1 an qui (h) amant ipsi sibi somnia fingunt *? Verg. 
»i, c. Promissam eripui genero. {h) Arma impia sumpsi. Yerg. 

2. Monosyllabic interjections are not elided. 

3. On the elision of e in -ne % see 456, R. 2. 

715. Diastole. — Many final syllables, which, were originally 
long, are restored to their rights by the weight of the Arsis. 

1r This is called Diastole. 

oi -■ 

Hostis est ux5r invita quae ad virum nuptum datur. — Plaut. 

Dummodo morata recte veniat dotatast satis. — Plaut. 

Fectoribus inhians spirantia consulit exta. — Yerg. 

Perrupit Acheronta Herculeus labor. — Hor. 

Sometimes, however, Diastole arises from the necessities of the verse 

(as in proper names), or is owing to a pause (Punctuation). 

Nee quas Priamides in aquosis vallibus Idae. — Ov. 

Desine plura puer — et quod nunc instat agamus. — Verg. 

Remarks. — 1. Scholars are not agreed on all these points. 
2. Notice especially -que : 

Sideraque ventique nocent avidaeque volucres. Ov, 

15* 



346 FIGURES OF PROSODY. 

716. Systole. — Long syllables which had begun to shorten in 
prose, are shortened (Systole). 

Obstupui steteruntque comae vox faucibus haesit. — Yerg. 
E terra magn(um) alterius spectare laborem — Lucr. 
Unius ad certain formam primordia rerum. — Lucr. 
Nullius addictus jurare in verba magistri. — Hor. 

Remarks.— 1. Many regard the short penult of the Perf. in stetSrunt, dederunt, as 
original (dedro in inscriptions). 

2. In earlier poetry (e. g. Plautus), many syllables otherwise long by position are 
shortened : So Hie, and its forms iste, more rarely ipse. Also inde, unde, and others. 

717. Hardening. — The vowels i and u assert their half-con- 
sonant nature (Hardening) : abjete, (abiete), genva (g^nua), 
tenvia (tenuia). 

Fluvjorum rex Eridanus camposque per omnes.— Yerg. 
Nam quae tenvia sunt hiscendist nulla potestas, — Lucr. 

718. Dialysis. — The consonants j and v assert their half- 
vowel nature (Dialysis) : dissoluo (dissolvo), Gaius (Gajus, from 
Gavius). 

Adulteretur et columba m i 1 u o. — Hor. 

719. Syncope. — Short vowels are dropped between conson- 
ants, as often in prose (Syncope) : calfacio for calefacio. 

Templorum positor templorum sancte r e p o s t o r. — Ov. 
Quiddam magnum add ens unum me surpite(= surripite) morti. — I 
Hor. 

720. Tmesis. — Compound words are separated into their (i 
parts (Tmesis). 

Quo me cunque rapit tempestas deferor hospes. — Hor. 

Remark.— The earlier poets carry Tmesis much further in unwise emulation of the| 
Greek. Celebrated is: — 

Saxo cere comminuit "brum. Ennius. 

721. Synizesis. — Vowels are connected by a slur (Synizesis) J 
as often in the living language: deinde, deinceps. 

Quid faciam roger anne rogem ? quid deinde rogabo ? — Ov 

So even when h intervenes, as dehinc : 

Eurum ad se Zephyrumque vocat, dehinc talia fatur. Yerg. 



VERSIFICATION. 34? 

Remark. — Synize^is (settling together) is also called Synaeresis (taking together), as 
opposed to Diaeresis (5) ; but SyDaeresis properly means contraction, as in cogo (for 
coigo). and nemo (lor nehemo). Synaloepha is a general term embracing all methods 
of avoiding Hiatiis. 

722. Peculiarities of S. — In the older poetry, final s, preceded 
by a short vowel, is dropped before a consonant. 

In somnis vidit priu(s) quam sam (— earn) discere coepit. — Ennius. 
Often in Lucretius. 

Remark.— In comic poetry, a short final syllable in s blends with est, and sometimes 
with es: opust (= opus est) ; simili's (= similis es). 






VERSIFICATION. 

723. Rhythm. — Rhythm means harmonious movement. In 
language, Rhythm is marked by the stress of voice (Accent). 
The accented part is called the Arsis ; the unaccented, the 
Thesis. The Rhythmical Accent is called the Ictus (blow, beat). 

Remark. — Besides the dominant Ictus, there is a subordinate or second- 
ary Ictus, just as there is a dominant and a secondary Accent in words. 

724. Metre. — Rhythm, when represented in language, is em- 
bodied in Metre (Measure). A Metre is a system of syllables 
standing in a determined order. 

725. Unit of Measure. — The Unit of Measure is the short 
syllable: Mora, Tempus (Time), v. 

The value in music is ^ = -§-. 

The long - is the double of the short. 

The value in music is I = \. 

Remark.— Any quantity that cannot be measured by the standard unit is called 
irrational. 

726. Resolutio7i and Contraction. — In some verses, two short 
syllables may be used instead of a long (Resolution), or a long 
instead of two short (Contraction). 

I i"^ 

Resolution. w w # *. Contraction, ww 0. 

U I 

727. Feet. — As elements of musical strains, Metres are called 
iars. 



318 



VERSIFICATION. 



As elements of verses, Metres are called Feet. 
As musical strains are composed of equal bars, so verses are 
composed of equal feet, marked as in music, thus | . 

Remark. — Theoretically, the number of metres is unrestricted ; prac- 
tically, only those metres are important that serve to embody the prin- 
cipal rhythms. 

728. Names of the Feet. — The feet in use are the following : 





Feet of ' 


rHREE Times. 


„ 


Trochee, 


— \j 


legit. 


J/ 


Iambus, 


\j — 


legunt. 


-fj 


Tribrach, 


\J \J KJ 


legite. 


m m m 




Feet of 


Four Times. 




Dactyl, 


— KJ \J 


legimus. 


i n 

& & 


Anapaest, 


KS \J — 


legerent. 


n i 

o & 


Spondee, 


-- 


legi. 


i i 






Feet of 


Five Times. 




Cretic, 


— \j — 


legerint. 


» 9 


First Paeon, 


— ^j \j 


^/ legeritis. 


i h n 

00 


Fourth Paeon, 


\J KJ \J 


— legimini. 


H 1* 1 


Bacchius, 


W 


legebant. 


000 


Antibacchius, 


\J 


legistis. 


JJS 




Feet of Six Times. 




Ionicus a major!, 


v-> 


\j collegimns. 


\ i n 

00 


Ionicus a minSri, 


\y kj — 


- relegebant. 


n i i 


Choriambus, 


-uu 


- colligerent. 


i n i 




Di trochee, 


— v^ — 


<j colliguntur. 


1 M h 




Diiambus, 


vy — w 


- legaminl. 


P» -1 > J 

& <ff 



VEKSIFICATION. 



349 



Remark.— Other feet are put down in Latin Grammars, but they do not occur in 



Latin verse, if in any, such as : 

Pyrrhic, 

First Epitrite, 

SecoDd Epitrite, 

Third Epitrite, 

Fourth Epitrite, 












legit 

relegerunt. 

eligebant. 

selegerint. 

colleglstis. 



Antispast, 
Dispondee, 
Second Paeon, 
Third Paeon, 

Molossus, 



legebaris. 

selegerunt. 

l§gentibus. 

legitote. 

legeriint. 



729. Ascending and Descending Rhythms. — Rhythms are 
divided into ascending and descending. If the Arsis follows, 
the Ehythm is called ascending ; if it precedes, descending. So 
the Trochee has a descending, the Iambus an ascending, rhythm. 

Ascending rhythms may become descending by Anacrusis. 

When the Thesis precedes the Arsis, it is cut off and called 
an Anacrusis {upward stroke, signal-beat). So the Iambus is re- 
garded as an Anacrustic Trochee, the Anapaest as an Anacrus- 
tic Dactyl, the Ionicus a minori as an Anacrustic Ionicus a 
major! The sign of the Anacrusis is: . 

730. Names of Rhythms. — Rhythms are commonly called 
after their principal metrical representative. So the Trochaic 
Ehythm, the Anapaestic Rhythm, the Iambic Rhythm, the 
Dactylic Rhythm, the Ionic Rhythm. 

731. Classes of Rhythms. — In Latin, the musical element of 
versification is subordinate, and the principles of Greek rhythm 
have but a limited application, 

The Greek classes are based on the relation of Arsis to Thesis. 

I. Equal Class, in which the Arsis is equal to the Thesis (yivoS i6ov). 
This may be called the Dactylico- Anapaestic class. 

II. Unequal Glass, in which the Arsis is double of the Thesis (ysvot 
8i7tAddiov). 

This may be called the Trochaico-Iambic class. 

III. Quinquepartite or Paeonian Class (Flve-eightJis class), of which the 
Cretic and Bacchius are the chief representatives (yevo$ rj/iioXtov). 

732. Rhythmical Series. — A Rhythmical Series is an unin- 
terrupted succession of rhythmical feet, and takes its name from 
the number of feet that compose it. 



Monopody = one foot. 
Dipody = two feet. 

Tripody = three feet. 



Tetrapody = four feet. 
Pentapody = five feet. 
Hexapody = six feet. 



350 VERSIFICATION. 

Remark?.— 1. The Dipody is the ordinary unit of measure (-meter) in Trochaic, Iam- 
bic, and Anapaestic verse. In these rhythms a monometer contains two feet, a dimeter 
four, a trimeter six, a tetrameter eight. 

2. There are limits to the extension of series. 

In Latin, lour feet is the limit of the Dactylic, six of the Trochaic and Iambic series. 
All beyond these are compounds. 

733. Equality of the Feet. — Every rhythmical series is com- 
posed of equal parts. To restore this equality, when it is vio- 
lated by language, there are four methods : 

1. Syllaba Anceps. 

2. Catalexis. 

3. Protraction. 

4. Correption. 

734. Syllaba Anceps. — The final syllable of a series or verse 
may be short or long indifferently. It may be short when the 
metre demands a long; long when the metre demands a short. 
Such a syllable is called a Syllaba Anceps. 

735. Catalexis and Pause. — A complete series is called Aca- 
talectic ; an incomplete series is called Catalectic. A series or 
verse is said to be Oatalectic in syllabam, in dissyllabum, in 
trisyllabum, according to the number of syllables in the cata- 
lectic foot. 

y.w | j:uv; | /. Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in sylldbam. 
j-xj w I j^^j kj I ^w Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in dissylldbum. 

The time is made up by Pause. 

The omission of one mora is marked 

A 

" " two morae " 

A 

736. Protraction and Syncope. — Protraction (rovrj) consists 
in drawing out a long syllable beyond its normal quantity. It 
occurs in the body of a verse, and serves to make up for the 
omission of one or more theses, which omission is called Syn- 
cope. 

- = 3 =J. - = 4 = J 

737. Correption. — Correption is the shortening of a syllable 
to suit the measure. 



VEKSIFICATICXN-. 351 

So oo = two short syllables with the value of one. 
So the ordinary (heavy) dactyl is — ^ w = 4 J J J 

The light (irrational) dactyl is -vv* =: 3 (lf+i + 1) J3"j 

Remark. —Under this head, notice the frequent use of the irrational long in Trochaic 
and Iambic verses, and in Anacrusis. The irrational long is marked > . 

The following line illustrates all the points mentioned ; 

a be b c b cL e 



> I— I *- II 



-^ - 



A' 






Nullam | Vare sa- | era || vite pri- | us || severis | arbo | -rem. Hon. 

a. Irrational trochee, b. Light dactyl, c. Syncope and Protraction, d. Syllaba 
anceps. e. Catalexis. 

738. Verse.— A Simple Ehytlim is one that consists of a 
simple series. 

A Compound Khythm is one that consists of two or more 
series. 

A Verse is a simple or compound rhythmical series, which 
forms a distinct and separate unit. The end of a verse is 
marked — 

1. By closing with a full word. Two verses cannot divide a word be- 
tween them. 

2. By the Syllaba Anceps, which can stand unconditionally. 

3. By the Hiatus, *. e. y the verse may end with a vowel, though the next 
verse begin with one. 

Remark.— Occasionally, one verse is run into another by Elision. This is called 
Synaphea (dvvdcpeia). It is a violation of the fundamental law, and is not to be imi- 
tated. Vekg. A en. i., 332-3, 448-9 ; ii., 745-6. 

739. Methods of Combining Verses. — The same verse may be 
repeated throughout without recurring groups. So the Heroic 
Hexameter, the Iambic Trimeter (Linear Composition). Or the 
same verse or different verses maybe grouped in pairs (distichs), 
triplets (tristichs), fours (tetrastichs). Beyond these simple 
stanzas Latin versification seldom ventured. 

Larger groups of series are called Systems. 
Larger groups of verses are called Strophes, a name some- 
times attached to the Horatian stanzas. 

740. Union of Language with Rhythm. — When embodied in 
language, rhythm has to deal with rhythmical groups already 



352 VERSIFIC ATI ON. 

in existence. Every full word is a rhythmical group with its 
accent, is a metrical group with its long or short syllables, is a 
word-foot. Ictus sometimes conflicts with accent; the unity 
of the verse-foot breaks up the unity of the word-foot. 

741. Conflict of Ictus and Accent. — In earlier Latin poetry, 
the coincidence and conflict of Ictus and Accent are regulated 
by subtle laws, the exposition of which would require, too much 
space. In ordinary Latin verse, Ictus overrides Accent, at least 
according to modern pronunciation. 

742. Conflict of Word-foot and Verse-foot — The conflict of 
word-foot and verse-foot gives rise to Caesura. Caesura means 
an incision produced by the end of a word in the middle of a 
verse-foot, and is marked f . 

This incision serves as a pause, partly to rest the voice for a more 
vigorous effort, partly to prevent monotony by distributing the masses of 
the verse. 

Remarks.— 1. So in the Heroic Hexameter the great caesura falls before the middle of 
the verse, to give the voice strength for the first arsis of the second half. 

Una salus victis t nullam sperare salutem. Verg. 
It does not occur at the middle, as in. that case the verse would become monotonous. 
2. In many treatises any incision in a verse is called a Caesura. 

743. Masculine and Feminine Caesurae. — In trisyllabic me- 
tres, when the end of the word within the verse-foot falls on an 
arsis, it is called a Masculine Caesura ; when on a thesis, a 
Feminine Caesura. 

a b c d 

Una sa | lus t vi | ctis f nul | lam f spe | rare f sa | lutem. 

a, &, c, are Masculine Caesurae ; d, a Feminine Caesura. 

744. Diaeresis. — When verse-foot and word-foot coincide, 
Diaeresis arises, marked thus : ||. 

Ite domum saturae f venit || Hesperus | ite capellae. — Verg. 

Remark.— Diaeresis, like Caesura, serves to distribute the masses of the verse and 
prevent monotony. What is Caesura in an ascending rhythm becomes Diaeresis as soon 
as the rhythm is treated anacrustically. 

Suis I et i | psat Ro | ma vi I ribus II ruit Iambic Trimeter. 

Su : is et II ipsa II Roma II viri | bus t ru I it. Troch. Trimeter, Catal., with Anacru- 
sis. 






VERSIFICATION. 353 

745. Recitation. — "When the word-foot runs oyer into the 
next verse-foot, a more energetic recitation is required, in order 
to preserve the sense, and hence the multiplication of Caesurae 
lends vigor to the verse. 

Remark. — The ordinary mode of scanning, or singing out the elements of a verse, 
without reference to signification, cannot be too strongly condemned, as, 
Unasa, lusvic, tisnul, lamspe, raresa, lutein ! 

Trochaic Ehythms. 

746. The Trochaic Ehythm is a descending rhythm, in which 
the arsis is double of the thesis. It is represented — 

By the Trochee : ^ v ; 

By the Tribrach : \0 ^ w; and, at the end of a series, 

By the Spondee : -c — , or rather the irrational Trochee, — > . 

Remarks.— 1. Anapaests are rare. Dactyls are used only in proper names. Both are 
of course irrational. In the earlier poets, however, the treatment of the Trochaic verse 
is very free. 

2. Trochaic-meters, being compounded of dipodies (ditrochaei), have £ instead of |- 
time (729). The second trochee of each dipody (-meter) may be irrational on the principle 
of syllaba anceps. Hence the rule : 

747. Trochaic-meters admit the substitution of a long for 
the short of the even places. 

1. Trochaic Tripody (Ithy phallic). 

Bassareu bicornis. — Atil. Fort. zu| -v; | -u 

2. Trochaic Tetrapody (Catalectic). 

Aula divitem manet. — Hon. ^u | -u | -u | - » 

3. Trochaic Dimeter, a. Acatalectic ; o. Catalectic. 

a. Vive laetus quisque vivis. jlkj \ — >|^.v^|— 3 

5. Vita parvom munus est. — Anthol. Lat. zu | -> | zu | - » 

4. Trochaic Dimeter with Anacrusis {Alcaic). * 

Si fractus illabatur orbis. — Hor. ^:^.v>» | — > | jl. <j | — 3 

748. 5. Trochaic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Octonarius). 

JLKJ I "-> I JLKJ I -> I JLKJ J -> J JLKJ I -C;. 

Farce jam camoena vati parce jam sacro furori. — Servius. 

Remark.— This verse and the following are compounds. The Octonarius is com- 
pounded of two Dimeters acatalectic ; hence regular Diaeresis after the Dimeter ; freely 
handled in comedy ; Hiatus in the Diaeresis ; Monotonous, on account of the division 
into two equal parts. It occurs occasionally in Plautus and Terence. 



354 VERSIFICATION. 

Verba dum sint, verum si ad rem II conferentur, vapulabit. Ter. 
Sine modo et modestia sum II sine bono jure atque honore. Plaut. 
Petulans protervo iracundo II animo indomito incogitato. Plaut. 

749. 6. "Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic (Septenarius). 

-^ ^ _ >^^_ > ||^.w_>-z_^_ / ^ 

Cras amet qui nunquam amavit || quique amavit eras amet. Pervig. 
Ven. 

Tu me amoris magi' quam honoris | servavisti gratia. Ennius. 
Vapulare te vehementer || jubeo : ne me territes. Plaut. 

Remark. — The Trochaic Tetrameter (so called by eminence) is of frequent occurrence 
in comic poetry. It is compounded of Dimeter + Dimeter Catalectic. Hiatus is often 
found at the break. 

Manibu' puris capite operto II ibi continuo contonat. Plaut. 

Iambic Ehythms. 

750. The Iambic Rhythm is an ascending rhythm, in which 
the arsis is double of the thesis. It is represented 

By the Iambus : ^ ^- ; 

By the Tribrach : w & ^ ; 

By the Spondee : _ ^ (in -meters) ; 

By the Dactyl : — kO ^ (sometimes) ; and 

By the Anapaest: w w ^. 

Remark.— Of course, Spondee, Dactyl, and Anapaest, are all irrational. The Spondee 
— _ > ? the Anapaest, — w w > , and the Dactyl, - -vw. 

751. Iambic -meters admit substitution of a long for the 

short of the odd feet. 

Remark.— Regarding the Iambus as an Anacrustic Trochee, the same rule and reason 
hold for the substitution in the one, as in the other (746, R. 2). 

752. 7. Iambic Dimeter. 

Usual Scheme. Anacrustic Scheme. 

Inarsit aestuosius v^^w_^^.^_ vy ; xu|„u|/.w|- a 

Imbres nivesque com- 

parat _^.w_w^w_ > : ^u|_uUu|_ * 
Videre properantes 

domum _^.w^^ — ^ w __ > : zw|uu>|jcu|_ a 
Ast ego vicissim ri- 

sero. Hor. _^w^ ^.w__ > : v^ww|_>|^_w|_a 

Remark.— According to the Anacrustic Scheme, the Iambic Dimeter Acatalectus is a 
trochaic Dimeter Catalectic with Anacrusis. 









VERSIFICATION. 355 

753. 8. Iambic Trimeter Catalectic. 

Mea renidet in domo lacunar w^w_w^.w__w^.^ 

Regumque pueris nee satelles Orci. Hon. _^^ww_^.w_w^^ 

Anacrustic Scheme : > : — w | _ > | _ ^ | _ w | l__ | _ ^ (with Syn- 
cope). 

754. 9. lamlic Trimeter Acatalectic (Senarius). 

Suis et ipsa f Roma viribus ruit w-^v/— w^w_w^.w_ 

Heu me per urbem t nam pudet tanti 

mali __^w ^.w ^w_ 

Deripere lunamf vocibus possim meis _ v£ w w ^.^ ^.w — 

Infamis Helenae f Castor offensus 

vicem — -^■www — ^-w ^-v^__ 

Optat quietem f Pelopis infidi pater —^.^ ^ ^ ^ ^ w — 

Alitibus atque f canibus homicidam 

Hectorem — \i> kj kj kj \D w kj w w -^-w 

Vectabor humeris f tunc ego inimicis 

e ques — -^-wv^w — -^-www *- \j — 

Pavidumque leporem et f advenam 

laqueo gruem. Hon. ww^-ww^^^^ — ww-^-^.- 



Anacrustic Scheme : ^:_w|_'i_^l_^l_w 



>, ... >. 



Remarks.— 1. The Iambic Trimeter when kept pure has a rapid aggressive movement. 
Hence, it is thus used in lampoons and invectives. It admits the Spondee in the odd 
places (first, third, fifth foot) ; the Tribrach in any but the last ; the Dactyl in the first 
and third, The Anapaest is rare. When carefully handled, the closing part of the verse 
is kept light, so as to preserve the character. Special study is necessary to understand 
the treatment of the comic Trimeter. 

2. Caesurae.— The principal caesura is the Penthemimeral, which falls on the middle 
of the third foot (7tevBr/jUlJ^£ft77^ = 2^) an( * is rarel y wanting. Less important is the 
Hepthemimeral (scpS-q/uijuepr/S = 3^)r which falls on the middle of the fourth foot. 

w_ ] w_ | wj*__ | wj*_ | w_ | w_ 

Levis crepante t lympha t de silit pede. Hor. 

Of course in the Anacrustic Scheme the Caesura of the ordinary scheme becomes 
Diaeresis. 

Le : vis ere I pante !l lympha !! desi I lit pe I de. 

3. A break (Diaeresis) at the middle of the verse is avoided. Short particles, which 
adhere closely to the following word, do not constitute exceptions. 

Laboriosa nec_cohors Ulixei. Hor. 

Adulteretur etcolumba miluo. Hor. 

In like manner explain — 

Refertque tanta grexamicus ubera. Hor. 



356 VERSIFICATION. 

755- 10. Trimeter lambicus Claudiis (Choliambus) ; Scazon 

(= llohbler) Hipponacteus. 

Miser Catulle desinas ineptire. Cat. w^w — w^.v^__w^^. w 

Fulsere quondam candidi tibi soles. Cat. — jl \j .z. w — w -£--£• \^ 

Dominis parantur ista ; serviunt vobis. 

Mart. u u z w kj jl. \j u zz vy 

Remarks.— 1. In the Choliambus the rhythm is reversed at the close, by putting a 
trochee or spondee in the sixth foot. The lighter the first part of the verse, the 
greater the surprise. It is intended to express comic anger, resentment, disappoint- 
ment. 

2. The Anacrustic measurement is as follows : 

:_w | _ | _w | _w |i | _w. Trochaic Trimeter with Anacrusis 

Syncope and Protraction. 

756. 11. Iambic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Octonarius). 

W-^-W — -Z- W — \J I ■*- KJ — \J -Z- KJ — 

Hie finis est iambe salve f vindicis doctor mali. Seryitjs. 
Te cum securi caudicali f praeficio provinciae. Platjt. 

Remark.— This verse occurs frequently in the comic poets, and is to be regarded as a 
compound. It either divides itself into equal parts at the end of the first Dimeter (with 
Hiatus and Syllaba Anceps) or has a Caesura in the first Thesis of the third Dimeter. 

1. Troja, patria, Pergamum, II Priame, periisti senex. Plaut. 
Is porro me autem verberat II incursat pugnis calcibus. Plaut. 

2. Facile omnes quum valemus recta | consilia aegrotis damus. Ter. 

757. 12. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic (Septenarius). 

Remitte pallium mihi f meum quod involasti. Cat. 

Remarks.— 1. This verse is to be regarded as a compound of Dimeter + Dimeter Ca- 
talectic : hence, regular Diaeresis after the first Dimeter : 
With Syllaba Anceps : 

Si abduxeris celabitur II itidem ut celata adhuc est. Plaut. 
With Hiatus : 

Sed si tibi viginti minae II argenti proferuntur. Platjt. 
2. It may be measured anacrustically : 



Dactylic Ehtthms. 

758. The Dactylic Rhythm is a descending rhythm, in which 
the Arsis is equal to the Thesis (2 = 2). 

The Dactylic Khythm is represented by the Dactyl : ^ w ^. 
Often, also, by the Spondee : ^ -• 



VERSIFICATION. 357 

A Dactylic verse of one Dactyl is called a Monometer ; of two, 
a Dimeter ; of three, a Trimeter; of four, a Tetrameter ; of five, 
a Pentameter ; of six, an Hexameter. 

759. 13. Dactylic Dimeter {Adonic). 

Terruit urbem. Hon. ^. w w ^ — 

Remark.— Though generally measured thus, this verse is properly logaoedic, and will 
recur under that head. 

760. 14. Dactylic Trimeter Oatalectic in Syllabam. 
Pulvis et umbra sumus, Hor. *- ^ ^ ■*- ^ ^ ■*- 

15. Dactylic Tetrameter Gatalectic in Dissyllabum. 

Aut Epheson bimarisve Corinthi ^v^w^_^w^ww^3 

O fortes pejoraque passi j^-.^._^.ww^3 

Mensorem cohibent Archyta. Hon. ^. — jl. \j ^ jl — x. Z> 

16. Dactylic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Alcmanius). 

Nunc decet aut viridi nitidum caput jlkj\jj^\j\j^.\j\jjl\j\j 

Pallida mors aequo pulsat pede ^.ww^_^._^ww 

Vitae summa brevis spem nos vetat ^_^.ww^._^.ww 
Occurs only in combination. 

Heroic Hexameter. 

761. 17. L*Jv|iJof^3vH^uU|^|^- 

1. Ut fugiunt aquilas t timidissima II turba columbae. Ov. 1 

2. At tuba terribili t sonitu t procul || aere canoro. Yerg. I 

3. Quadrupedante putrem t sonitu I quatit II ungula campum. i lve ac y s * 

Verg. J 

4. Cum medio celeres t revolant i exjiequore mergi. Verg. \ 

5. Vastius insurgens t decimae I ruit II impetus undae. Ov. >■ Four Dactyls. 

6. Et reboat raucum t regio t cita II barbara I bombum. Luck. ) 

7. Muta metu terram t genibus t summissa petebat Lucr. \ 

8. Inter cunctantes t cecidit t moribunda ministros. Verg. V Three Dactyls. 

9. Ne turbata volent t rapidis t ludibria ventis. Verg. ) 

10. Versaque in obnixos t urgentur II cornua vasto. Verg. ) t d 

11. Processit longe t flammantia II moenia mundi- Lucr. j 

12. Portam vi multa t converso II cardine torquet Verg. ) ■ 

13. Tectum augustum ingens t centum sublime columnis. Verg. J 

14. Olli respondit t Rex_AlbaI Longai. Ennius. \ No Dactyl. 



— is:?: :_t: 
..:.-::::•:■:■:::::• i--i: Lrrei:: Tel*. 
' -::.L::-;.:;^--_:::.::, Aii^ulil^s ~-~ 










% The two reigning ietnses are the first and fonft, and the pnmueioani;-'' 

- _- - ■ - -■ : • -----: .-_-.;-.- -- _i --,-■- ■._• - - i ::;;' -.I- p. r::i :» 

Terse, the Sonmaa by panses within the Ter*e, both before and after the u 

: V - : • - : - - /. " ;•:"•;• " ' ; /- - - - ■'-"-_ ' f the are 3= 

saira'rf toe thard foot, the so-ealled TKittf rroe^ wMch is less used among 
than among the Greek* ; then the Hqtithemimeral 3^j in the arsis of the : 

,. - ; _.... . ; ._-; ■ -:.• • -. *.- ■_•-.- . -. .. -. -;;.--: ".;.-_-.•.; .-.---. ' ". ■ ; r^:'! ■'. ' 

•i-' ■■■-;- , •-::--,-•:.,, :-•::•:•; " " ' ~ ". ". - ^ - i ^ - ' • ; :- . ; : ; > - : : . . 

r " ' -: ."- ': - • - • • " - ' ': ' ' ' ~ . . " : : " -: ; ' *. ; ' * '. ■: ' \ " '. fCl ■ '. * 

* : : - i Li • . ------ .:-:.. i ',. '.:■-. : - - .^: .-;.-.-.. ' 

, ; . - : ' • i ! ". . : ' : V . ' " : ' r .' . : ' ". : - ' - ' i. J- ' -': '. -': - -: - *. .'. '-. ' "-': ' " ': '. '. T . 1 ". 

;-.- ■ - ; V: :j 

Hif laerimii ritam " da.mus - ct miaereseimvs ult: 

: ■ i - b. - . * - ~ - ■ . - - ~ • I •: • . ' -. ■ . ■ ' ; ,~ • - ' '. ". . ' . -:-. ' '. '/ . . \ 

Foemi 1 perrortentef I omnia f eireumcuraant Eyy in. 

Cto tte other ha»4, the Bo^>15e t^trapod j. or pause at the end of the fourth foot d: - 1 

' - - : : '-^ ' -:.-■-■'■■ - : ; v --.-■":■;.-.• i v. : i". -'v.- : . ^ ;;•> ^^ 

troehaSe sooreaaeirt to th»s h-exaaBaeter. ft is oftem sonant after. 

SI Xodi of the oeaaty of the Hexameter depends 00 the selection and arrangemer 1 1 
of tibe word* eoMsidered aa metrical elements, The examp 

the end of the Hexameter demote sarprise; aoapaestie words, rapid mo d tL^I 

Agaki, the Hexameter maybe lowered to a eoitTersatlonal tone by large mas»e£ of 

.■■■-,. ■*.■.■■■■ ,■■_ ,;••-.., .-c '.',-.;>. •••: ••■-; . : :'•';;:>," .- ; ;--;>. '.Mi o/i'.-': i:, :lc 
',':>. . -' -.',- - •-- ^\-e» 



ve: 
762. IS. Elegiac ' T J). 

At dolor in lacrimas ] verterat cmne 

merum. Tib. _______ 

Me legat et lecto ] carmine dcctos 

amet. C _ _ _ _______ 

At nunc barbaries ] grandis habere 

nihfl. Or. - — !__•_. 

Concessum nulla j lege redfbit iter. 

Rrop. . 

The Elegia." _e Heroic ~£-z- 

ameter, with which it forms 

Saepe ego tentavi curas depellere vino 

At dolor in lacrimal ! vertera: :___._ meruin. Tib, 
Ingenium quondam fuerat pretiosi-f __ro 

At nunc barbaries | grandis habere nihil. <>v. 
Par erat inferior versus risisse Cupido 

Dicitur atque unmn | aar 
Saepe ego cum dominae iolcea _• _■_■_ __ro 
Agnosco vcces | sedomi 

Rexarks.— 1. The E 
themimers. the first of ? = ■ 

Diaeresis in - 

from the o] I ______________ 

used in eentime 



1 - 



_ 



This show - - - - 

.ins the preference 
3. As "ie -Santar 

the Penta meter as maeh as poss ■ ■ ■ "» 

great mec a a . . _ ess . _J m ; . ntanaeter ends in a dissyllable, and elision 

led. 

AxAr bs Et-frr___s 

763. The An is 

which the arsis is _is as 2 to & is - — 

By the Anapaest : - - - : or 
By the Spondee : — . 
By the Dactyl: - ^ - 

The Anapaestic -iv rfsts c -- 

le used among the Bo a 



300 VERSIFICATION. 

19. Dimeter Catalecticus (Paroemiacus). 

Volucer pede corpore pulcher w^-c^w — ww^.w 

Lingua catus ore canorus _-z.ww_^w^-^ 

Verum memorare magis quam _^ww — ww-^-w 

Functum laudare decebit. AusON. — ■*- ^w^-v> 

20. Dimeter Acatalectus. 

Venient annis || saecula seris ^kj jl v£w 

Quibus Oceanus || vincula rerum ww^ w v^ v^w 

Laxet et ingens || pateat tellus _ v£ ^ ww^_ 

Tethysque novos || detegat orbes -xuu v^w 

Nee sit terris || ultima Thule. Sen. Trag. _ *- v£w 

Syllaba Anceps is rare. 

Remarks. —Latin anapaests, as found in later writers, are mere metrical imitations of 
the Greek anapaests, and do not correspond to their original in contents. The Greek 
anapaest was an anacrustic dactylic measure or march (in 4. time). Hence the use of 
Pause to bring out the four bars. 

Paroemiacus: Anacrustic Scheme. 

Volucer pede corpore pulcher ^ w :_ w ^ | _ww | . | — 

A 

Dimeter Acatalectus : Anacrustic Scheme. 

Quibus Oceanus vincula rerum w ^ : — w w | | ^w— | — 

The Theses of the last feet are supplied by the Anacrusis of the following verse. 

LOGAOEDIC EHYTHMS. 

764. The Logaoedic Khythm is a peculiar form of the tro- 
chaic rhythm in which the thesis has a stronger secondary ictus 
than the ordinary trochee. 

Instead of the trochee, the light dactyl may be employed. 
This light or cyclical dactyl is represented in morae by 1%, £, 1 ; 

in music, by ££1 = fV, tV> i- 

When dactyls are employed, the trochee preceding is called a 
Basis, or tread. This trochee may be irrational - > (so-called 
spoudee). If the basis is double, the second is almost always 
irrational in Latin poetry. The basis is commonly marked X. 
Instead of the trochee, an iambus is sometimes prefixed. Ana- 
crusis and Syncope are also found. 

Remarks.- 1. Logaoedic comes from A, 6y o S, prose, and ocoidtj, song, because the 
rhythms seem to vary as in prose. 

2. Dactyls are not necessarily employed. No. 4 (Alcaic enneasyllabic) is logaoedic. 



versification. 361 

One Dactyl. 

21. Adonic. (See No. 13.) -t- w ^ — v> 

Terruit urbem. Hon. -vu | -v^ | 

22. Arisioplianic {Ghoriambic). ^- \j ^ — ^ 

Lydia die per omnes. Hor. -v ^ | — w ] i— | — A 

765. One Dactyl, with Basis. 

23. Pherecratean. — x — j- \j ^ — ^ 

Nigris aequora ventis. Hor. — > \***\* | «— | — A 



--i- A 



24. Glyconic. 
Bmirabitur insolens. Hor. — > | 

25. Phalaecean (Hendecasyllabic). _ x _ ) 

Passer mortuus est meae puellae — w y^w — v — v-.^ 

Arida modo piimice expolitum kD — ) 

Tuae Lesbia sint satis superque. Cat. _> |-^w | _ u | _v^|— ^ 

Remark.— The so-called spurious Phalaecean admits the Spondee — > in the place 
of the dactyl. 

Quas vidi vultu tamen sereno. Cat. 

766. One Dactyl, with Double Basis. 

26. Sapphic {Hendecasyllabic). *- v^ — *_ ^.f^w_w«^ 
Audiet cives f acuisse ferrum. Hor. — ^ | _> | _ f <» | — w | — \j 

Remark.— The Greek measure (Catullus) is _u I _> I -vu I _v I „ a 

767. One Dactyl with Double Basis and Anacrusis. 

27. Alcaic (Greater) Hendecasyllabic. Z ,— w _*-. J jl ^ ^ _ kj _ 
Vides ut alta [| stet nive candidum ^ : — ^ I — > | -v ^ | — ^ | —A 



Soracte nee jam || stistineant onus. Hor. 
Remark.— The second basis always a spondee in Horace. 



768. Two Dactyls. 

28. Alcaic (Lesser) or Decasyllabic. jlwjlw^kj — Z> 

Vertere funeribus triumphos. Hor. -^w |-~w | — ^ | — w 

16 



O 02 VERSIFICATION. 

In all these, the Dactyl has a diminished value. More questionable is 
the logaoedic character of the Greater Archilochian. 

769. 29. Archilochian {Greater) = Dactyl. Tetr. and Troch. 
Tripody. 

Solvitur acris hiems grata vice | veris et Favoni. Hon. 

Remark.— If measured logaoedically, the two shorts of the dactyl must be reduced in 
value to one (go — ^) y and the logaoedic scheme is 

-£l-£l-£l-£l-~l-~l-l- A 
Logaoedic tetrapody + Logaoedic tetrapody with Syncope. 

770. ChoriamMc Rhythms. — When a logaoedic series is syn- 
copated, apparent choriambi arise. What is I -* ^ I »— I seems 
to be -ww-. Genuine choriambi do not exist in Latin. 

30. Asclepiadean (Lesser). -^ww-_-^ww_w_ 

Maecenas atavis || edite 

regibus. Hor. — > | -^ w | t__ || -^ ^ | _ ^ | L 

31. Asclepiadean (Greater). _*_ ^.ww_^ww_^ww«v^_ 
Nullam Vare sacra || vite 

prius J severis arbo- 

rem. Hor. _> | -y | l_ || -™ | u_ | -»y | _ v | _ A 

32. Sapphic ( Greater). _ x ^, _ x _ ^.ww — ^w^/_w_3 
Te deos oro Sybarin || cur 

properas amando. 

Hor. _w I _> | ^w | l_ 1 -w | _^ | l_ | _ 

33. Priapean (Gly conic + 

Pherecratean). __ x _ ^^w_w_ || L __ -c w v^ _ v-» 

Hunc lucum tibi dedico || 
consecroque Priape. 
Cat. _> | -vv, | — w | i_ || — > | ~^o | i_ | . 



Cretic and Bacchic Ehythms. 

771. These passionate rhythms are found occasionally in the 
comic poets. They both belong to the Quinquepartite or Five- 
EightTfis class. 

1. The distribution of the Creticus is 3 + 2 morae. 

The metrical value of the Creticus is — ^ _ (Amphimacer). 



VERSIFICATION. 303 

Second long resolved _ w w w Paeon Primus. 
First long resolved w w w _ Paeon Quartus. 

34. Tetrameter Catalecticus. -^w^^.v -/ -i.^ w ^-c_ 
Da mi(hi) hoc mel meum si me amas saudes. Plaut. 

35. Tetrameter Acatalectus. z.u^x U i.ivxxu^ 
Ex bonis pessumi et fraudiilentissumi. Platjt. 

2. The Bacchius has the following measure : v^^_l + 2 + 2 morae 
( M i V or if the descending form — -ube regarded as the normal one 
2 + 2 + 1 morae (J J ^). 

36. Bacchic Tetrameter. 

Quibus nee locust ullu' nee spes parata w.z._v^^_w-^ — uzG 

Misericordior nulla mest feminarum w J"b _kjjl-.kjjl — \jx.\j 

I Ionic Ehythm. 

772. The Ionic Khytlim is represented by Ionicus a major! 

. — ^^ 000 0- For the Ionicus a major! maybe substituted 
i the Ditrochaeus -^_w. This is called Anaclasis (breaking- 

, U P)- 

The verse is commonly anacrustic, so that it begins with the 

^1 thesis ^ ^ : - -. Such verses are called Ionic! a minor!. 

The second long has a strong secondary ictus. 

773. 37. An Ionic System is found in Horace, Od. iii. 12. 
It consists of two periods, the first being made up of two di- 
podies, the second of two tripodies. 

Ionicus a minori scheme : 

Miser arum est neque amori kj\jj^ — ^v-z-—\ 

dare ludum neque dulci ww^.„w^^._| 

mala vino lavere aut exanimari v^w^-_^w-^— w^-^— | 

metuentes patruae verbera linguae uuz_^w^.-vyuz..| 

Ionicus a majorl scheme ; 

w w : w w | , I I, 2 

A 
ww : __^ w | --^| 2 

w w : — _vu | uu | II. 3 

w w : ww| uu | -r 3 



364 VERSIFICATION. 

Remarks.— 1. The Roman numerals refer to periods, the Arabic to the number of 
feet or bars, the dots indicate the end of a line. 

The iOnicus is an excited measure, and serves to express the frenzy of distress as 
well as the madness of triumph. 

774. 38. Tetrameter Catalechc. 

The Galliainbic verse (Tetrameter Catalectic) is found in a famous 
poem by Catullus (lxiii). 

Ordinary Scheme : 

Without Anaclasis : ^w^.__w^^_ww^. — uu^. 
With Anaclasis : w^-^wjiw^._ww^.w_ w ^. 

Anacrustic Scheme : 

Without Anaclasis : w w : w ^ | f ^ ^ I uw I 1 — 1 — 1 

A 

With Anaclasis : u u :-u_u| f ^ w | — w__w|l_j_|| 

A 

The Anaclastic form is the more common. The Anacrusis may be contracted (9 times 
in the Attis). 

The frequent resolutions and conversions give this verse a peculiarly wild character. 

Et earum omnia adirem furibunda 

latibula uux-uu^_^u^.uuu^i 

Quo nos decet citatis celerare tri- 

t 
pudiis -.j-kj.£-\jx. — \j\jjl\j^,\j\jx.\j 

Itaque ut domum Cybebes tetigere 

lassulae \j\jx.\j^.\j-£-—. \j\jjl\jjl\j^s^j 

Super alta vectus Attis celeri rate 

maria \j\jjl.\jj-k_/-£- — \j\j^-\j\j \j \j x. 

Jam jam dolet quod egi jam j anti- 
que paenitet __^.v^^.vy^. jl\j j-\j x. 



775. Verses Compounded of Iambi and Dactyls. 

89. 1. Iambelegus. Iambic Dimeter and Dactylic Penthemimeris. 
Tu vina Torquato move || consul e 

pressa meo. Hon. w^w_^^.w^||-cv^v^-cv/^^l| 

Or as two verses : 

>-:— ■|->I-V- A "l 



A 



A 



VERSIFICATION. 365 

776. 

40. 2. Elegiambus {Dactylic Penthemimeris and Iambic Dimeter). 
Desinet imparibus || certare submo- 

tus pudor. Hor. 
Or as two verses : 

-wu|_^u|_-.[ 

A 



> . .,1 > , 



I _£| -vl 



Saturnian Verse. 

777. The Saturnian verse is an old Italian rhythm which 
occurs in the earlier monuments of Latin literature. It divides 
itself into two parts, with three Arses in each : — 

The queen was in lier 'parlor ', 
Eating bread and honey v. 

Dabunt malum Metelli Naevio poetae 
Iterum triumpans in urbem Romam rediit 
Duello magno dirimundo regibus subigundis. 



778. Lyric Metres of Horace. 

I. Asclepiadean Strophe No. 1. Lesser Asclepiadean Verse (No. 30) 
repeated in tetrastichs. 







_£.\^/W_|j_£.V^^,_W__ 




Or thus : 


-> 


1— 1^-11— 1 -v 1 - A J 


3 
3 




-> 


|-u|^||-vv|-w|- A i 


3 
3 




-> 


1— ' l«-|-^ 1 -- I - A l! 


3 
3 




-> 


|^w | l_|-vw | -^ | _ A || 


3 
3 


In Od. i. 1 ; 


iii. 30 ; 


iv. 8. 


OA 



AsclSpiadean (No. 30) alternating, and so forming tetrastichs. 



v^w_w 



3G6 VERSIFICATION. 

Or thus : ->|'-vvs1— vs|_ A j 4 

1 ' ' A" * 

_> |^J lu-l^v, I --|- A » 8 

-> I — I -- I - A ll i 

->|-ww|(_|-w v |-w|- A | 3 

A 3 

In Od. i. 3, 13, 19, 36 ; ii. 9, 15, 19, 24, 25, 28 ; iv. 1, 3. 

III. AsctepiadSan Strophe No. 3. Three Lesser Asclepiadean Verses, 
followed by a Glycouic (Nos. 30 and 24). 

_ x _^uv,_|zuw_^_ _>|-^|l_||-^|_w|_ a 3 

— x — ^^w_||jiww_w— -> I -vv I 1 — || -^ w | _ w | _ 3 

A 3 
- x _ ^ww_||^^^_w- ->|-^w|l_||-vw|_w|_^ ^ 

3 

— X _ -C-^f KJ — W — __>|-V^|_ W |_ 

/\ 4 

In Od. i. 6, 15, 24, 33 ; ii. 12 ; iii. 10, 16 ; iv. 5, 12. 

IV. AsclepiadSan Strophe No. 4. Two Lesser Asclgpiadean Verses 
(No. 30), a Pherecratean (No. 23), and a Glyconic (No. 24). 

__ x _ iu^_|^.uu_u_ I. _>|^w|l_||-^w|_^||| 1.3 

/\ o 

_ X _-^W_||^WW_W_ _> I -»KJ I L_||-VW I _ W I _ J 3 

/x 3 

_ x _^w_w II. _> |.Wu I l— I - || II.- 

A 4 

— *_ -^ w w — w _ _>|-^w|_v^|__|| 

A 4 

In Od. i. 5, 14, 21, 23 ; iii. 7, 13 ; iv. 313. 

V. AsclSpiadean Strophe No. 5. Greater AsclSpiadean (No. 31), re- 
peated in fours. 

Or thus : 

-> I-wIl-I^Il-I-^ I --I-JI 3 

^X-^I^ii-^i^i^i -o|'- A l I 

3 

_>|^|t_||^|u_||-^|-w| I 1 

3 

-> I— I -II— I -II— I -- I - A ll § 

In Od. i. 11, 18 ; iv. 10. 



VERSIFICATION. 



VI. Sapphic Strophe. Three Lesser Sapphics (No. 26), and an Adonic 
(No. 21), which is merely a clausula. In No. 26 Horace regularly breaks 
the Dactyl. 



1 v^l_ j-\ kj w _ w _ kj _ w | _> | _fca I _ ^ I _ W J 

Iu--^t^^- u -^ _v^|_>|_fcj|_w|_w|| 

^- \j \j J-\J -«U | -W | ? 

In Od. i. 2, 10, 12, 20, 22, 25, 25, 30, 32, 38 ; ii. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16 ; iii. 8, 
11, 14, 18, 20, 22, 27; iv. 2, 6, 11 ; Carmen Saeculare. 

Word divided at the end of the third verse; Od, i. 2, 19; 25, 11; ii. 
16,7. 

VII. Lesser Sapphic Strophe. Aristophanic (No. 22), and Greater 
Sapphic (No, 32). Two pairs are combined into a tetrastich. 

-£. \J \J \J __ KJ 

Or thus : 



_ W I _> |-u^ |l__||-^/W | 



A" 



II 4 
"A l! 4 



-v l^> |-~y tM-v^ | -^ 1 «— I - A fl 4 
In Od. L 8. 

VIII. Alcaic Strophe. Two Alcaic verses of eleven syllables (No. 27) 
one of nine (No. 4), and one of ten (No. 28). 

i - >. T « 

- : --- X -l------ >:-w|-> |-u|-.| - A i L5 

5 

u:Iv,_ x _l^.uw„v,- >:_^|_ > |-v,^|-w|- A || ' 

w ■ v ' ' A TT 

-. - IL 



JL. \J \J \-/ v^» — V-» W 



-Vw|-^W | -U | — KJ \ 



In Od. i. 9, 16, 17, 26, 27, 29, 31, 34, 35, 37 ; ii. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15 
17, 19, 20 ; iii 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 17, 21, 23, 26, 29 ; iv. 4, 9, 15, 17. 



568 VERSIFICATION. 

IX. Arcliilochian Strophe No. 1. Hexameter (Xo. 17), and Lesser 
Aichilochian No. 14), two pairs to a tetrastich. 

JS.\y \j I JL \j \j j i | UU | -£. ^ W j _^ v^ ^/ | -£. __ 

_^ v^ ^ I _^_ w w I .fc 

Or -.:„ 

_v^v^[_^Wj— f VU I _ v^/ w I _ ^ U I I 

3 

_ w ^ I — w ^ j J 

3 



_ \J \J — \J \J 



_f uu I _u u I -^v I 1 3 



— w^'—w^l . I 

A ' 3 

In Od. ir. 7. 

X. Aichik :hian Strophe Xo. 2. A Dactylic Hexameter (Xo. 17), and 
in fcmbelegiis X: 

\j J- \j \j -L. \J [ -1. W \j -Z- W \J ^- 

Or thus : 

— VT V* I _V/U | -V/U | —WW j _U w | | 

u ■ */ ' A ' 

Epod. 13. 

XT. Archilochian Strophe Xo. 3. An Iambic Trimeter (Xo. 9), fol- 
lowed by un El-giambas Xo. 40). 

v,- - - ]x *y I - w ° I ' -r A I 

.Z. \^/ W _ '^ ^ — s-/ -£. '-^ __ 'V-' -£■ ^ 



Epod It 



u • = <r J A 






XII. Archilochian Strophe Xo. L Greater Archilochian (No. 29), and 
Trimeter I lectk No. 8). Two pairs combined to form a te- 

trastich 

i v /jiv-'-'w'^^^v; [ -£. v-/ w __ ^ 

\J -L- ■sj L/jL\/~ v/^.u 

1 

Rehjlrk.— This verse u sometimes considered as loguoedic 



VERSIFICATION. 309 



•a» i 



2 


_>i 

GO ' 


-I 


_ GO || __ \J | _ w 


-1 


-l\ 


-^ 1 


--IH-A." 


Si 


-l\ 


-l\ 


— GO || _ w | _ w 



-a! 



4 

A " 4 



>:_v,|->l-v>l-"|i-|- A 



XIII. AJcmanian Strophe. Dactylic Hexameter (No. 17). followed by 
Catalectic Dactylic Tetrameter (No. 15). 

In Od. i. 7, 28. Epod. 12. 

Remark.— The Tetrameter may be considered acatalectic with a spondee in the 
fourth place. 

XIV. Iambic Trimeter repeated (No. 9). 

v/^-w — w-^-w — w^-u- ^ : z u I - I -u I - 



', In Epod. 17. 



- v '-a 



XV. Iambic Strophe. Iambic Trimeter (No. 9), and Dimeter (No. 7). 

w-^-w — w^.v_/_ w^w_ > : _w | _ > | _ w j _^ | _^ | __ A 

\j ' w ' ' ^ ' A 

> . ! > 

"A 
In Epod. 1-10. 



V/-C.W — ^iU_ w ; ~ W i""t, |— ^ 



XVI. Pythiambic Strophe No. 1. Dactylic Hexameter No. 17 (Versus 
Pythius), and Iambic Dimeter (No. 7). 






Epod. 14, 15. 



XVII. Pythiambic Strophe No. 2. Dactylic Hexameter (No. 17), and 
Iambic Trimeter (No. 9). 



\J JL \j v^-£>^-— V> -£. yy _ 

Epod. 16. 

16* 



3; VERSIFICATION. 

XVIII. Trochaic Strophe. Catalectic Trochaic Dimeter (No. 3), and 
a Catalectic Iambic Trimeter (No. 8). Two pairs make a tetrastich. 



J- \u — w -f v./ _ 

\J ■£- KJ \J ^- \J — \J -£- KJ 



In Od. ii. 18. 



XIX. Ionic System. 

In Od. iii. 12. (See No. 37.) 



779. Index of Horatian Odes and Metres. 



Book. Ode. Metre. 

I. 1 i. 

2 . .. vi. 

3 ii. 

4 xii. 

5 iv. 

6 iii. 

7 xiii. 

8 vii. 

9 viii. 

10 vi. 

11 v. 

12 vi. 

13 ii. 

14 iv. 

15 iii. 

16 viii. 

17 viii. 

18 v. 

19 ii. 

20 vi. 

21 iv. 

22 vi. 

23 iv. 

24 iii. 

25 vi. 

26 viii. 

27 viii. 

28 xiii. 

29 viii. 

30 vi. 

31 viii. 

32 vi. 

33 iii. 

34 viii. 

35 viii. 

36 ii. 

37 viii. 

38 vi. 



Book. Ode. Metre. 

II. 1 viii. 

2 vi. 

3 viii. 

4 vi. 

5 viii. 

6 vi. 

7 viii. 

8 vi. 

9 viii. 

10 vi. 

11 viii. 

12 iii. 

13 viii. 

14 viii. 

15 viii. 

16 vi. 

17 viii. 

18 xviii. 

19 viii. 

20 viii. 

III. 1 viii. 

2 viii. 

3 viii. 

4 viii. 

5 viii. 

6 viii. 

7 iv. 

8 vi. 

9 ii. 

10 iii. 

11 vi. 

12 xix. 

13 iv. 

14 vi. 

15 ii. 

16 iii. 

17 , viii. 



Book. Ode. Metre 

III. 18 Vi! 

19 ii. 

20 vi. 

21 viii. 

22 vi. 

23 viii. 

24 ii. 

25 ii. 

26 . viii. 

27 vi. 

28 ii. 

29 viii. 

30 i. 

IY. 1 ii. 

2 vi. 

3 ii. 

4 viii. 

5 iii. 

6 vi. 

7 ix. 

8 i. 

9 viii. 

10 v. 

11 vi. 

12 iii. 

13 iv. 

14 viii. 

15 viii. 

Carmen Saeculare. vi. 

Epod. 1-10 xv. 

11 xi. 

12 xiii. 

13 x. 

14 xvi. 

15 xvi. 

16 xvii. 

17 xiv. 



APPENDIX. 



ROMAN CALENDAR. 

The names of the Roman months were originally adjectives. The 
substantive mensis, month, may or may not be expressed : (mensis) Janu- 
arius, Februarius, and so on. Before Augustus, the months July and 
August were called, not Julius and Augustus, but Quintilis and Sextilis. 

The Romans counted backward from three points in the month, 
Calends (Kalendae), Nones (Nonae), and Ides (Idus), to which the names 
of the months are added as adjectives: Kalendae Januariae, Nonae Feb- 
ruariae, Idus Martiae. The Calends are the first day, the Nones the 
fifth, the Ides the thirteenth. In March, May, July, and October, the 
Nones and Ides are two daj^s later. Or thus : 

In March, July, October, May, 
The Ides are on the 15th day, 
The Nones the 7th ; but all besides 
Have two days less for Nones and Ides. 

In counting backward ( u come next calends, next nones, next ides") 
the Romans used for fi the day before " pridie with the accus. pridie 
kalendas Januarias, Dec. 31, pridie nonas Jan. = Jan. 4, pridie Id. Jan. 
= Jan. 12. 

The longer intervals are expressed by ante diem tertium, quartum, etc., 
before the accusative, so that ante diem tertium kal. Jan. means il two 
days before the calends of January; " ante diem quartum, or a. d. iv., or 
iv. kal. Jan., " three days before," and so on. This remarkable combina- 
tion is treated as one word, so that it can be used with the prepositions 
ex and in : ex ante diem iii. Nonas Junias usque ad pridie kal. Septem- 
bres, from June 3 to August 31 ; differre aliquid in ante diem xv. kal. 
Nov., to postpone a matter to the ISth of October. 

Leap Year. — In leap year the intercalary day was counted between 
a. d. vi. kal. Mart, and a. d. vii. kal. Mart. It was called a. d. bis sex- 
tum kal. Mart., so that a. d. vii. kal. Mart, corresponded to our February 
23d, just as in the ordinary year. 

To turn Roman Dates into English. 

For Nones and Ides. — I. Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides, 
and subtract the given number. 

For Calends.— -II. Add two to the days of the preceding month, and 
subtract the given number. 

Examples : a. d. viii. Id. Jan. (13 + 1 — 8) = Jan. 6; a. d. iv. Non. 
Apr. (5 + 1 - 4) = Apr. 2 ; a. d. xiv. Kal. Oct. (30 + 2 - 14) = Sept. 18. 



HSTDEX OF SYNTAX- 



The Figures refer to the Sections. 



A. 



A, ab, abs, with ablative, 412; of 
agent, 205, 403 ; of origin, 395 ; of 
part affected, 398 ; a tergo, ab 
oriente, a spatio, 386, R. 2. 

Abhwc, 400, R. 3. 

Ablative, syntax of, 383-409; of 
place where, 384-387; of place 
whence, 388-390 ; of attendance, 
391 ; of time when, 392, 3 ; of 
origin, 395; of material, 396; of 
measure. 397-400, 566 ; of man- 
ner, 401 ; of quality, 402 ; of means, 
403 ; of price, 404 ; with sundry 
verbs, 405 ; of cause, 406 ; ablative 
absolute, 408, 409 ; prepositions 
with, 418, 420; abl. of gerund and 
gerundive, 432 ; of supine, 437. 

Absolute ablative, 408 ; restrictions 
of use, 403, R. 3. 

Absque, w. abl. 418. 

Abstract nouns in plural 195, R. 
5 : as attribute and vice versa, 357, 
R. 

Abutor, 405, 428 ; R. 3. 

Ac atque, 479, 615. 

Accedit, constr., 525, R. 3. 

Accidit, sequence after, 513, R. 2. 

Accinqor, constr., 332, R. 2. 

Accipio, with two datives, 350. 

Accusative, 327-340. Direct object, 
inner, outer object, 327 ; general 
view, 328 ; with active transitive 
verbs, 329 ; with verbs compd. 
with prepositions, 330 : cognate, 
331 ; adverbial, 331, R. 3 ; of part 
affected, 332; double, 333,-334; 
of local objects (terminal accusa- 
tive), 342, 410 ; of extent in space, 
335, 336 ; in time, 337, 338 ; in ex- 



clamations and explanatory ques- 
tions, 340 ; with interjections, 
340 ; with prepositions, 417 ; of 
infinitive, 424 ; of gerund, 426 ; of 
gerundive, 431 ; of supine, 436. 
Accusative and infinitive, 341- 
526. 

Accusing and acquitting, verbs of, 
—constr., 377. 

Ac si, 389. 

Action, stage of, 213 ; period of, 
213. 

Active voice, 204 ; for passive, 205 ; 
R. 1. 

Active genitive, 361. 

Ad, in compds. with ace, 330 ; with 
dat., 346. Preposition with ac- 
cus., 356, R. 1, 417; whither, 341, 
R. 2 ; ad Yestae, 360, R. 2 ; w. 
gerund, 437, R. 2 ; ad, hence, 400, 
R. 3. 

Adire aliquem, 330, R. 2. 

Adjective for substantive, 195, R. 
1-4. — Adjective predicate, 202; 
adj. attributes, 285, 288; peculiar 
forms of, 288 foil. ; comparison 
of, 311 ; as adverb, 329, R. 6. Ad- 
jective sentences, 505. 

Adnominal genitive, 359. 

Adulor, constr. 347. 

Advantage, dative of, 345. 

Adverbial accus., 331, R. 3; abl. 
401. 

Adverbial sentences, 507. 

Adverbs of quality, place, extent 
witli gen., 371, R. 3. Compara* 
five of constr., 399. Adverbs, 
440. Position of, 441. Negative 
adv., 442-450. Prepositions as 
adv., 406, R. Adverbs of likeness 
and unlikeness with atque, 640, 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



373 



Adversative particles for copula- 
tive, 484. 

Adversative sentences, 486-493. 

Adversus, w. accus., 356, R. 2, 417. 

Aeger, w. gen. 374, R. 2. 

Aemulor, 347. 

Aequdlis, 356, and R. 1. 

Aequdre, 345, R. 1. 

Aequl bonlque facto, 180, R. 2. 

Aestimo, constr., 180, R. 1. 

Affatim, w. gen., 371, R. 3 

Affection of the mind, 374, R. 2. 

Afflnis, constr., 356, and R. 1. 

Affirmative, indefinite, and general, 
448, R. 

Agent, abl. of, w. a (ab), 202, 403; 
without a (ab), 202, R. 2 ; dative 
of, 203, 352, 353. 

Agreement of predicate and sub- 
ject, 199, 281, 283 ; of attribute 
and substantive, 285, 286 ; of rela- 
tive and antecedent, 616. 

Ajo, 651, R. 

Alienus, w. dat.,. 356; with gen., 
356, R. 1 ; w. abl., R. 5. 

Aliquis, aliqul, 301. 

Aliter witli aique, 646 ; with sin, 
593. 

Alii— alii, 321. 

Alius, 306; with abl., 399, R. 2; 
with atque, 645. 

Alter, 306. Alter— alter, 321. 

Alius, 336. 

Ambiguity in use of ace. and inf., 
527, R. 4. 

Amicus, constr., 356 and R. 1. 

An, 459, 462. 

Anacoluthon, 694. 

Animi, constr., 374, R. 3. 

Annbn, 461. 

Ante, in compds., with ace, 330, w. 
dat., 346, Ante, w. ace, 417. A 
in expressions of time, 400, R. 3. 

Antecedent, 615; repeated, 617; in- 
corporated, 618 ; attraction into, 
619 ; omission of, 623. 

Antequam, constr., 576 foil. 

Aorist, 212. 

Apodosis, 590 ; omitted, 603 foil 

Apodotic period, 686. 

AposiopBsis, 691. 

Apposition, 319. Partitive (restrict- 
ive), 320. Distributive, 321 ; with 
nornen, 322 ; to a sentence, 323. 



Predicative, 324. Apposition of 
antecedent incorporated, 618. 

Apud, w. accus., 417. 

Arrangement of words, 674, foil, of 
clauses. 

As, 324, R. 3. 

Aspergo, constr., 348. 

Asseverations, 255. 

Assis, 379. 

Assuetus, w. abl., 403, R. 2. 

Asyndeton, 472, 480. 

Attempted actions by present, 218, 
R. 2; by imperf, 224. 

Attendance, ablative of, 391. 

Atque, for quam, 311, R. 6. See ac. 

Atqul, 488. 

Attraction of pronoun, 199, R. 5. At- 
traction of names of persons, 322. 
Attraction of mood, 509, 666: w. 
quod., 541, R. 2. Attraction of 
relative, 619 : inverted, 619, R. 2. 

Aui, 492. 

Autem, 486. 

Ax, verbals in, w. gen. 174. 



Becoming, verbs of, 193. 
Belli, 409, R. 3. 
Beseeching, verbs of, 546. 
Bewaring, verbs of, 548. 
Bene emere, vendere, 381, R. 3. 
Bidding, verbs of, 345 and R. 1. 
Birth, part, of, 395. 
Bonl consulo, 380, R. 2. 
Brachylogy, 689. 



Capitis, and capite, 377, R. 1. 

Gaptus, w. abl., 398. 

Cases, syntax of, 377-412; nom., 
194; voc, 194, R. 2; accus., 327- 
340; dat, 342-356; gen., 357- 
382; abl., 381-409; with prepo- 
sition, 417-419. 

Causa, gratia, w. gen., 372, 407. 

Causal particles, 500, sentences, 588, 
foil. 

Causal participle, 669. 

Causation, verbs of, w. partic, 537. 

Cause, abl. of, 406. 



374 



TXDEX OF SYXTAX. 



Cave, with snbj. for imperat., 264. 

Cairo, w. ace. and dat., 317; ne ut, 
548, R. 2. 

C#0, 833 aud R. 2. 

Ceterum, 490. 

Chiasmus, 6S4. 

Choosing, verbs of, 197, 334. 

Circa, circiier, w. aceus., 417. 

Circum, compds. w. ace., 530; e*r- 
cum, w. ace., 417. 

Circumdo, constr., 348. 

O-S', <r#ra, w. aceus., 417. 

Citations in abl., 386. 

Cities, names of, 410-412. 

Clam, w. abl., 417, R. 

Clauses, 474. 

Coeptus sum, 424, R. 

Cognate, aceus., 331. 

Cogndtus, constr. . 356, R. 1. 

Coincident action, 583, 

Collocdre in, w. abl., 384, R\ 

Com. con, in compels., w. dat., 346. 

Combination of relative sentences, 
639. 

Comitor, constr,, 347. 

Communicdre, const., 346, R. 

Communis, 356, R. 1. 

Comparative degree with quam, 
311, 647, foil.; with abl., 399; 
with gen., 370. 

Comparative particles for copula- 
tives, 484. C. sentences, 645, foil. 

Comparison, 311 ; standard of, omit- 
ted, 823 : of qualities, 314. 

Complementary final sentences, 541, 
543. 

Compos, w. gen., 373. 

Compound sentences, 192, 474, 

Compounds of preposit, with ace., 
330 ; w. two ace, 330 ; w. dat. 
346. 

Conceiving, verbs of, 523. 

Concessive subjunctive, 257. Con- 
cessive sentences and conjunc- 
tions, 606. C. participles, 611, 
670. 

Concord of predicate, w. subj., 202, 
281 ; gender, 282 ; number, 281 ; 
of attribute, 285 ; common attri- 
bute, 286 : of apposition, 349 ; of 
relative, 616. 

Concords, the three, 198. 

Condemning, verbs of, 377. 

Condition, resulting, 225, 230. 



Conditional sentences, 590-604 ; lo- 
gical^ 597; ideal, 598; unreal, 
599; incomplete, 600; in or at io 
obliqtta, 659, foil. ; conditional 
participle, 670. 

Qonducere, constr., 378. 

Conjunctions. — Coordinate, copula- 
tive, 477, 484; adversative, 486- 
493 ; disjunctive, 494-497 ; cau- 
sal, 500 : illative, 501-504 ; sub- 
ordinate, causal, 538 ; final, 543 ; 
temporal, 561 ; conditional, 591. 

Conscius, w. gen., 373, R. 1. 

Consldere in, 384, R. 1. 

Consilium est, w. inf. 429, R. 3. 

Constituere in, 384, R. 

Consto, 370. 

Consulo, 347, 380, R. 2. 

Constructio praegnans, 696. 

Contentus, w. abl., 373, R. 1. 

Continuance, verbs of, 424. 

Contigit, sequence after, 513, R. 2. 

Contra, as adv., 416, R. ; w. ace, 
217. 

Contrdrius, 356, R. 1. 

Convenio, 347. 

Convicting, verbs of, 377. 

Coordinate conjunctions. See con- 
junctions. 

Copula, 196 ; omitted, 200 ; agree- 
ment with predicate, 202, R. 1. 

Copulative conjunctions, 477-484; 
inserted, 483 ; omitted, 475-483. 

Copulative verbs, 1. 

Coram, with abl,, 418. 

Correlatives of si, 595. Correlatives 
of qui, 620. Correlatives, list of, 
645. 

Cum. prep., abl., with and* without, 
391-401; postpositive, 414, R. 1; 
with abl., 418. 

Gum {quum) primum, 563 ; cum 
(constr.), 581; temporal, 582; co- 
incident action, 583 ; lapse of 
time, 582, R. 3 ; conditional, 584 ; 
iterative, 585 ; historical, 586 ; 
causal, 587; concessive, adversa- 
tive, 588 ; cumtum, 587. 

Cumque, compounds with, 246, R. 
4. 

Cupidus, w. gen., 373. 

Cupio, 532. 

Curd ut, 264, 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



375 






Dative, 343-356 ; w. transitive verbs, 
344 ; w. in trans, verbs, 345 ; w. 
compd. verbs, 346 ; differs from 
accus., 347 ; with verbs of giving 
and putting, 348 ; with esse } 349 ; 
of the object for which, 350 ; ethi- 
cal dat., 351 ; of agent, 352 ; with 
gerund, 353; of participles, 354; 
with derivative nouns, 355 ; with 
adjectives, 356. Dative of gerund, 
430. 

Be, with abl., 418 ; for gen., 371, R. 
4, 377, R. 2 ; of time, 393, R. ; of 
origin, 395; with abl. of measure, 
398. 

Bebebam, 246, R. 

Becere, 355, R. 1. 

Declarative mood, 246. 

Becerno, 446, R. 2. 

Beficere, 355, R. 1. 

Beflgere in, abl., 384, R, 

Definite price, 404. 

Delay, verbs of, 551. 

Demanding, verbs of, 546. 

Demonstratives, use of, 290-292. 

Deponent verbs, 211. 

Depriving, verbs of, 389. 

Derivative nouns with dat, 355. 

Design, sentences of, 544, foil. ; re- 
presented, 544, R. 

Besino, 424. 

Desire, adj. of, w. gen., 373; verbs 
of, w. inf., 542 ; w. partic, 547. 

Besitus sum, 424, R. 1. 

Bespero. w. ace, 329. 

Destination, 377, R. 3. 

Determinative pronouns, 293-298. 

Beterreo, constr., 548, R. 1. 

Difference, abl. of, 400. 

Bl, dis, compounds with, 388, R. 1. 

Bignor, 398, R. 2. 

Bignus, 373, R. 3 ; 398, R. 2. Dignus 
qui, 556, R. 2. 

Direct discourse, 509. 

Direct object, 327. 

Direct question, 454. 

Disadvantage, dat. of, 345. 

Disgust, adj. of, 373. 

Disjunctive conjunctions, 494-497, 

Bispdr, 356, R. 1. 

Disproportion, 313. 

Distance, abl. of, 400, R. 2. 



Bistdre, w. dat, 388, R. 1; with 

abl., 400, R. 1, 2 ; with ace, 335. 
Distributives, 310. 
Bo, with two datives, 350. 
Boceo, 333, 424, R. 3. 
Boctus, constr., 403, R. 2. 
Boleo, w. ace, 329, R. 1 , w. quod, 

542. 
Bold, 401, R. 1. 
Boml, 412, R. 2. 
Bomb, 411, R. 2. 
Bombs, domum, 410. 
Bbnec. See Bum. 
Doubt, verbs of, 551. 
Duco, with two dat, 350, with gen., 

378. 
Bubito an, 469, R. 
Bubito, other constr. 550, R. 
Bum, with pres., 217, R. 1, 572 ; w. 

ind., 571, 573; with subj., 574. 

Bum, Bummodo, 575. 



E. 

for ex. with abl., 417; for gen., 

571, R. 4; of origin, 395; ex fugd 

388, R. 1. 
Ecce, 340. 
Egeo, 389, R. 1. 

Ellipsis of substantive, 195, R. 1. 
Ellipsis, 688. 
Emo, 378. 

Emotion, verbs of, 406, 542. 
En, 340. 

End, verbs of, 424. 
Endeavor, verbs of, 546. 
Enim, 500. 

Enumeration in abl., 384, R. 
Eb, w. gen., 371, R. 3. 
Ergd, w. accus., 356, R. 2, 417. 
Ergo, w. gen., 372. 
Ergo, conj., 504. 
Est qui, 426. 
Et, 534 ; et ipse, 297, R. 2 ; et nemo, 

482 ; et nbn, 534. 
Etenim, 497. 
Etiam, 477. 
Ethical dative, 351. 
Etiamsl, etsi, 605, 606. 
Exclamations, 340 with ace. and 

inf. 534 ; with ut, 560. 
Expers, w. gen., 373. 
Exspectdre, constr., 574. 



I 



370 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



Extent in space, 335, 336. 
External qualities, 402, R. 
Extra, as an adverb, 406, R. ; with 
ace, 417. 



Fac, in circumlocutions, 264. 
Facio, with gen., 365, R, 379; w. 

inf., 527, R. 1 ; w. part, 536; w. 

subj., 557. 
Feeling, dat. of, 351. 
Fearing, verbs of, 347, 552. 
Fido, 345, R. 1, 402. 
Filling, verbs of, 374, R. 6, 389. 
Final sentences, 543, foil. 
Fine, abl. of, 377, R. 1. 
Flo, with two norn., 197 ; with two 

dat., 349 ; with abl., 403, R, 2. 
Fitness, adjectives of, 356. 
Fldgito, 333 and R. 2. 
Forbidding, verbs of, 355. 
Forgetting, verbs of, with gen., 375. 
Frequens, 324, R. 5. 
Frequentative. See Iterative. 
Frelus, with abl., 373, R. 1. 
Friendliness, adj. of, 356. 
Frubr, 413 ; fruendus, 428, R. 3. 
Ful, perf. partic. pass, with, 240. 
Fulness, adjectives of, 382. 
Fungor, 405; fungendus, 428, R. 3. 
Future, 237; periphrastic, 237; in 

subjunctive, 514; inf., 529. 
Future participle, 279. 
Future perfect, 233, foil.; iterative 

use, 659. 
Futurum esse, fore ut, 237, 531, R. 
Futurum fuisse ut, 240, R. 2, 659. 



of memory, 375; with verbs ol 
emotion, 376 ; w. judicial verbs, 
377 ; with verbs of rating and 
buying, 376, 377 ; gen. with in- 
terest and refert, 381, 382 ; appa- 
rent gen , 412 ; gen. of gerund 
and gerundive, 429 ; cases of, 427. 

Gerund and gerundive, 426-432 ; 
gerundive for gerund, 428 ; after 
prepositions, 428, R. 1 ; gerundive 
formation restricted, 428, R. 2 ; 
428, R. 3 ; genitive of, 429 ; da- 
tive of, 430 ; accus. of, 431 ; ablat. 
of, 432. 

Glbrior, with abl., 407. 

Gratia, with gen., 372, 407. 



Hdbeo, w. perf. part, pass., 227 ; with 
two dat, 350 ; with gen., 378 ; 
with inf., 424, R. ; nihil habeo 
quod and non habeo quid, 634. 

Habit, verbs of, 424. 

Happening, verbs of, 525, 558. 

Hand, 442. Hand scio an, 457, R. 

Hendiadys, 695. 

Hei, 340, R. 2. 

Heu, 540. 

Hie, 290 ; of time, 383, R. 2. 

Historical tenses, 213. Historical 
present, 227. Historical cum, 586. 

Hodiernus, 324, R. 6. 

Hope, verbs of, 424, R. 3. 

Horrere, w. accus., 529, R. 



G. 

Gaudeo, w. abl., 406; w. inf., 533; 
w. quod, 528. 

Generic relative with ind., 246, R. 4. 

Genitive, 357-382 ; appositive gen., 
or gen. of specification, 359 ; pos- 
sess, gen., 360 ; active and passive, 
361-363 ; gen. of quality, 364 ; as 
a predicate, 365 ; partitive gen., 
366, foil. g. generis, 367, R. ; gen. 
with prepositional substantives, 
372; with adj., 373; with verbals 
and participles, 374 ; with verbs 



Ideal second person, 250, 267. Ideal 

_ conditional sentence, 598. 

Idem, 296 ; predicative use of, 324, 

R. 2 ; with dat., 356, R. 6. 
Idoneus, with dat., 356; qui, 556, 

R. 2. 
Igitur, 563. 
Igadrus, w. gen. 373. 
Ignorance, adjectives of, w. gen. 

373. 
Illative conjunctions, 502-504. 
FOe, 292 ; of time, 393, R. 2. 
Immemor, w. gen., 373. 
Impedio, coustr., 540, 549. 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



srr 



Imperative, 259-269; tenses, 259- 
262 ; negative, 263 ; periphrases 
for, 264 ; representatives of posi- 
tive imperative, 265 ; of negative, 
266 ; of positive aDd negative, 
267, 268 ; time of, 272 : imperative 
in oratio obllqua, 655 ; used mo- 
dally, 246, R. 

Imperfect tense, indicative, 222, 
foli. ; subjunctive, 250 ; in se- 
quence of tenses, 517; in unreal 
conditional sentences, 599, R. 2. 

Impero, w. inf., 532, R. 1. 

Impersonal verbs, 96. 

Impertio, 348. 

Imprimere in, abl., 384, R. 

In, in compounds with ace, 330; 
with dat., 346. In, with abl. of 
place, 384, R. ; with ace, 413, R. ; 
with ace. and abl., 419. In, with 
abl. of time, 393. 

Inclination, verbs of, 324. 

Incorporation of antecedents, 618 ; 
antecedent, 623. 

Indefinite perfect, 212 ; pronouns, 
302-304. 

Indicative mood, 246 ; for subjunc- 
tive, 399, R. 4. See the different 
classes of sentences. 

Indigeo, constr., 388, R. 1. 

Indignus, w. abl., 373, R. 3 ; 398, R. 
2. Indignus qui, 556, R. 2. 

Indirect discourse. See oratio ob- 
liqua. 

Indirect object, 208, 343. 

Indirect questions, 462. 

Induo, constr., 348. 

In eb esse ut, 237, 241. 

Infinitive, tenses of, 273, foil. 314; 
subject of, 327, 525 ; as a noun, 
420, 422; as a subject, 223 ; as an 
object, 224; as a predicate, 425; 
accus. and inf., 526 ; ambiguity of 
accus. and inf., 527, R. 4 ; accus. 
and inf., with verbs of will and 
desire, 532 ; with verbs of emo- 
tion, 533; in exclamations, 534; 
accus. and inf., as a subject, 535; 
in relative sentences, 538. 

Infra, as an adverb, 416 R. ; with 
accus., 417. 

Inquam, 439. 

Inquiry, verbs of, 333. 

Inscribere in, abl., 384, R. 



Instar, with gen., 370. 

Instrument, abl. of, 205, 103. 

Inter, in compound with dat., 346. 
Inter, with accus., 417; with ac- 
cus. for gen., 371, R. 4. Inter se, 
212. Inter of time, 393, R. 

Intercalary period, 686. 

Interest, constr., 373-381. 

Interjections, 194, R. 2 ; with divers 
cases, 340. 

Interrogative sentences, 449, 473. 

Intra, with accus., 417; of time, 
393, R. 

Intransitive verbs, 204, 345. 

Inverted attraction, 618, R. 2. 

Invltus, 324, R. 6. 

Ipse, use of, 297, foil. 

Ire, with supine, 437. 

Islands, names of smaller, constr., 
410, 411, 412. 

Itaque, 499. 

Ita—ut, restrictive, 556, R. 5. 

Item, itidem-, 645. 

Iterative tenses, 568-9. 



Jubeo, constr., 532, R. ; 546, R. 1. 

Jure, 398. 

Jussu, 407. 

Juvo, w. accus., 315, R. 1. 



Knowledge, adjectives of, 373. 



L. 

Lotus, constr., 336. 

Lege, 398. 

Letters, tenses in, 244 ; date, 411, 

R. 3. 
Libens, 324, R. 6. 

Liber, 373, R. ; Ixbero, w. abl., 388. 
Librb, and in librb, 385, R. 
Licere, constr., 378. 
Licet, constr., 535, R. 2. 
Likeness, adjectives of, 356 ; with 

ace, 646. 
Locdre, constr., 378. 
Locative, 412. 



378 



INDEX OP SYNTAX. 



Loco, 385, R 

Longe, with superl., 317. 

Longus, w. accus., 336. 

M. 

Made, 324, R 1. 

Magis quam, 314. 

3fagni, 377 ; magno, 380. 

Making, verbs of, with two accus. , 
334; passive of, w. two nom., 
196. 

Male, emere, vendere, 380, R 3. 

Malo, constr., 532, R 4; 546, R 3. 

Manner, abl. of, 401. 

Material, abl. of, 396. 

Mdtutinus, 324, R 6. 

Measure, abl. of, 398-400; of differ- 
ence, 398. 

Medeor, w. dat, 345, R 2; meden- 
dus, 428, R 3. 

Melius, w. indie., 246, R 1. 

Memini, w. pres. inf., 27, R ; w. 
gen. 375. 

Memo?', w. gen., 373. 

Memoria teneo, 277, E. 

Memory, verbs of constr., 375. 

Metuo, w. dat. and ace, 347. 

Militiae, 412, R 2. 

Mille, 308. 

Minbris, 380. 

Minor, minus, without quam, 311, 
R4. 

Mirdrl, with accus., 329, R 1. 

Mlrurn quantum, 469, R 2. 

Misereor, miseresco, miseret, w. gen., 
376. 

Mittere, w. two dat., 350. 

Moderoi\ with dat, and accus., 347. 

Jfwfo, with snbjunc, 575. 

Modo-modo, 481. 

Moneo, w. gen., 375 and R 1 ; with 
ut, 546 ; with inf., 546, R 2. 

Mood, attraction of, 506. 

Moods, 244; indie, 246, foil.; sub- 
junctive, 247, foil. ; imperfect, 
259 ; infinitive, 245, R 

Moris est, 365. 

Moving cause, 407, R 

Multiplication of subjects, 282, foil. 

Multitude, noun of, 202. R 

Multo, with superlat., 317. 

Multus, with et, 468. 

Muto, constr., 404, R 



N. 

Nam, namque, 500. 

Name, dat. of, 322 : gen. of, 359. 

Names of cities and small islands, 
constr., 410, 411, 412. 

Naming, verbs of, with two accus., 
334. 

Natus, w. accus., 338 ; w. abl., 395. 

—Ne, 456, 462. 

Ne, with optative subj., 253 ; with 
imper. subj., 256, 266 ; with ini- 
perat, 263, 264; with sentences 
of design, 543 ; of result, 566, R 
4 ; ne, provided that, 610. 

Nearness, adjectives of, 256. 

Necesse est, 344, R 

Necessitj', expressed how, 246, R 1. 

Necne, 461. 

Nee non, 448, R 3. 

Nedum, 484, R 2. 

Negative, of optative subjunctive, 
253 ; of imperative, 263 ; nega- 
tives, 442, foil. ; subdivision of, 
444 ; position of, 447 ; two nega- 
tives, 448. 

Nego, 446. 

Nemo, 304. 

Nempe, 500, R 

Neque, 482. Ne-quidem, 484. 

Nescio an, 404. 

Nescio quis qubmodo, with indie, 
469, R 2. 

Neuter adjective as substantive, 
199, R 4; as cognate accus., 331, 
R 2 ; as adverb, R 3 ; with par- 
titive £en., 371. 

Nl, 592,TR. 5. 

Nihil, 301 ; nihili, 379. 

Nid and si non, 592 ; nisi and nisi 
si — only, 592, R 2 ; nisi quod, R 
3 : nisi forte, R 3. 

Nltor, with abl, 403, R 3. 

No, 473. 

Noll, with inf. for imperat., 264. 

Nolo, 532. 

Nomen est, 322. Nomen w. gen, 359. 

Nominative, 194 ; double, 196 ; nom. 
for accus., 528 ; with inf. , 525. 

Non, 442 ; position of, 447 ; non 
quod, quo, 541, R 1. 

Non alius quam, 646, R 2. 

Non modo-solum tantum, 484. 

Nbnne, 457. 



INDEX OP SYNTAX. 



379 



Won possum non, 448, R. 1. 

Ms == ego, 195, R 7. 

Wostrl, nostrum, 362 and R 

Nouns. See Substantive and Ad- 
jective. 

Nubo % with dat., 345, B. 2. 

Nulius, 300, 304 ; for non, R. 2. 

Nam, 458. 

Number, singular for plural, 195, R. 
7 and 8 ; agreement in, 199. 

Nunc-nunc, 484. 



O. 



6, with voc, 194, R. 2 ; w. accus., 
340. 

si, 254, 388. 

Ob, in compds. with ace., 330 ; with 
dat, 346. Ob, w. accus., 417. 

Object, direct, 204; indirect, 205; 
infin. as object, 424; object sen- 
tences, 523-537 ; with quod, 525 ; 
with ace. and inf., 326, foil. 

Object, for which, 350. 

Obligation expressed, 246, R. 1. 

Oblique cases, 327-408. 

Obliquity, partial, 502. 

Obllviscor, constr., 375, R. 1. 

Olere and redolere, w. accus., 329, R. 

Omitting, verbs of, 551. 

Omnes, 369, R. 1. 

Oplnione, 399, R. 1. 

Oportet, 535, R. 1 ; 559, R 1. 

Optative, subjunctive, 256. 

Opto, 424, R. 2 ; 546. 

Opus, 390. 

Ordtio obliqua, 509, 651-655 ; moods 
in, 509, 653, 654 ; tenses in, 655, 
foil. ; condit. sentences in, 659 ; 
pronouns in, 663 ; involved, 655-6. 

Ordinals for cardinals, 309. 

Or dine, 401. 

Origin, abi. of, 395. 

Ortus, 395. 



Paenitet, 376 ; paenitendus, 428, 

R. 3. 
Par and dispdr, constr., 356, R. 1. 
Part, accus. of, 332. 
Particeps, w. gen., 373. 



Participial clauses, interrogative in, 
470. 

Participial sentences, 667, foil. 

Participles, tenses, 278-9 ; w. geni- 
tive, 374; subordination, by 
means of, 409, R. 2 ; 667, R. 1 ; 
participle as substant., 438 ; as ad- 
ject., 439; after verbs of Percep- 
tion and Representation, 524, R. 
1, 533; verbs of Causation and 
Desire, 534. 

Participation, adjectives of, 373. 

Partition in English, none in Latin, 
369, R 1. 

Partitive genitive, 366-371. 

Partitive, use of attribute, 287, R. ; 
apposition, 321. 

Parum, w. gen., 371. 

Parvi, 380. 

Passionate Question, 258. 

Passive voice, 205 ; passive of in- 
transitive verbs, 199, R. ; 204, 
208; passive genitive, 361. 

Peculidris, constr., 356, R. 1. 

Pedibus, 401, R. 1. 

Penes, w. accus., 415. 

Per, in compds. with ace. , 330 ; per 
with ace, 417 ; position, 416, R. 
Per, of space, 335 ; of time, 337 ; 
of manner, 401, R. 

Perceiving, verbs of, constr., 527, 
536. 

Perfect, pure, 227 ; historical, 231 ; 
passive, 242 ; perfect in letters, 
244; perfect subjunctive poten- 
tial, 250 ; optative, 254 ; impera- 
tive, 256, R. 1, 266; time of, 271 ; 
in sequence, 511 ; in sentences of 
result, 513 ; perfect infin., 275 ; as 
representative of indie, 277, and 
perf. part., 278; after verbs of 
causation and desire, 537; con- 
cessive, 670. 

Period of action, 213. 

Periphrastic conjugation, 240-243; 
subj., 514-516 ; infin. 531 ; in 
ordtio obliqua, 659. 

Perlius, w. gen., 373. 

Permitto ut, 532, R. 1. 

Person, concord of, 202, 283. 

Personal pronoun omitted, 195 ; 
gen. of, 362 ; personal pronoun w. 
gerundive, 429, R. 1. 

Person interested, 206. 



380 



INDEX OP SYNTAX. 



Persuddeo, 345, R 1 ; w. inf., 546, 
R2. 

Pertaesum est, 376. 

Peto, 333, R 2. 

Piget, 376. 

Placing, verbs of, 384, R 1. 

Place, whither, 332, 410; where, 
384-387, 412 ; whence, 388 ; place, 
as cause, manner, or instrument, 
3S7 

Plenus, 373 and R 2. 

Pluperfect, 233 ; indie, for subj., 
246, R 3; 599, R 3; iterative, 
569; pluperf. subj. as imperat. of 
pasi, 266, R 2 ; in sequence, 511 ; 
iterative, 569, R 2 ; in conditional, 
599. 

Plural of abstracts, 195, R 5, 6 ; for 
sing., R 7. 

Pluriml, 380. 

Pluris, 380. 

PHls, without quam, 311, B. 4. 

Pone, w. accus., 417. 

Pbnere in, abl., 384, R 

Posco, constr., 333 and R 

Position of attribute, 287, 288; of 
preposition, 404, foil. ; of adverb, 
441 ; of negative, 447, foil. : posi- 
tion, in interrogative sentences, 
470; of relative, 614. 

Posse, for future, 240, R 3; 662, 
R2. 

Possessive genitive, 360. 

Possessive pronouns, use of, 299 ; 
apposition with gen., 319, R 2; 
for genitive, 363 ; with refert and 
interest, 381 ; reflexive, 295, R 1, 
521. 

Possessor, dative of, 349. 

Possibility expressed, 246, R 1. 

Post, in compounds with dat, 346; 
in expressions of time, 400, R 3. 
Post, w. accus., 417. 

Post quam, 563-567. 

Postulo, constr., 333, R 2. 

Potential subjunctive, 250, foil., 519, 
543. 

Poteram, 246, R 

Potior, constr., 405, and R 3. 

Potius quam, 362, R 

Poiuisse, for futurum fuisse ut, 659, 
R 2. 

Power expressed, 246, R 1 ; adjec- 
tives of, 373. 



Prae, in compounds w. dat, 346; 
with abl., 407, R ; 418. 

Praeditus, w. abl., 373, R 1. 

Praestolor, constr., 347. 

Praeter, in compds., w. accus., 329. 

Praeter, w. accus., 417. "" 

Predicate, 192; predicative apposi- 
tion and attribution, 324. 

Prepositions, 413-419 ; origin of 
word, 413, R 3 ; position of, 214, 
215; repetition and omission of, 
216; adverbial, 416, R; prepo- 
sitions w. ace, 417 ; with abl., 
418 ; with accus. and abl., 419 ; 
with gerundive, 428, R 1 ; with 
abl. gerund., 432. 

Present indicat., 215-218 ; of en- 
deavor, 215, R 2 ; for future, 219 ; 
for past, 220; with jam, jamdiu, 
jamprldem, 221 ; present subjunc- 
tive, time of, 271 ; in sequence of 
tenses, 511; for future, 514; in 
conditional sentences, 381 ; pre- 
sent infinitive, 273; of contempo- 
raneous action, 529 ; present par- 
ticiple, 278. 

Preventing cause, 407, R 2; verbs 
of, 548, 549. 

Price, gen. of, 378 ; abl. of, 404. 

Prlmo, primum, 324, R 7. 

Principal clauses, 474. 

Prior, primus, as predicates, 324, R 
6, 7 ; w. gen., 370. 

Prius quam, constr., 576-9. 

Pro, interjection, 340. 

Pro, in compounds, w. dat., 346. 

Pro, with abl., 418. Pro eo, ut, 465, 
R4. 

Prohibeo, constr., 547. 

Prolepsus, 470. 

Promise, verbs of, 424, R 2. 

Pronouns, 290-304; demonstrative, 
290-293 ; reflexive, 294, 520-522 ; 
determinative, 296-298 ; possess- 
ive, 299; indefinite, 300-304; in 
ordtio obllqua, 663. 

Prope, w. accus., 417. 

Propius, constr., 356, R 4. 

Proprius, 356, R 1. 

Propter, w. accus., 417. 

Protasis, 590; omitted, 252, R 1, 
602. 

Proxime, w. accus., 356, R 4. 

Prudens, as adv., 324, R 5. 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



381 



Pudet, 376. 
Pure perfect, 212. 
Puto, w. gen., 378. 
Putting, verbs of, constr., 348, 384, 
R. 



Q. 



Qudprudentid es, 618, R. 1. 

Qualification of subject, 284. 

Qualis, 433. 

Quality, gen. of, 364; ablative of, 
402. 

Qualities, two compared, 314. 

Quam, w. comparatives, 311, 647; 
w. superlatives, 317 ; quam pro ut 
qui, 313 ; quam quod, 525 ; quam 
si, 604; quam omitted, 311, R. 4. 

Quamdiu, 570, 645. 

Quanquam, 607. 

Quamvls, 608. 

Quando. Quandoquidem, 538. 

Quantl, 400 and R. ; Quantus, 645. 

Quasi, 604. 

— Que, 478. 

Questions. See Interrogative Sen- 
tences. 

Qui, indef., 302. 

Qui, 612, foil. See relative. 

Quia, 538 ; non quia, 541, R. 1. 

Qulcunque, 266, R. 1. 

Quldam, 300. 

Quidem, 298, R. 

Quid me vis, 331, R. 3. 

Quln, in questions, 268 ; quln, 550 ; 
after verbs of omitting, etc., 551 ; 
for qui non, 556 ; non quln y 541, 
R. 1. 

Quis, indef., 302 

Quispiam, 303, 

Quisquam, 304. 

Quisque, 305 ; ut quisque, 645, R. 2. 

Quisquis, w. ind. , 246, R. 4. 

Quo, measure of difference, 400 = 
that thereby, 545 ; quo quisque f 
645, R. 2. 

Quoad, with gen., 371, R. 3 ; constr., 
573. 

Quod, in object sentences, 525 ; in 
causal sentences, 538-541 ; w. 
verbs of emotion, 542, foil. ; nisi 
quod, 592, R, 3 ; quodsl ubi, 612, 
R. 1. 

Quominus, 549. 



Quoniam, 538, foil. 

Quoque, 481. 

Quot, w. gen., 368, R. ; correlate 

645. 
Quoties, 569 ; correl., 645. 
Quotquot, w. ind., 246, R. 4. 
Quum. See cum. 



R. 

Rating, verbs of, constr., 378. 

Reciprocal relations, 212. 

Recordor, 277, R. 

Recuso, constr., 548. 

Reddo, 334, R. 

Refert, constr., 381, 382. 

Refertus, constr., 374, R. 1. 

Reflexive pronoun, 294 ; in subordi- 
nate sentences, 520-522. 

Refraining, verbs of, 551. 

Refusing, verbs of, 548. 

Relative sentences, 506, 612, foil. ; 
relative, position of, 614 ; con- 
cord of, 616 ; attraction of, 619 ; 
correlatives of, 620 ; relative 
clause, position of, 622 ; tenses in, 
624, 625; moods in, 626, foil.; 
ind., 626, foil. ; subj., 629, foil. ; in 
ordtio obhqua, 630 ; by attraction, 
631 ; when qui ut — is, 632, 634; 
when qui = cum is, 635 ; accus., 
rel. and inf., 638 ; combination of 
relative sentences, 639 ; relative- 
in ordtio obllqua, 658, R. 1 and 2 ; 
relative represented by participle, 
640, 671. 

Relinquo, with two datives, 350. 

Remaining, verbs of, 197. 

Remembering, verbs of, 375. 

Reminding, verbs of, 375. 

Reminiscor, 375 and R. 2. 

Repeated action. See Iterative. 

Representatives of imperative, 265- 
268. 

Representation, verbs of, with par- 
ticiple, 536. 

Requiring, verbs of, 333. 

Res, use of, 195. 

Resisting, verbs of, 345. 

Restriction to the comparative, 
315. 

Restrictive apposition, 320. 

Result, subjunctive of, 340, foil. ; 



382 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



exceptional sequence in sentences 

of result, 513. 
Resolve, verbs of, 424, and R. 2. 
Rhetorical questions, 452, R. 2 ; in 

drdtio obllqua, 654, R. 
Rideo, w. accus., 329. 
Rogata, 407. 

Rare, 410, 411 ; rus, 410. 
Burl, 412. 



S. 



Sacer, 356, R. 1. 

Sacrifice, 403, R. 2. 

Satis, w. gen., 371. 

Saying, verbs of, constr., 523-529. 

Sciens, 324, R. 5. 

Seat of feeling, 374, R. 3. 

Sed, 487. 

Seeming, verbs of, 196. 

Sentences, simple, 129; expanded, 
281 ; compound, coordinate and 
subordinate, 474 ; copulative, 477, 
foil. ; adversative, 486, foil. ; dis- 
junctive, 495, foil. ; causal, 500 ; 
illative, 502; object, 503, foil.; 
causal, 538, foil. ; final, 543, foil. ; 
consecutive, 553, foil. ; temporal, 
567, foil. ; conditional, 590, foil. ; 
concessive, 605, foil. ; relative, 
612, foil. ; comparative, 641, foil. ; 
abridged, 649, foil. 

Separation, abl. of, 388. 

Sequence of tenses, 511, foil. 

Sen. See Slve. 

Showing, verbs of, with two norm, 
197; with tw T o accus., 334; with 
accus. and infin., 526-529. 

£i, whether, 462; if, 591. 

Sign of conditional omitted, 600. 

Silentio, 401, R. 1. 

Similis, constr., 356, R. 1. 

Simple sentences, 195 ; expanded, 
280, foil. 

Sim u I — simul, 484. 

Simulac, 563. 

Sin (minus, secus, aliter), 593. 

Si non, 592. 

Sine, with abl., 418 ; not used with 
gerund, 432. 

Singular for plural, 195, R. 7 and 8. 

Sino, w. accus. and inf., 424, R. 3 ; 
with ut y 546, R. 3; without ut, 
546, R. 3. 



Sitio, with accus., 329, R. 

Slve— slve, 498, 499. 

Space, extent in, 335, 336. 

Spe, comparative with, 399, R. 1 

Specification, genitive of, 354. 

Specific characteristic, 357. 

Stage of action, 213. 

Standard of comparison emitted, 
312. 

Statu o in, abl., 384, R. 

Sto, constr., 378; with abl., 403, 
R.3. 

Stultitiae est, 365, R. 

Sub, in compounds with ace, 330; 
with dat,, 346; with ace. and abl., 
488; comp., 413, R. 

Subject, the forms of, 195; object 
for, 470; accus. subj. of infin., 
525, R. ; subject omitted, 526, R. 
2; 532, R. 4; noni. subj. for ac- 
cus., 528. 

Subjective genitive, 361. 

Subjunctive, 247; ideal and unreal, 
248 ; potential, 250 ; optative, 
253 ; in asseverations, 255 ; as im- 
perative, 256 ; as concessive, 257. 

Subjunctive, future, how represent- 
ed, 511, See different classes of 
sentences. 

Subllrnis, 324, R. 6. 

Subordinate clauses, 474. 

Subordination by means of partici- 
ple, 409, R. 2. 

Substantlva mobilia, 199. 

Substantive, agreement of attribute 
with, 285, foil. ; substantive sen- 
tences, 307. 

Subter, in compounds with accus., 
330; with ace. and abl., 219. 

Sul. See Reflexive. 

Sum, with dat,, 349, 350 ; w, dative 
of gerund, 430 ; with predicative 
genitive, 365. 

Sunt qui, 426. 

Super, in compounds with ace, 
330 ; with dat., 346 ; super, with 
ace, and abl., 419. 

Superlative, 316; strengthened, 317; 
with gen., 371. 

Supine, 435-437 ; accus. 436 ; ablat., 
437. 

Supplico, w. dat., 345, R. 2. 

Supra, as adv., 416, R. ; with accus., 
417. 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



383 



Suus, use of, 294, 299, R. 
Synesis, 202. 
Syntax, defined, 193. 



Table of temporal relations, 217. 

Taedet, 376. 

Taking, verbs of, 334. 

Talis, 645. 

Tamdiu, 645. 

Tamen, 492. 

Tametsl, 606. 

Tarn quam, tarn quam si, 604. 

Tantl, 380 ; tantum abest ut, 556, 
R. 1 ; tantus, 645. 

Teaching, verbs of, 333. 

Tempero, constr., 347. 

Temporal conjunctions for copula- 
tive, 484 ; conjunctions, 561 ; tem- 
poral relations, table of, 214^ 

Tempus est, 429, R. 3. 

Tendency, sentences of, 340, foil. 

Tenes, w. perf., part., pass., 227. 

Tenses, 213, foil. ; number of, 214 ; 
present, 218-221; perfect pure, 
227-230 ; historical, 231 ; imper- 
fect, 221, foil. ; pluperfect, 232-3 ; 
future, 234; future perfect, 235; 
periphrastic, 235 ; active, 236 ; 
passive, 240-243 ; in letters, 244 ; 
tenses of indicative, 270 ; subjunc- 
tive, 270 ; imperative, 272 ; in- 
finitive, 273, foil, ; participle, 278 ; 
sequence of tenses, 510, foil. ; 
dependent infinitive, 529, foil., 
iterative, 568, 569; in bratio ob- 
llqua, 656, foil. 

Tenus, position, 414, R. ; with abl. 
and gen., 419. 

Thinking, verbs of, 197 ; with ac- 
cus. and inf., 526-529. 

Time, accus. of, 337-8 ; abl. of, 392, 
393 ; with in, 393 ; with ante, post, 
dbhinc, 400, R. 3 ; participle, 552. 

Tirneo, w. dat., 347. 

Tot, 645. 

Toties, 645. 

Tbtus, of space, 386 ; of time, 392, 
R. 1. 

Towns, names of, 410-412. 

Trans, in compounds, w. accus., 
330 ; with two accus., 330, R. 1, 
2 ; w. accus., 417. 



Transient qualities, 402, R. 1. 
Transitive verbs, 204, 317. 
Turn — cum, 364. 
Turn— turn, 484, 
Tuns, 299, R. 



Ubi, w. gen., 371, R. 3 ; of time, 

563. 
TJllus, 304. 
Ultimus, 324, R. 5. 
Ultra, as adv., 416; with accus., 

417. 
Unreal conditional sentence, 599. 
Unus, unus omnium, with superlat., 
.317. 
Unus, how translated, 324, R. 5; 

unus qui, 633. 
Urging, verbs of, 546. 
Usus, 390, 322, R. 
Ut — ita, concessive, 484. 
Ut uti, design, 545 ; tendency, 554 ; 

ut omitted, 545, R. 3 ; 579, R. 
Ut qui, 627, R., 636 ; ut, of cause, 

645, R, 4. 
Ut, in explanatory questions, 560. 
Ut nbn, 543 ; 556, R. 6. 
Ut si, 604. 

Ut quisque — ita, 645, R. 2. 
Uter, 315. 
Uterque, 370, R. 2. 
Utinam, 253. 

Utor, 405 ; utendus, 428, R. 3. 
Ut prlmum, 563. 
Utrum, 460, 461, R. 



V. 

Vacdre, 347. 
Vacuus, constr., 388. 
Vae, 340, R. 2. 
Value, gen. of, 379. 
— Ve, 497. 

Vel, with superl., 317 ; ml, 496. 
Vel—vel, 496. 
Velle, for future, 240, R. 3 ; telle sibi, 

351. 
Velut velutsl, 604. 
Vendo, 378. 
Veneo, 378. 

Venio, with two dat., 350. 
Venit in mentem, 375, R. 3. 



384 



INDEX OF SYNTAX. 



Verb, voices, active, 204; passive, 
205 ; reflexive, 209 ; deponent, 
201 ; tenses, 213, foil. ; moods, 
244, foil. See Voice, Mood, Tense. 

Verbal nouns, sequence after, 518. 

Verbum, w. gen., 359. 

Vereor, 424. 552 ; w. dat, 347. 

Verb, 489. 

Versus, position, 414; w. accus., 
417. 

Verum, 488. 

Verto, w. two dat., 350. 

Vescor, 405 ; vescendus, 428, R. 3. 

Vesperlifius, 324, R. 5. 

Vestri vesirum, 362, R. 

Veto, w. ace, 345, R. 1; with inf., 
424, R. 3. 

Via et ratione, 401, R. 

Videre ne, 552, R. 2. 

Vi et armls, 401, R. 

Vivo, w. abl., 405, R. 3. 

Vocative, 194, R. 3. 

Voice, active, 204 ; passive, 205. 



Volens, 324, R. 6 ; volenti, 354. 
Yolo, 532, and R. 4; 526, and R. 3. 
Voti damndri, 377, R. 3. 
Vox, with gen., 359. 



W. 

Want, verbs of, 389 ; adj. of, 373 

R. 1 ; 389, R. 2. 
Warning, verbs of, 546. 
Whither? 313,410. 
Wishing, verbs of, 532, 546, mood. 



Y. 

Yes, 473. 

Yielding, verbs of, w. dat, 345. 



Z. 



Zeugma, 690. 



[gildersleeve's latin grammar.] 



COMPARATIVE SECTIONS OF SYNTAX. 



The numbers in the first column of each division below indicate sections in former 
editions of the Grammar; those in the second refer to corresponding sections in the 
Revised Latin Grammar. 



O. E. 


N. E. 


O.E. 


N. E. 


O.E. 


N. E. 


O. E. 


N. E. 


O.E. 


N. E. 


1 


192-3 


54 


250-2 


113 


313 


168 


371 


227 


439 


2 


194 


55-6 


253-4 


114 


314 


169 


372 


228 


440 


3 


195 


57 


255 


115 


3 5 


170 


373 


229 


441 


4 


196-7 


58 


256 


116 


316 


171 


374 


230 


442 


5 


198 


59 


257 


117 


317 


172 


375 


231 


444 


6 


199 


60 


259 


118 


319 


173 


376 


232 


447 


7 


200 


61 


260 


119 


320 


174 


377 


233 


445 


8 


202 


62 


261 


120 


321 


175 


378 


234 


446 


9 


202 R.4 


63 


262 


121 


322 


176 


379-80 


235-9 


448 


10 


202 R.5 


64 


263 


122 


323 


177-8 


381 


240 


449 


11 


204 


65 


264 


123 


324 


179 


382 


241 


450 


12 


205 


66 


265 


H. 1-7 


R. 2-8 


180 


412 


242 


453 


13 


206 


67 


266 


124-5 


325-6 


181 


383 • 


243 


454 


14 


207 


68 


267 


126 


327 


182 


384 


244 


455 


15 


208 


69 


268 


127 


329 


183 


412 


245 


456-9 


16-17 


209 


70 


269 


128 


330 


184 


385 


246 


460 


18 


210 


71 


270 


129 


331 


185-6 


3S6-7 


247 


461 


19 


211 


72-3 


271 


130 


332 


187 


388 


248 


462 


20 


212 


74 


272 


131 


333 


188 


411 


249 


463 


21 


213 


75 


274 


132 


334 


189 


389 


250 


465-6 


22 


214 


76 


275 


133 


342 


190 


390 


251 


467-8 


23 


216 


77 


277 


134 


410 


191 


391 


252 


469 


24 


217 


78 


278 


135 


335 


192 a 


392 


253 


470-1 


25 


218 


79 


279 


136 


336 


192 b 


393 


254 


473 


26 


218 R.2 


80 


281 


137 


337 


193 


395 


255 


474 


27 


219 


81 


282 


138 


338 


194 


398 


256 


477 


28 


220 


82 


'281 R.2 


139 i 


340 


195 


399 


257 


478 


29 


221 


83 


283 


140 ( 


196 


400 


258 


479 


30 


227-8 


84 


284 


141 


343 


199 


403 


259 


645 


30R.2 


229 


85 


285 


142 


314 


200 


404 


260 


480 


30R.3 


230 


86 


286 


143 


345 


201 


405 


261 


481 


31 a 


222-3 


87 


287 


144 


346 


202 


40(5-7 


262 


482 


31 b 


224 


88 


288 


145 


347 


203 


408-9 


263 


448 R.3 


31 c 


225 


89 -j 


289 


146 


348 


204 


413 


264 


444 


32-33 


233 


290 


147 


349 


205 


414 


265-7 


483 


34 j 


231-2 


90 


291 


148 


350 


206 


415 


268-9 { 


484 


216 


91-3 


292 


149 


351 


207 


416 


270 \ 


35 


234 


94 


293 


150 


352 


208 


417 


271 


486 


36 


234 R.1 


95 


294 


151 


353 


209 


418 


272 


487 


37 


235 


96 


295 


152 


354 


210 


419 


273 


488 


38-41 


236 


97 


296 


153 


355 


211 


420 


274 


489 


42 


238 


98 ) 

99 ( 


297 


154 


356 


212 


422 


275 


490 


43 


239 


155 


357 


213 


423 


276 


491 


44 -j 


240 


100 


298 


156 


359 


214 


424 


277 


492 


241 


101 


299 


157 


360 


215 


425 


! 278 


493 


45 


242 


102 


300 


158 


361 


216-7 


426 


279 \ 

1 280 \ 


495 


46 


243 


103 


301 


159 


362 


218 


428 


47 


244 


104 


302 


160 


363 


219 


429 


281 / 

282 f 


496 


48 


245 


105 


303 


161 


364 


220 


430 


49 ) 




106-7 


305 


162 


365 


221 


431 


283 


498 


50 y 


246 


108 


306 


163 


366 


222 


432 


284 


499 


51 J 




109 I 

110 j" 


304 


164 


367 


223 


435 


285 


497 


52 


247 


165 


368 


224 


436 


| 286 


500 


53 -j 


248 


111 


311 


166 


369 


225 


437 


287 


502 


249 


112 


312 


167 


370 


226 


438 


288 


503 



COMPARATIVE SE : 



5YOTAX 





N. E. 


B 


N. E. 




N "^ 




N. E, 


0. E. 


N. E. 


s 


504 


319 


- 




" 


: a-4 






634-5 


200 f 


320 


535 


356 


" - 








6:36-7 




505 


H 


536 


SI 


* 






428 


633 




a 






^ 


": 




605 




639 








: 


3^9 


y?4 


396 


606 


4:30 


41 


a i 


510 


'-. 






399 




431 


642 


•; r 


511 




541 


361 




400 


' :s 




644 




512 




543 






401 


609 


433-4 


645 




514 




543 




581 




1C 


435 


646 


a g 


r :,-: 




54 


i 






611 




41 




T lr 


332-4 




: 


" 


-. 4-fl 


13 




649 




511 


" 


: 




" 4 


406 


613 


438 


650 


301 I 


512 




558 






4 i 




439 


651-2 


i-l 


•■ 


368 




408 


616 


440 


653 




r :- 


>'- 


54 


369 




409 


416 


441 


654 


3.4 


-:- 


■ 


544 E.2 


;• 


588 


41C 




442 


655 


- " 


51 


M 


553-5 


~: 


" 


411 


618 


443 




3-H5 


520 




a oTi 


ys 


590 


-:•, 


619 


444 


657-8 




521 




558 


H3 


' '. 


413 


620 




659 


> - 


5§9 




\'. 


/-- 


r 4 


414 


21 


448-51 


660 


: 


523 


m 




m 


' I 


415 




45S 




: 


524 


-- 


560 


r 


- m 




m 


453-6 


662 


:. 


- " 


- 


554 




- 3 


417 


624 


457 






m 


HI 


:' I , 


378 


- 


418 


625 


458 


665 




m 




S 


^ --: 


' 2 


4j 




.\ 






528 


. 


561 


:•>', 


- : 


42C 




i 


667 


H4 


. 






-:-' 


- 


421 














387 


601 


422 


629 


482 


669 




" . 3 B 1 




: • 




. 


423 


630 


4 o 


670 




" 


". 


564 


- 


i 


424 


631 


464 




-- . 




-~- 


5 .:-: 


i : 


. ; ; 


425 


_ ;_' : 







Ik 



'j 















Deacidified using the Bookkeeper pi 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxic 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTechnolo 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESER' 

1 1 1 Tromson Park Drive 
Cranbe/ry Township, PA 160€ 



